. Appleton & CoSs Educational Publications. Dr. Arnold's Classical Series. plify capit; FIRST LATIN BOOK: re-modelled, re-written, and adapted, to the Ollendorff Method of Instruction. By ALBERT II ARKNESS. One vol. Ifimo. 75 cts. Several improvements have been introduced by Mr. II., and an effort made to sim- and render more clear the elementary portions of the work of Dr. Arnold. It is a capital book. A FIRST AND SECOND LATIN^BOOK AND PRACTICAL GRAM- MAR. Revised and carefully corrected, by J. A. SPENCER, A. M. One vol. 12mo. 75 cts. A most admirable volume, based on the true principles of learning a language, viz^ those of imitation and repetition. The pupil is put to work at once at Exercises iu Latin, involving the elementary principles of the language; words are supplied; the mode of putting them together is told the pupil ; and by imitating and repeating, all the time adding to his stock of words and ideas, the docile boy has the Latin elements in- delibly impressed upon his memory, and rooted in his understanding. HL LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION: a Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition. Revised and corrected by J. A. SPENCER, A. M. 12mo. $1. Very exact, copious, and scientific; Latin synonymes are carefully illustrated, differ- encos of idiom noted, cautions as to niceties pointed out, and every help afforded to- wards attaining a pure and flowing Latin style. IV. CORNELIUS NEPOS; with Practical Questions and Answers, and an Imitative Exercise on each Chapter. Revised, with Additional Notes, by Prof. JOHNSON, Professor of the Latin Language in the University of the Ci.y of New- York. 12mo. A new, enlarged edition, with Lexicon, Index, &c. $1. Very excellent, especially on account of the Exercises formed on the model of the text, by which the pupil becomes more thoroughly acquainted with the author and the language in general A good vocabulary is attached. v. FIRST GREEK BOOK, on the Plan of the First Latin Book. Revised and corrected by J. A. SPENCER, A. M. 12mo. 75 cts. A new and very admirable volume prepared by Prof. Spencer from the work of Dr, Arnold. It is equally good with the First Latin Book, and carries out the same princi- ples *to their legitimate results. VL GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION: a Practical Introduction to Greek Prose Composition. Revised and corrected by J. A. SPENCER, A, M. One vol. 12mo. 75 cts. Exact, cleat, direct, and copious. It is intended for use at a rather early stage, viz., dir :ctly following the First Greek Book, or simultaneously with the Greek Eeading /JOOk. VIL GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION. Part II. A Practical Introduction to Greek Prose Composition Part II. (The Particles.) In tins volume the Particle* are treated in full, and the student carried as far for- ward as is possible in tho art of composition in Greek. VIIL GREEK READING BOOK, for the Use of Schools; containing the sub- stance of the Practical Introduction to Greek Construing, and a Treatise on the Greek Particles; and also a Copious Selection from Greek Authors, with English Notes, Critical and Explanatory, and a Lexicon, by J. A. SPENCER, A. M. 12mo. A capital volume, having admirable Introductory Exercises on the Forms and Idioms of the Language ; a choice collection of passages (of length) from standard au- thors ; notes, clear, and precise ; and a copious lexicon at the end. It is fully equal to ny one of the series. 32 D. Appleton & Cols Educational Publications. PROF. ASHEL C. KBNDRICK. Greek Ollendorff; Being a Progressive Exhibition of the Principles of the Greek Grammar. Designed for beginners in Greek, and as a Book of Exercises for Acad- emies and Colleges. 12mo. $1. "Among the many elementary books published for the use of schools, we have not met with one that has pleased us as much as Professor Kendrick's Greek Ollendorff. It seems exactly fitted for the purpose intended, viz., by instilling into the minds of the young the more simple elementary principles of the language, thus to prepare them for a more extensive and familiar acquaintance with the ancient Greek classics. Its sim- plicity is perfectly delightful. The unfamiliar character of the letters, and the long y even a very imperfect knowledge of the Gram- from prosecuting the study of Greek, who, with course of study required to give a boy even a very imperfect knowledge of the Gram- mar, have deterred many a beginner from prosecuting the study of Greek, who, with the attractive volume before us, would have taken hold of it at once, and mastered all its difficulties. This is not only the best possible book to be put into the hands of boys, but it seems to us, that any person more advanced in years, and wishing to acquire eome knowledge of Greek, even without a teacher, may, by the aid of this volume, ac- complish his object "The sounds of the letters and diphthongs, and the use of the breathings and accents, are so briefly, yet so familiarly explained, that, although the author recommends that this portion of the work should be deferred by the younger pupils to a second, or a third pe- rusal, yet such a recommendation seems to us to be hardly necessary. "A knowledge of the Greek Grammar has generally been considered as an indispen- eable qualification of the pupil before he begins to read Greek. The doing away with the necessity of this at the beginning, is very encouraging to the learner, while at the same time it gives the author an opportunity to introduce gradually, and almost imper- ceptibly, sufficient grammar to illustrate the examples as they occur; and then, by re- peating these examples with variations almost innumerable, the principle is indelibly impressed upon the mind. In the older Greek books intended for schools, the examples given have been faulty, from their involving too many principles at the beginning. The mind of the pupil can- not comprehend so many things at once ; he gets confused, and becomes, after a while, discouraged. Whereas, in the Greek Ollendorff of Professor Kendrick, every principle of the Grammar is introduced by degrees, and only when it is wanted for application. It teaches rules by examples, rather than examples by rules. " Another advantage of this volume over the older school books of the kind, is the examples of double translation, introduced at the very beginning, and made a part cf the regular daily exercise. " The book is well printed in good type, and on go kl paper, for which the Appletoa* deserve due credit " We conclude by recommending this work to the favorable attention of teachers* N. T. Recorder. PROP. JAMES R. BOISE. Exercises m Greek Prose Composition. Adapted to the First Book of Xenophon's Anabasis. One volume 12mo. Price 75 cents. *** For the convenience of the learner, an English-Greek Vocabulary, a Catalogue of the Irregular Verbs, and an Index to the principal Grammatical Notes, have been appended. "A school-book of the highest order, containing a carefully arranged series of exer- cises derived from the first book of Xenophon's Anabasis (which is appended entire), an English and Greek Vocabulary, and a list of the principal modifications of irregular verbs. We regard it as one peculiar excellence of this book, that it presupposes both the diligent scholar and the painstaking teacher; in other hands it would be not only useless, but unusable. We like it also, because, instead of aiming to give the pupil practice in a variety of styles, it places before him but a single model of Greek composition, and that the very author who combines in the greatest degree purity of lan- guage and idiom, with a simplicity that both invites and rewards imitation.''---^ riiWcMt Register, 33 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, FOR THE USE OF HIGH SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES, DR, RAPHAELTKUHNER, CONRECTOR OF THE LYCEUM, HANOYER. TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN BY B. B. EDWARDS, LATE PROFESSOR IN THE THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY, AND S. H. TAYLOR, PKINCIPAL OF PHILLIPS ACADEMY, ANDOVEH. NEW YORK: D. APPLETON AND COMPANY. 1653. Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1852, by D. APPLETON & Co., In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern District of New York. ANDOVER: JOHN D. FLAGG, SIEREOTYPER AND PRINTER. 74? PREFACE. RAPHAEL KUHNER, the author of the following Grammar, was born at Gotha, in 1802. From 1812 to 1821, he studied at the celebrated gymnasium in his native city. Among his classical teachers were Doring, Host and Wiiste- mann. From 1821 to 1824, he enjoyed, at the University of Gottingen, the instructions of Mitscherlich, Dissen and Ottfried Miiller. While there, he prepared an essay on the philosophical writings of Cicero, which received a prize. Since 1824, he has been a teacher in the Lyceum at Hanover. The principal works from the pen of Dr. Kiihner are the following : 1. Versuch einer neuen Anordnung der griechischen Syntax, mit Beispielen begleitet. 1829. " Attempt towards a new Arrangement of the Greek Syntax," etc. 2. M. Tull. Ciceronis Tusculan. Disputationum libri. 1829 ; ed. altera 1835 ; ed. tertia 1846. 3. Sammtliche Anomalien des griechischen Verbs in Attisch. Dialecte, 1831. " Anomalies of the Greek Verb, etc. 4. Ausfiihrliche Grammatik der griechischen Sprache, in 2 Theilen, 1834, 1835. " Copious Grammar of the Greek Language, in two Parts." The second Part of this grammar, containing the Syntax, translated by W. E. Jelf, of the University of Oxford, was published in 1842; the first Part in 1845. A second edition of Jelf s translation of this work was published in 1851. This work is, however, only in part a translation, Mr. A* VI PREFACE. Jelf being the author of the remarks on the Cases, the particle av, the compound verbs, etc. 5. Schulgrammatik der griechischen Sprache, 1836 ; zweite durchaus verbesserte u. vermehrte Auflage, 1843; dritte verbesserte und vermehrte Auflage 1851. " School Grammar of the Greek Language, third edition, improved and enlarged." The present vol- ume is a translation of this Grammar, from the sheets, furnished for this purpose by the author. 6. Elementargrammatik der griechischen Sprache, neunte Auflage 1850. " Elementary Grammar of the Greek Language, containing a series of Greek and Eng- lish exercises for translation with the requisite vocab- ularies." This Grammar, translated by Mr. S. H. Taylor, one of the translators of the present volume, has passed through eleven editions in this country. 7. Xenophontis de Socrate Commentarii, 1841. 8. Elementargrammatik der lateinischen Sprache, siebent Auflage, 1850. " Elementary Grammar of the Latin Language with Exercises." This Grammar, trans- lated by Prof. Champlin, of Waterville College, has passed through several editions in this country. 9. Lateinische Vorschule nebst eingereihten lateinischen und deutschen Ubersetzungsaufgaben, vierte Auflage, 1849. 10. Schulgrammatik der lateinischen Sprache, dritte sehr verbesserte Auflage, 1850. " School Grammar of the Latin Language, third edition, greatly improved." Dr. Kiihner has also published in the Bibliotheca Graeca the first part of his edition of Xenophon's Anabasis. From the above statements, it will be seen that Dr. Kiihner has enjoyed the most favorable opportunities for preparing the work, a translation of which is now pre- sented to the public. The names of his early instructors are among the most honored in classical philology. For PREFACE. Vll nearly thirty years, he has been a teacher in one of the principal German gymnasia, and has thus had ample facili- ties for testing in practice the principles which he has adopted in his Grammars. At the same time, he has pur- sued the study of the classical authors with the greatest diligence, in connection with the productions which his learned countrymen are constantly publishing on the differ- ent parts of Latin and Greek grammar. Of course, his wofks might be expected to combine the advantages of sound, scientific principles with a skilful adaptation to prac- tical use. The " School Grammar of the Greek Lan- guage," being his latest publication, contains the results of his most mature studies. Its chief excellences, it may be well, perhaps, briefly to indicate. First, The grammar is based on a profound and accurate knowledge of the genius and principles of the Greek lan- guage. The author adopts substantially the views which are maintained by Becker, Grimm, Hupfeld and others, and which are fully unfolded in the German grammars of Becker. According to these views, the forms and changes of language are the result of established laws, and not of accident or arbitrary arrangement. Consequently, language may be subjected to scientific analysis and classification. The multitude of details may be embraced under a few comprehensive principles, and the whole may have some- what of the completeness and spirit of a living, organic system. Dr. Kiihner's grammar is not a collection of de- tached observations, or of rules which have no connection, except a numerical one. It is a natural classification of the essential elements of the language, an orderly exhibi- tion of its real phenomena. It is, at the same time, a truly practical grammar, fitted for its object, not by a theorist in his closet, but by an experienced instructor in his school. Second, The author has adopted a clear and satisfactory arrangement of his materials. This can be seen by an Vlll PREFACE. examination of the table of contents. To those, indeed, who are familiar only with the common distribution of subjects in our Greek grammars, the arrangement of Dr. Kiihner may appear somewhat obscure and complicated. A slight acquaintance, however, with the plan on which the Syntax, for example, is constructed, will show that he has followed the true and logical method. Abundant proofs of the justness of this remark may be seen in the exhibition of compound sentences. The particles *are treated, not as isolated, independent words, but as a com- ponent and indissoluble part of discourse. Third, Fulness and pertinence of illustration. The cor- rectness of every principle advanced, especially in the Syn- tax, is vouched for by copious citations from the classics. If, in any case, a principle is stated in an abstract form, or if a degree of obscurity rests upon the enunciation of it, its meaning may be readily discovered by reference to the illustration. The paradigms contain much more complete exemplifications of conjugation and declension than are to be found in the grammars in common use in this coun- try. In this connection, it may be stated, that Dr. Kiihner has chosen a pure verb as the model of regular inflection. He can thus exhibit the stem unchanged, throughout the entire conjugation. Fourth, The perfect analysis to which the forms of the language, especially of the verb, is subjected, may be men- tioned as another excellence of the grammar. In learning a paradigm, in the manner which the author points out, the pupil first resolves the verb into its -elements, and then rearranges these elementary parts into a complete form. In this method, and in no other, can he attain a mastery of this most difficult portion of the subject. Fifth, Every part of the grammar is equally elaborated. The closing pages exhibit the same fulness and conscien- tious accuracy, which characterize the forms, or the first PREFACE. IX portions of the Syntax. No part can be justly charged with deficiency or with superfluous statement. The view of the Third Declension, the scientific list of Irregular Verbs, the Dialectic peculiarities, the observations on the Use and Position of the Article, on the Middle and Passive Verbs, on the delicate shades of thought indicated by the Modes and Tenses, and on the difference between the use of the Participle and Infinitive, may be referred to as spe- cimens of careful observation and nice analysis. The Appendix on Versification has been supplied by the translators, the grammar of Kiihner containing nothing on that subject. The materials were drawn from a variety of sources. A more full view is less necessary, as the excel- lent work of Munk on Greek and Roman Metres, trans- lated by Profs. Bepk and Felton, is now accessible. Much pains have- been taken in verifying the almost in- numerable references to classical authors. The very few exceptions are those cases where the author made use of an edition of a classic not accessible to the translators. In this verification, the following editions of prose authors were used : Kiihner's edition of the Memorabilia ; Weiske's and Tauchnitz's editions of the other works of Xenophon ; Schafer's and Tauchnitz's editions of Herodotus ; Becker's and Tauchnitz's editions of Thucydides ; Dobson's edition of the Oratores Attici ; and Stallbaum's Plato. There are slight variations in numbering the lines of poetry in differ- ent editions, particularly in the tragedians. The present edition has been prepared from the third German edition, in which the author had made many im- portant improvements, particularly in the Syntax, having availed himself of the corrections or remarks of his learned friends and his reviewers. This the translators have en- deavored to put into such a form as would best meet the wants of American scholars. They have not aimed merely X PREFACE. at a translation ; it has been their object to state in as clear and concise a manner as possible the principles contained in the original, without reference to the particular form in which the statements were there made. The translators have also added principles and illustrations of their own, where it seemed desirable. The numbering of the paragraphs has not been changed in the present edition, and most of the subdivisions and Remarks are the same as in the former edition. The changes in this respect have been so few, that it has not been thought necessary to indicate them. The labor of preparing the first edition of this work was shared equally by the translators ; so, also, in the second edition as far as the 210th page. At this point in the progress of the work, the state of Professor Edwards's health made it necessary for him to relinquish his labors in connection with it, for the purpose of seeking a milder climate. After a few months' residence in one of the South- ern States, he was called away from his labors on earth, deeply lamented by his associate, and the large circle of friends to whom his character presented so many attractive qualities. His loss will be extensively felt also in the cause of Biblical and Classical literature, for which none cher- ished a deeper interest, and for the promotion of which he contributed with great zeal and success the rich stores of his elegant and varied learning. The proofs of the Grammar have been read by Mr. P. S. Byers, an associate Instructor in Phillips Academy, to whom special acknowledgments are due for these services, as well as for many valuable suggestions. ANDOVER, JULY 15, 1852. TABLE OF CONTENTS, ETYMOLOGY. SECTION L SOUNDS OF THE LANGUAGE. CHAPTER I. LETTERS AND SOUNDS OF THE LANGUAGE. ALPHABET 1 Sounds of the Letters 2 History of the Alphabet 2b Organs of Speech 3 Vowels 4 Consonants 5 Breathings 6 Changes of Letters 7 Changes of the Vowels 8 16 Hiatus 8 Contraction of Vowels 9 Crasis 10,11 Synizesis 12 Elision.. 13, 14 N Paragogic (^f\KvtrTiK6f) ; OIJTU(S) ; ^| and e'/c ; ou and OVK 15 Strengthening and Weakening of Vowels 16 Prolongation, Shortening. In- terchange and Variation, ... 16 Influence of a Vowel or Con- sonant on another vowel. ... 16 Syncope, Omission of a Vowel 16 Euphonic Prothesis 16 Changes of the Consonants. . . 17 25 Mutes 17 Liquids 18 Mutes and Liquids, Liquids and Mutes 19 Sibilant with Stem of the Pres. strengthened 157 I. Verbs with v inserted 158 II. Verbs with the syllable ve 159 III. Verbs with o.v or aiv 160 IV. Verbs in -ovccw, -if . . . 181 II. Verbs in -pi which annex vvu or vv to the Stem- vowel . . 182 Formation of the Tenses 182 Summary of this class of Verbs 183 188 A. Verbs whose Stem ends in a Vowel 183186 (n)in-o 183 (b) in -e 184 (c)in-t 185 (d) in-o 186 B. Verbs whose Stem ends in a Consonant 187,188 (a) in a Mute 187 (b) in a Liquid 188 Inflection of Kc?/j.ai and rjiuu 189, 190 Verbs in -i or $iv 210 First Declension 211 Second Declension 212 Third Declension 213 Anomalous and Defective Words. Metaplasts 214 XIV CONTENTS. The Adjective 215 Comparison 216 Pronouns 217 Numerals 218 The Verb 219-230 Augment and Reduplication . . 219 Personal-endings and Mode- vowels 220 Epic and Ionic Iterative Form 221 Contraction and Resolution in Verbs . , . 222 Formation of the Tenses ... 223 Conjugation in -/j.t 224 Ei>i and E?/xt 225, 226 Verbs in -o with a Sec. Aor. an- alogous to Verbs in -/it .... 227 Verbs in -ta with a Perf. and Plup. Act. like Verbs in -pi 228 Verbs in -w with a Pres. and Impf. Act. like Verbs in -fu 229 List of Dialectic Verbs . . 230 SECT. Ill FORMATION OF WORDS. Radical Words, Stems,Derivatives 231 A. Derivation 232-235 I. Verbs 232 II. Substantives . . 233 III. Adjectives 234 IV. Adverbs 235 B. Compounds 236 Formation of Compounds 237 SYNTAX. SECT. I SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. CHAPT. I. PARTS OF A SIMPLE SENTENCE. Nature of a Sentence. Subject and Predicate 238 Comparison. Attribute and Ob- ject 239 Agreement 240 Exceptions to the general rules of Agreement 241 Agreement when there are several Subjects 242 Remarks on Peculiarities in use of Number . 243 The Article 244 Position of the Article 245 Use of the Article with Pronouns and Numerals 246 The Article as a Demon, and Rel. Pronoun 247 ! Classes of Verbs 248 A. Active form 249 B. Middle 250 C. Passive 251 Remarks on Deponents 252 Tenses and Modes 253 A. Particular View of the Tenses 254 (a) Principal tenses: Pres., Perf., Fut 255 (b) Hist. Tenses : Aor., Impf., Plup 256 Tenses of the Subord. Modes 257 B. Particular View of the Modes 258 Use of the Subj.,0pt.and Imp. 259 The Modes with &v ...... 260 Position and Repetition of &v 251 CHAPT. II. ATTRIBUTIVE CONSTRUCTION. Ellipsis of the Substantive . (a) Attributive Adjective . 263 264 b) Attributive Genitive c) Apposition 265 266 CHAPT. HI. OBJECTIVE CONSTRUCTION. I. The Cases 268 Nominative and Vocative . . . 269 (1) Genitive 270 A. Local Relation 271 B. Causal Relation 272 (a) Active Genitive 273 (b) Causal Genitive 274 (c) Gen. denoting mutual re- lations 275 (2) Accusative 276 A. Local Relation 277 B. Causal Relation 278 (a) Ace. denoting effect . . . 278 (b) Acc.of the Object on which the action is performed . 279 CONTENTS. XV Two Accusatives 280 Remarks on the Ace. with the l';i>-sive 281 (3) Dative 282 A. Local Dative 283 B. Dative as a personal Object 284 C. Dative of the thing 285 . Construction of Prepositions . 286 (1) Prepositions with the Gen. only 287, 288 (2) With the Dative only .... 289 (3) With the Accusative only . 290 (4) With the Gen. and Ace. 291-294 (5) With the Gen., Dat. and Ace 295-299 Remarks on peculiarities of the Prepositions 300 CHAPT. IV. THE PRONOUN AS SUBJECT, PREDICATE, ATTRIBUTE OBJECT. I. Personal Pronouns 302 I Prospective and Retrospective II. Remaining Pronouns 303 | Use of the Pronoun 304 CHAPT. V. THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE USED AS AN ATTRIBUTE AND OBJECT. A. The Infinitive 305 (I) Inf. as an Object without the Article 306 Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. with the Inf. 307 (II) Inf. with the Article .... 308 B. The Participle 309 (I) The Part, as the Comple- ment of the Verb . .310 Remarks on the Inter- change of the Part, and the Inf. 311 (II) Part, used to express Ad- verbial Subordinate Re- lations 312 Special Peculiarities in the Participial Construction 313 CHAPT. VI. THE ADVERBIAL OBJECTIVE. A. A^, Sfjra, tiHjj', STj&ei', S-fiTrov&ev, Sat 315 B. Confirmative Adverbs 316 C. Emphatic Suffixes, y, irep, roi 317 D. Negative Particles 318 SECT. II. SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. CHAPT. VII. A. COORDINATION. Different Forms of Coordinate Sentences 320 I. Copulative Coordinate Sen- tences 321 II. Adversative Coordinate Sen- tences . . . 322 HI. Disjunctive Coordinate Sen- tences 323 IV. Causal Coordinate Sen- tences 324 Remarks on Asyndeton 325 CHAPT. Vni. B. SUBORDINATION. Principal and Subordinate Sen- tences 326 Sequence of Subjunctive Tenses in Subordinate Sentences 327 Use of Modes in Subordinate Clauses 327b I. Substantive Clauses 328 A. Introduced by Sri or o>y, that 329 B. Introduced by 5W, so that, etc. 330 II. Adjective Clauses 331 Agreement of the Rel. Pron. . . 332 Modes in Adjective Clauses . . 333 Connection of several Adjective Clauses 334 Interchange of the Subordinate Clause with the Adj. Clause 334 III. Adverbial Clauses 335 A. Adverbial Clauses of Place 336 B. Adverbial Clauses of Time 337 C. Causal Adv. Clauses . 338-340 XVI CONTENTS. I. Denoting Ground or Cause 338 II. Denoting Condition 339, 340 III. Denoting Consequence or Effect 341 D. Adverbial Clauses denoting Manner and Quantity 342, 343 I. Comparative Adv.Clauses denoting Manner 342 II. Comparative Adv.Clauses denoting Quantity 343 CHAPT. IX. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. I. Interrogatives 344 II. Oblique Discourse 345 . Special Peculiarities in the Construction of Words and Sen- tences 346, 347 Ellipsis, Brachylogy, Zeugma, Contraction, Pleonasm 346 Anacoluthon . . . 347 CHAPT. X. POSITION OF WORDS 348 Appendix A. Versification Page 574 Appendix B. Abbreviations in writing 587 Index of Subjects Page 589 Greek Index 602 Index for the Forms of Verbs 614 ABBREVIATIONS. Aesch. Aeschylus, Ag. Agamemnon, S. Septem adv. Th. Ar. Aristophanes. Dem. Demosthenes, Ol. Olynth., Ph. Philipp., Cor. Corona, Chers. Chersones., Aph. Aphobus. Eur. Euripides, M. Medea. C. Cyclops, H. Hecuba, O. Orestes. H. F. Hercules Furevs, Hipp. Hippolytus. Her. Herodotus. Isae. Isaeus. Lys. Ly- sias, pi. Plato. Cr. Crito, L. Leges, Th. Theages, Men. Meno, Soph. Sophista, Crat. Cratylus, Prot. Protagoras, Phil. Philebus, Rp. Respublica. Soph. Sopho- cles, O. C. Oedipus Coloneus, O. R. Oedipus Rex, Ant. Antigone, Ph. Philoctetes, Aj. Ajax, El. Electra. X. Xenopkon, C. Commentarii, An. Anabasis, H. Hellen- ica, S. Symposium, R. Ath. Respublica Atheniens ., R. L. Respubl. Lacedaem., O. Oeconomicus, Ag. Agesilaus, R. Equ. R. Equestris. 'unril GREEK GRAMMAR DIALECTS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 1. THE Greek language was divided into many different dialects, the most highly cultivated of which were the ^Eolic, Doric, Ionic, and Attic. The ^3Eolic prevailed in Boeotia, Thessaly, and in the ^Eolian colonies in Asia Minor; the Doric, throughout the Peloponnesus, and in the Dorian colonies in Asia Minor, Italy, and Sicily ; the Ionic, in the Ionian colonies in Asia Minor ; the Attic, in Attica. 2. The ^Eolic and Doric dialects are characterized by harshness and roughness, being the opposite of the Ionic, which is distinguished for delicacy and softness. The Attic dialect holds a beautiful medium between the two former and the Ionic, as it skilfully combines the soft and pleasant forms of the Ionic with the strong and full-toned forms of the Doric. 3. The Ionic dialect is divided into the Older and the Later Ionic. The older Ionic is the language of Homer and of his school, although these poets were not satisfied with their own dialect merely, but were able, in accordance with the true principles of art, to select, from all the dialects, those forms which corresponded to the nature of their poetry; and to employ since the regular laws of versification had much influence in forming the language 2 14 GREEK DIALECTS. a peculiar and definite poetic language, called the Epic, or Homeric. This had a great effect on the language of all the Greek poets even to the latest times. We find the later Ionic in the works of the historian Herodotus, born 484 B. c., and of Hippocrates, b. 460 B. c. 4. The Attic dialect is divided, in accordance with cer- tain peculiarities, into the Older, the Middle, and the Later Attic. The older is used by Thucydides, b. 472 B. c. ; the tragic poets ; JBschylus, who died 456 B. c. ; Sophocles, b. 497 B. c., d. 405 B. c. ; Euripides, b. 480 B. c. ; and the more ancient comic writers, e. g. Aristophanes, d. 390 B. c. ; by several orators, e. g. Antiphon, b. 479 B. c., and An- docides, b. 467 B. c. The middle Attic is used by Plato, b. 430 B. c. ; Xenophon, b. 447 B. c. ; and the orator Iso- crates, b. B. c. 436. The later Attic is employed by De- mosthenes, b. 385 B. c., and other orators, the later comic writers, and the prose authors in more recent times, who sought to preserve in their works the language of the earlier writers. 5. After the freedom of the Greeks had been destroyed by Philip, king of Macedon, tlie Attic dialect came to be the common written language. As it extended, not only over all Greece, but also over the Macedonian provinces of Syria and Egypt, it lost much of its peculiar stamp by the introduction of foreign forms and words, and it then received the name of the Common, or Hellenic language, rj /cowrj, or ' EX\.7jmK7) 8taXe/cro?. It was used, e. g. by Apol- lodorus, Diodorus, and Plutarch. ETYMOLOGY, SECTION I. CHAPTER I. Letters and Sounds of the Language. $ 1. Alphabet. The Greek Alphabet consists of twenty-four letters. FORM, SOUND. NAME. A a a "A\a Alpha B ft b BTJTO, Beta r V g FdfjLfia Gamma A s d Ae\ra Delta E e short *E-\lrl\(. \v Epsllon Z r z Zfjra Zeta ~H V elong ^Hra Eta e ^ 6 th \yY\TGL Theta i i i 'JTwTCt Iota K K k KaTTTTQ, Kappa A \ 1 AdfjL@Sa Lambda M V* m Mv Mu N V n Nv Nu E t X Si Xi o short *O fjil/cpo v Omikron n 7T P ni Pi p P r ( Pa) Rho s ff9 s SfyfJUl Sigma T T t Tav Tau T V u ; Upsllon $ < ph $1 Phi X X ch XI Chi ;jr ps TJTi Psi fl o> oiong '/2/^eya Omega. 16 SOUNDS OF PARTICULAR LETTERS. [$ 2. REMARK 1. Sigma at the end of a word takes the form s, e. g. treto-^s, in most editions of the classics. This small s is also used in the middle of com- pound words, if the first part of the compound ends with Sigma, though such a usage is contrary to the authority of the manuscripts, e. g. Trpos^epw or TTpcxrcpepw, 8vsyeirf)s or Sutryfisfis. REM. 2. When e - g- 7^7y- c has the sound of short e in met, when it is followed by a consonant in the same syllable, e. g. fj.fy-as, ^r-a. ; the sound of long e in me, when it ends a word or a syllable, or when it forms a syllable by itself, e. g. 76, &e-o>, jSatnA- e-wy. t\ has the sound of e in me, e. g. ^01/77. & has the sound of th in thick, e. g. bd.va.Tos. i has the sound of i in wane, when it ends a word or syllable, or forms a syllable by itself, e. g. l\irl-ffi, on, ireS-i-ov ; the sound of i in pin, when it is followed by a consonant in the same syllable, e. g. irpiv, Kiu-Swos. K always has the hard sound of k, and was expressed in Latin by c, e. g. KiAtKia, Ci I Ida ; Kticpoty, Cecrops ; KtKepcav, Cicero. |, at the beginning of a word or syllable, has the sound of z, e. g. feVos ; else- where, the sound of x, e. g. 8iavca, 7rp5|is, j/o|. o has the sound of short o in not, when it is followed by a consonant in the same syllable, e. g. \6y-os, nv-pos ; the sound of long o in go, when it ends a word or syllable, or forms a syllable by itself, e. g. r6, inr6, &o-6s, To|-o'-Trjy. ff has the sharp sound of s in son ; except it stands before p., in the middle of a word, or at the end of a word after 77 or a, where it has the sound of 2, e. g. wpa. X has the hard sound of ch in chasm, e. g. TO.XVS. w has the sound of long o in note, e. g. &yu. 2b. Brief history of the Alphabet. 1. The Greeks derived most of their alphabet from the Phoenicians. Ac- cording to the common tradition, letters were brought into Greece by Cadmus, a Phoenician. The Phoenician alphabet, being nearly the same as the Hebrew, consisted of 22 letters, the names of which are, Aleph, Beth, Gimel, Daleth, He, Vau, Zain, Heth, Teth, Jod, Kaph, Lamed, Mim, Nun, Samech, Oin, Pe, Tsade, Koph, Rcsch. Schin, Thau. Vau, the 6th letter of the Phoenician alphabet, was rejected by the Greeks as an alphabetic character, and used only as the numeral sijin for G. Koph (Greek Koppa), the 19th letter of the Phoe- nician alphabet, was also rejected, because its sound so nearly resembled that of Kaph (Greek Kappa), and was used as the numeral sign for 100. Zain and Tsade were modifications of the same sound ; Tsade, like the Greek Zeta, 2* 18 ORGANS OF SPEECH. [$ 3. represents the sound of both, and takes the place of Zain, becoming the 6th letter of the Greek alphabet, while Zain (Greek San, Sampi), was rejected as an alphabetic character, and used as a numerical sign for 900. Thus 1 9 letters of the Phoenician alphabet were adopted by the Greeks, as alphabetic characters. These are the first 19 letters of the present alphabet. To these the Greeks themselves added the five last letters of the alphabet, viz., u, , x> ^> This seems to he the most rational view of the formation of the Greek alphabet, though somewhat different from the common legendary account, which repre- sents Cadmus as bringing only 16 letters into Greece, viz., o, , 7, 5, e, t, K, A., fl, V, 0, 7T, p, ff, T, U. 2. The alphabet was not brought at once into its present complete form. The old Attic alphabet contained but 21 letters. H was considered merely as a breathing, and the place of t\ and o> was supplied by e and o, and that of ^ and | by *5 and X2, e. g. AI0EP (aifrfip), EX0PON (ixfrp&v), *2YXAI (i^xd), X2TN (l^). The alphabet is said to have been completed in the time of the Persian war, by Simonides, who added E, , and n, and changed the breathing H, to the long vowel TJ. The lonians first adopted the present full alphabet of 24 letters, and by them it was communicated to the Athenians. This full alphabet was first used in Attic inscriptions in the archonship of Euclides, B.C. 403, before this period only the old Attic alphabet is found in Attic inscriptions. 3. The early Greeks used the capital letters exclusively, and left no spaces between the words, e. g. METAAETOTTONEinEXEIPl2O*O2, i. e. ,ueTo Se rov- rov eiTre XfiptffoQos. The cursive, or small character, was not introduced till very late. A document has been found in Egypt written in the cursive char- acter, 104 B. c. But cursive writing was not in general use till long after that time. . It is first found in manuscripts in the eighth century. 4. The early Greeks commonly wrote in the Oriental manner, i. e. from right to left, as may be seen in several inscriptions. Other inscriptions, how- ever, of equal antiquity, are written from left to right, proving that both modes were in use. A third method was from left to right and right to left alternate- ly. This was called ^owrpo^TjSJi/, because it resembled the turning about of oxen in ploughing. Solon's laws were written in this way. But in the time of Herodotus, the Greeks wrote only from left to right. $3. Organs of Sp eech. 1. The organs of speech, used in forming or articulating words, are the palate, the throat, the tongue, and the lips. 2. The sounds which are emitted almost without any action of the throat, tongue, and lips, and which proceed in the freest manner from the breast, are called Vowels ; the rest, Conso- nants. $ 4.] VOWELS. $ 4. Vowels . 1. The Greek has seven vowels, a, i, v, which may be long or short, e and o, which are always short, rj and o> which are always long. The character (") over one of the vowels a, i, v, shows that the vowel is short ; (") that it is long ; (~) that it may be either long or short, e. g. a, d, a. REMARK 1. a, i, and v arc called the principal vowels, because they denote the principal sounds ; the other vowels are called subordinate, because their sounds are the intermediates of the principal sounds. Thus, the sound of is intermediate between a and t, the sound of o is intermediate between a and v ; ij is produced by lengthening or o, , with the vowels i and v, thus : . o -f- t = aiy pronounced like at in aisle, e. g. ctf, a -f- v = av, " au in laud, " vavs, -j- t = t, " ei in sleight, " $u/6s, [ f " " eu in feudal, " TrA.ev(ra, 7jS{ov, n ~T~ v n v y j o -}- t = 01, " oi in oil, " Koiv6s, o -\- v = ov, " ou in sound, " ovpav6s, v -f- i = vi, " whi in whine, " vi6s, w-j-w = a>; > (only Ionic,) " " ou in sownrf, " uvr6s t - also the im- proper diphthongs, a, T^, ry. REM. 2. The pronunciation of the diphthongs (f, ??, is the same as that of the simple vowels o, 77, o>, though the ancient Greeks probably gave the i a slight sound after the other vowel. REM. 3. With capital letters, the Iota subscript of 9, p, o>, is placed in a line with the vowels, but is not pronounced, e. g. Tfil KAAni=T( KO\V, ry "AiSp, but ^5?;. 20 VOWELS. [$ 4. EEM. 4. The Iota subscript, which in the most flourishing period of the Greek language was always pronounced, at length became a silent letter, and was either omitted in writing, or was written under the vowel to which it belonged. It was first written under the vowel in the thirteenth century. EEM. 5. The following examples w r ill show how the Romans sounded the diphthongs : at is expressed by the diphthong ae, ei by I and e, 01 by oe, ov by u ; v was generally expressed by y, e. g. s, Phaedrus ; Evpos, Eurus ; 0/jS/ces, Thraces ; s, Glaucus ; Boturia, Boeotia ; 0prj(r$6s, tragoedus ; AvKeuM/, Lyceum ; El\ei&vta, Ilithyia ; Kupos, Cyrus. In words adopted later, the Eomans expressed by o, as 84j, ode. EEM. 6. When two vowels, which would regularly form a diphthong, are to be pronounced separately, it is indicated by two points, called Diaeresis, placed over the second vowel (, v), e. g. ouSJi', for atSo?, ois, &VTTVOS. If the acute accent is on the i or v, it is placed between the points ; if the circumflex, over them, as aiSrjs, /cAefSt, irpavs. EEM. 7. The pronunciation given under 2a, as well as that given to the diphthongs above, is the one more generally adopted in New England. The original pronunciation of the Greek is lost. It is, therefore, the common cus- tom for scholars (in each country) to pronounce it according to the analogy of their own language. This is the method proposed by Erasmus in the sixteenth century, and is generally adopted in Europe at the present day. The pronun- ciation defended by Eeuchlin ! in the same century, corresponds nearly with the modern Greek. 1 For the benefit of those who may wish to compare the two modes, the fol- lowing explanation of the Eeuchlinian is extracted from the Greek Grammar of Sophocles: " A is pronounced like a in father, far. , 7, 5, like b, g hard, d; in later times, like Eomaic #, 7, 8. Before AC, 7, x> l 7 had the sound of ng in hang. , like Eomaic e, or Italian e. like z, but stronger. 77, like French e, as in ftte. &, like ih in thin, ether, saith. t, like i in machine. K, like k. A, /i, like I, m, respectively, v, like n. At the end of a word it was often pro- nounced and written as if it were a part of the next word. {, in the Attic dialect, like s ; in the other dialects, like KS. In later times, the sound KS pre- vailed, o, like Eomaic o, or Italian o. ir, like p. p, like r. At the begin- ning of a word it was rolled; when it was doubled, only the second one was rolled. It was rolled, also, after &, <, % ff -> ^ e s i n so fti P ast - Before ju, it was, in later times, sounded like and even changed into C i n writing ; as Z/iupra, for ~2.fj.vpva, in an inscription. T, like t in tell, strong, u, like French u. $, like/} but stronger. %, like Eomaic x> German ch, or Spanish^' (x). fy, in the Attic dialect, like /JL. REMARK 1. The consonants, which are produced by the same organ of speech, are called cognate consonants ; thus 7, /e, x are cognate consonants. 2. Consonants are divided again, according to the greater or the less influence of the organs of speech in their forma- tion, into breathings, liquids, and mutes. (a) The Breathings form a kind of transition from the vowels to the consonants. There are three breath- ings : the lingual a ; the Spiritus Asper ('), correspond- ing to our h ( 6) ; and the labial F (Digamma) ; on the last, see the remarks upon the Dialects. (b) The Liquids, \ /JL v p, are so called, because they easily coalesce with the other consonants. EEM. 2. The Breathings and Liquids are also included under the common name of semivowels, forming a kind of transition to the full vowels. During the brazen age, and probably during the latter part of the silver age, the diphthongs at, et, ov, had each the power of a single vowel, at, like ai in aisle ; in later times, like 77, or French ; during the latter part of the brazen age, like e. ou, like ou in our, house ; in later times, like ay, of. et, like a in freight, nearly ; in later times, like i. During the silver and brazen ages, e was often prefixed to t long, merely to mark its quantity ; as Kpeivw, rcto-at, retfj-TJcrai . And when quantity began to be disregarded, even short t was represented by ; as EiVi5o>pos, EtVo/cpdVTjs, yv/j.vaa-ftapx-fi, ov, T?W, tav, they differed from at, et, 01, au, *u, ou only in the prolongation of the first vowel. In later times, 9, p, were pronounced like d, 77, , respectively." TR. 22 BREATHINGS. (c) The Mutes are formed by the strongest exertion of the organs of speech ; they are, fiyS^/cTrr^x. 3. The Mutes are divided, (a) According to the organ of speech used in pronouncing them, into three Palatals, three Linguals, and three Labials ; (b) According to their names, into three Kappa, three Tau, and three Pi-mutes ; (c) According to the force of articulation, into three smooth, three medial, and three rough Mutes. HEM. 3. Hence each of the nine mutes may be considered in a threefold point of view, e. g. y may be called a palatal, a kappa-mute, or a medial, ac- cording as we wish to bring into view the organ by which it is pronounced, its name, or the force of articulation, a medial mute requiring less force to articu- late it than a rough mute. SMOOTH. MEDIAL. ROUGH. Palatals K 7 X Kappa-mutes Linguals T 8 Tau -mutes Labials TT ft * . Pi-mutes KEM. 4. The consonants, which are produced by the same effort of the organs, are called coordinate, e. g. the smooth mutes, K, ?r, r, are coordinate. 4. From the coalescence of the Mutes with the Breath- ing a, three double consonants originate, i|/ from 7T (70-), oj/v| (x is not, like \|/ and , to be regarded as a sound compounded of two con- sonants, but as a soft hissing sound, to be pronounced like a soft z. Only in the adverbs in ?, is C to be considered as composed of , to stop, Perf. Pe&vffucu). It may be regarded, perhaps, as a transposition of sounds, as when the JEolic and Doric dialects use, in the middle of a word, x'> iff pi vpuv, also in ou5e (yUTj&e) els (/), ne unus quidem, to distinguish it from ovSeis, nullus. In addition to its use in the Iambic measure, the Hiatus is found frequently, even in the Tragedians, who endeavored to avoid it when possible ; still, it is mostly limited to special cases ; for example, it occurs with interjections and imperatives, e. g. D, vat, &va (up!), ?&i, as i, J&t poi iraidv, Soph. Ph. 832; etAA^ &va, e| i8pd- vw, Aj. 194. On the Hiatus in the Epic dialect, see 200. $ 9. A. Contraction of Voivels. Contraction is the union of two successive vowels in the same word into one long syllable. These contractions arise either from the natural coalescence of two successive vowels, in accordance with the laws of euphony, or from grammatical principles. The first kind of contractions is called euphonic, the latter, grammatical. In the Common language, the follow- ing contractions occur : I. Euphonic Contractions. (a) a -f- a = a as- Tt/iarjre a -}- t = qt " yfipa'i = yfjpa o _|_ 1 ' n/j.dofj.ev = rifj.uiiJ.ev a -\- fj,ev a -f- ") " rifj.deis = a + ?? > a -\- 01 = to " nfj.doifj.1 = nfj.v/j.1 a -}- ou = a> " rifj-dov = Tifj.a> ( c ) 6 -f a =7? " ret'xea = reixn (Comp. No. II.) -f- <* == e 4- I = et -f- o = ou " (y) == a> (y) C = " T^TTTeot = TU7TT77 (JKA.MMAT1CAL CONTRACTIONS. 25 4- = a 4- V = P e -|- 01 = ot " i\o?s f -f- Ol/ = OU " tc cw'So'a = ew'Stt (Comp. No. II.) 0+77 = () o +- at = at " om\6ai = aTrAcu o -\- ti " fjuff&oei fj.Hr&o'i (Comp. Rem. 2.) o -f- rj = ot O ~\- Ol " /jUO~&6oij.U o -f- ou = ou " [jiio~&6ovffi = /j.i(T&ov(ri (g) v + o " Ix&vas = tx^vs v + 6 = u " ix^ues = i'x&us u + 77 " Setff^uTjTai = SeiKvvTcu (rarely) (h) w + a = w " 7^pa>a = rip< (only in Ace. of some Sub. of a> -f- i = (f ' A.coi'o'Tos = A.i\e'w = iA<, 4>i\e'ou ^iAoD, v\-f)f, but if it is any other vowel it is dropped ; e. g. Tifj.drjs = Ti^ay, TtlJ.doifJ.1 = Tl/J-ffJll = TlftdoV = Tljlia), TUTTTeat = Tl/TTTTJ. n. Gr*mniatical Contractions. (a) 6 + e = T;, particularly in the third Dec., e. g. rpt-fipee = rpirjprj, (b) 6 -}- a = o in the second Dec., e. g. oo*Tta = oo-ra, xp ffea ~ XP V xp ve?s 5 so ir6\eis, irf)X ls > c> 7X e/Aets > from irJAeos, etc. (c) o + a = d in Adjectives in 6os, o'rj, 6ov, e. g. air\6-a = air\a. o -f- "n = "n i n Adjectives in 6os, OTJ, 6ov, e. g. a.ir\6-i] = airXrj. o + a = ov in Accusative PL of fiovs ; so also /tebas = peifavs, and the like. KEM. 2. The contraction of oei into ou is found only in the Inf. Act. of verhs in 6coire. On the accentuation, see 31, II ; on the change of the smooth Mute into the rough before the Spiritus Asper, as rb t/5wp = 3-oi/Swp, see 4 below, and 17, Hem. 3. 2. Crasis is found only with closely connected words, the first of which is unimportant; hence it most frequently occurs, (a) with the article, e. g. 6 avrjp = avrj t o, TOV dvSpos = rdvSpos ; (b) frequently with Kai and the interjection o>, e. g. /cat dper^ = KapcT^, w av^/30)7rc = oh^/Doorre, w aya$e = wya$e, o> ara = a)ra ; (c) some- what often in cyw with oTSa and oT/Aai, e. g. eywSa, eyaymt; (d) less often with the neuter relative o and a, as o eyw, a eyw = dyoS; with rot, pevroi, OVTOI, particularly in connection $ 11.] MOST COMMON INSTANCES OF CRASIS. 27 with dV, apa, c. g. rav (seldom ill prose), ftordV; rapa and ovr&pa (|MH-tir) ; but seldom with TT/SO, e. g. irpovpyov for rrpo Ipyov; fre- quently in composition with the augment e, as Trpov&o/ca. 3. As the second word is the most important, it has properly a greater influence on the form of the Crasis, than the first ; on this principle it is to be explained, that the Iota subscript is used only when the i belongs to the last of the two vowels, 6. g. Kal etra = Kara, eyu) oI8a = ey<35a ; on the contrary, /cat err- ra = KaTTCira ; at dya$at = ayaSai, TW o^Xa) = rw^Xa). 4. When Crasis occurs with the article, and an a follows, the vowels of the article even ov and w are combined with the following a into a long a, and, if the article is aspirated, the aspirate is transferred to the long a, e. g. 6 avrjp = Q-vyp, ol TO dA.77$s = TaA/7$s, ra aAAa = TaAAa, TOV dv8po? rdvSpt ; also, TOV aurov = Tavrov, T<3 avr<3 = TavT(p. EEM. 2. Also the forms of the article ending in o, o, ov, o>, -- 6 = CO w -f- o = o> " ot -f- a = a u 01 -f- e = ou " -(- ot = cp " ^7^ ^ tt == tyySa ov + TJ = 77 " TOU r]/j.Tepov = ^^lerepou, poetic. ( 17, Rem. 3.) ou -}- ou = ou " TOU oupavou = rovpavov f ot -f- t = a " /col ?TO = K^ra (c) Here belong the examples given under 10, 4 and 5. 12. C. Synizesis. 1. Synizesis is the contraction in pronunciation of two vowels into one syllable, e. g. when ^ ov is pronounced as a monosyllable. It can occur only among the poets, but may have been used in the common colloquial language. REMARK. The difference between Contraction and Synizesis is, that in the ordinary Contraction and also in Crasis, the contraction is made in writing, e. g. i\S> from ) oXXot, cyo> ov (dissyllable), and eyw ei/u S. Ph. 577; also, in a few single words and forms, e. g. ^cot (=Soi, monosyllable), ccopaKo, (=wpaKa, trissyllable), dvewy/Aevos (= dvwy/xei/os, four sylla- bles), particularly in the Ionic- Attic Genitive -eoos, as ^o-eW (dissyllable). On Synizesis in Homer, see 206. $ 13. D. Elision. 1. Elision is the omission of a short final vowel before the initial vowel of the following word. It occurs also in compounds, but the apostrophe is then omitted. $ 14.] USE OF ELISION IN THE POETS. 29 KIM M ;K 1. Tin- murk of Klision is the same as that of the Spirilus Lenis, ami i* railed apostrophe, as TOUT' (ffnv, ytvoir" &v. * KI:M. 2. Elision differs from Crasis in that the former elides the vowel, while the latter lengthens it, e. g. ctAA' &ye (Elision), TC\ &\\a = ToAAa (Crasis). This distinction, however, does not hold, when the second word begins with a long vowel or diphthong, e. g. rb avr6 = ravr6. 2. In the prose writers, Elision is confined mainly to the following cases, where it often occurs : (a) In prepositions which end in a vowel, except vepl and Trpo ; also /ue'xpi and &xpi> used as prepositions, but rarely in eWa, e. g. 82 O!KOV, &r' olnov, but irtpl oT/coj/, ?rpo otitov. Elision is regular in composition, except with trepl, irp6, and sometimes ap^l, e. g. avf\&eiv, but irepiopcft/ ; (b) In conjunctions and adverbs, oAAa, &pa, 5pa, a/xo, circs, fireira, ^a\a, nd\i77, the comma is omitted, for in such cases, without doubt, the ancients pronounced the words in quick succession. On accent in Elision, see 31, III. $ 14. Use of Elision in the Poets. 1. The use of Elision in poetry is very frequent, and much more extended than in prose 5 yet the following points are to be noted : A word ending in u is never elided ; nor a, , o in a monosyllable ; hence the article r6, and the pro- nouns r\ and T/, are not elided ; and vcpl in no case, at least among the Attic poets, nor Sri, jue'xpi, &xp l > nor substantive adverbs of place ending in Si (S&i excepted), and very rarely the Optative ending in e. 2. The Elision of the i in the Dat. of the third Dec., particularly in the Sing., is very rare in the Attic poets, and is even doubted by many. 3. The verbal endings, /xat, rcu, e\Kueue, Tifh](rw ev TV} TpaTTtfy) ; so also with ecrrt ; (y) to the third Pers. Sing, in e, e. g. eruTrrev e/xe ; (8) to the numeral eucoo-c, though even before vowels the v is often omitted, e. g. et/coo-tv avSpe? and a/coo-t avSpes ; (c) to the Demonstrative i ( 95, e) but rarely, and then always after or, e. g. ovroo-tv, eKetvocrtv, TOVTOVO-LV, ovraxrw ; (^) to the Epic particles, vv and /ce, and to the Epic suffix i. REMARK. The poets place the v Paragogic before a consonant, so as to make a short syllable long by position. In Attic prose, it stands regularly at the end of a book or section ; it is, also, sometimes found, before the longer punctuation- marks, and sometimes elsewhere for the sake of a more emphatic pronun- ciation. 2. The adverb ovrcos always retains its full form before a vowel, but drops the final s before a consonant, e. g. ovrws lirolt)- o-cv, but OVTW TTOIW ; still, o^Tws may stand even before consonants, when it is to be made emphatic, e. g. OVTWS ye, Xen. C. 3. 6, 9. 3. So the Prep. e retains its full form before vowels and at the end of a sentence, but before consonants becomes IK, e. g. x T/&VS ; but before a consonant, ov, e. g. ov KOAOS ; so also /X^KC'TC (instead of py In) after the analogy of ov/ceVi. KEM. 2. When ou stands at the end of a discourse, or of a sentence, and is to be pronounced with emphasis, the form otf with the acute accent is used even before a vowel ; in this case there must be an actual break in the discourse, as when of; stands at the end of an answer expressed interrogatively, without connection with what follows, as IIus ykp oft; T Ap' ovv KT\. Xen. C. 4. 2, 37 ; or when it is found in the answer only, and corresponds to our No; it is found (.-specially in antithetical sentences, e. g. Tci/yadd', TO. Se KOKO. ot: 'Ecu/ Se' /crA. Xen. C. 1. 2, 42 ; A&ous eis rov irora/AOv ttyitnovv, eiKVovvro 5e oi/, of re e0\cnr- TOV ouSeVa. An. 4. 8, 3. If, on the contrary, the following sentence is closely connected with the preceding, then it is written OVK, e. g. ou/c, &AAo KT\. Xen. C. 2. 6, 11. and 13 ; 4. 6, 2 ; ou/c, el or jv KT\. Hell. 1. 7, 19. $ 16. Strengthening, Weakening, Prolongation, SJiortening, Inter - cliange, and Variation of Vowels. Influence of a Vowel or a Consonant on another Vowel. Syncope. Omission of a Vowel. Euplwnic Prothesis. The changes, which further take place in vowels, are : 1. Strengthening of vowels ; this consists in changing a weaker vowel into a stronger (see 4, Rem. 1). There are different degrees of strength- in the vowels ; the weakest is . The strengthening takes place, e. g. in words of the third Dec. in os, Gen. -eos ; the pure stem of these words ends in es : in the Nom., however, which prefers fuller forms, the weaker e is changed into the stronger o (in Latin into w), e. g. 761/05, genits, Gen. ytveos (instead of 7eVco--os), gentr-is. In yow and So'pu (Gen. yovar-os, 56pa,T-os), o, the final vowel of the stem, is changed into the stronger u. 2. The weakening or attenuation of vowels ; this is the opposite of the change just described ; it occurs, e. g. in substantives of the third Dec. in -ts, -i, -Or, -0 ; in these, the stronger stem- vowels i and u are changed into the weaker e, C. g. ic 6\ts, ir6\f ir-f)X ftas 5 o-f JWTI, ffivdircos ; &ffrv, SCTTCOS. So with adjectives in -vs, -i5, e. g. y\vKvs, y\vicv, Gen. -eos. 3. Prolongation of vowels ; this changes a short vowel into a long vowel or diphthong, viz. a into 77 or at ; t into t or et ; u into v or u ; e into TJ or ; o into a> or ou. This prolongation takes place either for the sake of euphony, or from grammatical reasons, or from both together ; in the poets often on account of the metre. The prolongation of vowels is very prevalent in the Greek language. One instance only is here mentioned, namely, the strengthening of the Present tense in Mute and Liquid verbs, e. g. /cpfrew, TI-XUVW, A.^co, Qalvu, Aeiirw, 32 INTERCHANGE AND VARIATION OF VOWELS. [$ 16. instead of Kptvu, irXvvo}, Ac&w, (pave*, \tirca, tyvyw. The reason of the prolon- gation is very often found in the omission of a v with a Tau-mutc, more rarely of a mere >/, or in the omission of a a after a Liquid, or of a final Sigma, e. g. odovs instead of oSoVrs, SiSous instead of SiSoVrs, /SovAeiW instead of jSouAeu- ovrs ; fj.f\as instead of yue'Aews ; eo-^Aa instead of eor^oAo-a, fiyyeiXa instead of iyye\ instead of do, e. g. -uiv, instead of ?Ados, -ov, Aec6s instead of Ados, ved>s instead of vdos, instead of Me^eAdos ; further, in the Attic dialect, cnAea>s, ao-iAed instead of the Ionic /JcwnATjos, -7)0; so also, Tro'Aecos, Tr^X 5 ) Attic, instead of ir6\ios, irffx vos 5 * s weaker than i and u, see No. 2. 6. Variation, i. e. the change of the radical vowel e into o and a, for the formation of the tenses ( 140) and derivatives ( 231, 6); when t in the Present is lengthened from the radical t, it becomes ot in the second Perf, but when from the radical e, it becomes o ; e. g. rpecfxa, rerpoQa, (root Ar), AeAotTro; Qbflpu (root <&ep), e^opa, ^apfjv; ^Aeyw, rpoxos ; Tpe'^ew, rpotyr}, rpoQevs, rpcupepSs. Comp. Germ, stehle, gestohlen, stahl, English, ring, rang, rung. The i\ is changed into w, e. g. ap-fiyca, a KEMARK 1. Whether the a is to be regarded as a variation, or rather as a euphonic change of e, introduced by a preceding or following Liquid, partic- ularly p and A, sometimes even /j. and v, may be doubted. Comp. tTpairov, ira.jj.ov, ZK.TO.VOV with 7. Change of a vowel by the influence of another vowel or of a consonant. Here belong two special cases : (a) The Attic writers change the Ionic 77 into a after the vowels e and t and the diphthongs ending with i, sometimes even after other vowels, and after the Liquid p, e. g. tSe'a (Ion. t'S&j), ffotyla, xP 6l/a > (b) The union-vowel e in verbs in a>, is changed into o before the terminations beginning with )t* and v, e. g. jSovAeuojuez', fiovXevovrai, ffiovtevo/j.ej', ejSow AetWro. 8. Syncope (a-vyKoir-fi), i. e. the omission of e in the middle of a word between a Mute and a Liquid, or between two Liquids, or between TTT ; the same, also, occurs in the declension of certain substantives of the third Dec., e. g. Trarp6s instead of wen-epos ; in the forming of the Present tense of certain verbs, e. g. yiyvopat instead of yiyevofiai, TTITTTO) instead of iwreTca, fj.lfj.vo> instead of fj.ifj.evco ; and in the formation of the tenses of some verbs, e. g. riyp6^f]v from lyeipw ; Syncope rarely occurs after tffTr6fj.r)v, eo-erot. A striking example of Syncope is found in $\&ov instead of fJAv&ov, from 'EAET0H. Comp. 155 117.] MUTES. 33 9. Apocope. Sec on the Dialects, 207. 10. One of the vowels a, e, o is prefixed to several words, for the sake of euphony. This is called euphonic prothesis, e. g. affrepoir-fi and arepwrf), iurrcupis and crawls, tx&* 5 an ^ X^ 6/s ^KIVOS and /ce?j/os, &e'A.o> and &e\(a, wpvotis and Kpvos, oSvpofj.a.1 and 5vpo/j.cu t o/ceAAo* and /cAAw, etc. KI:M. 2. From these euphonic letters care must be taken to distinguish ( 1 ) o when it stands for &ir<{, e. g. a-^vvfiv, to avert, or when used instead of avdt, e. g. apva-ffciv, to tear up, or instead of the a or a copulative with the meaning of a^o, from which also a intensive has been formed; (2) e, when it i< ii-i-d instead of ^ or lv, e. g. fyclpciv, to wake up, tpfvyw, eructare, irritare ; (3) o with the meaning of j/tov, c. g. II. CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. $ 17. a. Mutes. 1. The changes of the consonants arise, in a great degree, from the tendency of language to assimilate different sounds. This assimilation is either a mere resemblance in sounds, as when XeXey-raris changed into A / A.KTCU, the smooth r chang- ing the medial y into the smooth K ; or it is a complete identity in sounds, as when, aw-phm* is changed into o-vpptTTTw. Sometimes, however, the language shuns a sameness in sound, and seeks to remove it by changing similar sounds into dissim- ilar, e. g. TT-iX.r)Ka for -iX.r)Ka, 2;a7na> for Sa) or a Kappa-mute (K y x) before a Tau- mute (r 8 $) must be coordinate with the Tau-mute, i. e. only a smooth Mute (TT K) can stand before the smooth T ; only a medial ((3 y) before the medial S; only an aspirate ( x) before the aspirate 3; consequently, TTT and KT; /3S and 78; # and ^ e - - /3 before T into IT as (from rpi/3(0) ( " ypdQw) \e\ey-rcu = TeTplTTTCU = yfypcnrrcu = AeAe/crot KVITTCi)) /cu7r-8a ypd(p-$r]v 34 MUTES. [H7 BEMAHE 1. The preposition & remains unchanged, probably by virtue of an original movable xty> n t on ty i* 1 inflec- tion and derivation, but also in two separate words, the rough breathing being transferred from the vowel to the smooth Mute ; but the medials (/3 y 8) are thus changed only in the inflection of the verb ; elsewhere there is no change, hence : air' ov = aa.it/(a, rervTr-a = rerv(pa (from 5e/ca, ^ = e>freA/c), but ovSeis (not ov&els, from ouS' and els) but A^' frepav (not Ae'x' erepov) ' ovrcas (not rp?(^' OUTWS). REM. 2. The negative OVK (ov) thus becomes ou%, e. g. ovx ^Sus; yet this change does not occur before the aspirate p, e. g. ou pirrro). In some com- pounds, the smooth Mute is retained even in the Attic dialect, according to Ionic usage, e. g. cbnjAte&TTjs (east wind, from oiro and ?}Ato$), \evKanros (one wlio rides a white horse, from \fvx6s and 'liriros), Kparnriros, etc. EEM. 3. This change of the smooth Mute before the rough breathing takes place also in Crasis ( 10 and 11), e. g. rh eVepa = fr&Tepa, rb IH&TLOV = &ol/j.d- TIOV, Kai eVepos = x&repos, Kal oo~a offns, OTTWS = %(Ta, x&ffTis, x&inos. Yet this Crasis is only poetic. When the smooth Mutes irr or KT precede the rough breathing, both must be changed into Aspirates (No. 2), e. g. e^)3^/iepos instead of eTTT^fcepos (from irrd, V e/ P a )> v v X& 'd^W instead of VVKT' oAyv. Attic prose uses also the full forms, e. g. VVKTO. oXy?. REM. 4. In some compounds, the aspirated liquid p changes the preceding smooth Mute into the Aspirate, e. g. ta^ovn--tos), MtA^crios (from MtAr^ros), 'A^epoucnos (inslcad of 'AxepoVr-ios), ovaia (instead of 6Vr-i'a), yepovtrc'a (instead of yepovT-ia), o/iavcrio? (from cvtavros). The t sometimes changes by assimilation the other Tau-mutes, and the Palatals, into cr ; thus in the forms of the Comparative in -crerwv and -v, where there is a double change, first of the Tau-mute or Palatal to ao-cro>v, poet., Tra^us (ira^tW, (b>v), 7ra^tp-w). See 116, 15. 2. N before a Liquid is changed into the same Liquid, e. g. becomes crv\\oyifa a-vy-/j.frpia becomes iv-p.tv(a " l/j./j.et'co ffvv-piirrca " REMARK. Comp. iZ/ino, iwmineo, instead of in/ino, i?zmineo. Assimilation takes place in tf A.\u/*t, instead of o\wfu. 'Ev before p is not assimilated, e.g. ivplTTTQ) ; vet fp'pvb/j.os is more frequent than evpufyios ; on the contrary, KVW stands instead of i\\aKKei>(a. 3. M initial before a Liquid is changed into (3, e. g fjL\irreiv (from /te'At) becomes /3\iTTi/ Hpor6s ( " ^pos, mors) " fyorts. 36 MUTES AND LIQUIDS. [$ 19, $ 19. c. Mntes and Liquids. Liquids and Mutes. 1. A Pi-mute (IT fi <) before /x, is changed into /*,, a Kappa-mute (K y x) " /x, '* " y, a Tau-mute (T 8 $) " /u, " " cr, e. g. Pi-mute : rerpift-fj-ai (from T/jf/3o>) becomes ( " ypd(pw) " yeypafj.fj.ai (ft) Kappa-mute: ireVAc/c-jwcu ( " irAe'/cw) ( " Aeyw) remains ( " pe'xw) beeomes (7) Tau-mute: tfvvT-fjuu ( " ovurw) ( " ^perSco) KeKOfj.iti-fJ,ai ( " Kofi^o)) REMARK 1. In some words, the Kappa and Tau-mutes are not changed before /u, e. g. a/f/u^, TT^T/XOS, \axf*-6s, KV^/J.C>V, etc. In some words, even % stands before /i, instead of the original K or 7, e. g. icaxpds from WKW, 7rAo%/t. 2. The medial fi before v is changed into /x, e. g. , >) " ypdtyffw ( " ypd&ciffi \fovr-ffi becomes Aeouos, etc. (in iroAti' the usage varies) ; also in some inflective and derivative forms in -crai and - being con- tracted into , e. g. ayyeA-e-crco, a^eAw. So too in the Nora, of the third Dec. the final Sigma is omitted, when v or p precedes, and the short vowel is lengthened, e. g. ei/ccov instead of ciic6v-s, iroipftv instead of Troi/teV-s, p-f^rup instead of p-f^rop-s, al&yp instead of aibfp-s. T and a are omitted in the Nom. of substantives and participles in -o>j/, Gen. -ovr-os ; but, as a compensation, o is lengthened into o>, e. g. \eovr-s becomes AeW, frov\evovr-s becomes fiovXsvuv. REM. 4. In eWu/u (instead of fcr-vvfu, ves-tio) the a- is assimilated to the following v, and in elp.1 (instead of ear-pi) aXapyia (instead of KeaAoXyia from aAyetv), yA.(Do-, bdir-ru, fj.ai) Tfda.fj.iJ.ai (but third Pers. PI. rerd^arai, e. g. Her. 6, 103, with one of the better MSS. is to be read instead of W into (frpcK-ffofjiai) &peo/j.a,i ] rpix~6s into &p , in the comparative, becomes ^dfftrwv. For the same reason, the future c|co, from cx, to have, is the proper form, the aspiration of the % being transferred to the smooth breathing and making it rough. KEMARK 1. TU, COmp. mens), ^VTJCTKW (from Sav-tiv), rer/i^ica (from re/A-eiy), (from /?aA.-eu/), TTTTJo-o/xat (from irc'rofuu). $ 23. Doubling of Consonants. 1. Consonants are doubled, in the first place, for the sake of euphony, e. g. /3o^vppoos from f$av and pew ; Ippcov instead of in the second place, in consequence of the concurrence 40 STRENGTHENING AND ADDITION OP CONSONANTS. [ 24 of like or similar sounds, in the inflection and derivation, e. g. ei/-vo// (instead of evX.), cru/x,-/>ia^os (instead of o-vv/x.), XeXci/>t-/>iat (instead of XeXewryu,.), X^u,-//,a (in- stead of XfJTTfJia), K0/>i-//,a (instead of KOTr/xa), rcur-o-w or Tar-raj (instead of ray-crco), ^oxrooi/ or r/rrcov (instead of rfK-uav), yu-aXXov (instead of /mX-iov), oXXos (instead of 0X105, alius). 2. In the Common language, only the Liquids, X, /*, v, p, the Sibilant a-, and the Mute T, can be doubled ; yet TT and K are also doubled in single words; e. g. JWo?, a horse ; KOKKOS, a berry. The Medial y is often doubled, but this letter thus doubled is softened in the pronunciation ($ 2). Two Aspirates are not doubled ( 17, 4). 3. p is doubled when the augment is prefixed, e. g. eppeov, and in composition, when it is preceded by a short vowel, e. g. , j3a&vppoos', but eu-pu>o-ros (from cv and poWiyu). REMARK. In imitation of Homer, the Tragic writers also double the er, yet much less frequently than Homer, e. g. r^arcrov, Soph. Aj. 185; oTuWas, 390; fff (instead of j8Acj8-co), T^TT-T-W (instead of TJ^TT-W), plir-r-w (instead of fiiQ-u) ; sometimes also by and (aug-eo), a\e|ft>, o5ci|a> and oSafc ; the strengthening T is found only in Tre/cTco and T/CT. (c) The Linguals (S T ft) are strengthened by pa5o>), or, though more seldom, G assimilates the preceding Tau-mute, e. g. TuVo-ojuat and \iTOfjiai, fpeffffw, cperrca (instead of epeVou), Kopvffffu (instead of /copudw). 2. The unpleasant concurrence of fj.p and vp in the middle of some words, occasioned by the omission of a vowel, is softened by inserting /3 between w 25.] EXPULSION AND OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. 41 and 5 between vp, thus, in {j.f\ liable long by position, e. g. Tvp.iraa'ov (from TUTT-T-CU), instead of irv&oiuu, biyw, \dfto). On the change of V, see 19, 3. On the v Paragogic, see 15, 1. 4. 2 also is prefixed to some words, but mostly to such as begin with /*, e. g. /ta>5i and o>iw8i, p.utp6s and v instead of yeve-ff-os, yeve-y-wf (comp. gene-r-is, gene-r-um). At the end of a word, and after Pi and Kappa-mutes, it is retained, e. g. yevos, Tinl/ta (=TUTT(ra>), irAe'lcw (= irAe/c-trw), but after the Liquids, in inflection, as well as commonly at the end of a word, it is omitted, e. g. tfyyfi\a (instead of ^77eA-(T-a), 01776 Aw (instead of ayye\--cr-(i>, ayye\-e-(a), p-fjrwp (instead of pT)Top-s). Comp. 20, Hem. 3. 2. The Digamma softened into the vowel u ( 200) is omitted: (a) in the middle of the word between two vowels, e.g. o>6v (vFdv), ovum, fas (&Fis), ovis, oudjv (cdFwi/), aevum, vfos (veFos), novus, ffKcuds ((TKaiF6s), scaevus, &o6s ((3oF6s), bovis ; &ew, TrAe'w, irv4s (instead of lx&vFs), Ace. KII>, ffvv, t'x 1 ^"; t ut ^ disappears also, in this case, in the middle of a word between vowels, e. g. Al-6s, Ki-6s, ) " AeAe'x&ai (17,2.) e), which usually retain their final consonant before a vowel to prevent Hiatus, but drop it before consonants, here belong, (a) adverbs of place in &/, e. g. Trp6o-&ev, oiriffSev, vwep&ev, etc., which never drop the v before a consonant, in prose, but very often in Epic poetry, more seldom in the Attic poets ; (b) fj.cxp is an< i #XP ts > which, however, in the best classical writers, drop their x - C. 4. 7, 2 ; ,uexpi epvfrpas fraA^TTTjs, Id. Cy. 8. 6,20; (c) the adverbs a.Tpe[4.as, e/juras, p.ffft]yi)S, avriKpvs, ^j/ecos, &$vcas, which in poetry may drop their s, but never in prose ; in the Ionic dialect, numeral adverbs in -diets also frequently drop the a before consonants, e. g. TroAAcfoi. Her. 2, 2. 5. A genuine Greek word can end only in one of the three Liquids, v, a- (^, , i. e. ir, -7.J NATURE AND QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 43 CHAPTER II. Syllables. ? 26. Nature and Division of Syllables. 1. Every vowel, pronounced by itself, or in connection with one or more consonants, is called a syllable. 2. A word consists of one or more syllables. When a word consists of several syllables, a distinction is made between the stem-syllables and the syllables of inflection or derivation. The stem-syllables express the essential idea of the word, the syllables of inflection or derivation, the relations of the idea. Thus, e. g. in ye'-ypcu^-a, the middle syllable is the stem-syllable ; the two others, syllables of inflection : in 7rpay-/xa, the first is the stem-syllable ; the last, the syllable of derivation. $27. Quantity of Syllables. 1. A syllable is short or long, by nature, according as its vowel is short or long. 2. Every syllable is long which contains a diphthong, or a simple long vowel, or two 'vowels contracted into one, e. g. ySovXevw ; i/pcos; "d/cwv (from deKcov), fiorpvs (from /3orpuas). 3. A syllable with a short vowel becomes long by position, when two or three consonants, or a double consonant ( ij/), follow the short vowel, e. g. o-reAAco, Tvi/'anres, *opd (/cdpcucos) Tpa.7Tf.tfL. REMARK 1. The pronunciation 1 of a syllable long by nature, and of one long by position, differs in this, that the former is pronounced long, but the latter not. When a syllable long by nature is also long by position, its pronun- ciation must be protracted. Hence a distinction is made in pronouncing such words as TrpdrTO), 7rpa|is, irpciyfj.a (d), and T, T<|JS, ray/io (a). REM. 2. But when a short vowel stands before a Mute and a Liquid (Positio debihs), it commonly remains short in the Attic dialect, because the sound of the Liquids, being less distinct than the Mutes, they are pronounced with more 1 The method of pronunciation stated in this remark is adopted in many of the German gymnasia^ and in some of the schools in England and Scotland, but not to any extent in this country. TE. QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. [$ 28. 44 ease, e. g. &TCKVOS, &irfir\os, 'cwc/*^, fiorpvs, SiSpaxv-os, yet in two cases the posi- tion of the Mute and Liquid lengthens the short vowel : a) in compounds, e. g. 'e/cj/eyuw ; b) when one of the Medials (0 y 5) stands before one of the three Liquids (A. p. v), e. g. ftip\os, evoSfAos, TTfir\eyfj.ai ; in tragic trimeter, &A. also lengthen the preceding short vowel. It is obvious that a vowel long by nature cannot be shortened by a Mute and Liquid, e. g. pfovrpov. 4. A syllable, which contains one of the three doubtful vowels (a, i, v), cannot, in the same word, be pronounced long and short, but must be either long or short. $ 28. Quantity of the Penult. In order to a correct pronunciation, the quantity of the three doubtful vowels, a, t, and v, in the penult of words of three or more syllables, must be determined. The following are the principal instances in which the penult is long. The quantity of the syllables of inflection is treated in connection with the Forms : The penult is long, 1. In substantives in -auv (Gen. -aovos or -acnvos), in substantives of two or more syllables in -itav (Gen. -iovos; but -teav, Gen. -tcovos), and in forms of the comparative in -IODV, -lov (Gen. -twos), e. g. oirdcav, -ovos, 6, ^, companion, Tloaei- Sdcav, -cavos ; K/COJ/, -ovos, y, pillar, jSpax/cov, -ovos, 6, arm, 'AfjiQTwt/, -ovos ; but Aeu/aA.fcoj/, -t5dT7js, TroAfr^s, -ou, citizen (Fern. -woA-ms) : irpeff0vn)s, -ov, old itian ; ' Exceptions: (a) to the proper names in -CCTTJS : ToAd-r^s, AoA^drrjs, all in -Parns and -Q&TTIS, and compounds formed from verbal roots, e. g. rr)S 5 (b) K p IT^S, judge, from the short root /c/ri, KTtr^s, builder, one who sacrifices. 4.. In Proparoxytones in -tAos, -l\ov, -Ivos, -Ivov, in words in -Ivy, -Iva, , -vya, in those in -vvos, when o- does not precede the ending; in Pro- QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. 45 Proparoxytoncs in -up a, and in adjectives in -vpos with a preceding long syllable, e. g. 'O Ofj.i\os, multitude; Savrft/rj, gift; 6 KivSwos, danger; ire'SfA.oj', shoe; AfyiVa, yevpa, bridge; T) Kd/j.Ivos, oven ; alffx^^i shame : Ivxypos, strong ; y parsley; fyiwa, defence; (but oxfyds and ^xtyxfc), firm. KI:MARK 1. The following may be added to the Proparoxytones in -Ivos and -0/jo, namely, & x^vds, rein; & tyii/ds, wild jig-tree ; and TJ Ko\\vpa, coarse Ei\airtvrj, feast, and compounds in -yvvos (from y\>vi], woman), (.'. g. avSpdyvv os, and Kopvvrj, club. 5. In substantives in -VTOS, whose antepenult is long, and in compound adjectives in -Scucptiros and -rpvros (from Scutpvco, rpucw), and also in sub- stantives in -i>[j.a, -vyi n and -vy ululatus ; dSa/cpuTos, without tears; 'fi>pv/j.a, -dros, seat; b\o\vy(av, ululatus, &oTpv5dv, in clusters. Exception. Map/j.apvy^t splendor. 6. In dissyllabic Oxytones in -l\ds, -I fids, -Ivds, -ids, -v\ds, -v/j.ds, , and in Paroxytones in -6/477, -vv-n, e. g. , bare ; y fads, skin ; 6 pvjj.6s, pale ; vvds, common ; 6 Xt\ds, fodder; o 'toy, dart; 6 &v/j.ds, mind; \6/j.rj, injury; o \I/jLos, hunger; 6 x^ds, juice; so, &&V/J.QS, etc.; fJ-vjnr], excuse. Exceptions. Bids (6), bow ; ir\vvds (6), washing-trough. 7. In dissyllables in -dos, -dvds (oxytoned), and in dissyllables in -to, which begin with two consonants, e. g. 6 vdds, temple ; dvds, brilliant ; crrfa, pebble ; $\ld, door-post. REM. 2. The following maybe added to dissyllables in -to: Ka\ld, shed; avta, trouble ; Kovta, dust ; and to those in -dos, the variable 7\ooy, and the proper names in -d o s, e. g. 'A/juftidpdos ; Olvd/jidos is an exception. Exceptions. Tads or rods (6), peacock; ffKid ((), shadow. 8. The following single words should also be noted : I. d. "AKpdros, unmixed; veavis, young girl ; riapa, turban ; avidpds, troublesome ; oirdo'ds, attendant ; d\dpos, clear; au&d5r?s, self-sufficient ; vlvdiri, mustard; 6 (j>\vdpos, tattle. Also the proper names, "A/jucris, "Avdiros, "Apdros, Aij^dparos, Qfdvd, Upldiros, 2opdirty (Serapis), Sru/i^dAos, QapadXos. II. r. f, exact ; ^ tvtirfi, rebuke ; Trapbevoirbr-ris, gallant. r, strong; fytbos, day-laborer; T^ rdplxos, pickled fish ; 6 rj x^^v, swallow; ' 46 ACCENTS. [ 29. Also the proper names, 'Ayxto"ns, TpdviKos, Evpiiros, Ki'ixos (tf./Odpis, Eov, to hold back; \dxp6s, cold. $ 29. Accents. 1. The written accent designates the tone -syllable, according to the original Greek pronunciation. The accented syllable was pronounced with a particular stress as well as elevation of voice. The same is true of the modern Greek. In English, too, while the stress of the accented syllable is more particu- larly prominent, there is often also an accompanying elevation of the voice, but not so much as in the modern Greek. 2. In the pronunciation of Greek prose, the accent and quan- tity were both regarded ; thus, in av^pcoTros, while the accentual stress was laid on the a, the proper quantity of the penult w was preserved. Compare analogous English words, as sunrtsing, outpouring, in which both the accent on the antepenult and the length of the penult are observed. 3. How the Greeks observed both the accent and quantity in poetry, cannot now be determined. But as it was generally sung or recited in the style of chanting, the accent was probably disregarded, as is constantly done in singing at present. 4. The Greek has the followin marks for the tone or accent (a) The acute (-' ) to denote the sharp or clear tone, e. g. Xoyos; (b) The circumflex (-) to denote the protracted' or winding tone, e. g. s, Acfybj, but Hv&panros, \6yos. The murk of the^gn^^^rasused only to distinguish certain words, e. g. rls, some one, and rts, who? and, as will be seen in 31, I, instead of the acute on the final syllable of words in connected tfscoune. KIM. 2. The accent stands upon the second vowel of diphthongs; at the beginning of words commencing with a vowel, the acute and grave stand after the breathing, but the circumflex over it, e. g. O7ro, otfAeios, &z/ e^s, ftpos, offia. But in capital letters, in connection with the diphthongs o, 77, &>, tin- accent and the breathing stand upon the first vowel, c. g/'AiSr/s. On the diaeresis, see 4, Rem. 6. KKM. 3. The grave accent differed from the acute as the weaker from the stronger accent in detrimental, or in the Latin feneratdrum, the penultimate accent in both words being much stronger than the preceding one. The circumflex accent denoted a tone like the circumflex inflection in English. REM. 4. In the United States and Great Britain, Greek is not generally pronounced by the accents, no regard being had to these so far as the pronun- ciation is concerned. In a few institutions, however, the pronunciation is regulated by the accent ; but where this is the case, the grave and circumflex accents are pronounced in the same manner as the acute. No difference is therefore made in the pronunciation of rt/x-^ and n/j.^, nor between yj/ca/j.ai and yvw/j-ats. In these and all similar cases, the Greeks must have made distinc- tions. 5. The accent can stand only on one of the last three sylla- bles of a word ; it was not any natural difficulty but merely Greek usage which prevented the accent from being placed further back than the antepenult. 6. The acute stands on one of the last three syllables, whether tliis is long or short, e. g. /caAos, avSpwrov, TroAc/xos ; but upon the antepenult, only when the last syllable is short, and is also not long by position, e. g. avSpomos, but avSpuTrov. 7. The circumflex stands only on one of the last two sylla- bles, and the syllable on which it stands must always be long by nature, e. g. TOV, o-co/xa ; but it stands upon the penult only when the ultimate is short, or long only by position, e. g. , Gen. -UKOS, KaXavpoif/, REM. 5. Also in substantives in -r and -c{ (Gen. -r/cos, -VKOS), i and v long by nature, are considered as short in respect to accentuation, e. g. o/r, Gen. -f/cos, /C7)p0|, Gen. -VKOS. 8. If, therefore, the antepenult is accented, it can have only the acute ; but if the penult is accented, and is long by nature, 48 ACCENTS. [$ 29, it must have the circumflex, when the ultimate is short, e. g. paTTc, but the acute, when the ultimate ] is long, e. g. , 7rpaTTOi ; if the penult is short it has only the acute, e. g. rarrco, rarrc. On the ultimate, either the acute or the circumflex stands, e. g. irarrip, Trarpwv; nominatives accented on the ulti- mate usually have the acute, e. g. iTnrevs 7rora//,ot, Srjp. EEM. 6. In the inflection-endings, -at and -o*, and in the adverbs, and e/c7raAcu, the diphthongs, in respect to the accent, are considered short, e. g. Tpdirefaiy rvTTTfrai, yXufftfcu, fofrpwiroi, x&jpot. The optative endings, -o t and -ai, e. g. rt/i^crat, e/cAeiTrot, AetVot, and the adverb ofycot, domi, at home, are long; on the contrary, ol/cot, houses, from olnos. EEM. 7. In the old Ionic and Attic declension, CD is considered as short in respect to accent, having only half its usual length, as it takes the place of o, e.g. MeveAews, avdtyetav ] ir&'A.ecos, Tr6\f(av ; '/Aews, &yr)p(as, Gen. tXeco, ayripoo] but if adjectives like 'l\ecas are declined according to the third Dec., they are accented regularly, e. g. QiXoy&ws, i\oy\iroS) TVR- (d) Perispomena, when the ultimate has the circumflex, e. g. KO.KUS ; (e) Properispome'na, when the penult has the circumflex, e. g. Trpay^a, i- Xovffa ] (f ) Barytones, when the ultimate is unaccented, e. g. Trpdy^ara, trpuyna. 1 Hence the accent often enables us to determine the quantity of syllables, e. g. from the acute on the antepenult of irpdjrpia, ^o^rpta, we infer that the ultimate is short, otherwise the accent could not stand further back than the penult, No. 6, above ; from the circumflex on OTTOS and 7rp5|ts, that those syllables are long by nature, 7; from the circumflex on /xo?pa and #/"* an ^ " H P a > tnat the ultimate is long, otherwise the penult of these words must be circumflexed, 8; from the acute on <$>i\os and iroi/aAos, that the penult of these words is short, otherwise they must have been circumflexed, 8. TK. 30.] CHANGE AND REMOVAL OF THE ACCENT. 49 $ 30. Change and Removal of the Accent by Inflec- tion, Composition, and Contraction. 1. When a word is changed by inflection, either in the quan- tity of its final syllable or in the number of its syllables, there is generally a change or removal of the accent. (a) By lengthening the final syllable, (a) a Proparoxytone becomes a Paroxytone, e. g. Tro (/?) a Properispomenon, a Paroxytone, e.g. (y) an Oxytone, a Perispomenon, e. g. $eos, $eoi). Yet this change is limited to particular cases. See $ 45, 7, a. (b) By shortening the final syllable, (a) a dissyllabic Paroxytone with a penult long by nature becomes a Properispomenon, e. g. evyw, , fiov- (c) By prefixing a syllable or. syllables to a word, the accent is commonly removed towards the beginning of the word, e. g. evyw, e^evyov; so also in compounds, always in verbs, com- monly in substantives and adjectives, e. g. 68os crwoSos, $cos i\ee = iXf6/ji.evos = i\ov/j.fvos fffTa6rvs = fffTwros 6p&6ovffi = op&ovvi (b) when the contracted syllable is the ultimate, it takes the acute, when the last of the syllables to be contracted had the acute ; the circumflex, when the first of the syllables was accented, e. g. co-Taw? = CO-TWS, ^x l == ^X ^ EEM. 2. The exceptions to the principles stated, will be seen below, under the contract Declensions and Conjugations. CHANGE AND REMOVAL OF THE ACCENT IN CONNECTED DISCOURSE. $31. I. Grave instead of the Acute. II. Crasis. III. Elision. IV. Anastrophe. I. In connected discourse, the Oxytones receive the mark of the grave, i. e. by the close connection of the words with each other the sharp tone is weakened or depressed, e. g. Et ^ nyrpvivj TrepiKaXXrjs 'Hepi/3oia fy. But the acute must stand before every punctuation-mark by which an actual division is made in the thought, as well as at the end of the verse, e. g. 'O //,> Kvpos tTrepao-e rov Trora/AoV, ot Be iroXc/xtot a-jrifyvyov. Exceptions. The interrogatives rts, T, quis ? who ? quid 1 what ? always remain oxytoned. REMARK 1. When an Oxytone is not closely connected with the other words, i. e. when it is treated grammatically, the acute remains, e. g. et rb ^ II Words united by Crasis ($ 10), have only the accent of the second word,' that being the more important, e. g. rdya^oV from TO aya6v. When the second word is a dissyllabic Paroxy- tone with a short final syllable, the accent, according to 30, 2, (2) (a),, is changed into the circumflex, e. g. TO ITTOS = TO^TTOS, TO, oAAa = TaXXa, TO epyov = rovpyov ; ra orrXa = $S)7rXa, eyw ot/tat = eyw/xai. $ 32.] ATONICS OR PROCLITICS. 51 III. When an unaccented vowel is elided ($ 13), the accent of the word is not changed, e. g. TOUT' l, iSe), the accent wholly disappears, and also when the accented vowel of monosyllabic words is elided, e. g. iro\\a tirc&ov = ir^AA' fira&ov irapa 2/j.ov = trap' fuou Setfct IpuTas = Stir' epwras aTrb tavrov = a' tavrov aAAa tyu = oAA' tyu ot8e yw = ouS 1 4yct> = eirr' 3\aav $ 5e 6's = i) 5' 8s. IV. Anastrophe. When a preposition follows the word which it should precede, the tone of the preposition naturally inclines back to its word, and hence the accent is removed from the ultimate to the penult ; this drawing back of the accent is called Anastrophe (avaoTpofftrj), e. g. fjuix 7 ) 5 ^ iri btU itr\ /J.dx'ns v*u>v &TTO but curb vtuv 'Ido/o/j' KOTO " /cara 'I^a/CTjj/ /caAcDj/ irepi " irepl Ka\). Other Grammarians reject the Anastrophe in both cases. In poetry, irepi is subject to Anastrophe only when it governs the Gen., but then very often, and even when the Gen. and irepi are separated by other words. See 300, (c.) HEM. 3. Prepositions, moreover, admit Anastrophe, when they are used instead of abridged forms of the verb, e. g. &va instead of avdo-frriTt ; JUC'TO, irdpa, tin, Sire, Trept, vi, instead of the indicative present of flvat, compounded with these prepositions, e. g. ba\d(r- s follows the word which it should precede, it has the accent ; this position, however, is found only among the poets, e. g. /ca/cot x), not; but at the end of a sentence and with the meaning No, it has the accent, ov (OVK). Comp. 15, Hem. 2. 33. 'VI Enclitics. Enclitics are certain words of one or two syllables, which, in connected discourse, are so closely joined, in particular cases, to the preceding word, that they either lose their tone or throw it back upon the preceding word, e. g. i)f*i, to say, in the Pres. Indie., except the second Pers. Sing., el, thou art, and Qps, ihou sayest ; (b) the following forms of the three personal pronouns in the Attic dia- lect : I. P. S. fj.ov H. P. S. a-ov ffoi III. P. S. o5 Dual, o-tpwtit PL ffQio-i (/) oT e, vlv ; (c) the indefinite pronouns, rls, ri, through all the cases and numbers, together with the abridged forms TOV and ry, and the indefinite adverbs ir&s, ird>, irtj, irou, TTO&I, iro&fv, Trot, 7TOT6 ; but the corresponding interrogative pro- nouns are always accented, e. g. T/S, rl, TTWS, etc. ; (d) the following particles in the Attic dialect, re, rot, ye, vtv, irep (and in the Epic, we, eV, j/u, fid), and the inseparable particle Se, 34, Hem. 3. REMARK. Several small words are combined with these enclitics, forming with them one word, with a meaning of its own, e. g. efre, otfre, ^ T f> #sre, &sirep, ttsns, etc. 34.] INCLINATION OF THE ACCENT. 53 9 34. Inclination of the Accent. 1. An Oxytone so unites with the following enclitic, that the accent, which is commonly grave in the middle of a sentence ($ 31, I), again becomes acute, e. g. frrjp rts for &ip rls KO\OS effriv for xaXbs lariv Kai rives " Atoi rives vora/j.6s ye " irora/j.bs *ye K0\6s Tf " K0\bs T6 ITOTO^of TlVfS " 1T07 UfAol riVfS. 2. A Perispomenon unites with the following enclitic without further change of the accent, e. g. u>s ri for ws rl tAe? rts for i\t rls KO\OV nvos REMARK 1. A Perispomenon followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, is regarded as an Oxytone. For as >s teriv, for example, are considered as one word in respect to accent, and as the circumflex cannot go further back than the penult ( 29, 7), the Perispomenon must be regarded as an Oxytone. Long syllables in enclitics are treated as short in respect to the accent ; hence olvrwotv, ZVTI- vtDv, are viewed as separate words, e. g. KO\U>V -rwi\os p.ov for l\os fiov but i\oi fyaffiv &\\os irtas " &\\os irtas >c &\Xos irore, REM. 2. It is evident that if there was an inclination of the accent when a Paroxytone was followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, the accent would stand on the fourth syllable, e. g. $l\oi-p(oTroi rives " &v&pa)iroi rives ffta/j-d effriv " ffS>/j.a effrlv. Exception. A Properispomenon, ending in | or \|/, does not admit the incli- nation of a dissyllabic enclitic, e. g. aS\o| riv6s, au\a| erj), and after the particles aAA', el, OVK, pA], us, /cat, ytteV, '6ri, irov, and the pronoun TOUT", and also at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. i'Se?v cmv (licet videre), el fffTiv, OVK er]fj.t, 3. The enclitic Pers. pronouns, o-oD, i, (rr6\-os. 2. The double consonants and t|/ are joined to the vowel preceding them ; e. g. rd^-d), Sty-os, Trpa-ts, &vrira-d/j.fvos. But is joined to the vowel following it, except when it stands after 6 or o, or after an accented vowel in the ante- penult, in which case it is joined with these vowels ; e. g. i/opi-fa, vo^i-fa, apird-^Q) ; but rpdfTf -0, v-os, yo^i^-Oyuej/, apTrd^-o/j.ev. 3. A single consonant (except in the penult) before or after the vowels a and i having the accent, and also a single consonant before or after e and o having the accent, is joined to these vowels ; e. g. ay-a&os, Tror-a/uos, /Jo-atA-ec, v-iro\- acoj', 6-Tr6r-fpo5, r/d-o^ej/, a-irop-ia, ev-SiK-ia, ITU-T ip-ia ; for a single consonant after a long vowel, etc., see 4. Exception. A single consonant preceded by o, and followed by two vowels, the first of which is e or t, is joined to the vowel after it ; e. g. (rrpa-rtd, avaffrd- (Tews, (Trpa-TiwTijs (not ffr par-id, etc.). 4. A single consonant after a long vowel, a diphthong or v, is joined to the vowel following ; e. g. cbnmj-Xd'di, ^Tj-^uepos, q>i\ y ffvvfK-Qc&vrjffis, irp6&-ea-is, d;/aj8-a7Tos fhrjros icrnv. REMARK. Besides the parts of speech above mentioned, there are certain organic sounds, called interjections ; as alas ! oh ! ah ! They express neither an idea nor the relation of an idea, and hence are not to be considered as proper words. Prepositions, conjunctions, and adverbs not derived from adjectives and substantives, are included under the common name of Particles. 4. Inflection is the variation or modification of a word in order to indicate its different relations. The inflection of the substantive, adjective, pronoun, and numeral, is termed Declen- sion ; the inflection of the verb, Conjugation. The other parts of speech do not admit inflection. 58 DIFFERENT KINDS AND GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. [$$39,4(1 CHAPTER I. The Substantive. $39. Different kinds of Substantives. 1. When a substantive ($ 38) indicates an object, which has an actual, independent existence, it is termed a Concrete substan- tive, e. g. man, woman, lion, earth, flower, host; but when the substantive indicates an action or quality, winch is only conceived of as being something actual or independent, it is called an Abstract substantive, e. g. virtue, wisdom. 2. The Concretes are, (a) Proper nouns, when they denote only single persons or things, and not a class ; as Cyrus, Plato, Hellas, Athens ; (b) Appellatives, \vhen they denote an entire class or an individual of a class ; as mortal, tree, man, woman, flower. REMARK. Appellatives are called material nouns, when they indicate the simple material, e. g. milk, dust, water, gold, coin, grain ; collective nouns, when they designate many single persons or things as one whole, e. g. mankind, cavalry, fleet ; nouns of quantity, when they denote measure or weight, e. g. a bushel, a pound. $40. Gender of Substantives. Substantives have three genders, as in Latin ; the gender is determined partly by the meaning of the substantives, and partly by their endings. The last mode will be more fully treated under the several declensions. The following general rales determine the gender of substantives by their mean- ing: 1. The names of males, of nations, winds, months, and most rivers, are masculine, e. g. 6 /JcunAevs, the king; ol "EAA^i/es, 6 TafjLf]\Lwv (January, nearly) ; 6 'AAy, -i/os, etc. ; those, in -os, Gen. -ou, e.g. Flapi'cwro's ; in -cos, -w, c. g. "AJbm the name of a person, is particularly to be observed) ; (b) feminine, -liooo in -77 (a), Gen. -rjs, e. g. Afrj/77, "1877, Ofrrj ; those in -is and -us, e. g. "AAirts, Gen. -ews, "AATrets, -ew^, Kc(pa/ij8is, -8os, "O&pvs, -uos (masculine in Lat.), ndprrjs, --TI&OS ; (c) neuter, those in -ov, e. g. AVKCUOJ/, n^Aiop. REM. 3. The gender of the names of places also is determined almost entirely by the endings ; only a few of these are feminine, properly agreeing with the fem- inine appellatives 777, x ( * > P a ^ v^ * (i- e - vtovaa xo>pa), TTOA.JS to bo supplied with them ; (a) names of cities and islands in -os, -ov, e. g. 77 Kopiv&os [v6\is], 77 'Po"5os \vTJffos], 77 ATJ\OS [j/rjo-osj (except 6 'O'/XTJO'TO'S, 'flp&nro's, & Alyta\6s, 6 Kavuiros ', usually 6 y OpxofjLfv6s y 6 'AAiopros; but generally 77 FIuAos and 77 ^EiriSavpos) ; and the following names of countries : 77 AFyuTrros, 77 Xfpp6vr)(ros, 77 y H7reipos, 77 TleAo- ; (b) names of cities in -wj/, e. g. 77 BajSvA^f, -w^os, 77 Aa/ceSat/xcwv, -o/os, civ, -Jj/os, 77 XaA^Swj/, -J^oj, 7*7 Kapx^wz/, -ovos (except 5 Qlved>i> and 6 i/, -wvos, usuully 6 Mapabdv, -uvos; but commonly ^ St/cucii/, -wi/os) ; (c) The gender of the others is determined by the endings. Hence, (a) All names of countries in -os, Gen. -ov (except those named above), are masculine, e. g. & BLOTTO/JOS, 'Io'3/io's, FIoWos, 'EAAT^STTOVTOS, Alyia\6s ; all plural names of cities in -01, Gen. -o>i/, c. g. $l\nnroi ; names of cities in -oi/s, Gen. -OUKTOS, e. g. 6 'Tfyot/s (some of these are used both as masculine and feminine, e. g. $(AoCs ; 'A/no&oOs, KeocwroOs, 'Pa/xi/ous, 2t5oGs, and ToaTre^biis, are feminine only) ; those in -as, Gen. -euros, e. g. 6 Topas; those in -cus, Gen. -&>s, e. g. 6 QavoTfvs 5 finally. 6 Mao-7js, Gen. -77705 ; (b) All names of countries of the first Dec. and those of the third, which have feminine endings, are feminine (see 66, II), e. g. 77 'EAeuo-fs, -tvos, TJ ~2.aXa.ius. 'it/as, etc. ; (c) All ill -oi', Gen. -ou; plurals in -a, Gen. -ay, and those in -os, Gen. -ow, are neuter, e. g. TO "lAzov, TO AeG:Tpo, rb "Apyos, Gen. -ous. 4. The names of persons which have only one form for the Masc. and Fem. are of common gender, e. g. 6 r) $eo's, god and goddess ; 6 17 Trats, boy and girl. REM. 4. Movable substantives are such as change their ending so as to indicate the natural gender, e. g. 6 cwnAeus, king ; rj &airr) 77 tippyy, the male fox ; or the gender may be indicated by prefixing the article, or by another adjective, e. g. 6 &PKTOS, the male bear. Some masculine names of animals have also the corresponding feminine forms, e.g. 6 AeW, a lion: ij AeWa, a lioness. See Rem. 4. Here belong, in the second place, the Masc. names of persons in the PL, which include the Fem., e. g. of yovtis, the parent* ol woTSfs, liberi, the children (sons and daughters). 60 NUMBER CASE, AND DECLENSION. FIRST DEC. [$$ 41, 42. $41. Number, Case, and Declension. 1. The Greek has three Numbers ; the Singular, denoting one person or thing ; the Plural more than one ; and the Dual, two. REMARK 1. The dual is not often used; it is found most frequently in the Attic dialect ; it does not occur in the JEolic, nor in the Hellenistic Greek. 2. The Greek has five Cases, 1 Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative, and Vocative. J^EM. 2. * The Nom. and Voc., as they represent an object as independent of any other, are called independent cases (casus recti) ; the others, as they rep- resent an object as dependent on or related to some other, are called dependent cases (casus obliqui). REM. 3. Neuter substantives and adjectives have the same form in the Nom., Ace., and Voc. of all numbers. The dual has only two case-endings ; one for the Nona., Ace., and Voc., the other for the Gen. and Dat. 3. There are in the Greek three different ways of inflecting substantives; distinguished as the First, Second, and Third Declensions. REM. 4. The three declensions may be reduced to two principal declensions, yiz. the strong and the weak. The case-endings of the strong are prominent and clearly distinguishable, while those of the weak are less distinctly marked. Words of the third Dec. belong to the strong, those of the first and second to the weak. In the third Dec. the case-endings uniformly appear pure ; in the first and second this is less so, because in these declensions the steins end in a vowel, and hence combine with the case-endings which begin with a vowel. The inflexion of both the principal declensions, in the Masc. and Fern., is as follows : Singular. Plural. Dual. Strong. Weak. Strong. Weak. Strong. Weak. Nom. 5 I II s 5 t f Gen. 05 S 03V p aiv Dat. V * V * ?> ais aiv Ace. av ov t\v (Xl/ 7JI/ as a Voc. ad 77. a 77, a. at a. REMARK 1. It will be seen from the above terminations, that the plural as well as the dual endings are the same, whatever may be the form of the singu- lar. REM. 2. The original ending of the Dat. PI. was aitri(v), as in the second Dec. oiffi(v), e.g. Sixa-uri, rolcn, Kafwrcucn, S-eoTtn, fffj-utpoiffi, aya&oifft. This form is also found in the Attic poets, and is not foreign even to prose, at least to that of Plato, especially in the second Dec. Even the Ionic form -p, e, or t (a pure), e. g. x^P a land', iSta,form; , take the ending 77 instead of o: /cJpTj, maiden; K^TJ, cheek; Stprj, neck; abdpri, water-gruel; and some proper names introduced from the Ionic dialect, e. g. 'E^vprj ; the i\ then remains through all the cases of the Sing. If any other vowel than e or i, precedes, the Nom. and all the cases of the Sing, have 77, e. g. &/COTJ, irf), ovcet^?, ^ a color; trr6a, porch; yva, field; pous, $ 44, 3). The final syllable remains circumflexed in all the Cases. HEM. 3. The first Dec. is called the a declension, as its uninflectecl forms end in o, e. g. yvtap.-r] from the uninflected yj/cfytea (comp. fj.r]s >7 yv(ap.ri p.ai ffVK-cu TOJV yvc>)fj.(av ffvK-iav rats yva>/jLais arvK-ais rcks yv(f>fj.as ffvK-as vpds Xtcuvai \zaivwv Xfaivats Xfaivas \eaivai Dual. TOD yvcapd AeaiVd crept/paw Xza.iva.iv. KEMARK 1. On the form of the article rct> instead of rd, see 241, Rem. 10. On the declension of the article ^, see 91. The 2> standing before the singu- lar and plural Voc. is a mere exclamation. HEM. 2. On the contraction of -ea into -rj, see 9, II. (a) ; in the plural and dual of the first and second declensions, however, -ea is contracted into a. Comp. 9, II. (b). Nouns in -oa are contracted as follows: N. pi/da, p.va. (mina), G. /j.vdas, p.vas, D. juraa, jtwo!, A. fj.vdav, p.vav : PL N. {JLVOI, etc. 44. II. Nouns of the Masculine Gender. 1. The Gen. of masculine nouns ends in -ou; nouns in -as retain the a in the Dat, Ace., and Voc., and those in -77? retain the r) in the Ace. and Dat. Sing. 2. The Voc. of substantives in -779 ends in a : (1) All in -rrjs, e. g. TO^OTT;?, Voc. ro^ora, 7rporfnr)s, Voc. Trpoffi- ra ; (2) all in -^s composed of a substantive and a verb, e. g. Voc. yeo^erpa, fJivpOTri'tXijs, d SCllve-selleT, Voc. fJivpo- 144.] MASCULINE NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. 63 u; (:>) national names in -17?, e. g. ITcpo^s, a Persian, Voc. rd. All other nouns in -r/s have the Voc. in 77, e. g. IIcpoT/?, s (the name of a man), Voc. Iltpo-^. 3. The remarks on contract feminine nouns ($ 43, 2), ap- ply to Masc. nouns contracted from -e'as, e. g. 'Ep/x^s, /Joppas. In /3op eas, the ea is contracted into a, and not into 77, since p }>n vcdes, $ 43, 1 (a). The doubling of the p in ySoppas is merely accidental. REMARK 1. Contrary to 43, I, compounds of /terpe'w (to measure), as yftaptrpris, end in -TJS instead of -as ; on the contrary, several proper names, etc., as ncAoirtSas and ywv&8as, a noble, end in -as instead of -175. REM. 2. Several masculine nouns in -as have the Doric Gen. in d, namely, irarpoAoias, fj.ijrpa\olas, patricide, matricide; opv&ofrfipas, fowler; also several proper names, particularly those which are Doric or foreign, e. g. "T\os, Gen. 'T\d, SKO'TTOS, -d, 'Ai/j/03as, -a, 2uAAas, -a ; (the pure Greek, and also several of the celebrated Doric names, e. g. 'Apxvras, AewWSas, Tlavo-avias (also the Boeotian 'Eira/jieivuvlias), commonly have ou;) finally, contracts in ay, e. g. Boppas, Gen. |8o/Jp"a. Paradigms. Sing. N. G. D. A. V. Citizen. 7co\trfis TTO\ITOV Mercury. ea) T)S iroKlra. Youth. veavtds vsaviov veavia veavidv Vfavid Fowler. opv&ofrfipd opvt&ofrfjpd opv&ofrfipy opvi&ofrfjpd opvi&ofrfjpd Plur. N. G. D. A. V. veaviai iro\lrais iroXlrds 'Ep/JLUtV 'Epfj.ais 'Ep/j.5.5 'Eppcu veaviais vsavids veaviai Dual. TTOXlTCUV 'Ep/JMtU veavia. vea.via.il' L REM. 3. The Ionic Genitive-ending -ecu of Masc. nouns in -TJS ( 211), is retained even in the Attic dialect in some proper names, e. g. 0a,\eo> from Qa\ns, T-npeca from TTJ/JTJS. The contract fioppas is also found in the Attic writers in the uncontracted form ; thus, fiopeas, X. An. 5. 7, 7. PI. Phaedr. 229, b. flopcou, Th. 3, 23. jSopfao, 3, 4. REM. 4. The ending 175 occurs, also, in the third Dec. To the first Dec. lirlong: (a) proper names in -/Srjs and -dSrjs, e.g. QovKiSiSys, 'ArpetSTjs (from 'Arpe and {STJS), Mi\Ttd8i)s, as well as gontile nouns, e. g. 27rapTtaT?7s ; (b) nouns in -TTJS derived from verbs, e. g. irot^TTjs from irotfu; (c) compounds consisting of a substantive and verb, or of a substantive compounded with another of the first Dec.. P. g. TraiSorpi/Jij?, &i&\ioird!>\-r)$, 64 QUANTITY AND ACCENTUATION.- FIRST DEC. [$45. $45. Quantity and Accentuation of the First Declension. a. Quantity. 1. The Nom. ending a is short in all words, which have the Gen. in -77$ [ 43, 1 (b)] ; but long in those which have the Gen, in -as, e. g. TrreAed, XP'> 7r ^ a > W* 6 '/**' A7 ?^d, aAa\d, etc. 5 the same is true of the Fern. ending of adjectives in os, e. g. &.eud-e/>d, Stitatd. Exceptions. The following classes of words have a short in the Nom. : (a) Dissyllables, and some Polysyllabic names of places in - At&pa, QaiSpa, Ko\\vpa, are exceptions. 2. The Voc. ending a is always short in nouns in -TJS ; but always long in nouns in -as, e. g. TroAtra from Tro\lrris, veavia from veavias. The quantity of Fern, nouns in -a and -d, is the same in the Voc. as in the Nom. 3. The Dual ending a is always long, e. g. Movo-d from Moutra. 4. The Ace. ending av is like the Nom., e. g. MoDcrdv, x^P aj/ from MoDcrd, 5. The ending as is always long, e. g. TOS rpairefas from rpdirefy, 6 veavlds, fovs veov/ds, TTJS otKids, ras oiKids. b. Accentuation. 6. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom., as long as the laws of accentuation permit ( 30^. Exceptions. (a) The Voc. SeVTrora from SeoTr^TTjs, lord ; (b) The Gen. PI. of the first Dec. always has the final syllable uv circum- flexed, which is caused by the contraction of the old ending duv, e. g. Xeaiv&v from \4aiva, vea.viS>v from vcavias. But the substantives, xph ff * TTJS, creditor ; av, -cuv, -ais; this holds, also, in the second Dec. ; c. g. fr*6s, -oC, -v ; on the contrary, SfkTj, Sfkcu, but SIK&V ; (c) Properispomena become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, e. g. MoCtrd, MOWTTJS ; (d) Proparoxy tones become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, e. g. $46. Second Declension. The Second Declension has two endings, os and ov ; nouns in -os are mostly masculine, but often feminine ($ 50) ; those in -ov are neuter ; except Fem. diminutive proper names in -ov> e. g. ^ rXvKe/otoi/ ($ 40). Endings. Singular. Plural. Dual. Nom. OS OV ot a (a Gen. ov T&J/ Xoy-ov Island. God. VT}ffOS vr\ffov TOV Messenger. 6 &yye\os ayyf\ov ayy&y &yye\ov Fig. T& 0~VKOV TOV ffVKOV T(f (TVKtf Tb (TVKOV & ffVKOV ol \6y-oi al vijffoi ol &eot TOIV Xoy-cav TO>V TO"IS X6y-ois TCUS TovsX6y-ovs TOS vhcrovs TOVS freovs & \6y-oi & vriffoi & &eol ayye\ois ayyfXovs ret TU3V ffVKWV TOIS (TVKOIS T^I (rC/co & ffVKO, I). T(i) X6y-U TO VT](T(t) Tolv X6y-oiv TCUV vf)o~oti TCt> ffVKCO TOIV ffVKOlV. REM. 3. The yoc. of words in -os commonly ends in e, though often in -os, e. g. & i\os ; always &eo's in classic Greek. $47. Contraction of the Second Declension. 1. A small number of substantives, with o or e before the case-ending, are contracted in the Attic dialect ($ 9). Paradigms. Navigation. Circumnavigation. Bone S. N. 6 ir\6os TT\OVS 6 irepiir\oos irepiirXovs rb OCTTfOV OffTOVV G. ir\6ov ir\ou TTfpnr\6ov irepiirXov 00~TfOV OffTOV D. TT\6a} 7TA.W TTfplTT\6(a ireptvrAw 6o~Tca OffT(f A. TrXoov TT\OVV irepiirXoov irtpiirXovv OffTtOV OffTOVV y. Tr\6e ir\ov TreplirXoe ireptirXov OffTfOV OffTOVV P. N. TT\60L irXo'i TrfpiirXooi n-fpltrXoi otrrea OffTO. G. ir\6(av TT\caj/ TrepiirXoow TTfpiirX&j/ otrreajj/ OffTWV D. TT\6oiS ir\ois irtpnrX6ois irfp'nrXois 6o~T(OlS OQ-TOIS A. TT\6oVS TT\OVS irepnr\6ovs irep'nrXovs 6o~T(a OffTO. y. ir\6oi TrAo? irep'nrXooi Trep'nrXoi 0(TTa OffTO. D. ir\6ca Tr\6 TrepnrX6ci) TTepiTrAw offTfca bffT ir\6oiv irXolv ntpiirXooiv irepiirXotv OffTfOlV OffTOlV Only the following nouns besides the above are contracted in this manner : o v6os, vovSy the in hid ; 6 p6os, povs, a stream ; o frpovs, noise ; 6 xvovs, down ; 6 aSeA- ^tSovs, a nephew; 6 frvyaTpiSovs, grandson; 6 ave^/tdSovs, son of a sister's child. REMARK. Uncontracted forms sometimes occur even in the Attic dialect though seldom in substantives, c. g. row, Plato, Prot. 344. a; much oftener in adjectives, particularly r.?uteix in -oa, as TO a'oa, (Tfp6irXoa. On the contrac- tion of ea a 1 tlu- I'l. spe 9. II. (!>) I, 49.] Till: ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. 67 $ 48. The Attic Second Declension. Several substantives and adjectives have the cmlinirs o>s- (Muse, and Fern.) and an/ (Neut), instead of 05 and oi/; they retain the w through all the Cases instead of the common Bowels :uid diphthongs of the second Dec. and subscribe t under or oi; thus, ov and a become w ; os, ov, and ovs become ws, cov, and us ; oi, ots, and ow become w, a>9, and wv; w, w, and a>v remain unchanged. The Voc. is the same as the Nom Paradigms. Sing. N. G. D. A. V. rinr. N. G. D. A. V. D. N. A. V. G. and D. People. 6 Ac-ws Table. 77 KaA-cos Hare. \ay-cas Hall. avuyf- avuryc- Ae-cfo Aecj Ae-oJy Ae-cSs Ac-p \ay-y \ay-wv \ay-6s Xay-y Aay-cDi/ \ay-(fs avcaye-c \ay-cf \ay-), and commonly rj ews, the dawn ; T] aAcor, a threshing-floor ; fj Ke'cos, }] Kws, 6 "ASus, fj Tews, and the adjectives &yyp(as, not old ; tiriir\f cos, full; virepxpeias, guilty. ]\KM. 2. This Declension is termed Attic, because, if a word of this class has another form, e. g. Aews and \a6s, vews and va6s, Meve'Aecos and Mej/eAdos, the Attic writers are accustomed to select the form in -ews; though, in the best Attic writers, the non-Attic forms also may be found. On the interchange of the long vowel in this Declension, see 16, 5. 49. Accentuation of Second Declension. 1. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the quan- tity of the final syllable permits ; the Voc. SSeA^e from a5f\6s, brother, is an exception. 2. The change of accent is the same as in the first Dec. ( 45, 7); in the Gen. PL, however, only oxytones, e.g. &e, instead of TTAW, O ; (b) compounds and polysyllabic proper names, which retain the accent even on the penult, when it would regularly stand as a cir- cumflex on the contracted syllable, e. g. TrepiTrAo'-ou = ire plir A ov (instead of TreptTrAoD), from TrepiVAoos = Trepiir\ovs ; Ueip&A-ov = Ueipi&ov (instead of C), from Tleipfooos Ufipi&ovs ; also adjectives, e. g. evv6-ov = ftfvov (not v), from e#z/oos = etfj/ovs ; yet the accent is never removed to the antepenult ; thus, TrepforAoi, not WpnrAoi ; KcucoVoi, not /cctaoi/oi; (c) T& icdveov, basket, takes the circumflex on the ultimate, in the contract forms ; hence KO.VCOV = KO.VOVV (instead of KO.VOVV) ; (d) words in -Serfs = Sows denoting kindred, have the cir- cumflex instead of the acute on the ultimate, e. g. aSeA^Seo's = oScA^iSoCs, nephew (instead of a8e\os, a small stone ; ri ^dfi/j-os, sand ; rj enroSos, ashes ; v) jutAros, red earth; TJ KpvffraXXos, crystal (6 /cpiWaAAos, ice) ; 97 f3d(ravos, a touch- stone; }) tf\KTpos, electmm; TJ (r/j.dpay$os, a smaragdus ; TJ /SwAos, a clod; fiyinf/os, gypsum; j) vaXos, glass; -f] riravos, chalk; j) &pyi\os, clay ; TJ TTA^OS, brick; rj & a b x > ^ trope's, a coffin; y Xi)i/6s, a wine-press; TJ \fiKvfros, an oil-flask ; ^ Kaftlvos, an oven ; f) (jxapta^s, a chest ; y irueAos, tub ; (d) Such as express the idea of a way, e. g. ^ 6$6s, a road; y a./j.a^tr6s (sc. 6Srfs), a carriage-road ; TJ -rplpos and rj &Tpa.iros, afoot-path; y rd(ppos, a ditch; (e) Many of the above substantives were originally adjectives, and hence appear as feminine-nouns, because the substantives with which they properly agree are feminine. There are also many others, e. g. TJ aij\eios (sc. THIRD DECLENSION. 69 Ktntse-door ; 77 jireipos (sc. 77)), the mainland] f) HvvSpos (sc. 77)), thirsty land, desert , f) vtos (sc. -x&pa),a fallow field; % KTJO-OS (from i/6?i/, sc. 77)), an island; 77 t>td\cic- ros (sc. (pwrfi), a dialect; 77 (rvyKATjros (sc. /3ouA7^), senate; j) pdp&iros (sc. Av/>a), >'; Sidjuerpos (sc. 7pa/i;uVj), diameter; 77 (more seldom d) &caro; (sc. vaCs), Uxrt; 77 &(fAos (sc. of/cfa), round building, etc.; (f ) Several feminine nouns which stand alone, and hence specially to be c. g. f) i/6ffos, sickness ; 77 yvfaos, jaw-bone ; 77 8p6 I/ 01V Dat. 1 p $ I p-f)TOp-05 ^ (atSJtr-os) cu5o-os ; (c) The third class includes words, which in the Nom. have the stem pure, since the stem neither assumes the gender-sign s, nor lengthens its final vowel, e. g. (instead of frfip-s) .. f ( " " ewwy-s) pj J atwv-os ( " " ^paxr-s) ^ 1 (^pco(r-os) T^pw-os 5a/iap ( " " Sa^uopr-s, Sa^iapr) ^ Sdfj.apr-os. 3. Neuters exhibit the pure stem in the Nom. ; still, euphony does not permit a word to end in T ($ 25, 5). Hence, in this case, the T is either wholly rejected (as in the Masc. XeW, Gen. Xeovros), or is changed into the corresponding o- ($ 25, 5), e. g. . . f ireirepi . . f rJ> TreVept > f ireirfpi-os or e-oy S J treAos g J ri) (Te\as c J (creAacr-os) treAa-os ^ 1 (T (trocar) crcD/ua ^ ] ffdafj-ar-os ^ rcpar "* [ rb (repar) repas [ repar-os. REMARK. The stem iri)/> is lengthened in the Nom., contrary to the rule : rb irup, Gen. irvp-Js. $ 53. B. The remaining Cases. 1. The remaining Cases (with a few exceptions, which will be specially treated), are formed by appending the endings to the stem, e. g. Stem KopaK Nom. /c<$pa| Gen. /c^pa/c-os PI. Nom. KJpctK-es. 2. In forming the Dat. PL by appending the syllable o-t to stems ending in a consonant, the same changes take place as have already been noticed in regard to the Nom. of similar words [$ 52, 2 (a)], e. g. <|>Ae)3-cri = (p\ffyi K6paK-fft = /cJpo|t \a/J.irdS-(ri = \afnrdffi yiyavr-ffi = yiydfft o86iT-(Ti = oSovffi f3dF-fft = fiovcrl. The following points also are to be noted : 3. (a) The Ace. Sing, has the form in -v with masculines and $53.) THIRD DECLENSION. 71 fi'ininines in -is, -vs, -aus, and -ovs, whose stems end in -, -v, -at, ami -ov; e. g. Stem TTO\I Nom. 7rJxXc\l/, pv&-a) Kopvb ic6pvs n6pvv (poet. K6pvSt-a) Xaptr x&P 1 * X"P l v (poet. X dpir-a). In prose there are but few exceptions, e. g. rfpy&a, X. H. 3. 1, 15, and else- where (instead of Tcpyiv) from ?j Tcpyis, xapn-o (instead of x-P tv )^ *b. 3. 5, 16; in constant use rptiroSa, tripod. (X. An. 7. 3, 27, rair/5a is to be read instead of TcfTrjSo.) The goddess x*P 15 nas x*P tra * ne Ace.; still, in Luc. Deor. d. 15, 1 and 2, REMARK 1. Oxy tones of one or more syllables have only the regular form in -a, e. g. (iroS) irovs, Ace. iro5-a; (e'toriS) f\irls, Ace. ^Airt8-a; (x^a(j.vS) x^ a ~ fivs, Ace. x^-o^^S-o. The monosyllable K\tis, Gen. K\iS-6s, contrary to the rule, usually has the Ace. /cAcH/, instead of /cAcXS-o. 4. The Voc. is like the stem, e. g. Satfuav, Gen. &u//,oi/-o5, Voc. Balfiov. Still, euphony does not always allow the stem-form to appear. Hence the following points should be noted : (1) The Voc. is like the stem in the following cases : (a) When the final vowels of the stem, e and o, in the Nom. are lengthened into rj and w, the short stem-vowel reappears in the Voc., e. g. Gen. Salfiov-os Voc. Saifiov yepovr-os ytpov (instead of ytpovr) ~2,wKpa.Tf-os (instead of , which, in the Voc., take again the short stem- vowel e, but with the accent drawn back, thus : TrdYep, &/ep, Saep. According to this analogy, even 'Hpa/cA( 617)77* (stem 'Hpa/cAees) is shortened in the Voc. by the later writers, into "H/ro^Aes. (b) Adjectives in -as, Gen. -aVos, and also adjectives (not participles, see Rem. 5), whose stems end in -vr y have in the Voc. a form like the neuter (or the stem) ; Tras and its com- pounds are exceptions, e. g. Gen. air-os Neut. and Voc. /ie'Aai/ fin-os x a p' iev (instead of xapievr, 52, 3). So substantives in -as, Gen. -avros, have the Voc. in -oV (instead of -air), 52, 3, e. g. ytyas Gen. avr-os Voc. yiyav (instead of ytyavr) KoAx" s avr-os Kd\x atf Aids avr-os Atav. REM. 2. Some substantives of this class, with the T reject also the v, but as a compensation lengthen the short a, e. g. "Ar Ads, Gen. -wr-os, Voc. "ArAet, rioAuSa/ids, Voc. IIoAuSci^d. (c) Substantives in -is, -vs, -avs, -evs, and -ovs, whose stems end in -t, -v, -av, -eu, and -ov, have the Voc. like the stem, the s of the Nom. being rejected, e. g. fj.dvris Voc. (j.dvTi ; irpeV^us Voc. Trpefffiv ; /uOs Voc. /iS ; (rus Voc. (ri5; A/y Voc. At; 7paOs Voc. ypav ; fiaffitevs Voc. /8a(7tAeG ; )3oOs Voc. )8oO. The word TraTs, Gen. TTO opvis, icopvs, irofc. Still, some substantives in -is, Gen. -tvos, have the Voc. like the stem, e. g. 3 SeA^/v (also SeA^fc), from 8eAt'a Gen. -Ivos. (d) The Voc. is like the stem in all words, which in the Nom have their stem pure, e. g. #r?p, atw, etc.; but 'A-TroXXwv (Gen. -a>vos), IlocmSon/ (-Svos) and o-w-nfc (-%>os) are exceptions, the Vocatives being w "ATroAAov, IloVetSoi/, O-WTC/O, with the accent drawn back. $.11.] THIRD DECLENSION. 73 (.') The Voc. is not like the stem, but like the Nom., in most won Is \\ hose steins end in one of the consonants which cannot stand as the final letter ($ 25, 5), because after the stem-consonant, frequently it could not be de- trrmiiu'd from the Voc. what the true stem was; e. g. from eru'/j, Gen. o-apK-os, the Voc. would be o-ap (instead of trap*) ; from 6 9, Gen. (instead of G- fat-os (instead of r)x6s alS6-os ( " " alS6(T-os) alSot ( " HEM. 5. The Voc. of all participles is like the Nom., e. g. 2> rinrrcav, TCTU- ^>ws, TUI//OS, ru^tyj', 5et/cyus. "Apx See ^ 52, 2 (a). (c) The stem ends in a Tau-mute S, T, KT, ^, v$. See 4 52, 2 (a). On the Ace. see $ 53, 3 (b). The stems of the Neuter, belonging to this class, end in r and KT (70X0*7-), but, according to 25, 5, reject the T and KT; thus : ffSipa instead of /T-ey oSovr-cs b6vr-a, -a/cos, raven; 6 \dpvy, -vyyos, throat; 6, rj opvls, -Ibos, bird; 6 &va^ -OKTOS, king; y eA/itvy, -iv&os, tape-worm; 6 8e\^)ts, -/os, dolphin ; 6yiyas, -WTOS, giant, etc. REMARK 1. The stem of nouns in -^ and -| commonly ends in the smooth v and K ; the stem of those in -7! ends in -77, except 6, rj \vy, Gen. \vyn-6s, lynx (but?) Atry|, Gen. \vyy-6s, hiccough). Instead of fyapvyyos from -f) see 21, 3. HEM. 2. The word ^ aAs, Gen. aA-Js, signifying sea, and in the Fern, gender, is only poetic, and the Sing. 6 a\s, signifying salt, is only Ionic and poetic ; elsewhere, only ol aAes, salt, occurs (PI. Symp. 177, b. Lys. 209, e). HEM. 3. To class (c) belong also the contracts in -TJIS, Gen. -ri'tSos = -?fr, -ySos, e. g. 77 Trapys, cheek, iraprjSos. EEM. 4. The stem of rb oSy, ear, is O>T, thus : Gen. u-r6s, Dat. art, PL 5ra, ^TOJJ/, axri(j'). The word rJ repay, according to the rule of the ancient gram- marians, usually admits contraction in the plural, among the Attic writers, after the T is dropped: repa, rcp&v (but X. C. 1. 4, 15. PL Phil. 14, e. Hipp. 300, e. Tfpa.ro.) ; rb yepas, reward of honor ; T& yrjpccs, old age; rb /cpeas, flesh, and rit Kfpas, horn, reject T in all the Numbers, and then suffer contraction in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., and throughout the Dual and Plural (except the Dat. PL) ; yet Kfpas, besides these forms, has the regular form with T ; Thucyd. uses the contracted forms ; the uncontracted /ce'para occurs only in 5, 71. Kepcas is uni- formly employed in the phrase M Kepus, in column. When the a, contracted from aa, is used by the poets as short, it must be considered a case of elision, not of contraction ; the same is true also of Neuters in -ay, -aos, -oy, -eoy, e. g. (fr. ovceVay) instead of tr/ceVd, /cAe'-; (fr. /cAeoy) instead of /cAe'a. 55.] THIRD DECLENSION. 75 Sing. N. G. D. rb Tfpas, wonder. Tfpar-os rfyar-i rb Kepas, horn. rb Kptas, flesh. Kt paT-os and Ktpws (Kpta-os) Kpeus Ktpar-i and Kfpq. (/cp'o-i') /cpwi Plur. N. G. D. Tfpar-a and rtpa Tfpdr-uv and T*p>v repa-. For the omission of v, and vr, before ), fi*/5pas, etc. Sing. N. G. D. A. V. Plur. N. G. D. A. V. Dual. 6, Shepherd. 6, Lion. TTOlfJi-flV \WV iroi/j.eu-o s JTOlfifV-l iroi/jLfv-a Aeoir-o i, Orator. p-fjrwp p-trrop-os pyrop-i p-firop-a prjrop a, Father. Trar-fjp ira.Tp-6s TTdTp-t irartp-a irorep , Daughter. TroijueVes \4ovr-es (v) Ae'ouff i(v) iroi/j.fv-as \eovr-as irot/ieV-es Aeovr-es p-ffTOp-fS p-flT6p- hand, belongs to nouns of class No. 2, and differs from them only in not lengthening the 6 of the stem (x*p) into 77, but into et, e. g. x fi P instead of x*P s 5 it; is irregular in retaining the ei in inflection, thus : %>, X 6t P etc -> except in the Dat. PL and the Gen. and Dat. Dual x f P ff ' l ( v }-> X e P^- ^ et m P oetrv tne short as well as the long form is used in all the Cases, as the necessities of the verse require, e. g. x ei P^ s an( * X e P^ s > KEM. 2. The following nouns in -wv, Gen. -ovoy, reject the v in particular Cases, and suffer contraction : r) et/ccfo', image, et/coVos, etKoVt, etKoVa, et/coVas, etc., together with the Ionic and poetic forms : Gen. et/fovs, Ace. et/c^, Ace. PL et/couy (the irregular accent is to be noted in ewci and tlitovs) ; r) ctojWi', nightingale, Gen. dTjStWs and O7j5o0y, Dat. 07780*; T\ xcXiScS?, swallow. Gen. x*'5(Ws, Dat. EEM. 3. To class No. 2, belongs the obsolete Nom. 6, rj 'APH'N, lamb; the Nom. of this is supplied by 6 fj apvAs, Gen. apv6s, Dat. dpj'/, Ace. &pva, PI. Nom. itpi/es, Gen. tyv&v, Dat. d/>/a(rt(i'), Ace. &pvas ; farther, the word 6 do-r^p, -epoy, stor, though not syncopated like ira-Hjp, etc. belongs to this class on account of the assumed a in the Dat. PL affrpav-a 0.1&V 6, Xenophon. 6, Wild beast, -rb, Nectar. &TJP VfKTap drjp-oi veKTap-os &T]p-l VfKTO.p-1, &r)p-a veKrap (&TJ/) VfKTap ira.ia.v-fs iraicLv-wv iraia-(n(v} ira.ia.v-as ira.ia.v-fs frrjp-es al(a-ffi(v} Kfvo(pu-(Ti(v) ai&v-as * "S,Vofy5ivT-a.s aiuv-es brjp-es VfKTap-a vfKTap-a iraiav-e ira.i&v-oiv auav-oiv ZevcxpcaVT-e vfKTap-e VfKTap-OlV. $57.] THIRD DECLENSION. 77 REMARK 1. The three words in -uv, Gen. -wi/os: 'AWAAcwj/, AO>J>, threshing-floor, drop v in the Ace. Sing., and suffer contraction; thus, ('AWAAwva, 'ATrjAAwa) 'ATrjAAw, FIoo-eiScD, oAo> (on aAw, comp. 48, Rem. 1, on Ku/ced>, 213, 11). Also the Ace. 7Afo> from 77 7A^x" or &XT)X>V, penny- royal, Gen. -wj/os, is found in Aristophanes. REM. 2. All the Neuters belonging to this class end in -p (op, op, cop, vp), e. g. TO vfKTapj i)rop, ireAwp, rrvp (Gen. irvpts). The word TO cap, spring, may also be contracted, e. g. ^p, Gen. ^poy. B. WORDS WHICH HAVE A VOWEL BEFORE THE ENDING -os IN THE GEN. 57. I. W^ords in -cv9, -avs, -ovs. 1. Tlie stem of substantives in -ev's, -aus, -01)9, ends in v (from the Digamma F) ; s is the gender- sign. On the omission of v between vowels, see $ 25, 2. 2. Substantives in -ev9 have -cd in the Ace. Sing., and -019 in the Ace. PL, from fFa, Fa Ev/?oev9, the end- ings -co>9, -ewv, -e'd, -ed9 are also contracted into -9, -oiv, -a, -9. Nouns in -av9 and -ov 3. 7, 6. rovs Paaite'is, 3. 9, 10. and elsewhere, but more seldom among the other Attic prose writers. The Ace. vieis is regular in all the Attic writers. REM. 2. The following are declined like x fvs ' n/>ojei5s, Gen. Tleipcucos, Ace. Heipaia, 6 ayvievs, altar before the door, Gen. ayvias, Ace. ayvta, Ace. PI. ayvias, and several proper names, e. g. 'Eperpius, Sreiptws, MrjAm, EvjSowy, Eu;8oa, Eu/Joas, n\arcuas, Aupias ; yet the uncontracted forms are often found in proper names, e. g. eoTi-teW, cameos, Sretpteo, nA.arouea>p, 'Eperpifwv, Aa?pteW, Tleipcuewv (in Thu., X., PI., Dem.). The uncontracted forms are regular in a\ievs, fisherman, oAte'ws, oAtea, oAteoy, HEM. 3. The Nom. PL of POVS and ypavs are always uncontracted in good Attic writers : Bdes, ypaes ; on the contrary, in the Ace. only the contract forms ypavs and vavs occur ; the Ace. PI. ftovs is the common form ; &6as occurs only very seldom. REM. 4. Only 6 xous, a measure, a mound, and ^ f>ovs, vinegar-tree, are de- clined like POVS ; but in the PL both without contraction ; only ^ vavs (v&Fs, navis), is declined like ypavs ; still, this noun is quite irregular; see 68. $58. II Words in -775, -cs (Gen. -cos); -ws (Gen. -wos), -ws and -o> (Gen. -oos^; -as (Gen. -aos), -os (Gen. -cos). The stem of words of this class ends in s. On the omission of a; see $ 25, 1. In the Dat.PL, a o- is omitted. $ 59. (1) TFbre?s in -rjs and -es. 1. The endings -rjs and -cs belong only to adjectives (the ending -T/S is Masc. and Fern., the ending -es neuter), and to proper names, terminating like adjectives, in -^av^s, -yeVtys, -Kpa-njs, -ft^Srjs, -TTCI^S, -o-^ev^s, -reA^s, -KT/^S, -dv$r)f-s) (ravels (eTs /cpaT7j 2wKpares (TlcpiK\f-'i) (Ilept/cA.e-a) (UfptK\ffi) cd (Poet, also REMARK 1. On the contraction in the Dual of ce into 77 (not into et), and in the Ace. PI. of -fas into -eis, see 9, II. When a vowel precedes the endings -TJS, -cs, then -ea in proper names in -K\f)s is always contracted into -d, and commonly also in adjectives ( 9, II.), e.g. riept/cAe'e-a = rie/ji/s (stem atSos), shame. 7i 7ix<*> (stem ^x os )> echo. G. (al86-os) atSous (r/^J-os) rixovs D. (ai'SJ-t) at'So? (f^YO'-i') 7?X^ A. (aiSo-a) aiSw (riY^-a) 7)X^ V. (ai'So-i) aiSo?. (W-0 to*. $ 61. (3) Words in -a?, Gen. -aos, and in -os, Gen. -cos. (a) -as, Gen. -aos. Only the Neuters TO o-c'Xa?, light, and TO SeVas, goblet, belong to this class : Gen. creAa-os, Dat. creA-a-t, and o-eA-a ; PI. creAa-a and creA-a., Gen. creAa-cov, Dat. o-Aa-crt(i/) ; Dual creAa-e, treAa-oo'. REMARK 1. On the poetic shortening of the contract a, see 54, Rem. 4. In the following four Neuters in -as, the a in the Gen., Dat., and in the PL, is changed, according to Ionic usage, into the weaker e, viz. $62.; THIRD DECLENSION. 81 Pptras (poet.), image, Gen. Pptrcos, PI. /Jpe'rea and KWO.S (poet.), place, PI. in Homer, *wea, KW? Attic. (b) -os, Gen. -eos. All substantives of this class are also neuter. In the Nom., e, the stem-vowel of the last syllable, is changed into o (16, 1). Sg.N.A. G. D. rb ytvos (instead of Y^Ves), genus (yevf-os) yevovs (yece-*) y ft/ft rb K\fos ( instead of K\e5), glory. (K\-OS) K\*OVS (*cA.ee-i) K\eei Plur. N. G. D. (ytff-a) yfvf-wv and y4vf-ffi(v] & (/cAee-o) K\6-ffl(v) K\fS>V Dual. |?l) y4vr) ysvoiv (/cAce'-oo/) K\OIV. REM. 2. On the contraction of into 77 (instead of et), and of eo into a (instead of r;), when a vowel precedes, see 9, II. On the poetic shortening of the contracted d in K\ea, see $ 54, Hem. 4. HEM. 3. The uncontracted form of the Gen. PI. is not unusual, e. g. opeW, )8eA.eW, /cepSeW, and almost without exception cu/deW; in PI. Polit. 260, a., the uncontracted Dual in 6 occurs : TOUTW TW yeVee. In the lyric portions of the Attic tragedians, irc&ea, ox^a, etc. occur. III. WORDS IN -is, ~vs, -t, -u. $ 62. (1) TFords iw -Is, -vs. Tlie substantives in -Is, -vs originally ended in -tJs, -vjFs. See $ 25, 2. Sing. N. 6 K?S, corn-worm. rj ffvs, SOW. 6 ix&fc, fish. G. K~i-6s ffv-6s iX&v-os D. Ki-i 994 iX&v-'i A. KlV ffvy ly&fif, V. Kl (TV i x M Plur. N. kt-fS ffv-ts lX&>-fS G. Kl-S>V ffv->v IV&V-QW D. Ki-ffi(v) , in which the o> has no influence on the accent (comp. $ 29, Hem. 7). In the Dat. Sing, and in the Nom. and Ace. PI., contraction occurs. Sing.'N. G. D. A. V. city. & irriX^t cubit, rb is, serpent ; TJ Tri'), e. g. ^5uy, ytieos. HEM. 2. In the Attic poets, though probably only in the lyric passages, the Gen. in -eos, from substantives in -d|, breastplate, -OKOS ; 6 pfy, reed, ptircfs ; 7? CLKrtsy ray, -Tvos, but r? ^i\a|, clod, -a/cos, 77 t\irts, hope, -fSos. See fuller explanations in Larger Grammar, Part I. 291. $65. Accentuation of the Third Declension. 1. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the laws of accentuation ( 30) permit, e. g. rb irpaypa, deed, vpdyimaros (but vpayndruv), rJ> ovopa., name, ovopuros (but ovo^a.rv, -wrros, -wires, -uvruv. Particular exceptions have been noticed in the Paradigms. 2. Monosyllables are accented in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers on the final syllable ; the long syllable tav and oiv having the circumflex ; the others, the acute, e. g. 6 \L-I\V, n-t\v6s, wvi, firjvoiv, fj.T}vS>v, fj.rj(ri(v). Exceptions: (a) The following ten substantives are Paroxytones in the Gen. PI. and Gen. and Dat. Dual : 7? Say, torch ; & Sfjuas, slave ; 6 y bcas, jackal ; rb KPA2, poet. (Gen. Kparts), head; rb ols (Gen. wr6s), ear; o 77 iraTs, child; 6 o-fis, moth; o 77 Tpcis, Trojan, Trojan woman; 7? cps (Gen. >s (Gen. faros), light; e. g. Sa'Swi/, SaSow, &wa>j/, Kpdrtav, &TIDV, &TOIV, vaiSwi', iraiSoiv, (Tc'eov, Tpuuv, <^>wSw^, v (on the contrary, TU>V SfjLcauu from al 8/nwa/, ruy Tpwuv from of Tpwaf, TU>V Qwruv from o ( 60), the irregular accentuation of the Ace. Sing, of Tjx^ a = VX^ (instead of f/x^)? should be noted. 5. (a) In the Voc. of syncopated substantives ( 55, 2) in -rjp, the accent, contrary to the principal rule, is drawn back as far as possible, e. g. ^uyarep, A^/iTjrep, avep; so also (a) in the folloAving substantives; ' (coj/os), noj/, Gen. -ovos, whether simple or compound ; also in comparatives in -tcai/, - and /, 5 and rb KaAAioj/ ; (the following are exceptions : 5 Aa/ceSa^o*/ from ', compounds in -(ppwv, e. g. & AvKotppov from Avicdfppuv, Ev&6(ppoi' from , S> and rb Satypov from Sa't^pcov;) (c) in the compound Paroxytones in -rjs, mentioned in 59, e. g. Sco/cpares, Ayj/xoV&ei/es ; 3 and rb o^oSes from av&d- Srjs, i&T]s (but ctATj&e's from aATj^Tjs as a simple), atfrap/ces, ac^7}^s. (Adjectives and substantives in -WTJS, -o>S7js, -wA^s, -wp^s, -?prjs, are exceptions, e. g. evcadrjs, eud)5es, ajiKpwTjs a/j.(f)caS, Travy ; -TJS, Gen. (--oy) -ovs ; -us, Gen. -ca-os ; (B) the following with exceptions : (a) in -qy, Gen. -qvos ; but 6 r) x*V> goose; in -rjv, Gen. -ej>-os ; but 6 rj gland, and 77 !/, Gen. -w^-oy; but 77 oAwj/, threshing-Jloor ; 77 &\r)X MV or penny-royal ; 77 /teAeS^v (poet.), care; 77 ^KUV, poppy ; 77 TrAaTerytSi', rattfe (but i TT\. petal of the poppy) ; 77 rpfyuv, pigeon; 77 ouAti*' (poet., but prose 6), ravine; 77 6 /cciSwj' 6e//; (c) in Tjp, Gen. -77/>-oy ; but 77 icfip t fate (on account of 77 icfip, goddess of fate) ; 6 77 fratffT-fip, hammer; (those in -77? contracted from -cap, are neuter: T^ KTJP (poet.), Gen. Kijpos, heart; rb tap, Gen. 7^>oy, spring;) in ijp, Gen. -pos ; but 77 yaar-np, yaffrpds, belly ; in -rjp, Gen. -ep-oy ; but 6 ij a&fjp, ether; 6 i) ajp, air; (d) in -tip, Gen. -tip-os; but r} x e ^P Aanc? (regularly, 6 avrixeip, the thumb) ; (e) in -up, Gen. -wp-os ; but rb e'Awp (poet.), booty; rb irt\o>p (poet.), monster; (f ) in -oi/y, Gen. -o~os, see 57, Rem. 4; (g) in -us, Gen. -wr-os; but rb ^>wy, light; (h) in -//, Gen. -iroy, -;8oy. II. Feminines: (A) a// nouns in -as, Gen. -o5-os; -eiy, Gen. -etS-oy (only 7^ KAei's, Ar^) ; -auy, Gen. -o-os; -ti/y, Gen. -iy^-oy ; -vvs, Gen. -uv^-oy ; -77y, Gen. -77T-oy; -jy, Gen. -ir-oy (only 77 x^P 15 ) 5 " w > Gen. -uS-oy and -t/&-oy; -is, serpent; 6 (later also 77) fx ts > viper; 6 (later 7^) K6pis, bug ; of and at xvpfieis, laic-tables; in -is, Gen. -5-os; but 6 ee ^/ ^ XP^ vs t a sea ~ fish ; in -us, Gen. -eo>$ 5 but 6 ireAefcus, axe ; 6 TTT/^VS, cubit ; (c) in -ay, Gen. -ov-os ; but 6 O'K/XOJJ', anvil; 6 irptiav, saw; 6 KO.V&V, rule; 6 /, axle ; 6 fffiffuv. earthen-vessel ; 6 fTriffelwv, fiag ; 6 f) Kt, doll ; 6 ^uup/iTjSccj/, anfs nest ; 6 f) a\Krpvci>v, cock and hen. KEMARK 1. Nouns in - are partly masculine, partly feminine, except those in -o (Gen. -a/cos), which are masculine ; most of those in -| are feminine-, the larger part of those in -ty are masculine, but many are feminine, e. g. 77 KoA.au- po\J/, -OTTOS, shepherd's crook; % \cu\afy, tempest; f] oty (vox), OTTO'S, voice; 77 (rai'ely 6) dty, ayir6s,face; 77 $\fy, . This formation is called Metaplasm (transformation), and the substan- tives included under it, Metaplasts. The Nom. form, presupposed in this case, is called the Theme. $68.] ANOMALOUS FORMS OF THIRD DEC. 87 $ 68. Anomalous Forms of the Third Dcclenion. 1. Tow (TO, knee), and 86pv (TO, spear), see $ 54 (c). In the tragic poets, the Epic forms, yovva.ro. and yovva, yowcuri, occur ; also in the Attic poets, the Gen. Sopo's, Dat. Sop/, and even S6pei, and PI. So pi) instead of Sopara, are formed from So'pi/; and in the phrase, Sopl 4A6?i', to take a prisoner of war, this Dat. form is retained even by the Attic prose writers. 2. PVVTJ (fj, woman), Gen. ywatK-os (as if from yvv A CC - p(oo, Ace. PI. x^, as if from xoofc. The latter forms are preferred by the Attic writers ; Xov9, with the meaning of mound, is inflected only like /3ov9. The form ^oev9 is Ionic, Dat. xo. 19. Xpw9 (6, skin), ^pwr-09, x/wmj xP^ TCt< Collateral forms in the Ionic dialect and the Attic poets, are, Gen. xpo-6w is found in certain phrases with ev, e. g. ev xp ^ en - XP" 5 tne ^ at - an d D ua l are wanting ; ovap and virap (only as Nom. and Ace.), in dreaming and waking ; ov. (b) of different genders (hence called heterogeneous), e. g. 6 vSiros and TO vGrrov, back (the last form was regarded by the Atticists as the only proper form, still TOJ/ vurov Xen. R. Equ. 3, 3) ; & iry6s and rb vy6v, yoke. In the PI. the neuter form of these heterogeneous nouns is more frequently used, e. g. 6 u ; 6 trrofywfe, a station, balance, of x^P> space; r) 6x^n an d Xx&oSt rising ground ; TJ Stv^o and TO 8tyos, thirst; 77 J/OTTTJ (the older form) and TO J/OTTOS, iW/ey, etc. It should be observed further, that the word 6 irpfo-ftvs, elder, has only Ace. trptcrfivv, Voc. irpffffiv; these three forms are almost entirely poetic (irpefffivTfpos and irpffffivTaros formed from this, are in frequent use) ; in the Common Language, 6 trpf. (b) The proper names mentioned, 59, Rem. 2, have t\ as well as rjv in the Ace. Sing. only. B. Of the Second and Third Declensions. (a) Of the Common second and third declensions : several substantives in -os, as masculine, are inflected according to the second Dec., but as neuter, according to the third Dec., e. g. 6 and TO o^os, chariot, TOV o^ov and o^ovs, rov o\ov and TO o^os ; 6 and TO O-KOTOS, darkness. (b) Of the contract second and third declensions : itp6xs (^, watering-pot], Att. irp6xovs, Gen. irp6x<>v t etc., Dat. PL irp6xovs, laughter^ y4\oyros, yeAwTi, Ace. y\(ora and 76\w>/, and the three following: Trdrpus, patruus, /j.-f)rp and Mfi/wos, Dat. Mfrot, Ace. M/J/W ( 48, Rem. 1), Mivwv and Mivua. $72. III. Metaplasts. Metaplasts [^ 67 (c)] like Heteroclites, have two modes of formation ; they are either of the third declension, which have been already presented together (68), or of two different declen- sions. Those of different declensions are, e. g. as follows : (a) Of the Common second and third declensions : AeVSpoj/ (rb, tree), Gen. SeVSpou, etc.; but in the Dat. PI. among the Attic writers, SeVSpeo-i (from the stem rb AENAPO2) and 8eVS/>ois; the first form is regarded by the Atticists as the better. To this stem belong, also, the forms T$ Se'pfyet and T& SeVS/j??, which occur in the Attic poets, and in later prose writers. Ko t/a> v 6s (6, partaker), Gen. KOIVWVOV, etc.; Xenophon uses the forms 01 Koivwvts and rovs Koivuvas (from KOINilN). $ 73.] INDECLINABLE AND DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 91 Kplvov (rb, lily) Gen. Kpivov, etc., with the secondary form in the Dat. PI. Kplvto-i in Aristoph. from the PL Kplvea (in Herod.). Comp. StvSpov. A os (6, stone), Gen. Aooy and in Soph. O. C. 196. Aefoy. 'O ovtipos [and poetic rb ovfipov], dream, Gen. bveipov and oveipwros. Uvp (rb,Jlre), vvpts. But PL, rk wpd, watch-fires, according to the second Dec. "fi6s (6, son), Gen. vlov, etc. Together with this formation, there is another according to the third Dec., much in use, particularly in the Attic writers, from the theme 'TIET2, Gen. vleos, Dat. vUT (Ace. vtia is rejected) ; PL t/ie?s, Gen. vicW, Dat. w'eVi, Ace. (vtc'ov), Attic vkTs ($ 57, Rem. 1); Dual, wee, Gen. vUoiv. (b) Of the Attic second and third declensions : The three substantives, ^ oAws, threshing-floor ; 6 rcu&s, peacock; and & rvws, whirlwind, have, together with the common inflection according to the Attic second declension, another according to the third declension, in -wvos, etc., e. g. REMARK. The words 77 &\s in the Ace., 48, Rem. 1. But the forms a\wvos, tfAwi'w, &\u necessity, destiny, and be^is with forty and e?i/cu, and several foreign words, e. g. rb, rov, r$ (d) The substantive infinitives, e. g. rb, rov, ri 2. Some substantives are used only in the Sing., or only in the PL Such words may be termed defective in number. The reason of it is found, either in the meaning of the word, or simply in usage, e. g. 6 alfrfip, ether ; ol trijo-tcu, the Etesian ivind ; ad 'A&TJI/CU, Athens ; ra 'O\u/tiro, the Olympic games. Comp. further, Syntax, 243. 3. It has been already noted, $ 69, that some substantives are found only in single Cases (Defectiva casu). 92 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. [$$ 74, 75. CHAPTER H. The Adjective and Participle. $ 74. Gender and Declension of the Adjective and Participle. 1. The Adjective and the Participle, like the Substantive, have three genders, being varied by inflection to agree with the gender of then* substantive. But all adjectives have not separate forms for the three genders ; many have but two endings, one for the Masc. and Fern., the other for the Neuter, e. g. 6 o-axfrpwv avrjp, r} a a> p o> v vy a 5 avijp, rj (frvyas K a p' lfv 'i /neAas, jUeAotva, /ieAow ; re'peti/a, repev ; jSapus, apeTa, fiapv ; /3ouA.eu/T&)J/ > X a P ttffffwjf /ieAay, /xe \atva, fj.4\aif " pcXdvuv, p. e \ a i v a> v iray, iroo'a, irav " IT&VTUV, IT a a a v -?0*O, -4lf TV^fVTUV, T V & t 0" W V , Tu\|/do"a, rvfyav rvfydiruv, Tvi^affuv} but, y -tin), -LVOV " a vb p i\6- TCKVOS (from renvov), irdyKeucos (from c/coy). But if the last part is formed of a verb, then adjectives with a long penult, are Oxytones, e. g. ifwXoirojiMro'y, (j.f\os, nourishing wild beists ; fripoTpotyos, nourished by wild be ids. Words compounded with prepositions, a privative and intensive, eu and 94 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. [$ 76. Svs, and det, ayav, apt, apri, epi, 77/ti, a, irav, and iroAv, are always Pro- paroxytones, and hence exceptions to the rule respecting words with a short penult, '(b) Verbal adjectives in -r6s remain Oxytones, even in compounds, if they have three endings, but are Proparoxytones, if they have but two. See 78, I. (c). (c) All compounds in -TTA^|, -f>c(>|, -rpd>^, -o-^o|, are Oxytones. SUMMARY OF THE ADJECTIVE AND PARTICIPLE ENDINGS. $76. I. Adjectives and Participles of three Endings. L -os, -T|, -ov: Nom. 070^05, Gen. aya&ov, aya&r)s, aya&ov Nom. ifySoos, 075^77, oySoov, eighth, Gen. PL 6yS6uv, 6y86wv t oyS6(ay ( 75, 4.) Gen. PL ypcupofjievwv, ypa ^X^P 01/ ) hostile, Gen. fx&P 9 **} Nom. c&poos, Gen. a&p6ov, Gen. PL a& P 6uv, Most of the adjectives belong to this class. The Fern, ends in o, when pre- ceded by i or p, 43, 1. Still, adjectives in -oos have -6a in the Fern., when p precedes o, otherwise, -^77, e. g. abp6a, yet 075^77. On the accentuation of adjectives in -os, -77 (d), -ov, see 75. Adjectives in -eos, -efl, -eoi/, which denote the material, e. g. xpvffeos, golden ; apyvpeos, silver ; Kfpa/j.eos, earthen ; and multiplicative adjectives in -6 o s, -6 77, -6 o v, e. g. air\6os, single ; $nr\6os, double, are contracted. On the accentuation of those in -eos, -eo, -eoj/, see 75, 3, and on the contraction of those in -* into -a, -077 into -77, and -6a into -a, see 9, II. Xpvff-eos, tpe-eos, ^/je-ed, epe-ovs, 4pe-a, apyvp-eos, apyvp-ea, apyvp-eov apyvp-ovs, apyvp-a, apyvp-ovv Snr\-6ov 8nr\-ovy. REMARK 1. Contraction is seldom omitted in Attic classic prose, not unfre- quently in the Tragedians, e. g. xpvvea, Xen. Ag. 5, 5 ; yet a&p6os, -6d, -6ov, crowded, is rarely found contracted; S IK poos, -6 a, -6ov, two-pronged, is com- monly contracted in the Masc. and Neut., SiKpovs, StKpovv, but in the Fern, the uncontracted form is usual, 77 Smp6a ; 6 y S o o s is always uncontracted. II. -vs, -el a, -v: Nom. y\vKvs, yXviceta, y\vKv, sweet, Gen. y \vKfos, y\vKeias, y \vitfos Gen, PL ^Xu/ceW, y\vKsiuv, y\vKtav ( 75, 4.) 7G.] ADJECTIVES AND PAKTU'irLES OF THREE ENDINGS. 95 w The declension of the Mase. is like- irTixus. though with the common genitives in -'os, -W; the declension of the Neat, is like &TTIA yet always uiicuntrarti-d in the I'l. (-o). The only deviations from the regular accentuation are, /J/xuruy, Vfjilfffia* ^i/niffv. half; &7jAus, &^Aem, &r)\v, female ; irp( PI. Menon. 83, c. in the best MSS. III. -i)s, -Sera, -vv'. Nom. SeiKvvs, SfiKvvcra, SeiKvvv, showing, Gen. 8efKjWos, SfiKvvatis, SfiKvvvros Gen. PI. SfiKvvvrwv, $eiKvvv, SeiKi/vmotv ( 75,4.) Nom. us, ^>C(ra, $i>v y produced, Gen. ipvtnos, ^utrrjs, tpvmos [ 65, 2 (c).] Gen. PI. fyvvrwv, tyvviav, So the Pres. and second Aor. Act. participles of verbs in -/i*. For the de- clension of the Masc. and Neut., see 54 (d). IV. - i s, -e lovely, Gen. Gen. PL For the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see 54 (d), the only difference being that the Dat. PL ends in -eaj', Xenfyavrotv. So the first Aor. Act. Part., and also the Pres. and second Aor. Act. Part, of : terras, -acra, -dV ; ffrds, -ai/, StSoua-wi', Thus only the Part. Pres. and the second Aor. Act. (Sots, Sovffa, Ufa, Gen. , Sovffrjs, Gen. PL Fern. Sovj>, commonly ^KWI/, S/couo-o, S/cov. For the declension, see 54 (d). XII. -uv, -ov, -e, and -6ffa, -uv Nom. i\jv, -ovffa, -ovy Gen. TI/J.WVTOS, -CCOTJS, -r&VTOS Gen. PL ^)l\OVVTiaV, -OVff&V, -O&VTWV. Gen. PL n^vruv, -cacrciiv, -cavrwv. Nom. iu(T&S>Vy -ovffa, -ovv Gen. PL nicr&ovi/Tcav, -ovffcav, -OVVTWV. The Fut. Act. Part, of Liquid verbs is declined like tyiX&v, ^tAoucra, Qi\oVv, Gen. i\ovvros, etc., e. g. ffirepwv, -ovaa, -ovv (formed from (nrepewv, etc.), from >, to sow. XIII. -6s -via -6s: Nora. reruns, Teru^uTa, TfTV6s, having struck, Gen. reTvOTs and -6s, etc., see below, 193, Rem. 2 and 3. U7.J ADJECTIVES. PARADIGMS. 97 XIV. The adjective-:, neyas, pe y cA.i?, pcya, t/rit. iro\Js, i iroXu, Hindi, are irregular in the. Num.. A in tlie Attic poets; Ac>ch. S. 824, uses the Voc. /ueyaAe; irpaos, TrpoeTa, irpaoi', so/fc, is also irregular; it has, throughout the Fern., in the PI. and Dual Neut., as also in the Gen. PL Masc., and sometimes, also, in the other Cases of the Masc. PL, a form like irpavs, -e?a, -5 (comp. y\vicvs t -em, -u), which occurs in the Dialects. See the Paradigm. 77. Paradigms. S.N. G. D. A. V. ayc&-6s a-yo&-oD ayc&-f dyo^-rj aya^-ri aya^-fj ayab-6v, good l\i aya&-(p -os irpaov Trpacav irpaov paos(e) Trpaela irpaov TrpaeTa irpaov, soft TrpaeicLS trpdov P. X. G. D. A. V. y\vKf?ai y\vKfiuiv y\vKiais y\vKeids y\vKfa yXvKtcav y\victws rervcpvia TeTV /j-eya /J.eyaXri peya, great /j.eyaXov p.eya ueya 7TO\A.Ot TTOXXo'lS TTOXXOVS TTOXXOL TroXXai iroXXG>v iroXXats iroXXds TroXXai TTO\\6lS IJ.eydXwv fjLeydXois ueyaXois ueyaXoi fj.eya.Xa fj.fydXoa' $78.] ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 99 p.t\av, Hack /ufAdvos /j.(\avi fj.t\aiva irav, all ircrr) iraaav ircuTa. iravri 1TU.V ruffai ij.tha.ivuv iraffi irdvras irdvres itdffais Trdffas iraffcu iraffi Trdvra irdvTO. irdvrc irdvroiv Trdara irdfrcuv irdvre irdirroiv. as (rrdvra. trras v ( 76, XII.) $78. II. Adjectives of two Endings. Adjectives in -05 of two endings are declined like dyo.9o?, except that they have no separate form for the feminine, the same form being used for the masculine and feminine. 100 ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. [$ 78. I. -QSj -ov'-, 6 7) &\oyos, rb &Xoyov, irrational. To this class belong, (a) A few simple adjectives without particular derivative endings, e. g. 6 % fidpfiapos, not Greek ; Acj8pos, vehement ; tf/nepos, gentle ; \oiSopos, calumniating ; mild; x*P ffos i unfruitful; ^(rv^os, silent; Sa.ira.vos, extravagant; (b) Most simple adjectives with the derivative-endings -tos and -etos, and i/uos, e. g. 6 ?; J/is, Thu. 5, 110. Svse/j.po\(!>TaTos T? Ao/cpis, Id. 3, 110. II. -ovs, -ovVj & TJ ffoovs, rb ftivovi/, benevolent. Adjectives with these endings are, (a) Those compounded with the contracted substantives vovs and ir\ovs, and hence in the Masc. and Fern, are declined like these, but in the Neuter like bffTovv ( 47), yet the Neuter PL in -oa does not admit contraction, consequently TO ftvoa. On the accentuation, see 49, 3. HEM. 2. -Attic writers sometimes omit the contraction in the PL, e. g. KUKO- . Cy. 8. 2, 1. K pv^iv6ovs X. Ag. 11, 5. Svsvooi X. H. 2. 1, 2. (b) Such as are compounded with the substantive irovs, e. g. 6 rj iroXvirovs, rb Tro\vTrovv, and are inflected like it, but in the Ace. Sing., even as OiSiirovs [ 71, B. (b)], are partly of the contract second Dec. and partly of the third, e. g. Gen. TroXinroSos and iro\virov ; Ace. TroAuTroSo and iroXvirouv, etc. HEM. 3. In several adjectives of this kind, e. g. &TTOVS, fipafivirovs, Sfaovs, avnrT6irovs, the inflection does not follow the second Dec. III. -w s, -(a v ; 6 TI tXcws, rb 'l\fuv, compassionate. Adjectives of these endings are like the Attic second Dec. ( 48). HEM. 4. The Ace. commonly ends in -oav, but in a number of compound words, it ends in -w ( 48, Rem. 1), e. g. a|t($xp>, avdir\ew, &yr]pca (in r&&pect to the accentuation, see 29, Rem. 7), REM. 5. There are three endings to the simple adjective: n\ews, irXea, Tr\fcai/,fuU : Gen. TrAew, TrXeas, TrAew, PL TrXew, TrAe'ai, ir\4a ; the compounds are either of two endings, e. g. 6 r; dmTrAews, rb avdirtew, PL ol of e/c7rAew (linreis eKTfXew X. Cy. 6. 2, 7. e/CTrAeo> rpdirefai X. Hier. 1, 18), TO KTT\v, this word forms only the Ace. Sing, ffuv, like the Attic second Dec. ; it has also the Ace. oi/. The form cu, N. trwo, rarely i\6yf\cas t rb i\6yf\(o and i\oyf\(irros ; fiovicfpws, Gen. fiovKepu and fiovKfpwros, so fiiKfpws. The adjective Svsfptas follows the third Dec. only, e. g. tivstparros, etc. Forms like the Common second Dec. originate from forms of the Attic second Dec., e. g. , rfjKepoi, &Kfpa. On the accentuation, see 29, Rem. 7. IV. -o> v 5 -o v ; N. d 77 ts, nourished. In addition to the form in -LOS, these adjectives have another in -iSos, but more rare, and only- poetic, e. g. ffipiSa, (b) N. 6 fi fi>x a P ts > T0 G. TOV rrjs TOV ev^dptros. Here belong the compounds of x^P 15 ) Tr&rpiSi eATrty, , one-toothed, G. TOV T7JS TOV p,Ov68otTOS. So the remaining compounds of oSovs. For the Dec., see 54 (d). 79. Paradigms. S. N. G. D. A. V. 8'nrovs StVoSa and SlTTOW 8/1TOW StVow 8/irouv P.N. G. D. A. V. SiiroSes SiVoSay SiTTO(Tl ej/8o| StVoSa SiVoSa SiTToSa Dual. evSol-oiv. StVoSc PARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES. 103 S.N. G. D. A. V. (t)Tr\(o-os)ovs ffcr\ou doubtful i'Aews P.N. G. D. A. V. eforAot (vir\oa Dual. S.N. G. D. A. V. fvSal/j.ovos fvSa (v5a.lfj.ova P.N. G. D. A. V. evUalfJioves petrous fvciaiuoi'as evSaifJiova, evSaiuoves like the Nominative. like the Nominative. Dual. S.N. G. D. A. V. vyies vyi(e-os)ovs P.N. G. D. A. V. e-as es aA7)^( e'-a)r} like the Nominative. vyts: 6 ij fipiro|, Gen. -070*, rapacious. 6 77 ^\i, " -IKOS, equal. 6 r) /j.uvv, ' '^X ** one-hoofed. XII. -J>, Gen. -ir o s : i T) otyitafr, Gen. -nros, foV/A. XIII. Such as end in an unchanged substantive, e. g. &TTCUS, childless ; fMKpo- X'P> long-handed; aur<$xP done with one's own hand; /uwcpatac, long-lived; uaKpavxyv, long-necked ; \f6Kcunris, having a white shield. The declension of such adjectives is like that of the substantives, e. g. (Mutpavxevos. On the compounds of wovs, however, comp. 78, II. (b). 81. Comparison of Adjectives. 1. The quality expressed by an adjective may belong to an object in different degrees : (a) When the quality belongs to one object in a higher degree than to another, the form is called the Comparative, e. g. Plato was MORE LEARNED than Xenophon. (b) When the quality in the highest degree belongs to an object, the form is called the Superlative, e. g. Plato was the MOST LEARNED of the disciples of Socrates. (c) The form of the adjective which expresses its simple meaning without any comparison, is called the Positive, e. g. Plato was LEARNED. 2. Only the adjective and adverb are susceptible of com- parison ; the participle does not admit it, except in a few rare cases, where the participle has the meaning of an adjective, e. g. eppcofjuevos, -ea-repos, -ecrraro?. 3. The Greek has two classes of terminations for the Comparative and Superlative. The first, and much the most common, is -repo9, -re pa, -repov, for the Compara- tive, and -TO, TO 9, -Tar 77, -TCLTOV, for the Superlative; the second is -((,~)a)v, -(l)ov, or -wv, -oi>, for the Comparative, and - (i) 0-T09, - (I) o-rrj, - (t) CTTOV, for the Superlative. The i is the union-vowel. 4. The first class of terminations is appended to the stem of the adjective by the connecting syllables o (&>), at,, 9, ^9; hence the general rule< In most adjectives, the usual end- ings are appended to the stem by means of the connecting syllable. 106 ADJECTIVES. - FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. [82, REMARK. Instead of the single forms of the Comparative and Superlative, the Greek, like the Latin, can prefix /uaAAov (magis) and fj.d\iffra (maxime) to the Positive. This periphrasis is necessary in all adjectives, which, for the sake of euphony, have no Comparative form. $ 82. A. First Form of Comparison. Comparative, -repos, *Tp a, -repov; Superlative, -rare?, -Tar 77, -rarov. These endings are appended to the stem of the adjective ; the stem is found by rejecting os in the Nom. of the second Dec., and the same syllable in the Gen. of the third Dec. I. Adjectives in -os, -rj (-a), -ov. (a) Most adjectives of this class annex the above endings to the stem by means of the union -vowel o or o>; the union -vowel is o, when a syllable long by nature or by position ($ 27, 3), pre- cedes, but Tpa, Id. Ph. 1367. (b) Contracts in -cos = -ovs and -005 = -ov? are contracted also it the forms of Comparison ; the first contract e and o> the union- vowel into to ; the last assume the union- syllable es and contract in with the preceding o, e. g. iropQvp-eos = tropfyvp-ovs a.Tr\-6os = air\-ovs vop(pvp-e-repo5 a.ir\o-4ff-'repos = airX-ovs-repos iroptyvp-furaTos = iropcpvp-ta-raros aTrAo-eV-Toros = air\-ov X. 0. 10, 11. (c) The following adjectives in -atos: ycpatos, old; 09, ancient; Trepatos, on the other side; o-xoAatos, at leisure, assume -rep 09 and -raros without a union-vowel, e. g. yepat-os, Com. 7epai-Tepoy, Sup. ycpal-Taros, iraA.at-05, " va\ai-repos, ' iraAcu-Taroy. REM. 3. Ila\ai6s and o-xoXatoy have also the usual forms of Compari- son; ira\ai6'T(pos, ffxo\ai6Tcpos, so also yepaifafpos, Antiph. 4, p. 125, 6. (d) The following adjectives in -09: ev8io9, calm; -^ quiet; 18109, peculiar; 10-09, equal; /AC 0-09, middle; op$pco9, early ; o/ao9, foe; 7rapa7rX^o-to9, similar ; and 7rpuuo9, w& ^e morning, assume the union-syllable at, the Comparative and Superlative thus becoming like the preceding words in -0x109, e.g. peff-os, Com. pcff-ai-rfpos, Sup. Jf5i-oy, " REM. 4. Sometimes also the common form is found, e. g. Tiffvx&ra-Tos ; i\a>Tfpos, i\(t>Taros are the usual forms in the Attic writers. Here belong also the adverbial forms irpcaiairepov, irpcoiaiTcra, from irpdtos ; thus in Plato 5 likewise irputrfpov and irpiaiTara ; thus always, as it seems, in Thu. (Popp. ad 7, 19, 1), also in Xen. Anab. 3. 4, 1. vpatTepov according to the best MSS. (on the contrary irpwtaiTara, Cy. 8. 8, 9). The adjective l\os has three forms: i\tt>Tpos seldom (e. g. Xen. C. 3. 11, 18.), and i\os. In addition to these three forms, also the Superlative i\iuv) is found in Attic poetry. REM. 5. The two adjectives, jusVoy, middle, and vtos, young, have a special Superlative form, /leVoroy, vearos] but this is in use only when a series of objects is to be made prominent, /teVoroy denoting the very middle of the series, and vearos the last or most remote, whereas /j.e/xev- 108 ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. [$82. eV-repos, eppw/xev-ecr-TaTOS, d/cpar-ecr-repos, d/cpaT-eV-raros. So also cuSotos has ai8oi-e'o--TaTos in the superlative. HEM. 6. Further, the adjectives, &os, rich; iei/-ef}Ai{, Gen. &(f>-f)\iK-os, growing old, fipiro|, Gen. fynrery-os, rapax, Com. &rj\i/c-T7\j/c-V-TaToy, Sup. apTray-lff-raros. (4) Adjectives in -i?, -ev, whose stem ends in vr, append the Comparison-endings directly to the stem, the last T being changed into y Gen. x a P^ J ^"- y > pleasant. Com. xa/>ff<7-Tfpos Sup. xapUa-rceros. (5) The compounds of ^apts assume w, e. g. s, Gen. ^vixdpir-os, pleasant. Com. eirixapiT-u-Tfpos, Sup. lirixapiT W-TOTOS. in Homer, comes from axaplr-rtpos ; comp. No. (4). $ 83. B. Second Form of Comparison. Comparative. -iW, Neut. -Zov, or - Att. (jSeATaroy, Poet.) KpdrtffTos (0epTpos, Poet.) , Att. , (pfpiffTOS, Poet.) Adv. aAytaj' jua/cporepoy (fiaxrcruv, Poet.) /tto/cporaTosr Positive. Comparative. 1. oryadxfa, gwc?, a^fl^uv, Neut. 2. Ko/e, especially when it is used adverbially ; irAcoi/os and ir\elovos, irAeovt and irAefov*, Ace. irA'o>, irAeova, and TrAeta, are used indiscriminately; PI. Nom. and Ace., usually TAefous, also ir\f loves and ir\ftovas (but not v\4ovs) ; ir\du is much more frequent than irAe'w ; trKfi6vwv and ir\eto, etc., retain the ending -u> regularly in the Comparative, and almost uniformly in the Superlative, e. g. &VW, above, Com. avcarepw Sup. avwrdrta K, ravra liroLTjaa', (a) /, thou, he, she, it; (b) my^ thy, his ; (c) here, there, thus. I. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. A. Substantive Personal Pronouns. $ 87. The simple eyw, ego, o-v, tu, ov, sui. Singular. Nom. tye, Acc. (Poet.), themboth G.D. vyv, of us both, to us fftyyv, of you both, aiea (ea), them. 10* 114 THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS e/xavTov, oreavTov, eaurov. [$ REMARK 1. The forms susceptible of inclination are put in a parenthesis, without any mark of accent. Comp. 33 (b), and 35, 3. On the accentuation and use of the third Pers. of the Pronoun, see 302, Rem. 3. The Vocative is here, as in the following pai'adigms, omitted, because, when it occurs, it is always like the Nominative. REM. 2. The Gen, Sing, of these three pronouns, in imitation of Homer, often has, among the Attic poets, also the forms ^e&ep, las, them. Both forms, o-i and crfyiv, though seldom, are used by the poets as the Dat. Sing. ; the form e, on the contrary, is used much more frequently as the Ace. Sing, instead of avr6v, -f)v, -6, also as reflexive instead of eavr6v. (b) The Reflexive Pronouns, e/xavrov, a-eavrov, eauro v . Singular. G. f/mvrov, -TJS, of ffeavrov, -TJS, or eavrov, -TJS, or myself ffavrov, -r}s, of thyself avrov, -775, of himself, of herself D. fyavrcp, -fj, to fftavrip, fj, or eavrip, -fj, or [itself A. myself */j.avr6v, -T]V, ffavrcf, 77, to thyself (reavr6v, --f]v, or avrif, -77, to himself, to herself, to eavrov, -fo, -6, or [itself myself ffavrov, -f)v, thyself avrov, -i\v, -6, himself, herself, Plural. G. fl/j.jv avrcav, of v/j.>v avruv, of your- eavrcav or avrcav, or ourselves selves ff$S>v avroav, of themselves D. J)/MV avrois, -ais, vfuv avrois, -cus, to eai/ToTs -ais, or avrois -cus, or to ourselves yourselves o-tylffiv avrois -ais, to themselves A. Tj/JLas avrovs, -ds, vp.a.s avrovs, -ds, eavrovs, -ds, -d, or avrovs, -ds, ourselves yourselves -d, or o~<(>as avrovs, -ds, o~. 90. B. Adjective Personal Pronouns. Personal pronouns, having the form of adjectives, are called Possessive pronouns, since they express possession. They are formed from the Genitive of substantive personal pronouns : , -repet, -repov, noster, -tra, -trum, ^uos, "fj, -6v, meus, -a, -wm, from /JLOV ; from TJ/J.WV ; ff6s, -$, -6v, tuus, -a, -urn, from G. D. rolv raiv roiv rovroiv ravraiv rovroiv avrolv avratv avro'it/. 1. The pronoun ouros is composed of the article 6, 77, r6, and the pronoun auro's; where the article has o, , or ot, they combine with the first syllable of avrds and make ov; all other vowels of the article are absorbed by the 116 RELATIVE PRONOUN. [$92. first syllable of euros. Hence the first syllable of euros ends in ov where the article has o, &>, or ot ; elsewhere in ov. The same rule holds when euros is compounded with an adjective pronoun, e. g. roerouros (from roffos and euro's). Examples : 6 euro's = ouros, T) avr-f) = eurrj, r"b euro* = rovro ; rou avrov = rourou, r?is avr"f]s = reurTjs, etc. ; so roffos euro's = roo"ouros, roff-rj avr-f) = roff- OUTTJ, roVoi/ euro" = roffovro, rdVou avrov = roffovrov, etc. 2. Like 6, 7), r6 is declined, #8e, 7}5e, r^Se, rouSe, TTjsSe, PI. oVoV, ynvi IrriMl fyvriva '6 rt oTsri, e. g. Th. 8, 24. X. Cy. 1. 6, 26. Vect. 4, 32. LENGTHENING OF THE PRONOUN. 119 (1>) Adverbial Correlatives. 1 Interrogative. Indefinite. Demonstrative. Relative. Indirect Intcrrog. liroD; where? \ ubi '. ||y<&y; whence? un.le '. F[ *<>?, u-hither? I quo? TTOV, somewhere, alicubi iro&eV, from some place, alicunde irof, to some place, aliqno wanting (hie, ibi) wanting (hinc, inde) wanting (eo) o5, where, ubi o&fv, whence, unde of, whither, quo OTTOU, where. ubi <57T<&>, whence.undc $iroi,whither, quo [1 in$T6 ; tchen 1 quando ? 1 inivlKa. ; quo temporis punc- to? quota ho- 1 n't < iroT, some time, aliquando wanting Tore, then, turn ryvi- ] hoc ic68e 1 ipso Tt\vi- \ tcm- Kavra J pore ore, when. quum TjviKa, when. quo ipso temporc 6ir6r, when, quando biri)viKa, when, quo ipso tern- pore 1 1 TttS ; AOU.' ? 1 10} ; whither ? \ how? iT(t>s, some how irf), to some place, thither, in some way OUTO>($) O>5, SO TTjSe ( hither, Tavry \ or here us, how 77, where, whither OTTOJS, how OTTTTJ. where, whither. REM. 2. The forms to express the idea of here, there (hie, ibi), wanting in the Common language, are supplied by fvrav&a, &/&a5e, and the idea of hence, thence (hinc, inde), by ly&cVSc, trrevbev; fv&a and frbev in the old and poetic Ian linage have both a demonstrative and relative sense, but in prose only a relative sense, except in certain phrases, e. g. Zv&a /j.(v frSa 5e, hie, illic, y Kal fvbtv, hinc, illinc, and when the signification of place is changed to that of time, e. g. cv&o \eyfi, then he says, fr&ev, thereupon. The forms TCS, thus, ;, hither, here, are poetic ; &s (instead of ovrcas), is also for the most part poetic ; in prose, it is confined almost wholly to certain phrases, e.g. /col &s, vel sic. ouy (/X7j5') 5$, ne sic quidem, and in comparisons, us &s, ut sic, PL Rp. 7. 530, d. Prot. 326, d. ; also &s olv, so then, Th. 3, 37. $ 95. Lengthening of the Pronoun. Some small words are so appended to the pronouns, for the purpose of giving a particular turn to their signification, that they coalesce and form one word. They are the following : (a) The enclitic 7* is joined to the Personal pronouns of the first and second person, in order to make the person emphatic, by putting him in contrast with others, e. g. eyorye, I for my part. The pronoun e'-yw then draws back its accent in the Nom. and Dat. e.g. *yu 76, fytoirye, epoiyf, f/J.(yc, crirye. As ye can be joined with any other word, so also with any other pronoun, but it does not form one word with the pronoun, e. g. oln6s 76. (b) The particles 8Vj (most commonly S^TTOTC), and o3i>, are appended to relatives compounded of interrogative* "or indefinites, as well as to 8iros$TiiroT(. quantuscunque ; 6in]\iKosovy, hoiccver great, v how old sofvcr : so also wsTrepouv [comp. (d)]. 120 NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. [$ 96. (c) The suffix 5e is joined with some demonstratives for the purpose of strengthening their demonstrative relation, e. g. oSe, ^8e, r6Se ; rot6sSe ; To e - g irevraxo.) irei/ra^f), TrevTaxeDy. (e) Proportionals, wlu'ch denote & proportion, and answer the question, /tow many times more ? All are compounded with the endings -7rA#o-io9, -id, -iov (more seldom -7rAao-tW, -ov, e. g. CKCXTOV- Ta7rXao"t(ov, -ov) I StTrAcunos, twice as much (as another which is taken as an unit), rpnr\darios (3), TTpcnr\d/t/3' = 1842, p f = 100, ,p = 100,000. 98. Principal Classes of Numerals. Cardinals. Ordinals. la' efs, via, tv vpwros, -r}, -ov, primus, -a, -um 2/3' 860 Sfvrepos, -a, -ov 3y> rpflsy rpta rplros, -rj, -ov 48' TfTTapes, -a, or Teovapes, -a rerapros, -17, -ov 5e' jreVre Tre^iTTToy, -j, -ov Gr' k 6/CTOS, -77, -OV U' Irnf e'jSSonos, -77, -ov 87,' OKT& oySoos, -rj, -ov 9&' tvvia. VOTOS, -7, -OV 10 i' Se/ca Se/coros, -77, -ov lla' ; j/8eKa fj/SfKaros, -77, -ov 12 iff M8a SwSeKaTos, -77, -ov 13 iy' rpe?s (rpfa) Kal Se/ca 1 rpiros, -77, -ov /col Se/coros, -77- -ov 3 14*8' T6Trapes(a) /cal Sc/ca* rfrapros, -77, -ov /cal Se/faros, -77, -ov 15 ie' ire^re/cafSeKa JTe/JLTTTOS, -77, -OV Kttt SfKaTOS, -1}, -OV 16 is- 7 (KKCLlSeKO. CKTOS, -77, -ov /cal Se/caros, -77, -ov 17 if eirraKaiSfKa &$OfJ.OS, -77, -OV Kai 86/fOTOS, -77, -0V 18 IT?' OKTcw/caiSe/ca #78005, -77, -ov Kal Se'/caros, -77, -ov 19 i&' IncNucattcica evaros, -77, -ov ical Se/caros, -77, -ov 20 K' cf:o(n(j') 6t/COO-TOS, -7J, -Jv 1 The rare Attic form rpisKaiSfita is indeclinable. * The non- Attic form reffffapaicalSfKa, is indeclinable. 3 The forms given from the 13th to the 19th are preferable to etc. NUMERALS. 123 21 Kaf 30 A.' 40 p! 50 i/ 60 ' 70 o' 80 V 90 5' 100 p' 200 1 fiiro|, once 3 rpls 4 rerpa/cty 6 7 8 9 10 Sex a/cis Cardinals. ffKoo'iv els, /i^ Tptd/covra TfTTOp&KOVTO, irevT'fjKOVTa 6V ffiSo/JLTJKOVTa. oySorjKovra -at, -a , -at, -a at, -at, -a -at, -a -at, -a eTrraKdatot, -at, -a o/frd/cdo-tot, -at, -a Sisxi\ioi, -at, -a Tpt$x*'A-'0' -at, -a TTpOKlSX^ iol i ~ CU > " a t, -at, -a -at, -a [, -at, -a i, -at, -a SfKOKiSfivptoi, -at, -a eKOTOj/TOKts/tuptot, -at, -a Sta/coo'iaKtSjU.upiOi, -at, -a Ordinals. TCTTOpCUCOO'Tjs, -7J, -< irfVTT)KOO'T6s, -4\) -6v e^a/coo'To's, -T^, -ov TptdffOO-tOO-T^S, -7^, -0V Terpa/coo-too-To's, -/;, -o*! f'vva.Koo'ioo'Tds, -Vj, , -^j, -o'v , -17, -0V , \ -6v SeKaJdSfj.vpioo'ToSj -4\, -ov r, -7^, -oV 12 owoW/ct; Numeral Adverbs 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 fiKOffaKis oiro| 22 fiKoa-aKis Sis 30 TPIOKOVTO.KIS 40 50 60 70 80 07807; Kovrei/cty 90 ^vfVT]KOvra.Kts 100 fKa.TOVTd.KlS 200 SiaKOffiaKis 300 Tpia.KOffia.Kis 1000 2000 10,000 /iuptdVcts 20,000 124 REMARKS ON THE NUMERALS. [$ 99. $ 99. Remarks. 1. The rarer subordinate forms of 13, 14, etc., used by later writers, are SeKarpeis, Neut. SfKarpia, SeKar^rTopes, -a, Se/coWj/Te, etc. 2. Mupwt, 10,000, when Paroxytone (pvpioi), signifies innumerable. 3. In compound numerals, the smaller number either precedes the larger, and then always with ical, or it follows the larger, usually with KOI, sometimes without it. The first order corresponds with the usage in English, e. g. Jive and twenty ; the second only in part, e. g. twenty-five, e. g. 25 : TTfvrf /col jf/cov oKTtb \jj.oipu>v\ at St5o fj.otpat. But one half is expressed by compounds with ^ut, e. g. 7]fj.iSapeiK6v, half a daric ; so in the PL rpia, TreVre tymSapet/co, a daric and a half, two darics and a half. Fractions are also expressed by an ordinal with fj.6piov or pepos, e. g. rpiTi)/j.6pioi/ or Tpirov (j.epos = J, TTf/jLirrov fifpos = % j a mixed number is also expressed by ripi preceded by a numeral, e. g. ireVrc ^iSapei/co = 2^ darics, also by &r prefixed to an ordinal, e. g. firlTpirov = 1 J, eTr'nrenirTov = !-. 6. The Cardinal numbers compounded with ovv are equivalent to the Latin distributives, e. g. s, e.g. l\-os, lovely, Gen. PI. S Kalpi-oSy timely, " Kaipl-wv Kcupi-us a.Tr\(6-os)ovs, simple, " air\(6-(av)S>v air\(6-a>s)us ftfv(o-os)ovs, benevolent, " (evvt-wv) etivwv (evv6-ws) eiWs iroy, all, ircunds, " iravr-wv TT&VT-WS ffcatppwv, prudent, u ffaxppov-tav ffp6v-us Xaplfts, pleasant, ^api4vr-oav xjapttin-ws T<*x<5s, swift, " raxf-uy raxe-us fJLeyas, great, fj.eyd\-uv fj.fyd\-(os &\i}Mls, true, o\rj^(e-6>v)wy a\-n&(f-ws)S>s s, there are many which have the endings of the Gen., Dat, or Ace. (a) The Gen. ending appears in many adverbs in -?)<; and -ov, e. g. ffjs, $e}s, in order; e&Trivrjs, suddenly; TTOV, alicubi; TTOV, ubi ? OTTOV, ov, ubi ; avrov, ibi ; ovSa/xoO, nowhere. (b) The Dat., or an obsolete Abl. or Locative 1 ending, occurs in the following adverbs, (a) In adverbs with the ending -T, e. g. %pi, in the morning, comp. %p, spring , awpf, unseasonably ; e'/cTjTi (Dor. eWrt), oe/cTyrt, kKovri, afKovrt; in adverbs of manner in -eland -f, from adjectives in -QS and -TJS, and almost exclu- sively in adverbs compounded of a privatrve and iras or avr6s, e. g. iravopp.fi and travoppt. On the use of both forms, see Large Grammar, Part I, 363 (j8). 1 The Locative Case, is one which denotes the place where. $ 102.] CLASSES OF THE VERB. 127 (0) In local adverbs in -o?, commonly derived from substantives of the sec- ond Dec., e. g. 'Ic-fyiot from 'lo&jtufe, Uv^o'i from Tlv&d, Mtyapoi (rit Mcyapa), Tlftpaio?, KIKVVI/O'I from rj Kwi/a), of, 'owoi, quo, whither, ofaot, do mi. tVom olnos. REM. 2. Adverbs in -o? t derived from substantives, denote an indefinite where, but those derived from pronouns commonly denote the direction whither, yet sometimes the indefinite where. (7) In local adverbs in -at. This ending occurs only in a few forms, e. g. Xa/juil, humi, 7retA.ai. To this form corresponds the PL locative form -7J0-J (/), or where i precedes, -aaiv, derived from substantives of the first Dec. ; this ending originally belonged to plural substantives only, but was transferred later to substantives in the singular number, e. g, TjjSij- ueetj/, gratis. ()3) In the ending -ov, e. g. 8r)p6v, diu; o?/ca, gratuitously. CHAPTER VL The Verb. NATURE AND DIVISION OF THE VERB. $ 102. Classes of the Verb. 1. The Verb expresses an action or state, which is af- firmed of a subject, e. g. the father writes, the rose blooms, the boy sleeps, God is loved. 2. Verbs are divided into the following classes : (1) Active verbs, which express an action, that the sub- ject itself performs or manifests, e. g. ypd(f>w, to write ; ^d\\(o, to bloom (comp. 248) ; (2) Middle or Reflexive verbs, which express an action that the subject performs on itself, the subject being, 128 VERBS. - TENSES. [$ 103. therefore, both agent and object, e. g. advise myself, I deliberate ; (3) Passive verbs, which express an action that the sub- ject receives from another object, e. g. Tinrro^ai, VTTO TWOS, I am smitten by some one. 3. Verbs, which are used only in the middle form, are called Deponent. They have either a reflexive or intransi- tive meaning. They are divided into Middle Deponents, which have a middle form for their Aorist and Future, e. g. ^api^ofiai, gratificor, Aor. e^apLcrd^v, Fut. ^apiov^ai, ; and into Passive Deponents, which have a Passive form for then* Aorist, but commonly a middle form for their Fut., e. g. ev&vjAeo^cu, mecum reputo, Aor. eVe^u/xTJ^v, mecum reputavi, Fut. eifevjjujaofjiat,, mecum reputabo. Comp. 197. $ 103. The Tenses. 1. The Tenses denote the time of the action of the verb. The Greek has the following Tenses : I. (1) Present, /3ov\eva), I advise, (2) Perfect, fie/BovXev/ca, I have advised ; II. (3) Imperfect, e/3ov\evov, I was advising, (4) Pluperfect, e(Be[Bov\evKeiv, I had advised, (5) Aorist, e/3ov\evcra, I advised (indefinite) ; III. (6) Future, fiov\evcra), I shall or will advise, (7) Future Perfect (almost exclusively in the mid- dle form), fiefiovXeva-ofuu, I shall have advised my- self, or I shall have been advised. 2. All the Tenses may be divided into, a. Principal tenses : Present, Perfect, and Future ; b. Historical tenses : Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist. REMARK. The Greek has two forms for the Perf. and Pluperf. Act., two for the simple Put. Pass., and two each for the Act., Pass., and Mid. Aorist ; these two forms may be distinguished as Primary and Secondary tenses ; i. e. the first Perfect is a primary tense, the second Perfect a secondary tense, etc. Still, only a very few verbs have both forms ; most verbs construct the above tenses with one or the other form, but not Avith both. No verb has all the W 104, 105.] VERBS. MODES. PARTICIPIALS. 129 tenses. Pure verbs ( 108, 5) form, with very few exceptions, only the primary tenses. Mute and liquid verbs ($ 108, 5) may form both the primary and secondary tenses, but no verb has all the forms in use. The Fut. Perf, which is found in but few verbs, is entirely wanting in liquid verbs. It is seldom found in verbs which have the temporal augment ( 121), e. g. a/pew, to take, i, PL Prot. 338, c., ctTj/tacw, to dishonor, ^Ti^trojitat, Dem. 19, 284. $ 104. The Modes. The Modes denote the manner in which the action of the verb is represented, whether as a direct affirmation, a condition, or a command, etc. (comp. 258, seq.) The Greek has the following Modes : I. The Indicative, which makes a direct affirmation, e. g. the rose blooms, bloomed, will bloom. II. The Subjunctive, which expresses what is merely conceived, or conditional. The Subjunctive of the his- torical tenses is called the Optative. Comp. ypd^oi/jLt with scriberem. REMARK. See 257, 2 (a), (b), and Rem. 1, for the manner in which the Aorist may use both forms of the Subj., and how the Future may have an Optative. III. The Imperative, which expresses a command, e. g. fiov\eve, advise. 105. Participials (Infinitive and Participle). Besides the modes, the verb has two forms, which, as they partake both of the nature of the verb and also of the nature of the substantive and adjective, are called Participials : (a) The Infinitive, which is the substantive participial, e. g. e'^eXoj fiov\eveiv, I wish to advise, and TO fSov\eveiv, the advising. (b) The Participle, which is the adjective participial, e. g. {3ov\vcov avrjp, a counsellor. REMARK. These two participials maybe called verbum infinitum; the re- maining forms of the verb, verbum Jinitum. 130 VERBS. STEM, AUGMENT, AND REDUPLICATION, [ft 106-108. $ 106. The Persons and Numbers. The personal forms of the verb show whether the sub- ject of the verb be the speaker himself (/, we, first person) ; or a person or thing addressed (thou, you, second person) ; or a person or thing spoken of (he, she, it, third person). They also show the relation of number: Singular, Dual, and Plural (comp. 41, 1), e. g. /3ouXeu&>, /, the speaker, advise; ySouXeut9, thou, the person addressed, advisest; J3ov\evei,, he, she, it, the person or thing spoken of, advises ; fiovXeverov, ye two, the persons addressed, advise ; fiovXevovcn, they, the persons spoken of, advise. REMARK 1. The student will at once observe that the ending, or personal forms of the Greek verb, determines the person and number without the subject being expressed. So in Latin. But in English, as the verb is not varied so as to indicate the person and number of itself, the subject must be expressed. HEM. 2. There is no separate form for the first Pers. Dual throughout the Act., and none for the Pass. Aorists ; in these instances it is expressed by the form of the first Pers. PL $ 107. Conjugation. Conjugation is the inflection of the verb in its Persons, Numbers, Modes, Tenses, and Voices. The Greek has two forms of conjugation, that in -G>, which includes much the larger number of verbs, e. g. ySovXeu-eo, and the older, original conjugation in -ju, e. g. laTrj-jjut,, to station. CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -. $ 108. Stem, Augment, and Reduplication. Char- acteristic. 1. Every verb is divided into the stem, which contains the ground-form of the verb, and into the syllables of formation, by which the relations of person, number, tense, etc. are denoted. The stem is found in most verbs in -, fiovXev-o-o), /JovXcu'-cro/iat, or are prefixed to the stem, and are then called Augment and Reduplication, e. g. e-ftovXevov, I was advising ; fa-ftovXevKa, I have advised. For a change in the stem of many verbs, e. g. T/oeV-w, T-Ty>o-a, 1-Tpa.Tr-rjv, see $ 140. 3. The Augment is e prefixed to the stem of verbs which begin with a consonant, e. g. -/3ovAv is cut off, is called the verb-characteristic, or merely the characteristic, because, according to this, verbs in -o> are divided into different classes ; according as the characteristic is a vowel, a mute, or a liquid, verbs are divided into pure, mute, and liquid verbs, e. g. /3ovA.ev'-a), rt/xa-w (pure verbs), Tptfi- (mute), is the tense-ending of the Fut. The stem of the verb, together with the tense-characteristic and the augment or reduplication, is called the tense-stem. Thus, e. g. in cfiov- Aeuo--a, ej3ov\ev " Pov\ev-, e, ot, rj o, at, are the mode-vowels. The mode-vowels e and o of the Indie. are lengthened into T? and a> OL _ et, e 0), 2. et r> y 01 e 3. H "n 01 e D.I. - - O) Ol - 2. T? n Ol e 3. e It i) OL P.I. (a TOV 3. TUV Tf 3. TWffCUf Sing. 2. (cro) o 3. Dual 2. o-bov 3. (rbwv Plur. 2. (T&e 3. ffbwffai', (T&tav D. Infinitive. 1). Infinitive. v Pres., Fut., and Aor. II. VOLI Pcrf. Act. and Aor. I. and II. Pass, t Aor. I. crbai E. Participle. E. Participle. Stem vr t with exception of the Perf., whose stem ends in -or. fj.fi/os, Herri* fJ-evov ; /j.fvos, fj.*w), LLZVOV, Perf. 12 134 PERSONAL-ENDINGS. [$ 114. REMARK. The Personal-endings follow so directly the mode-vowel, and are so closely joined to it, that often the two do not appear separately, but are united together, e. g. Povtevcr-ys, instead of j8ouAewr-7}-is, Povtev-rj, instead of /8ouAeu-e-ai (a and e coalescing and t being subscribed). $ 114. Difference between the Personal-endings in the Principal and the Historical Tenses. 1. The difference between the Principal and Historical tenses is important. The Principal tenses (Pres., Perf., and Put.) form the second and third Pers. Dual with the same ending -ov, e. g. ftov\ev-c-rov ouAei5-e-To> ; povAfv-e-ff&ov Pov\fv-c--ovaii>-u, *AN), so as to exhibit a full Conju- gation. 2. In learning the table, we are to note, (1) That the Greek forms may always be resolved into, (a) Personal-ending, (b) Mode-vowel, (c) Tense-characteristic, (d) Tense-stem, (e) Verb-stem, (f ) Augment, or Reduplication. (2) The spaced forms, e. g. ftov\fv-frov, QovXt-v-riTov, third Pers. Du. Ind. and Subj. Pres., may direct attention to the difference between the Historical tenses in the Ind. and Opt., and the Principal tenses. (3) Similar forms, as well as those that differ only in accentuation, are distinguished by a star (*). The learner should compare these together, e. g. Pov\(v advise, /8ouA.eu-o^v, we advise, /8oi/A.eu-eT6,* you advise, ffov\ev-ovffi(v), they advise, j8ovAeu-,* I mat/ advise, fiov\ev-r)s jSouAev-?;* ySouAejJ-TjTO)/ BouAey-Tjrov * &OV\V-(i}(J.V )8ouA6U-7JT j8ouA6U-W(Ti(l') Imperfect, Tense- stem: ^-/SovAeu- S.I. 2. 3, D.2. 3. P. 1, 2. 3. ^-jSouA.ev-oi',* / was advising, '-/3ouAeu-es, f/jow twisf qdvising, 4-ftov\ev-e(v), he, she, it was adv. f-fiov\fv-Tov, ye two were adv. -/3ov\cv-e Tt]f, they two were adv. e-)8ou\6u-o / uej', we were advising, 6-/8ou\eu-6Te, you were advising, e-^SouAeu-oj/,^ they were advising, Per/ecf/., Tense- stem : j8e-ouAei/-/f S. 1. 2. 3. D.2, 3. P.I. 2. 3. /3e-$ouAu-K-a, / have advised, /8e-|8ouAeu-/c-as, thou hast adv'd, &-pov\*v-K-e(v),*he,she,ithasa. ^e-)3ouAeu-/c-oTov, ye two have a. Pe-&ov\ev-n-a TOV, they two have advised, /3e-j8ouAeu-/c-ajiiej', we have adv'd, fi-fiov\i>-K-aTc, you have adv'd, fie-fiov\fv-K-a.(ri(v), they have a. /3-pov\ev-K-(o,ImayIiavea. )8e-)8ouA6u-/c-77s j8e-j8ouAei>/c-j7 )8-j8ouAeu-K-rjToy ftf-l3oV\V-K-T) TOV )8e-)8ouAcv-/c-cB/x6i/ j8e-)8ouAeu-/c-7?Te fie-povtev-K-fafft (v) P/wper- fect /., Tense- stem: ^-j8e- j8ot>Aeu-K- S.I. 2. 3. D.2. 3. P.I. 2. 3. t-f}f-pov\fv-K-fii/, I had advised, e-)3e-)3ouAeu-K-eis, thou hadst adv. e'-j8e-ouAi;-/c-ei, he, she, it had ad. e'--/3ovAeu-/f-etTo', ye two Jtad advised, f-&-ftov\ev-K-f lrt} v,they two had advised, e-ftt-fiovXev-K-finev, we had adv. e-fie-pov\fv-K-eiT, you had adv. e'-/3e-/3ouAev K-effav, they had a. Per/: //. p/,i/: //. 7T6-<77j/-a, l I appear, e-Tre-^i'-eip , 2 / appeared, ire-tjrfiv-w, I may appear, Aorist I., Tense- stem : e-/3oi/Aeu-, let him ad. jSouAeu-eroj/, ye two ad. 0ov\fv-eruv, let them both advise, /3ouAey-6T6,* do ye ad. SouAeu-eVaxrai', usually jSouAeu- ejj/, to advise, (SouAeu-wj' (3ov\v-ov1J- i/e-i/at,t TTS-^TJJ'-cfot 0ov\i>--(T-aVTOS )3ouAei/-(T-a(ri7S, having advised, 11 y -aavTuv* AiV-otjui, etc., like the Opt. Impf. AiV-e, etc., like the Imp. Pres. \tir- tiv, t fiov\fi>- iJ.&a j8ovAU-7J(T&6 /SouAew-wi/Tot Imperfect, Tense- stem: S. 1. 2. 3. D.I. 2. 3. P.I. 2. 3. t-&ov\ev-6(ji.T)v ) I was deliber- t-fiov\fv-o v [ating, Perfect, Tense- stem : S. 1. 2. 3. D.I. 2. 3. P.I. 2. 3. &-pov\fv-pat, I have deliberated, )3e-|8ot;Aey-//eVos, 5, 1 may &-l3ov\Gv-(jifvos ys [have fie-fiov\v-/j.fvos T) [delib- [erated, /Se-^ouAeu-tr S- o v fif-&ov\fv-v r a i Pluperfect, Tense- stem : S.I. 2. 3. D.I. 2. 3. P.I. 2. 3. ^-)8e-j8oi;At5-/i TJ v, 7 Aad deliber- o [ated, Aorist L, Tense- stem : S. 1. 2. 3. D.I. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3. i-l3ov\fv-ff-> [(indefinite) ftov\ev-ff-ca fiai, I may de- ftov\ev-ff-p * [liberate, Pov\ev-ff-r) r a i &ov\fv-(T-r) a (& o v J3ov\fv-ffav, usually /SouAf u-o (ff&t}v )8e-j8ouA6u-(ro, deliberate^ -(r&(affai', crjj \de- [liberate, fiov\fv-ff-ai/j.rii>, I might &ov\fv-ff-a i o [deliberate, deliberate, to deliber- ate, /3oV\fV-(T-dfJL(VOS having deliber- ated, &ov\fv--&-i)Tov e-ftov\fv-&--f)T-riv e-fiov\ev-&-i<)/j.ei' f-f3ov\ev-&-r)Te e-fiovAfv-fr-T] ffav /3ov\fv-&-a>, I might have j3ouAei-&-77s [been advised. fiov\ev-&-rj j8ouA6V-&-7JTOJ' &OV\fV-&-TJ TQV ^OV\V-^-M/J.fV j8oiAeu-&-77Te * $OlA6t/-i&- ff I ( v} Future I. S.I. 2. fiov\ev-SrT)-ri = /SouAevovo-i. On the irregular lengthening of the vowel pre- ceding the y, see 20, Rem. 2. 6. In the first Pers. Sing. Plup. Act., Attic writers use, together with the form in -ew, a form in -rj, which arises from the Ionic ending of the Plup. -eo, e. g. ^8e0ouA6u/c-7j instead of -K-CIV. The mode- vowel ft in the third Pers. PI. is commonly shortened into e, e. g. e'jSe/SouAeu-K-e-o-cu' instead of tftefiovXev-K- fi-, e. g. 7rat8u-ot-/it, ira^fvff-ai-fjLi ; but the ending -t]v in the first and second Aor. Pass., according to the analogy of verbs in -pi. This t\ remains through all the per- sons and numbers, though it is often dropped in the Dual and PL, especially in the third Pers. PI. and then, firj^v = el/iey, efrjre = eTre, drivca/ = cler, e. g. 7rai5ev&ei / 7?/i' and 7rcueu&i)tij/, /ij/rj(T&t7?Te and -d-fTre, beir]ffav Th. 1, 38, and (more frequently) 8. The Attic Optative endings -rjr, -17?, -77, etc., and the third Pers. PL -*v (rarer -tja-av) which appropriately belong to verbs in -pi, are used with verbs in -co, in the following cases : (a) Most commonly in the Imperf. Opt. of contract verbs, e. g. rt/jupyv, (b) In all Futures in -cD, e. g. $a.vo(i]v Soph. Aj. 313., epolrj Xen. Cy. 3. 1, 14, from the Fut. aj/w, c'peD ; (c) Somewhat often in the second Plup., e. g. ^KWf), -eiav. REMARK. The second Pers. Dual Act. of the Historical tenses often ends, among the Attic writers, in -yv instead of -ov, e. g. etVeVrji' PL Symp. 189, c., eVe5i7^7}, rir/y, is very frequent, e. g. ireiraiSevKus &, educaverim ; irrrraiSevicws efrjv, educa- vissem. Yet this form seems to denote a circumstance or condition, more than a simple completed action ; comp. PI. Hipp. M. 302, a. et KfK/j.rjK(as rt, ^ rerpw- fjLfvos, 1) ireir\ijy/ji(vos, % &\\' OTIOVV ireirov&tas fKarepos r}fj.wv ely, ou KO! a/j.(f>6- Ttpoi a5 TOVTO ireTr6v&oi/j.ev] examples of the simple forms are, cbrciArj^)??, PI. Rp. 614, a., fl\-fj(pufftv Polit. 269, c., tpireirTfaKOi X. An. 5. 7, 26., Kara\e\oiiroiei/ X. H. 3. 2, 8., airoKfXvrfKoi ib. 5, 23., wr-nper^Kot ib. 5. 2, 3., ireirorf)Kot Th. 8, 108., tspep\-f)Kotev ib. 2, 48. The Imp. Perf. does not often occur in the Act., e. g. yeywve, Eur. Or. 1220. 14. The Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, append the personal-endings to the tense-stem without a mode-vowel, and hence they cannot form the Subj. and Opt. (with few exceptions, which will be further treated below, 154, 9), but must also be expressed periphrastically by means of the Participle and flyeu, e. g. ircira.i8evfj.fvos 3>, efyv, educatus sim, essem. 15. The third Pers. Ind. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, of pure verbs ends in -VTO.I, -VTO, e.g. ftffiovtevvTcu, ^3ej8ouAet/ro ; but in mute and liquid verbs, this formation is not possible. Hence the Attic writers usually express this person periphrastically, by means of the Perf. Part, and elo~i(v), sunt, i), erant ; the older and middle Attic writers, however, sometimes use the Ionic forms -orat, -a.ro (instead of -mat, -VTO) ; the a of these endings is aspirated after the Kappa and Pi-mutes, and hence changes the preceding smooth Kappa or Pi- mute into the corresponding rough (comp. 144) ; but this a is not aspirated after the Tau-mutes ; thus, rpifi-(0, to rub, Perf. r-rptfj.-/j.cu 3 P. TCTpiQarai (for Tfrpifivrai) Pip. frcTpi(paTo TAe/c-w, to twine, ir-ir\ry-[j.ai " jreTrAe'^aTai ( " irir\Kvrai) T, to arrange, re-ray-nai " Tfraxdrot ( " rerayvrai) -(i), to separate, /ce-;CcSpia'-/iai " KfX (usually e'AaiW), to drive, t\d-a-u, Fut. Att. ^A<, -as, -$, -aTov, -u/jifv, -are, -Sxn(v) ; reAe'w, to finish, T\e-(T-w, Fut. Att.TeAw, -els, -?, -OU/A6I', -?T, -ov, the circumflex remains on the ultimate in compounds also. e. g. t/t/SaAoO, a^i/coD, eVAwroO, eViAad-oD, a^eAou, ^ej/7/coD; so in verbs in -/ii, when the verb is compounded with a monosylla- bic preposition, e. g. irpo8ov, evbov, a$ov : yet the accent is drawn back, when the verb is compounded with a dissyllabic preposition, e. g. a.ir65ov, Karddov, bir6&ov: but in the Dual and PL of the second Aor. Mid., the accent is in all ca, Tpifiu (uAa|ai ; but Imp. first Aor. Mid. uAa|cu. 13 146 VERBS. SYLLABIC AUGMENT. [$ 119, 120. $ 119. Further view of the Augment and Redu- plication. 1. After the general view of the Augment and Reduplication ($ 108, 3), it is necessary to treat them more particularly. 2. As has been already seen, all the historical tenses (the Impf, Plup., and Aor.) take the augment, but retain it only in the Ind. There are two augments, the syllabic and temporal $ 120. (a) Syllabic Augment." 1. The syllabic augment belongs to those verbs whose stem begins with a consonant, and consists in prefixing c 1 to the stem, in the Impf. and Aorists, but to the reduplication in the Plup. In this way, the verb is increased by one syllable, and hence this augment is called the syllabic augment, e. g. (3ov- Xeuco, Impf. c-(3ov\evov, Aor. Z-fiovXcvo-a, Plup. l-fie-fiovXevKuv. 2. If the stem begins with p, this letter is doubled when the augment is prefixed ($ 23, 3), e. g. pun-to, to throw, Impf. Aor. tppuf/a, Perf. eppt^a. Plup. REMARK 1. The three verbs jSouAo^at, to will ; Swj/a/ucu, to be able ; and jueAAw, to be about to do, to intend, among the Attic writers take 77, instead of e, for the augment ; still, this is found more among the later than the earlier Attic writers, e. g. e@ov\'f)frr)v and ri^ovK-^^v ; e'SiWjUTjj/ and i]$vi'd. l ur]i', tSuv-fi&r]!' and ySvvfi&riv (but always fSvydc^v) ; ejiieAAoj' and T^ueAAov. The Aorist is very seldom T)(j.e\\-r)(Ta (comp. X. H. 7. 4, 16. 26). REM. 2. Among the Attic writers, the augment e is often omitted in the Pluperfect ; in compounds, when the preposition ends with a vowel ; in sim- ples, when a vowel which is not to be elided precedes, e. g. dj/ajSe^/cet, X. An. 5, 2, 15 ; KaTaSeSpa^/ceo-cw, X. H. 5. 3, 1 ; KaraAeAeiTTTo, X. Cy. 4. 1, 9 ; Kara- TreTTTw/cet, Th. 4, 90 ; ai ffvv^Kai yeyevnvro, X. Cy. 3. 2, 24 (according to the best MSS.) ; but in the Impf. and Aorists, the syllabic augment is omitted 1 According to analogy, we may suppose that e is prefixed to all verbs in the augmented tenses, whether the verbs begin with a vowel or consonant. If the verb begins with a consonant, e appears as an additional syllable, e. g. e-Trpar- TOJ>, but if with a vowel, e is assimilated with that vowel and lengthens it, if it is not already long, e. g. &yca, Impf. sayov = ^yoy ; e'&e'Aco, Impf. ee&eAoi/ = ^fre- \ov ; o/ce'AAco, Impf. eMtfeAAoi' = &KC\\OV. If the word begins with a long vowel, it absorbs e, e. g. 7)Aci is used in prose, is an exception. $ 121. (b) Temporal Augment, The temporal augment belongs to verbs, whose stem begins with a vowel; it consists in lengthening 1he fii>f >' in -vowel. This is called the temporal augment because it increases the time, e. g. a becomes 77, e. g. "d-yw Impf. ^yov Perf. fix - Plup. tfx* 1 " i t, ' ; 'tAcereucu ' ; 'IKSTSVOV " 'ftelrcMfa ij y. ' v'jSpiOw *' ' vQoiCov t; f vQptKCL cu 77, " alpfco " rfpovv 01 " &', " OlKTlfa " (pKTl&V " (pKTlKO. R KM ARK. Verbs which begin with 77, t, u, w, ow, and ei, do not admit the augment, e. g. yTTdopai, to be overcome, Impf. 77x^^77^, Perf. ^TTTJ^CU, Plup. ; 'iTr^w, to press, Aor. "iTroxra; 'UTTJ/^OJ, to /// to sZeep, Aor. "1)7 , to benefit, Impf. u, to find, in good prose, always omits the augment. $ 122. Remarks on the Augment \. Verbs beginning with d followed by a vowel, have d instead of 77, e. g. 'dia>, (poet.), to perceive, Impf.'di'oj'-, but those beginning with d, au, and 01 t'ol- luwi'd by a vowel, do not admit the augment, e. g. 'dijSi'^Ojucu, to //are an wn- pfcastint sensation, lmj)f. 'd?j5t^oju.i7J/; avaivca, to dry, Impf. atiau/ov. oia.Kl(i> y to N/.-I /-. Impf. o(aH-tC oz/ j a ^- so oi/dAtWa;, to destroy, though no vowel follows d, has aj/a/\a>co), to siiiit. and d'/'o-trw (Att. o'cnrco), to ?7/sA, take the augment, e.g. fjetSoj/ (prose pSo^). ^", to accustom (to which belongs also efcwd-a, to &e accustomed, from the Epic &>a>) ; efo- a, poetic Aor. (stem 'EA), to place (in prose only, Part. Aor. Mid. kcra.fji.syos and eurauez/os, establishing, founding); lAi, to wind; eA/ca>, to draw; Aor. e'/A/cucra (stem 'EAKT) ; efAoy, to tore, Aor. (stem C EA) of cupe'co; eTro^uai, to follow ; epyd- o /j. a i, to work ; e p TT a>, e p TT u a>, to creep, to '/o ; e a- T t a co, to entertain ; e X w, to Aaye (on the Epic ef^at, see 230). 4. The six following verbs take the syllabic, instead of the temporal, augment : &yvvm, to break, Aor. caa, etc. ( 187, 1). a\lffKO pa i, capior, Perf. ta^uita and ^ACOKO, captus sum ( 161, 1). aj/Sdva, to please (Ion. and poet.), Impf. ta.vSa.vov, Perf. eaSa, Aor. taoov ( 230.) ovpeca, mingere, eovpovv, (ovpijKa. <^a>, to push, edfrow, etc. (sometimes without the augment, e. g. Stw&ovvro, Th. 2, 84; ^wo-^jo-ai/, X. H. 4. 3, 12 ; &, PI. Cli;-.rm. 155, c.). uvfofj-ai, to buy, Impf. f- VOVVTO, Aeschin. c. Ctes. c. 33; owTojj/etTo, Andoc. p. 122.), Aor. ewrjad- }t.i\v (see however 179, 6.), Perf. ewvr)/n.ai. 5. The verb copra^cu, to celebrate a feast, takes the augment in the second syllable, Impf. edjpra^ov. The same is true of the following forms of the Plup. II.: EIKfl, second Perf. eoi/co, 7am like, Plup. e\Trofj.ai, to hope, second Perf. eoATra, I hope, Plup. e^ATretf. ) ) , to c?o, second Perf. eopya, Plup. ecipye tz/. 6. The three following verbs take the temporal and syllabic augment at the same time, the Spiritus Asper of the stem being then transferred to the e of the augment : 6 paw, to see, Impf. t&pu>v, Perf. e^pa/ca, ecopa^uat. avolyta, to open, Impf. aveuyov, Aor. afer7yu.ecu /3e/3Xaai, fo sow, -(T7rap/ca KTi'i, <0 //, to plour/h, e'Aaco (e'Aawco), to drive, ap-^ipofj-at eA-'/7Aa/ca cA-^Aa,uaj ) ap-7)p6/jL7)v e'A-rjAaKeiv eA-TjAa/xTji' 'OMOil, o/j.vv/j,i, to swear, 'OAEH, V\\V/JLL, to destroy, Ofj.-^)/j.oKa o/j.-dafj.oar/j.at oA-wAe/ca Perf. II. ?A-coAa ojj.-w/J.6(r/,n)v oA-wAeweiv Plup. II. oA-wAe "VL 125.) AI (;.\ii;.\T AM> i'.i:i>i I'l ic.\Ti<>.\ i.\ COMPOUNDS. 151 , to convince, opvrrta, to dig. (t\--f]\cyxa) totfaeffUU op-wpuxa op-dipvy^ai and and Further: I \l to smelt, oS-w5a ; (fiepco ('ENEKfl), fr> carry, lv-r\vo~xa., ev-jjvey/jia.1 ; )>f ( '-'i ( l of a7-?j7oxa, so as to soften the pronunciation) is later, and is rejected by the Atticists as not Attic, though in Lysias ; but Peif. Mid. or Pass, always $y/j.cu. (b) Those which in the second stem-syllable have a vowel long by nature, and shorten this after prefixing the reduplication (except epei'Sw) : , to anoint, aKovw, to hear, 'EAET0H, pxo/J.ai, to come, epetScu, to prop, p-Ti p e i KO. j to collect, e-yeipw, to icake, ay-riyepfjiou (ey-i t yepKa.) ey- ay-nyfp^Tjv (ey-iiyepicew) ey- So from tyeipw comes the second Perf. eyp-fjyopa (on account of euphony instead of ey-riyopa), I wake, second Plup. Act. fyprjy6piv, I aivoJce. REMARK 1. The forms included in parentheses are such as are not found in good Attic prose. REM. 2. The verb &yu, to lead, forms the second Aor. Act. and Mid., and Qfpco, to carry, forms all the Aorists with this reduplication ; here, however, the reduplicated vowel takes the temporal augment, and that only in the Ind., and the vowel of the stem remains pure : &yw, to lead, Aor. II. %y-ayov, Inf. ayayciv, Aor. II. Mid. rjyiry^uTji' ; (pepus, to carry (stem 'EFK), Aor. II. tfy-eyKov, Inf. ev-eyKeiv, Aor. I. fyV-e-y/co, Inf. tv-eyicai, Aor. Pass. V-e'xd^J', Inf. $ 125. Augment and Reduplication in Compound Words. 1. First rule. Verbs compounded with prepositions take the augment and reduplication between the preposition and the verb ; the final vowel of prepositions, except Trcpt and Trpo, is elided [$ 13,'2, (a)] ; irpo frequently combines with the augment by means of Crasis ($ 10), and becomes 7rpo; IK before the syllabic augment is changed to e ($ 15, 3 ) ; and ev and , to throw around, Trept-ejSaAAoi' Trepi-/3e/3A?7x:a irepi-e/3tl3\-f)Keiv ,, to few, fee/ore, eV)8aAAa>, to throw out, e-eaAAoy cri>A-A /< ya>, to collect together, a"uv-\eyov ffvv-ei\oj(a (rvp-p'nrr ; (b) but in the middle, when the stem of the simple verb begins with a vowel, except 77 or w, e. g. SUS-TI/XCW, to 6e unfortunate, e-Sus-Tlr^ouj/ Se-5us-T^77/fa 8us-a>7rea>, to /nafce ashamed, (-Svs-cairovv Se-Svs-caTrrjKa Sus-apeaWw, to 6e displeased, Svs-ripea-rov Sus-Tj/jeVrTj/ca REMARK 1. Verbs compounded with eS may take the augment and redupli- cation at the beginning or in the middle, yet they commonly omit them at the beginning, and euepyere'cy usually in the middle, e. g. eu-Tuxeew, to be fortunate, Inipf. -r)v-Tv-%eov, but commonly eu-ru^eov ir-co%eouai, to feast ivell, " ew-coxcJ/tTjj/ ev-fpyereca, to do good, " ev-rjpyereov, but commonly ev-epyereoj/, Perf. ev-ypyeTfjKa, but commonly ev-epyerrjKa. 3. Third Rule. All other compounds take the augment and reduplication at the beginning, e. g. p.v&o\oyea), to relate e/j.v&oX6yeov e'w, to build, cpKoS6fj.eov Thus irapp'nffid&ij.ai (from irapp^ffia, and this from ?ra^ and ffiffis], to speak openly, Aor. ^-Trappr}(na(rdfj.riv, Perf. Tre-irappr](ria(r/j.ai. REM. 2. 'OSoTToie'cu has the Perf. a>8o7re7ro](r&aj, X. An. 5. 3, 1. Lycurg. c. Leocr. 139, has 126. Remarks. 1. The six following words compounded with prepositions take the augment in both places, viz. at the beginning of the simple verb and before the preposi- tion : $ 126.] VERBS. - REMARKS. 153 iL/jLirfxofJLat, to clothe one's self, Impf. dj/c'xo/iou, to endure (not avexu), '' eto, to be uncertain, : T}fj.($>fyv6ovv and avop&6(i), to raise up, ; fjvvp&ovv Perf. eoj, to molest, ' i]v&x^ ovv " eu, to 7*z'0, ; t-rrapcpvovv " TreTrapwi/rj/ca " irapcfVT)(ra. 2. The analogy of these verbs is followed by three others, which are not compounded with prepositions, but are derived from other compound words, viz. (from Siaira,food), (a) to feed, (b) to 6e a judge, Impf. ^nyrtav and Trcoi', Aor. e&rfTTjo-a and 8477x770-0 ; Perf. SeSiTJTTj/ca ; Impf. Mid.' u, to serve (from Sta/coj/os, servant), Impf. 5i7jK(Ji'ouv and Perf. SeStrjK^/fa eca (from AM4>I2BHTH2), to dispute, Impf. ^^(pfa-^Tovv and 3. Exceptions to the first rule. Several verbs compounded with prepositions, take the augment before the preposition, since they have nearly the same signification as the simple verbs, e. g. (voe'w), to 6e uncertain, Impf. y/jt., " ^Ka.^evSoi', seldom 4. Those verbs are apparently an exception to the first rule, which are not formed by the composition of a simple verb with a preposition, but by deriva- tion from a word already compounded, e. g. evavTiov/j.cu, to oppose one's self to (from evaj/rios) Impf. avTiStKfo), to defend at law ( " avrtfiiKos) " r/j/rtSi/couj/ and avTifioKita, to /til npmi ( " ai/Tipo\.-f)) 4/j.Tropd.Q), to f/aia \>tj traffic ( " , to establish ( " 5. Many verbs, however, which apparentlv are formed only by derivation, are treated, even by the best classical writers,'as if they were compounded of a simple verb and a preposition. Thus, Trapavo/j.fia, ira.pT]v6p.ovv and irapfi/6fj.ovv, Trapnv6fj.ri(ra, Perf. Trapavev6/j.riKa, although it is not from irapd and ai/Ojuew or yo/xe'a>, which two verbs are not in use, but from the compound irapdvo/j.os ; so further, eyxeipv (from 'EFXEIPO2), to take in hand, Impf. &(x e lp vv e >ir '^ u - /ic'eu (from 'EIII0TMO2), to desire, Impf. -rre^vfji.ovv ; eV&u/ie'ojuot, Aor. eVc^v/x^- 1^77^, Perf. ffTf&v/j.ri[j.ai', K arwyopeti) (from Kar^yopos), to accuse, Impf. /caTTj7(J- pou^, Perf. KarT)y6pf)Ka', irpo&vfjio vfj.a i (from irp6&vfj.os), to desire earnestly, Impf. Trpov^vfjiovfj.^ and irpo^vij.ovfj.-r]v ; so tyiccafjud^fiv, irpocprjTfvetv, ) etc. 1 So PI. Phaed. 87, 6, according to most and the best MSS. 2 Eur. Med. 1128, and Aristoph. Thesm. \G5. 154 VE?,BS IN -co. DERIVATION OF TENSES. [$$ 127, 128. FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF VERBS IN -tXe-a>, to love ; JJLLO^O-W, to let out for hire. II. Impure verbs, whose characteristic is a consonant; these are again divided into two classes : A. Mute verbs, whose characteristic is one of the nine mutes, e. g. Xe/TT-w, to leave ; 7rXe/e-o>, to twine ; 7refe-co, to persuade ; B. Liquid verbs, whose characteristic is one of the four liquids, X, p, v, p, e. g. ayye\\-co, to announce ; vifji-w, to divide ; aiv-a), to show ; , 7r\K-a>, etc. ; (t) Perispomena, whose final syllable is circumflexed in the first Pers. ; these are consequently contract verbs, e. g. Tipta, i\u, $ 128. Derivation of Tenses. All tenses are formed from the stem of the verb, the inflection-endings men- tioned above ( 113), being appended to this. The Primary tenses only have a distinct tense-characteristic ( 110); this is always wanting in the Pres. and Impf., the mode-vowels and personal-endings being sufficient; but the Pres. and Impf. very frequently strengthen or increase the pure stem, e. g. TVTTT-U) (pure stem TYn), afMpr-dvca (pure stem 'AMAPT) ; the Secondary tenses never admit such an increase, but are formed from the pure stem, and without the tense-characteristic ; yet, in certain cases ( 140), they admit a change of $ 129.J FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF PURE VERBS. 155 the stem-vowel. Hence, certain tenses, which are formed from a common stem, may be distinguished from each other and classed by themselves. Tenses, included in such a class, may he said to be derived from one another. The principal classes are the three following: I. Tenses, which may strengthen the pure stem. Tli^e aiv tiie I';-o--. and Impf. Act., Mid., or Pass., e. g. (pure stem TTn) TVTT-T-W TVir-T-ofj.ai %-TVTT-T-OV ^-TV7T-T-(fyiTJI/. II. Tenses, which have a tense-characteristic. These arc the Primary tenses, e. g. (a) First Perf. and first Plup. Act., c. g. (Tre-^paS-Ko) 7re-paKa, (b) Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass. These do not have the tense-charac- teristic; from the Perf. Mid. or Pass, the Fut. Perf. is formed by rejecting -pat and annexing -, so the Fut. Perf. has a long vowel, e. g. (c) First Fut. and Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. -TUI|/CI t-Tv$d/j.r)v ; (d) First Aor. and first Fut. Pass., e. g. e-rv(p-^r)v Tu^-dijc-o/ucu. III. Tenses, which are formed from the pure stem without a tense-character- istic, may yet, in certain cases, admit a change of the stem-vowel. These are the Secondary tenses, e. g. (a) The second Perf. and second Plup. Act. c. g. Te-rihr-o, e-Te-TUTr-eiv ; (b) The second Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. e-Ao-oj/, 4-\c&-6iJ.T)v from Aav- &dv ( v commonly long), to hinder. Ko>AO-<7a;, K-K^AVM<"> 6te. 156 TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. [ 130 e into 77, e. g. ), to let out for hire, /j.Hr&ct>- ; (pcapa-(a, to steal, (pcapa-ffd) ; but eyyua-w, to (/z've as a pledge, eyyf-^trw ; j8oaa>, to ca# OM?, jSo^trojuat, ^o?j, to give an oracle; xpao^uat, to wse; an to bore, though p precedes, lengthen d into TJ, e. g. ^ 130. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs ivith a short Characteristic-vowel. The following pure verbs, contrary to the rule ($ 129, 2) re- tain the short characteristic-vowel, either in forming all the tenses, or in particular tenses. Most of these verbs assume a A r - ^XP" 7 " * I n ^- XP^ ffal ' P ass - with or; (but XP^ W > to anoint, Fut. xpr, Aor. IxP" 7 " ? ^f- XP* ffal > ^ or - MM- ^?fl^4w 5 Perf. Mid. or Pass. Kcxpi-ff-pai, /cexp^o-^ot; Aor. Pass, ^xp^-^iv ; verbal adj. REMARK 1. , to perceive, of the Ionic dialect, belongs here ( 230). The poetie euw is found only in the Pres. and Impf. ("aiov, 122, 1). (b) -fo. 1. 'Ai/^w (also old Att. avvTu) to complete, Fut. aj/uo-w ; Aor. tfi/vtra. Pass. with , to sacrifice, " d&rw " f&vira " rfavita T&VHHI " " At/w, to loose, " A6(T " &.u (usually ^AeuW), to drive, Fut. ^Aa (Att. e'Aw), etc. See 158, 3. &Aaa>, to bruise, dAaaaj, etc. Pass, with , etc. Pass, with a (/ce/cAo- etc - Pass, with o- (exoA^-o--^??*'). 5o/uao> (usually 5a/icCa>), domo, Aor. tSdfjiaffa. Pass, with o 1 . TT cpdca, to transport, to sell, Fnt. irep&vca ; Aor. tirepa, to tremble, -e, etc.; verbal adj. rpe-ff-rfa. X 6/(W > to P ltr - See 154, Rem. 1. 2. The following have in some tenses the long, in others the short vowel: alvfu (in Attic prose ^Tratj/ew), to praise, Fut. ewVe'erw ; Aor. ijij/e, to call, Fut. /coAecra>, Att. /caAw ( 117,2); Aor. AwUeoM ; Perf. Act. /ee/cATj/ca ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. /ce/cAtyucu, Zai called ; Fut. Pcii'. KtK\'!}(Top.a.i, I shall be called; Aor. Pass. 4K\-f)frrjv ; Fut. Pass. K\r)S-f)ffofj.a.i ; Fut. Mid. KaAoDjuai ; Aor. Mid. e/cctAecra.uTjj'. iro&ea>, to dest're, Tro^cVo^uar, Lys. 8, 18, PI. Phaed. 97, a. ; cVd&eo-o, Isoc. 4. 1^'J. 19, 17; elsewhere, irofrf)ffco, cTro&Tj-ra; Perf. Act. TCTr^Tj/ca; ireTro.^-Tj/iK/ ; Aor. Pass, firo&ea&rjv. to), laboro, Fut. jrovfjo'w, etc. (to work) ; TiweVw (to / z'n pain) ; Perf. TreTro- I/TJKCC in both senses ; Mid. and Pass, always have 77, e. g. fTrovrja-d^rjv and ^TToi/Tjd-TjK, Perf. ireTr^j/Tj/xaj. (e) -ow. Jw, to plough, Fut. ap6, to roll; Aeuco, to stone Perf. seems to be wanting) ; |uw, to scrape; iraiu, to strike; ira\alp-f)(rofjuu, Aor. Pass. &/>p^-oS&ijj/ ; x^co, to heap up (Ke'xw-o'-^ai, e'x^-(r-^7ji/) ; XP W ^ ^^ an orac/e (Ke' ^j/, 129, Rem. 2) ; XP^ to anorn^ [ 130, (a)] ; ^/auo>, to Hippbcr.). $ 131. J VlCIir.S. - AORIST AKD Fl'TUKE PASSIVE V/1TH , to cfo, Fut. 8pd(tw, etc.; Perf. Se'Spd/ca; Pcrf. Mid. or Pass. 8e5pd/xai and (Th.) ; Aor. Pass. fSpdtr^v (Th.). Verbal adjective Spo-tr-ros, w, to break in pieces, Perf '. Mid. or Pass, rffrpav-a-fjiai (Plat. Aor. Pass, t&pav-ff-frriv. Verbal adjective dpau-, to ireep. Perf. Mid. or Pass. Ke/cAccv/uci and KfK\av-ff-/u.at. , to s/ittf, Perf. Mid. or Pass. KfKteifjuu commonly, KAet-(r-/xot Aristoph.; Tragedians, Thu., sometimes PL, rarely Xen. ; Aor. Pass. e'/c\ei'- , Attic tK\r$-ff-frnv (Th.) ; Fut. Pass. /cAet-o-^aoftat. Verbal adjective KO\OVW, to maim. Perf. Mid. or Pass. KfK6\ovfj.at and /ce/coAou- (JLCU (poet.) p&P-a-i), utor, K^xp^/J-ai iravca, ''> rintxf 'o rf-dsc: to Jinish, irira.v/jLCU and tiravbTjv, iraudVo/iai Ion. and Th. Verbal adject 5. The following verbs, though they retain the short charac- teristic-vowel in the Perf. and Aor. Pass., do not assume o- : 8uo>, Srva>, \w [$ 130 (b), 2], ^A(o> [ 130 (c)], euVcv, ofpcv, Sew [ 130 (d), 2], apow [ 130 (e)], x [ 154. Rem. 1], -(r-frriv Future Pass. B. Contract Pure Verbs. $ 134. Preliminary Remarks. 1. The characteristic of contract pure verbs is either a, , or o ($ 127) ; these are contracted with the mode-vowel following. The contraction, which is made according to the rules stated above ( 9, 1.), belongs only to the Pres. and Impf. Act. and Mid., because in these two tenses only is the characteristic- vowel followed by another vowel. The Paragogic v in the third Pers. Sing. Impf. Act. disappears in the contraction. On the tense-formation, sec 129-131. $ 134.] PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 16\ 2. The contract forms of verbs in -du in the Indicative and Subjuncxive are the same ; contracts in -j. viz. -o?s, -o?. 3. The contracted Infinitive of verbs in -ow, which, in ouv editions of the classics, is more commonly written with an Iota Subscript, is without that lette in the ancient inscriptions, being contracted from -oev, e. g. rip-av, not r 4. If only one syllable follows the parenthesis in the paradigm, the termina tion of the uncontractcd form is the last syllable in the parenthesis, and the syllable after the parenthesis is the termination of the contracted form, e. g. Tifj.(d-u)a} = ri/j.dw, TI/JLU, Tif.(.(d.-tiv}a.v = Ti/j.dfiv, Tificiv] but if more than one syllable follows the parenthesis, the syllable, or syllables, after the last hyphen is the common ending of the contract and uncontracted forms, the uncontracted word embracing all the letters of the form except the vowel after the paren- thesis ; the contract, all without the parenthesis. 14* 162 PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 135. 135. Paradigms of ACTIVE. Indica- tive, Snb- junc- Impera- Infin. Partici- S. 1. 2. 3. D.I. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3. S. 1. 2. 3. D.I. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3._ "sT2T 3. D.2. 3. P. 2. 3. Norn. Gen. Characteristic TtyU,(cc-cu)fti, to honor, Tifj.(d-eis)as Tt,u(d-Tps)S,s Ti,u(a-7j)a-Te rijj.(d-(a)S)-ffi(v) ri/j.(a-e)d-TC>)(rav, or Characteristic (f)i\(-ca)w, to love. ^(e-e)ei-Tov i\(e-e)e'i-Te i\(e-o)ov-vTOS Ti/j.(a-ov)co-(riis \i\(e-ov)ov-(rr)s Characteristic o. '&(o-(i>)(ii), to let, /ju(r&(6-eis)o'i$ /J.l(TS( 0-77)0? fj.iff&(o-e)ov- or /j.ii\(f-o)ov-fj.o.i Clianictoristic t>. i\(f-fa)fa-u.at $t\(e-7]}p J o-w ) o;-,uat i O-;, 1 }-'jl -} , or f)oi'-(T&CU o-6}ov-ij.fvos o-o)ov-/j.tvrj Imperfect. d-f )a-ro CTtjtl ( O-d ) W fi\(e-ots)o'is /j.i(r&(6-ots)c'ts )aj, to draw. Characteristic e. , tocom- TereAe/ca eVereAewe reAw Characteristic o. ap(6-(a}co, to plough, %p(o-ov)ovv ap-Jipoxa PAS Aorist, Verbal adjectives : (nra-ff-Tfos, -reo, -reov, 136. PAKAl*i<;.MS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 165 Characteristic o. Imperfect. Characteristic e. Characteristic o. Tl/J.(d-Ol)ff}-0 rifJ.(d-Ol)(f-TO l\(-Ol)ot-I>TO p3.cr O/J.CLI /J.l(T&( 6-01 ) ol-VTO SIVP:. Future, | pi\Tj^ri(TOfj.ai f fj.HrbiA.7j-Te'oy, -rea, -TCOJ/, /iitrd-w-Teos, -Tea, -r4ov. in forming the Tenses. MIDDLE. Characteristic o. Characteristic e. Characteristic o. -/jLaL ap(6-o)ov-/j.ai TT 6 A.6-0-- flUl er fT\-cr-fj.r] T\OVfiCU ap6cro/j.ai SIVE. | Future, | , eTrAetre, e TrAe op. Opt. TrAe'otjUt, TrAe'ots, etc. Mid. Pr. Ind. irAeo/iot, Tr\4rj, -jrAerrat, TrAe^jue^ov, irAera^of, etc. Inf. 7rAer<7&cu. Part. ir\f6(j.vos. Impf. eTrAe ^^v. 2. The verb Sew, to ^'HC?, is commonly contracted in all the forms, particu- larly in compounds, e. g. rb Sow, roD SoOj/ros, SfaSoC^uat, KareSovv. But Se?, z' is necessary, and $eo/j.ai, to need, follow the analogy of verbs in -ew, with a monosyllabic stem, e. g. i}> SeW, Seo^at, SeTo-^at ; uncontracted forms of Seo^aj occur, instead of those contracted into -ei, c. g. Se'erat, Seecr^at, ^Se'ero, Xen., and sometimes also forms of other verbs belonging here are uncontracted, e. g. eVAeej>, X. H. G. 2, 27 ; irAeei, Th. 4, 28 ; oWx"*', PL Rp. 379, e. 3. Several verbs deviate in contraction from the general rules, e. g. (a) -ae, -aet, -or;, are contracted into -rj and -77, instead of into -a and -9, e. g. C(c-o>) cD, to live, CT?S, -C??, -^?TO^, -C5)Te, Inf. V, Imp. ^, Impf. e^, -^s, -rj, -T}TO^, -j)TT)v, -?jT6 ; Trety ((-) w, to hunger, Inf. Treiz/rji', etc.; Si^- ((-a>)aJ, to f/iirs^, Si^?7s, etc. Inf. SnJ/V; KJ/((i-)w, to scratcJi, Inf. KVTJV; (T/u (c-o) w, to smear, Inf. OTATJI/; ij/ (ci-co) cD, to rub, Inf. i^^; %P (^") u-fj.ai, to use, XP?7> XP^ Tctt XP^ ff ^ al 5 so a^oXP^M "* ^ ^ ue enough, OTTOXP?>CU; aTr6xp-r) (abridged from aTroxpi?), A suffices, Inf. OTTOXP^I', Impf. aTre'x/"? ; X P (" ' w ) ^> fo ^^ an orac ^ to propfiesy, xp^s> XP??> XP^"- (b) -oo and -oe are contracted, as in the Ionic, into -co, instead of into -ov, and -6rj into -w, instead of into -o?, e. g. ^t7((i-w)cS, to freeze, Inf. p^cDv (Aristoph., but piyow, X. Cy. 5. 1, 11), Part. G. piywros (Aristoph., but piyovvrcai', X. H. 4. 5, 4), and piySxra (Simon, de mulier. 26), Subj. pty$ (PI. Gorg. 517, d.), Opt. piyfa (Hippocr.). REMARK 1. The Ionic verb i$p6w, to sweat, corresponds in respect to con- traction with 17600, to freeze, though with an opposite meaning: iSpwffi, V 1 1)*-.] FORMATION OF THK TKN'SES OF IMPURE VERBS. IG7 4. The following things arc to be noted on the use of the Attic forms of the Opt. in -TJI/ ( 116, 8), viz. in the Sing., especially in the first and second person, of verbs in -ecu and -6) " X(lir-dC-w, to kill, Pass, t - * $ 0.7 - t\v " " dy-alv-w, to show, " " l-Q&v-nv " Mid. $ a v-ov^ai >, to destroy, " " 4-b&p-nv " Act. ^3p-w. 168 IMPURE VERBS. STRENGTHENING OF THE STEM. [$ 139. 3. When a form of a verb cannot be derived from the Pres. tense in use, another Present is assumed ; this assumed Pres. may be termed the TJte-me (#e//.a), and is printed in capitals, to distinguish it from the Pres. in actual use ; thus, e. g. YPO is the assumed Pres., or the Theme, designed merely to form the second Aor., \ 139. Strengthening of the Stem. 1. The stem is strengthened, first, by adding another conso- nant to the simple characteristic consonant of the stem, e. g. rinrrca (TWIT), to strike, Aor. II. Pass. 4-Tvir-nv Tdrroa (ray), to arrange, " e-ra.y-r]v fy (Kpay), to cry, " Act. f-Kpay-ov. 2. Yet the strengthened stem is found only in the Pres. and Impf. ; in the other tenses the simple stem appears, e. g. Pres. TVTTTOI) Impf. ZTVITTOV Aor. II. Pass. hvTrtjv Fut. rfyca REMARK 1 . The characteristic of the pure stem, e. g. IT in THI-H is called the pure characteristic ; that of the impure stem, e. g. TTT in TUTTT-W, the impure characteristic. 3. The stem of many verbs is strengthened also by length- ening the short stem-vowel in the Pres. and Impf. ; this short rowel reappears in the second Aor., and in liquid verbs, in the Fut. Thus, a is changed into t\ in mute verbs, e. g. (e-A.a&-oj/) a at in liquid verbs, ' ((pav-u) tpaivca e " et in liquid verbs, " ((p&ep-u) <}>&eipvy-ov) REM. 2. This strengthening of the stem distinguishes the Impf. Ind. and Opt. from the same modes of the second Aor. ; likewise the Pres. Subj. and Impf. from the same modes of the second Aor., e. g. %Kpaov tttpayov, Kpdoi/j.i {pdyoi/j-i, Kpdfa Kpayw, Kpdfc Kpdye ] eAeiTroi/ HXltrov, \fiiroi[u XtiroifJ.1, \tjra>, } 140.] VERBS. - CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOWEL. 169 $ 140. Change or Variation of the Stem-vowel. 1. The change or variation of the stem- vowel [$ 138, 1 (c)], occurs only in the Secondaiy tenses, with the exception of a few first Perfects. 2. Most mute and all liquid verbs, with a monosyllabic stem, and with c as a stem-vowel, take the variable a in the second Aor., e. g. rpfir-w, to turn, Aor. II. Act. f-rpair-ov KAeW-w, to steal, " Pass. f-K\a.ir-i\v Tpe-, to nourish, " -Tpa-fjv -a>, to turn, " e-ffrpa), eVrpe^^i/ (fr. (TTpetpo)), belong more to poetry than prose ; tK\t, have no first Aor. Pass. The variable a does not occur in polysyl- lables, e. g. ^yyeA.oi', TjyyeA.Tji', &fyt\ov, ^yep6(JLnv. KEMARK 1. As this variable vowel distinguishes the Impf. from the second Aor. Act., e. g. %Tpeirov (Impf.), erpanw (Aor. II.), in some verbs of this class (2, above), whose second Aor. Act. is not in use, the variable vowel does not occur in the second Aor. Pass., because that tense cannot be mistaken for the Impf, see 141, Hem., e. g. A 4 IT w, to see, Impf. e-f}\eTr-ov, second Aor. Pass. -/3\eV- nv (first Aor. Pass, is wanting) ; \4y\4y-a,to burn, ^Ae'-y-Tjj/ (more seldom ^Ae'x&rjf ) ; tyeyw, to censure, l-tyey-qv, first Aor. Pass, wanting. HEM. 2. The verb TTA^TTW, to strike, when uncompounded, retains the i\ in the second Aor. and second Put. Pass., but when compounded, it takes the variable a; thus, ^-v\-fiy-T\v, TrA7jyi}(ro^cu, Qt-ir\ay-t)v, /care-irAay-Tji/, e/c-TrAdyij- ,Aor.rT77{a; second Perf. TeVrj/ca, lam melted; second Aor. Pass, tr&env; also first Aor. Pass, frfad'?*', PI- Tim. 61. b., Eur. Supp. 1033. 170 VERBS. - CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOWEL. [$ 140. 3. Liquid verbs with a monosyllabic stem and with e for a stem-vowel, take the variable a, not only in the second Aor., but also in the first Perf. Act., in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and the first Aor. Pass., e. g. (TTcAAw, to send, Put. Pf. f- (poet.), to cause to hope, $o\ira, I hope, Plup. M>\Treiv, I hoped,- 'EPHl, to do, eopya, Plup. Mpyeiv; pty-w/j-i, to break, eppwya, lam broken (but on a-fjvw, see Rem. 2). 5. The following take the variable o in the first Perf. also, contrary to the rule in No. 1. KXeTTTw, to steal, first Perf. /c6/cAo^>o, but Perf. Mid. or Pass. KK\/j.jj.ai (very rare and only poet. K&Xequ/Mtt}. Xryw, to collect, first Perf. . 6. The following mute verbs with a monosyllabic stem, and with e for a stem-vowel, like liquid verbs (No. 3), take the variable a in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. ; still, the a is not found in the first Aor. Pass., as is the case in liquid verbs, e. g. $ 141.] VERBS. REMARKS ON THE SECONDARY TENSES. 171 (rrpfyw, to turn, Pf. Mid. or Pass. $, to turn, " rpe/, -tfjaiVi -nv, -^(To/uu, -a, and -en/) immediately to the pure characteristic of the verb, e. g. f-\"nr-ov, second Aor., but ^-TrcwSeu-tr-a, first Aor. ; partly, in being formed throughout from an unchanged pure verb-stem (except the Perf. which prefers a long vowel, see No. 2), e. g. Aeforw, e-Atir-oj/, vy-ov; and partly, in taking the variable vowel, e. g. , AA0- ; or it retains the long vowel or diph- thong of the Pres., e. g. TTfvrt)v, to put tofliglit), Irpfyfrnv (used more by the 172 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE-VERBS. [$ 142. poets, see 140, 2) ; but in compounds, e. g. fviTpeQ&fjvcu, Antiph. 4. 126, 4. 127, 5). There are but few exceptions to the statement under (b), since the second Aor. Act. and Mid. and the second Aor. Pass., occur but rarely, and mostly in the poet, dialect, e. g. CTVTTOV Eur., and eruTTTji/ ; tXiirov and eA^Tjv ; e/\ei>^?jv, and very seldom f\nr6fjLi)t>. 4. It is rare that a verb has both Aor. forms ; where this is the case, the two forms are used under certain conditions, namely : (a) The two Aor. forms of the Act. and Mid. have a different meaning, i. e. the first Aor. has a transitive meaning, the second Aor., an intransitive. The same is true of the two forms of the Perf., where they are constructed from the same verb. See 249, 2. (b) The two forms of the Aor. belong either to different dialects, or differ- ent periods, or to different species of literature, prose or poetry. Still, in some verbs, both forms occur even in prose, e. g. o7T7j\Aax^ 7 7 / j an &Tii/cu and pxa&rjvat, both for ex. in Thuc. Several verbs in poetry have a second Aor. Act., which in prose have commonly a first Aor. only, e. g. Kreit/u, to kill, Aor. prose, e/cTeu/a, poet. ZKT&VOV and e/croi/. (c) The two Aorists stand in such a relation to each other, that the forms of one Aorist take the place of the forms of the other not in use, and in this way each supplies, respectively, the place of the other, as will be seen under the verbs rtdrifu and Si A. FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE-VERBS. $ 142. Classes of Mute Verbs. Mute verbs are divided, like mute letters, into three classes, according to their characteristic ; in each of these classes, verbs with a pure characteristic in the Pres. and Impf. are distinguished from those with an impure charac- teristic ( 139, Rem. 1) : 1. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Pi-mute (ft, TT, $ pure characteristic; TTT ([ 24, 1] impure characteristic), e.g. (a) Pure characteristic: tre/ATr-co, to send; rpift-co, to rub ; ypd(j)-a}, to write ; (b) Impure characteristic : TUTTT-G), to strike (pure char- acteristic TT, pure stem TTJI) ; ft\a7rr-co, to injure (ft, BAAB) ; pbrr-to, to hurl (<, f PI<). 2. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Kappa-mute (K, 7, ^ * 143.] MUTE VERBS. REMARKS ON THE CHARACTERISTIC. 173 pure characteristic ; a-a- or Attic rr [ 24, 1] impure characteristic), e. g. (a) Pure characteristic: TrXe/c-to, to weave; cuy-co, to lead; reu^-cu, to prepare; (b) Impure characteristic: (frplo-cr-a), Ait. pLrr-co, to shudder (pure characteristic K, pure stem <&PIK) ; Tacrcr-a), Att. Tarr-co, to arrange (7, TAP) ; ^crcr-Q), Att. pqrr-a), to cough (%, BHX). 3. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Tau-mute (r, 8, S-, pure characteristic ; [ 24, 1] impure characteristic), e.g. (a) Pure characteristic : avvT-co, to complete ; aS-co, to sing ; Trefe-co, to persuade ; (b) Impure characteristic : <^/?af-o), to say (pure charac- teristic S, pure stem &PAA). 143. Remarks on the Characteristic. \. The following mute verbs in -ITTW and - (-TTCO) form the Secondary tenses, especially the second Aor. Pass., and have for their characteristic : IT: K\eirT-a>, to steal; K^TTT-W, to cut; Tt/irr-ai, to strike (second Aor. Passive l-K\&ir-t)v, etc.). : ft\dtrr- : fidirr-u, to tinge ; Stdirr-, to dig (second Aor. Pass. e-jSa^-Tj*/, t-r&Q-nv, f-rpv(f>-i}Vy tp'-p&Q-'ni', 4p'-pt-i)v and ^ppiip^v, t-critaQ- nv). K: 4>pt, etc. ; still, Keipeiv is commonly used for ireta-civ with the meaning to shear, and KTfvifatv and fcatvfiv with the meaning to comb ; rlKT-u (formed from TI-TCK-O)), to beget, Fut. re'lo/tcw, second Aor. Act ere/col/, second Perf. TCTO/CO. 3. The following verbs in - (non-Attic ap/no'Cw), to Jit, Fut. -6; /J\fTT, to take honey, Fut. -iau; ftpdffffta (non- Attic fipd(ca), to shake ; e p e , to row, Fut. -4, to scatter, Fut. -< ; IT A a er - trw, to form, Fut. -ckrw; irrfo-o-w, to husk, Fut. -f ff a- Tro),to hunger ; oyeipcarru, to dream ; v TT v da r r w, to be sleepy. 4. The following verbs in -a era) vary between the two formations : v d , etc. ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. veVa, whose pure characteristic is a Tau-raute, commonly 5, there are only a few primitives, e.g. eojueu, Poet., /co&c'fouat, prose, / seat myself, ?a>, commonly Kc&ify, to seat; alvum dejicere ; yet there are very many derivatives, namely, all in -cJ and most in -tfy, e. g. &f0, ejKctCw, etc. 6. Verbs in - , whose pure characteristic is a Kappa-mute, commonly 7, are mostly Onomatopoetics, i. e. words whose sound corresponds to the sense ; the greater part of these denote a call, or sound, e. g. aid , to groan, Fut. ma|o>; a\a\d(o, to shout (av$dcurbai, to speak, Aor. wanting in Her.); ypvfa, to grunt; /cofo>, to squeak, to grunt (like a swine), Fut. KO?|O> ; Kpdta, to scream, Aor. fKpayov, Kp(6, to whip ; 68dou, to scratch ; o t /* c o>, to lament, Fut. ol/j.uo/j.ai ; o \ o \ i) , to cry out, to shout ; pvff- rd v f co, to throb ; rpl o>, to chirp (rerplya, Ion. and poet.) ; $ \ v ^w, to bubble, and the Poet. & d (>, to prate, Fut. j8d|w, third Pers. Perf. Mid. or Pass. fifpoKTai ; ft p t , to divide, to kill ; t\f\la, to whirl, to tumble; tvapica, spolio ; p eca, to do (eopya). 7. The following verbs in - o> vary between the two modes of formation : fia, to lift up, to support, Fut. -dcrto, etc., Aor. ^affrdx^nv ; Siffrd , to doubt, Siffrda'd}, from which the verbal Subst. SKrray/j.6s and Sicrraffis ; vvff- r d , Aor. frv, to jest, Fut. Trat^ov/jLat and Tralo/j.at, Aor. Att. !7rara (in later writers firai^a, TreTraixa), Perf. Mid. or Pass. Att. TreVato-^at (in later writers TreVaty/wu, 4vcdx^nv) 5 verbal Adj. iraurrcos ; ap-rrd^ta, to rob, Att. apTrd, Aor. e/cAo7|a; TrXci^w (poet.) to cause to wander, Fut. TAcfylw, etc. Aor. Pass. fTr\dyx&nv ; ffa\iriw, to blow a trumpet, Fut. -iyfr, etc. (later also -Iffw, etc.) 144. Formation of the Tenses. Mute verbs form the Fut. and the first Aor. Act. and Mid. with the tense-characteristic pa ; voplfa, to think, 4v6i or -ei&a, e. g. enreVS-w, Fuk (trvfj/S-ffoa) o"irei&ai instead of KfKpty&cu (/cKpuiyai, * <) (a) Pure Characteristic, , IT,

Imp. Tpl)8-e Inf. rpip-eiv Part, rpifr-uv Ind. f-rplp-oi/ Opt. rptp-oifu Ind. (rf-rpl0-a) r4-rpis Ind. (ii-re-rptft-eiv) t-re-rpty-eiv Opt. re-rphp-oi/M Ind. (rp/jS-crw) rptyw Opt. Tptyoipi Inf. 7ptyetj/ Part, rptyeov Ind. e-rpt^o Subj. r/jfyw Opt. rpl^oup.o.i. Imp. rpfyov Inf. rpT^ Part, MIDDLE. Ind. Tpifi-ofjuu Subj. rptp-(ofj.ai Imp. rprjS-ou Inf. Tpf-eos Inf. Te-Tp/i//6(r,^ot Part, re-rpi^/6- PASSIVE. . Subj. rpuf>-bS> Opt. rpiQ-bei-nv Inf. . r .^ _, Imp. rpi-frn-frr)v F. I. Ko-frf) 2- 3. P. l.j 2. 3. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. /ceca/ijuevoy, 17, -ov Subjunctive. Verbal adjective : Kafj.irir6s, -/;, -6v, Kafj-Trreos, -re'a, -Te'oj/. ^ 147. B. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Kappa- mute (y, /c, x)- (a) Pure Characteristic, 7, K, x- (b) Impure Characteristic in the Pres. and Impf., cr. T&r, Att. Tarrw, to arrange. ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. MIDDLE. Pres. Perf. Fut. F.Pf. (Tre'-irAe/c-a) irAe'/f-o/xat (7re'-7rAec-/xai) ToW-o/iat Te-ra|oaat PASSIVE. Aor. I. Fut. I. A. II. F. II. l--ir\dK-nv and Verbal adjective : 7rXe/cT({s, -T\, -6v ; irAe/c-reos, -Tea, TeW ; TOKT^S, rcucrfos. 178 PARADIGMS OP MUTE VERBS. 148. Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. TCUTO-W, to arrange, and pa-areo %-Qpa-ffA ( (stem 2*AA), Fut. o-^oX-w, first Aor. e-ff^A-a, Perf. EEMARK 1. The endings of the Fut. in liquid verbs, namely, -w, -ovfjuu, arc formed by contraction from -eVcw, -eVo/ucw after the rejection of cr ( 20, 3). The inflection of these contracted endings is like that of contracts in -e' in the Pres. Act. and Mid.: i\-ovfj.ai ( 135) ; a- is omitted in the Fut. of liquid verbs, to prevent the harshness occasioned by the combination of that letter with the preceding liquid. The Fut. Perf. is wanting in liquid verbs. 2. The Present tense of Liquid verbs, with the exception of a few whose stem-vowel is e, is strengthened, either by doubling the characteristic X, or by inserting the liquid v after the characteristic ; also, by lengthening the short stem- vowel, as in all verbs in -tvw, -vvco, -vpco, or by changing it into a diphthong ( 16, 3), e. g. alv-co (stems 2$AA, TEM, KPIN(t), ^MTN(i)), KTEN, $AN) ; but ph-v, vk^<*> with a pure stem. 3. Except the Pres. and Impf. the tenses are formed from the pure stem, but the final vowel of the stem is lengthened in the first Aor. Act. and Mid. (see No. 5), e. g. (Z&AA), Fut. o-r)\-a. The second Aorists Act. and Mid. rarely occur, and scarcely at all in 180 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. [$ 149. prose ; on the contrary, the second Aor. Pass, is more in use than the first Aor. ; the first Aor. is wholly wanting in many verbs. 4. In liquid verbs with an impure characteristic, the ground-form of the stem is not borrowed, as in the case of mute verbs, from the second Aor., but from the Fut., since only a few verbs of this class form a second Aor. Act. and Mid. 5. Liquid verbs are divided into four classes according as the stem-vowel of the Fut. is a, e, I, or v before the ending -. In the first Aor. Act. and Mid. a is lengthened into 77, e into ei, I into l y v into v ( 16, 3). Thus : I. Class with o in the Future. Pres. Fut. Aor. ff -(pi]V-a. n. Class with e in the Future. fiey-w, to remain, fifv-> ayye'AA-w, to announce, ayye\-ca 7fjLv-ca, to cut, rffjL-w wanting vffj.-o), to divide, vefj.-S> -vei/j.-a Kreiv-tc, to kill, KTSV-W lfj.eip-u, to desire, t/tep-w HI. Class with t in the Future. T&A-w, to pluck, TiA.-w -TiA.-a Kpiv-(o, to separate, Kp1v-> e-Kplv-a IV. Class with in the Future. ffVp-o), to draw, avp-u <[-a, KOiXavai) : \euKaivca, to whiten ; opyatvo), to enrage ; ire-ira'tvo), to ripen ; also all verbs in -pa.ivaiVo>), Trapco^vyKa^ Polyb. (from Trapogvvco, to excite). But the form in -y/ca is found only among later writers. The best writers endeavor to avoid it, sometimes by dropping the v, e. g. Ke/cpZ/ca, /ceK\l/ca from Kpivw, K\IVW (so also /ce/cepSd/ca, among later writers, also /cetcepScvy/ca, but /ce/cepbrjica, Dem. 56, 30. from Kep&aivco) ; or also, as in /creiva), by using the form of the second Perf., e. g. aTre/crova, in the sense of the first Perf. (eicrarjica, e/craKa, from the time of Maenander), or, as in the case of verbs in -eva), by not forming any Perf., as, e. g. in fjuevco, by forming it from a new theme, as /te/^e- vrjica from MENEn. 7. The three following verbs with the characteristic v drop that letter, not only in the Perf. and Plup. Act., but also in the Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, and in the first Aor. Pass. : to separate, /ce/cpi/ca /ce/cpt/tat K\tvu>, to bend down, Ke'/c\j/ca /ce/cAi/iat ^/cAferji/ (the 2d Aor. iKXtvrjv is rare). , to wash, (ireir\vita) ireV\u/u tirXvfrriv (Hippoc.) EEM. 3. Telva, to stretch, and Krelvw, to kill, form the above-mentioned tenses from new themes, viz. TAn, KTANH, KTAX1, thus : (and e/croyKo) ^/cTa^at ^/crd^jj/ (fKTdvfrrjv among the later writers); yet the forms of fcre^w here presented, are not Attic. The Attic writers use &CTOI/O as the Perf. Act. (see No. 6), and instead of e/cra/ncu and eVrc&rji', sub- stitute Te&jrjKo and airfbavov in passive phrases with \nr6 and the Gen., or ainjpriiJMi and avypffrriv, without a preposition. KEM. 4. K/nW, K\ivu, TT\WW, and /crciW, among the poets, often retain v in the first Aor. Pass, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. lK\(vdrqv t lTr\vvfri]v; in prose, these forms seem to be doubtful, yet /ectTe/cAh'&ij is found in X. Hell. 4. 1, 30, in all the copies. 8. On the formation of the Perf. Mid., the following points should be noted: Verbs in -aivu and w/w, usually drop the v before the endings beginning with fiy and insert a-ff-iJ.ai 7re-ieu ; 7repa/j/a> TreW- paff/j.a.i ', paivu fppa.fffj.cu ', ito.\\)v< Trfirdxv(rfJ.ai ; TjSiW v^Sixr/xat ; \firrvvw \f\eir- n\vv Te^TjA.uarjv-a, second Perf. ire-fyrfv-a] but cr7retp-o>, Fut. GTrep-5), second Perf. e-cnrop-a. REM. 6. Second Aorists Act. and Mid. are rare in liquid verbs, e. g. ^8oA(fyi7jj', e/fcu/oi/, fTTTapov (doubtful in prose) from /JaAAw, *eatVa>, irralpu, v, pw, (TTeAAw, (paivw, /xcuVw, K\iv, ayyei\aifj.i, &yyfi\ov, &yyei\ai, ayyfl\as Ind. tfyyeX-ov Subj. Opt. ayyeAot^ut Imp. ^776X6 Inf. ayyeAeiV Part. ayyeXwv , -ovffa, -6v. 151.] PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. 183 MIDDLE. Pcrf. Ind. S. 1. 2. 3. D.I. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3. elffi(v) Imperative. Infinitive. ^77\-^cu Participle. Subjunctive. S> Plup. Ind. Fut. Ind. S. 1. 2. 3. D.I. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3. , -fj.&a, -de, faav ayye \-ovfif da ' Opt. ayy\-olfj.r]V ayyek-dio ayyeA.-o?To d-yyeA.-oticr&e Infinitive. Participle. Aor I. Aor. II. (rare) Ind. fryyetA.-ci/iTjj/, etc. Ind. 7J77fA.-d\\u, fnllo; Qalvw, to show, Mid. to appear. ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. MIDDLE. Pres. Perf. I. Perf. II. Fut. Aor. I. a\ov/j.a'. wanting 7r6-7jj/-o, 1 appear, Qaiv-ofjuu Tf-ipaff-fJUU 1 I shall appear, airoQ., I shall affirm. 2 Prose dire., it was affirmed In/ me. PASSIVE. Aor. I. Fut. I. Aor. II. Fut. II. a\-frfidt'-frr)v, I appeared, f)(ro/Jiai , I appeared, Verbal adjective : o-oA-T6oy, -rco, -Ttov, ov-Teos. 184 PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. [$$ 152, 153. Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, of (patv-w, to show ; |7jpaj/-co, to dry, and reiv-ta ( 149, Hem. 3), to stretch. Ind. S. 1. 2. 3. D.I. 2. 3. P.I. 2. 3. re- tyav-frov Imp. S. 2. 3. D. 2. 3. P. 2. 3. T6-Td-(TOt Tt-ra-Tcu re-ra-a&e re-ra-vrcu re ra-ffo re-rd- tr&u , or Inf. Part. 152. (b) with e in the Future: 'r/ue/p-w (Ion. and Poet.), to desire, and , to send. ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. MIDDLE. Pres. Perf. I. Fut. Aor. I. ifj-flp-w t/JLCp-KO, Ifiep-S} '1/j.fip-a i/j.eip-0/j.ai 'l/j,cp-/j.ai lfj.fp-ovp.ai ifj.eip-d/*i)v (TTCAX-W f-(TTa\-Ka (TTf\-U -V-OVfJL(U f-fj.6\vv-a Verbal Adj. Ti\-r6s, TiA-reos, aff-fj.ai, that of ^(r%u/u- ^tat (from cuVxui'-w, to sAame), like 4-^pa/jL-fj.ai. 154.] PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. 185 , to lend down; ir\dv-(i), to wash, with v dropped ( 149, 7). Pres. Perf. Fut. Aor. I. ACTIVE. MIDDLE. K\tv-OfJ. (K\&W seldom, and without contraction), to weep, K\avffofj.ai or K\avffov/j,ai (No. 3), K\a.vff, but is omitted where it comes between two vowels ; it appears, however, in the Fut., as it there stands before the consonant (x e/J ^>> X 6 ^ w )) to P our out -> differs from the pi ceding verbs: Fut. x e/a >j Fut. Mid. x^ t jial ( see No. 4); Aor. e^eo, Subj. Inf. xeoz, Imp. x 6/ol/ > X e ^ Ta >> etc > Aor. Mid. ^x e ^W ( see No. 7); Perf. A< /ce'xwca; Perf. Mid. or Pass, jclxfyuu; Aor. Pass. ^x^7"5 ^ ut - ^erf- X^ ( 223, E. 2). The forms with eu belong only to the Epic; Fut. x 6 ^; 3. The circumflexed Put. in -ovpai which properly belongs to liquid verbs only, is used by the Doric writers with other verbs also, whose Future would regularly be in -o-w or -o-o/xat, e. g. TUI//XO, -flevy-a, to flee, Fut. TTOI^-W, to sport, " 7rcuoD / ucu " 7rai|ojttot XeC' w > alvum exonerare, " x* " "!" 11 ), to fall, " ireffov/jiai (lIETil) to inquire, TTfvcrovfj.ai, usually irevffop.a.i y and also in those mentioned under No. 2 : /cAai'w, 7rAw, irvew, j/cw 4. Future without the tense-characteristic. The Fut. of the following verbs, being without the Fut. characteristic a-, and having the inflection of the Present, takes entirely the form of a Present, viz. : 5-w, Epic, usually &rd-o>, to eat, Fut. eS-tyiat ; irlv- X e ^> etc< j ^ ut - Mid. x^ - 1 ( see Rem. 1 ). 5. Also two mute verbs take the Future form of liquid verbs in -ov/mt without o- : , to fight, Fut. /j.ax-ov/j.ai (formed from the Ion. fj.ax-fffofn.ai). ('EAn), to s#, Fut. 6. The Flit Perf. of the following verbs has an Act. form: , to die, Perf. T&Sh/Tj/ca, I am dead, Fut. Perf. Te3r^| or -ofj.ai, I shall be dead ; , to station, Perf. lo-ry^-a, 7 stand, Fut. Perf. fpa> ('ErKfl), to bear, first Aor. 1}vfyK-a (second Aor. Ijvfynov) ; x, %X* a ( see EEM. 2. In the second Aor. fircrov, from HET-w (Trtirr-ca), to fall, the ff is not the tense-characteristic, but belongs to the stem, the r having here been changed into a- (Dor. firerov). The first Aor. eirco-a, is late ; in Eurip. Ale. 471 and Troad. 294, the readings are not sufficiently confirmed. 8. The following pure and impure verbs form the Perf. Subj. and Plup. Opt. Mid. or Pass, without the aid of the auxiliary ei/u; the impure verbs by assuming an e as their characteristic in forming the tenses, become analogous to pure verbs : i, lobtain, Perf. JC&TWMU, I possess, Subj. /ce/crw/icw, -77, -rjrai; Plup. I possessed, Opt. KficnffjLriv, Kfttrfjo, KfKrpro or /ce/cT, to throw (BAA), Perf. jSc^ATj^eu, second Pers. PI. Perf. Subj. 5iae- 0\r), to wake, second Aor. rjyp6fjLijv (also the Inf. fypeffSai with the accent of the Pres.), I awoke (rryepdr??, I was awake), (ex or i syncopated.) tpxofuu, to go, second Aor. ^A&ov, Inf. eA&e?i/, etc., from 'EAET0I1 (u synco- pated), ( 167, 2.) oT/wu, to suppose, instead of ofyiuw, instead 188 VERBS. METATHESIS. [$ 156. 2. This Syncope plication ; thus, e. g. 2. This Syncope occurs most frequently after the redu- j a. In the Present: i, to become, instead of yi-yevofj.au, stem TENil. fj.ifj.va>, to remain. Poet., instead of fj.i-fj.evu. TTITTTW, to fall, instead of iri-ireTw, stem IIETfl. TrnrpdcTKca from irepda). b. In the Perfect: ireTdwv/j.1, to spread out, ireTrrojuat; vfirruita (from HETH), to fall. $ 156. Metathesis. 1. Metathesis ( 22) occurs in the formation of the tenses of several verbs, most frequently in the Perf., Plup., first Aor. Pass., and first Fut. Pass, (seldom in the second Aor. Act.), sometimes also in the Pres., both for the sake of an easier or more euphonic form, and, in poetry, for the sake of making a syllable long by position. 2. In the Common language, the following verbs are subject to Metathesis : &d\\w,to throw, Put. pa\S> (f3a\\-fiffa>, Aristoph. Vesp. 222); Aor. Aor. Mid. ef3a\6fir)V : BAA: Perf . 6)8X07 /co; Perf. Mid. or Pass. fjiai] Aor. Pass. ^jSX^&Tjj'; Fut. Pass. 0A?jdVo,ucu ; Put. Perf. 5afj.da>, usually da.fj.dfy, to tame, Fut. Sajuaaw; Aor. e'SdyUcwra; AMA:. Perf. SeS- ^UTJKO; Perf. Mid. or Pass. SeSfj.-nfj.ai ; Aor. Pass. fSfj.^^T] Sefj.0), to build (mostly Poet, and Ion.) ; Aor. Act. eSet/xo ; Aor. Mid. AME: Perf. SeS^/ca; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ScS^rj/iot. & v -f) , IT \dd-w; Aor. Pass. irc\d; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Att. ir t IT \ a fiat. (b) The same holds also in the stem of the verb &P&TTU, to disturb (formed from ropeiTTw, rpadrro)), an Attic form of rapdtrffw ; Aor. 157. Verbs in -w with the Stem of the Present strengthened. 1. It has already been seen ($$ 138-140), that the stem of many verbs is strengthened in the Present ; but this strength- ening remains only in the Present and Imperfect. Besides the modes of strengthening already mentioned, by T (TTT, KT), o- (cro-, ), and by lengthening the stem-vowel, there are others, which will now be specified. REMARK. All the forms which are assumed for the sake of constructing the tenses in use, are indicated by capitals ( 138, 3). The abbreviations, D. M., signify Deponent Middle, and D. P., Deponent Passive ( 102, 3). The /t*, placed in parenthesis, shows that the form standing before it, is analogous to the con- jugation in -/JLI, to be treated below. See 191. 4158. I. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. and Impf. by inserting v before the ending. PRELIMINARY REMARK. Balvw lengthens the stem- vowel a into ou; a into av ; Sbi/w and irba, v and I into and f. 1. BcuVw, to go (BA-), Fut. ^O-O/ACU; Perf. /3e/fyca ($ 194, 2); second Aor. ly&yv (/xi, $ 191); the Pass, occurs in compounds, e. g. dva/Jcuvo/xai, dvayS^Sa/xat, 7rapa/3e/3a/Aai, dvcySa-^v, [ft 130 (c), and 131, 5]. Verbal adjectives, ySaro'?, ySa REMARK. First Aor. Act. /37jera, and Fut. /3^) has in the Pres., in the Fut Svo-w and first Aor. Act. eSvo-o, a transitive signification, to wrap up, to immerse, 190 VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. fr 158. to sink; (so also Perf. in X. An. 5. 8, 23, dTroSe'Si'Ko/;) Aor. Pass. I8&V; Fut. Pass. S^o-opu [$ 130 (b),2J. But the Mid. Svofjiat, 6VSu/mi, ovcro/Aat, l&vcrdfJiTrjv, signifies to wrap up one's self, to go into, or under, to clothe one's self; likewise the Perf. Sc'Sviea and the Aor. 2, -as, etc. poetic, yet also in X. Cy. 8. 3, 32. cra-eXa, Imp.) ; Fut. cXaaw (in later writers, though also X. An. 7. 7, 55. eXao-oi/ras), commonly Att. eXw, -as, -a, Inf. eXav ($ 117); Aor. jjfXaou; Perf. cX^Xa/ca; Mid. to drive from me, Aor. rjXaa-a^rjv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eX^Xa/xai ; Inf. IX-rj- Aaav&u [j 124, 2 (a)] ; Aor. Pass. ^Xa-V [a in the tense-forma- tion, $ 130 (c) ; without $avio, to anticipate, Fut. <^o-o/xai, more rarely <#acrco, e g. X. Cy. 5. 4, 38. 7. 1, 19; first Aor. t^ao-a, and (in prose more seldom) second Aor. l^v (/u, 191) ; Perf. l^aKa. In Pres, and Impf. a in Epic, a in Attic. 8. $bivu> (poet., rarely prose and only in the Pres., e. g. PL Phaedr. 246, c. Symp 211, a.), to perish (seldom to consume), Fut. Q&fow and Aor. e^d-uro, trans. to consume. Intrans., Fut. 4&iVo/icu; Perf. edfyu, %&foyu, Opt. Qblpiiv, ^tro, Imp. Qfrlff&w, Inf. $ 159.] VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 191 Part. <^e>os, c. g. X. Cy. 8. 7, 18. rots ^ipfvots, the dead (/it, $ 192). Verbal Here belong also three verbs, whose pure stem ends with a consonant : 9. SaKvw, to bite, Aor. cSoucov ; Fut. 8$b/u (late 8^w) ; Perf. Apr. Se&jxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Se'Sryy/Aai; Aor. Mid. ( Hippoc.) ; Aor. Pass. &tjxfh]v ; Fut. Pass. S^X^O-O/ACU. 10. Ka/tma, to Zafor, to be weary, Aor. eKa/nov; Fut. Perf. jccK/upca ($ 156, 2). 11. T/xvw, to CM, Ftlt. re/xai; Aor. ere/xov (era/xov, $ 140, 2); Perf. Tcr/xT/Ka (^ 156, 2) ; Mid. to cut for one's self (something) ; Aor. Mid ere/xo/^v; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Te'r/^/xcu (Subj. Tc ^ov, $ 154, Hem. 3); Aor. Pass. CT/A^V; Fut. Perf. Verbal Adj. $ 159. II. Fer&s, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. and Impf. by inserting the syllable vc before the ending. 1. fiv-vw, to stop up, Fut. /2ixra> ; Aor. !/?v^w, Aor. rjfjLTTurxov, d/ATrwrxetv, Fut. d/>t^>c^o/xat ; Aor. and ^/xTreaxoft^v (^ 126, 1). 192 . VERBS WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 160. $ 160. III. Verbs, whose Pure Stein is strengthened in the Pres. and Impf. by inserting the syllable a.v, more rarely aiv, before the ending. a. Q.V or aiv is inserted without any change. PKELIMINART REMARK. All verbs of this kind form their tenses from a threefold stem, viz. the Pres. and Impf. from the strengthened stem, the second Aor. from the pure stem, the Fut. and Perf. from a third stem, consisting of a pure stem and an assumed e, which is changed in the inflection into t\ ; hence the Fut. and Perf. are formed like the same tenses of verbs in -4o>. The o in the ending -dv Inf. aTrcx^eo-^ai with irregular accent; Fut. ob-ex^o'cpu ; Perf. dTnfo^juai, I am hated. 4. auava) (and cu5a>), to increase, Fut. a^^crw; Aor. Perf. r/v^7]Ka ; Mid. and Pass, to thrive, Perf. iyv^/xat ; Fut. cro/xat and avr)$r)(rop.aL ; Aor. rjvr)97)v. 5. fiXao-Tavo), to sprout, Aor. efiXao-rov (later e^SXacrr^o-a) ; Fut. y8A.ao-r^o-a) ; Perf. e/JAao-rrj/ca and ^Xaa-njKa ( 123, 2). 6. Sap&xi/co, commonly in composition, KaraS., to s/eep, Aor. Kare'Sap^ov ( KaraSap^evra, Aristoph. Plut. 300) ; Fut. KaTaSap^ao- /xai; Perf. KaraSeSap^Ka. 7. tavw and fco^i^avw, secondary form of ?uxt, to smell, Aor. (uo-^potoyv ; Fut. Prcs. opao-frai was a rare Attic form ; Aor. caar(ppT]ffdfj.ijy and late. 12. o^Xio-Kavo) (rare Inf. o?a-a, Lys. 13, 65. and by later writers) ; Fut. 6X?jo-\r)Ka ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. b. o.v is appended to the pure stem, and v is inserted before the Characteristic-consonant. PRELIMINARY KEMARK. The short vowel in the middle of the pure stem is changed into a long one, in inflection. The v is subject to the usual changes before the Pi and Kappa-mutes ( 19, 3). 13. epvyyavw (instead of cpv-v-yavco), ructo, Aor. r/pvyoi/, Fut. 14. #ryyai/a>, to touch, Aor. $iyov; Fut. 9iopcu.. 15. Xay^avw, to obtain by lot, Aor. eXa^ov; Fut. X^o/xat; Perf. (rarely XeXoy^a from AEFX-, comp. TreTrov^a, 7ra$e/, TTCJ/- ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ctX?/y/tai (^ 123, 4) ; Aor. Pass. eX^^v. Verbal Adj. X^KTCOS. 16. Xa/x/Javco, to to;7i;e, Aor. eXaySov, Imp. Xa/?e and Attic Xa/? [HI 8, 3 (a)]; Fut. X^o/xat; Perf. ctX^a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eiX^ju/u 123, 4), (XeX>7/xa6 Aesch. Ag. 876) ; Aor. Mid. Aor. Pass. eXrJ^^v ; Fut. Pass. X^&jo-opu. Verbal Adj. 17. Xav^avw (poet, and also X. O. 7, 31, also XiJ&o), to cealedy Aor. IXa^oi/ (I. Aor. eXi;o-a late in simple words) ; Fut. Xiyo-w; Perf. XeX^a, J aw concealed; Mid. Xav^avo//,at (Ion. and poet, also X^o/xat), in prose tTrtX. (seldom euX.), to forget, Fut. X^o-o/xat; Perf. XeXr/tr/xat (^ 131) ; Aor. eXcu^o^v; Fut. Perf. XeX^- o-o/xat, Eur. Ale. 1981. 18. Xt/x,7ravw, rare secondary form of Xewroo. 19. /xav^ai/w, to learn, Aor. l/*,a$oi/; Fut. /xa^o-o/xat ; Perf. //.e/xa^/ca. The a remains short, and the Fut. and Perf. are formed from the stem MA0E, according to No. a. Verb. Adj. 20. Trw^avouai, to inquire, to perceive, Aor. eTrv^ott^v ; Perf. TTC- 17 194 VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 161. Trw/itu, TreTruo-at, etc. ($ 131); Fut. Trewro/Aat (very rarely TTCVO-OV- /u,ai, $ 154, 3). Verb. Adj. Treuorrds, Treuareos. 21. rvyxavw, to happen, Aor. erfyov; Fut. re^o/xat (TEYX-) ; Perf. TTvxr)Ka (TYXE- according to No. a). The transitive of this verb is the poetic rev^co, paro. 22. , to flee, Fut. eVKTO, e. g. evp-la-Kw, Fut. efy^-, yrjpdffKw. 1. aX-iV/c-ojLuu, to be taken, to be conquered, with this meaning, is used as the Pass, of cupe'co, Impf. yXLo-Kopyv; fAAO-) Fut. cUW>o-o/xo-Ka>, to eat (Fut. Att. eSo/>tat from ecr^iw, second Aor. e$?jj/io-K&> (mostly Poet.), to ca/Z, to make known, Fut. 77a>j/Va> j Aor. fyey(amr)j/e/Tw, Xen., 767WJ/6?*', Poet., seldom prose, e. g. PL Hipp. M. 292, d, from the Prim. 8. yr/pao-Kw (or yr)pa.w), senesco, to grow old, Fut. yiypao-o/xat (sel- dom y7pacra> Plato) ; Aor. ey^/adcra (in Aesch. Suppl. 901., Trans. to cause to grow old}, Inf. y^pao-tu (instead of it yrjpavai, from an old second Aor. ey^pttv, was preferred by the Attics, /At, 192, 1) ; Perf. yeyTJpaKa, Jam old. 9. yiyW)o-Ka> (ylj/oxrKa)), cognosco, to know (FNO-), Fut. yvwo-o- /tat; second Aor. cyvwi/ (/zi, $ 191); Perf. eyvcoKa; Perf. Mid. or Pass, lyvoxryaat (^ 131) ; Aor. Pass, eyvwo-^v; Fut. Pass. yvwo-^TJ- crop.a.i. Verbal Adj. yvwcrro? (old form yi/wros), yvcooreo?. 10. StSpao-Kto, ^o rww away (only in compounds, e. g. 0.77-08., exS., 8ta8.), Fut. Spao-ofuu; Perf. 8c8pd/ca; second Aor. ISpdv (/xt, $ 192, I)- 11. evptb-Kcu, to find, second Aor. eupov; Imp. cvpe [^ 118, 3 (a)]; C EYPE ') Fllt ev/^o-w; Perf. evp^a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eup^/xat; Aor. Pass, evpe^v [$ 130 (d)] ; Fut. Pass, evp^o-o/xcu ; Mid. to obtain, Aor. evpo'/^i/ (Aug. $ 121, Rem.). Verbal Adj. evpero?, eupT/reos. 12. fjfido-Kw, pubesco, to become marriageable, Fut. i^o-w ; Aor. TJ/Bya-a ', Perf. rjftyKa (f)j3d(o, to be young, but dny^dw, to become young again). 13. ^V^O-KO), commonly aTro^r/TJo-Kco, to ^Zz'e (Metathesis, $ 156, 2), (AN-) Aor. aTre'&xvov (Poet. Uavov; ^a^wv, ot ^avoVrcs, tAfi 196 VERBS IN -W WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 161. dead, aj.so in prose) ; Fut. d7ro.Wojuai (Poet, ^avov/w-ai) ; Perf. TtSwjKa (not aTTore^^/ca) both in prose and poetry, re$va//,ev ($ 194), etc., Inf. re^avai; Fut Perf. re^/^w ($ 154, 6), and among later writers redi/i^o/xat, / shall be dead. Verbal Adj. SVTJTOS, mortal. 14. $POJO-KW ($ 156, 2), to spring, to leap, Aor. e^opov; Fut. Sopovpai ; Perf. re^opa. 15. LXda-KOfjLai, to propitiate, Fut. iXoo-o/xai ; Aor. I. tAao-apyv ; Aor. Pass. tXao-^v. 16. //-e^'cr/cco, to intoxicate, Fut. //.e^vo-w; Aor. e//,e'$uo-a. But /Ae^vw, to 6e intoxicated (only Pres. and Impf), borrows its tenses from the Passive, e. g. c/Ac&xr&p/ ($ 131). 17. fjufMnfja-Kd), to remind (MNA-), Fut. //.VTJO-W ; Aor. fyanrjo-a ; Mid. to remind one's self, to remember, also to mention ; Perf. p-e/xv^/Acu, memini, I remember, I am mindful (Redup. $ 123, Hem. 1), Subj. ficfivStfjuiit -77, -^rat ($ 154, 8), Imp. ^i^vrjcro; Plup. e/xe/xv^- /x^v, I remembered, Opt. /Ac/xny/x^i/, -^o, -^ro, or /xe/x,v(o/x,?;i/, -wo, -<3ro ($ 154, 8) ; Fut. Perf. /Ae/xi/^a-o/xai, I shall be mindful (among the Tragedians also, J wz# mention) ; Aor. /xv>;o-^v, J remembered Poet); Fut juv^cr^cro/Mat, I shall remember (o-K(o, to wound, Fut. rpwo-w ; Aor. Irpcoo-a ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Terpoyxcu, Inf. TT/3ojo-$ai, Part. TeTpo>/>tei/os ; Aor. Tp(t)3~r)V ; Fut. TP, to say, to /M'H& (Ind. and Imp. very rare), Impf. ; Fut. TJo-a>; Aor. tyrjaa. (Pass. eao-/cTO, S. Ph. 114). 24. XOO-KW, to gape (XAN-, among the later writers x at/l/w )> Aor. ; Fut. xavoi)/Acu ; Perf. REMARK. In 5t5a, cfoc-eo, the /c belonging to the stem is strengthened by a- prefixed ; hence the K remains in forming the tenses, Fut. SiSd^u ; Aor. 81- 5oo; Perf'. 5e5i'5axo; Perf. Mid. or Pass. SeSiSayfjuu ; Aor. Pass. cSfidxfrnv. Verb. Adj. SjScucrJs, -rcos. The same usage is found in the Epic and poetic verbs, oAdV/co>, a\u, e. g. /, poetic (instead of of the Pres. Inf., which are used even in Attic prose, e. g. ctAe'lw, to ward off, tragic Inf. a\Kc&eiv (stem 'AAK) ; i/tiW, to ward off\ a.fivvd&fu', Impf. T]^vvaStov] Siw/cw, to pursue, Suaicd&fiv, Impf. tSKaKc&ov, also prose ; eftcw, to yzWrf, Impf. cr/co^ov, /cc&oi/ut ; elfryw, to shut up, Impf. and Aor. (tpyo&ov, ?x> to ^ ye > a.Tra, apapiffKw, 230. 1. /?i/?oa>, to make go, to convey, Fut. Att. /?i/3o), -as, -a (still also /tyScurco, X. An. 4, 8, 8. 5. 2, 10). Verbal Adj. ySi^oorcos. 2. ylyvopai (yu/o/xai) instead of ytyei/o/xat ($ 155, 2), to become, to be, (TEN-) Aor. lycvoprjv (late Attic cyevrj^v) ; Flit, yoojcro/zcu (PI. Parm. 141, e. yev^o-eTat, fiet, and moreover yevc^rjo-erat, efficie- tur); Perf. yeyei^/xat, I have become, factus sum, exstiti, and ye'yova with a present signification, lam, implying lam by birth; prjv and yeyova are also used as preterites of ei/xt, to be. 3. 7rtW/xi. 164. VII. Verbs, whose Pure Stem-vowel a zs strengthened in the Pres. and Impf. by i. Here belong the dialectic verbs, mostly Epic and poetic : ayaiopcu, to be in- dignant; 8aiw, to divide and burn ; palofjuu, to rage; vaieo, to dwell. See 230. 165. VIII. Verbs, whose Pure Stem assumes c in the Pres. and Impf. 1. ya/xea>, to marry (of the man), Perf. yeya/x^/ca; but Fut. yfyc,a>; Aor. ey^/aa, y^u-ai (eya/x^o-a first in Menander, then in Lucian. ; ya/x^o-eia? with the better reading ya/x^o-etets in X. Cy. 8. 4, 20). Mid. ya/x,oO/xat (with the Dat), to marry (of the Woman, nubo), Fut. yajuov/zai ; Aor. ey>7/>ta/x^v ; Perf. ycya/x^/xat. Pass, in matrimonium ducor, Aor. eya/x^^v, etc. [$ 130 (d), 2]. 2. y^^ew, Poet., usually Perf. yey^^a (also prose), to rejoice, Fut. yrjSijarta. 3. SoKeco, to 5eem, videor, to think, Fut. 8o^o> (SoK?jo-a> poet); Aor. eSo^a (eSo'^o-a Poet.) ; Aor. Pass. KaraSox^ct?, Antiph. 2. 116, 2; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Se'Soy/im (SeSo'^/xai, Ionic and Eurip.), visus sum. 4. KTvireca (Poet.), to resound, Fut. --{jffci), etc. ; second Aor. SKTVTTOV (Epic and g. 0. C. 1450) ; first Aor. e'/cT^o-o (ib. 1606). 5. /Aaprvpeco, to 6ear witness, Fut. /mprvp^o-w, etc. But /xaprvpo- ftat, Dep. Mid. to ca/Z 05 witnesses. 6. ^upeto, to shear, to shave, Mid. vpo/xat; Aor. c^upa/^v ; but Perf. ^vpyjfj,ai. 7. a>$e'a>, to push, Impf. cto^ow ; Fut. wo-to and w^crw ; Aor. uxra, wo-at ; Perf. ew/ca late, Pint. ; Flit. Mid. wcrojaai ; Aor. eaxra- /A^V; Perf. Mid. or Pass, coxr/uu; Aor. Pass, e^or^i/; Fut Pass. (Aug. ^ 122, 4). Verbal Adj. WO-TOS, -reos. $ 166.] VERBS IN -CO WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 199 $ 166. Verbs, whose Stem is Pure in the Pres. and Impf., but which assume an e in forming the tenses. This change has taken place in the formation of verbs in -ew, partly from necessity, as is the case with verbs whose characteristic is (, >// ; partly for the sake of perspicuity, that the root may not wholly disappear by the introduction of consonants, as in verbs whose characteristic is "*> if, x> a > "> > ot - The e is changed into TJ in inflection. Exceptions : , &x&ofj.ai, and paxopcu [ 130 (d)]. 1. dfSo/icu, to fed shame, to fear (Pres. and Impf. old poetic, in the Common language otSeo/uu), Impf. a,iS6fj.i)v without Aug.; Fut. aiSeffopeu and -fao^ai (&rcu5e, 160, 4. 4. a^o/x,at, to be vexed, Fut. dg^coxy/uu, and in prose usually dx#co-#>7o-o//,cu (both with the same signification) ; Aor. yx^vSw (H31). 5. fioo-Ku), to feed, Fut. /?OO-KT}O-, ^o want, to need, usually Impers. Sei, it is wanting, it is necessary ($ 137, 2), Subj. 807, Part. Se'ov, Inf. Se^; Impf. e8a, Opt. Scot; Fut. SeTyo-et; Aor. e8e>/cr(i/) ; Perf. SeSeryKe^) ; Mid. Se'o/Aai, ^0 weeo?, Fut. Seiycro/xat ; Aor. eSerJ^v ; Perf. 3e8e^/xat. 8. e^e'Aw and e'Aa>, ^o z^7/, Impf. ^eXov and eSeAov; Fut and eA^o- (which is preferred to the other form cA.Kvo-0) from 'EAKY&) ; Aor. eiA/cvcra ($ 122, 3), eXxvo-ai (more common than ct\|a) ; Perf. e?A.Kv/ca ; Mid. to draw to one's self, cA-Kvo-o/xat, eiA/cvcrap^v ; Aor. Pass., Fut. Pass., and Perf. Mid. or Pass, only clX/cvo^v, cAxw^cro/Acu, eiA.KV(r/>uxt. 11. *EIPOMAI, Aor. ^po/x^v, I inquired, ep&r&u, epw/xcu, epoi/^v, epov, epo/xevos ; Fut. epr/cro/xat. The other tenses are supplied by epwrav; but the Aor. ^pamyo-a is rejected. 12. ^pa>, to go forth, Fut. epp^o-w; Aor. ^p/fyo-a; Perf. rjpprjKa. 13. evSco, commonly Ka^evSw, to sfeep, Fut. Ka^evS^o-w ; Aor. rare and late; Perf. wanting (Aug., $} 121, Hem. and 126, 3). Verb. Adj. KaSev&rrreov. 14. ej(w, to have, to hold, Impf. cT^ov (^ 122, 3) ; Aor. rj(ov (instead of l-o-c^ov), Inf. a^eiv, Imp. o-^e?, Trapao^es according to verbs in /u (in composition also tr^e, as Karaoke, Trapaaxe), Subj. 07(o>, -^s, Trapatrxci), Trapda-^^ etc., Opt. oyofyv (ph 192, Kem.), but in compounds Trapacrxoi/xi, etc., Part, o^wv; Fut. e^w and , to swe#, i. e. to ew& a/i ocfe>r, Fut. o^o-w ; Aor. (Perf. oSwSa with the meaning of the Pres. in Homer and the later writers, $ 124, 2). 24. oto/u and ot/xat, to think, second Pers. otei ($ 116, 11); Impf. u>6fji.r)v and w/xiyv ; Fut. oujo-o/xcu ; Aor. w^^v, olrjS^vaL ; Perf. wanting. (Aug., $ 122, 1.) Verbal Adj. otV /0 - The abbreviated forms, ol/ioi, $i.-t\v, are used in prose as a mere paren- thetic expression, like the Lat. credo, and hence are often employed in an ironical sense; ofo/uai, on the contrary, has such a sense, only when it is a governing verb ; still, this difference of usage is not fully observed even by the best Attic writers. 25. oixojxat, lam gone, have gone (with sense of Perf), abii, Impf. (OXO/A^ (sense of Aor., also Plup.), I went away, had gone, Fut. oi^o-o/xat; Perf. a^/x-cu, commonly as a compound, e. g X. .An. 2. 4, 1. in the best MSS., Ion. and Att. Poet. 202 VERBS IN -<0 WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 166. (so originate, oT^a, otK-w^a, OI^-COKO, comp. the Epic from ej(a>, $ 230). 26. 6, to ow-'e, debeo, I ought, must, Fut. o^etA^o-co ; Aor. i\.r)(ra ; Perf. &eiXrjKa ; second Aor. w t rejoice, Fut. xaipr?;o-o/xat late) ; Aor. f (/x,t, ^ 192, 8); Perf. Ke^ap^Ka (Aristoph. and Herod.), I have rejoiced, and Ke^apr;/xat (poet.), I am glad. Verbal Adj. REMARK 1. Of the preceding classes, there belong here verbs in -cUw ( 160), and vTrurxyfo/juu, of those in 159. REM. 2. With these verbs several liquid verbs are classed ( 149, 6) ; still, they form the Fut. and the Aor. regularly, e. g. to remain, Fut. /iej/; Aor. e/iij>a ; Perf. /iejucVrj/ca. Verbal Adj. , never eos. , to divide, Fut. pe/D; Aor. evcz/ta; Perf. j'ej'e^^Ko; Aor. Pass, eve- /t^&rjv. Mid. vefji.ofj.ai, Fut. vefj.ovfj.ai] Aor. eveip.dfj.rjj' ; Perf. Mid. Of Pass. yei/e^Tj/ioi. Verbal Adj. 167.] VERBS WITH TENSES FROM DIFFERENT ROOTS. 203 167. Verbs, whose Tenses are formed from different Roots, and which are classed together only in respect to Signification. 1. aipew, to take, to capture, e. g. a city, Impf. $pow; Fut. Perf. yjprjKa; Aor. (from C EA) euW, eAeti/; Aor. Pass. Fut. Pass, aipe$>jcro/x, to eat, Impf. r}o-3iov; (eSw, Ep.) Fut. I8o/x,at, ($ 154, 4) ; Perf. eSr/SoKa ; Aor. !, JSoifit, c, $118, 3 (a), iServ, i8wv. (On the second Perf. oTSa, I know, see $ 195.) Fut (from 'OH) o^o/Ltat (2. Pers. 9r)v, 6$fjvai. ; Fut. oftat. Verbal Adj. opdros and OTTTOS, OTTTCOS. 5. rpe^w, to rzm, (APEM-) Fut. 8pa/xov/xat ; Aor. eSpa^tov; Perf. 8c8pa/xryKa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eTrtSeSpa/^/xcu (X. O. 15. 1). Verb. Adj. SpcKreov. pe'|o/xcu, ?^pc|a, rare and poet. Second Perf. only Epic Se'Spo/za (APEMfl). 6. ^>pa> (only Pres. and Impf.), to bear, COI-) Fut. OMTW (Aor. Imp. oto-e, oiVcTcu, bring, in Aristoph., see ^ 230, under ep, Part. eVeyKon' (rarer , Imp. eVeyKC, -erco, etc. (and -arw, etc.) ; ('ENEK-) Perf. eviyvoxa ($ 124, 2) ; Mid. to carry of, carry away, win, Fut. oto-o- uat; Perf. Mid. or Pass, en^ey/xat (-yat, -yKTat, or ev^e/crai) ; Aor. Mid. -^i/eyKa/xryv, eVey/cai, -aa$ai, -a/xevo5 ; Pass, (a) to &e borne, carried, (b) to ear one's self, to hasten; Aor. Pass, ^ve^ryv; Fut. rarer our$^uu). Verb. Adj. OIOTOS, otoreos (Poet. 7. 7^/ with the meaning of the Aor. also <>, come Fut. epw, Perf. iprjKa, Perf. Mid. or Pass, eip^at (^ 123, 4) ; C PE ~) -A- 01 "- P 8 - 88 - cppTjSrjv (eppe&yv appears not to be Attic), p-rjSfyaL, p^ets; Fut. Pass. pTy&Jo-ofUH and ctp^o-o/xat. Mid. only in compounds, Fut. cwrepovjaai, and first Aor. aTretTrao-^at, to deny, to be wearied out, to give up, like aTrewrecv. Verbal Adj. p^ros, pi/reos. Instead of the Pres. ^>7jjuf, other words are sometimes used, particularly in composition. Compare ctoreryopeuw, I forbid, a-rretTrov, I forbade; avriXeyw, I contradict, avrtiirov, I contradicted, the compounds of flirflv in the Aor. being more frequent than aTnrySpevcra, and oyreAe^a. So, ayopevw riva KCUCUS, I speak ill of one, but avrfiirov KOKWS. 168. Conjugation of Verbs in -pi. 1. Verbs in -pi, the number of which is small, differ from those in -to, principally in taking different personal-endings in the Pres. and Impf., several also in the second Aor. Act. and Mid. ; and also in omitting the mode-vowel in the Ind. of the above tenses. The formation of the remaining 1 The first Aor. is preferred to the second, in the first Pers. Sing. Indie., when the next word begins with a consonant 5 also in the persons of the Imp. which have a ; hence SWy/ce, but 169.] DIVISION OF VERBS IN -fit. 205 tenses is like that of verbs in -o>, with a few exceptions. In omitting the mode-vowel, these verbs are analogous to those in -oo), -eo), and -oo>. 2. In the Pres. and Impf., most verbs in -/u with a mono- syllabic stem, take a reduplication ( 163) ; this consists in repeating the first consonant of the stem with 4, when the stem begins with a simple consonant or a mute and liquid ; but, when the stem begins with err, TTT, or with an aspirated vowel, i with the rough breathing is prefixed to the stem. These verbs are the following : 2TA T-0T77-/U IIPA Trl-/j.-vpT]-fjLi XPA Ki-xpn-pu AE (5-57j-/Ai) 5i5e'cwrt(j/) BA (01-fa-ju ftiftds E IITA l-irra-fMU, 'E T-TJ-/U AO REMARK. Most verbs in -fit do not follow this conjugation throughout in the three tenses above named, but only in some particular forms ; four verbs, T&rj/it, to put ; Tern^u, to place ; Si'Swyut, to give, and ftj/w, to send, have this conjugation most full, though even these have forms in use borrowed from the conjugation in -, together with several forms of the inflection in -/. See $ 172, Rem. 8 $ 169. Division of Verbs in -fu. Verbs in ~fu are divided into two principal classes : 1. Such as annex the personal-ending to the stem-vowel. The stem of verbs of this class ends : (a) in o, e. g. l-crry-pi, to place^ Stem 2TA- (b) " , " Tf-d7j-/ii, to put, " 0E- (c) " o, " 5i'-5-/ui, to give, " AO- (d) " i, " 3^, to go, 'I- (e) " ff, " tlfii, instead of &r/*f, to be, " 'E3-. 2. Such as annex to their stems the syllable -wv or -vv, and then append to this syllable the personal-endings. The stem of verbs of this class ends : A. In one of the four vowels, a, e, i, o, and assumes -wv (a) in a, e. g. j>t;-jiu, from the stem 2BE-, is the only verb of this class which forms the second Aor., namely, eo-jSajj/ ; several verbs in -a;, form their second Aor. according to the analogy of these verbs, e. g. Svw, e5uv. 170. Characteristic-vowel and Strengthening of the Stem of the Present. 1. In verbs of the first class, the short characteristic-vowel of the stem, a, e, o, is lengthened in the Pres., Impf., and second Aor. Act. : a and e into ij, and o into w. Still, in verbs in -e and -o this lengthening extends only to the Ind. Sing, of these three tenses ; but in verbs in -a, to the Dual and PL Ind. also, and likewise to the entire Imp. and the second Aor. Inf. Act. In the second Aor. Inf. Act. of verbs in -e and -o, is lengthened into et, and o into ov, e. g. $a-vcu, Soi)- vai. But in the same tenses of the Mid., the short character- istic-vowel remains throughout. 2. Verbs in -v^i, whose stems end in a vowel, and hence annex -vw, retain the short characteristic-vowel, except those whose stem ends in -o, e. g. crr/ow-i/w/u (3TPO-) ; but verbs whose stems end in a consonant, and hence annex -w, are strengthened in the stem of the Pres. by lengthening the stem- vowel, namely, a becomes 07, as in -jr-fjy-vv/jn, second Aor. Pass, firay-fiv a " at, " at-vv^ai instead of &pvv/u.cu, stem 'AP, 'AIP " ei, " Se/K-w/tt, stem AEK, hence Ion. eSea v " eu, " f6y-iri)iu, second_Aor. Pass, $$171,172.] VERBS IN -/U. - PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 207 $ 171. Mode-vowels. 1. The Ind. Pres., Impf., and second Aor. do not take the mode-vowel ($ 168, 1), and hence the personal-endings are annexed immediately to the stem of the verb, e. g. 2. Tlie Subj. has the mode-vowels CD and ?;, as in verbs in -co ; but these vowels coalesce with the characteristic-vowel and fprm one syllable ; this coalescence differs from the contraction of verbs in -co, as follows : d-n and dp coalesce into TJ and $ (not, as in contracts in -eta, into a and a), 6rj coalesces into (not, as in contracts in -6a>, into ot), e. g. l-ffTd-o) = I-O-TW 1-ffTa-rjs = i-ffrrjs = ffrd-rjs = arris 8i-86-a> = 8i-8a> REMARK 1. This form of the Subj. of fcrrrj/u and r&ijjut is like the Subj. of the two Aorists Pass, of all verbs, e. g. Ti/d, e. g. Sei/o/vw, -vys, etc. 3. The Impf. and second Aor. Opt. have the mode-vowel i, which is annexed to the characteristic- vowel, and with it forms a diphthong, e. g. Impf. Opt. A. l-ffra-i-tiv l-ffTai-Tjv Aor. II. A. oro.(-i\v Impf. M. i-(rral-/j.ijy 8oi-T\v HEM. 3. The Opt. of verbs in - (ri^/ju) is like the Aorists Opt. Pass, of all verbs, e. g. /ii, the abbreviated forms are very rare, except the third Pers. PL, which is commonly abridged. REM. 4. The forms SiSyrjv and S^TJJ/ also occur. (e) The endings of the Pres. and second Aor. Imp. are: Sing. 2. -bi (1-ffra-bt) (rl-bf-bi) ($l-$o-&i) 3. -TW I-0-TO-TO) n-bf-TW Sl-56-TU Dual 2. -TOJ> 1-ffTa-rov ri-bf-Tov Sl-So-rov 3. ?-o"Ta-T6 ri-fre-Tf 5i-8o-T Tt-fre-raxrcu' oVSo'-Taxraj/ Plural 2. 3. or l-ffT&vruv Ti-&(iT(oy 5t-5oVra>j/. REM. 5. The second Pers. Sing. Imp. Pres. rejects the ending -&i, and, as a compensation, lengthens the short characteristic-vowel, namely, a into 17, e into t, o into ov, v into 0, T-o-rd-^t becomes T-O-TTJ rl-bf-bi becomes rl-bet The ending -^t is retained in the Pres. only in a very few verbs, e. g. , are the regular forms in good prose, and the uncontracted forms scarcely occur except in the poets and later writers. (b) In verbs in -e, the contract forms in the Imp. Pres. are poetic and rare, and in the Indie. Impf. not at all in use; thus, Impf. eri&ecro, Imp. ri&fcro (ri&ov) ; in the second Aor., both of verbs in -e and -o, the contract are the regular forms, e. g. Indie, e&ov, Imp. &ov ; eSou, Sou. In verbs in -o also, the uncontracted forms seem to be the usual ones in the Impf. and Imp.: eSt'Sotro, St'Soo-o. (c) The contracted forms are uniformly employed throughout the Subj.; in the Opt., as in verbs in -a, the or is always omitted, yet the form remains uncontracted. REM. 8. The Sing. Impf. Act. of T&T?^, is eV&rjj/, 2 Pers. M&eis, 3. (from TI0EH), er&ejs and eT/det being more frequent than e'n'&Tjs, eTidij; on 'irjfj.1, see 180; the Sing. Impf. Act. of StSoyu is always eSlSow (fr. AIAOH), ^StSous, etc. (X. An. 5. 8, 4. is to be read eStSovs instead of e8/8a>s, according to the best MSS.) In verbs in -v/j.i, the forms in -vu are usual throughout the Pres. and Impf., especially in third Pers. PI. Indie. Act., e. g. SeiKvvova-i^), and the only forms in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., e. g. SfiKvvco, 6/j.vixa, 0-v/j.fj.iy- together with SfiKWfii, op.vv(j.i, a-vfj.fj.ljwij.1. In Attic poetry, there are also and I'TJ/U in the second and third Pers. Sing. Pres. contracted forms of Ind. Act., e. g. T&e?s, ms, n&eT, tV?. But the Middle admits the formation in -vu only in the Subj. and Opt. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 173. I First Class of Verbs in -uu. 1. In forming the tenses of the Act., the short characteristic- vowel is lengthened, both in the Fut. and first Aor. Mid., namely, a into rj, e into rj ; also in the Perf. Act. of TI^/U and Ttjfu, e is lengthened into ei, and o into w ; but in the remaining tenses of the Mid., and throughout the Pass., the short charac- teristic-vowel is retained, with the exception of the Perf. and Plup. Mid. and Pass, of TI^/U and fy/u, where the et of the Perf. Act. (re^a/cd, re^et/xat, et/x, et/xat) is retained. 2. The first Aor. Act. and Mid. of r$%u, fyfu, and oYSw/xi, has K for the characteristic of the tense, not o-; thus, 171.] VERBS IN -/U. - FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 211 The forms of the first Aor. Act e&y/ca, ^/ca, and loWa, however, are usual only in the Intl., and generally only in the Sing. ; in the other persons, the Attic writers commonly used the forms of the second Aor. ; in the other modes and the participials, the forms of the second Aor. were always used. Examples of the first Aor. in the PI. Ind. are: l&^fcopcir, X. C. 4. 2, 15. tofcopci', X. An. 3. 2, 5. O. 9, 9. 10. tfcfcore, Antiph. 138, 77. &VKOV, X. Cy. 4. 6, 12. tfrqicar, H. 2. 3, 20. a^/coi/, Cy. 4. 5, 14. Also the forms of the second Aor. Mid. of rt^/xt, fy/xi, and 8i8to/xt, are used by the Attic writers instead of the first Aor. ; rjKa^riv from fy/u occurs, though but seldom. On the contrary, the forms of the second Aor. Ind. Act. of T^fy/u, fyut, and Si'Scu/xi (ZS-rjv, ty, eSwv), are not in use. 3. The verb wmjiu forms the first Aor. Act and Mid., like verbs in -o>, with the tense-characteristic o-, e. g. l-ony-cr-a, e-o-n/- o-a/ATjv. The second Aor. Mid. eora/xT/v is not used. Some other verbs, however, have a second Aor. Mid., e. g. K KM ARK 1. The second Aor. and the second Put. Pass, are wanting in these verbs, also the Fut. Perf., except in lo-Trim, the Fut. Perf. of which is e, i(TT?j|o/iat, stabo (d<|)e, retain the w through all the tenses, e. g. (rrpw-wv-fju, w-wv-//.i, pw-wv-/u, Fut o-rpw-o-w, etc. But verbs, whose stem ends in a liquid, in form- ing some of the tenses, assume a Theme ending in a vowel, e. g. o/x-vv-fii, Aor. (o/x-o-cra, from 'OMOfi. The second Aor. and the second Fut. Pass, occur only in a few verbs, e. g. See $ 182. 212 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -pi. [$ 175. $ 175. Paradigms of ACTIVE. mbers and S.I. 2. 3. D.I. 2. 3. P.I. 2. 3. Sf-0-Ta-Te t-a-Ta-ort(j') (from lard-aa i) S. 1. 2. 3. D.I. 2. 3. P.I. 2. 3. 3. D.2. 3. P. 2. 3. Infin. Part. 2TA- to place. Y-CTTTJ-S 't- used (l-a) ) for i 6-So-TOJ/ e-5o-T6 AEIK- wanting. Sai 1 (TTpS ffTfj ffTTJ-TOV crav and %6-TCOV 86-re ti6-Tooffav and Inftn. Sov-vai Part. trrds, Stra, ay Gen. (&-e^s, eTtra, e Gen. &eVros Sous, .oDo~o, J Gen. 56vTos Future. AorisTL e-8w-/ca Instead of these forms, the 2d Aor. is used in the Dual, PI. Ind. and in the other Modes and Participials, $ 173, 2. e'-tTTTJ-KO, 5 StO, T- & 6 t -K O Pluperfect. e-a-T-f)-Keiv and 6-re- & e e-8e- 8 c6 -/ Put. Perf. wanting. wanting. wanting. PAS A_ I e compounds, e. g. awo-Too, e'/cfrw, StoSS, have the same accentuation as the simples, e. g. onroo-TcSo-t, e'/oSHjToi/, StctSo^ey. 2 See 1 72, Rem. 3. 3 In composition, irapdo'T'ri&i, irapdcrTa, a,Tr6ffTr)&i, a-jr^ffTa, 172, Rem. 5. 4 In composition, Trepi&cs, ev&es: a-rr65os, e8os; 7Tpl3-eT, ef/cSorc, $ 118, Rem. 1. 6 See 176, 3. 6 tr&7iv and refrfja-oiMt instead of &ffrr)v and 175.] PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -/At. 215 MIDDLE. 2TA- 1 ' place. 0E- AO- to give. AEIK- to show. does not occur, but %-&ov (from e-^e- Z-8ov (from e5o does not occur, but TTpia-ao, or &ov (from 5oO (from 5^aifJ,T)v, -aio, -airo ( 177, 4), and ivpidpriv ( 179, 6). 2. The foi*ms of the Opt. Mid. Impf. and second Aor. in -01, viz. ^oifjifiv, were preferred to those in -et, viz. rtd-efyuji/, -e?o, -etro, etc., fret -m>, etc. In compounds, the accent remains as in simples ; thus, (eV&et'iwjj/), eV&otb (eV&etb), etc.; so also in compounds of SofyiTji/, e. g. SiaSoTo, etc. 3. On the abbreviated form of the Perf. and Plup. : e-ora-Tov, e'-), Ibid. 118, a. 5. In the later writers, e. g. Polybius, a Perf. and Plup. are found with the Trans, meaning, 7 have placed, namely, etrTa/co, SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -/**. 1. Verbs in -/tt which annex the Personal-endings immediately to the Stem-vowel. 177. (a) Verbs in -a (?-o-r^-/xt; 2TA-): 1. KL-xpy-fu, to lend, to bestow (XPA-), Inf. Ki^pavai, Fut. Aor. exprjo-a. Mid. to borrow, Fut. ^pTyo-o/Aat. (Aor. e^o-a/^v in this sense is avoided by the Attic writers.) To the same stem belong : 2. xp^i ^ ?s necessary, oportet (stem XPA- and XPE-), Subj. xp$> Inf. xpW Part, (rb) xp 6 ^ (usually only Nom. and Ace.) ; Impf. or x/>V (with irregular accent), Opt. XP 6 ^ (from XPE-) ; Fut. x/") "" in Soph, (but not Inf. XP^^J oiroxprjJ', in Eurip., by contraction from xpoetj/. 3. airtxpTl, it suffices, sufficit; the following also are formed regularly from XPAH: aTToxp^ff^v), Inf. airoxpr)!/] Part, diroxpws, -wtro, -cSv ; Impf. aTrexpr? ; Fut. cwroxpVet; Aor. aire'xp? 12 9, Kem. 2. 4. ovLin/jfjLL (with Attic reduplication instead of ovovrj^i), to ben- efit, ('ONA-) Inf. ovtmvat; Impf. Act. wanting, eieA.ow being used for it ; Fut. 6i/^o-w ; Aor. wnyo-a, Inf. ovycrai (for it 6v^i/at, like o"njvai, in PL Rp. 600, d.). Mid. 6vtVa/xat, to ^e^ benefit, be bene- fitted, Fut. 6v^cro/>iai; Aor. a>v^/x,^v (uvdfjirjv later, but also in Eur. , -770-0, -77x0, etc., Imp. oVryo-o, Part. ovrjjJLtvos (Horn.), Opt. -aio, -atro ($ 176, 1), Inf. 6Vao-$ai ; Aor. Pass. &vf}&r)v rarer $ 178.] SUMMARY OP VERBS IN -/u. 217 instead of wvrj^v. The remaining forms are supplied by 5. 7u'-//.-7rXi^/u, to Jill, (IIAA-) Iilf. 7ri/x7rXdrai ; Impf. 7rt/x,7rX?yv ; Fut. TrXrjo-to ; Perf. TreTrX^Ka ; Aor. en-X^o-a ; Mid. to Jill for one's self, TTtjj.TrXaf/.ai, Inf. 7ri/u.7rXao-$ai ; Impf. eTri/w-TrXa^i/ ; Aor. CTrXrja-d- fjirjv; Fut. TrAT/o-o/x-at; Perf. Mid. or Pass. TreTrXr/oyxcu, ; Aor. Pass. 131); Fut. Pass. TrXrjo-^o-o/Acu ($ 131); second Aor. , Poet. Verb. Adj. TrX^oreo?. The fi in the reduplication of this and the following verb is usually omitted in composition, when /u precedes the reduplication, e. g. t/j.irtir\a/juju, but ti/eiri/j.- w\d/j.ijy. Contrary to this rule, however, forms with and without p. are both used by the poets, according to the necessities of the verse. 6. TTLfjLTrprjfjn, to burn, Trans., in all respects like TTI/ATTX^I : 717317- 7. TAH-MI, to endure, Pres. and Impf. wanting (instead of them VTTO/AO/CO, di/t^o/xai) ; Aor. erXTyv, (rXai,) rXair/v, rX^t, rXas (rXao-a) ; Fut. rX^o-o/xat; Perf. rcVXryKa. Verbal Adj. rXipros. (In Attic prose this verb is rare.) 8. A-), has the following formation: $ 178. Present. ACTIVE. Imperfect. Indi- cative S^ojT Imp. Inf. Part. S. 1. 2. 3. D.2. 3. P.I. tyarov fart rjs, , or Qarov, (paruv, &rc, ffav and (pavat i7jii, a^ri77W, ovrt^pJ, etc. 19 218 DEPONENTS BELONGING TO VERBS IN -/At. [$ 179. REMAKK 1. In the second person Qys, both the accentuation and the Iota subscript are contrary to all analogy. On the inclination of this verb in the Pres. Ind. (except Qys), see 33, a. HEM. 2. This verb has two significations, (a) to say in general, (b) to affirm, (aio) to assert, to assure, etc. The Fut. ds is not used in Attic prose ; still, ^ PL Ale. 2, 139, C. fyavres. HEM. 3. With <(>r)fj.i the verb ypi, inquam, may be compared, which, like inquam, is used in the spirited repetition of what had been said ; the imperfect fy, $ is used in the phrases 3\v 5' e'ycS, said 7, ^ 5" 2s, said he, to describe a con- versation. $ 179. The following Deponents also belong here. 1 . aya//,ai, to ivonder, Impf. ^ya/x^v ; Aor. Y]ydo-3~r)v (^yacra/^v, Epic and Dem. 18, 204) ; Fut. dydo-o/xat. Verbal Adj. dyao-ros. 2. Swa/tat, to be able, second Pers. Swao-ai [SuV?? from the Ion. Sweat, tragic and later, $ 172, 2, (a)], Subj. owco/^u 176, 1), Imp. Swcuro, Inf. Swacr&xi, Part. 8wd/x,evos ; Impf. eSwa/xvp' and second Pers. eSiW (not c8wao-o, $ 172, 2), Opt ( 176, 1) ; Fut. Sw^tro/Aat; Aor. eSw^-dip', ^Sw^^iyv and (not ^Suvacr^v), the last Ion. and in Xen. (Aug., $ 120, Hem. 1) ; Perf. SeS^/xat. Verbal Adj. Swaros, ; Part. 7rpia/A/os. $ 180. (b) "Per&s iw -e (rt-^-fu, 0E-). "I-rj-fjLi (stem 'E-), to smd. Many forms of this verb are found only in composition. ACTIVE. Pres. Ind. Tty/zt, js, Subj. ttt, tps, etc. Imp. T, IC'TW, etc. Inf. IcVeu. Part, fe/r, i?(ra, re, mtw, d^ips, Impf. Perf. Aor. Ind. low (from 'IEfl), tuplovv (rarer ^0^ou>/, rare tetv, irpotfiv, T)idt>), lets, tet, et^^t (rarer 4$fci) ; ?eroj/, UTTJJ/; Te/iey, tere, Tecrcu/, aic, dc^ps, etc. Opt. etrjj/, e7rjy, etrj ; efrof , T, L(]/, d(/)6?6t/. Imp. e'y, 6<^>6S, TCO ; C'T Inf. efi/ai, d^ervat. P. efr, efffa, d EEMARK 1. On the Aug. of d/xcu, dia>;imt, nj, a^>tp, etc. Imp. tWo, or You. Inf. tW&at. Part. Ifpei/os, -rj, -ov. Impf. ie/UTjj', 'if ffo, etc. Opt. ifl/j.T)v, Att. ioi/j.r)v, Io?o, d^xolb, etc. Aor. II. Ind. cfyiTj*' Subj. w^at, a^u/j-ai, 77, a.(j>T), ^raJ, o^^rot efcro, et^>er<70 Opt. irpoofyn/j/, -o7o, -O?TO, -oi/j.f&a, -o?eieTos). REM. 3. Besides the two verbs rlbyfju and tTj/tJ, only the following dialectic verbs belong here, viz., 'AH-MI, AI-AH-MI (AE), (though SiSeaa-i(v), from the last is found in X.) ; SifrfjMi and AIH-MI. 181. (c) Verbs in -t, only eT/x,i ('I), to go. PRELIMINARY REMARK. The verbs efyi, to go, and dpi, to be, are pre- sented together (though the last, on account of its stem 'E5, does not belong here), in order to exhibit to the eye the agreement and disagreement of the two verbs in their formation. PRESENT. Ind. S. 1. flfjil, to be Subj. 3 Ind.l. el/it, to go Subj. la 2. 6? V s 2. ft "W 3. l,uev 2. 4-VVV e-ffTpca-Ka Att. tr/ccSw, -as, Kope-ffco, Att. KopcD, -els, -c? ffrpta-ffu Mid. Pass. Pres. Impf. Perf. Plup. Fut. Aor. F. Pf. Aor. Fut. Kop4-ff-ofj.ai i-Kop--vwov (v always short). ffTpwrts ffrpw-Ttos. KOpe-vvvoa, %-KOps-vvvov ffrpw-vv^w, f- B. Verbs whose Stem ends with a Consonant. Pres. Impf. Perf. I. Perf. II. Plnp. I. Plup. II. Fut. Aor. I. perdo, oA-Av-/*ai, pereo, ('OAEfl), perdidi, 124, 2. perii, eiv, perdiaeram, oA-t^A-etj', perieram, oA-w, -e?y, -e? oA-ou^ioiJ, -e? A. II. o>A-(fot &/J.- ('OMOn) 124, 2. op.-vv-p.ai 1 And oAAu-w, \\v-ov o/j.vv-, Att. Kepw; Aor. eKcpao-a; Perf. KCKpa/ca ; Mid. to mix for one's self, Aor. eKepao-a/x^v ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. KCKpa/xai (/ctKpao-/xa, Anacr. 29, 13 ; Illf. Ke/cepao-#ai, LllC. Dial. Meretr. 4, 4) ; Aor. Pass. iKpaS-qv, Att. also eKepao-^v (Metathesis, $ 156, Rem.). 2. Kpefjt.a-wv-fJLL, to /ia?2g-, Flit /cpe/xao-w, Att Kpe/xai ; Aor. e*pe/xa- tco ; Aor. ^/xi'eo-a ; Perf. Act. wanting ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ^/x<^tco-/xat, ^/x^teo-at, ^/x^teorat, etc., Inf. ^/x, Alt. /copco ; Aor. Aor. Mid. eKopaa-a/x^v ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. jccfcopeo-fuu ; Aor. Pass. 4. crfii-wv-pi, to extinguish, Fut. o-/?eo-o> ; first Aor. r/3co-a, J extinguished; second Aor. ccr/^v, J ceased to burn; Perf. ecr/ify/ca, I have ceased to burn. Mid. o-jSeWv/xai, to cease to 5wm, intrans. Fut. o-/??7cro/x,ai ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eo-jSeo-pu ; Aor. Pass. eo-/?o-- ^i/; Fut. Pass, o-^ea^cro/xat. No other verb in -w/xt has a second Aor. Act. ($ 191, 2). 5. (rrope-wv-fu, to spread out (shortened form oro/n/vfu, Poet. and X. Cy. 8. 8, 16), Fut. ; Perf. e&o/ca, Pans.; Aor. cwo-a ; Mid. to gm pwe's self, Aor. Mid. e^axra^v ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. (oo7/,ai (^ 131). 2. pw-wv-fju, to strengthen, Fut. pcao-co; Aor. Ippwo-a; Perf. "Mid. or Pass. epp(o/>uxt, Imp. eppwo-o, vale, farewell, Inf. IppGxrSau.; Aor. Pass, cppoxr^v (^ 131) ; Fut. Pass. pwo-^ryo-o/Aat. 3. ; Aor. ca^a, Inf. aai (Part. Lys. 100, 5. /carca^avres with the Aug.) ; second Perf. cdya, / ;? broken ; Mid. to /ea& yor owe'5 ^e^ Aor. la^d^rjv ; Aor. Pass. (Aug., $ 122, 4). 187.] SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN -/U. 225 2. SciK-vv-pt, see $ 175. 3. cipy-vv-fu (or eipyo>), to s*te in, Fut. eipo>; Aor. e!pa, Inf. Part. lpa ? (PI. Polit. 285, b.), 7repiepan- 9 (Th. 5, 11), (PI. Up. 5. 461, b), Subj. Ka$ap#s (with the variation PI. Gorg. 461, d; Aor. Pass. tp^7/v; Perf. elpy/xat. (But etpyo), ipa>, eTpa, tipx&rjv, to S/JW 0w, etc.) 4. evy-'v-tu, to ypm together, Fut. eva> ; Aor. eva ; Mid. to yarn to or^/or orae's self, Fut. evo/xai ; Aor. eeva/x,>7v ; Perf. Mid. or Pass ee//.y/A; Aor. jutai; Perf. /xe/xl^a (Polyb.) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, Aor. Pass. e/Aix^v, and e/xtyTyv ; Fut. Pass, Fut. Perf. ncfjLigofuu. 6. oty-vv-^ usually as a compound: (The Attic use of the form otyi/v/u is not certain) dvotyi-i5/>it, Siotyvv/xi (but instead, dj'otya), Stoi'yu), are more frequently used in the Pres. and (Woryov always in the Impf), to opera, Fut. dvot^w ; Aor. dvew^a, dvot^at (in X. Hell, ^votyov, fjvoiga, signifying to put to sea, to u-eigh anchor) ; first Perf. ; Aor. w/xop^a ; Mid. to trzpe o^ y>o?ra orae'^ 5e^*; Fut o/xop^ofiat ; Aor. wftop^d/xryv ; Aor. Pass. Mfjiopx&rjv. 8. 7r77y-i/u-/xt, to fix, fasten, freeze, Fut. -7n}!o>; Aor. eTny^a; first Perf. TreVr/xa, I have fastened ; second Perf. TrcTn/ya, / standfast, am frozen ; Mid. Tnjyvfyuu, J s^'cA: yarf ; Perf. irtTnrynai, I stand fast ; Aor. Pass. cTrayT/v (more seldom cTnJx&yv) ; second Fut. Pass. Trayrjo-o/icu. Verbal Adj. TTTJKTOS. 9. pT/y-vv-^u, to mw/, Fut. pij^w; Aor. eppry^a; second Perf. cp*pwya, /aw reni ($ 140, R,em. 3); Aor. Mid. epp^d/x^v; Aor. Pass, cppaiyrjv (iftp-q^rjv rare) ; second Fut. payijo-otwu. 10. <^pdy-ia5-tti (commonly ^>pdo-o-a), , $ 143, 1), to 6rea&, Impf. e^pdywv (Thuc. 7, 74. S. Ant. 241); Fut. pt\v. The remaining forms come from 2. KTcC-vv-fu, commonly written jcrtWv/u in the MSS., to put to death, Att. prose secondary form of KrctVw, is used in the Pres. and Impf. The stem is KTEIN-, lengthened from KTEN-. The v of the stem is omitted on account of the diphthong ($ 169, Hem. 1). 3. oA-Av-/u (instead of oA.-w-/u), to destroy. See $ 182, B. In prose, only in compounds. 4. ofji-vv-fu, to swear. See $ 182, B. 5. op-vv-fu (poet), to rouse ($ 230). 6. (TTop-vv-fu, to spread out. See oro/oem5/Ai, $ 184, 5. $ 189. Inflection of the two forms of the Perf.. net pat and PRELIMINARY EEMARK. The two forms of the Perf. Kel> at and are so essentially different, in their formation, from the other verbs in -/it, that they require to be treated by themselves. a. Ket//,cu, to lie. Ket/xat, properly, I have laid myself down, hence I lie down ; then Pass. I Jiave been laid down, I am lying down (e. g. draKei- yuai, I am laid up, i. e. consecrated, o-vy/ceirat, it has been agreed upon, compositum est, constat, but crvvrtSurai VTTO rtvos, it has been agreed by some one) ; this verb is a Perf. without reduplica- tion, from the stem KEI- (contracted from KEE-). Perf. Impf. Ind. KM/MI, Keiffcu, KCITM, Keijj.e&a, /ce?, etc. ; Opt. /ca&o//7i>, /ca^oto, /ca&oiro, etc. REM. 2. The Opt. forms : ica&i/juip', -po, -pro, etc. are doubtful. The defective forms of ^/xcu are supplied by e^eo-^at, or 'le 3 SSrov, SDrc G. Sui/ai G. SWTOS. 1 Compounds, e. g. avafiu, avafifjs, etc. ; O7roo"/3w ; 8m7'cD ; avaSvu. 2 Aeschyl. Suppl. 230 (215) ffvyyvepr) ; but in the Mid. form (instead of tivli\v) is not found in the Attic dialect, but in the Epic ( 227). $ 192. Summary of Verbs with a second Aor . like Verbs in -/xi. Besides the verbs mentioned above, some others have this form : 1. ofifxiffKw, to run away ( 161, 10), Aor. (APA-) eSpfly, -as, -a, -d/uei', -ore, (tSpdv Poet.), Subj. 5p, Spas, Spa, Sparo*', 5pa>,ue>/, Spore, 5pa>, Inf. Spcu/cu, Part. Spd$, -oVa, -w ( 154, 2), Aor. ('PTE-) ^p' 8. x'p to r? >'' ce (^ 166 > 32 )> Aor - (XAPE- 9. oAunco/teu, to 6e taAren, Aor. ('AAO-) f/Awv and eaAcov ( 161, 1), oAi, -s, -y, etc., oAo/Tjv, oAous (always a, except in the Ind.). 10. 0i6w, to live, Aor. 43iW, Subj. /3vvuo-a>, Trans. / mil produce. The Perf. ir(vKa, I am produced, also has an intransitive sense, so also the Pres. Mid. ; Fut. REMARK. Here also belong the forms , however, a is contracted with the stem- vowel, e. g. Tc-rXa-ao-i = T-rA.a-o~i. REMARK 1. Except the forms of Am and ftm^u, all the Perfects of this kind belong almost exclusively to poetry, particularly to the Epic. The Sing. St'Sta is not Attic. REM. 2. The Imp. of these Perfects is also in use, and, since it not only wants the mode-vowel, but takes the ending -&i in the second Pers. Sing., it is wholly analogous to the forms in -yut. So the Inf. Both append their termi- nations to the short stem-vowel; SeSicvai is an exception. The Subj. Perf. and the Opt. Plup. of verbs whose stem-vowel is o, are formed like verbs in -/u, since the Subj. Perf. admits the contraction of the stem-vowel with the termination, and the Opt. Plup. ends in -airiv, e. g. , , -ys, etc., TCT\ali}v. The Part, of verbs in -dot contracts the stem-vowel a with the ending -&$ and -6s, e. g. Caracas = earths, fffra-6s fffrdas and e, e. g. eo-ranos, remains in all the Cases, e. g. effrecoffa, effre&s, Gen. fffreuros, -cao"ris. re&j/ewo-a, Tedi/ccfo, Gen. Tf&vca>Tos, -(t>a"r]S. and TCTATJ/CO never have this form of the participle. Perfect. Pluperfect. Perfect. Pluperfect. Ind. S. 1. 2. 3. D. 2. 3. P.I. 2. 3. Se'-Si-o e'SeSfet Se'-SI-TOJ/ 'E-2TA-A '4-]Ka, TE0NAA : PI. Tc^ya/tcv, Tei^varc, rfbvacra (Lys. and Dem.), T&vfts, Inf. r&v&vai (Aesch. rffrvavcu from rc^voeVtu) ; Plup. tr&va- fftu', Opt. T&valiiv. 4. TAAfl, to bear, Perf. TC'TATJ/CO, TETAAA: Dual rerXarov, PL TTAa/i6i/, TTAdT6, TfT\a (^ 161, 6), to ecrf, Perf. jSe'jSpw/ca, poetic fSe&pepa> ; olua* ( 166, 24), of the Common language, belongs here. 197.] DEPONENT PASSIVES. 233 $ 197. Summary of the Deponent Passives 102, 2, 3). , to ironder, Swa/icu, to be able, Kpena/j,at, to hang, to reverence, Susapeareo/iai, to be dissat- AoiSopeo/uu, to revile, , to irander, isfied, naivopai, to be mad, afju\\dofj.cu, to contend, ivavri6o/j.aiy to resist, ^era/ieAo/iou, to regret, ion- 160^0.1 (Poet.) adversor, fa&tyubpuu, to lay to heart, /uyi\orifj.fOfuu, to be ambi- tia\tyoncu, to converse, &tpo/j.cu (Poet.), to become tious, Jhcwoe'o^cu, to think; hot, irjroroir4ofjuu t to conjecture. REMARK 1. The Aor. of several verbs have a Mid. as well as a Pass, form, e. g. av\io/j,cu, to lodge; AojSopeo^ou, to revile; opfyofMi, to strive after; irpay/j.a- rfvofjcu, to carry on business (Pass, rarer); t\oi\o- rifj-fo/jLcu in Isoc. and Aristid. Several of the above list of verbs have a mid- dle ;\s well as a Passive form in the Fut. : cu'Se'o/w". 166 > 1 ^x^o/ioj, 166, 4. Sia\fyofj.ai, to converse with, S(oAe|ojucu and rarer SiaXfx^fl^ofjicu, SiavofOfj-ai, to think. eVtyieAo/iW, 166, 21. Trpo^vfj.fOfj.ai, to desire. irpobv/jL-fiffo/JLcu and rarer irpo&v- fja^aofuu. Both J}5o/w, to rejoice, and the poetic epafjuu, to love, have a passive form for their Fut. : rifffrfjirofjicu, fycurdijtrojucu, 179, 4. KKM. 2. All the other Deponents are Middle Deponents, or are used only in the Pres. and Impf. KKM. 3. Among the Deponent Passives, are very many Active verbs, which in the Mid. express a reflexive or intransitive action, but have a Passive form for their Aorist ; on the contrary, a Middle form for their Future, e. g. o&4, to terrify ; 4>oj?&rjj/eu and o&r](Tf(rdai, timere, to fear. Here belong all verbs in -aiveiv and -vvetv, derived from substantives and adjectives, almost all in -ovv, and most in -ifiv, c. g. ev^pcdvfiv, to gladden, fwppai/^vcu, evivcu t 'i(T^cu (rarer ouVxw^Vjfffa.visiv ; /JaAAea/ ; SaTravav, Siairav ; f&i&iv, eTreiyeiv &TIV), eariav, eux " / 5 iirrav (F. j]TTr)&-f)(rouai and rarer r}TT-f]a.vi](recr&ai and (pavf'icr&ai, to appear, but Ta(rfrf]a'e(r&a,t), (j)fpcw voi, otcrea'&cu and ^yex^o'eo'^a', rarer oiVdTjcro^cu), ^eipe i^at [<&e/>er&ai, Ion. and poet.J, tpofteTv (^o^Tjcrea^at artd 5cty (//u(r^ijj/at, ^vff^T], to gro, )3toa>, to live, jSAeVa, to see, /3oaw, to cry oz, to take, >i to suffer TrrjSdca, to leap, iriva, to drink, TT/TTTW, tO fall, TrAew, to sail, to blow (but irviya>, to strangle, , to desire, fO), to reverence, peca, to flow, po , to gnaw, tpfvyw, to flee, X 6 'C a ') to ease one ' s se lft , to obtain, ^cu/w, to come before, X w P* 6l 'i to contain. REMARK. Some have both the Active and Middle form for the Future ; the Middle, however, is preferred, e. . o'8a> (aa-w non-Attic), a/wroa>, i, yrjpd- ' x w P* v - &npaw, frriptvw, Ko\dfa are also used with the middle form. The following compounds of x^pc'w have an Active and Middle form in the Put. : diro-, oxpe' have only the Active form. CHAPTER VIL 199. Prepositions and Conjunctions. Besides the Substantive, Adjective, Pronoun, Numeral, Adverb, and Verb, there are also the two following parts of speech, viz. Prepositions and Conjunctions. On the forms of these nothing need be said ; hence these parts of speech are treated in the Syntax, so far as it is necessary. PECULIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS. PARTICULARLY OF THE EPIC DIALECT. A. ORTHOGRAPHY. 200. Digamma, or Labial Breathing F. 1. The Greek language had originally, in addition to the Spiritus Asper (') and the Lingual Breathing cr, a Labial Breathing, 1 the sound of which corre- sponds nearly to the Eng.y^ or the Latin v. In accordance with its form (F), which is like one Gamma standing upon another, it is named Digamma (double Gamma) ; and as the ^Eolians retained it longer than the other Grecian tribes, it is called the ^Eolic Digamma. It has the sixth place in the alphabet, namely, between and , and is named Bay. Comp. $ 26, 1 and 25, 2. 2. This character disappeared very early ; but its sound was in some cases changed, in some of the dialects, into the smooth Labial , e. g. /3io, vis, Fis (later fr) ; in other instances, it was softened into the vowel u, and, after other vowels, coalesced with these, and formed the diphthongs ay, eu, yv, ov, v, e. g. vavs (vdFs), navis, x u (x^) -Sol., povs (&6Fs), bdvs, bos, Gen. bovis; in others still, it was changed into a mere gentle breathing, which at the beginning of a word is denoted by the Spiritus Lenis, but in the middle of a word and before p is not indicated, e. g. Fis, vis, ft ; SFts, ovis, fas ; ctAcu, volvo ; FpoSov, p65ov, etc. ; it was also changed, in the beginning of some words, into a sharp breathing, which is denoted by the Spiritus Asper, e.g. c is found before the Digamma, e. g. eTrel otf efre v Ian x P ^ W1 ' ( = V Ff&w); (e) in compounds, neither Elision nor Crasis occurs, e. g. Siafiirefj.ev (= StcuPetTre^cv), aayfjs (= aFayfts) ; (f ) a digammated word with a preceding consonant, makes a vowel long by position, e. g. yap e&ev (where the p and the Digamma belonging to efrev make a long by position) ; (g) long vowels are not shortened before words that have the Digamma, e. g. /ccfoAef re aTiKfiuv KO.I e'/]ua(o t peyebos ; SO also Doric rpaQca, ffKiapSs, "AprafjLis instead of (TKiepoy, "Apre/jLis ; and in several particles, e. g. ctaa, rojTd'a>, 6pdu. e instead of o (Doric), e. g. e^f^Kovra instead of e/38o/d7Koj>Ta. a instead of o (Ion.), in ap'paSf'iv instead of bppuSeiv. 2. The following cases are to be noted in addition : The long o is a special peculiarity of the Doric dialect, and causes, in par- ticular, the so-called Plateiasm (i. e. the broad pronunciation) of the Dorians, e. g. ojuepa, Kairoy, o8us, Aa/iorrjp. The older and the later Ionic have softened this grave d into 77. The Attic uses both the Doric o and the softened 77, ( 16, 7). Comp. Dor. a^uepo, Ion. fi/j.epa, Att. fj/j-fpa (with the Ion. 77 and Doric o) ; Ion. tro(/)i7j, Dor. and Att. ffoOS, 0^7)0, so the Infinitive, e. g. XafirfVy Ka\T)V., instead of o*77^?or, tteivos, o|e?a, \afteii>, Ko\eiv. at instead of t (Doric), e. g. v (also Ion. and Pindar.) instead of olv, instead of 5ov/\os, upav6s instead of ovpav6s, fius instead of ftovs ; rinr- TOUTI(V) instead of TUTnovffi(v), rinrroKra instead of rvirrovaa, apov. 8 instead of 7 (Dor.), e. g. 55 instead of 77} ; hence Arj/u^T*?? instead of 5 instead of ft (Dor.), oSe\6s instead of of3e\6s. (c) The Aspirates b and \i&iv, oltyap (uber) ; tp-rjp and ), Tvp/iTj (from orupw), tar&a ; r^fpov, to-day, and TTJTCS, f/iz's year (the two last only in the comedians, but in tragedians and in other Attic writers , to crouch; fivo-ffos, a deep; TrnVtrw, to husk; TrriWw, to fold ; ftpdff is rejected), etc. o- and v in the Dor. verb-ending -/j.es, e. g. rvvr Q/U.CS (instead of the common form TVTtTO[jLsV) see 220, 6) ; also ales Dor. instead of alctr. 0-5 instead of (^Eol., so also in Theoc.) but only in the middle of words, e. g. /ueAtVSeTcu, /ieV5a>i> instead of jteA.ie TC > V-efav or jU6i / o'> not at the beginning of words, nor if & precedes, or and T, the first Att., the last Ion., e. g. ao-Qapayos Att., aa-Trdpayos Ion. So ^Eol. and Dor. TT, instead of , e. g. apirt ( JEol.) instead of a/x^>i ; hence in the Common language. d^Trexeti/, etc. jit and ir, e. g. ireSd (JEol. and Dor.) instead of perd. (d) The double consonants and t|/, and the two single consonants of which they are formed, though transposed, in the JEol. dialect, e. g. tr/feVos, tA.6ufrom t\ov] ir\(vves from ir\foi/fs 5 TrA.TjpeuVres from Tr\t]p6oyrs ir\r]povv- TCS ; etiiKdiev from tStKcdoe = tSiKalov ; elpwrevy from flpurraov elpArwv ; yt- \eiffa from yt\a.ov), namely, in verbs in -dw, in genitives in -oo and -deaf, in substantives in -dwv, Gen. -davos, and in proper names in -\aos, e. g. vcra.vres, x ^-" "'* ye\av from yf^dcav] v Kopav from rdcav Kopdwv = -ri\ffcu instead of t\f), which had been contracted from J/. 5. On the contrary, it is a special peculiarity of the Ionic dialect, that while it delights to avoid contractions, it still, in particular cases, admits them, where the Attic dialect does not, e. g. Ip6s (r), tpevs, IpcvaaaStai Ion., instead of /epo's, etc., and especially the contraction of OTJ into w, particularly in the verbs 0ouv and votiv, e. g. f/3a> very often in the adverb e'u (= e5, well), e. g. 4to Kpivas, ^UKT/- when jo, v, p, or a follows c'u in compounds then they are doubled, e. g. wT]Tos, t'up'p'oos, (v, and with at and forms (a, e. g. rb &yaA- ua = T&yatyta ; SO TwArj&e's, ruvrd, wrfp, uvSpes, &v&pcoTrot, (pir6\oi, from Tt> aArj- &e's, rb avr6, 6 avfjp, ol &v8pes. ol ap&pcoTrot. ol anr6\oi. In Herodot. occur, &piffTos, uTfj.6s (instead of 6 e^s), rowe/co, owena (instead of ou eVe/ca) j Kayu is doubtful. 2. Instances of Crasis in Doric are : r&\yeo$, r&vrpta instead of TOV oAyeos, r(f &vrp(a ; so o and = o>, at and e = 77, e. g. 6 eAa^os = 8>\a(pos, 6 e'| = ; e. g. 0"H?&ea, i?jue'as, &eot', xpwe'ots, redrewre ; much rarer in ae, to, tat. ill, ty, to, e. g. ae^AeiW, ir^Atas, ir6\ios; oo only in frySoop; uot only in Scucpvouri] 771 in Srjfoto, dy'iay, S7jfoir<, ^'taj (b) Between two words in the following combination of vowels : 77 a, i\ e, 77 77, YI ct, 77 ou, 77 ot ; et ou ; a> a, a ou ; the first word is either #, ^, 5^, /i^, and &re, or a word with the inflection-endings, 77, o>, e. g. %, ou, ST? acpvedTaros, fji^j aAAot, ctAoTTifTj 7/6 70/^05, aafieffTca ovS' uMv. 5. Elision (13 and 14) is found very often in Homer, particularly as fol- lows : (a) The a is elided in the PI. Neut. and the Ace. Sing, of the third Dec., rarely in the Aor. ending -<-', /ue', ere', etc. ; in the Voc. of the second Dec., in the Dual of the third Dec., in endings of the verb, and in particles, e. g. 5e', re', Tore, etc. (but never in t5e'). (c) The t in the Dat. PL of the third Dec. ; much rarer in the Dat. Sing., and only when jt could not be mistaken for the Ace., e. g. x a

U- 7i 376. rwv o! | c eye | vomo || e | vl fj.jd | poifft ye | ye^XTj, II. s, 270 ; (e) In the metrical Diaeresis,' after the first and fourth foot of the verse, e. g. IfyX 6 * | 'iSoftft/rjos ayavov AeuoA:5ao, II. ju, 117. Tre/i^oi ^TT' 'ArpeiSp ""Aya.fj.efj.vovi \ od\ov 'Qveipov, II. /J, 6. Comp. , 422 ; (f ) Where the first word has the apostrophe, e. g. 5/5/>e' e^oAAcv ; fe) Sometimes in proper names ; (h) Words, which have the digamma occasion no Hiatus ( 203, 3), e. g. ov | 5e ous | TrcuSas e | affKev (= ou5e Fovs). 207. Lengthening and Shortening of Vowels. 1. The following vowels are lengthened : A in Homer is sometimes lengthened into ot ; this occurs in atVro's, oV, a/yaf- oyucu, instead of ae-nfc, etc. ; so also ' irapai (also /caTcujSoTcu), in the tragedians 5taf, and analogous to these, j/rraf, instead of irapd, Sid, \nr6. a. into 77 in Homer, in f/epe'dotrai, fofptboin-at, ^i/e^fis in the Arsis, conse- quently on account of the metre. o into at before a (^Eol.) in the Ace. PI. of the first Dec. ; also in /j.e\ais and ToAcws instead of /i\ds, raAds, rcus instead of rdy, /coAoTs instead of KaX&s ; in Pindar, in the first Aor. Act. Part., e. g. rtyats, -aura instead of -ds, -a, e. g. reAefw, TTJ/C/W, also in etW instead of eo>y, urab7; sometimes also in the Augment and Reduplication, e. g. et'ATjAou&a, etot- Kviai) SctSta, SetSexoTat. E into 77 (Horn, and Dor.), in the Dec. of substantives in -euy, e. g. fiao-iXfiis, Gen. -Tjos, etc. 5 further (also Ion.), in adjectives in -eios, e. g. /Jao-tArji'oy, royal; likewise in single words, e. g. /cATjfy, /cATji'Soy (Ion.), etc., instead of /cAets, and in very many substantives in a of Dec. L, e. g. dATjdrjfy instead of dA^&eta. H sometimes into at (JEol.), e. g. Srvaia-Kca instead of Srvtifftua. O into ot (Ion. and Horn.) before a vowel in several words, e. g. irolt], TrotTjety, Xporf, poi-f}, etc. ; in the Gen. of the second Dec. in Homer, e. g. frcoTo instead of &(ov, and in (poivios, xopoirvTriii, 6fionr6piov, ayKoiisr)o'i(j'), and i)yvoir)cre(v). O is changed into ov (Ion. and Horn.) before a Liq. or Sigma, still only in a certain number of words ; and, in the Dor., before a Liq. into w, e. g. ic6pos Ion. Kovpos Dor. K&pos pAvos Ion. juoCj/os vo/j.a ' ofoofjut ' tavofta *O\v/j<.Tros " Ov\vfj.iros J also in the oblique cases of S6pv and yow. But substantives, which have the variable vowel o, cannot be thus lengthened, e. g. ir6vos from ireVo/ww, S6fj.os from O into w in Homer, on account of the verse, in wrao^uot (and also Tpoxaco, Trordofuu), f into ov often (Dor.), e. g. bovydrrip instead of frvydrrip. In Homer, in 2. The Epic dialect can resolve contracted syllables, when necessary, namely, a. into aa, a into aa ; t\ into 77, fir], i\f\ ; ca into ow, wo, o>o> ; particularly in the inflection of verbs, e. g. 6pdas instead of &pas, Kpfavov instead of K/JTJJ/OV, 6pow instead of 6pa>, yeXcbovres instead of yeXcavres, TJ/Jcoaxra instead of rj/Saxra ; also >s, light (from <|>aos), and proper names in - instead of AiVoy, erapTj, eT&pi&o&ai. Ei into e before liquids (Ion. and in Horn.), in the forms x*p6s> X f p' L > fro m Xeip, hand, so also Att. x f P^ X e P ffi 't also ( Ion - and Dor -) before a vowel, in Proparoxytones in -etoy, and in Properispomena in -e?a ; in Homer, onlyiaa few Fern, adjectives in -vy, e. g. 207.] LENGTHENING AND SHORTENING OF VOWELS. 245 , -e'??, -cov Ion. instead of -etos w/te'a instead of i/ccm from o>/ct5s re'Aeos, -CTJ, -eoj> " -ftos fia&tri " j8o&e?a " fia&ts fvpci) from eupus " -eTa 5a/, Kp4 instead of -upey, e. g. Oi into o often in the Dor. and JEol. dialects, e. g. TTOW instead of iroi>. Ov into o in Horn, in the compounds of vovs, e. g. aeAAoy, /cei/o's; so also in the Gen. PI. Fern. oureW, To prevent the accumulation of short syllables, he inserts in several compound words an TJ in place of the short vowel, e. g. TovTjAeyeoy, ir/j)8oAos, eVrjerco'^s, oAryrjireAe'w, e'Aa^jSoAos, instead of ravuA., eVtjS., eVteT., 6\iyoir., f\a(po^6\os. 21* 246 DIALECTS. [$ 208. An i is inserted in Homer after ot in f>p.oli6s instead of '6/j.oios, and in the Dual oitv instead of -oiv. 10. The later Ionic, also, sometimes inserts e before a long vowel : (a) in some genitives of substantives and Fern, pronouns before o>, and in OVTOS, roi- ovros, and avr6s before long inflection-endings, e. g. avtipeav, x^W, e/ceu/eW, TovTfwir, aurtwj/, avTfta ; (b) in some forms of the verb before a long vowel, e. g. /(Tre'curi, 8vt/ew/j.ai, 8iW have forms as if from -ew, e. g. /3oAAo> ffv/j.^a\\e6/ui.j/os, u7repoAAeW ; irica> irifevpfvos (also in Horn. ineew instead of eirie&ov) ; also etyee, ^et%e, (J>Aee, from e\J/eo, eVe'xw, 3>oos ; fi)/j.affpd(ra'o/J.ai, e^eiviffffa ; (d) In the middle of several words, e. g. &rdpvyyos. 5. Homer often places a consonant before a short syllable, to make it long by position, namely, a v in viavv/jLvos, a7raAa/*j/os, ISpuj/^, a^v a T after ?r in irroAe^os, irroAiep8aAeos. Here belongs also the Epic prefix of p. ( v, according to 24, 3), before /Spo- re's in composition, so as to strengthen tho long syllable and give fulness to the word, e. g. fyfipoTos, rep^ifj-ftporos, and in a.^afflf) instead of $209. Quantity. PRELIMINARY REMARK. Only a few general rules will be given here ; the quantity of particular words, not embraced in these rules, may be learned from rules previously given, or by observation. 1 . A syllable which has the vowels or o, followed by another vowel or a single consonant, is short by nature, e. g. re/ccfs, dec's, jSdij. 2. A syllable which has the vowel 7? or /, etc. (Comp. 45.) (b) a in the Dual of all nouns of the first Dec., is long, e. g. Nom. Sing. Ae'aipd, Dual \ecuVd. (c) o is long in the Gen. Sing, in -oo and Gen. PL in -& | as; also (b) when the final syllable ends with a short vowel, but the following word begins witli a double consonant, or with two single consonants, which arc not a mute and liquid, e. g. a8/u^ | TTJI/, ir\v \ oijiro) v \ no vybv | tfyayev \ ajrfjp, H- ? 293. But a mute and a liquid in this case, always make the syllable in the Arsis long ; on the contrary, the syllable in the Thesis, may be either long or short according to the necessities of the verse ; e. g. /j.-f) /i< \ 5o>p' (pa \ TO irp6(pe \ pi XP V I O'erjs *A \ TetVro, II. /*, 283. frwyare \ pa, lf\v (= F-ffv), H. A, 226. REM. 3. A syllable in itself short, may be used as long or short in the same word, according as it is or is not. in the Arsis, e. g." 7 Apes "'A | pes jSporo J Xoryc; avfipes "I | ffaffiv and -nXs'iova \ 'iffaffiv. 10. Not unfrequently in Homer, from the mere necessities of the verse, a short vowel is measured as long in the Thesis, when it stands between two long syllables. This occurs in the middle of a word, and oftenest with t, e. g. (rd-' VTTO | 8e|f | 77, II. j, 73. 770-1 Trpo | Sfv/j.t | yet, II. j8, 588 ; this is rarely the case at the end of a word, e. g. TTVKVCL \ p(aya\e \ i\v^ Od. p, 198. T?; 8' tirl \ fiev Top | 70* /3Aotv). 1. In the Homeric dialect there is, besides the Case-inflections, a Suffix i(v), whii'h properly and originally denotes the indefinite where, like ' the local Dat. (see the Syntax) ; it is also used to express other relations of the Dat., as the Dat. of the instrument, and with prepositions (such as in Lat. govern the Abl.), it expresses those relations of the Gen. which in Latin would be denoted by the Abl. 2. The Suffix t, before or without the door (in several ancient editions Tjiv, Od. 5, 407 (as soon as the morning dawned). II. Declension both Singular and Plural. All these forms, without respect to the accent of the Nom., are paroxytone (-6u>) : (a) Dat. SaKpv6(f>iv (with tears), ^(rrosp araXavros S^tyiv (an adviser equal to the gods) ; (b) Geni- tive (Abl.) OTTO or /c Tra(T(ra\6(j)iv (to take from the pin), e/c &6iv (from the bones). III. Declension almost exclusively in the PL &iv is here used with not a large number of neuter substantives in -os (Gen. -cos), also with KOTv\T)5v and vavs, e. g. irpbs KorvXySo^cp^v) (with the union-vowel o), to the arms, vav- eA777epeTd, nrTnjAdVd, /uTjT/ero, fvpuoira. The Voc. retains the ending -a in all these words. 2. The Gen. Sing, of masculines in -rjs and -as originally ended in -do ; -do was then contracted into - (Dor. into -d). In Horn, both the uncontracted and contracted form is found ; he also resolves the -o>, originating from -oo, by means of e (comp 207, 3) ; it is further to be remarked, that the -co in respect to accent is considered short ( 29, Kem. 7) and the e is always pro- nounced with the Synizesis ; -e becomes - when a vowel or p precedes (still AtVeieco, II. e, 534). Thus there occur in Homer, 'Ep/uetos, Gen. 'Epjuetdo and 'Ep/j.fico] Eoperis, Gen. Bopedo and Bopew; 'ArpeiSrjs, 'Arpei'Sdo, and 'ATpei'Sew, iKfTao and i/cerew ; et)/^ieAia>, 'A 5eo*7roVea, TOUS Seo-TroVeos from Seo-Tnmjs, -ou, MtATioSea from MiA-rtd'o'Tjs, -ou. 4. The Gen. PI. of all the endings was originally in -dW ; -duv was after- wards contracted into -&v (Dor. in -oV). Homer uses both the uncontracted and contracted forms, e. g. fredW and frewv, irapeiduv and irapeiuv. He can also, as in the Gen. Sing., again resolve, by means of e, the -wi/ originating from -dcav] the ending thus becomes -eW, which is commonly pronounced with Synizesis, e. g. TruAeW, &upeW, oyopeW. The Gen. ending -eW becomes in the Ion. writers, the common form, e. g. MouaeW, TI^WV. 5. The Dat. PI. originally ended in -ojo-i(j') ; this ending is found in the Dor. writers, in the Att. poets, and even in the older Att. prose writers ; in the Ion. writers, -oto-t was changed into -ri, and some Masc. common nouns with the ending 213.] THIRD DECLENSION. 251 ~ewv in the Gen. PL, e.g. irea-fffuv ; (b) The ending -dcav instead of the Ion. ~4(av belongs to the Dor. (comp. alyav instead of alydcoi/ from o?, 213, 5). 4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual in the Epic dialect ends in -ouv instead of -s, 'Ado'wy, Kttas, Gen. -6;, e. g. adv, yudi/Js instead of /xVjj', fj.i]v6s, etc., "EAAd;/, "EAAd^es, Tfoi^av instead of iroifj.^]v y Gen. ds, -aros instead of j/e^TTjy, -TJTOS. fjp, &rjpes, and all names of persons in -r-fjp, are exceptions to this Dor. usage. 2. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, on the contrary, 77 commonly takes the place of the long o, as also elsewhere, e. g. &&PT]!-, ofrj, '/PTJ instead of ^c5pd|, /epd|. 3. The Dat. PI. in the Epic dialect, ends, according to the necessities of the measure, in -a-t(j'), - an( ^ a-vdicr-fffiv (from fiva|, oVa/cr-os). In Neuters, which have a radical a in the Nom., the or is omitted when it stands between two vowels ( 25, 1), e.g. &re-e a^SpeW ( 207, 10). Theocritus has TO.V alyav (instead of ruv alycav] from 77 ot|, a goat, after the analogy of the first Dec. 6. The Epic dialect sometimes forms the Ace. Sing, of words in -us (stem u) in a instead of v, e. g. eupea irSi/rov, t%&ua, yea from vavs. 7. The words ye\ws, laughter ; ISpds, sweat ; epcas, love, which properly belong to the third Dec., in Homer follow the Attic second Dec. in some of the Cases, e. g. ISpca, ISpw instead of t'Spwra and /Spam ; y4\", -Tjas. Yet the long a in the Ace. -u, -eds of the Attic dialri-t. a-ain becomes short. Among the proper names, the following are to be specially noted : 'OSuo-ereus, Gen. 'O8v Dat., and MiVw Ace. occur. (b) -), o5fc irAore?. In the Nom. PL, the form can be either contracted or uncon- tracted ; in the Ace. PL, the uncontracted form in -eas is regular, which, when the verse requires, can be pronounced as a monosyllable, e. g. TreAeVeos (tri- syllable). $ 214. Anomalous and Defective Words. Metaplasts. 1. T6w (TO. knee) and S6pv (rb, spear, 68, 1), are declined in Homer as follows : Sing. "youVoTos and yovvos Sotiparos and Soupos dovpan and Sovpl PL Nom. yovvasra " yovva. Sovpara " Sovpa Dual Sovpe Gen. yovvwv Sovpow Dat. yovvae). The form yovi>a, 451, 569) has critically little authority. 2. The following forms of icdpa (rb, head, 68, 6) are found in the Homeric dialect: Sing. Nom. Kefprj Gen. K^TJTOS /cop^oros Kparts Kpdaros Dat. icdprjTi Kap^ari Kpari Kpdan. Acc. itdpi) (riv Kparo, Od. ^, 92, and eVi KC/), II. TT, 392). 215.] ADJECTIVES. 255 PI. Nom. Kdpa, Katfara ; secondary form Gen. Kpdrwv " Dat. Kpaa-l(v) Ace. Kpdara " 3. AH as (6, stone, Horn., instead of Aas), Gen. Aaos, Dat. Ao7, Ace. Aooy, Gen. PL \dtuv, Dat. \dfff v vauv Dat. tn]v(ri (vaul i X*P a -> Dual x *P e > X f P ?" (poet, also xetpoiV), PL x*P fS i X f P& v i X f P ff ' l ( v ) (x f ^P fffl ( v )i an( ^ -fffo'i(v) in Homer), x*P as ' REMARK 1. Metaplasm (72) occurs in Homer in the following words: ./a/, T^, strength, Dat. dA/cf (from Nom. *AAH) ; 'Afttys, -ou, 6, Gen. fii'Sos, Dat. Ji j'AI2) ; 'AvTi, Nom. and Acc. Dual, 6o: or TJUS, Neut. TJV (ei) and eS only as an adverb), wants the feminine form ; in II. ca, 528, is found Sapuv ola SiScaai KO.KWV, erepos 5e eao>j> (sc. SwpcDj/), therefore ed'wy as the Gen. PI. Neut., unless perhaps from Sddpw the cognate SoVewp is to be supplied for taw to agree with, as in 5&m/pes e'owv the Gen. Sing, is eojos. 2. Adjectives in -7?eis, -ijcao-a, -yjej/, are often found in Homer in the contracted form -775, -9j(T(ra, -TJV, e. g. Ti/tps (and rt^/cis), TIJUTJI/TO; those in -o^ts, -o'etro'a, -oW, contract -oe into -eu, e. g. ireSia AcoTeSira. 3. In the Epic dialect, iro\vs is regularly inflected in the masculine and neuter, viz. Nom. TTO\VS and irouAuj, Neut. TTO\J, with the secondary forms iro\\6s, iro\\6v. Gen. iroAeos, Ace. iroXvv and TTOV\VU, TTO\V and TroAAoi' ; Nom. PL TroAees and 7roAe?y, Gen. iroAeW, Dat. TroAeV^j/), TroAeVo'ifj'), and iroAeetrtr^v), Acc. iroAeoy and TroAels. The Ionic dialect inflects iroAAos, -^, -J>', regularly throughout. 4. Compound Adj. in -os (comp. 78, 1.) often have in Horn, a feminine ending, viz. -i), e. g. o&cwaTTj, dcr^eo-TTj, iro\v(j>6p&ri, apt^Arj (but also apln\oi avyai, II. X, 27), &^0t/3pJT7j, o^x 4 ^ 1 ?? apyvpoirtfa, a/j.(f)ipvrr) ; on the contrary, /cAurJs as a feminine is found in II. )8, 742. Od. e, 422, from the simple KAimfc, -4j, -Tepos t 6ivpTfpos, \dp(t>Taros. 'AvtTjptta, troublesome, has the Comparative oj/tTjpeo-Tepoj/, Od. )8, 190, and &x a P iS > disagreeable, axapivrfpos, Od. u, 392. Comp. 82, Kem. 6. Adjectives in -us and -pos, in the Homeric dialect, form the Comparative and Superlative in -icov, -iov, and -ttfros, -rj, -oc, sometimes also regularly, e. g. eAax^Sj little, e\dx t, 531, with the variation ^/CKTTOS, which Spitzner prefers). oA/yos, Comp. o\ia>v (b\ioves ?i> populi suberant statura minores, II. always has the signification of the Compara- tive /..N-.S-, ftoaer, iceotcr. The PI. irAj and (Ace.) irAe'as arc found in Homer from the Comp. irXfW. RI:M. 2. In the Kpic dialect, the forms of the Comparative and Superlative, in many instance's, arc derived from Substantives; some of these forms have Urn tran>U'nvd to the Common language : & a a i A. e v s &a Doric TTV Dor. ; Tffv Dor. et tv Dor. (usually or- Ep. ( usually Orthot.) roi (TOI) Ep. and Ion. thotone) eoT, of (ot)Ep( Reflex.) A. ^te, (t.4 (fj.f) Epic w \ -p ff^Av.c^lv ) A. Vtol, Vd) ) Epic P. N. fjfj.e'is Epic ; rjfjLffs Ion. v[j.(is Ep. ; Ujiiees Ion. ff^)W, (T^W a/ies Dor. ; fy^tes Epic u/xe's Dor. ; u)t/ies Ep. G. r)(jLeo)v Ion. and Epic u^ieW Ion. and Epic fftyfuv (ffQeiav) Ion. r]/j.(twv Epic v/j.fiwv Epic and Epic CLULLCCOV UXjOllC CtJUCOV i>fj.fjL(cav JEiQ\. ei'a/ Epic D. ^UP, ^/UIP, ^/i/ Epic vfjuv, vfj.iv, v/j-iv Epic 6/xyut(j') jEol. and Ep. : VLLLiltl/) EpiC ^- aiuv and o^/v Dor. r^te'tf. 1 )^' A. T]fj.fas Ion. and Epic fyie'as Epic and Ion. rJJ C^) Ion. and Epic ^os, r]fj.ds Epic a^e Epic ; aue Dor. V/J.CLS, vfj.ds Epic tf/i^e Epic ; vp.4 Dor. ff, situs, Epic ; a/j.6s, --f), -&v Dor. and Epic, fyt^uos, a^ueVepos JEol., instead of r)/j.erepos ; vcai'repos, of us both, Epic ; fytJs, -^, -s, r6s Dor. (b) #8: Epic Dat. PI. To2s5e, are formed according to the analogy of those beginning with p, i. e. by Metathesis ; hence e/^opa, etc., instead of fj.ffj.opa. The Epic and Ion. Perf. of KT(O/U is I/CTTJ/XCU. A strengthened reduplication is found in the Horn, forms SeiSe'xarai and Sei'Se/cro. 7. In the Epic dialect, the second Aor. Act. and Mid. also often takes the reduplication, which remains through all the modes. In the Ind. the simple augment e is commonly omitted; thus, e. g. Ka/xj/w, to grow weary, Subj. Aor. KtK, latfo, to escape notice, A.eAa&oj/ ; iref&aj, to persuade, Treiribov, ireTn&J- fitjv : repireo, to delight, TTpair6fj.r)i' ; rvyxdvta, to obtain, TTy/ce/, #ENfl, ^o murder, Zirttpt/ov, irtcpvov; a.K-ax'np.a.i ; 'ENEK& (), to carry, Ion. <=V- f]Vfiyfji.ai ; epeiTrco, to demolish, Poet. ep-^ptTra, Epic ep-eprTo ; ep, to contend, Epic ep-Tjpta/tcu. $220. Personal-endings and Mode-vowels. 1. First Pers. Sing. Act. The original ending -/LU of the first Pers. Sing., is found in the Epic dialect in several subjunctives, e. g. Kreivu/Jti, aydywfu, TVX&Y", ftcw/u, ed-eAojjtu, ?5a>,iu. Comp. 116, 1. 2. Second Pers. Sing. Act. In the Dor., and particularly in the JEol. and Ep. dialect, the lengthened form -, Od. ; tfovcerv, 11. 7, 388. 9. The second and third Pers. Dual of the historical tenses are sometimes cchan^vil lor each other. Thus in Homer, the forms -rov and -vbov (second Pers. Dual) stand instead of -TTJJ/ and - pdfv t iKpt/jLu. When the characteristic of the verb is e, it is very frequently omitted in the Ion. dialect, before -ecu and -eo, e. g. , 202, yet with the variation f*Ae' from K\eo/j.at. Comp. 222, B (3). The ending -eo in Homer is lengthened into -etc, e. g. epeto, o-TreTo, and the ending -e'ecu is contracted into -flat, in verbs in -e'w, e. g. fivbeicu, vfiai. Homer sometimes drops a in the second Pers. Sing. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, also, viz. /ie'/iur/ai (and /-le'/wi?), /3e'/3A7)CU, IWVO. 11. The Dual endings -TTJV, -O-&TJJ/, and first Pers. Sing. -/MJP, in the Doric are, -rdv, -a-^dv, -p.a.v ( 201, 2), e. g. t) MjAa^cu eArjAaSaro, Od. rj, 86, and a.Kaxify a.K-f]X f l J - ai aiojx^oTot, II. p, 637 ; the 8 seems to be merely euphonic ; yet it is to be noted, that the reading is not wholly settled ; the forms tppdSaTtu and (ppatiaro (from paivw) must be derived from the stem 'PAZfl (comp. pdcrffarf, Od. u, 150). 262 DIALECTS. [$ 220. 14. The third Pers. PL Aor. Pass, --riffav is abridged into -ev, in the Doric, and also frequently in the Epic and poetic dialect, e. g. rpdev instead of erpd- Qrjffav. In the Opt. this abridged form is regular in the Common language ( 116, 7), e. g. TiK^freTej/ instead of rvcf>&eir)&i6}j.eTat instead of -nrai ( 207, 4). 17. The first Aor. Opt. Act., in the JEolic dialect ends in -eta, -etas, -eie, etc., third Pers. PL -eiav, instead of -cu/u, -ais, -at, etc., third Pers. PL -aiev. See 116, 9. 18. Infinitive. The original full form of the Inf. Act. is -fj-evai, and with the mode-vowel, -e/uei/ai, which is found in the Epic, Doric, and ^olic dialects. This form is sometimes shortened into -/j.ev (-e^v) by dropping at, sometimes into -vai by syncopating /te (e/*e). But in the Epic dialect, the ending -eiv also is found, formed from -e/iev, and in contract verbs, and in the second Aor., also the endings -eeiv and -e/. The Pres., Fut., and second Aor. take the mode- vowel e and the ending -pev, hence -fftev, e. g. rvTrr-e-fjiff, rmJ/eVtei/, flir^fv. Verbs in -da and -ecu, as they contract the characteristic-vowel a and the mode-vowel 6 of the Inf. ending -^vai, have the form -^/teyat, e. g. yoii^vai (yodco), (piX-hpevai (opfw). With the ending -f)fj.euai corre- sponds that of the Aorists Pass., e. g. rvTr-fipevcu instead of ruTT^yat, aoAAto- 3^/iei/at ; so always in the Epic dialect ; but the Doric has the abridged form in -fj/zei', e. g. ruTTTj/iev. In the Pres. of verbs in -/, the ending -/JLCV and -^vai is appended to the unchanged stem of the Pres., and in the second Aor. Act., to the pure stem, e. g. Tt^6-/iy, Ti&e'-jueyat, Iffrd-^ev, lara.-p.evai, 8i86-/j.ey, StS^-fiej/at, Sei/cj/u-^iej/, SeiKvv-iJLevai ; &e-fj.ev, ^e'-yuevai, So-/j.ev, SJ-^evat; so also in Perfects derived immediately from the stem of the verb, e. g. Tedycfyiei/, /SejSauev. The following are exceptions, viz. T^^VOLI, II. ^, 83 (with which the forms of the Pres. Part. Mid. rt^/tevos, Kixfowos, correspond), SiSowot, II. o>, 425, also the Inf. second Aor. Act. of verbs in -a and -u, which also retain the long vowel ( 191, 2), e. g. ffr^-fj-evat, 0-f)-fj.evai, 5v-fj.evat, instead of crr^vai, Swai. 19. Besides the forms in -eleven and -e/zev, the Doric dialect has one in -ev abridged from thes^pe. g. &yw instead of &yeiv ; Fut. ap(j.6 instead of apfj.6- fffiv ; second Aor. 2SeV instead of iSeTv, Ao)8eV instead of \apetv, etc. In the Doric of Theocritus, the JEol. Inf. ending -i\v is found, e. g. x a ^"? I/ > second Aor. \aftriv, instead of xcupeij/, Xo/3e?v. 20. The Inf. ending of the Aor. Pass. -^i/ot, -%tei/, is abridged into -t\v in the Doric Avriters, yet only after a preceding long syllable, e. g. it,&va*rt)v instead of -dfjwu. The Inf. ending of the Perf. Act. varies between -t]v and -eiv in the Doric and JEolic writers, e. g. reS-ewp^KTjy, yey6vw instead of ypyov^vot. , 222.] CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION IN VERBS. 263 21. Participle. The JEoYic dialect has the diphthong 01 instead of ov before tr in participle's, and ai instead of a, C. g. TWITTOH/, rvirrotffa, rinrrof, Aao?vy~ffKe ; in verbs in -/a, without a mode- vowel, e.g. ffrd-ffKf (= ccrrrj), irapefid txp& (re (from XP W > to attack). 264 DIALECTS. [$ 222. (2) In some words, a is changed into e, viz. psvoiveov from from avrdca, opoitXeov from 6/j.oK\dco. Comp. 201, 1. (3) Instead of the uncontracted and contracted forms, the contracted syllable is resolved, as often as the measure requires it ; this is done by inserting a simi- lar vowel, commonly shorter, more seldom longer, before the vowel formed by contraction ; in this way, a is resolved into ad or da, and } bp6u>\ but if this syllable is long, the long vowel must be used on account of the verse, e. g. r)f}cacaTa, ye\ct>ovTts, nvcaot/ro ; in the Opt. also, the protracted -wot instead of -co is found in jjfr&otfu (instead of jipdoifu = J?0?/u). The following are anomalous forms: vaierdwffa (instead of -oWa), crdca, second Pers. Imp. Pres. Mid. and third Pcrs. Sing, Impf. Act. from 2An, to save. HEM. 2. On the Inf. in ^evtu of verbs in ~dca and -ew, see 220, 18, and on the Epic-Ionic contraction of or? into , see 205, 5. B. Verbs in- e w. To this conjugation belong also all Futures in -e'co and -eo/xo'j all second Persons in -eo, -eoi, and -you, second Aor. Inf. Act. in -eW, and the Aor. Pass. Subj. in -eo> and -ica. ( 1 ) Contraction does not take place in all forms in which e is followed by the vowels w, o>, rj, p, ot, and ou, e. g. i\4canev, tA.e'o*/a, etc. ; yet such uncontracted forms must commonly be read with Synizesis. In other instances, the contrac- tion is either omitted according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. (JuAe'ei, epeca Tut., oTpvvtovffa Put., |8aAeW second Aor. Act., Tretreeo-^at Put. Mid., piyfcafft second Aor. Subj. Pass. ; or contraction takes place, and then, when eo is con- tracted, it becomes eu ( 205, 1), e. g. afpeu/wjj', aiirevu, y4vev ; except aveppiirTovv and eir6p&ovv. (2) Sometimes the open e is lengthened into t ( 207, 1), e. g. IrcXefero, fT&eiov, irXfteiv, OKveica, Sajueiw instead of Sajuw, p.iyeir) instead of fuyfi (second Aor. Subj. Pass.). (3) In the ending of the second Pers. Sing. Pres. Mid. or Pass., two Epsilons coming together are either contracted, as in the third Pers., e. g. ' f'iai, like /u>&eTTat, veiai, like veTrat, or one e is elided, e. g. -'.'.] CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION IN VERBS. 265 This elision commonly occurs both among the Epic and Ionic writers, in tlu- second 1'ers. luijtf. and Imp. Pros. Mid. or Pass., e. g. oeo, ooirra, iSpuovcra, virvuotnas (comp. ^/3woj/To, 4 above) ; or they become wholly analogous to verbs in -du, since they resolve -oviri (third Pers. PL Pres.) into owffiy -OVVTO into -Jwi/ro, and -otev into -6u>ev, and consequently suppose a contraction like that of verbs in -aw: (aptovvi) apovvi ap6a>TO SrjiduvTO (comp. 6p6 or -wo is confined to such forms as admit it in verbs in -du> ; hence, e. g. the Pres. apoTs, apol, apovre, and the Inf. apow, do not admit this resolution. II. Ionic dialect. (1) In the Ionic dialect, only verbs in -di\eufj.ev instead of (pt\to- fnf V = iAoC^e>', ttAeou = i\-eai, e^iAe-eo. On the elision of e in the ending -e'eo, see above, No. 1, B (3). (3) Verbs in -aw follow the common rules of contraction; but in the uncon- tractcd form, the o is changed into e, e. g. 6pew, <5pe'o,uef instead of dpdca, xpeera*, tovTcu instead of xp^rat, etc. Comp. 201, 1. (4) Ao in the uncontracted forms is frequently lengthened into eo> ( 207, 3), e. g. x/ )e ' wl/Ta '? tKTeooivo, 6pea>KTS, ireipeujj.ei>os instead of (xpaojrcu) xP^VTai, etc. (5) The change of the a into e, as in e'w, explains the usage among the Ion. writers of sometimes contracting oo and aov, and also and tov in verbs in -fw, into -eu ( 205, 1), e. g. tlpurevv instead of flpuraov, y(\ev instead of ov is often found even in verbs in -6ia, e. g. SIKOKVO-I instead of (StKadovcri) SiKaiovvi, Kcufvv instead of 5tatoDv, eSiKaievv, (rrfQavtvyrcu from has a double form, either the abridged form in -/ instead of -e?y, e. g. TroieV instead of iroieli/, or according to the analogy of verbs in -dw, a form in -TJV (from -erjv), e. g. -(ri, yeXav instead of ye\(d-wf)(ev, Qvaavrfs instead of (j>v-rres. REM. 4. On the contraction into -eu instead of -ov, see 205, 1. A striking peculiarity of the Doric dialect, especially of the later Doric as used by The- ocritus, is, that it frequently has a long a even in the inflection of verbs in -e, e. g. firSvcura instead of tv6v^, tyi\cura instead of ei\7j(ra from $ 223. Formation of the Tenses. 1. Besides the verbs mentioned ( 130), the following also in the Homeric dialect retain the short characteristic-vowel in forming the tenses, viz. KOTCW, to have a grudge ; veiKw, to quarrel ; ravvu, to stretch ; fyuw, to draw. On the con- trary, eVcuve'oj, to approve, has tTrr}inr}ffa. 2. In the Fut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid. of pure verbs, which retain the short characteristic- vowel in forming the tenses, and in the same tenses of verbs in -o>, -arffu (-TTW), the , e. g. Krepiovffi, dyAai'ero-^ot, together with the common Futures dp/j.ia-a'o- [j.Vj KOTrpiffffovres, Kovi, -da, -vw, Horn, forms Futures which are similar to the present of these words, viz. in verbs in -ew, he often uses the ending -4 take | instead of , to r^cd ; tr e A e /* f a>, to shake ; ir o A e /* f a>, to contend ; , to smite. G. Liquid verbs in -of VG>, which in the Attic dialect form the Aor. with the ending -ova instead of -t\va. ( 149, Rcm. 2), have d in the Doric, and t\ in the Epic and Ionic. The following liquid verbs, in the Epic and poetic dialect of all periods, form the Fut. and first Aor. with the ending -vu and -o-o, viz. upd, tyvpaaa, irvpa/wcu, etc., is used). The Opt. o^eAAetcy, Od. ft, 334. II. , 651, is formed according to the usage of the JEolic. 7. To verbs which form the Fut. without the tense-characteristic o* ($ 154, 4) belong the following forms of the Epic dialect : fttopcu or ftfioficu, second Pers. ftty, I shall live, perhaps from ftaivta, to go, to live, also from A An, to know, to learn, and KEIft (/cel^ou, to lie down), Srjca, STJCIS, S-rjo/jLev, Sricre (I shall view,Jind), and Kfiu Or KIW, KCif/xcp, Keiwv, Kfcov. 8. To verbs which form the first Aor. without the tense-characteristic to pour out, fxeua (Homer; Att. fX fa ) 5 KexapW* (from XAIPE-n), aAAcu fi(p\T)Ka. (from BAA). Except these, he forms only second Perfects (which belong commonly to intransitive verbs, or have an intransitive signification) ; but even in pure verbs and in the impure verbs mentioned above, he rejects the in certain persons and modes, and regularly in the Part. ; in this way, these forms become analo- gous to those of the second Perf. These participles either lengthen a and e into 77, e. g. /SejSaprjws, burdened (from BAPEn), Keicopycas, satisfied (from fcope'-i/w/it), K*KOTir)s } from 3xiAA), \f\aKv7a (of \f\iiKs, from \d(TKw), ireTra&vta (from TTCIO-XCU). REMARK 1. The form resolved by e, in the Ionic dialect, has become the permanent one with some participles, e. g. es, eo-Tewtro, effreds, Gen. eo-rewTOS, -(ixrr]s r&Vfcas, TedreaJtra, Te^j/ec5s, Gen. Tf&vewros, -dxrris. BejSTjKo and rerXrjKa never have these forms. Comp. 193, Hem. 3. 14. Some verbs, which in the stem of the Pres. have the diphthong /, shorten it in the Epic and poetic dialect into v, in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and in the first Aor. Pass., e. g. t, to ask, IT eirvff p.ai ; ffevca, to shake, Mid. and Pass, to hasten, eff paro, Perf. Teruy^at, Aor. ' < / >6 ^7 5 to flee, Perf. irec REM. 2. X eeo (formed from x^ X 6 ^)! * ^ OMr Ouf 5 follows the analogy of these verbs, in the forms KC'XVKO, /cc'x^at, ^x^" 5 tnese forms have been trans- ferred to the Common language also ($ 154, Rem. 1 ). Contrary to the analogy 224. CONJUGATION IN -fit. 269 -tatcd, the v is long in the Homeric form ir^iryvfuu from irveu (*WF), to REM. 3. In Homer, Od. v/7j) from <^uo>; so <^?o, ^?TO Opt. of l<^ip.f]v from 4. The third Pers. PL Impf. and second Aor. in -e-o-cw, -7j-&i. 1\7)&i instead of VAddi. 7. The third Pers. Sing. Subj. has often in the Epic dialect the ending -, e. g. Sdxavt instead of Sun. 9. In the Subj. second Aor., Homer uses the following forms, according to the nature of the verse : Sing. 1. 2. 3. Dual. Plur. 1. 2. 3. Sing. 1. 2. 3. Dual. Plur. 1. 2. 3. Sing. 1. 2. 3. Plur. 1. 2. 3. Contracted, ffTU d, hy the Ion. writers, into o ( 220, 13), c. g. T&tarcu, StSJareu, t'SeiKj/uaro Ion., instead of T&eirai, etc. But when nn a precedes the v, the a is changed into , and v into o, e. g. iVrcarcu Ion., instead of 'iffravrai^ lffT4a.ro Ion., instead of arTairo. 13. The third Pel's. Sing, in the Doric is -TI, c. g. for art, T^TI, Si'Sam, 8f//c- rOr, and the third Pers. PI. ends in -VTI, c. g. /O-TCUTJ, Ti&eVri, 5i5), efy Epic, ^ Ep. and Ion. PI. eoj/iev, 77Te, eo)(rt Ep. and Ion. Imperative. S. 2. 0-V, ^oG(TO, Participle, tov Ep. and Ion. IMPERFECT. S.I. 2. 3. D.3. P. 1. 2. 3. Indicative, %a (comp. ^-n'&ea), ^a, eor, to-Kov Epic and Ion. e7j to S- i Epic, els Ion. Subj. Sing. 2. Pcrs. fytrda Epic i, fytfj/ Epic fjifa (and jyeii/) Epic and Ion., %'iov Epic tfies (and ^fets), ?S Epic #e (and pet) Epic and Ion , fjiefj/) Epic, ^ Epic r\iov Epic, fiiaa.v and rjaav Epic and Ion., tffav Epic frriv Epic tot Epic, tetT? II. T, 209. (eV and efy II. o, 82. w, 139. Od. |, 496, 272 DIALECTS. [$ 227. P.I. 3. D.3. Opt. S. 3. come from et'/it)- jFu*. and J.o/\ Mid. efrro/xat, efrraro, third Pers. Dual teicrd, WHICH IN THE PRES., PERF., AND SECOND AOR. ACT. AND MlD., FOLLOW THE ANALOGY OF VERBS IN -/it. $227. (1) Second Aor. Act. and Mid. In addition to the Aor. forms mentioned ( 191, 192), the poetic and especially the Epic dialect has the following : A. THE CHARACTERISTIC is A VOWEL. (a) Stem- Vowel a (e/3T?v, BA-) : /3a"AAa>, to throw, Epic second Aor. Act. (BAA-, e/JArjv) |u / u/3A7jTTji', Od. <, 15, Inf. lu/ijSA^uepai (instead of -?}i/at), II. , 578 ; Epic second Aor. Mid. (e')8Arj- /MJJ>) C^ATJTO, 1^1/3 AT; J/TO, II. |, 27, Inf. A?5cr&a(, Part. j8AT?,uej/os, Subj. II^ATJ- rat, )8AtjeTat (instead of /BAT/r/Tat), Od. p, 472, Opt. Ae?o (from BAE-, comp. irt^TrATj^t), II. y, 288. Hence the Put. ^\^{ro/j.ai. "Ynpdca, or yrjpdtTKG}, to grow old, second Aor. third Pers. Sing, ty-ftpa, II. p, 197, KaTfyfjpa, Herod. 6, 72, Inf. (Att.) ynpavai, Part. (Epic) yripds. The a. in tyripa., etc. is used instead of i\ on account of the preceding p. See StSpoV/cw, 192, 1. KTeiVco, to fc/7/, Epic and poet, second Aor. Act. (KTA-) e/crav retains the short vowel ; thus, e/cTd^tej/, tf/cTare, third Pers. PL also ZKTO.V instead of c/crdcraj', Subj. KTW (first Pers. PI. KT^W^V Epic), Opt. /craiTji/, Inf. /cravat, (Epic /cxa^tei/, Kra^uevat), Part. ACTOJ ; Epic second Aor. Mid. with Pass, sense, cbre'/craro, /cracTidat, Ka.Ta.KTa.iJ.tvos. ovrdw, to wound, Epic second Aor. Act. oSra third Pers. Sing., Inf. ovrdpej/ai, ovrdfj-ev (the a remains short as in e/cTdv) ; Epic second Aor. Mid. , fo approach, Epic second Aor. Mid. CTTATJ^I/, (Att. eVAa/nji'), ir\TJTO (irt/j.Tr\T]fj.i), to Jill, Epic second Aor. Mid. ^TTATJTO and TTA^TO, also in Aristoph., who uses the following forms also : Imp. TTA^O-O, Part. e^uTrA^- /ievos, Opt. f/j.w\yfj.i]v with the variation ^iwrAet'/w/J', as xp et/7 7 from xp-fj(dca) and )3Ae?o from ejSA^Tji/ (BAA-). 'fjaffw, to shrink with fear, Epic second Aor. Act. (IITA-) (CTTTTJI/) tliird Pers. Dual. dvci), to come before, Epic second Aor. Mid. REMARK. From e^v (/3afi/o>) are found in Homer the forms /3aT7jj> (third Pers. Dual) and unep^dcrai' (third Pers. PI.) with the short stem-vowel. $ 227.] VERBS IN -0) LIKE VERBS IN -fU. 273 (b) Stem- Vowel (tafav, 2BE-): AAfl. Epic, stem of 5i8cunc, to teach, second Aor. Act. (AAE-) iSdrjy t I learned, Sulj. Saw, Epic 8ae/u>, Inf. 5a/]raj, Epic 8a.-f)p.tvai. (c) Stem-Vowel i: , to consume nnd to vanish. Epic second Aor. Mid. tydfyiT/i', vros. (e) Stem- Vowel v (SfSuv): (poet.), to /tear, Epic Imp. second Aor. Act. /cAu&t, AcAvre; and 219, 7). Auw, to /oose, Epic second Aor. Mid. AUTO, \wro. ew, to breathe, Epic second Aor. Mid. (I1NT-, from irvtFw, irvtvu) &f*irvvro instead of aveirvvro, to breathe again. vta, to shake, Epic second Aor. Mid. cVo-ujuTjj/, I strove, co-ffvo, ffvro. X, Epic and second Aor. Mid. oA, to brandish, Epic TTCATO, Ae sprang. , to destroy, perdo. Homer uses irtpbcu instead of ), to Jix, Epic WTJKTO, 274 DIALECTS. [$ 228. $228. (2) Perf. and Plup. Act. (Comp. ft 193, 194). (a) The Stem ends in a Vowel. ylyvo/j.ai t to become; TEFAA, Stem TA : Perf. (Sing, yeyova, -as, -e) Epic and poet, yeya./j.fi', -are, -dd., etc., Subj. wanting, Inf. T6TAcu/a< (Epic TfT\d/j.v), but Part. Epic TerA^ccs ; Plup. Dual eVe'rAd-roy, fTfT\aT7)v, PL tTeT\afj.ev, eTeVAdre, ^TeT\a., to ectf (second Aor. eppwv), Perf. j8e)3pa>Ka, poet. j3ej8pc6s, Gen. -WTOS; JT/TTTW, to ,/a//, TreTTTWKa, Epic TreTrrews, Att. poet. TreTrrc^s. (b) The Stem ends in a Consonant. It is to be observed in respect to the formation, that when the consonant of the stem comes before a personal-ending beginning with T, the r is changed into &, and thus these forms assume the appearance of a Mid. form, e. g. irei'bco, to persuade, ireiro&a, to trust, Epic Plup. ^reViid/tei', Imp. in Aeschyl. Eum. 602, TreVeHT&i (instead of TreW&t)- EEMARK. Thus the Epic form ireiroff&e, stem HEN with the variable o (I1ON0), instead of TreiroV^are from ird] from TreTroV&are by dropping the connecting vowel o, comes ireVoj/^Te ; and hence as a Tau-mute before another Tau-mute is changed into , to bawl), Plup. KfKpayaTOV KfKpax&ov Kficpayarov K.tKpax&ov ...] vrnns IN -co LIKE VERBS IN -/xi. 275 P. 1. 2. 3. p&yafJLfV Ktitpayptv itttitpdyeintv ^K(Kpayfj.fy ^KfKpdyfiTf KCKp&yax^', dj/aryeVew and aj/^x&w, apcfycrc and co,-X&; Suhj. di/wT?;; Inf. aporxcjuei/ ; Plup- ^^c^ea, tytayfi ; Opt. avdryois. tydpta, to nimArw, Perf. typrfjyopa (stem 'EFEP with the variable o), /am awake; from this, Homer has the forms: Imp. eypjiyopbe instead of fypryjpare, Inf. typijydp&ou (as if from 3ypJ)yopfj.ai) and typrjy6pSa(n(v) instead of typriy6pa- -ro (instead of TJWCTO). , to stretch, to span, H. p, 393. rdvv-rai (instead of ravuerai). , to draw, tpvrtu, ftpvro, Ipvro, %pvao, pvtr&cu ( 230). , to shake, Epic Pres. , to eat, Epic, Inf. eS^iei/cu. , and a (Ep.). to hear, only Pres. and Impf. a.ar6s (a-daros). aiov. Comp. eira/'w. aya.iofj.ai, Epic and Ion. prose ( 164) d/cax'C*' (Epic), to trouble, stem 'AXU, and aydo/j.at (Ep.), to be angry at, and second Aor. ^/ca%oy; Fut. dK-ax'V' 1 ') in the Pres. Epic also to grudge, to first Aor. rj/raxw* j Mid d/cax'CoA 40 ") enuy, Put. ayd, to collect, Epic second Aor. Mid. r?/caxpffj,ai) Plup. aynyeparo > Aor. Pass. d/ye'pdTj, and aKa-x^^ai, third Pers. PI. aKrjx^- third Pers. PI. ayep&ev ; Epic Pres. Sarat ( 220, Rem. 2) and d/ojxe'arai, i)jfpfSfOfj.ai ( 162). Part. d;c7JxeV ei/0 s an( l d/cox^/wej/os, Inf. d-yj/oe'co, to 6e ignorant, Ep. Aor. j)yvoir)(re a.Kdx'no'&ai ( 223, Rem. 4); Plup. ( 207, I), dy^o-oo-Ke ( 205, 5). Epic d/caxe/oro. &7fO/i(. to 6reaA:, Aor. Epic ^|a instead aKax^vos (Epic), sharpened, pointed, of ea|a ; third Pers. PI. Aor. Pass. from 'AKft, acuo, instead of ct.Kdyfj.evos &yfv Epic instead of (dyi). ( 19, Rem. 1, and 208, 2). The x &yca, to lead, Epic second Aor. Imp. comes from the Perf. Act. &|eTe, Inf. dle^ej/ai, d|e' J uei' ( 223, d/cijSew, to neglect, Aor. d*ii75e). 10); first Aor. Mid. &a), to sm#, Epic second A^ai ( 219, 8), a^^/jL^os, dAaATjo- Aor. Imp. de/a-60 ( 223, 10). ^ai ( 223, Rem. 4). (prose ctipca), to raise, Epic first dASaiVw, to ma^e increase, Epic Aor. Aor. Act. #etpa, Mid. detpa.uTji/, Pass. f?A.5ai'e('). aepSrriv ; Epic second Aor. Mid. ap6- a\fw, to keep off, Epic second Aor. fiijp from aipw; Epic Plup. ^wpro ij\a\Kov ( 219, 7), (from 'AAKfl), instead of fipro with the variable dA.aA.KeIV, a\a\K(ai/ ; Fill. dAa\/dj(ra>. vowel, and transposition of the aug- dAe'o/tat and a\evo/j.ai (Epic), to s/iwn, ment; Epic Pres. f/epe'&o^cu ( 162). Aor. ytevd/j.rjj', Subj. dAeTjrat, Opt. 'AHMI, ('AE-,) to 6/ow; in Homer, are: dAe'curo, Imp. dAeW^e, Inf. oAeuatr^at Part, dei's, deVros ; third Pers. Sing. and dAe'cwrdcu ( 223, 8). Impf. #77, ^et, Siciet ('AEH) ; in the dA&V/cco, dA^iV/cw (Ion. prose), to 7iea?, other forms, the 77 remains contrary Eut. dA^e|w, etc. to the analogy of T&T^I ( 224, 6): dAiraiW (Epic and poet.), to sm, Fut. STJTOJ/, d^vat, a-f),ufvai ; Mid. and Pass. aXir-fiffoa ; Aor. tfXirov, a.\ir6fj.t]Vy a\i- &ri/j.ai, to blow, v6/j.evos Kal a-fi^-fvos, reV&aj ; Perf. a\ir-f]fj.fvos, sinful ( 223, drenched with rain and beaten with the Rem. 4). wind; Impf. Mid. &JTO. aAAo^tat, to spring, Epic second Aor. otSo^ot and euMofuu in Homer, to 6e Mid. aAtro, etc. ( 227, B). ashamed, to respect, Epic ai8-f), ^Au|o. 169, Rem. 1), only Pres. and Impf. dA^aiW (Ep.)> to find, Sec. Aor. dAe?i/. aipeca, to take, Ion. Perf. apaiprjKa, apai- d^apra^a), to m/ss, Epic Aor. ?nj.$poTov pwai ( 219, 8); Epic second Aor. (ft 223, 11, and 208, 3). Mid. 7eVro instead of cAero ( 227, d/iTrAa/ctV/cco (Ep. and poet.), to err, Fut. B). d/*7TAa:7], 126 ; d^Sai/a) (Ep., poet., and Ion.), to please, I) instead of oto-ow, to rus/i, Ep. forms : Impf. eai/Sowoj/ (Herod.), 4V5. and #'!a ; Subj. df|co, Part. dt|as ; Aor. 5jj/S. (Ep.) ; Aor. eaSoi/ (Herod.), a5o? Pass. i)txfrnv (also in Plat.), Inf. di*- (Ep.) ; Inf. dSely; Peif. ed8a; Fut 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 277 a.Hfj>. (2)J ; ( 222. Rem. 1 ). /JaAAw, to throw, Ep. second Aor. avvw, to complete. Epic Impf. in Theoc. ^A^TJJ/ [ 227, A (a)], Fut. , Imp. aVa>x&t, etc. (228); ftaptu (Ep.), tote Aeary. ej8ap7?cs ( 223, riup. i><7e ( 220, 8). In certain 13). forms this Perf. is changed into the &f0pu&ois (Ep.), to eat, instead of 0i- infleetion of the Pres., e. g. third PptfxrKots. Pcrs. Sing. ai>yct, Impf. rfvcayov and ftfofj.ai and 0flofj.ai, I will go, will live, avoryoi/; Fut. aj/c|o>; Aor. ^o>a. Ep. Fut. /Ser?, 0e6nrba ( 223, 7). iuravpdca (Epic), to take away, Impf. 0ido(j.ai (Ep.) instead of tao/xc, to air-nvpuv, -as, -o ; first Aor. Act. Part. force, tfti-fjo-aro, &ffi'n]Kf. airovpas ; first Aor. Mid. &7rrji;poTo, (3tfipwffK(a (Ep. and poet.), to 90, instead Mid. air, to cry ow<, Ep. Aor. e/3a>cra instead OTTTW, to join to, Ep. Aor. Pass, ecty&r;, of tf6r], pdv ( 224, 4), Inf. Subj. besides )8cD, etc. : /Seta, jS^jp, /3cf- Aor. o/tcv ( 224, 9); first Aor. Act. and Aalviifu (Ep.), to entertain, to feed (in- 24 '278 DIALECTS. [$ 230. stead of Salr-vvfju, 169, Rem. 1), ere, to await (e. g. an attack, a wild Fut. Saurw ; Mid. SaiVu/iat, to feast, to beast), in the following forms : Se'xa- consume, second Pers. Sing. Impf. Ind. rat instead of Se'xoi/Tat ( 220, 13), SatW (Satwo instead of e'Safo/uao, II. ^ct, 147, Perf. Se'Sey/uat with the $ 224, 5), third Pers. Sing. Opt. Sat- sense of the Pres., Fut. SeSe'lo^at, VVTO instead of -WTO, third Pers. PI. excipiam, second Aor. Mid. eSe/cro, 3a.ivva.To; Aor. e'SauraMT?". etc. ( 227, B) ; Perf. Mid. SeSo/ojjue'- 8aia>, Ep., (a) to divide ($ 164), Fut. vos, awaiting, lurking, II. o, 730. SdVoiuat; Aor. (also prose) ^affd^v ; Seuw (instead of Se^w), Ep. instead of Perf. Pass. Se'Saoytat, am divided,broken, 8eo?, to wani, from which come eSevr/- SeSaioTat ; (b) to burn, to inflame, Perf. ae, Ae wanted, 8/J, to subdue, from Att. (Xen.), secondary form of Sew, which come third Pers. Sing. Pres. to bind, StSeWt (Xen. An. 5. 8, 24) ; Safjiva ; third Pers. Sing. Impf. e'Sajtm* Impf. Si'Srj instead of e'St'Stj, II. A, 105. and Sdfj.va, Sc^u/aavce ; second Pers. Sifr/jicu (Ep. and Ion.), to seefc; it re- Sing. Pres. Mid. Sa^va; Sdfj.vr](ri, tains the i\ (contrary to 170, 1, Sd/jLvaficu, etc. comp. 'AH MI) : eSt^jTo, eSi^rjyro, Sf- Sap&dvot, to sleep, Epic Aor. eSpo^oy C 7 ?^ 01 ? Si^cvos (in Herod.) ; ( 223, 11). (Horn.), St'Ceat (Theoc.) ; Fut. SoTe'o^iai, Ep. secondary form, used in pai ; Aor. e5t7jcra/jj>. the Pres. and Impf., from Soto/ww, to AIHMI (AIE-), of the Act. only eVSt'eorai/ divide. (third Pers. PI. Impf.), II. tr, 584, they AAH (Ep. and poet.), (a) to feacA (= drove away ; Mid., to wa&e one run, to Si^dffKca), (b) to /earn (= SiScur/co/xcu) 5 make free, oftener to scare, to chase to (a) belong the Ep. second Aor. (specially with the Inf.), Siej/rot, II. Se'Sae (Horn.), e5oe (Theoc. and ^, 475, Star&eu, II, /u, 304, Subj. Apoll.); to (b) Sfticuas (Horn.), 8e5e- 8i?jTa<, StWrat, Opt. Stoiro (comp. off i (in other authors) ; Ep. second ri&oiro). Aor. Act. e'Sarjf, / /earned [ 227, A Si'cw (Ep.), to yfee, Sie, Sei'Ste, S/ov, I fled. (b)], from which Ep. Sa^o-o/iat, SeSa^j- SovTrtw (Ep.), to soimrf, Perf. SeSouWroy ; /ca, SeSaTj^eVos. From the Perf. a Aor. eSovirriira and ^SOUTTTJO-O (from new Ep. Pres. has been formed, SeSd- TAOTn-, comp. rvirrta and KTVTTCW). o- Mid. etSeroi, it seems, et'Sjjueyos, op- 230. LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 279 pcariixj, making like ; Fut. tfoouai ; lirst Aor. eurtfytijv and ififfd/jL-nv, tlffd- Hevos nnd ^eio-a/uei/os ( 219, 4); sec- ond Aor. (SffyiTjv, I saw. EIKA, third Pers. Sing. Impf. e7*f, it , II. a, 520 ; Perf. OJKO, lam , Ep. third Pcrs. Dual ftVrov and Plup. tfimji' ( 228), Part, loutcfcand II. ;/>, 254. ciK-oSy, eiKuTa and II. comes Aor. Pass. t\vcrfrr)i>. eJfAw, to p-ess, to drive, from which in Horn, only fl\6/j.fvos ; in the same author, etAe'w, tti\eov ; the rest are from 'EA, e. g. cAaai/, Inf. eAo-cu and ^eA. Ep. and Ion., sero, to arrange in a row, to string, first Aor. Qflpas, exse- rens, Herod. 3, 87 ; Ep. Perf. Mid. or Pass, tepucu, ifppevos (in Herod. 4p- /j.fvos), Plup. tepro. tfpu, to say, Pres. only Ep., Fut. tpw, Ep. ipw. f(ra, Ep. Aor., I placed, from the stem 'EA- (comp. sed-eo), Opt. Imp. dffov, Part. Jiff as ( vireiffas, Her. 3, 126. 6, 103), Inf. t, ep|a ; rat, eVaro Ep., instead of rivrat, T\vro. Perf. eopya, Plup. e, . a-aff&ai. ^TjAew (Ep. and poet.), to sprout, Fut. , to /srfa, Ep. tpi(o/j.cu, Perf. Mid. &7jA^(ro>, etc. ; Perf. re'drjAo ( fp-npiff/jiai ( 219, 8). Ep. 223, 13) ; second Aor. ej3/3w, to wander about, Ep. Aor. eporcu. to 0HI1I1 (Ep.), to siiw, Perf. hurry away ( 223, 6). Plup. ere^/Trea; second Aor. (from (poet.), to redden, Fut. e'pu&Vw. TA*Ii) erdcpov. to keep ojf, Ep. second Aor. Act. &vf)(n, etc. ( 228). epvw and cipuw (Ion. and Ep.), to draw, &pdoTMI, Inf. instead of '/Ac^i ( 224, 6), as in elpv/Mfvai, Hes. Opp. 816, Mid. to Theoc. 15, 143, Subj. Ep. i\T)Kr) :>. KKju7ju>r, K\dfa, to sound, Kp. Pcrf. \\ith the pcnso WTO?, -6ros ($ i'-'? !">>. Kp. second of the Pres. KtK\ijya, KfK\ijys, PL . Snhj. KfKd/^u ( 219, 7). KfK\-f)yovTfs (as if from KeJcA^-yw) ; KfiHat, t<> li< . in Horn. Kforrcu, as if from Aor. ^/cA^oj/. Ktop.a.i ; Kp. and Ion. /CTCU, fce'c ai (third Pers. PI. KtK\e- rat and (Ion.) Kttnat, Suhj. Ktu/j.at, arcu instead of KeK\^arai) ; Aor. Pass. tliird Pers. Sing. JCT/TCU ; Impf. iccaro ^KAT/fa-dTjj/ ; from the Ion. KATJ'/W come and rffurro Kp. instead of tKfirro; the forms often found in the Att. KfffKfTo ; Ep. Fut. Ktiw, Ktco, Kfitav, writers, viz. KArfw. ^/cATjtra, KtK\rj/j.ai. (Ep.), fo celebrate, of which only Kflpa), to shear ojf, cttt off, Ep. Kfp, K\fofj.ai, Jmpf. t/cAe'o instead of ^cAceo titepaa ( 223, 0), hut iKGipdpr)v. ( 220, 10). KeAAw, /o art'ye, P'p. (Kt\ffa ( 223, 6). /cAvw (Ep.), to Arar, Imp. KAiJe. K\verf ; Kf\ofiai (Ep. and poet.), to M/Y/P, Fut. second Aor. Imp. KAO^, /cADrc; and Kf \faonat, first Aor. taAqan^M}*; /ce/cAv^t, /ce/cAurf [^ 227, A (e)] ; the ml Aor. ^/ce/cA(fyi7jj', etc. ( 223, Impf. e/cAuoi/ is used instead of the Ind. Pres. (Ep.), to pVcA:, stimulo, Aor, Ktkrraj, to sfr/^e, second Perf. KtKoira in i ( 223, 6). Horn , instead of /ce'/co^a. K(pa.vviiiiu, to mix, Ep. Kfpd5s. Impf. iKlpva.) and Kipvyni (Impf. Part. KeKop-qus ( 223, 13) in respect iKipm}, Kipvas) ; Ep. Mid. Kfpcavrai (as to its meaning belongs. if from Kfpauai) ; Impf. K(p6 ters: ^cepSTjtra ; KepSTjaea^at and /ce'p- cro/wu (tro-; Aor. in Herod. /cpa^eo, to 6azt'/, cry OM<, poet. Pei*f. (Ep.). to conceal, Fut. /ce5, Aor. 70, KCKpay^ev, etc. ( 228) ; Fut. /ce- e/ceuo-a ; Perf. KfKfv&a ; second Aor. Kpd$o/j.cu, Aristoph. e/crdoj/. icu^oi/, Suhj. KfKvbw ( 219, Kpatvca (Ep. and poet.), to complete, ac- 7) ; Mid. only Pres. and Impf. complish, Ion. commonly Kpaiaivw, w, to make anxious, in the Act. only Impf. eitpaiaivov ; Ep. Fut. Kpaveia] Ep. Fut. K?;57j(rw ; Perf. /ce'/cTj&o, / a/ Aor. (KpT}i>a and Ep. iKfrfnva, Imp. anxious ; Ep. Fut. Perf. /ccfcaS^crojUcu, Kpr\vov and Ep. Kp4\t\vov. Inf. Kprivcu. II. ,&, 3.)3. and Ep. KpTjrjvai ; Ep. Perf. Pass. Ki'Sj/ajucu, Ep. SOCOndniT form of o-weSa^- KtKpdavrai (Eur. /ce'/cpcwTcu) ; Ep. Fut. i/t/uaj, to scatter, only Pres. and Impf. Mid. Kpavfo^ou. KivvfjLai (Ep.) instead of Kiveofuu, to stir Kitlvta, to kill, Ep. Fut. Kreveca (Ep. 'j s(V/j to 6e moved, Pass. KIVV/J-CVOS. Part. KTavtovra., Ka.rcu KIXE-) : second Aor. Suhj /c p?jca. I'art. Kix'J nd Mid. irtx^juefos; Aor. Aa>x" w i ' partake. Ion. Fut. Aa|o/xai ; Mid. (Kixr,ffaTo, E]. Aor. Suhj. AeAax ( 219, 7), KIW (Ep.), to ra nvpts, to alve the dead the Aor. /xer tKic&oy ( 162). /io/ior of jure, i. e. ?/uze Awn partaker 24* 282 DIALECTS. [$ 230. of; Perf. \e\oyxa Ep., instead of MAn (Ep.), to strive for, Perf. with the elATjxa [Od. A, 304, \e\6yxao-i]. sense of tlie Pres., in Sing. fj.ffj.ova AAZTMAI (= \dofj.ai, to take], Epic (comp. yeyova with TEFAA), fj.efj.arov, e'Ac{>TO. pefj.afj.fv, etc. ( 228). \a/j.t3dvw, to receive, Ion. \dfj.^ofj.ai, AeA<{- fj.fipofj.ai (poet.), to obtain, Ep. efj.fj.ope f3r]Ka, AeAifyt/icu, AeAajudc, e'Aa^&rjy, third Pers. Sing. Perf. (and II. a, AajUTrreos; also Dor. AeAa77/ca, but 278), third Pers. Sing, second Aor. AeAa/*,u, AeAa^at ; in Dramatists Act. (Augment, 219, 6) ; Perf. Pass. AeArj/t^at; Ep.Aor.AeAa/3eV&cu( 219, f"fj.aprai, A is determined ($. 123, 4). 7). /teAw, commonly Impers. jiteAet, zf corc- Aay&<{ye0, Ep. oftener A^co, to 6e hidden, cerns, I lay it to heart, Ep. Perf. /ic'/irj- concealed ; Ep. second Aor. Act. Ae, Part. ^e^irjAciJs ; Ep. Perf. Mid. juc/t- Subj. AeAddw and Mid. \f\a&6fj.r)v P\erai and Plup. /ue'jujSAero instead of ( 219, 7); Perf. Mid. AeAao^icu ; in ute/^AajTcu, e/xe^A^To, comp. $Aco; yet these forms were more stead of Aod-eo-dcu ; eViA^w and properly considered as a Pres. and a>, to cause to forget, Ep. Aor. Impf. jo-a ; to ^ as ^> Pres - and I m P f -5 the other tenses are formed from VITTTW, which to /oose, Ep. second Aor. Mid. among the later writers came to be Auro, ArWo [ 227, A (e)] ; Ep. Plup. used in the Pres. and Impf. also; Opt. AeAOro ( 224, 3). thus, Fut. vtyto, Perf. Mid. or^Pass. MaiVojttot, To rave (e/c^a/j/aj, to make v4vifj.jj.ai, poet. ; Aor. Pass, frf^&ip', raving, also Aor. e/i7jva, Arist. ; doubt- Hippocr. ful X. H. 3.4, 8) ; second Perf. /*^- j//, ofofiat, /tav^-ayco, to /earn, Fut. in Theoc. /*a&eC- wiVfywjy, ofoiro ; Aor. Mid. 6'iffdfj.r)v 5 juai (like /xaxoO^iat). Aor. Pass. wfo&Tjy, oi'cr^eis. fj.dpvafj.ai (Ep.), to ^/i<, only Pres. and ovo^ai (Ep. and Ion.), to Warns, Impf., like Suya^at, but Opt. /j.apvoi- third Pers. PI. uvovrai, Imp. ;u.7jy, Od. A, 513. Impf. wv6fj.-rjv, Opt. 6yoifj,r)v, OVOITO ; to contend, Epic /ia%e'oyTat, Fut. ov6ffofj.ai '. Aor. uvoo~dfj.T)v and t > Max e ' OITO > M a X^ oll ' TO > P ar t- wyJcr^77y ; Ep. owyetrid-e (comp. ov\6fj,- t ' /os an( i fj.ax^ov/j.vos ; Ep. eyos), 11. w, 241, instead of oveo-Se Fut. fj.ax^o-o/j.at and /j.axfo'ofj.ai ; Aor. and this instead of oyoa&e from 'ON- ; Ep. Aor. Mid. #yaro. LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 283 6pdw, to see, Ion. 6pfa t Epic 6p6w t Impf. first Aor. tirepa-a, ( 223, 6) ; second fy>oi>; Kp. second PITS. Sing. Pros. Aor. ftrpfi&oi' ( $ 223, 1 1 ) ; Ep. second Mid. 4p>l- tfpwjiu (poet.), to ere//?, Put. Sptru, Aor. y&>i> with irregular accentuation; Ep. Sypaa, ($ 233, 6) ; Ep. Pcrf. In trans. Perf. Pass, irtipaTai, irpa.ppfi ; Ep. Aor.' tipoptv ; from Se'Se/zcu). Mid. 8pvv/j.cu, to rouse one's self, to stir, irf)yvv/j.ai, to fix, Ep. Aor. TTTJ/CTO, Kare- Ep. Fut. op6?roj, Aor. Ap^tifr; Ep. irrj/cro ( 227, B). Aor. Mid. Spro, etc. ( 227, B) ; Ep. iri\va/j.ai, Eq. secondary form of ireAa^w, Perf. opajperaz, Subj. opeapijrat (^ 219, to ofrau; near, only Pres. and Impf. 8). Tn'/iTrA.Tjjiii, to Jill, Ep. Aor. Mid. TTATJTO, 6a, to strike, Ep. second Aor. Act. in late prose oAAw (Ep.), to increase, only Pros., Act, cirAwi/, etc. f 227, A (d)]. Impf., and Opt. Aor. o^eAActe^, Od. vvtta, to breathe, in Horn. Perf. ireVi/u/uu ^8, 334. ( 223, Rem. 2), to 6e animated, intel- aAAa), to s^a/:, to suffer, Ep. Perf. Part. ireTra- of a^irvv^n ( 223. 12). as if from TreVa^a; Ep. Perf. TTT^O-O-W, to crouch, shrink from fear, Aor. de (^ 228, Rem.). ^7TTrj|a ; second Aor. KOTaTrTd/c^, iraro/Aai (Ion.), to tas, to persuade, second Aor. Act. Ep. second Aor. /caTctTTTTjTTjj/ [ 227, eirtioj', Aor. Mid. &n&, , to r/*-w near (Trag. TreAo^co, (4)] ; third Pers. Sing. Impf. Act. TrAa^o?), Fut.TreAaaw. poet, sometimes instead of eVooc ; Aor. ircAw ; Ep. Aor. Pass. Part. ; from ? z/ : irecpiSecr&ai ( 219, 7); 8); Perf. ecro-t^tai (223, 14); Plup. from (pet8oiJ.ai comes Trecpi^ffo^ai. fffffv/jL-rji' ; second Aor. Mid. fff, to carry, (pepre Ep. instead of etc. [ 227, A (e)]; Aor. Pass. eos, escaped earvyov; first Aor. rrv|a, Trans., to ( 223, 14). make fearful. &tw, to con- 228), Eut. r\-f]ffo/j.at. sume, and sometimes to vanish, perish ca (poet.), to stretch, Ep. TC^CTCM (Ep. first Pers. long), Fut. iAea>, to foye, Ep. Aor. e^tA^Tjj' ($/- , Subj. first Pers. PL rpairelo- ACOI/TOJ, ^>?Aot). ; second Aor. Mid. iTpair6/j,T]v and typdfa, to speak, Ep. Aor. Tre^poSoi' p7r6wv ( 219, 7). (219,7). (poet.), to ma&e rearfy, to obtain, tyvpca, to knead, in prose, forms its tenses Fut. Teu|&) ; Aor. eTeu|a, Perf. Ep. from (pvpaea, e. g. vpauw, to produce, Perf. irfcpvita, Ep. third /cetV, rervKovro, TeruKeV^at ( 219, 7). Pers. PL irftyvain, Part. Tre^i/wras, TIEn, Ep. Perf. Act. TeTiTjcfo, -(^TOS, Tre^vuta ( 223, 13); Impf. Ep. eVe- anxious, and Perf. Mid. /am anxious, ^VKOV. second Pers. Dual reTiV&oi/, Part. Xdo/j.ai (Ep.), to retreat, yield, Aor. Mid. TCTtTj^eWs. Ke/ca5oi/To ( 219, 7); Aor. Act. /ce'/ca- Tlvvvp-ai, Ep. secondary form of rivofjLai, Sov and Fut. /ceKaS^crw, Trans., to o?e- to punish; in Att. poetry with one prive of, rob. v, Tivvp.ai ( 185). X at/ P w to re ji ce i Ep. Fut. /cexapVw, r/j.-fiyco, Ep. secondary form of refj.vca, Kex a P^ ffo / Liat 5 ^ rst -^- or - -^^- X^P aTO 5 to CM, first Aor. r^as ; Aor. Pass. second Aor. Kfx<^P OJ/T t Kexa.poia.To third Pers. PL r^yev. ( 219, 7); KexapT^s ( 223, 13); rpetyca, to nourish, Ep. second Aor. Perf. /cexw^os, Eur.; Verb. Adj. erpa<|>oj>, / nourished, Perf. rerpocpa, x a P T ^ s - Intrans.; Aor. Pass, frpdcprjv, third x al/ 5c{vco (Ep.), to hold, to contain, Aor. Pers. PL rpafytv. exctSov ; Perf. with the sense of the $aiVa>, to sAow, Ep. (paeij/uv, enlightening ; Pres. Ke'xafSa: Fut. X 6 ^^ at (comp. Ep. Aor. Pass. ^aa.v^f]v ; Perf. Mid. eTrad-o;/, TretVo^at). or Pass. Trec/xw/u.at, third Pers. Sing. x e/co ' ' f " 7 ' ou ^i Ep., Fut. x e ^ w 5 Aor. jreQavTcu : Fut. Tre$>-f]ffo/j.ai ; second exeua; second Aor. Mid. Aor. QdwKei', II. A, 64. fos [ 227, A (e)L $ 231.] FORMATION OF WORDS. 285 SECTION III. FORMATION OF WORDS, $231. Primitive words. Stems. Derivatives. 1. Words are formed, (a) by derivation, and (b) by composition, in accord- ance with certain laws. 2. Those words, from which other words are derived, but which are them- selves underived, are called primitives (vocabula primitiva). Primitive words are either verbs (which constitute the greater part), substantives, adjectives, or pronouns. A primitive has two parts, the root and the inflection-ending, e. g. Tp(-u, ypd, \ey-ca, \&-os ; Ka\-4s ; ^u-e. 3. The roots, i. e. the forms which remain, after the rejection of the inflection- endings, are all monosyllabic. Still, the roots do not always appear pure in the primitives, but often with a strengthened form, e.g. SOK-V-W, IK-VI-O/JUU, av-dv-, to make golden, to gild ; pri-rup, orator ; ypa or ^ takes the variable vowel ( 16, 6), e. g. Tp4$- o>, rpo-os (from 2E*-fl, comp. ffo)5 (b) in dissyllabic Barytones of the second Dec., which denote what is done, or the result of an action, e. g. \6yos, ivord (from xfy-ta) ; 6j/-os, murder (from *EN-n, comp. eTre^i/oj/) ; vofjios, a law (from i/e/j.-ca) ; (c) in dissyllabic Oxytones of the second Dec. in -juo's, and in dissyllabic oxytone adjectives of the second Dec. in -6s, which, for the most part, denote an active object and often have a substantive meaning, e. g. irAox-^os, plait of hair (from TrAe/c-oj) ; arro\-/j.6s, garment (from oWAA-w) ; TTO/JLTT-OS, attendant (from ire/j.ir-ct)) ; -6s, wise (from 2E*-fi, sapio); rpo-) ; o-rrop-ds, scattered (from enrcp-eTj/) ; \oy-ds, chosen (from \ey-u) ; tipo/j.-ds, running (from APEM-n, comp. Spa/i-eli/) ; (f ) in all derivatives of the forms mentioned, e. g. in substantives in -a/j.os, adjectives in -tyttos, verbs in -aw, -e'a>, -600, -euw, -ifa, e. g. Tr\6K-a/j.os] rp6(p-ifjLOS ; , -e'w, -&>, -600, -i5w, -etfeu, -<> -^ "> -<$&>, -vC^j -atvwy -tJi/w, -afpw, -efpw. All these verbs must be considered as denominatives ; for though the stem-substantive for several verbs of this kind is not in use, yet the analogy of the other verbs requires that" a substan- tive should be assumed as the stem of these also. Many of these derivative verbs, especially many in -ew and -dco, supply the place of obsolete primitives, e. g. , which are mostly derived from substantives of the first Dec., and those in -ifa which are derived from substantives and adjectives of all declensions, are partly transitive, partly intransitive, since they denote either a condition or the exercise of agency or activity, e. g. roX^dca, to be bold, from r6\fj.a, boldness; %oA.cta, to be angry, from x^7 goRj yoda, to weep, from 7, to judge, from St'/a?; e'Tur^co, to hope, from c\iris; 6pifa, to limit, from opos] alrtfa, to beg, from ai'rrjs, beggar; sometimes those in -d, to be full of bile, have much bile. -. Verbs in -dCw and -lca formed from proper names, express the effort to resemble single individuals or whole nations, in custom, nature, language, sentiment. DERIVATION OF VERBS AX&AJE f MVfcg^ 287 Such verbs arc called Imitative verbs, e. g. Swpidfa, to &e orian, i. e. to or think as a Dorian, Awpiews ; \ATJJ//^W, /o personate the custom or language of a Greek, to be a Greek in ntalimi, etc. ; lUTjSffc, to be a Mcde in sentiment. KIM VI;K 1. Verbs in -tfa often signify to make something into that which tin- root tirnotos. Si'O (c). U & Verbs in -6fa and -t$iw are very rare, e. g. ap/j.6fa, to Jit ; ^piruw, to creep. By the ending -dw also, verbs are formed, which denote the repetition or strengthening of the idea expressed by the simple verb; these are called Frvtinentative and Intensive verbs, e. g. biirrdfa, to throw to and fro, jacto, from friirrta, jacio ; , to adorn, from K&r/ios, Pa, to be a king, from jScunAeus. (c) Verbs in -J, which are mostly derived from substantives and adjectives of the second Dec., those in -alvw, which are commonly derived from adjec- tives, more rarely from substantives, and those in -vv, see Rem. 1, e. g. xP vff ^ ta i to make golden, to gild, from %pv, irapaSuo-fiw, to be inclined to sur- render. There are also other Desideratives in -da and -law, e. g. Savarata, to wish to die, ^o&TjTia&j, to wish to become a disciple. REM. 4. Some verbs in -ffKca have an inceptive sense (beginning to be), and are called Inceptive or Inchoative verbs, e. g. y^pdffKu, to begin to be old, to grow old; yevfido-Kfi), to begin to have a beard ; yfidtricca, pubesco. $ 233. II. Substantives. Substantives are derived : 1. From verbs and substantives, and express a. A concrete idea, i. e. the idea of an active person (concrete nouns): (o) With the endings -eus (Gen. -e'ws) for the Masc., -eta or -i ; TroAmjs, citizen, iroAms, from Tr^Ats ; p-hrup, orator, from 'PE-,0. ; ^epaTrwr, servant, Stepd- iraiva., from ^epai// ; oi/ceT?js, a s/ave, from o?/cos ; S^oV^s, one q/" fo people, from Srjfj.os ; oTrA/TTjs, a hoplite, from oirXov ; o-TparicoTTjs, a soldier, from ffrpana. () With the ending -?7crat), et/pe TO*, >> (from aiffxpts, tuo")(lT7js. Comp. 234, 3 (g), etc. (b) Patronymics, i. e. the names of persons derived from their ancestors, with the endings -tSijs (Fern, -is, Gen. -iSos) ; also -i&8r)s l ; but substantives of the first Dec. in -jjs and -ay, and many of the second and third Dec. whose stem ends in i, and some others, have -d5r)s (Fern, -ds, Gen. -dSos) ; these endings are appended to the stem, and where the stem ends in 6, this e and < of the ending -iSrjy combine and form a diphthong, as in nrjAet'S^y, e. g. Upta^-iS-ns, Fern. Upia^-is from Tlpla.fji.-us, ITTjAei'S^y from TIr)\fvs, Gen. EtyAe'-eoy, Ke/cpoTri'STjy from KeVpoi^, Gen. -oir-oy, na^oiS^y from ria^ooy, -ovs ; TeAa/uwi'-taSTjs from TeAo^cij', AiVeo- 8rjy from AiVeoy, ctrrtaSTjy, Fern, eo-ri-ay from eVrtoy. (c) Diminutives (frequently with the accompanying idea of contempt) with the endings -IQV which is the most usual, -aptoi/ [-aa-iov] (seldom) and some few with the endings -v\\iov, -uAAfy, -vbpiov, -vv) ; -- 1 5 e v s ( but only of the young of animals), e. g. utipdmov, youth, from /ue?pa|. -a/c-oy, iroiS-toj/, a little child, from irais, iraiS-6s ; ira.i5-d.piov ; - a ff i o v instead of -ipiov only in Kopda-iov (from K6pa, young woman) on account of the preceding p ; /xeipcuc-uAAtoi/, a.Kai'&-v\\(s from &/cap&a, thorn, vriff-vSptov, islet ; fav-iov, little animal ; xP vff ~d-

vos), seldom -fdv, and -arvid, which denote the residence of persons or a place filled with plants, e. g. fpycurrrip-ioj', workshop, from tpyaa- r-f)p, and so others in -r-rjpiov from -Tfjp or -TTJS; sometimes also this ending is used with reference to vessels, e. g. TTOT-^PIOV, drinking vessel; Koupeibj/, barber's shop, from Kovpevs, -e-cos (several in -iov [-etoz/] have another signification, e. g. rptxpeiov, wages of a nurse, from rpcxpevs) ; Tjcretbj/ from &r)(revs, -e-ovs, 'A^r)vaiof, MouereToi' ; avSpcav and yvvaiKckv, apartments for men and women; linruv, stable for horses ; po56v and pe&cavia, bed of roses ; irepiffrepeuv and 7rept0Tepc6j/, dove- cote. , (e) Substantives which denote an instrument or a means of accomplishing some object, with the endings -rpov and -rpa, e. g. ^vtrrpa, curry-comb ; 8/5a/c- rpov, tuition-money ; \ovrpov, water for washing ; \ovrp6v, bath ; also to designate place, e. g. opxhtfTpa, dancing-room, instead of the ending -raptor. 234. III. Adjectives. 1. Erom verbs are derived adjectives with the following endings : (a) With the ending -os, which is annexed to the stem of the verb. These adjectives express the transitive, intransitive, or passive idea of the verb from which they are derived, e. g. av6s, brilliant, from ; \onr6s, the remainder; the verb-stem of many is not in use, e. g. /ccuctta. (b) With the endings -, -I/J.OS,-TJ, -ov or -ffifjLoS) -ov, which denote ability, fitness, aptness. Of these, those in -iic6s have a transitive signification, those in -ipos both a transitive and passive, e. g. ypa\6s, -^, -). (g) With the ending -77 s, -es (Gen. -eos), e. g. Tr\-f)pris, plenus. (h) With the ending -ds (Gen. -aSos) with a transitive, intransitive, x or pas- sive signification, e. g. e'pw) ; 5/jo/tp, ^-trav-a'-^Tjv, irau- ^-XP^' --&Tjj', (rrpfir-r6s ; TpeV-w, ^-rpe'^-^Tji/, rpfir-re ^TJV, Sbpfir-Tfos ; T-(TTi7-/LiJ, foTa-friji/, ffra-rSs, -reos ; firaive-w, r6s] some the form of the second Aor. Act., e. g. aiptca, e1\c-Tov t f \e-r6s ; ?TJ/, t-rov (commonly clTov), /LIJ, 6-^e-roi/, be-r6s, -re'os ; some the form of the Pres. Act., e. g. /ieVw, p.4v- frov, /ieve-Wy, -Ttos ; eT/ii, f-roi/, j-re'os; so aTr-cux^-Tos from 'ETXE-TON MU 5vva-r6s 2. Adjectives are formed from substantives and adjectives : By the ending -toy (in connection with the preceding vowel of the stem -euos, -ctos, -otos, -o>os, -vios) and -IK 6s (which, when v precedes, becomes -/k, and when t, often -ai<6s). These adjectives have a very great variety of mean- ings. They frequently indicate the mode or manner of the adjective idea, often also in a very general manner, that which proceeds from an object and is connected with it or related to it, e. g. ovpdv-ios, heavenly, pertaining to heaven ; cleanly (but Kc&ap6s, clean)] ^Aeu&e'pios, frank, liberal, liberalis (but , liber) ; ayopatos, belonging to the market-place (ayopd) ; frtpttos, summer- like (dVpos, -e-os), at'ooTos (aiSus, -6-os), ijpifos and -fjpuos] Tpur-f)x vios j REM. 2. In some words the ending -aios also -icuos occurs, e. g. ffKorcuos and VKOTICUOS. In several words the ending -A.<$TTJS, -rjros), eKov8ets, Ion. Gen. -i-wv), ' ("AyKvpa), TapavT-'ii/os, -(vt] (Tapas, -avr-os). 235. IV. Adverbs. 1. Adverbs are formed from verbs : With the endings -Syv or, when the primitive has the variable which denote mode or manner, e. g. Kpu/85jj.-, secretly (/cpuTrrw) ; ypdp-Syi', by writing, scribendo (ypd) ; fftrop-dSrjt/, scatteredly, sparsim. 2. From verbs and substantives : With the ending -86v or -aUtv, -77801' (mostly from substantives). These also denote manner, or, when derived from substantives, the external form, e. g. ava(f>avS6v, openly, aperte ; 8ia/cpiSop, distinctly ; fioTpv$6v, grape-like, in clusters (p6rpvs), l\aS6v, in troops, catervatim ; ayehySdv, in herds, gregatim ; KWTjSJp, like a dog. 3. From substantives, pronouns, and adverbs, adverbs are formed to denote the three relations of place, viz., whence, whither, and where, by the endings -&ev, -8e (-,from heaven ; ovpat>6j/-5e, into or to heaven, ovpav6- &i, in heaven ; &\\o-&tv, from another place, aliunde, &\\o-ffe, to another place, alio, &\\o-bi, at another place, alibi. Rules in respect to the accent of those in -fop t 236.] DERIVATION OP ADVERBS. 293 and -bt : (a) Dissyllables are cither Paroxytoncs or Properispomena, c. g. vpfobfr, yfjdei', o5di; (b) polysyllables are Paroxytones, when the penult is short by nature, e. g. Afcr&fofv from Mcrfios, K.virp6&a> from Kvirpos, ovpavo&i from ovpav6s\ exceptions: otKodcv, ohoSt, tvSoSfi/, tvSodi, &\\o&cv, ^KdVrodf*', and some poetic words ; (c) polysyllables whose penult is long by position, are without exception Proparoxytones, e. g. IfvTotr&fi/, uirurbeif ; (d) polysyllables whose penult is long by nature, are Proparoxytones, when the primitive was a Barytone, c. g. e|w&ej/ (f|o>), irtpw^fv (eVepos), 'Ad^i/rjfov ('A&fjrcu) ; but Properispomena, when the primitive was an Oxytone, e. g. Tlvdta&fv (riy&w), Qptri&ev (&pid). On the accent of those in -5e (-, and also others, append the endings to the un- changed vowels, e. g. &vot-&ev, ffdtrvr-dty, e^w-idw, ^cel-d-ey, jyy^&i, e'5o-&ej', evSo-^i. Some forms of the comparative in -repos lengthen o into , e. g. a/juportpu-bfi'. In some of the above forms, o> can be shortened into o in poetry, and then rejected entirely, e. g. o-&cj/, irpoa-Srev (instead of elwdev, irp^o-w^ei/), and in imitation of Doric usage, a is often omitted before &, e. g. briber, e/cro- &/ (instead of faurSev, ("Kroabev). REM. 3. The ending -5e is commonly appended to substantives only, and to the unchanged form of the Ace., e. g. oAoSe, to or into the sea (fi\s), TlvbwSe (from nv&w), oftc^Se only Epic, elsewhere ofreaSe (from the stem 'OIS), as ^iryoSt (from *YE) instead of QvyyvSc which is not in use, 'EXei/o-IVoSe). In pronouns and adverbs, -ere is appended instead of -5e, e. g. ^/ce?-o-e, &\Ao to the ground, humum (from the obsolete sub- stantives, epa, x a l JM i earth). REM. 4. Instead of -8e or -&oyyos : having a double sound ; 7rai/(ro^)os, all-wise. (b) Inseparable adverbs arc such as are used only in composition. They are as follows : (a) ^/it-, half, semi, e. g. ^ufyAeKros, half-burned, semiustus. (0) Svs- expresses difficulty, adversity, or aversion, and is often the antith- esis of 6<5. e. g. SVSTVX^V and evrvx^v^ dvsScufj.oi'ia, misfortune; (y) a Privative (usually a.v- before a vowel) has the force of the Latin in, and expresses the negation of the idea contained in the simple word, e. g. &ffouAa|, v6pos, or the declension-stem in -es [ 61, (b)] is retained, e. g. Tt\fs-6pos ; so also the ending -TJ or -a is annexed even to words of the second and third Dec., e. g. bavaTij-^pos, aTi-6pos, (TKfvo vav-ffl-iropos. 3. When the first part of the compound is an adverb, only those changes take place, which arise from the general rules respecting the change of consonants. 4. Respecting the second part of the compound, it is to be noted, that the words beginning with d, *, o, in composition regularly lengthen these vowels (if the last part of the compound is a simple) into TJ and w, e. g. (o) from foe/las, a-Tpa.TT)y6s from &yca, fv-fjvup from arfjp] (e) Svs-fipfT/jLos from fj.6s t SusTjAaros from e'AoiW ; (o) ayw^eA^s from 8ot, nourished by uild beasts. See 75, Rem. 4. () -TJS (-TTJS) or -ay (Gen. -ou), -rjp (-TTJP), -rup, commonly used as substantives with a transitive signification, e. g. fvfpytTijs, benefactor; y, legislator; //upoTrc^Aijy, opvibodi'ipas, Trcu$o\(T(i>p ; 296 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 237. (7) -rjs, -es, commonly with a passive or intransitive signification, e. g. &oj/ = 6 rovs 5ai/j.oi/as Seuras, tirixcupeKaKos = 6 ro7s KOKO'IS fTrixaipow, KaKoSaifJuav = 6 /co/cbi/ Satfioi/a e%a>i/, Svsepws, one who has an unhappy love, ei/(^eos = 6 rov i^eby / eaimjJ exwv, &TTOLKOS 6 cbrb TOV of/coy &v, Hirais = 6 iratSas OVK ex&>j/. In all these examples the form of the sub- stantive remains unchanged, 1 where the substantive has a form which is appro- priate for the Masc. or Fern, of the adjective, but where this is not the case, the substantive assumes a corresponding adjective-ending, viz. -os (Gen. -ov), -as (Gen. -o>), -TJS (Gen. -ovs), -is (Gen. -tSos), -i\oxp^lf^O'Tos (xpf}/ia, xp^ara), &(TTO/J.OS (trr^/ia), efryecos (yil), having a fertile soil; \snr6vews (va.vs], one who deserts the ship ; ww(pe\^s (rb &(pe\os), &vaX- KLS (a\irfi), axp'hfACDi', &5a.Kpvs, Gen. -uos (TO Sditpv). c. Or the second part is an adjective : The adjective retains its form, except that those in -us commonly take the ending ->js ; the first part consists either of a substantive or an adverb, e. g. ao-Tvjfircav, near the city, urbi vicinus ; Tr&vffofyos or Trd(r, the predicates. 3. The predicate properly contains the substance of the sentence; the subject is subordinate to it and can be 298 SYNTAX. [$ 238. expressed by a mere inflection-ending of the verb, e. g. i&w -//.t, (/) give. 4. The subject is a substantive or a word used as a substantive, viz. a substantive pronoun or numeral; an adjective or participle used as a substantive ; an adverb which becomes a substantive by prefixing the article ; a preposition with its Case ; an infinitive ; finally, every word, letter, syllable, and every combination of words can be con- sidered as a substantive, and with the neuter article com- monly agreeing with it, can be used as a subject. The subject is in the Nom. T b p6 5 o v &cAA.ei. 5 E y j/ ecri. Ot (p&ovov vr e s fjuffovvrai. O I ir d \ a t ai/Spe'ioi ^ffav. O I TT e p I KO\WS tyuax^Vaj'To. X. Cy. 8. 3, 42. Ofrroi ovrcas rjSv fori rb aj'iapbv rb aTrojS^A.A.etv. Tb Si5aa"/cet^ Ka\6v ecru/. X. R. L. 9, 2, eVeTot rp apery t&i fftav- rbv KOAflV 6pwv els rerpaKisx^iovs (about four thousand stood), ejLurpov -rrvXiav. X. H. 6. 5, 10. e(pvyov els AcwceSaf/iora TWV Trepl ~2,rdffnnrov Teyearuv ire pi OKraKOffiovs. So KO^ 4/ca(TTous, each one singly, one by one, singuli ; KOTO, e&vri, singulae gentes, 5. In the following cases the subject is not expressed by any special word : (a) When the subject is a personal pronoun and is not particularly emphatic, e. g. Tpd^xa, ypd(peis, ypd) TO?S "E\\T]aerf, A^ouo-i, etc.. tin- Miliject av&puiroi is regularly omitteil, us it is readily apparent; (d) Sometimes the subject is supplied from some word of the sentence. Her. 9, 8. rttv 'l tne y uitlll the Istlunus, and the [wall] was, etc. X. Cy. 2. 4, 24. iropcfoofjuu ci&i/s vpbs ret /8ao-f A tia, *cal fy fj.tv av^iffrTjrai, PC. <5 jStwtAft/y. So also other Cases as well as the Nom. are thus supplied, e. g. PI. L. 8C4, d. s, oi5eV TTCW TWV roiovrw (sc. (e) With the third Pers. Sing, of the verb, in a subordinate clause containing a general idea, and in definitions, the indefinite pronoun rls is sometimes omitted. PI. Criton. 49, c. otfre arra.SiKtti' 8, otfre KOXU>S iroifiy ovStva &.V&PWTTWV, ou5* &y fciovy ir ivxy ^ 7r ' awTwv, nof even if any one should suffer from them ; so often with the Inf. ; but if a participle stands in connection with the Inf., e. g. Eur. M. 1018. K.ov *X et b-dyov (consentaneum est), Ae-yeTeu (?< J5 said), etc., the Greek language always considers as personal, the following Inf. or substan- tive sentence being regarded as the subject of these verbs. 6. The predicate is a verb, an adjective, participle, ad- jective pronoun or numeral, or a substantive with the Formal word elvai ; elvat,, in this relation, is usually called the copula, since it connects the adjective, substantive, etc. with the subject, and forms one thought, e. g. i. 'O &vbpwiros &vt]r6s iariv. 'Abdvaroi tlffiv ol foi. 'H apfT^j Ka\"f) 4 IT T iv. 'Aya&fy irapaiQcuris tVTiv fraipou. Kvpos fjv jSacriAeus. TOVTO TO irpaypA 4 shows that its subject is in the first person, and its being in the Ind. mode Pres. tense, indicates that the speaker asserts something directly, at the present time. But if the predicate is expressed by an adjective or substantive with ? v a i, the affirmation is denoted by the adjective or substantive, and its relation to the speaker by cTxoi, e. g. evSaip-uv et/t/ = evo'ai/KOj'e-w, ev$al/j.(ov eT = evScu/iove'-ety, fvSaifjLovfs &rorrcu = ev$cu/j.orf)-f). 300 SYNTAX. [$ 239. BEM. 5. In order to give greater emphasis to the predicate, the simple idea expressed by the verh, is resolved into the participle and copula elvai. This mode of expression, however, is more usual in poetiy, though it is found also in prose, particularly in Herodotus, comp. Hem. 3. Eur. C. 381. ir&s & ra\at- ircop', ^re iraffx VTS TciSe ; Id. H. 117. ^v o"7rev5i/. Her. 3,99. a Trap - ve6fj.ev6s eVrt. Id. 9, 51. ^ vrjff6s effri curb TOV ' Affcairov Se/co ffraSiovs aTre'xoua-a. PI. L. 860, e. et TO.VTO. ovrcas ex ovT< * tffrtv. Dem. Ol. 3. (v. 1.) 11, 7. TOUT' &v eyvcoKSres ^ffav, they would have been convinced of these things. HEM. 6. The copula sJvai is sometimes omitted, though commonly only in the Ind. Pres. ; etWi is sometimes omitted, even when it is not a copula, but properly a verb. This ellipsis is most frequent in the following cases : (a) In general propositions, observations, and proverbs. Eur. 0. 330. oA)3os ou fj.6viiJ.os ev Pporois. X. Cy. 2. 4, 27. (rrpari^, yap 77 paffrr] (686s) (b) Very often with vei'bal adjectives in -reoy, as also with other expres- sions denoting necessity and duty, e. g. a v ay KTJ, xpecoi', fre/ity, et/co's, also with Kaipos, &pa and the like. Dem. Ph. 3, 129, 70. ijfuv y virep rrjs \fv&fpias aycaviffreov. Id. Cor. 296, 205. ci.Tifj.ias eV SovXevoixry rfj ir6\ei (eetv (c) Often with certain adjectives, e. g. erotjuos, irp6&v/jios, oT6sT, Swa- rds, fx8iov, xa\Gir6v, STJ\OJ/, &iot>, etc. PI. Phaedr. 252, a. (^ fiov\(Vfiv fToifJ.r). Dem. Ph. 1. 48, 29. eyca Tratrxeij/ oriovv erot- X. C. 1, 1, 5. TJ\OJ/ oivv, '6ri OVK Uv (~2,dOKpdrr}s) irpof\fyfv, et /j,r) euo-eti/. Comp. ib. 2, 34. Here belong also the expressions , it is very ivonderful ( mirum quantum), d^x "' " oVoi/, it is quite impossible, inconceivable (= immane quantum), see 332, Kem. 10. On ovSfls fans ov (= nemo non), see 332, item. 12. HEM. 7. The Ind. Impf. is but seldom omitted, e. g. Aeschin. Ctes. 71, vb iv fj,s &v, and especially after conjunctions, e. g. PI. Rp. 370, e. &i> &i/ avrois XP*' ia ( sc - ^)- The ellipsis of the Opt. when &v belongs to it is more frequent, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 4, 12. ris yap av, e(paav\os (sc. &v) (pavov/j.ai, but else- where also, e. g. X. C. 2. 3, 15. aroira \eyeis xal ovSa/j.S>s irpbs aov (sc. ovra), et nullo modo tibi convenientia ; even in such cases as Th. 4, 135. x/"wws TeAeurwj/- TOS Kal Trpbs eop fjSrj (sc. ovros). The Inf. is often omitted after SoweTf, yyfitr- &at, vofiifciv and the like, e.g. Th. 7, 60. jSouAeurea e'So'/cet. X. Cy. 1. 6, 14. OTnoWa ^ie e/ceAeuTaTos rjv. 'O cro<6s Traircov /xaXiora 7rt^v/xet T^S apcr^s. UI.M M;K 1. The Comparative is strengthened or more definitely stated in the following ways : (a) by rt, still, even, etiam, e. g. ntlfav tn, still greater ; (b) by /J.O.KP&, o\iy(p, iroAA^, en TroAAy, 8, Totrovro*; /j.fya, o \iyov, TroAu, Sffov, roaovro, which show how much more or less of the quality expressed by the adjective is intended, e. g. IT o \ A $ /j-cifav, multo major, Jar gnater, TroAAcp tri /jLfi&vfs, multo majores etiam ; (c) sometimes by /uaA- \ov. Her. 1, 32. na\\ov oAjStwrepo's fan (far). KKM. 2. The Superlative is strengthened or more definitely stated in the following ways: (a) by it a/, vel, even, e. g. *al /tcUioTa, vel maxime, very greatly ! : (b) by words denoting measure or the degree of difference, viz. iroAAy, /*a/cp<, iroAu, irap it iro\v, offtf, roaovrtp, e. g, iroAAy fipjtTTov, 77t//o raitaiitissimus, the best by far; /uaicpy &PKTTOS, longe praestantissimtts ; (c) even the Superlative: /j.d\ts lv roTs irpe(rftvraT6s eVrt (i. e. lv rois irpecr^vraTois ovtri), the oldest among those who are very old.- Her. 7, 137. Tour6 fj.01 tv ToTtrt ^fi6rarov QaivfTcu ycvfa&cu. PI. Symp. 173, b. SwK-paTous ^PCUTT^S &v tv rols pd\ terra rwv r6re. The construction with the 1-Vni. is found only in Thuc., e. g. 3, 81. (trrdo-ts) tv rols irptar-n tytvero. Ib. 17. tv TO?S TrAeTa-Tai vrjfs. In such instances, ro?y must be considered as Neut. In like manner, the expression '6/j.oia (VoTa Ion.) rots was used Avith the Superlative. Her. 3, 8. tre/Soi/rat 5e 'Apd&ioi irians av&ptairwv dfj.o'ia T o ?(r t /xaAi(TTo(sc. (TejSo^ueVots), like those wlio respect very much, ut qui maxime. Th. 1, 25. \pT\iJLQ.T(t)v 8vvd/j.ft owes OT' tKelvov T))V xp6vov OfJ.oia r ols 'EAA^i/wi/ irAoixra>T(iTOis. The Superlative is also intensified by joining a positive with it, c. g. 'Aya&tov iinrfwv itpdrurros, the best among the good horsemen = the very best. REM. 3. The Superlative relation is often expressed more emphatically by negative adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, preceded by ov (Litdtes), in-tend of jxtsitive adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, e. g. oi>x ^iKiffra, not the least, especially, ov KK ivr o s t ov K ^Aax'^roy, stronger than p.d- , /Be'-Vno-Tos, /^KTTOS. Sometimes, also, it is expressed antithetically, e. g. dAAi 1 'fls, on are not in themselves intensive particles, but merely connect some part of Svvanai understood, and in that way may be said to give intensity to the Superlative. Sometimes Swa/Mi is expressed, e. g. e.fyotAi7nros peyas Tjvf 173-7; (Dem.). 'AAtfi/JtaSTjs rjpf&Ti v\aKyffi ol Baf}v\(f>viot (diligenter versabantur in custodia), Her. 3, 152. Mdrrju ftvai, to be in cain. Elvat, as well as the verbs ytyveffbai and irt^u- Ktvat, is very often connected with adverbs of place and degree, of which the corresponding adjective-forms are not in use, as 8/x> X W P^ S > 4cs, (j.aic- pdv, Tr6pp\vapias eli/at, X. An. 1. 3, 18. See 241, Rem. 3. The neuter pronoun denotes the nature of an object ; on the contrary, the pronoun that agrees with a noun, denotes the quality of the object. Hence there are cases where the two forms of expression cannot be interchanged, e. g. Ti tern TO\IV i-jreirXfov eV TroAA.]? Tapa\p Kal fy6fica OVTO.S. X. Cy. 7.3, 8. 5 aya^ij Kal Triffrr) ^v%"h-, o?xy ty airo\i- TTWV rj/j.as. X. H. 1. 4, 13. 6 e/c TOU ao-reos o%Aos ybpoiff&ii irpbs ras vavs, $ravp.aovTes Kal iSeiv fiov\6/j.evoi rbv 'A\Kt0id5r}V. It is very frequent with the pronouns, Th. 1, 136. (pevyei e's KepKvpav us avruv (sc. KepKvpai- tav) evepyeTys. 4, 15. 4s r^v ~2,irapri}v ws i)yyf\frr) ra yeyevrj^eya irepl Uv\ov, 5o|ei/ ouTots (sc. TO?S ^irapTidrais). X. Cy. 3. 3, 14. ffvyKoXeaas irav TO ff T pa- rt car j K b i/ e\e<= Trpbs a v T o v s roidSe. Also with the relative pronoun ; see on adjective-sentences, 332, 5. $-11.] EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. 305 llr.M \I;K 1. When tin- subject i-; expre^ed by the Ncnt. article r 6 or r d in connection with a substantive in the (Jen. 1'L tlic jm T(pa, according to No. 4, while ttevbepwrtpa is conformed to the idea of frriia contained in KI.M. 2. Closely related to the construction just stated, is the following: When a substantive subject with an attributive substantive in the Gen. PI. c\;>ivr> periphrastically a substantive idea, as ^ux^ Tctpcfflao, the Participle which stands in a remoter attributive relation to the subject, agrees in Case with the subject, but in Gender and Number with the substantive in the Gen., which expresses the principal idea of the periphrasis. Od. A, 90. $\&e 5' eVi tlux^ Qii&aiov Tdpfffiao x/jutreo*' (TKrjirTpov cx&>j/, the shade of the Thtban -nis antic, liai-int/ a golden sceptre (here ex^j/ agrees in number with vj/i/x^> but in gender with Tftpeai irTfpvytaffiv. 2. "When the subject is expressed, not as a special and defi- nite object, but as a general idea, the predicative adjective is put in the Neut. Sing, without reference to the gender and number of the subject. (The English sometimes uses the words thing, or something. Sometimes the pronoun rl t or the substantives xp^/* a > wpay/xa, are connected with the adjective. When the adjective is in the Superlative, the English uses the article the). II. ft, 204. OVK ayabbv Tro\vKoipavlr) (a multiplicity of rulers is not a good \iny) : efs Koipavos ecrrw. Eur. 0. 760. dtivov ol TroAAof, Kcutovpyovs OTOV oo-Toras. Id. M. 329. TrA?V 70^ reKvcav e/uotye

t\oi$, friends are to be trusted. Her. 1, 91. rty TreTrpoo/xe'j/Tjj' fj.o'ipav a8 visard eVrt (if is impossible) airofyvyesiv Kal bff. 3, 83. Srj\a, '6ri Sel eVo 76 Tiro j^teW acn\ea ytrcV&cu. Th. 1, 86. ovs ou TrapaSoTea TO5' 'E\\r)sir6]/Tioi, a\\a Awpnjs, it (this) is not lonians, etc. Aeschin. Ctes. p. 55. OVK tcrri ravra apxt (Ms is not an office). Id. Leg. p. 50. TO Or' e(mj> 6 TrpoScmjs, this is the traitor. PI. Phaedon. 62, d. 6 avdrjTos &V&PUTTOS rax &v ol^Sffi-r] ravra, TTia iraff&v, ol/j.ai, rwv ^iriSrv^.tcav aKparr) e (/>m o-rpara) dv^a>p7/o-ai/. Taiv avroiv Seovrat KCU 17 yvvr) Kal 6 avrjp. The rule seems to be, that when the affirmation is made of each of the two separately, the Dual is used, but when of both together, the Plural, e. g. Mtvws KCU Av/covpyos vopovs e$Tir]v (each gave laws) ; ^8ov; o~oi /ecu Kvirrj ev ry TroXct REM. 7. The Dual is not used in all cases where two objects are spoken of, but only where two similar objects are mentioned, either naturally connected, e. g. tr6Sf, x f ?P f > &r f t or sucn as we conceive to stand in a close and reciprocal relation, e. g. two combatants, two friends, etc. REM. 8. The Dual very often interchanges with the PI., especially in par- ticiples, e.g. II. \, 621. r ol 5 s ISpu a IT e ty v x o v T o xircavcav aravr e TTOT! PI. Euthyd. 273, d. ty(\av yfveTo lax"f) T6 6fios re (two streams running on opposite sides are compared with two hostile parties). II. &, 185, sqq. Ec'3 p e re Kal ffv Tl68apye, Kal Atibuv Aci/xTre re 5?e, vvv /not T-fjv KopiSty airo- rlvfTov, 191. oAA* 2, Suo, but seldom with SuoiV. II. e, 10. 5ua> vices. II. i, 4. avf/Jioi ovo. Aesch. Ag. 1395. SuoIV ol/j-uynaffiv. PI. Soph. 244, b. irpos- 8uotV o v6/j.a(r i v. PI. Rep. 614, c. 5vo x aff l JiaTa vu (b) The Duals TW, TO?J/, rwSe, To?j/5e, TOVTCO, TOUTOU', avru, avroiv, u, oTv, in prose are used both as masculine and feminine (i. e. they are of common gender), e. g. &uw ru iro\f ru yvvatKf a/j.u rovru rcl; f)fj.epa TOIV yeveatoiv rovru ru ri-^va rovroiv roiv Kivqffeoiv ru 6Su. The Fem. 308 SYNTAX. [j 241. form of the article rd, is extremely rare, e. g. TO. 8* ovv K6pa, S. Ant. 769 ; oftener the form Ta.1v, X. H. 6, 4. 17. PI. Tim. 79, d; so 4* rcuj/Se 8* ovffa.iv TTap&fvoii', S. O. C. 445. Tavra occurs Av. Pac. 847, but T a v T a i v is more frequent, e. g. T o u T o t y /* <$ v a i v, S. O. C. 859 ; e/c r a v - raty, 1149: TO.VTO.IV 5e To.1v 8ia&"i]Kau>, Isae. 5, 15. A (fro, S. Ant. 570. Besides the pronouns mentioned, sometimes other attributives also in the Dual are used as of common gender ; the participle but seldom. PL Phaedr. 237, d. TUJLUV eV e/ccfo-Tw Svo Tivi eVroj/ iSea apxovTe Kal ayovre, olv eTro/ue&a 'TOVTW Se K. T. \. 6. When the predicate is a substantive connected to the subject by ami or any other verb having the character of a copula ($ 240, 2), the verb often agrees by means of attraction, as commonly in Latin, with the nearest predicative substantive. Her. 3, 60. rb /UJKOS TOV bpvy^aros cirra (rrdSiol ei \6q>TO. Isocr. Paneg. 51, b. ea, bv lff^vooTa.Tov KOI &pa T'IKTSI eV, instead of fovffa. Comp. No. 2. A similar attraction occurs sometimes in sentences denoting comparison, e. g. ruv KOIVUV TI apa 8ievoov/jLr)v, v>v ovSev &v /tSAAoi/, ^ TIS &\\os exet, PL Theaet. 209. a. (e^et here agreeing with -m instead of u/xaV travra xp^ov iravTuv \apirp6- TO.TOS &v Sia^eVei. PL Tim. 29, a. 6 K6V yeyovoTtav. Plutarch. Consol. 102. c. rj Xvir-rj x aA - 67rwT * T7 ' "*<>&<*>'' O n tne contrary, Isocr. ad Nicocl. extr. o-v/ijSouAos 070^^5 xP'n (ri f J -^ raT01/ Ka ^ TvpavvutA- TO.TOV a.ira.vT(ov KTT)fj.dT(ov ea-rt (the Superlative here taking the gender of the partitive Gen. REM. 11. When the idea of personality in general is to be expressed, the Masc. form may be used, referring to words denoting females; (in this and other similar irregularities, less regard is had to strict grammatical principles than to the general idea to be expressed,) e. g. ~2,vvf\Tj\v^affiv ws e'/xe KaTa\e\ei/j.- fjLfvai dSeA^cu re Kal afieXtyiSa't Kal avefyial TOffavrat, &ST" tlvai eV rfj oiKia Tfffffa- pfSKatSfKa TOUS 4\ev&e p ovs (free men), X. C. 2. 7, 2. 'H ov &OV\O/JLCU. Hipp. 244. alSovfjif&a yap ra \e\eyfjitva fioi. KI.M. 13. In an address directed to several persons, the Greek has several peculiar idioms : (a) The Imp. Sing. etTre and some others, which denote an exhortation or animating call, e. g. aye, <>, i Sc, is frequently connected in the Attic writers with a Voc. PL, or with several vocatives, e. g. PI. Euthyd. 283, b. ij, u/LteTy, & 'H p i IT ic i 5 a, Kal 8 iSdffKfTe ainbv jSovArj^vai airep fi/Afts ol fjiev $)) avaff- rdrrfs (SiScurKov. An interchange of the Sing, and PI. often occurs among the Tragedians, when the chorus is either addressed by others, or speaks of itself, the poet having in mind, at one moment, the whole chorus, at another their leader, e. g. S. 0. C. 167. leTj/ot, p.^ STJT' aSt/cTj- $< ) iras TIS (every one use his bow). Hence, also, the transition from the third Pers. to the second, e. g. Eur. Bacch. 327. (345.) u.a.Tos Ka^e^iav els Tty Siavoiav e (jLTriirTova tv, X. C. 3. 12, 6. ScoKpa*- Tet dyuiATjTa 7 e v o p. e v ft) KpiTlas re Kai 'A \K i &id8i)s Tr\e?o~Ta wa/ca rrjv rr6\iv TT o 1 17 ff d r t\ v, ib. 1 . 2, 12. 'H p a K A TJ s Kal 77 u.aTos K&\\OS Kal io~x v s 8et\< Kal Ka.K$ ^vvoiKovvTa irpfirovTa ^aiVerot, PI. Menex. 246, e. Evyevetai Te Kal Swdpeis Kal Tip.a.1 Srj\d tffTiv aya&a o/Ta, PI. ^Hv f) ayopaKalTb irpvTavf}'iov Tlapica A^w i] ff K 77 /i e'j/a, Her. 3, 57. At&oi re Kal ir\tv&oi Kal u\a al KfpafJLOS aTdKTus eppifj.fj.eva ovSev XP^^'M^ effrtv, X. C. 3. 1, 7. 'H Ti>X"n Kal *iAtTT7ros ?iV epycov Kvpioi, Aesch. C H oX- KloTt] Tro\iTelaTf Kal 6 K.a\\iffT os o.v^p \onra &v rjfjuv etr) StcAi^e?^, Tvpavvis Te Kal Tvpavvos, PL lip. 562, a. (b) Each subject is considered separately and by itself; then the predicate is confined to one of the subjects and $242.] AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. 311 agrees with it. This construction is also used, when one of the subjects is to In- rcpivsrnti'd as more prominent than the others. There are here three positions of the predicate: (a) before all the subjects; (b) after all the subjects; (c) after the first subject PI. Lys. 207, d. i Kal OX^MOTO Kal btpdirovTcs Kal 77 ira. OUT. K KM ARK 1. Sometimes the verb, though it follows different subjects, agrees with the first subject, the remaining subjects being then represented as subor- dinate, e. g. X. An. 1. 10, 1. fiaKUV elsiritr- Tfi. So also with the attributive adjective, e. g. X. An. 1. 5, 6. eirra 60o- \ovs Kal f}fj.iofi6\ioi' 'A.TTIKOVS (the adjective here agreeing with o&o\ovs ratlu-r than jjyuojBrfXur); Th. 8, 63. 'Acrrvoxos tirv&fro rbv 2 Kal r as vavs REM. 2. The verb sometimes stands in the Sing., if several nouns in the PI. denoting things precede, when it is intended to represent those nouns as making up one whole, as a condition, state, etc., e. g. PL S. 188, b. /col iraxvat Kal x a * a C a ' K ^ pvffi (3ai K 9rAeove|tas Kal aKOff/J-ias irepl a\\7j\a T)V roiov- ruv ylyverai e REM. 3. When the subjects are connected by ^ ^, aut aut, Kat /cof, et et, otirc afire, neque neque, the predicate agrees with the subject standing nearest to it, if each subject is to be regarded separately and by itself, e. g. *) OUTOS, % fKfwos a\T]&?i \eyei, aut hie, aut illc vera elicit ; but when the subjects arc not considered separately or as independent of each other, but as expressing plurality, the predicate is in the PL, e.g. Dem. Aph. 817, 12. & &TjpnririST)s cravat. REM. 4. The attributive adjective commonly agrees with the substantive nearest to it, e. g. 'A/j.(poTepois ol avrolftpKot Kal v /j./j.axia KareVrrj, Th. But where perspicuity or emphasis requires it, the adjective is repeated with each substantive, e.g. irdvrfs avSpes Kal iraaai yvvatKes', or the con- structions stated under No. 1 are observed, e. g. 'H p a K \ fj s Kal Q rj o^j/, ego et tu scribimus. '70? Kal &c?j/os ypd(f>o/j.V,'ego et ille scribimus. '741) Kal Te. 'H/xeTs Kal IKWOI ypaQopfv. 'T^eTs Kal ^/celvos ypdv p.aru>v, like valetudinett, etc. ; TT I i>fffis~, Kal rats yvwpais Kal ro7s ia t philosophy in general, 77 QiXoffotyia, as a particular science or a particular branch of philosophy. When the Inf. is to be considered as an abstract substantive, it has the article, e. g. r b ypdetv. But the abstract noun takes the article when it expresses a concrete idea, e. g. 77 \6v eVrt. But when the predicate denotes a definite, a before-mentioned, or a well-known object (No. 6), it of course takes the article. Her. 1, 68. o-ui/e/SaAAero rbv 'Opeffrrjv TOVTOV flvai, he concluded that this icas the Orestes, namely, the one before-mentioned. 5, 77. ol $ c nnr p6Tai ol irax**s, the rich bore the name of (before-mentioned) iinro&oTcu. In 27 314 SYNTAX. [$ 244. passages like X. Cy. 3. 3, 4. 6 yuev ravra etVaJi/ Trapr,\affev 6 8e 'Ap/j.fvtos j/ evepy ir-qv, rbv &v$pa rbv ayaStov. An. 6. 6, 7. ol 8e a\\oi ol irapSvres roov ffrparicar&v ^d\\eiv rbv Af^iTTirov, a.vaKa\ovvres rbv TT poS 6rrj v, the article denotes, that the ideas expressed by benefactor, honest man, traitor, point to a definite action either before named, or well-known. When the predicate is a superlative or a substantive with a superlative, the article is not used in Greek j the English, however, uses it here. Ol Qaffntirai elffi irovnp6rar 01 avSrp&Truii/ Kal aS iKcarar o i (the most wicked, etc.), Dem. 25, 2. 'AvSpl /caA.< Kaya&y e pya- ffia KpariffT-r) earl yewpyia, X. Oec. 6, 8. Comp. 241, 7. 2. Hence the article is used to denote the whole compass of the idea, everything which can be included under the term used; one object is here considered as a representative of the whole class. 'O av&pwTros &vt)r6s eo-rt, man (i. e. all men) is mortal Xp^ rb avrb yd\a REM. 2. Where the English uses the indefinite article a or an, denoting merely a class, as a man, or an individual of a class who is not distinguished from the others, as some man, it not being determined what man, the Greek omits the article ; hence &v&p(inros in both instances. REM. 3. Common nouns sometimes omit the article, where, according to the statement in No. 1, it would be inserted. This is the case: (a) In appellations denoting kindred and the like, where the particular relation is obvious of itself, or is sufficiently definite from the connection or the context, e. g. irar^p, firir-rtp, vlos, a$e\' 'lirirov tivcu, horse-back. 'Eirl Sr^pav e'|ieVat (i. e. ad venandum). X. Cy. 1. 2, 9. nJrepov 7rto"ra^evoz/ fjvioxeiv ^ ^eCyos AajSeTi/ KptiTTov, // /xr/ ivurrdfteifw (ad vehendum), X. C. 1. 1, 9. 'ETT! vStap teVcu (aquatum ire), Her. 3, 14. R.EM. 4. The names of the arts and sciences, of the virtues and vices, often omit the article, even where they occur in a definite relation, since, as well- known appellatives, they have come to be used as a kind of proper names, e. g. Tldvra fi.tv ovv e/.ioiye SoKeT ra Ka\a Kal TO aya&a affKrjra elvai, oi>x ^Kitrra Se (Tea (ppoff i)vt\. X. C. 1. 2, 23. 'Enel ovv TO. re SiKaia Kal ra &\\a Ka\d re Kal rdvTa aperrj irpdrrerai, SrjAov elvai, 6n Kal S iKatoffiivt] Kal TJ a\\r] iraffa. la eVrf, 3. 9, 5. 'Eiricr^ p.t) apa hil(>si>l>hi;iiitj (in />/e distinguished from another, the article is used, e. g. ^ pTjropiK-f), r) &pi&(j.i]TiKr). The substantives /j-fycbos, irATj&oy, uJ/os, e3- pos, fid& os, yevos and the like, are very often found in the Ace. or Dat. without the article, as they are to be received as a kind of adverbial expression, e. ir- -rroTafj.bs KvSvos uvo/j.a, tvpos Svo irAe&po/, ttco plethra wide, X. An. 1. 2. !':{. 3. The article is very often used with common nouns to denote what belongs to an object or is requisite for it, what is due to it. X. Cy. 3. 3, 6. 'Evoju/^ie ydp, tl fxcurros rb /J. tp o s a.itira.ivov trort)0~if, rb o\ov avrcf KaXcas $x lv (partem, cui praeest; centuriam swam). 8. 3, 3. vel/j.as 5c rovruv (TUV aro\S)v) rb pcpos /ca(TTaj ra>v rjyt^vwi', tKf\fvcrev avrovs roinois /coayielV rovs O.VTUV y /iTjSe ft e)3ouA.TO ttivvaro &v ravra ^airoraj/ (the meas- ures requisite to guard against deception). 5. 6, 34. ol crrpaTiatTai T/TTC/AOUJ' aur

r as cVi rovs Tro\ff^.lovs &yet (leads HIS soldiers). Kvpds re KaTa7TTj5T)(ras a-rrb r ov ap par os rbv & u pa.K a eVe'Su /coi dvajScks C'TT! r b v 'iirirov TO iroArcb els rets x 'P as ^AajSe, X. An. 1. 8, 3. 5. As the article may make one object prominent, by indi- vidualizing it and presenting it apart from others, it is often used, when an object is to be represented in a distributive rela- tion to the predicate of the sentence. Tlposairovcn 8e fj.i(T&bv 6 Kvpos virKTxvtiTat. Sdffeiv avrl SopetKou rpla TOW fjuiirbs r$ ffrpar Karri (singulis mensibus singiilis militibus, three half- Darics a month to each soldier, comp. English so much the pound), X. An. 1. 3, 21. (comp. 5. 6, 23.) Aapei/cbi/ Kao~ros ofoei rov /j.r)vbs vp.uv (each of you shall have a Daric each month), 7. 6, 7. 'O Se o-weburbfls rbv tva tya/nov kv\ fyca Trpoirf/jLiTfiv, ore fj.^ irapfi-r) iro\\d, $vvair kv aAuTrws ry fvl xp^f^at (singula panis frustra, to dip each morsel into the different sauces), Id. C. 3. 14, 6. 6. The article is properly and originally a demonstrative pronoun, and is still often used in a demonstrative sense. This 316 SYNTAX. [$ 244. is particularly the case in Homer, where the article almost uni- formly has a pronominal relation. Comp. 247. The simplest use of the article as a demonstrative, is as follows : An object not before described or referred to, when it is first mentioned as an indefinite individual, does not take the article; but when it is repeated, it takes the article, because it has been already referred to and is known, e. g. ElSov &j/Spa' & Se avfjp fjiOi e\eej/. Hence the article is also used when the speaker points to an object, e. g. yd\a (the milk, ivhich had been pointed out) ; and even when a part only of the material is referred to, the article is employed, though material nouns elsewhere are always without the article, as they contain no idea of individuality, e. g. Uivu rov otvov (of this wine). The article is often used in speaking of persons or things known and celebrated, where the Latin uses the pronoun ille, e. g. 6 Ka\bs Trews, that beautiful boy ; this is very frequent with proper names. See No. 7. "Ore Eep|7)s ayeipas r^v ai/api& [t.f\Tov ffTpariav $\&ei' eirl v^v 'E\\d5a (that numberless host), X. An. 3. 2, 13. 7. Personal proper names as such, i. e. so far as they in them- selves denote merely individuals, do not take the article. But they take it, when they have been already mentioned, and are afterwards referred to (No. 6) ; or even when they have not been before named, if it is intended to designate them as well- known and distinguished (No. 6). Plural names of nations, and also the names of countries, districts, and festivals, are both with and without the article. 6(pT). So also where an adjective is joined with a proper name, e.g. o-ocpbs 2, (a itpdrvs, the wise Socrates, ^EviK^ffav rjjSaTot Aa.Ke5aifj.o- viovs. 'Aftpo KO/JLO.S ov rovr' fTro'njfffV, a\\' eVei tficove Kvpov eV KtAi/ffo ovra, ai/cwrrpeij/ay e/c ^OIV'IKIJS Trapct. /JcunAea airfaawev, X. An. 1.4, 5. Ku- pov Se ^eTaTre'uTrerai (Aapetbs) . . dva/Satvet ovv 6 Kvpos, X. An. 1. 1, 2. 'ATT^ TOU 'I\i(T(roD \eyeTai d Bope'as rrjv 'flpciiS-uiaj' apirdffai, PL Phaedr. 229, b (as well-known names). HEM. 5. "When a noun in apposition, accompanied by the article, follows a personal proper name, the proper name does not take the article, e. g. KpoTcros, 6 riav AvScov ficurtXevs. But yet when the article is used, e. g. 6 K.po'iffos, 6 riav AvSuv ficuriXevs, it has a demonstrative sense, and desig- nates the proper name as one already mentioned or known. The noun in apposition is accompanied by the article, when it serves to distin- guish the person or thing mentioned from others of the same kind, or when the person or thing named is to be pointed out as one known, e. g. r, the i\ocro 'AxeAwos irora^6s, Th. 2. 102. &rl T&:/ 2apo/ irorafj.oi', &rl rb/ riupa/xov irorap.6v, X. An. 1.4, 1. ni rbv Evre >eldt>m : M T< iroTo^aJ KaKvirdpa, Th. 7, 80. ^irt rbi/ irorap.bv rin/ 'EpijWv, il>. 82. Sometimes the article is wanting : tirl "Vdpov vorap.6v (accord- ing to the best MSS.), X. An. 1. 4, 1 ; M "Apircurov irornp.6v (according to the best MSS.), ib. 4. 7, 18; woro/ubs ISeAu'oCs, 5. 3, 8. The names of mountains, islands, seas, cities, etc., are also placed between the article and the noun, when they are of the same gender or, at least, of the same declension as the nouns to which they belong, viz. 77}, &Kpov, upos, i>rj/j.Tju, Th. 4, 43 ; rb 2otWi/ &Kpoi/, 7; Qeo-irptorls 77}, 77 AfyAos vrjffos] rov 2,K6fj.0pov upovs, Th. 2, 96; rov A'(/JLOV upovs, Th. 2, 96 ( opet rrj Tcpai/cio, Th. 4, 70 ; T7;v &Kpav rb Kvvbs (TTj^a, 8. 105; r^s'lS^s rov upovs, 108; 77 AyKu&os rb P*'> / at ' 'EiWa dooi, 1, 100 ; rijv TTO\IV rovs Tap(rou$, X. All. 1. 2, 26. The article is seldom omitted, e. g. anb 'A/3S7jpajj/ ir6\fcas, Th. 2, 97. 8. When adjectives or participles are used as substantives, they regularly (according to No. 2) take the article. The Eng- lish here either employs an adjective used substantively, as the good; or a substantive, as the speaker (the one speaking) ; or resolves the participle by he who, they who, that ivhich (= to the Lat. w, qui). This usage is very frequent in Greek with all the participles. 'O v rb Koivbv u.fyto~r (av rip-wv a^iovrai. 'O irXfiffra. o><> eA^tras rb K. p.. r. a^iovrai. 'O TrAeT- (TTo w(f)\-f)ff(i}j/ r. K. p.. r. a|ia>&i](reTat. 'O aperr]? ex MV TrAoure? u.tv ovruv (pi\cav TroAAcDi', TrAovreT 5e /cat &\\cav ^ov\o/j.fvci}j/ "yei/eV&cu /cal e5 p.fv irpdrroov e%ei Tois o" f i/ TJ a" 3- TJ ffofjievovs, lav 5e Tt o~(pa\TJ, ov o"jravifi ru>v fioT)&r) o~6v- r ca v, X. An. 7. 7, 42. But when the adjectives and participles are designed to express only a part of a whole, the article is omitted, e. g. 070^01, good men ; ffmiv^v rov Mapooviov oirroi (crav ol 8 ictptraffav r cs (and these are they tluit robbed, etc.). X. C. 2. 6, 18. ou u,6vov ol ISitorai rovro iroiovo~iv, aAAa Kal TroAfts a I rwv re KO\WV jUaA^rro t, Kal ra alo~xpa T^/CITTO TT posif pevai -jroAAa/cjy 27* 318 SYNTAX. [$ 245. irpbs dAArjAccs. 3. 5, 4. Botwrot /xeV, of irpAffSsv ouS' eV TT; tavrSiv ro\- 'A&Trjvaiois &vev Aa/ceSat^oi'iWj' TC /cal TOO;/ aAAwj , vw/ a.Tcei\o\J(Tiv avrol /ca^' eaurous t/ij3aAeiV ei's TTJV ' 10. The Greek may convert adverbs of place and time, more seldom of quality, into adjectives or substantives by prefixing the article. In like manner a preposition with its Case may be made to express an adjective or substantive meaning. 'H &vvt]s fjLfTdffTaffis. 'O def, an im- mortal. So TO and TO vvv t now, i. e. at the present time; rb ird\ai, formerly, in the former time ; TO irplv, rb avrlita, immediately. Oi irdvv ru>v OT par tear >v, the best of the soldiers. Tb K^pra tyvxos. 'H &yau d/xeAeto. 'O bp.o\oyovjj.4v(as Sov\os. Th. 6, 80. r))V a.Kti>$vv Tra/xTrav and rb Trapd-nav, omnino, rb K dpra, rb irapa.iro\v used adverbially. Even : 'H rwv yecpvpcav o u 8id\vffis, the not destroying of the bridges. *O -jrpbs rovs Tlfpffas ir6\e[j.os. Ol irepl (fuAoero^icw, the philosophers. Of Iv &a~rei. 'H tv Xeppovfjcry rvpavvls. 11. The neuter article TO, may be placed before every word or part of speech, when the word is not considered in relation to its meaning, but is used only as a form of speech, or when a preceding word is repeated, without regard to the structure of the sentence in which it is repeated. The Greek, by prefix- ing the article, may give even to whole phrases the form and meaning of an adjective or substantive. Tb rvirru, rb rvirreis. Dem. Cor. 255, 4. fyiels, 5 oVSpes 'A^i/cuot rb 8* u/*6?s orav efrrw, rfyv ir6\iv Xsyu). PL Rp. 352, d. ov irepl rov ^irirv)(6vros (de re levi) 6 \6yos (fffriv), ctAAo irepl rov ovni/a rp6irov XP^I C^^* 245. Position of the Article. 1. The article is sometimes separated from its substantive by intervening particles, e. g. /*eV, 8e, ye, re, yap, 877 ; by the indefinite pronoun rlpa, r^v 8e ywalKa. When a preposition stands before the article, the prose-writers say either : wpbs 8e rbv &vSpa, or irpbs rbv fodpa 5e, but not irpbs rbv 8e &v$pa. Tcai> ris Tlepcreow, Her. 1, 85. To?s avrbs avrov Trf)/j,aV KO\UV Tf Kaya&wv s XoiTrbs ^j/, . . . 6 inrtp rfjs eVl T$ trvpl KaTaXTi e tr r 77 /c (^ T a> i/, ai 5 irdAeiy (republics) al Si] /U.OK par ov /jifvai TOIS v6p.ois rots /cei/xeyots, Aeschin. 3, 6. Tb iinriK'bv rb tKeivcav (sc. TUV ^KvSfS)^) ovrca /j.dx*Tai, rb Se 6ir\iTiKbv r6 ye ran/ 'E \\-fjv a v, &s eyw \eyco, PL Lach. 191, b. 'Eyw /j.V oiiv fKtivovs TOVS avSpas ii/Jii ov fjiovov T&V o~ (a JJ.O.T wv Ttav Tj/J-CTepuy irarepas elvat, aAXa Kal TTJS 6 \evfrfpias T rj s re rjfj.fr cpas Kal vp.irdi' TO>J/, TU>V Iv TrjSe TTJ rjTreipw, PL Mcnex. 240, e. Ate^epxovrai rds re ffv u. (pop as ras IK rov iroXe/j.ov T ov Trpbs a\\-f]\ovs iifuv yfyfvyfj. tvas Kal ras a^>e- \fias ras e/c T-/JS o~Tpareias rrjs eir' ticc'tvov e a o u. e v a s, Isocr. Paneg. 43, 15. Sometimes the position varies in the same sentence, e. g. Toy ^670- Aas 7}5ovas Kal TO. aya&a TO /J.yd\a ?; Tre&ca Kal r) Kapvepia Kal ol *v Tip Kaipff Tr6voi Kal Kivfivvoi. irapex VTai (great pleasures and advantages), X. Cy. 3. 3, 8. ITws iroTf: ri aKpar o s 8 IKUIO crvvr) irpbs a 5 iKiav T^\V aKparov exet ; PL Rp. 555, a. Then the second position does not differ from the first. HEM. 2. "With a verbal substantive, the attributive expressed by a preposi- tion and its Case, is often placed after its substantive without the repetition of the article. So also, when an attributive explanation comes between the article and the substantive : 'H (Tiry/co/iiSr? /c ra>v aypwv es rb affrv, Th. 2, 52. 'H vvv v/J.fT(pa opy}] es WltTv\r}vaiovs y 3, 44. TTJS TUV yvvaiK&v irwXovvras o~o.) 'O fia (postnlo) rovs depdVoiras faol /nev a&oj/a T& tirir-fiotia irapa t o.va.p.ifj.v^v Trpoy6v(av T&V tavrov fls rovs 07j/3atous irpoydvovs Vfpyrias t Dem. (Psephism.) 18, 186. 'E^aearw^Tj virb TUV ev rfj STroprTj T\UV, X. An. 2. 6, 4. On the contrary, the Gen. without the article, is placed either before or after the other substantive, when that substantive denotes only a part of that expressed in the genitive ; the emphasis is then on the governing substantive, e. g. 6 Srjfji.os 'A&Tjj/euW, or 'A^Tjvaiw*' 6 Sfj/ios, the people and not the nobles. Hence, with this position, a partitive and not an attributive genitive is used; the Athenian people is not here considered in contrast with another people, but a part of the Athenian people is contrasted with another part of the same, viz., the nobles. Compare further, /? SaHcparovs ^uXotroc/x'o or rj 4>i\o(ro 17. REM. 6. In like manner, the word fi6vos has the position mentioned under (a), when it expresses an actual attributive explanation of its substantive, e. g. 6 juoVos 7ra?s, the ONLY son; on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b), when it is a more definite explanation of the predicate, e. g. 'O TTCUS /xoVos or fj.6vos 6 Trots iraifei, the boy plays alone (without company). MoVrjj/ rwv avfrpwirw (y\urra.v) eirolT)(rav (of freol) o'lav ap&povv r^jv , i. e. r) TWV av&p. y\TTa \i.6vT\ to-Tlv, ^]v ^Trolrjffav o'lav K, r. X., they made the human tongue only, capable of articulating sounds, X. C. 1. 4, 12. REM. 7. When a substantive has two or more attributives, one of which limits the other ( 264, 2), one position maybe as an English, e.g. Of &\\oi aya- bol fobpotiroi, the other good men ; or the limiting attributive with the article either stands first, and the second follows with the article and substantive, or the limited attributive with the article stands first, and the limiting attributive fol- lows with the article and substantive. 'O i/avriicbs 6 rS>v fiapfidptov roils &\\ois rots l/toTs x w P^' s > ^y s - 281 - (When & aAAos is joined with an adjective used substantively, the article is commonly repeated, e. g. raAAa TO. 7roA.m/cci, X. Hicr. 9, 5. Of &\\oi of irapaTvyx&vovTes, X. Apol. 11.) 'H oux ^Kiffra /8Acx\|/ao-a rj \oin5->)s v6ffos, Th. 1, 23. 'Ev rfj rov Albs rr} /jLeyicrrr) eoprp, Th. 1, 126. J Es aurbu rbv ftrl TO? T< irpdyftariy Dem. 6, 8. (c) 'O wp&s rbv W\e/ioi> (rrpaT^ybs aipfbt is (this position is most fre- quent, when the i>:irtk'i]>le has two more definite expletives). T&s inrb VOVTOV 0\a(rr)pias e f prj /JL f v as, 1H, 126. Ai irpi TOW (TTd/uaroj VTJCJ i'av^ax'0'', Th. 7, 23. T& TT^S A^vifj/ /afpos r tr papntv o v, 58. When there arc two or more explanatory words belonging to the partici- ple. they a iv cither placed between the article and the substantive, e. g. T^f T<$T6 G-n&aiois p, & e'xpf?To), X. C. 1. 2, 49. 1a.\)Tt\v ^vd}^t\v exw (which signifies OI^TTJ eVrti/ % yv&fjiT), fy ex w )) -^ n - 2. 2, 12. If, however, the predicative substantive is to be represented as a definite object or one before-men- tioned, it takes the article, e. g. 'OTroVe ('ScaKparris) TI r$ \6yv 5 EtTre ju.oi, Sci/cpares, OVK atffx^^p ov^uara Syptvcav ; ( = blockhead, why dont you cease ?) PI. Gorg. 489, b. OVK oIS' arra \eyets, & SwK/jares, oAA' ^AAoi' Ttj/a tpfoTa* 2. Ovros dvJjp oix fnrofj.Vi cas like OJroi, ofcs dpart, fidpfiapoi iro\t/j.iu>T(poi ^ui/ Ifforrai, X. An. 1. ('). It'), tlu- relative claiiM 1 supplies the place of tlie article. Hut then- are lew pa-sa^es like: $fpe \afiwv x tr ^ >lfas u^v rovrovai and the following rovsSe x ir <*>>'cis, X. Cy. 8. 3, G, wlicrc tlic demonstrative is u-ed like a tkicttC (that irlu'cli fxiiiifs out) adverl) (here, tlicrr). The poets very often omit the article where the prose-writers mu>t use it. REM. '2. When the pronoun ouros or tKt?vos belongs to a substantive having the article and an attributive, then these pronouns are often placed betAveen the attributive and the substantive, e. g. Ai ruv UfKoirovv^ffiuv alrai Kf/es, Th. 8. 80. 'H ff-Tfvi] OVTTJ &5os, X. An. 4. 2, 6. 'O AV 'AbTjiraiav iraffa. (O'ATJ) ir6\is. 4. A substantive with which TOIOVTO?, rotosSe, TOO-OI)TOS, To?, are joined, takes the article placed according to $ 245, 3 (a), when the quality or quantity designated by these, is to be considered as belonging to a definite object, one before mentioned or known, or as belonging to a whole class of objects previously named. TAp' aiftv Svvcuo rbv TOIOVT ov fi/xe/uTrroj' i\ov vop.leiv ; (i. e. talem, qnalis anted descriptns est). X. Cy. 5. 5,32. Ilus kv olv 6 roioufos avfy 8iav TOGOVTUIV Kai TOIOVT uv a-yc&uv vp.'iv Kal rats &\\ots 'Afrrivaiots ex VTfS X-P IV (' n relation to what precedes), Dem. Cor. 327, 305. 'Opa>v rovs TIJ\IKOVTOVS tyvXar- Tovras /xoAttrro ras ywaiKas (relating to the preceding yepoucp, but at the same time designating the whole class of the yepaioi), X. R. L. 1, 7. So also when taken substantivcly : 6 TOIOUTOS, TO. roiavra. On the contrary, the article must be omitted, when the object is indefinite : any one of those who are of such a nature, or are so great, e. g. TOIOVTOV &v$pa OVK Uv tiraivoiiis. 5. "When Tra?, Travres, 0X05 belong to a substantive, the following cases must be distinguished : (a) When the idea expressed by the substantive is considered as altogether a general one, the article is not used. Flay &V&PUTTOS (seldom &v&pwiros iras), every man (i e. every one to whom the predicate man belongs ; Trdires &v&p avTols ov TOVS vap6vTa.s fj.6^ov avoKTe'tvai, aXXa Kal TOVS airavras MirvXyvaiovs, 3, 36. Tb '6\ov avdyKr] TO. travra. /j. 6 p 77 elj/at, PI. Theaet. 204, a. 'AvfrpdiroKTi yap TOIS ir aff i KOIVOV Tou|ajuapTdVetJ', S. Ant. 1023. 'EKfivcas (JLOI fyaiverai, Sjsirep TO. TOV irposwirov p6pia exet irpbs rb '6\ov IT pdswiroi', PL Prot. 329, e. Hence it signifies, in all. Tlf/jiirova-i x i ^' lovs TOVS irdvras 6ir\tras, a thousand hop- lites IN ALL. Sfi'eTrA.Tjpwi^TjO'aj' y^es at iraffai Se/co fj-aKiffra. ai l/carcy, Th. 3, 66. (y) When the words Tras, Travres, intended merely as. a more definite explanation, without any special emphasis, belong to a word denoting a definite object and hence having the article, they are then placed according to $ 245, 3 (b). This is by far the most frequent use of Tras, Travres. The word oXos also is usually constructed in the same manner, in connection with a substan- tive and the article. Ol ffrpaTLUTcu d\ov T& ffr par JireSoj' airav or &TTO.V rb ffr par Ol ffrpaTiwrcu vdifres or irdvres ol ffrpaTtwrai Ka\ws Aia r^v ir&\iv o\i)v or Siei 8X17^ r^v ir6\iv (simply through the whole city, whereas Sick T^\V '6Xf\v ir6\iv, through the WHOLE city). Ataj8ouz/ouert irdvr es fls rb ftv^avriov ol O~T par icar at, X. An. 7. 1, 7. Et inrb rrjs 'E \\d5os ir a ff rj s allots eir* apery (^av^a^eer^at, T^V 'EAAaSa ireipaTfov ev 'iroit1v y X. C. 2. 1,28. 6. When ocao-ros, each, every, belongs to a substantive, the article is omitted, as with ?ras in the sense of each, every, when the idea expressed by the substantive is considered as a general one ; but when the idea contained in the substantive is to be made prominent, it takes the article which is always placed according to $ 245, 3 (b). Kara r^v fjfiepav fKairrr^v, Dem. Cor. 310, 249, or o^' fKa.ffTi)v r^v T]fi4pa.V) every single day, but OVK 6\iya fcrrl KC&' tK&trrfiv T}fj.epav (quotidie, each day, every day, general) TotaOro opav re /cal aitovfiv, X. C. 4. 2, 12. *A fKaffry y Xt/cta irposrzTOKTai TroteTv, 8ir]yT)(r6iJ.(&a, X. Cy. 1.2, 5. Tvpavvovv- TOI inrb SfKa avSpcav, ovs AvffavSpos /careVrTjo'ej' ev e/catTTT? IT 6 A e t, H. 3. 5, 13 ; but "O Tt av ev T rj 7 77 e K a cr r 77 Ka\bv f) aya&bv rj, fj.e/ji.ff)(ro]/Tai, in every single land, Cy. 8. 6, 6. Kal fjyf/jihv pfv 3\v 6 Seo-Tr^TTjs fitdffTi)s rijs oiiclas, An. 7. 4, 14. 7. When c/carepo?, each of two, a/* and a/x^orepos, both, belong to a substantive, the article is always used, since here $ 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 327 only two knt)u'n, therefore definite objects can be spoken of. The article is here placed according to $ 245, 3 (b). 'Eirl T tav ir\fvpuv 4 K ar tpctfp, X. An. 3. 2, 36, or or} I KO.T t pv. Ta wra ikp.6r tpa. or afira. 'A/n^oiv -rotv XpoIV or ToiV x f P*" butyo'iv. Ko&' iKarepov rbv IsirKovv, Th. 4,14. Ty url iicarepu, X. Ven. 5, 32. 8. In respect to the pronoun avros and the indefinite pronouns or numerals aXXo?, crepos, TroAv?, TrXeiwv, TrActo-ros, the following points are to be observed : (a) 'O avr6s signifies the same, idem, e. g. 6 avrbs avbpviros, idem homo ; rail- r 6, the same ; but 6 HvbpuTros a.vr6s or avrbs & avbpwiros, homo IPSE. (b) *AA.\os = alius, another, in contrast with ipse (avr6s) ; & &\\os = reliquus, the other ; ol a\Xoi = reliqui, certeri, the rest, e. g. ij &\\rj "EAXas, reliqua Graecia, the rest of Greece, in contrast with some part before named ; ol &\\ot &v&pt\ot, Ariaeus and the rest. But 'O T\ovs &rev cx ovv iroXf/jiiwv rb fjLtv iro\v ffJLfvcv, p.cpos b" av- ruv airfivra rots Kara ra a/cpa (most of the enemy remained), X. An. 4. 6, 24. What is true of the Positive, is true also of the Comparative and Superlative. 'Eov i\ovs f) ir6\iv w ^ T ?7 KOMia, R. L. 9, 2; of irAefovsorTO TT \ e o y signifies the majority in opposition to the minority (of c?Aacr- o"ous), therefore a definite whole; of ir\e7cn 01, the most, TO TT \f1a-rov, the greatest part, also to be considered as a definite whole. Or, (2) iro A us is joined with the substantive having the article, and is placed according to 245, 3 (b) ; TroAvs is then to be taken in a predicative sense, e. g. 'ETTC! ec6pa TroAAa TO K pea (when he saw the flesh that it was much, the flesh in great abundance), X. Cy. 1.3,6. 2kn iro AA& ret &iropa |ujU]8e)8TjKOTa (sc. op&vres), Th. 1, 52. IIoA- A^v T^JI/ alriav flx ov (they had censure in great abundance, i. e. were very severely censured), 6, 46. (d) 'O \lyoi, few, e. g. oAfyot Sv^panrot ; of o At 701, fAe /ew, i. e. either the few mentioned, or to be considered as a definite whole, viz., emphatically the Oligarchy, considered as a whole, in opposition to of iroAAof, e.g. IlpeV^ets of MTJ\IOI Trobs fjiev TO TTATJ&OS OVK tfyo.'yoi', eV 8e rats apxais Kal rots 6\lyois Xtyeiv ^eAcuov, Th. 5, 84 ; but when only an indefinite idea is expressed by the word oAiyos, the article is omitted, e. g. UpoSofrrjvai r^v iro\iv VTT' bxlytav (by oligarcJis, not by the Oligarchs). 9. When a cardinal number belongs to a substantive, the article is omitted, if the idea expressed by the substantive is indefinite, e. g. r/ms avSpes yXSov ; but the substantive takes the article which is placed : (a) according to $ 245, 3 (a), when the substantive with which the numeral agrees, contains the idea of a united whole; hence also, when the number of objects is to be represented as a sum-total, after the prepositions a^i, Trept, ets, vTTtp ; but the article is here used most frequently, when a preceding substantive with a cardinal number agreeing with it, and without the article, is referred to. Of T>V jScwnAeW oiVo%^ot 5i86aid\riv (aith the three fingers, i. e. the three generally used), X. Cy. 1. 3, 8. "^Hi/, oVe cTeAcuro, afj.(f>l TO irivT^Kovra HT?) (he had reached about the sum of fifty years), X. An. 2. 6, 15. 'Iinrffs els rovs rerpaKisx i^iovs crweAe- yovro camp, KOI ToloVat els TOVS pvpiovs, Cy. 3. 2, 3. Tots KepKvpaiois T&V ve>v ov Trapovtrav (referring to the preceding words of KepKupaioi vav(T\v avrovs rpefyap.evoi, Th. 1, 49). ((3) But the article is placed according to 245, 3 (b), when the numeral without any emphasis, is joined with the definite object, merely to define it more definitely, and when the nu- meral had not been previously mentioned, e. g. *E/mxravro ot //.era Kept/cAto^s OTrXtrat ^tAtot or ^tAiot ot /xera II. OTrXtrat, the hoplites with Pericles, a thousand in number, fought. $ 247.] ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN. 329 I,'I:M. ;{. The article is frequently omitted with substantives which hnve an onliiiiil number joined witli them, as tin- ordinal in u measure supplies the place <>f the article-. Tplroy TOJ ry iro\(fj.c,> tTt\tvra (lie. died the third i/(or), Th. L'. KIM. (,'omp. ;{. i>5, 88. $-'17. The Article as a Demonstrative and Relative Pronoun. 1. The article 6 77 r6 had originally the sense both of a demonstrative and relative pronoun. i'. In the Homeric poems, the pronoun 6 rj r6 has almost wholly the sense both of a substantive and adjective demonstrative pronoun, which refers to an object, and represents it as known or already spoken of, or brings it before the mind of the hearer, e. g. II. o, 12. 6 (he) yap $\&e boas tirl /7)as 'Axouwv. 29. r)) v (her) 6" fyeu ov \\xrv yepas o, 185. Tb (rbv /j.fi/os a, 207 ; so it is used in case of apposition, e. g. Od. A, 298. Kal AT^STJV elSoj/ T^U TuvSopeou irapaKoiTtv. Od. |, 61. avaKTes ol vfoi; further, "Ajriryes ot irepl Sicppov, II. A, 535. 'A.v$pu>i> TUV r6re i, 559. Ttels ol AoAt'oco, Od. at, 497 ; also with the demonstrative, a! KVVCS oTSe T, 372 ; it also takes the place of the possessive pronoun, e. g. II. A, 142. vvv p.fv Sfy rov irar pb s act/ceo Tttrere \W&T)V (of your father), and denotes what belongs to an object, e. g. Od. o, 218. 4yKOxe\ croupot, vyt p.f\aivri (the reuxf<* belonging to the ship). 3. The use of the article as a demonstrative adjective, is not unfrequent in all the post-Homeric writers ($ 244, 6) ; but as a demonstrative substantive pronoun, it was retained, in certain cases, through every period of the language ; thus : (a) Tb Sf (id autem, or on the contrary), very frequently at the beginning of a sentence; 6 p4v (is quidem), 6 5e (is autem), ol 5e' (ri autem) very fre- quently at the beginning of a sentence; irpb rov (irporov). formerly ; often Kal r6v, T-f)t/, et eum, et earn, at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. Kal rbv Kt \fvcrat Sovvat. In connection with KOJ, the Greek says in the Norn. : /cat os, Kal ?}, Kal ot ( 334), but in the Ace. Kal rbv, Kal TTJI/; seldom TO* ye, id quidem, TO?, idr-o, and the like. (b) In such phrases as, rbv Kal r6v, TO Kal r6, this man and that man, this thiny and that tltlni] ; ra Kal rd f varia, bona et mala. (c) It is used immediately before a sentence introduced by 8s, oo*os or ofos, which sentence expresses periphrastically the force of an adjective, or 28* 330 SYNTAX. [ 248. especially, an abstract idea. This usage is confined mostly to Plato. PL Phaedon. 75, b. opeyerai TO v '6 tarty 1v, Off ai irepl Tavrd flei, TO az&o? S-aXXe^. But the active form has a two-fold signification : (a) Transitive, when the object to which the action is directed, is in the Ace., and therefore appears as pas- sive or as receiving' the action, e. g. TUTTTW TOV TralBa, ypdla, fiabifa el? rr)v iroKiv, Intransitive verb. (2) Or the subject performs an action which is confined to, or is reflected upon itself, e. g. Tvirrofjiai, I strike MY- SELF ; /3ov\evo/jLai,, I advise MYSELF, or / deliberate ; TUTTTO- fiau TTJV K(j)a\TJv, I strike MY OWN head; Karacrrpe^ofiat, rrjv yrjv, I subjugate the land for MYSELF ; a^vo^ai row $249.] CLASSES OF VERBS. - ACTIVE FORM. 331 ou9, I keep off the enemy from MYSELF, Middle or Reflex- ive verb. Hi MARK 1. When the ivllrxive action is performed by two or more subjects on ruch other, as Tinrrorrat, they strike each othrr ; StaKt\fvoi>Tcu, they exhort each other, it is called a reciprocal action, and the verb, Reciprocal verb. (3) Or the subject appears as receiving' the action, i. e. the action is performed upon the subject, e. g. Ol o-rpancoTai, VTTO TWV 7ro\e/jLicov ou)')fi'r)o~av, were pursued, Passive verb. REM. 2. The Act. and Mid. have complete forms. For the Pass., the Greek has only two tenses: the Fut. and Aor. All the other passive forms are indicated by the Mid., since the passive action was considered as a reflexive one. REMABKS ON THE CLASSES OF VERBS. $ 249. A. Active Form. 1. Many active verbs, especially such as express motion, besides a transitive signification, have an intransitive or reflex- ive sense. (So in English, as he leads, the birds move, the car- riage breaks, the snow melts, which have also a transitive sense ; so the Lat. vertere, mutare, declinare, etc.) irora/jLOs 4s&d\\fi ts r V A./wrfj/, Th. 1 , 46. 'H B6\fa \((J.VT\ /, administrari, e. g. WAts oiyce? (the state is managed), Plat. T e A. e v r a v, to end, to die. Karopbovv, to succeed. Nt/cSy, to prevail, e. g. tviKa i) x e 'P COI/ ^^ yv(a{j.f(av (like vincit sententia), Her. 6, 109. 'E A. A e ITT e t >, o^cz'o swo rfeesse ; aTroAetTreiv, to remain behind, etc. 2. Several active verbs with a transitive signification, which form both Aorists, have in the first Aor. a transitive, but in the second Aor. an intransitive sense : Svco, to wrap up, first Aor. eSi/x a > I have opened, " aveyya, I stand open (* 187, 6), Trpdrrca, to do. irfirpaxa, I have done, " Trcirpaya (sc. u), / Moreover some second Perfects of transitive verbs, which do not form a first Perf, have an intransitive sense : , to break, second Pf. eaya, lam broken, i, to tear, ' : Zpp vtirre iv, ye iv vv 6 r ivos, to be accused by some one of impiety. E5, KCLKUS it IT 6 , ira&tveiv (comp.Pl. Prot.320, a. 324, d. Menon. 94, b). 250. B. Middle Form. 1. The Mid. denotes an action, which is performed by the subject, and is again reflected upon it or is confined to it. Two cases are here to be distinguished : (a) The Mid. denotes, first and most frequently, an action which the subject performs upon an object within its own sphere, i. e. upon an object belonging to the subject, connected with it, or standing in any near relation to it. In English, this relation of the Middle voice is expressed by a possessive pro- noun, or by the preposition to or for with a personal pronoun. , fTv^dfj.-r]v rr?v Ke^oA^i/, 7 strike, I struck my own head (rfarrtiv K., to strike the head of another) ; \ovaa suam vestem, to rend one's own garment (irfpipprftcu, alius, that of another) : irapa to give something from one's own means, to furnish of one's self, as voDs, hence also to show, e. g. f&voiav Trapx ecr & ai ( on * no contrary irapt'xeiv nj/l Trpcry.uara, (pSfiov, etc., to cause trouble, fear, etc., to some one); airoSfi^aff^ai TJ, c. g. fpyov, yvu>(j.rii>, Svva/jiiv, to show one's own work, etc. ; tirayyti\ac|a6/j.ovs e&e;/To; '7^ fjikv f$eo\>s ol/j.ai robs v6povs rovrovs rots avfrpwirois freww, X. C. 4. 4, 19; *ap.vva.(r&ai TOUS iroAe- fjiiovs, propulsare a se hostes, hence to defend one's self against any one (d/xtWii/, properly to ward off", then to help) ; rifjLup^ffaa^ai TI, to revenge one's self on some one, to punish him (T ifj.cape7i/ TIVI, to help one) : Tpfyacrbat, to put to flight; aircao-aff- bai KO.KO., a se propulsare mala ; a.iroTrep\iaff8ra( Tiva, a se dimittere ; a.iroffeiav\d acrbat, to be on one's guard, to be cautious (but v\drrtiv rtvd, to guard some one) ; tyijtyl- i, to determine or decree by vote (but ifaQlfcit/y to put the vote) ; /SouAeu- i, to deliberate, to advise one's self (but fiovXivftv Tivt, to advise some one) ; i, to taste (yweiv, to cause to taste, to give a taste of) ; ri^wp^ffaff- & a i, to avenge ; the reciprocals StaKaraXvffaff&ai irp6s riva, to be reconciled to any one ; trvvbta&ai, to bind one's self, to agree with any one ; fftrfiffaff&at, to make a treaty, peace with; atroffx^ ff ^ al ^ t restrain one's self, to abstain from; several compounds of frj/it, e.g. ififff&at, to strive; ixplevbai, to yield, be remiss ; /u e & f e cr & o t, to neglect, be remiss ; CLVT iir oiT]ffaff&ai rivas, to strive for something; avri\a&4a& at rivds, to lay hold of something. Here belong, also, most Deponent Middle verbs ($ 197, Rem. 2). REMARK 1. This immediate reflexive relation is expressed also: (a)^by middle verbs with a Pass. Aor., e. g. StoAiW, to separate, SioAu&rji'ai, $ia\vtrtff&ai, to separate one's self discedere (see 197, Rem. 3); (b) by the active form, e. g. fieTajSoAAeip, to change one's self (see 249. 1 ) ; (c) by the active form with the Ace. of the reflexive pronoun, e. g. liraivfiv faurov, avaprav faur6v, to attach one's self to, to make one's self depend on any one ; airoKpinrTtiv tam6v, e^i^tiv tavr6t/ t irap(x ftv fourJi/, airo\vfiv (avrov, to free one's self, airofftyaTTfiv eaurov, airoKrfi- vfiv *avr6v ; the Mid. then has the signification of the Pass. ; thus, liraivfia\ayyas pridp.fvoL (in sttu/n commodum) K\tffir)ffi fjuyrif+fvat. Hence the reflexive pronoun is not seldom used with the middle', particularly in antitheses, in order to bring out emphatically the reflexive sense which exists in the middle only in a general and indefinite manner, e. g. a,vt> 336 SYNTAX. [$ 251. ftovXeverai eourw ovo/j.a Kai ovva.ij.iv TT e p nroi-fi, to be a manager, Ta(j.ifvo/u.ai, to conduct business, to arrange, especially in a metaphorical sense, e. g. rovs v6/j.ovs ; a-Tparfvu, to undertake an expedition, used of a general or a state, (TTpa.Tfvofji.ai, to engage in an expedition, used of the soldiers. Derivatives in -l&fuu correspond in sense to those in -evofj.cu, e. g. ctcrTetfouat, to demean my- self as a citizen ; ^ap/evT/^b/tiat, to act in an agreeable manner. Still, derivatives in -ifa, from names of nations, reject the middle, e. g. Sapifa, to demean myself or to speak like a Dorian. REM. 5. Several verbs which in the active have a causative sense, in the middle have a simple intransitive sense, though some of them are constructed with an Ace., e. g. (popTjecu, to cause to fear, f(r&aL and Upecr&cu, to inquire; airoKpivecr&ai and aTra/ieijSetr&a:, to answer; ffvpftovXtv- ((r&at, to consult ivith one, ask his advice, and a.va.K.oivovff&a.ij to consult one (O.VO.KOIVOVI> being especially used of consulting oracles). $ 251. C. The Passive. I. From the reflexive signification of the Middle, the Passive is derived. Here the subject receives the action from another upon itself, permits the action to be performed upon itself. Hence the subject always appears as a passive or suffering object. $251.] CLASSES OF VERBS. - THE PASSIVE. 337 Maffriyov/j.at, ^fuovfiai (inr6 TWOS), I receive Wows, punishment, I let myself be k, punished = I am stnirk, /ni>ii.fi Kta\v- ffovrai, Th. 1, 142. "Hv TIS /3ov\-r)frf) KOK^S yfvfa&cu, Ko\aff&r)v o~povpi(i)v, &s irifiov\evo-ofj.ei' v \ d e r a i inrb TU>V v. OVK ayvoovvrfs, on tvftipfvffoivTo VTTO ruv TroAe/utcoj/, H. 7. 2, 18. Very commonly a 8 1 K 4\ ff o /j. a i, tipl-opai (from &px<, impero), ft\d\j/o- fi.ai, ^pV^o/iot. So always a\u>(To/j.ai. Some verbs have both forms of the future, as, e. g. u o i \}/v- , they had deprived each other of life. PI. Phaedr. 244, e. T$ op&us IMVCVTI KO! ), "in fine frenzy " and in ecstasy. REM. 3. It has been shown, 197, and Rem. 3 (comp. 250, Rem. 1), that the Aor. Pass, of very many verbs is employed by the Greeks to denote a reflexive and intransitive action, c. g. fiov\o/j.ai, I u-ill, c^ovA^^rji/, / willed ; evcppatvca, T gladden, cheer. evpatvo/j.ai, I am glad, ev

x^T]a-ay. Instead of faro, irp6s with the Gen. is used, when at the same time a strong and direct influence of a person, or of a thing viewed as a person, is to be expressed, e. g. \A.TV Tr6\ewv,~X. 0. 4, 2; also irapd with the Gen. is used, when the author is at the same time to be represented as the person from near whom, or from whose vicinity, or through whose means internal or outward, the action has proceeded ; hence used specially with W/*- irfff&ai, SiSocr&eu, a>os, Lach. 184, e. When the passive condition is not caused by persons, but by things, the Dat. is commonly used (= Lat. Ablative), e. g. 'H v6\is TTO \\aTs opo?s e'lrie'^eTo, the city was distressed by great misfortunes. The above usage corresponds with that of the Latin, the voluntary agent with a passive verb being put in the Abl. with the preposition a or a&, the involuntary agent in the Abl. without a preposition. REM. 5. The Dat. of persons, however, is very often used, particularly with the Perf. tense, and regularly with verbal adjectives. The Pass, has in such instances an intransitive or reflexive sense, and the Dat. indicates the person by whom the action was performed, or for whom it was performed. While viro with the Gen. denotes merely the author of the passive action, the Dat., at the same time, denotes that this action stands in relation to the author, e. g. "fly fioi irpSrepov 8e7]A.a>Tc, i. e. as the thing has been before pointed out by me, and for me now stands as pointed out, Her. 6, 123. 4. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that the Act, not merely of transitive verbs with the Ace., may be changed into the per- sonal Pass., like the Latin, but also the Act. of intransitive verbs with the Gen. and Dat. inr6 TWOS (from q&ovelv TU>I, invidere alicui), i. e. I experience envy from some one, am envied (in Latin, on the contrary, invidetur mihi ab aliquo). X. Conv. 4, 29. Kpetrr&v eVri ir icrr ev evSrai virb TTJS irarplSos fj.a\\ov, t) OTT i-ai(av eir ifto v Ae v6fj.&a (e'TnjSouAevew rivi). "PI. Up. 3. 417, b. Kal eTajSouAeiWres, Kal eiril3ov\v6iJ.evoi $idovV fiiov. 8. 551, a. cur/cerTou 8)7 rb ael Ti/j.w/j.fvoi', a/J.e\e7rai 8e rb a.Tt/j.atyfjievoi'. X. S. 4, 31. OVKGTI oTre t\ov pat, a\\' tfSr) a7rejAft> &\\ois. So apx&Tji/o., Kpar-rj- Syvai, y'ye/j.ovfv&rivai, KarcKppovrj&rivai vir6 TWOS (from &pxfiv, ttpa- ve'ii', yyefj-ovcveiv, KaTcuppovc'iv TWOS), fir ix 6 'P 7 ?&r) l/at (from tirix*iptiv TWI). On K6TTTO/JMI T^]V /ce^aA.Tjj', firiTp(Trofj.ai T}\V (f>v\aK-f)v, see 281, 3. REM. 6. The Greek may form a Pass, from other intransitives also, yet, for the most part, only when the subject is a thing, particularly a Neut. pronoun, or a Part. used as a Neut. substantive, e. g. Kal fj.iKpa ay.apTn&4vTa (vel parva peccata), X. An. 5. 8, 20. 'ATux^freVrcuJ' (rerum infeliciter gestarum), Dem. Cor. 298. 212. 'ETT! Tofaois eyw a.\fi^fvofj.fvois SfS'w^ fy>< iro\\uv lt.pt- rij K ivtivvfVfffbai (in /wr/r////w rocuri), Til. 2,35. Ou fatiov ^a. inrb iroAAwi' ixp' ivbs pT)$?ivai, Lys. 5, 1 1J. $252. Remarks on the Deponents. It has been seen above ( 102, 3) that Deponents are simply verbs which occur either in the Mid. only, or in the Mid. with a Pass. Aor., and have a reflexive or intransitive signification ; and, also, that they are divided into Mid. or Pass. Deponents, according as their Aor. has a Mid. or Pass. form. The reflexive sense of many Deponents is so slight, that they seem to be, in our mode of regarding them, merely transitive verbs, e. g. Sexo/J.al n, I take (namely, to viysflf) something, tpyd&nai n, fitvpbr)vai y to be lamented; O.K tff aoi/j.i, scriberem; (c) The Pluperfect : (a) Indicative, e.g. eyeypdQeiv, scripseram; (ft) Optative, e. g. ycypdQoifju, scripsissem ; (d) The Optative of the simple Future, e. g. ypdfyot/j.i, I would write, and of the Fut. Perf., e. g. /Se/SouAeucrofytrji/, I would have deliberated, or I would have been advised, when in narration (and consequently in reference to the past), the representation of a future action, or of one to be completed at a future time, is to be expressed, e. g. 6 &yye\os eteyev, '6ri ol iro\ffj.iot vncf)ffoiv, the messenger said, that the enemy WOULD conquer ; eXeyev, 'dn irdvra urrb rov ffrpaTyyov e5 /3e)3ouA.eu(roiTo, he said that everything WOULD be well planned by the general. $255. (a) Principal Tenses: Present, Perfect, Future. 1. The Present Indicative represents the action as taking place in time present to the speaker. The Present is often used, in the narration of past events, for the purpose of a more vivid and graphic representation ; past time is then viewed as present. This is called the Historical Present. $ 255.] PRINCIPAL TENSES. 341 Tavn)v r^v rdfypov f3affi\vs ptyas iroicT ami tpvparos, tiretty irvvbavtrai Kvpov -irpost\avvoma, X. An. 1. 7, 16. T Hi/ ris Upiap&iav vturaros Tlo\vSwpos t 'Endfiris irais, bv IK Tpoias 4/j.ol irar^p SiStaffi Hpia.fj.os Iv 86/j.ois rpftyfit,-, Kur. Hoc. 1116. The Hist. Pres. is sometimes used even in passages which in them- si-lvi's, aside from adverbs like irore, Trd\ai (poet, irdpos), are considered as involving past time, c. g. Zwvr' dsoKovaras irditia, t>v tir(i TOT*', Eur. El. 419. KKMARK 1. An action is often viewed by the language as present, which belongs, indeed, to the past, but at the same time extends to the present, or ia its results reaches to the present. In this manner, the following verbs particu- larly are used: (a) verbs of perceiving, e. g. OKOVW, irvv&dvofiai, altr&d- vonai, yiyvuxTKu, pavbdvu (like Lat. audio, video, etc., and Eng. to hear, to see, to perceive, to observe), when the object of these verbs is to be represented as .-till continuing in the present; (b) (lam dead, have died, S. El. 113), rlKru, yevvu (I am a father or mother, Eur. Ion. 356. Her. 209), etc. This usage extends to all the Modes and Participials of the Prcs. as well as to the Impf. e^urroKAea OVK a/covets avtipa aya&bv yfyov6ra; PI. Gorg. 503, c. HoWa irvv&avo /JLCVOS o Kpowos fire/jure e's 'S.irdp- TI\V ayy(\ov5 y Her. 1, 69. Tf 8e ; tri; tKfTfo d/c^/coos, '6n Mv, hast thou heard? dwouw, yes, I have known of it, X. C. 3. 5, 26. 'AirayyeA.eTf ^Apiaiia, OTI V]/j.f?s 76 t/iKu/nev a v r u v iar\ ai ra kamuv fiv /cat TO tStv ^rrufjLfvtav Aaju)3a^tj/, 3. 2, 39. Aapiov Kal TlapuffdriSos irai8es ylyvovra.1 Svo, 1. 1, 1. HEM. 2. OfxM at an d ^KW, with Pres. forms, are often translated in Eng. by Perfects, namely, otxf- a ^ I have departed, and $}/c, I have come; yet oVx<>M, X. Cy. 1. 3, 14 (5/5a>/ii, / offer). "E/cacrnk TIS Zirfibci' ZevoQuvra {nroffrrivai r^v apx^v (persuadere studebat), X. An. 6. 1, 19, MiTuA^valbi M M-iiStvfjivav is irpoS 1 8o/j.f vt\v Iffrpdreuffav (putantes parari ibi proditionem), Th. 3, 18. In like manner often the PITS. Part, after verbs of motion, e. g. 'H vdpaXos (s ras 'A^i/as eir\fv(rcv, airayyc A \ov(ra TO ytyovtra (for tkepvnOj^ of announcing) . X. H. 2. 1, 29. Kai re? ptyet O.TTW A A u/ie^a, Kal X'^y TrAetVTTj fiv (ire atpetted tn pi-fish), An. 5. 8, 2. OVK tv&vs a5cwv Kvpov, X. Cy. 1.3, 13. 29* 342 SYNTAX. [ 255. REM. 4. But also actions or events wholly future are sometimes indicated as present, by the use of the Pres. tense, when in the view of the speaker the action or event yet future is vividly apprehended, or when he is so firmly convinced of its occurrence, that it appears already present, e. g. 5 Ej/ piS. fj,dxp T7|i/5e r^v x^P av T pos KTaafr e /cat &ctinjv jUaAAov eAeufrepoGre (you, gain, vj'dl gain, and free], Th. 4, 95. "Hi/ Savris Wes, those who died, are dead); /ceVr^ai (I have acquired), I possess; Te^ou^ovo (I have been wondering), I am astonished; (I have taken counsel with myself), lam determined; v^i\va. (I have shown myself), I appear ; o?8o, novi (I have seen), 7 know ; re&ri\a (I have blossomed),/ bloom; ireVot^o (I have convinced myself), I trust; 0e&i]Ka (I have taken steps), 7 am going; fj.f/j.vn/j.ai, memini (I have called to mind), / am mindful, or remember; /ce'/cAT/^uai (I have been named), / am called, etc. The Pres. and Impf. of many verbs, especially such as express the idea of to sound, to call, are not used at all, or but very seldom, so that the Perf. and Plup. seem to take entirely the place of the Pres. and Impf., e. g. /ce'/cpaya, I cry, properly, / am a crier ; fj.ffj.vKa, I roar. REM. 6. The transition from the completed action to the condition or state produced by it, is more obvious in the Pass, than in the active. Comp. f/ &vpa K(K\eiffTat, the door has been shut, and it is NOW SHUT. So particularly the third Pers. Sing. Perf. Imp. Pass, is often used, when one would command with emphasis, that the thing spoken of should remain fixed and permanent in its condition, i. e. not only that the action should be performed, but particularly that the result should continue, e. g. rb ayKvpiov avecrxdo-bca, let the anchor be drawn up and remain so ; AcAefydco, reliqmnn eslo. let it remain permanently ; ireTrei- pdcr&ca, let it be tried ; vvv 8e TOVTO TeroA^o-^o) flire'tv. So the Inf. in the Oratio obliqua, X. H. 5. 4, 7. QIOVTGS Se flirov, T^V bvpav KeKMlfffrai, that it be shut, and remain shut. REM. 7. The Perf. is used with special emphasis, even of future actions, the occurrence of these being affirmed with the same definiteness and confidence, as if they had already taken place. II. o, 128. Siecp&opas! you are lost, will be $ 255.] PRINCIPAL TENSES. 343 lost. So tfXa>Aa, like ;wnY, infv rois u.tv aya&ois eWtjuos K irapa\va.rfi\os rjfjuv ovSels AeAef^eTcu (no friend will [CERTAINLY] be left tis), X. An. 2. 4, 5. So also in the Inf. Avoiv % rpicav rj/j.fp&i' TOUTO IT fir pdftr &ai, Dem. 19, 74. In the Act. the periphrasis 0e&ov\evKws eo-o^uat is found. REM. 9. The Fut. Perf. is used in Greek only in principal clauses, and in subordinate clauses introduced by on and us (that), by e I used instead of O'TZ, and by &ST6 (so that), all with the Ind. In all other subordinate clauses, the Aor. Subj. (more seldom the Perf.) is used instead of it, in connection with a conjunction compounded of &i>, as cdu, eirdv, eireiSdv, OTCU/, irpiv &/, esr' &v, t>$ &v t etc., e. g. 'Ecif TOVTO Ae ?? s (si hoc dixeris), a^ $256. (b) Historical Tenses: Aorist, Imperfect, and Plup e rfe c t . 1. The Aorist (Ind.) expresses past time, in a wholly indefi- nite manner, with no other relation, e. g. eypai/^a, I wrote,- Kv/oos TroAAa ZSvr) IviKfjo-ev. It thus stands in contrast with the other tenses which express past time ; still, so far as it indicates past time indefinitely, it may be used instead of either of these tenses. 2. Both the Impf. and Plup. (Ind.) represent an action as past, but always as having relation to another past action. But the Impf. expresses the action as contemporary with this other past action ; the Plup. expresses the action as already past before this other past action. $256.] HISTORICAL TENSES. 345 'Eif $ av drat C< J, ^yw typao v, while you were jihiyinrf. I MY;.-,- vrithnj. "Ort ^771/5 ^o-av 01 &dpfrn>oi, ol"E\\ijvfS i^dxovro. "Ore ot &dp0apot be I'.ycypds(p($pos e?, 228. Tovs ire\raffTas ^Sf^ai/ro ol fidpfiapoi KoH f^a-xovro- firtl 8' lyyvs fiffa.v ol 6Tr\1rai, trpd-rrovTO' Kal ol irfXraffral eu&i/s t'Lirovro (tlie barbarians withstood the peltasts and continued to fight with them; but ichen the hoplites drew near, they fled, and immediately the peltasts set out in pursuit), X. An. 5. 4, 24. Euve'^Tj T$ a5oK"<7Tvvnov Kfpas OUTOJV, oirep 8)7 /cat irpo/cex^P^fet, cv&vs inroppayev $fiv, fv&vs (pevywv, /cal /caTaATj^eis inrb MvpKiviov TT\Tao~Tov, airo&vf)o-Kfi' ol 8 avrov vo~Tpa pr) Kfv T)fJ.as, Isocr. Pac. 163, a. (The Perfects denote the result, the Aorist the event.) Kern. 2. Inasmuch sis the Aor. Ind. represents a past action independently and absolutely, iincon iccted with any other past time, while the Impf. Ind. represents a past action as always connected with another past action, being, 346 SYNTAX. [$ 256. consequently, employed in exhibiting an action in its duration and progress, and hence used in description ; accordingly the Aor. expresses a moment or point of time, while the Impf., denotes duration or continuance. The Aor. therefore describes a momentary action or a single action ; the action, however, described by the Aor. may be a continued or protracted one, but the Avriter in using the Aor. presents no such view of it, communicating merely the fact of the occur- rence. The Impf., on the other hand, describes an action in its continuance and progress, not merely a single act, but a series of acts. It often depends on the choice of the writer whether the Impf. or Aor. is used. An action graphi- cally presented in its duration and progress by the Impf., can be stated histor- ically as a mere past act, by the Aor. And so, many actions stated in the Aor. might be more vividly described by the Impf., if the writer wished it. 4. On the use of the Impf. and Aor. Ind., the following things are to be noted : (a) The Impf. appears sometimes to stand instead of the Pres., since an action which continues into the present time, is referred to a past time in which it occurred, or was known to the speaker. Kvpos ej-f\a6vei tirl riv Xd\ov iroTau.6v, OVTO. rb evpos ir\f&pov, irATjpTj 8' lx&v(av /j.eyd\cay Kal irpaeow, ovs ol ~2,vpoi &eoi>s fv6fj.i^ov Kal aStKf'iy OVK fttav (which the Syrians CONSIDER as gods, namely, as I then saw), X. An. 1. 4, 9. 'A^/KOVTO Trpbs rb MTjStas Te?xos O7re?%e Se BajSuA.dJj'os ov iro\v, 2. 4, 12. Tj; Se Trpiarr) ^uepot cupi tirl rbj/ TroTcyxdj/, os &pie ii]V re ra>v Ma 4. 8, 1. 'Ara/j, & troupe, ap' ov r6fie i\v rb Sevopov, e^>' oircp tfyes rj/j-as ; PI. Phaedr. 230, a. OVK &p aya&bs TO TTOXITIKO. UepiK\rls 3\v e/c TOVTOV TOV \6yov (namely, when he so appeared to us, consequently = OVK &p aya&6s fo/3e?, Kal ae/A.eTo V(KI\V pTj'fiias (who inspires the brave man with fear, and bears off the victory). X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. al p\v yap irKtiffTai ir6\fis irposTdrrovffi TO?S iroXlrais /j.)) K\eirTfiy, ^ apirdCfiv, Kal ra\\a TO, roiavra wsavrcas' $v Se TIS rovrcav TI irapafiaivr) , Cw' 05 avTo"is fire&effav (were accustomed to impose a penalty upon them). Dem. Ol. 1(2). 20, 9. '6rav IK ir\foveias Kal irovrjptas ris, fasirfp OVTOS ($i teal fjLiKpbi/ TTTaiviJLa avcana turfxainae Kal $ 256.] HISTORICAL TENSES. 347 I;IM.:>. Wlu-n tin- idea of Ix-inif trout to do, as found in tho Anr., is to be in;nlc promim-m, or when a mil in' lil>it \< to l>e exjuv-M-d. tin; lircek uses the ij>t\tw and ^f'Ativ. Her. 7. 10, 5. iA^e ybp & &tbs ri \nrtptxotna. trdma 157. T

xp<$s re H.LV el\e irapetds us avris KC&' op.i\ov IfSu Tpuuv aytpuxuv (sc. Flapis). II. IT, 482. ijpiirf 8', us ore ns 5pvs tfpnrtv. (d) The Tragedians often use the Aor. in dialogue as an impassioned or emphatic expression of a decision or determination, which has respect, indeed, to the present time, but which the speaker wishes to represent as having been previously established and settled in his own mind. The English often trans- lates such Aorists, in a very imperfect manner, by the Pres. Here belong especially verbs expressing strong feeling or passion, e.g. airfirrvffa (I do abhor), tyf\a|a, e'&au/ta 5pav bavfiv. Hecuba : aireir- Ti/(ra, this thought I do abhor = a thought ichich I have abhorred. (e) With like effect the Aor. is often used by Attic writers, apparently instead of the Pres. in urgent appeals or commands, expressed in the form of a question introduced byrf olv ov or ri ov. The speaker wishes, as it were, to see the desired action already accomplished. X. Cy. 2. 1, 4. ri ovv, <^j 6 Kvpoy, ov KO! r^v Mvafuv f\eds pot (quin igitur mihi recenses ? why hast thou not yet told me of the forces? instead of tell me forthwith !) 5. 4, 37. ri olv, TJ, u TaSaro, ovxl TO, /.ifv Tfix-r) v\aKy tx v P- ttroirjfras (why therefore have you not made the walls strong by a guard ? = at once make them, etc.) ; PL Phaedon. 86, d. d olv TIS vnuv fviropdrrtpos faou, rl OVK air tup iva.ro ; (is quam celerrime respondeat, let him answer at once). The Pres. is also so used ; yet the expression is then far weaker, e. g. Tl olv, $ 8' fcs, OVK tpur$s; (stronger than tpura, but weaker than Ti olv OVK ijpurfio-as or ^pou;) PL Lysid. 211, d. Ti olv ov ffKOTTOVlJLfy, X. C. 3. 1 , 10. (f ) The Aor., like the Perf. ( 255, Rem. 7) is used, when the speaker confi- dently considers a future event as already taken place. II. S, 160 162. efrrtp ydp T KO! avrlK 'OAu/tTrios OVK trt \fo-fffv, /c re Kal o^ reAel, avv re (j.eyd\ta aiTfT iffav ffvv o-Qrjffiv K(f>a\TJ, I am strong, iffxvffas, having become or been made strong, potens factus (Th. 1,3). Avv-t)- 3" e i s, potentiam nactus. 'A (r&e 1/7)0*01, to have become sick, in morbum incidisse. Kvpos T]ya.ff&T) auroV (VL\ia.pxov), X. An. 1. 1, 9. Cyrus came to admire him, ejus admiratione captus est. 257. Subordinate Modes. I. As the Aorist Indicative expresses a past action as inde- pendent and completed, having no relation to another past ac- tion ; while the Imperfect, always representing a past action in relation to another past, and being used in describing and paint- ing, presents the action in its duration and progress, so the same distinction holds in regard to the subordinate modes of the Aorist and Present : l The subordinate modes of the Aor. (Subj. Opt. and Impr.) together with the Infinitive and Partici- ple, are used, when the speaker wishes to represent the action by itself, as completed ; the subordinate modes of the Present together with the Infinitive and Participle, and also the Imper- fect Opt. are used, when the speaker, considering the perform- ance of the action, wishes to represent it descriptively in its dura- tion and progress. In this way the following modes stand in contrast with each other : (a) The Subjunctive and Optative Aorist with the Subjunctive Present and the Optative Imperfect, e. g. ^vyta^v and ^eirywjuei/, let us flee. With Qvycafj.ev, the idea of fleeing itself is urged and is had in mind; with 4>eu7/xej', I rather have reference to the performance and progress of the action ; the Aor. expresses the action with more energy, as it denotes an instantaneous, momentary act. The same distinction exists "in all the following examples. Ti Troirjo-co/iei/ and iroi&fj.ev , what shall we do? Ae'-yw, 'iva pd^-ps and ft/a pavbavris , ut discas; f\eyov, 'iva patois and ft/a navfrdvois, ut disceres. The Greek Subj. always refers to the future, and hence is never used, as in Latin, of the present and past, e. g. Laudat puerum, quod diligens sit or fuerit, because he is or has been. In subordinate clauses with fcs &v, %av, %Tav, etc. [260. (a)], the Subj. Aor. corresponds with Latin Fut. Perf. (255, Hem. 9). 'Eav TOVTO Xeyys, (si hoc dices or quotiescunque hoc dicis, errabis). 'Eaj/ TOVTO 1 The subordinate modes of the Imperf. are supplied by those of the Pres. f 257.] SUBORDINATE MODES. .>19 \ ri y , apaprriffr) (*i hoc dixeria, if yon shall hare .laid). Comp. the exam- ple under $333, 3. 337. ft. 335>, 2, II. (li). The Impf. ami A or. Opt. has tin- SCUM- of tlu- present or future in clause.* which express n suppti- tion, conjecture, or undetermined possibility, in prose commonly with aV, in hypothetical clauses with ei; the Opt. in this sense is found in clauses denoting a wish, in final clauses, and in direct interrogative clauses, particularly in deliberative questions. Touro pittas b.v ytyvotro or yevoiro, tin's HI it/lit easily be done. See 259, 3 and 6, and 260, 4. Ei rovro \tyois or Ae^eios, a/j.aprdvois or apdprois &v, if you should say this, you would err. See 339, II, (a). EZ^e rovro yiyvoiro or ytvoiro, that this might be! See $ 259, 3. (b). "EAryov, fro Havbdvois or ndbots,utdisceres. See$330,2. Tls roiavra inro\afi- &dvoi or vKo\d&oi; who would suppose such things ? See $ 259, 3, (e ). Owe tlx ov i * 01 Tpfvoiftriv or r pairolfjniv, I knew not what I should do. See $ 259, 2. The following case also belongs here : When tho subordinate clauses in 333, 3. 337, 6. and 339, II, (b), arc made to depend on an historical tense, and the Opt. without &v takes the place of the Subj. with &s &/, '6ra.v, ^7r5af, Hav, etc., the Opt. has a future sense. O&s ttv ISc: ra Ka\a tirirrjo'fvoi'ras, n^crta (quos videro). *E, air4- (pevyov, quotiescunque impetum faciebant). 'Avaftioiis Zteyfis, a t/ce? 15 ot (what he had there seen, a dependent question). Comp. No. 2, (b). (b) The Imperative Aorist with the Imperative Present, e. g. &vye and ipevye, flee. Aos and Sf Sou p.oi TO fiifixiov, give. M)) depute Tre, 8> &vtipfs oAA' tnneivarc pot, ofs eSe^^Tjj/ vfj.u>v, ^i bopv&fiv ty ots &v (the principal fact is here fy/jifivarc, the more definite explanation bopv&eirf) PI. Apol. 30, c. 'EirtiSai/ airavra a.Koii o )8 o v , TOUS 8e yove"ts rlp.a, rovs 8e t\ovs oto"^uj/ou, TO?S Se i/oVots iref^ou, Isocr. Demon. 16. Comp. 259, 4. The Infinitive Aorist with the Infinitive Present, e. g. 'Ede'Aw Qvytlv and (^eu-yttv, / u't'sA to flee. 'lKcu>6s dpi iroiijo~a.i and Troterv rt. ('H yftapyia) naSfii' T ^ao-TT? e'So'/cet Tj/at Koi ^SiWij t pyd fffbai , X. Oec. 6, 9. AipfTwTfp6i' fori KaAws aTTo&ai'erj'jj) ^TJ v cuVxpws, Isocr. Pan. 95. Ou TO ^ A o /3 e T v TO ayada OVTW ye x^^ v -> &strfp TO \a&6rra 30 350 SYNTAX. [$ 257. \vTT-r\p6v, X. Cy. 7. 5, 82. KcAeuw ere SoOi/at and KaAeVay 6 KOpos 'Apdcnrrtv MfjSov, TOI/TOJ/ e/c Aaat OUT< -Hji/ re yt/pcu/ca /cal r^r o"K7jff)i/, X. Cy. 5. 1, 2, with which compare in 3. following: ravrrjv ovv fKf \evo~ev 6 Kvpos 5ia(pv\drrf iv rbv 'Apdffiniv, fees Uv avrbs Aa/ty (to continue to guard, the subordinate clause necessarily implying duration in Sia e'Ke?pat Vlapffvav Kal rb Se'/yia KpffJ.do~ai eV rep avrpca, X. An. 1. 2, 8 (cittern detraxisse suspendisse, to have flayed, and hung up). Comp. No. 2, (c). avjuaarbj' (palverai p.oi rb Treio~&T)vai rtvas, us 2w/cpoT7js TOUS vfovs Sifty&tiptv, X. C. 1. 2, 1 (persuasum esse quibusdam, that certain individuals had been persuaded). Tb fj.e8ffj.lav TWV TroAewv a A c!) v a t 7roAtopta, p.fyiffr6v tcrri fffip.fiov r ov Sia rovrovs TT fiff&fvr as robs *a>Ke'as ravra irofif^?*', Dem. 19,61. (But when by the Ace. with the Inf. with the article, a purpose is expressed, the Inf. Aor. has naturally something of a future relation, e. g. 'Eire/ieA^&Tjy rov SiSao-- Ka\6v fj.ot nva yfvfcr&ai, / took care that I might have some one as a teacher, X. C. 4. 2, 4.) In all other cases the Inf. Aor. has the relation of present time. (d) The Participle of the Aorist with the Participle of the Present ; comp. Ao&e (pvyc&v with \dv&avf tyfvytav. T\.fpifir\v a\\orptaA(rrepoj/ robs olxovs robs v/j.erfpous avriav , Isoc. Nic. 49. ( Comp. 255, Rem. 5.) It has already been stated No. 1. (a) that the Greek Suhj. always refers to the future. (b) The Optative Aorist with the Optative Pluperfect, e. g. Ol "IvSol &.ecu/, tri IT >// te ois, H. 5. 2, 3. In what instances the Opt. Aor. is used of the present or future, and in what of the past, has been stated in No. 1, (a). (c) The Infinitive Aorist with the Infinitive Perfect; comp. airo&a.i'iiv with redirjKeVaJ. Uarpbs Kvpos \4yfrai yevtff&ai \fs X. Cy. 1. 2, 1. Ae-ycrai HvSpa TIVO. ruv tro\vv STJ nva. xp^ov tirl ry /caAAet TOV Kvpov (stood or continued amazed), ib. 1. 4, 27. Comp. 255, Rem. 6. (d) The Aorist Participle with the Perfect Participle ; comp. airobavuiv with , Plut. Aem. Paul. c. 36. extr. Hc/xrcus /Jtei> ex I vtvtKf\- (even tltongh vanquished, in the condition of one vanquished) robs ircuSas, Al/j.i\ios 5e rubs avrov (sc. ira?5as) viK-f)iicf) AeXra KoXovp-fVOv, tv&a. *u\\& 352 SYNTAX. [$ 258. Ka\ aya&a \iityoivro (where they WOULD receive)* X. Cy. 8. 1, 43. eV^eAeTro STTWS (J.-f)Te affiroi, ^re &TTOTOL vrore e e i v , y p a |/ a t (/ am now about to ivrite, intending to write). 'ASvvar oi ei'trti/ cTri/neAe?* e a e or & a i (unable to become and continue careful), X. Oec. 12,12. 'A 5 v v a. T o i elffiv els ein^eAetcu/ ruiv /COT' aypbv epycav , ib. 12, 15. 'ASuyaToi rjfuv '^ (Taer^oi, Her. 6, 58. 'E\iriei paSiws vfj-cis 6|o7raT^(retj/, Dem. 860, 54 (he hopes to deceive you) . 'E \iriS as TrapfX fTal W s fvHaipovas iroiri o-noi T p a TT o ifj. i) v, ncscie- 6am t quo me verterem. Aeyu, 'iv eiSrj s, dico, ut scias, in order that you may know it. y EAea, tV 6 i 8 e i v) s, dixi, ut scires, in order that you might know it. (c) The Imperative denotes the immediate expression of the will, being used in commands, entreaties, etc. 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 353 and ypdQf, iiritr. Bpa8'ws piy $l\os ylyvov, i'tu: I-. I Vm. 7. rpa^dVa* and ypcuptru, lit film irrife ( 257, 1. b). The /,//- 7/r;m/ expressed by tin- Imp. is not always to he understood as a strong com- mand, entreaties, exhortations, and counsels, being also expressed by the Imp. KIM.VRK. The Modes exhibit the relation of an expressed thought to i the mind of the speaker. Hence they denote nothing objective, i.e. they never ' show the ttrtiinl condition of an action; the Ind., in itself, docs not denote something actual; nor the Subj., in itself, something possible; nor the Imp., something necessary; the language represents these ideas by special expres- sions, c. g. iArj&ws, Svvcurbai, 5e?, xtfh ctc - The modes express subjective rela- . tion< M>lely, i. e. the relations to the mind of the speaker, showing how he I conceives of an action. A mental operation is either an act of perception, an i act of supposition or conception, or an act of desire. The Ind. expresses ' an actual perception ; it indicates what the speaker conceives and represents as a real it if. whether an actual, objective fact, or a conception; even the future, which, in itself is something merely imagined, can be conceived by the speaker as a reality, and hence is expressed by the Fut. Ind. The Subj. expresses i a conception ; it indicates what the speaker conceives and represents as a j conci-ption, whether it has an actual objective existence, or is a mere mental ' conception. The Imp. expresses desire; it denotes what the speaker conceives and represents as something desired, whether it be an actual objective necessity $ 259. Use of the Subjunctive, Optative and Im- perative. 1. The Subj. of the Principal tenses, the Pres. and Perf., as well as the Sub. Aor., alway relates io future time [$ 257, 1, (a)], and is used in Principal clauses : (a) In the first Pers. Sing, and PI. in exhortations 1 and warn- ings, where the Eng. uses let, let us, with the infinitive ; the negative is here //.rj. (b) In the first Pers. Sing, and PI. in deliberative 2 questions, wlu-ii the speaker deliberates with himself what he is to do, what it is best to do ; here also the negative is yu,?j. , eamus! let us go, suppose we go! M)j f(afj.ev. "Aye ( 77. eA&w/uei' 8' a.va & TSKVOV, vvv Kal rb TTJS v^aov paSy s, S. Ph. 300. HEM. 2. On the use of the second Pers. Subj. with ^ to express a prohibi- tion, e. g. /*)> ypdtyys, ne scripseris, do not write, see No. 5. HEM. 3. A wish is very seldom expressed by ei&e with the Subj. instead of the Opt. E?&' al&fpos &vo> TTTWKoSes bvr6vov Si^ Trveu/xaros e \oxri fA (o si aves me sursum in aefherem per auras stridentes capiant), S. Ph. 1094 (without varia- tion). Comp. Efd-e rives vval SiKatow fyutfofop eV "Apyet fyavGxri Ttnvoiffiv Eur. Suppl. 1028. E5fi^' O&TXIOI' elSoy aj/rl TOV KaXov AajSw (in some MSS. AajSelj/), Hel. 262. HEM. 4. In the third place, the Subjunctive is somewhat frequently used in principal clauses, in the Epic language, instead of the Fut. Ind., though with a slight difference of meaning. Both express a present conception of a future action ; but the Put. Ind. represents what is still in the future as known and certain in the view of the speaker, while the Subj. represents what is future as merely a concession or admission of something expected. II. , 459. /cot irore TIS eiirr). In tin- jiriiK -iplc Driven in No. 2, the act of supposition or conception hcloni:- to the past, ami this is tin- common use of tin- Opt. (tin- Sulij. of the historical tenses), in subordinate clauses. But the Opt. is also used, when- the act of .-imposition or conception is u present one. When a present conception is expressed by the subjunctive. e. &\\y OJJ.OLOV % (\ov yevoiro (that would scarcely be like or friendly to another, as one would readily admit), PI. Lysid. 214, d. 'AiroAo/ueVTjs 8c TTJS tywxris TOT* ^Srj T^V 304. /urj tutv affTTovSi 76 Kal aAeio)s airo \olfjLrjv, may I not perish ! S. Aj. 550. 2> ircu, yevoio irarpos euTuxeVrepos, TO 8' &\\' '6/j.oios ! KCU yfi/oi Uv ov Kai(6s, may you be more fortunate than your father, but in other things like him! then you ucould not be wicked. X. Cy. 6. 3, 11. 'AAA', 5 Zev /jityiarf, AajScu/ /xoi ytvoiro avrdv, us tyw /3ouAo/u, may I be able to take him. The wish is com- monly introduced by efde, ci yap (in the poets also by et alone). Od. y, 205. t yap (fj.ol Toa-a-rivSe bfol Svva/j.iv irapabf'ict'! X. Cy. 6. 1,38. ei yap yevoLTo! (In poetry us is used like Lat. utinam. Eur. Hipp. 407. &s a TT 6 \ o i r o TrayKOKws ! ) HEM. 6. When a wish is expressed, which the speaker knows cannot be realized, the Ind. of the historical tenses is used, e. g. Et^c TOVTO tyiyvfro ! tfof TOVTO tyevfTo ! utinam hoc fartinn -.s>v-/ .' that this were done, or had been done! So &v virfp- fiaffia Karda-xoi; who could restrain? i.e. who can be supposed to restrain? Arist. Plut. 438. z/a| v A7roAAo tolrjs &v [$ 339, II, (a)J, if you had, you imuld give. (4) The following points in addition arc to be observed respecting the Imp., [$ 258, 1, (c)] : Though the Imp. always refers to time present to the speaker, yet the Greek has several Imp. forms, viz., a Pres., Perf., and Aor. These forms, how- ever, do not express a different relation of time, but only the different condition or circumstances of the predicate. The dif- ference between the Imp. Aor. ypanj/ov and the Pres. ypdfa, has been explained, 257, 1, (b). The Imp. Perf. has always the sense of the Pres., with the accompanying idea of the perma- nence or continuance of the result, e. g. /AC/XVT/O-O, memento, be mindful, remember; y Svpa KKA.io-$w, let the door be shut (and remain shut). See $ 255, Hem. 5. 5. In negative or prohibitive expressions with ^ (ne), the Greek commonly uses only the Pres. Imp., not the Aor. Imp. ; but instead of the Aor. Imp., the Aor. Subjunctive is used. M)j ypdfe or /xrj 7^0^77$ (but neither ^77 ypdfys, nor rf ypd^ov). M^ ypatperu or /*)) ypdtyrj,ne scribito (but neither ^ ypdtpri, nor yu?) ypatydru). M?) pot a.vrl\fye or fjL-f\ fj.oi avTt\(7)s, do not speak against me (but neither ^ avri\4yr)s nor ^ avri\^ov). Isoc. Dem. 24. M r? 8 e v a. uTa> 5wo/xet inroirrfpov fcvyovs TC Kal T]vi6~)(ov (grant that the soul is like, etc.), Phaedr. 246, a. Ae-yc'rco irepi avrov, us (admit that each one speaks of it), Th. 2, 48. 358 SYNTAX. [$ 260. REM. 10. In the interrogative formula of the Attic poets: o!cr& t> Spao-ov,- d!8e, ejf TOI dpeovm, ret ycl> Xt-yw Kanaov T>V Sopvipdpav CTTI irdo"r)jj>cu Tv $ irafil jSi'as OITOT ifferai avSp&i', he would punish. II. f, 267. aAA' ?&', eyh Se we rot KaptrtiM. pinf 6TT\oTepda:v Suxro) oTrvif[j.cvai,dabo,sciLsitibilubuerit. X. Cy. 6. 1,45. vfipurr ty ofiv vofjiifyav avr6v, e3 o?8' '6n Afffifvos tiv Trpbs &v$pa, cilos axpftoi ItrovToi virb TOV ^Kirif\TJx^ ai (& v i s wanting in only two MSS.). $ MC>O.J MODAL ADVERB av. 359 Ki \IVKK 1. With tin- 1'res. and P-'if. Ind.. Avis not u-ed. I'l.r that which the speaker expresses ;is a present objeet, cannot at the same time IM- ex; a^ -('inetliiiiir. the rcali/.ation of which is dependent on another thought. In tho^e pa->a-e-. where av is found with tin- 1'res. or IVrf Ind.. either the reading i> <|iie>tional>le. or av must he referred to another verh of the -ciitenee. e. %. OUK o!5' av (I TTfivaini (instead of ft irtiffcum "K I'' 111 '- Mcd. M~ : so often vofilfa av, 011*01 av and the like followed by an Inf., where av belongs to the Inf.; or it is to he considered as an elliptical mode of expression, as in X. S. 4, 37. tyw Se OVTOO iro\\a tx 6 ** us fj.6\ts avra Kal lyw & v avrbs tupiaitu, I have so main/ t/n'nt/s thut / irith ili (fit-nil ij jind t/<> tit. indi-<-d if 1 should seek for fain myself, I should not find than. Nor is av used with the Imp. For what the speaker expresses as his immediate will, cannot be considered as dependent on a condition. The few passages referred to in proof of the use of av with the Imp., are all, criti- cally considered,, questionable and prove nothing. (2) "Av is used with the Ind. of the historical tenses : the Aor., Iinpf. and PI up. : (a) To denote that something might take place under a cer- tain condition, but did not take place, because the condi- tion was not fulfilled. The condition is then expressed by ct with the Ind. of the historical tenses. Ei TOVTO fatyts ( laetatus fuisses (scil. si hoc vidisses). REM. 2. Here belong also the expressions, ^6u.f\v &v, %yvu ns Hv, rfffbero ris &v, ycrtJ TIS av, and the like, as in Latin, putares, crederes, diceres, cernercs, videres, you (one) would think, or you (one) would have thought. Here ei irapfjj/, ei e\eytv, d eTSfv, fl ^Suj/aro, and the like, as conditioning antecedent clauses, are to be supplied. "Ev&a 8r/ 7^0? TIS b.v TOVS 6/jLorlfj.ovs TreTratSev^-e- vovs, us 5(7 (turn vero videres, then one might see, were he present), X. Cy. 3. 3, 70. y Ei/&a 8?; fyvca ns av, ocrov a^iov etrj tl> v 3*9 360 SYNTAX. [$ 260. _ Lys. 123,3. XPV" Se s eo &e?, Tpos-fjKei, KaA&s ex fl ^ etc -? ls used of things which can yet take place. Comp. possum commemorare, which implies that I still can do the act, and poteram commemorare, which implies that I cannot do it. REM. 6. "Av is very naturally omitted, if in the apodosis there is an Ind. of an historical tense of the verb K i v 8 u v v e i v, to be in danger, to seem, since the verb by itself implies that the action expressed by the Inf. connected with it, did not take place ; for what is only in danger of occurring, actually does not occur. Th. 3, 74. r} ir6\is ^KivSvvevffe iraffa Sia(p^apr)vai, el &ve(j.os eireyevero rfj (p\oyl eirityopos es avr-fjv, the whole city was or would have been in danger of destruction, if. Aeschin. c. Ctes. 515, R. et p.)] Sp6/j.Cf) /n6\is e^e^)vyo^.ev els Ae\(povs, i K ivSv vevffa/JLev eiTroAeVi^at. So if in the apodosis, o \tyov, fjLtKpov, rdxa-i nearly, almost, are joined with the Ind. of a historical tense in the concluding clause ; for what only nearly takes place, actually docs not take place, hence the Ind. without av is appropriate in both these cases. Plat. Symp. p. 198, C. eycaye ev&v/j.ov/j.ei'os, on avrbs oi>x ol6s T' ecrojuat ouS' 77^^ TOVTCOV ovSev Ka\bv elire'iv, vir' aio"x vvi\s 6 \iyov air 08 pas caxo/j.t]v, ei irr) elx ov i I had almost fled for shame, if. Without a protasis, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. /cot TTOJS otairrjSwv avrq 6 VTTTTOS Tr'nrrei els yovara, Kal /j.iKpov KaKelvov e |er pax?) ^-*' ff e v. Comp. the Lat. prope (paene) cecidi, 1 came near falling. (/?) To denote that an action takes plaae (is repeated), in certain cases, and under certain circumstances. The his- torical tense in the principal clause is then commonly the Impf. The condition under which the action is repeated, is expressed by a subordinate clause with et, ore, etc. and the Opt. ; the condition, however, is often omitted. Eiirev av, he was accustomed to say, he would say as often as this or that happened, as often as it was necessary, and the like. X. C. 4. 6, 13. et Se TIS avry irepi TOV avrt \eyot, eirl r^v virfoeffiv eiravrjyev 'av iravra rbv \6yov, as often as one contradicted him, he would (he icas accustomed to) carry back the whole argument to the original proposition. 1. 3, 4. et 5e' rt 8<$etej/ avry (^uKparet) (nj/j.atveff- 260.) MODAL ADVERB av. 361 deu iraparuv bf&v, JjTror I* tirclffbii irapa Ta crrjuaivoufva wotjjo-ot, *; f TJJ ft&tj/ 68ov Aae?j/ iiytptt'o. Twp\bv OVTI /SAfVoiros. An. 2. ,3, 11. Jf TIJ SoKoir) TUV irpbs TOVTO TfTayptvuv ft\aK(Vftv, eTraiev fiv, //e would beat him. 1. 5, 2. 01 /iif UPOI, liret rts 8ta>*rot, irooS/jajUoWes ttv fffra.ffa.Vy as often at any one fir*til tin in, t/n-y trwiM xtajt (the Flup. having tlic sense of the Impf. 23J, Rcm.3). 3. 4, 22.. 0>oVe Se Stdffxotfv at irAevpol TOU v\cu TlpoTay6pa, OVK ^(JLI\V SiSaKTbv tlvai, ffol 8e \tyovriovK x w ft 5 &" avio-Tu (\.c.fio~v \fyfts), I know not how 1 could disbelieve it, if you say so, Prot. 319, b. *Av 8' av j)fj.fis viKufj.fi/, \c\v/j.fvr)s T^S yt>vpa$ ovx fov 31 362 SYNTAX. [$ 260. if you had anything, you would give it (you. may perhaps have something, and then you may give it to me). The Attic writers in particular, use this mode of expression, to denote firmly established and definite opinions and views of anything, and even to denote actual facts with a degree of reserve, moderation and modesty. A negation is here expressed by ou(/c). Her. 3, 82. ai/5pbs evbs, rov apiffrov (i. c. et apurros etr)) ovSev aptivov civ (pavei-rj, nothing would seem better than. 7, 184. &vSpes kv e?ev eV avrotai reff&epes /AvpidSes Kal efrccxn, there may have been two hundred and forty thousand men. 5, 9. y evoiro 8' Uv irav tv r

, as 259, 3, (a), the action is ex- pressed with greater emphasis and definiteness, since the speaker has no refer- ence to the conditioning circumstances, which might prevent the realization of the thing conceived. Comp. peta &e6s 7' &4\a>v Kal rr)\6^ev avSpa a a d> a a. <, the propitious deity, I THINK, CAN save, Od. 7, 231, and ffa&ffai &v, COULD, MIGHT save, if he wished. Hence the omission of &v in the freer language of poetry, is far more frequent than in prose, which has more regard to the actual relation of the things described. (b) So also the Opt. is used with av, as a more modest and mild expression of a command or request, since the thing de- sired is represented as dependent on the will of the person addressed and is thereby made conditional. Here also a nega- tion is expressed by 'lepcav, $ir)yf](ra.(r&ai, & et/cbs elSevai i' ; might you not, could you not restrain the man, instead of, restrain him. In a sharper and more urgent tone as an exclamation, II. w, 263. OVK tcv S^i fjioi a.fj.a^av e(poTr\l ffcraire Tax^Ta, ravrd re ira.vr' eiri^e'ire, 'tva. would you not get ready the chariot, if I commanded it ? $ 'J60.] MODAL ADVERB ay. 3G3 (c) The Optative with av has the same force in interrogative as in other sentences, and may commonly be translated by the auxiliaries can, could, would. II. o>, 367. tt rls fft ftoiTO . . , rls kv o-f) roi v6os Jfrj ,- how ivould you then feel 9 II. r, 90. oXAa rt Ki> dj/ty) 'Adijfa/ot/s /carairoAe^wv ; can there be any stranger news than ? REM. 8. Comp. wo? ns (jxvyei ; whither does one flee ? Arist. Pint. 438. trot TIS (f>vyoi ; whither may one flee f (more definite than with &v). Eur. Or. 598. TO? TIS 6.v vyot ; tchither would one flee ? whither could one flee, f where in the. icorld could he flee ? S. Aj. 403. irol -m olv Qvyrj ; whither shall one flee or is one to flee, f (d) The Dramatists, particularly, often express a wish, in the form of a question, by TTWS and the Optative with av, it being asked how something might, could, would take place under a given condition. Soph. Aj. 338. & Zeu, ircDs &v TOV cdfj.v\u>TaToi> . . oAeWos T*\OS bttvoi/ju Kavr6s ; how might, could, would I die ? instead of, that I might die ! Eur. Ale. 867. irus &v oAof/iTjy; PI. Euthyd. 275, c. irs &f KO\WS trot Siijyrjffat- /i 77 v ; how can I appropriately describe to you ? that I could! REM. 9. But the Opt. in itself, as the expression of a wish, does not take the conditioning adverb &v [$ 259,3, (b)]. II. 281. 8>s KC ol afoi ya?a x<*"<>* is not properly expressed as a wish, but as a doubtful condition, thus (&s = the earth should then open for him. (5) The Inf. and Part, take av (/ce), when the finite verb, which stands instead of the Inf. and Part., would take it : (a) The Inf. with &v after verba sentiendi and declarandi, consequently the Inf. Pres. and Aor. with &v, instead of the Ind. Pres. and Aor. with &v, or instead of the Opt. Impf. and Aor. with &v in direct discourse; the same principle holds when the Inf. is used as a substantive. The Inf. Perf. with &v instead of the Ind. and Opt. Plup. with &v, is more seldom. The Inf. Fut. with &v is rare in Attic ; instead of it the Inf. Aor. or even the Pres. with 6.v is commonly used. E? rt fTxey, Itynj, So vv at & v ( Oratio recta : tl rt eix ov i eSwKo Hv), he said that if he had anything, he would have given it, dixit. se, si quid habuisset, daturum fuisse. Ef TJ tx'> ^j Sowai &v (Or. recta : tfrt exotjUj Soitjv &v), dixit, se, si quid haberet, daturum, esse. 'Eyca $OKO> SSKUKIS & v Kara rrjs yJjs Karaovvai 7/5ioi/, ^) 0^)1^77- vai o'vTQ} Ta.iTfii/6s, X. Cv. 5. 5, 9 (Or. recta: SCKO-KIS by airo&dvoim 9)5iov, # 67, TO fj.a\\ov &z/ yy-fiffaTO avrrjv Kal KO.T airh-fj^eiv robs 7roA.iTas, K. L. 8, 3. Tlcas ex els nphs T& e&e'A.eip &j/ ifvai aKXrjTos eirl Sftirvov] (the same as mis ex ets irpbs TOVTO ori f&f\ois Uv teWt &K\T]TOS eVl Sern-j/oi/;) PI. Symp. 174, b. Ei ouy Aey ^e ^OITJS, PI. R. 350, e. HEM. 10. In Latin the conditioned Inf. is expressed as follows : ypdos KO.KOV (p6fi(p T))V aSiKiav Travcrovres (existimantes se non gravioris mali metu injuriam COERCITUROS FORE, thinking that they could deter from crime by the fear of no greater evil). Th. 6,38. ot/re ovra, o#re Uv yfv6fj.fva \oyoiroiovffiv (i. e. & oisre tffriv, ot/r' tiv y 4 v o i r o, they fabricate what neither is nor will be). Isocr. Phil. 133. Eu fofri ^TjSev &v p.e TOVTUV eTTj%etp^(Toj'Ta (re Treti^etj/, t Swaff- Tfiav i*.6vov KOL irXovrov f(t>put> e avrtaf r yfvr}s &v, irp\v &v, small particles like Se, re, /teV, ydp, sometimes come between, e. g. &s 8' &v. 2. As &v represents the predicate as conditional, it ought properly to be joined with the predicate, e. g. \fyoi/j.i av, t\fyov av ; yet it commonly follows that member of a sentence which is to be made emphatic, e. g. PI. Crito. 53, c. Kal OVK o?et affxtlpoi' & " , rdxurr' 6.v, crQoty &v, 7?5'j i>, K&V (instead of Kal v, etiam, iW), etc. REMARK 1. In certain constructions, the &v belonging to the Opt. is re- moved from the dependent clause, and joined with the principal clause ; this is particularly the cnse in the phrase, OVK o'iS' &i> '. PI. Tim. 26, h. lyu ydp, RKM. 2. In certain parenthetic sentences, the Hv belonging to the Opt is placed first; thus particularly, &v TIS ?TTOJ, cdr). PL Phaed. 87, a. ri olv (,) tu/ airj 6 \6yos ( , ) TJ a.irio'Tt'is ; 3. "Av is very often repeated in the same sentence (/ce very seldom). The reason of this is two-fold: (a) It is used once at the beginning of the sentence, in order to show, in the outset, that the predicate is conditional. This is particularly the case, when the principal sentence is divided by intervening subordinate clauses, or when several words precede the conditioned verb to which &/ belongs. &ST* fo, < ffbtvos \d&oi/j.t STJXWO-CU/H' kv oV aitro7s Qpovu, S. El. 333. (b) The second reason is a rhetorical one. "Ay is joined with the word which requires to be made emphatic. If the rhetorical emphasis belongs to several words in one sentence, Hv can be repeated with each. But besides this, &v can be again placed after the conditioned verb to which it properly belongs. PL Apol. 35, d. ffatyws yap &i>, tl ire&ot/it u/ias, deous & v SiSacr/coi/ut ^ iiyfiv, otire 4. 'A.v is very frequently found with a conjunction or a relative without a verb, when the verb can be easily supplied from the context ; thus especially & s &v, >siTfp 6.v et, IT MS yap av, TrSts 5* OVK &v y Ssirep &v and the like. &ofiov/j.fvos, &sirep kv fl vats (i. C. &sirep kv ^o^SoIro, ft vous el?;), PL Gorg. 479, a. CHAPTER II. 262. The Attributive Construction. Attributives serve to explain more definitely the idea contained in the substantive to which they belong, e. g. TO K a \ o v po'Bov, o /j, e 7 a ? Trat?. The attributive may be : a. An adjective or participle, e. g. TO ica\ov poBov, TO Sr a X X o v a^o? ; 31* 366 SYNTAX. [$ 263. b. A substantive in the genitive, e. g. ol rov Sev&pov c. A substantive with a preposition, e.g. rj TT p o s rrjv 7T X I V 656? J d. An adverb, e. g. ol vvv av^pcoTroi ; e. A substantive in apposition, e. g. Kpola-os, o 263. Ellipsis of the Substantive to which the Attributive belongs.. When the substantive which is to be more fully explained by the attributive, contains a general idea, or one which can be easily supplied from the context, or is indicated by some word of the sentence, or, by frequent usage in a particu- lar connection, may be supposed to be known, then the substantive, as the less important member in the attributive relation, is often omitted, and the adjective or participle becomes a substantive. Substantives which are often omitted with attributive adjectives, are : &*&pcoiros, fobpiairoi, av-rjp, avSpts, yvv-i], Pyf*** XPtpa-, irpay^a, Trpdynara, rj/J-fpa, 777, X^P a -> M-o7pa, 66s, x*' l P> \J/y)4>os, Te^j/Tj, ir6\e/j.os, etc. ; those omitted with the attributive genitive are : Tar-ftp, p-fiT-np, vlos, irais, bvydrrip, oSeAcfxk, avf)p (husband), yvirf] (wife), ot/cia, olwor, x^P a > TV (land). The substantive is omitted with the following classes of words : a. The attributive adjective, adjective pronoun, and participle. (a) Such as denote persons : of &vr)roi, mortales; ol ffotyoi, ol yeiva.tj.woi (instead of yoveis) : ol exovres, the rich; ol fyvXarrovTes (^uAawes) ; ol 5t/cc{bj/Tes, judges ; ol \fyoirrfs, orators, etc. (j8) Such as denote names of things : (a) appellatives : T& ^erepa (xpfoaTa), res nostrac ; TO e/no, res meae, everything which relates to me ; TO Ka\d, res pulchrae ; TO KO/CO, mala ( 243, 4), rj vo-repaia, r) ^irtovo-a, T] irptaTt], Sevrfpa, etc. (r}/j.fpa) ; i) Tro\f/j.ia (x^pa), the enemy's country ; 77 0tXto, a friendly country ; 77 otVouiuewj (77?), the inhabited earth ; 77 &vvpos (777), a desert ; ij cui^eTo (6S({s) ; rfyv Taxio~Tif]v, quam celerrime ; Trjv to"riv (fioTpav) etTroStSoj/ot ; 77 irfirpoj^vi] (po'ipa) ; 77 Se^ta, 77 apio'Tepd (X 6t/ P)j ^ viKtaffa. ( yvci>iJ.r) ); T^V tvavTiav ( tyrityov) Ti&fff&cu; 77 pyropiirfi (rex 1 ^)' (b) Abstracts : T& Ka\6v, T^I 070^^, or ra.ya&6v, the beautiful, the good ; TO euTi/xe'y, good fortune; rb avalo-^-r}Tov t want of feeling ; rb Koiv6v, the common- wealth (e. g. TU>V "2,a.(j.io}v) ; -TO frapffovv, confidence. (c) Collective nouns denoting persons: T& Ivavriov, the enemy ; rb VTT^KOOV, the subjects. Adjectives in -IKOV especially belong here, e. g. rb iroXninov, the citizens; rb oirXiriKov, the heavy armed; T> oiKfTiK6i>, the servants; rb 'E\\t]viKou, Tb &ap0aptK6v, Ti> iTTTTjK^, etc. The plural of adjectives of this ending is often used to denote a number, collection, or series of single events, e. g. TO Tywi'/ca, the Trojan war ; TO 'EAA.Tjvi/ca, the Grecian history; TO, ^ovTi/ca, naval war, but also naval affairs. . $ 264.] ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. 367 b. The attributive genitive also is used without the governing substantive, e. g. *AA'{cu'5/)os, 6 *iAnnroi; (vl6s), Mcua 77 "ArAorros (birydrrip) ; then with the prepositions V, tls and IK with the Gen. of a person to denote his abode, e. g. iv aSov (ofctu) tivai; tls a'5ot (olxov) ^A&eu> ; (Is S<5cur/caAa>i' v, the whole extent of the war ; r& 'A&Tji/afwj' poi/e?j/, ab Atheniensium par- tibits stare; rek TT)S opyTJs-, TO TTJS (/juretpias, rb ruv lir&vfjLiwv (that which pertains to anger, the nature or essence of anger, etc.) ; rb TUV iraiScw, the custom of boys; TO TUV aAtc'wr. c. The attributive adverb is used without a substantive, e. g. 01 vvv t ol rore, oi ireUoi, o/ tvddSf l&v&pcairoi), TO. olnoi (irpd'yfj.a.Ta), res domesticae, 77 irjs, (^jucpa), the following day, etc. d. The attributive substantive or substantive pronoun with the preposition by which it is governed, e. g. ol KO& was, ol ty' four, our contemporaries ; oi a/j.(j)l or trtpi riva, e. g. riAarw^o, signifies (a) a person with his companions, followers, or scholars ; of i/*^l TIcuriffTpaTov, Pisistratus and his troops ; ol a/j.>, OTTUS 6 /caAov ptvo s VTTO TUV aotyun&v K6cr/j.os f6s. OUT os 6 avT)p aya&ds. Tpe?y a-ya^ot &v8pes. Tb irpurov ita\bv irpayfMa. Od. *, 322, sq. tVrbs vrfbs finoiKV'ia'&ai ; eV iravrl KO.KOV eTvai ; eis TT a v irpoe\-f]\v&e /uox&Tjpias. Moreover, the Neut. pronoun is very frequently joined with the genitive, espe- cially in prose. Th. 1,49. ihf4rey 4s TOVTO avdyKrjs, to this degree of necessity. X. An. 1. 7, 5. iv TOIOVTC? TOV mvdvvov. Dem. Ph. 1,51. els TOV& v fi pews fA-fi Au^ej/. c. The substantive is made to depend upon the adjective in the Sing, which takes the gender of the substantive which it governs, instead of being in the 201.) ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. 369 NVut., C. p. TJ iroAAr? rfjy IleAoiroKi^o-oi; instead of rb woAu TTJJ IT. The word JJ p i , TWI/ fyrrtav TOVS s. Th. 7, 3. TTJV ir\icrT^v TT)S crrpaTtaj trapfra^t : so iroAAj) TTjy s, rbv ir\t"i 3. The Greek, like the Latin, frequently uses the attributive adjective to define the subject or object, not by itself, but only in reference to the predicate. In this way the designations of place, time, number, also a reason, condition, and manner can be expressed by adjectives, winch agree with a substan- tive in gender, number, and case. a. Adjectives of place and order. Od. two's, x* l P*P lv 6 s > etc -j especially those in -o?o s, e. g. Sevrepcuoy, , etc., xpdvios (after a long time), etc. II. o, 497. ijepiij S' avefiri /j.cyav ovpavtv instead of ^/>t, s^e went early. X. An. 4. 1, 5. ffKonalovs StcA&elj' rb irfSlov, to pass through the plain in the dark. TeTopTcuos, ire/j.irra'ios oupi- /cero, he came on the fourth, fifth day ; xp^vtos ^\&e', after a long time. c. Adjectives of manner and other relations, e. g. ous, raxvs, al'5oj o-eo/ = uirJ, s aSfis, you sing beautifully (not xa\bs &5tis, for the person who sings beautifully, is not necessarily beautiful). When the Greeks expressed such designations of place and time, as properly belong to the predicate, by adjectives, it is to be explained as resulting from their vivid mode of conception. For example, f, vcTtpov, vo-rarov or SffTaro), /j.6vos, it.&vf\v and /j.6vov T^V 4Tri 6 Mai'as sc. vl6s). 2. When a substantive is in apposition with a possessive pronoun, it is put in the Gen., since the possessive pronouns take the place of the Gen. of the personal pronouns. 'E/ibs (= e/xoD) TOV odAiov )3u>s, the life of ?ne, wretched, a&\iov being here in opposition with c/j.6s. Ta/xa ( = ra fp.d) TUV Svffr-fjvov KO.KO., the evils of me, un- happy one ! 2)? TTJS Ka\\t. 2. 4, 13 and 25. Taurr; TTJ yyoi/a ($f,u(da. v6\tv uvo/j.a, 1*1. Up. 369, c. (/o ////.< community we gave tin- iiuiitf city, mllnl it a r/Vi/). 'Ai/tyjirfVTjs *cal STJJUOTIK&S tKT-faaro TV /SatnAcr'wrd- TTJV wal dejoTefrni/ TT po s-nyopiay, rbv &l xaiov, Plat. Ar. 2. ( received the surname, tin- Just). (The Gen. also is u-cd in the same phrase : $c0tfiui/ ^cW/traTo T^i/ roC Xprj(TToO irpos-nyoptav, Plut. Ph. 10. The Noin. also occurs: Aesch. f. 1. { 27.) See 269, Rcm. 3. KI:M. 2. A substantive in the Norn, or Ace. sometimes stands in apposition with the whole sentence ; in the Nora., when the appositive expresses a judg- ment on the whole sentence ; in the Ace., when the appositive denotes a thing accomplished, a result, a purpose, or object, e. g. Eur. Or. 496. n-f I yap Q4wfv- ' eyfivaro, KTtiva.1, irpbs oi>x aTavras f{jK\eiav OIKIUV TroAAal) ^TrfirrwKfa-av, 6 \lyat Se vtpirjffav. X. R.L.6, 1. lv rals ^AAcus Tr6\tffi rust iavrou tKaffros nal iraitiuv Kal oineTwv nal 372 SYNTAX. [$ 267. apxovcr iv (suis quisque liber is imperant). Cy.3.1, 3. Si eSiSpacrKov jjSrj eKaffros 7rl ra lauroD, ftov\6^evoi TO, ovra tKirotiwv 7rcuerv ' ^^ airofftpaTT 6 /J.GVO i. Her. 3, 82. avrbs ffcaffTos ftov\6/j.evos Kopvtycuos elvai yvw/nrjiri re viKav, ts ex^eo fj.fyd\a a\\-fi\oivyfv e p K o s o56vT(ov, Od. a, 64, what a word escaped thee, thy lips ! where cp/cos the part is in apposition with ere, the whole. Tp&as 8e rp^uos cufb? uTT^Au&e yv To e'/cacrroi', II. u, 44. 'AxaioIVij/ 5e p.4ya ff&ei/os e|tt/8a\' fKaffrta /cap 5 1 ?? &\\T]KTOV TroAe/a^ew r/8e /j.dxfO'^ai, II. , 152, sq. CHAPTER III. 267. The Objective Construction. As the attributive construction ( 262) serves to define the subject, or in general, a substantive idea, more fully, so the objective construction serves to complete the predicate, or define it more fully. By object, is to be understood here everything which, as it were, stands over against (objectum est) the predicate, i. e. everything which stands as the com- plement of the predicate and defines it more fully : (a) THE CASES. 373 tin- Cases, (b) Prepositions with their Cases, (c) the Infini- livc, (d) the Participle, and (e) the Adverb. i: :. M \ KK. The object completes the idea of the predicate, when the predicate nKeuarily requires an object, o. ^. 'EiribvfjLU rr)s apfrrjs. Bov\o^ai ypdfftr. The object defines the idea of the predicate, when the object is not necessarily required^ e.g. Tfe^gor b&? Jv T K^TTU. The predicate is thus defined by the ipectficatkHM of time, place, degree, means, manner, and instrument. 268. I. The Cases. 1. All the relations, which the Greek denotes by the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative, were originally consid- ered relations of space. 2. The action of a verb, with which the substantive object is connected, is contemplated under the idea of motion. In this manner the object of the verb appears in a three-fold aspect : first, as that from which the action of the verb proceeds ; secondly, as that towards which the action of the verb tends ; thirdly, as that by or with which the action of the verb takes place. In this way -three Cases originate: the Genitive, denoting the motion or direction whence, the Accusative, whither, and the Da- tive, where. 3. The relations of time were viewed in the same man- ner as those of space. Thus the Gen. (the whence-case) denotes the time from which an action is conceived as proceeding ; the Ace. (the whither-case), the time to which, or over which the action is conceived as moving ; and the Dat. (the where-case) the time in which an action is con- ceived as existing. 4. The relations of causality, also, were regarded as relations of space. The cause (the ground, the origin, the author), was conceived as a local outgoing of an action from an object (Genitive) ; the effect (the result, the con- sequence), as a motion towards an object (Accusative) ; the means (the instrument), as the resting of an action with or in an object (Dative). 32 374 SYNTAX. [$$ 269, 270. $ 269. Remarks on the Nominative and Vocative. 1. The Norn, and Voc., so far as they do not express objective relations, cannot be considered as Cases ; the Nom. is the form for the subject, and the Voc. is the form which is used in calling to or in a direct address to a person or a thing. But also the predicative adjective or substantive, which is joined to the subject by the copula eTpcw, is expressed, as in other languages, accord- ing to the laws of agreement, by the nominative ; and even the objective rela- tion of an effect or result with the verbs mentioned in 240, 2, is viewed in the Greek and Latin as a relation of agreement, and is expressed by the nominative. REMARK 1. With the verbs bvop.a&iv, oj/ojuaCtcr&cu and the like, the Inf. eli/cu is often added to the Nom. or Ace., and thus in some degree the relation of the effect or result is indicated. Her. 4, 33. rhs bvo^d^ovffi Afaioi elvai tT firpo-)(T]v re Kal AaoSi/crji/. 5, 99. ffTparrjyovs &\\ovs a7re'Se|e (instead of aW- 8ete) WliXTifficav elvai. REM. 2. On elvai, and yi-yvfo-frat with an abstract word, see 284, 3 (9). REM. 3. Since the Nom., as the Case of the subject, denotes an object as independent, the Greeks use it not only in the case mentioned in 266, Rem. 1, but even with verbs of naming in the active. Her. 1, 199. MV\ITTO. 6c KoAe ovtri rV 'A^poSiTTji/ 'Avtrvpioi, the Assyrians call Aphrodite, Mylitta. 2. Sometimes the Nom. seems to stand instead of the Voc. in a direct sum- mons or call ; but in all instances of this kind, the Nom. contains an explana- tory exclamation, which takes the place of a sentence. Here belong particu- larly the following instances : (a) OVTOS either alone, or in connection with the Nom. of a proper name, is often used when one calls out to another, in the sense, ho there ! heus tu : PI. Symp. 172, a. 6 &a\i)pcvs, fpos, ov Trepi^viis ; which means, see ! this is that Apollodorus, the Phalerean, who comes there ! (b) Very often in this way, the Nom. with the article, is joined as an apposi- tive to a call or direct address. PL Symp. 218, b. of 8e ot/cerat, Kal ft TLS &\\os eVrl Pf&r)\6s re Kal aypot- KOS, irv\as ira.vv /j.fyd\as TOIS ucrlv e7n'&e(r&e (the same as, vfj.e'is Se, otKcrcu OVTCS], X. Cy. 4. 5, 17. t&i pev olv Siopt^fiv, afyitva iravfiv, vavfff&ai, Kto\vfiv, fpi)Tvcii>, tlpyeiv, \vetv, ttevbtpovv, ', Ip^povv, Sicuptpfiv, vtw, d\\f&ri(raj'. X. Hier. 7, 3. 5o/cct pot roinca 8ia TWO. riav ayabwv. TTJS fiav. Her. 6, 103. Treprjv TTJ s 68 ov (on the other side of the way). Dem. Phil. 1.49, 34. TOW irdffxeii' avrol KO.K&S e|w 4. Here belong verbs of beginning and originating, e. g. ap^etv, vTrap^eiv, Karapxtw, e^ap^eiv. Ttvos, e.g. TOU TToXc/iou, means simply to begin something, without any other relation: Si'v rols beats itpx c wi"apX 6tJ/ j KOTapxetv have a relation to others beside the subject, i. e. they signify not merely to begin abso- lutely, but to begin before others, to do something first or before others, to begin first, hence to be the cause or author: Tovs &f\oj/Tas tyvy^s #pxeii> iroXv Kp^irrov vvv roTs vo\f plots Ta.TTOfj.fvovs, fy Iv Trj i]fj.fTfpa Ta|et, 6pav (it is better to see those disposed to begin the fiight [set the example offiight] in the enemies' ranks than in ours), X. An. 3. 2, 17. 'H ^uepa TO?S "EA.\7j(Tt /* e 7 < A. w r /ca/cwz/ &pei (will begin, be the cause of great calamities), Th. 2, 12. 'TTrc^/Jxetv aStKcav HEM. 2. "Apxefffrai air6 TWOS (or Tro&eV) means, to proceed from a thing and to begin with it, e. g. &pxeuetv, $dvr]s 7/e.'>'.. :i. /tias itrirpbs irdrrts a$t\$ vlos, i. c. 6 (&c) TOV /3as yei'j'ij&fls uuj. Tck r&v avibpuiruv Trpd.yp.ar a.. KKMARK 1. Commonly the preposition ^/c, more seldom &TTO, is connected with tlie genitive. 2. Tlie active Genitive stands, in the second place, as that object which has gained another, made its own and possesses it ; the Gen. therefore denotes the owner or possessor. This Gen. stands : (a) with the verbs cTvcn, yevcV&u (to belong to), Tro^io-^at, to maJce one's own; (b) with the adjectives tSto? (also with Dat.), oiKttos (with Dat, inclined), iepov iroiovvrat (they bring A. under their pnii-fr). Isocr. Paneg. 46, 29. y Tr6\is T}V-&v Kvpia yevoi*.4vr) roiovriav aya- ibuv OVK 4pos TTJS 'Apr c /j.i8os. Dem. 01.1. 26,28. of KivSwoi TUV {(peffTiiKOTav (ducum) tSiot, niafrbs 5' OVK ZffTiv. 2.32,16. TOUTTJS Kvptos TTJS x^P as yet^ffcTat. In the attributive relation: 'O Krjiros. 'H ~2,WK par ov s aperi). FlaTTjp REM. 2. The Gen. is connected with \4yew, v ^/uev TTore Kvpioi, (^aiVetr&eu irpo'i/j.evovs. Chcrs. 102, 48. So/ce? ravra Kal 8 a Trails /t e y a \ TJ s Kal TT 6v p6s effri T6TTcpwv ff T a 8 1 a) v (of four stadia in width = four stadia wide). Attributive Gen.: Se/co fivHv xwpioy, Isae. 2, 35 (a place of [costing] ten minae). The Gen. is but seldom used to denote other qualities, e. g. rys aurfjs yv(afj.t\s elvai, ejusdem sententiae esse, to be of the same opinion. ('A\Kifiid5ris) &\- AOTC &\\cav tarl \6ywv, PI. Gorg. 482, a (is of different words at different times, uses different words, etc). HEM. 3. Here belong also the expressions fiyeTo-bai, Troie'ta-bai, behai tro\- AoO, 7rA.efv XP"n ff V-uv (re- $ 273.] PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 379 citalmt rdtictniorum sc. partem). So rt^vtiv yys (devastate terrae, $c. partem) iv TT]S 77/5, to m-t foot upon. REM. 4. With the partitive and attributive Gen., two cases are to be distin- guished: the Gen. denotes the whole cither as . plurality in relation to the indi- vidual parts, as IIoXXol ruv av&pwirwv : or as a unity in relation to a certain quantity, e. g. IlcWe rd\avra apyvptov. This last partitive Gen. may be called the (Jen. of quantity. Both these genitives occur very frequently : (a) With substantives, e. g. Zrayoves voaros (vSaTos expressing the whole, and ffraytvfs the parts) ; o-w/ioroy pfpos ; if with the name of a place, the country where it is situated is mentioned, the name of the country as denoting the whole, stands in the Gen., and usually before the name of the place denoting the part, e. g. 'O ffrparbs A06ctr* rys 'ATTIKTJS is Oivoriv (into Oenoe, a part or city of Attica), Th. 2, 18 (never Is TT)J (b) With substantive adjectives, in the positive, comparative, and superlative, when it expresses the highest degree ; with substantive pronouns and numerals : of xpj]ffrol r&v avibpcairtav, ol *v (ppovovvres TUV av&p&iuav (the useful, well disposed part of men) ; iroXXo/, o\iyoi t nvts, irAetofcs, ir\t7ffToi TUV av&puirwv (many, few, some, etc. among or of men). In addition comp. above, $ 264, Hem. 5. On the contrary, ol brrirol avfrpcairoi, since the property of mortality belongs to the race ; vo\\ol or 0X1*701 &v&pwiroi ex- presses a whole consisting of many or few (a great or small number of men); iroAAoi or 0X1701 avdpwTrwv denotes the many or few as a part of the whole ; so rpets ^/ie?s "/iufy, i. e. we were three in all. there were three of us ; rpets final' fiffav, i. e. there were three of us (three out of our whole num- ber) there ; (c) With adverbs : (a) of place, e. g. iroO, irov, irt*j, ir<&6p, o5, ^, ouSo/ioO, vav- TOXTJ, iroppQ), and irpoaw (further), etc. Her. 2, 43. ovSa/j.?! Aiyinrrov (nowhere in Egypt). PI. Rp. 3. 403, e. flStvai, OTTOV yys ^O"TJ (where intheworld). 'EvraiJ^o TT^S r]\iKlas (at this age) ; ttrav&a TOV \6yov (to this point in the discourse or argument). 'Opart, olTrpoeXiijXu&ej' do*X7e/os (what a degree of insolence he has reached, (/uo intemperantiae progressus sit), Dem. TlavT axov TT) s yys, nbivis terra-rum. Tl6ppoo v rpixti>p.a.ruv a, &v&pcairoi icxovffiv). X. Cy.3.1,25. TrdvTwv ruv ofiviav 6 (seldom with Dat.), StaSo^os (often also with Dat), ei}?, e7s (more rarely with Dat.), irpoa-Scv, c/xTrpoo-^ev, oTTtor^ev, /zera|u, and many other adverbs ; (y) to acquire and attain, e. g. rvy^aveii/ (to acquire and hit), Xay^avctv, e-, eiKvet- ie /j.fvo i T&V /cepSwi/ ol fytrcrous uTre/xevoi' rfyv ruv KpsHrffAvcav SouActav (the inferiors desirous of gain, etc.). Cy. 1. 2, 3.- irovijpo v TIVOS ^ alffxpov epyov ftpieffbat. 3.3,10. firati'ovffi Kal ai (borders on). 3, 72. %pyov ex^MeS-a (opus aggredia- mur). nepte'xo^ai TIVOS (cupide aliquid amplector). Th. 1 , 140. TTJS y via fj.it] s T 77 s auT/js e x M a * (I hold to the same opinion ). 4,10. avSpes ol vvapd/ji.fvo i TOU KivSvvov (who have taken part in this danger). PL Rp. 2, 362, a. (cum veritate conjunctum). Dem. 01. 1, 20, e'cos earl KOI- 273. J GENITIVE CASE. 381 p v v6p. (a v, tvrpfirr) (neither do you respect us, the laws). X. C. 4. 5, 11. 8o/c?y /xo< \tyfiv, is avSpt ^TTOi/t TOJJ/ Sta TOU ffufj-aros rifiovSav ird/JLirav o v $ e p. i a s operas IT po sri K* i (that no virtue belongs to a man who is a slave to bodily pleas- ures). Dem. in Aristocr. 690, 14. ourot *c\7jpovo/uou6 23< &/ ire Si oio. v, 64. ire 8 to to otwKftv opveov (to pursue over the plain). So the prose, I4vai rov irp6ff, \~2. rov \onrov (*)] iretdefyteda avrov. PI. Phaed. 59, d. ^Xdojufi/ rov 5eo>ia>T7jpfow iff* (pas (at evening). Ov paKpov xp vov > ov ('"> "<'/ short, long time) ; iroXAwi/ rjpfpuv, (within ninny d ^^ Kupou, C^rt aetate, Sia iro\\ov Xpovov, Ivr6s or (ra> iroXAou XP 01/OV ' Coinp. the remarks on the prepositions. REM. 13. The Gen. as well as the Ace. denotes continued or protracted time, but with this difference, that the Gen. denotes the time within any part ofichich the action may take place ; whereas the Ace. of time implies that the action is in progress during the whole of the time mentioned, e. g. ra.vrt\v r^v ijfj.f- pav avrov TjuA^tTo, he encamped there during the whole of that day ; but with the Gen. the meaning would be, that, in the course of that day, sometime in that day, he encamped there. Comp. 279, 6, in regard to the difference between the Gen. and Ace. of time and place. 5. The active Genitive, finally, denotes the material of which anything is made, formed, and, as it were, produced, or the source from which something is drawn; the material being viewed to some extent as the cause of the result. This Gen. stands : (a) With verbs of making, forming, and the like. Her. 5, 82. x a ^ KOV iroifovrai ra ayd\/j.aTa (are made of bronze). 2, 138. torpwfjifVT) lo-rl &5bs \ibov (is paved with stone). Th. 4, 31. tpv^ia avrd&i 3\v \ibat/ \oydo-nv ir TT o t TJ /j. e v o v. In the attributive relation : e/cirw/xa v A. o v (a drinking cup [made] of wood) ; rpdirffa apyvpiov, ffrttyavos vaitiv& e ^ c - 5 i"A.eos, TrXypys, /u.eoro5, , 8acrvj, etc. ; TTCVT^?, cvSc^s; aXt? (satin). X. Symp. 4, 64. \6- (are full of these sayings). EvTropfw, curope'iv, Tr4vf(T&ai, vr jb vfoiov fjifffr6v (full of persons running about). An. 2. 4, 384 SYNTAX. [$ 273. 14. SCKTUS Hevtipav (thickly set with trees}. An. 1. 2, 7. TrapoSettros fieyas, aypiuv &i)pia>v ir\T]pT]s (/// q/ 1 w/toJ animals). 1. 4, 19. eVraud-a ^(rap KaJ/uai TroAAal /iearal a'nov Ka\ otvov. In the attributive relation, e. g. SeVas ou/ou (o #oWe< of [filled with] wine). (c) With verbs signifying to eat, to drink, to taste, to cause to taste, to enjoy, to satisfy one's self, and in the figurative sense to have the enjoyment, use, and advantage of something; eo-SUiv, (j>ayelv, evoo^etcr^at, Trivew, yeuetv, yevtcrSai, Kopecracr^at ; aTroAauav ; ecmav (to entertain), etc. 'Eo'&ietJ' Kpeuv (to eaf of flesh); Kope ffaff&ai Qopftris (to satisfy one's self with food) , irtvetv otvov (to drink of wine). X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. avdyirn o~oi air oyevefffrai T ovr 77 v &\\(i>y x" ( en jy your meat). 6. 2, 28. vSari ^fj.iyjjifvr}v a el r$)V fia^av eff^iei (always eats maize). Ibid. /ULCTOL 8e rbv crlrov lav olvov TT iirlvu) fj.ev, ovSev fj.e'iov e%owa rj ^i/x^ ai/aTrautrerai (spoken of a habit). So ^ o~ & t e i v Kpea and Kpewv, ir iveiv olvov and olvov. Hence iriveiv olvov is said of those whose usual drink is wine, but irivetv otvov, is to take a drink of wine, to drink some of the wine. Hence the Gen. with verbs of eating and drinking has a partitive sense, like the English expressions, to eat or drink of something. PI. Symp. 176, c. itoXvv irivetv olvov. (d) With verbs signifying to smell, emit an odor of something, etc. ; irvcAVy o^etv, *Qeiv tuv (to smell violets); p.vpov irve7v (to emit the smell of myrrh) ; IT pos j8a\A.e iv fj.vpov, irvetv rpdyov, oeiv Kpojj.ixav. Ar. Ran. 341. cbs r)8v p.oi IT po s eirvevo~e xoipeiw Kpecav (so sweet was the smell of swine's flesh to me). REM. 16. In poetry many other verbs are constructed with the Gen. of the material, e. g. airoffriX^eiv a.\ei9, and *c/n'0a ; also \vith expressions of being ac- <>, eVu>5 c^w ; with adj ectives in - 1 /c o s (derived from transitive verbs) which denote s/o//, aptness, etc. ; also with * something. X. C. 2. 1', 33. Of yepadrtpot r)8ea>s ruv Tra.\aiS>v irpd^faiv p.4 fj.vi]vra t (r> m< mber the past achievements). Antiph. II. a, 7. 'H tir&vfjita TT)S rifjLwplas i/j.vf)/j.ova ruv Kivtivvtav KO&(/j.i) s (I make trial of an opinion ) . With the poets this use of the Gen. is still more extensive. II. 0. 411. TC/CTOJ/OS, fcs pd re irdcnis c5 dSfj (ro(f>iijs (who is well acquainted with all skill). X. 3. 1, 6. irapaff Kfva- v 4 TT i TTJ 5 e / 1> v TOIS (Trpariv /j.eo ire eAeu^epot (MOW therefore obeying me, be free). So Th. 7, 73. HEM. 19. The above verbs have the following constructions : (a) Gen. of the thing, as in the examples given. The Gen. denotes the material as a who'/e, of which one perceives, as it were, single parts, or the sense, the purport of which one perceives mentally. Ala^dvofiai Kpavyijs (1 perceive, as it were, the single tones of the cry) ; X. H. 4. 8, 19. aiVdeVda* TTJS fioij&eias ( I observe something of the help); (b) Ace. of the thing; then it is denoted that one perceives the whole thing with his senses, or the thing in its totality. Th. 2, 94. 'fis ya-borro ryv &or)&elav (when they observed the help approaching = saw with their eyes = lups off(ppavro rd- XIO-TO, ruv Kaju.i'/ Awy ol "iriroi Ka.1 elSoy auras oir'ura) avtarptfyov (as soon as the horses got scent of the camels ). So a v v i TJ /j. i ( to understand) , with the Gen. of a person, e. g. Her. 1, 47. KO.} Kwtyou (rvviniju Kal ou (fxavevj/TOS aKovca (I under- stand a mute) ; but with the Ace. of the thing, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 6, 2. Si' (p/nqveoav 7 as TUV Seiiiiv & v /*& ov\i as trwi-npi ( I understand the counsels of the gods ) . T he verb aia&dvea&ai is not constructed with the simple Gen. of the person. (d) Gen. of the person and Ace. of the thing : "Hxovcra 2a>K par ovs T OUT ov rbv Koyov (audivi e Socrate hunc sermonem, I heard this conversation from Socrates). So also ri x a ^ f '"'bt' pff&rjffai TOV/J.OV )3tou ; (what have you perceived disa- greeable in my manner of life. ?) X. C. 1. 6, 4. ^uvir}/j.i aov rbv \6yov. (e) Gen. of the person with a participle in the Gen., or with a subordinate clause which takes the place of the Ace. of the tiling. 'A/cowo ~2uKpdrovs Sta\e- yo/j.fvov (I hear Socrates reasoning, nearly the same as aKovca ^wKpdrovs 5id\o- yov). X. H. 4. 2, 19. AaKe5at/j.6vioi OVK rjcr&di'oi'To irposiovrtov rwv iroAe- p.iV iro\e/j.t(av rrjv irpJjoSoi/). The person is sometimes also contained in the parti- ciple, e. g. Th. 5, 73. ija'&oj/To Te*x t C^*' TWJ/ (they perceived them building the wall, instead of rjcrbovTo avT&v T ^I-^I^OVTU>V or ort Tix'iotv). X. An. 1. 10, 4. fiaffi\evs ijKova-f T iffGatycp vovs, on oi "E\\.7]ves viKyev (heard from Tissaphernes that the Greeks were conquering, like tfitovve Tiffffatyepvovs T}\V Tiav 'E\\-f)vu>i/ VLKT\V). C. 4. 4, 13. OVK aiff&di/0[Mii ffov, birolov v6fj.ip.ov *j TTO'IOV SiKOiov Ae-yets (I do not comprehend you, what you call according to law or according to justice). HEM. 20. Likewise the Gen. of the person and Ace. of the thing, or the Gen. of the person with a participle in the Gen. or with a subordinate clause standing in the place of the Ace. [Comp. (d) and (e) Rem. 19], is used with verbs of seeing, hearing, experiencing, learning, considering, knowing ; of judging, examining, and say- ing ; of admiring, praising, blaming : 6 pay, & eacr&ai, a /c o TT e 7 j>, VTTOVOS IV, e v i, etSe'j/at, ev^u/ieTcr&at, etc. ; IT v v d |eTa e tv, Aeyetr, $r)\ovv, etc.: OLTTO- (to receive the opinion of one, to agree in opinion with one) ; a7acrdat, , /j.f/j.(p eiy avrwr (2rrf considered in respect to them tchfthtr. etc.). An. 3. 1 , 19. fiov tu&ois, & aroxpiroiuu ; will you then understand my anstcvr, i. e. learn from me tckat lanswerl). 465, e. Ac- yorrrf pv /3pax' ludrbarts (you did not understand me urhen I spate briefly). The Gen. of the person alone. Ph. Phil. 51, c, efpouparddrctr instead of cf /u>v ^uvdaifis, & Xeyw (//" you comprehend me, understand tchat I say). Th. 4. 6. {TV^OVTO T^S IIvAov ar ei \ii put rift, instead of ^xvd. rf,j riuAou, Sri jrcrrciAirfifurif J(r ( irAen tA instead of pov rvyxcfmr {abserte respecting the others, whether). ('Eyjvuttffbai with the GOT. o/'' Me thiny, for example T^J Spas, X. Ven.8,6., r*v T&*W. ib. 9. 4. signifies to have a regard for something, and belongs to $ 1 74, 1 (b) ; Ivdv/icrrda* with the Ace. of the thing signifies to reflect upon, consider something, al'ujuid secum reputare.) PI. Protag. 324. c. aro&txorrat oi trot vJUroi KCU a^*** 1 ** fficvr orofiov rvft^ouAtvorro; ra ToArrurt ofiov rvft (reonne f4e ojnnion of the brazier and shoemaker). Her. 6. 76. iyocrdai rov 'Epatri'rou ov xpo58o'xToj TOWS oAr^ras (to admire Emsintu because he did not betray the citizens). Th. 1, 84. r& 3po5u rai /tcAAov, & p>forrai fuLu r irAicA <% dbVy?y complain of us). X. Cy. 3. 1 . 1 5. ' iyacrat rov Tarpos, ^ 3 (1 praise Agesilaus for this also). PL Men. 95. c. rop7/ou /uUurra raura fi-yauai (/ particularly ad- mire this in Gorgias. or Gorgias for this). Theaet. 161. b. 2 &ai/ppovTictv, K^Secr^at, 7re/3iopavpea-Sa.L, Trev^iKais tx eu/ > and ouo-eipeu/ (with the Ace. of the person and Gen. of the thing) ; (d) Anger and indignation: 6pyieo-$ai (with the Dat. of the person and the Gen. of the thing), xoAcTrojs epe/; (e) Envy : <$ovetV (with the Dat. of the person and the Gen. of the thing), CTTI^OVOOS StaKeto-^at; (f) Admiration, praise, blame; $av/>iaeii/ and ayao-^at (with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, sometimes also with the Gen. of the thing and the Gen. of the person, which is governed by that thing, see Hem. 2), fyXovv, ew$cu/xo- i/tv, eTraivetv, /xe/x^ecr^at (all with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing). PL Rp. 403, a. 6 op&bs Upas ire'(u/ce Koffpiov re /cal Ka\ov ffcatypdvus re Kal /j.ovffiK&s fpav (to love what is well ordered and beautiful). 438, a. ovSels IT or ov ir i&v pe?, a\\a xP r l a ' r v TOTOV, Kal ov ff irov, a\\ct, % p t\ v eir i&v fj.ovff iv (no one desires drink, but wholesome drink, etc.). Symp. 181, b. ol av\oi T>V a.vStp&irv ffw/j.d- Tx rirrov eviat T>V Qva-euis, ^ &\\ai -rS>v alrwv re Kal TrorSjv (thirst for praise not less than others for food and drink). Attribu- tive, e. g. epcas, ciribvuia aperr^s (amor, cupiditas virtutis, love, desire for virtue). Th. 6. 14. K^Seo-3-ot TT/S IT 6 \etas (to be anxious about the city). Her. 3, 151. firo\i6pKee (Ba$uA.a;i/i'ous)

eu rov avopts (Oh what a man!). PL Up. 509, c. "AiroAAoj/, oaifjto v I as vir ep/3 o \TJ s! X. Cy. 2/2, 3. rfjs r v XTJS, TO tpt vvv K\T)b*vra. ocvpo rvx^v ' ( ill fortune, that I am called hither at this time !). Lys. C. Philon. 187, 11. ico^eVrTj/ee n foos oixaiov iraaiv cusbpuirois, ruv avruv aS tier] p.druv fj.d\io~ra opyifo~ibai rots p.d\to~Ta ovvaptvois , firj aSiKeTi/, ro7s of irfVT}(riv 1) aovvdrois r<# ffup.ari ffvyyvufjci]v ex U/ > ^*^ ro Tiytiff&a-t- &KOVTO.S avrovs a.fj.aprdi'fiv (to be angry on account ofthesame icrongs). (In poetry, the Gen. is much more frequent with verbs expressing anger, e. g. II. |, 266. 'HpaK\r)os irep ix u ~ (Taro, ircuobs eo?o (teas angry on account of Hercules, his son). Od. a, 69. (Tlofffioduv) K.vK\uiros Kf x^ AWT at, of o^aAjuoG a\du(Tfv (is angry on account of the Cyclops). S. Antig. 1177. irarpl u.t\v(aa.s / TO?S "EAATjtrt ^ orvus &yav In is S laKela Srat (it is not just that we should be so much envied by the Greeks on account of our sovereignty). So also in poetry, (j. f y a i p w, e. g. Aesch. Prom. 627. ov ftfyaipu rovSf aoi oupJiparos (I do not enry you because of this gift). Attributive, e. g. (having admired him on account of his gentleness, education, etc.). Symp. 4, 45. T)\U Tlf iv r i, scrutari, investigare ; Trpoz/oetV, ir poo pav n (to perceive beforehand, to consider beforehand); tine pop civ ri and rivos, despicere, in the same sense. In poetry, /j.f\ei sometimes takes for its subject a noun denoting a thing, in the Norn. ; but in prose, it takes only a Neut. pronoun in the Nom. The verb is then used personally : Me\fiol iTTirot, II. K, 481. ToOra /*/ ow &e y /teA^tre , PI. Phaedr. 238, d. REM. 2. The verbs &avij./cpaTous r^v (roty'iav (I admire the wisdom in S crates, or the wisdom of Socrates) ; (c) the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, when one admires a person on account of some quality, e. g. &a.v/j.du 2co/cpdT7j rrjs ,uaa> ^.wKparovs rrjs eo-$ai, 7rposKaAer$ai (all with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing)", eTre^teVcu, eyKaAetv, eTna-Krrir- rej-Sai (all three with the Dat. of the person and the Gen. of the thing) ; eiryiv (to be accused) ; &/caeiv, KptVeiv, at/oeu', to convict (all three with the Ace. of the %)erson and the Gen. of the thing), and oAoivat, to be convicted. Her. 3, 145. rovs tiriKovpovs r i^wp-^ffo^ai TTJS eV&aSe airiios (will pun- ish the allies on account of the invasion of this land). (Ssldom Tt/xpef\ //.;/// sun.) 'ETTOIT to. ffbai nva 6 v o v (to pros- ecute one for murder), rpdtpta&ai -riva. irapa.v& p.av (to indict one for illegal Measures), *(vy(tv K \ oirrj y, 6vov, aat K\OTTTJS (to be convicted of theft). REM. 3. Also the punishment for guilt is put in the Gen., but this Gen. is to be considered as the Gen. of price ( 275, 3), e. g. bavdrov Kplvctv, KptVeo-^ot, SiwKftv (to sentence, be sentenced to death). Sometimes the prepositions repi and cVefca are joined with the verb, e. g. SiwKfiv ru-a irtpl s t pcrplus, and the like, also with as, was, OTTCOS, f), STTTJ, OVTWS, w8e, usavras, connected with the verbs %-%fiv and *5:eir, sometimes also with eivai and other intransitive verbs, the object by which a condition is caused or occasioned, is put in the Gen. Ka\ws (lam well in respect to my feet). Her. 6, 116. 'A&rjvatot, as TTO- TdxurTa ^SoVj&eov es rb &CTTV (as they were able ivith respect to their feet, i. c. as quickly as their feet would carry them). 5, 62. xpupdrav eS TJKOI/- T 6 s (well off for, to have a plenty of, means). So 5, Ka\as, fj.frplus x eu/ /Stou, Qpevuv, yevovs, 8vva.fj.fas (to be well off" as to the means of living). Oi "EAArji/es ovras flx" OfjLovolas Trpbs a\\-fj\ovs. X. Cy. 7. 5, 56. ovru rpdirov f X e IS (y ou are thus zw respect to circumstances, you are in such circumstances). H. 4. 5, 15. us rdxovs (KO.O-TOS f ?x cj/ ( as eac ^ UYts a0 ^ Z/J respect to swiftness, as guickly as each icas able). 392 SYNTAX. [$ 275. $ 275. (c) Genitive denoting certain Mutual Re lations. The third division of the causal Gen., includes the Gen. by which certain mutual relations are expressed, e. g. the relation of the ruler to the subject. As a ruler necessarily supposes a subject, and a subject a ruler, an inferior, a superior, etc., the one may, in a measure, be considered the cause or occasion of the other. Hence the Gen. is used : 1. With verbs of ruling, superiority, excelling, surpassing, sub- jection, inferiority : ap^tv, Kpamv, 8ecr7roeu>, rvpavveiv, rvpawevtw, crrparrjyeiv, eTriTpoTreueu', 7rto-raretv, /SacrtAeuav, ^ye/Aovet'av, etc.; with the adjectives ey/cpar^, u/cpar?;? ; also with iyiyyeo-^at, Trpocrraretv, VTrep/iJaAAeiv, v7rcptpLV, , Trpecr^evetv, TrpoKpiVetv, 7rpon/x.av, TrXeovcKrctv, etc.; fjrra- {xrrepetV, t>OTpteiv, eAaTTOt>o-$ai, /xeiovcr^ai, /xeiovexreiV, vorepov clvcu, ^rrova eTrai, etc. Her. 7, 97. roD rouTt/coi; ^ffrpar-fjjeoi/ ot'Se (these had the command of the naval forces), 3,15. eirirp oire ue t>/ Ai7t/7rTot; (to 6e *Ae governor of Egypt). Th. 1, 69. <5 A^os TOU Hpyov eKparei (the report exceeded the thing itself). X. Cy. 1. 1,2. fip^ovres /xeV etVt /cal ol fiovK6\oi TU>V $o>v, Kal ol iinro(pop&ol T>V 'l-mrcau, /col Trai/res 8e oi Ka\ov/j.evoi voxels, &v Uv ^TTKT- r a T > a t ^c6 to v //C^TWS av &pxovr e s TOVTWJ/ vop-i^oivro (all those called herdsmen might properly be considered the commanders of those animals of which they have the rule). 1. 2, 8. (ol Hepcrai TOVS 7ra?5as) SiSdaKovfftv tyKparfls flvai yaffTpbs Kal irorov (teach them to be masters of their belly, etc., temperate in eating and drinking). 4.1, 14. ^uol 5e So/ceT rrjs ^^ylffr^s r)Sovi)s iroAt* fj.d\i(TTa iria iraffiav, ol/xai, T>V sir iSv fj.iu> v aKparrj V fv 'SirdpTri yvvaiKwv (will surpass all the Spartan women in beauty). Th. 1, 81. TOIS oirXois avruv Kal rtf n-X^,9-ei virepe pofj.ev (are superior to them in arms, etc.). X. Ag. 5,2. 'Ayr)(ri\aos riysiTO apxovri irpos-fiKetv ov /ua\a/rjo, a\\a KapTfpiq TWV iSicarcav ireptf'ii'ai (that the commander ought to excel the privates, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 19. raxet TTC- pieyevov avrov (you excelled him in despatch). PL Gorg. 475, b. ex eTat r v *A \eyovros. 'Hrraffbai rtav tir&vptui/ (to be sub- ject to on's dtsii-tn). Di-in. Cor. 308, 244. oi5a/xoC rjTTTj&eij airrjA&oi' TWK wapct 4>jAt7nrou irp4ff&e(av (being overcome by or yielding to the envoys). X. C. 1.3,3 2wKpaTT?s bvfflas bixav piKpks airb /j.iKpwv ouSci/ ^yerro /ttioOv iroAAa /col ^-yciAa &v6vr wv (did not think that he uxu inferior to those making many great sacrifices, etc.). Hier. 4, 1. ij.cyd\ov aya- &ov ft.ftovfKTf'i (comes short of a great good). 'T er T e p e IV rf}s /x a x TJ s (to come after the battle). "Tffrfpi^ftv rStv Kaipuv (to be behind opportunities, to foil tousethem). "r T ^5 y ir6\e(o j, rOov tvavriwVfTuv tiri&vfj.i* icpelff- ffwv nvpiwv \6yuv /Sporors (is better than a myriad of words). Her. 7, 48. rb 'EAATjviKbc (rrpdrev/jLa ^aiVerat iro \\air \-fiff lov t ; TraAeiv, aTroStoW^at, TrcpiStSoo-^ai, 5t8dvcu' ; also with verbs of exclumging and bartering, e. g. 394 SYNTAX. [$ 275. dAAdrrav, dAAdTTeo-^cH, Sia/xet/3ea-$at, AiW, etc.; with verbs of Valuing, e. g. rt/xav, n/xaa-^cu, Troieur^at, diow, dtovora(, and Avith the adjective dtos. Genitive of price. Her. 5, 6. (of p-^i'/ces) wveovrai ras yvvdiKas irapa TWV yoveuv xp-r) par uv fj. e y d \ ca f (buy their wives at a great price) . X. C- 2. 1,20. T wj' irovwv irw\ov- ffiv yijuv TrdvTa royc&y ol &eot (i), Ae|oj/ ^toi, 7r<{(rou af irpiaio, &STC T^V yvvaiKa a.Tro\a.ftfiv (what would you pay to regain your wife). 'Ey&> /zei/, C^TJ, 5 KO/je, K&V TTJS 'J' vx ?7 s TT p i a f ft TJ j>, #sre ^TTOTC AaTpeCirat TOVTTJI/ (/ wow/W 6wy /ter a< fAe expense of my life). II. , 236. T6>x > ^M et ^ 6J/ XP Ure/a X a ^ Kf ' iCl)J/ t e/car^^ot' evitfafioifav (was exchanging arms, golden for brazen, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 37. /cat o"i 8e', 5 'Ap/xe'm, OTToyou T^>/ re ^uya'/ca /cat au-roi/s iraTSas /LtTjSei' avT&v /carafrety (nulla re pro us deposita, having paid nothing for them). Oi aya&ol ovSfi/bs aj/ itepSovs r^v TT)S irarpiSos f\eu^fplav ai'Ta\\a|atj/To (^Ae 9000? would exchange the freedom of their country for no gain). 11. A, 514. tVrp&s 70? av^p ic o \\tov avrd^ios &\\cav (is worth as much as many others). Her. 3, 53. 6 AvK^^pcav ouSe ava- Kpiffios T){T(poi' vo/j.ia) T&V tv av&puirois eli/at TOV ray tfftav T6v re aya&bv atov(rat. TI/JLO.I/ nvi TWOS and ru/d TLI/OS, e. g. Se/ca ra- , roG i^avcirou (to fine one ten talents, to sentence one to death, to con- sider one worthy of punishment). So the Mid., used of the accuser : Tipacrbai rtvi apyvpiov, &ava.T o u, to impose a fine, or penalty of death upon one ; com- monly, however, SI/CTJJ/ is here supplied. REM. 4. With verbs denoting to barter, to exchange, the relation is usually considered like a relation of space, and is denoted by avri with the Gen. REM. 5. The Gen. with substantives (attributive Gen. 262, b.) expresses a much greater variety of relations, than the Gen. with verbs. For where two objects are immediately connected with each other, there is always a mutual relation between the ideas they express ; the one depends upon the other, seems united with it, to proceed from it or in some way to belong to it. Hence the rule : When two substantives are connected with each other, the substantive which completes the idea of the other and defines it more fully, is put in the Gen. As ad- jectives or participles are, in their nature, nearly related to the substantive, many adjectives also govern the Gen., when the verbs from which they are derived, take the Ace., e. g. Kparia-Tou irarphs "EX^vcav rpaeis (sprung from, like natus alicujus), S. Ph. 3. REM. 6. The attributive genitive is called the Subjective, the Objective, or Passive genitive, according to the mode in which it originates in the sen- tence : (a) It is called the Subjective Gen., when it originates from the subject of the sentence or from a Gen. depending on efrat and yiyvfias), the beauty of wisdom, the W 276, 277.) ACCUSATIVE CASE. 395 beauty irhich iriadom HUMS. Ti TOV 'O/xVjpov iroi-fjuara. 'O TOV /3a verb, e. {r. 77 TT}S (rofas liribv/jila, the desire for wisdom (tinbv/jiu TTJT r, n'r- t nt i\t amor, the love of or for virtue (Ipia TTJS dperfjj) ; etivoid TII/OV, good-will to minis one (eVvovs (1/j.i TIVI) ; ^Tri/j.f\(ia TWV IT o \ f fj. i K > v epywv, cura rerum bi//icannn (iiri/jLf\ov/JMi TWV iroAc/UKau/ Hpywv). 'H TUV U \araitwv ^triffrpa- T/O instead of irpbs TOVS II., the expedition against the Plataeans. Til. 1, 108. tv airofid&d r^y 7^s instead of tirl rr)s y^s, /n disembarking on the land. (c) It is called the Passive Gen., when it originates from the passive object of transitive verbs in the Ace., i. e. when it takes the place of the object of a transitive verb, and so denotes the thing affected or caused by the transitive action, e. g. ^ T fj s ir 6 A. c w s Kriais (from icr/^et T^P v6Xiv), the city being that which is possessed. 'O TTJS ^iri(TTo\7js ypcuptvs (from ypdtyfi ^TntrroA^j'), the ^Tritr- ro\-fi being the object acted upon. 'H rtav Ka\S)v tpyw trpais, REM. 7. Sometimes one substantive governs two genitives expressing dif- ferent relations. Her. 6, 2. 'laricuoy virftivvf rfav *\v T^V f)yf/j.ovir}i> TOV wpbs Aapdov iro\4 pov the command of the lonians in the war against Darius. $ 276. (2) Accusative. The Ace. is the W/titJier-case, and hence denotes : (a) in the local relation, the goal, limit, or point to which the action of the verb is directed, e. g. ao-rv /toAetv, to go to the city ; (b) in the causal relation, the effect, consequence, object produced; also the object put by the action in a passive condition, i. e. the object on which the action is performed. 277. A. LOCAL RELATION. The Ace. in its local relation (Ace. of local termination), denotes the local limit, place, or object towards which the subject moves. Hence this Ace. is used with verbs of motion, going, coming, etc. ; yet this usage is found only in the poets, especially in Homer. Od. y, 162. of fj.lv airoo-Tptycun-fs t&av i/eas a.fitf\i(T (came to our house). S. O. T. 35. &u eTno-roAryi/. The original and simplest form of the Ace. of effect (of the object produced), is where a verb, either transitive or intransive, takes the Ace. of an abstract substantive, which is either from the same stem as the verb, or has a kindred signification. An attributive adjective or pro- noun or an attributive clause commonly belongs to the Ace. This is often called the Cognate Accusative. PL Symp. 181, b. ovr6s eVrw (6 e/jcus), $>v of 6pov (" / (gratia, for the sake. of). x&P lv *)d\ v -> ff ^ v (mea, tua, gratia), Svpfdv (gratis), Sur'u/ny, TrpoiKa., /XCTTJJ/ (incassum). So also roOro, ravra (therefore), ri (why), 6 (therefore}. Eur. Hec. 13. Vdaf.aTos S" tfv UpiafJ.i5wv S /ecu ^ue 77)5 U7re|e7re^i|/of. PI. Prot. 310, e. a\\' aura ravra vvv T^KW iraph (re (on this very account). 4. The Ace. denotes also the effect merely aimed at, the de- sign of the action ; yet almost always with neuter pronouns or adjectives merely, whereas with substantives a preposition, as ts, Trpo's, eTrt, is commonly used. The following verbs, in partic- ular, belong here : rivi ri (originating from xp^) ff ^ a/l T "" XP e ' aj/ ) to for something; vei^tiv (originating from irei&etv nvh irelffw) tiroT puve iv, irpoKa\e7 ^ TI Xp-flffofAat a.v r $. TiS^y xpi}0 6 jiie&a TOUTW; (for what purpose shall we use him, what use shall we make of him?). Tfj Kp-fivy TC\ irAeto-Tou 6|to expw^To (ad res maximi momenti), Th. 2, 15. netir&TJj'ai T^?y ai/ax^/"?*''"'* to ^ persuaded to a retreat (instead of the usual construction et's T. di/ox^p.)? ^. 21. Tavrd /3ao-9opetv, cTrtrpoTreucti/ (to provide with a 279.J ACCUSATIVE CASE. 399 KoAcuceveiv, ^toTrevav ($awrmv Poet.), irposicwtlv ; TTCI- (Poet, responckrc), remunerari; ^>vXaTTco-^ai, vXja/3ti(r3ai, ; /xi/xetcr^at, 77X0 uv (0 emulate). X. C. 1 . 2, 64. (SwKpdVrjs) avepbs T)P depaTreuw*' TOVS & e o u s (evidently WtntippeA the gods). Aesch. Ctes. 618. TIS ov efr; Sij^wrya^os rotou-ros, OSTIS TOP fij> 877/4 OP &iairfvi/rSou, OVTO 0a4>eAeiV TIVI but very seldom, and then in the poets; () aSiKftv et's, irpos, and irtpt TWO.; (7) affffitlv fls and irfpl TIVO.; eutre- frttv efs Tjva, ircpi, irp6s TIVOL\ (S) \vfj.al ve abal TIVI frequently 5 (e) Aa>)3a- ffbat TIVI sometimes ; (C) vftpl^fiv eft TWO. often ; (rj) tiriTpoirfVf iv Tiv6s somewhat frequently ( 275, 1). 'ApeV/ctii/ takes the Ace. only in the sense of to satisfy, but the Dat. in the sense of to please. REM. 2. Aw p eta-Sal Tivi TI (donare alicui aliquid, to present something to some one), is the construction in Attic prose, not Swpeurdcu Tivd TIVI (donare aliquem aliqua re, to present one with something). 2. Verbs signifying to do good or evil to any one, by word or deed, e. g. eue/ryereti/, Ka/covpyetv, KaKorroieiv ; euXoyetv, ev, KoXcu9, KaKws Xcyeiv, S. Aj. 1154. &vbpnfvov ifjil aviav ovKkvvvai/j.iiv ofrr* ev \fytv t ovr'cv IT o if 7 v (know- ing how to speak well of one who sjieaks well of me, and to do good to one who does well to me ; but I should not be able to speak well of or to do good to one who, etc.) In- stead of the adverbs tv and KOKWS with TOICU', etc., the Greek uses also the cor- 400 SYNTAX. [$ 279. responding adjectives ; hence Ka\a, icana irotetV, A.e'yetj/ r i v d (to do good or evil to one, to say good or evil of one). See 280. 3. Verbs signifying to persevere, to await, to wait for, and the contrary, e. g. /xeVetv (like manere), Trept/xevav, $a/5/ktv, Kapreptlv ; , airofavyav, ttTroStSpao-Keiv, SpaTrereveiv. M-); oSv avrbv Kal *v'yu (I run away from him, etc.). Dem. I. Phil. 50, 37. of TWJ/ irpay/j-dTcav Kcupol ou fj.svovffi T^V pav fipaSvrriT a (do not wait for your slothfulness). REM. 3. After the analogy of ^etfyeti/, other verbs also, which contain the idea of fleeing, e. g. those signifying to turn back from, to retreat from, to abhor, are constructed with the Ace., though but seldom, e.g. virox^p^lv TOJ/ ox^ov (to retire from the crowd) ; IKO-TT) vai Kivtivvov (to shrink from, shun fear) ; tKTptireff&aij vireKTpfirecr&ai, vir ee'px 6(ri ^ a ' ctToo'TpftpfO'&ai. Qap p *tv rift signifies to have confidence in something (Jidere aliqua re). 4. Verbs of concealing and being concealed: Xa^aveti/, Kp\nr- Tew(ceZare),Kpv7rTc i n tne sense of to need, are constructed with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing or person, of which or whom one is in need ; this construction, however, belongs only to poetry, e. g. Od. a, 124. /Avfrfiorfat, O'TTCO o"e XP"h (y ou w ^ ^ f what you are in need). Aesch. Pr. 86. avrbv ydp oi xpt 7 5. Many verbs denoting a feeling or an affection of the mind, e. g. o/37jrai, orav a.Kov ( / see that you are dis- gusted with, loathe this food). PI. Symp. 1 73, c. r ovs IT at povs t A 6 w. Dem. Cor. 290, 185. K ar air \ayij vat rbv &l\iirirov (to be panic-stricken by Philip). In poetry this use of the Ace. is much more extensive. lvi::vr. 5. Verbs which express the idea of motion, sometimes take (as transi- tive verbs) the Ace. of the thing put in motion by them, as a passive object ; tliis construction is used in poetry, seldom in prose. The following verbs especially belong here, fraiveiv, aiafffiv, /repay, ir\(it> pcireiv, ffirtvSf iV) etc. S. Ant. 1158. Tu;xrj KOT appfirei T~bv tvrvxovvra. ( frt nne sinks the fortunate man). 'Ex fiaivf iv, iir alia cr varia loco). Cy. 1.6, 43. a.y*iv (ffrpanav) v. arevas ^ \OT(as 65ovs. Dem. I. Phil. 49. 34. ayeav Kal Tas Sd- Xarrav (sailing through t/n> sea). Xpovov, T'OV xpu vov *f or a tl ' me y (different from xP v ?i ffvv Xp6f Sa^Secoj/ rpiuv r)/jLfpu>v oSo'f. X. C. 3. 6, 1. ouSeVco ef/c oaiv errj yeyovcas (like viginti annos natus, twenty years old). Here belongs the Ace. with Supaer&aj, ?o &e worth. Her. 3, 89. rb BafivXaiviov raAai/Tov Suvorot Evfto'iSas e/SSo/t^Koj/Ta [j.vfas (the Babylonian talent is worth [weighs as much as, amounts to] seventy Euboean rninae). REM. 6. In poetry, the Ace. of the local object is sometimes used even with verbs denoting rest, e. g. Kflvfrai, (m>at, ^tr^ai, ^oo-o-etj', Kabifcii', etc. (instead of eV with the Dat., as in prose). Here also the Ace. represents the space as the object acted upon, or taken possession of, e. g. S. Phil. 145. (r6irov irposiSe'ii/ &f\fis) ovriva Ketrat (quemjacens occupatum tenet). Comp. Larger Gram. Part II. 554, Rem. 3. REM. 7. The following prepositions are joined with the Ace. to define more fully the extension in space and time, viz., avd,froma lower to a higher place, e. g. ava iroTa/m.bv TrAe?!/, a.va vvKra ; Kara, from a higher to a lower place, e. g. Kara trora^bv ir\e?i/, Kara rbv fiiov ; a/j. T^pl T MTj5i/cc ; vir6, under, u' TJ\IOV, VTTO vvKra, sub noctem ; virep, over ; napd, near by, along, by the side of, e. g. irapa rbv Trora^bi/ Tropevfcr&ai, trap b\ov rbv fiiov ; eTrt, upon, e. g. lirl vwra &u\d(Tffris TrAe?*/, firl iroXvv -^phvov ; 5ta, through, e. g. S(a Sahara fiaiveiv, Sia vvKra ; juera ravra, postea ; Trpbs effirepav, towards evening. REM. 8. From this use of the Ace. to denote space, time, and quantity, very many adverbial expressions have originated: (a) rrjv raxiffrvv (6SoV), celerrime ; rriv irp&rriv, primiun ; rr\v (vSe'iav, rccte, straightforward ; /j.aKpdv, far ; a\\Tjv KOI a\Xrtv, sometimes here, sometimes there, etc. II. i|/, 116. iroAAa 5' a v a v ra, KaravTo, irdpavr d re, 5<^XM tc * T> ^ ^ov ( they passed over many up hills, down hills, straight and cross ways ; (b) (rri/^epov, to-day ; avpiov, to-morrow ; apx'hv, Triv apxriv, properly, at first, omnino ; TeAos, rb rf\evra7ov, finally ; vtov^ lately ; irpSrepov, Trparov, rb irpwrov, rb irpiv, rb auri/ca, rav vv, rb TroXat, rb ira\ai6v, rb \onr6v, etc.; (c) TroAAa, saepe; ra iro\\d, plerumgue ; TroAu, /xe'ya, fj.*yd\a, fj.e- yiffra, b\iyov, /j,LKpoy, it.iK.pd, trvxi/a, /xa/cpa, "icrov, TOCTOI/TO, Trdvra, etc. So also 7. Finally the Ace. is used with intransitive or passive verbs and intransitive adjectives of every kind, to explain and define their meaning more fully. Here, also, the Ace. represents the object as acted upon or suffering, since it denotes the object to which the intransitive action of the verb or adjective, refers or is directed. This Ace. is used most frequently in specifica- tions relating to the body and the mind. This is called the Ace. of more definite limitation, sometimes the Ace. of synecdoche. $ 280.] DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 403 Tlor. 2, 111. Kd.jj.vtiv TOUT oos (that he was not desirous of those well-constituted in body for beauty, but oftliose well- adapted in mind, etc.). PI. Rp. 453, b. $tais xal yvu/jnjv tKav6s, Kal TO iroAe/u.ia &\KI/JLOS ?iv. X. Cy. 2. 3, l.OLVfffrii *c/>awAas rb ffu>/j.a OVK av>]s, KO! T^V $vx^ v ^ K Q.y*vve1 cu/Spi toiKtas. 8.4, 18. Hfivbs ravr-qv r^v rexvyv. So &av/j.affTbs rb fif- ye^oy, TO Ka\\os ( wonderful for his size and beauty, of wonderful size and beauty). The English commonly uses prepositions to express the force of this Ace., viz. in, in respect to, of; or when it stands with an adjective, the English sometimes changes the Ace. of the thing into a personal substantive, and makes the adjective as an attributive agree with it, e. g. a-ya&bs Ttxrnv t a good artist, comp. Eng. he is a good shot, i. e. marksman ; or the prepositions of or with are placed before the substantive denoting the thing, and the attributive ad- jective is made to agree with that substantive, e. g. vfavlas /toAos TTJI/ ^VXTIV, of or with a lovely spirit. REM. 9. Sometimes the prepositions fls, irpds, Kard are joined with the Ace., in which case the relation is analogous to an Ace. of space, denoting direction, as SiaQfpftv ( fs rt, e. g. fls apfr^v. X. C. 3. 5, 1 . ft/So^ortpa TJ iro\is fls Tck iro\e/jLLKa tffrai. 2ov (four plethra in width). 4. 2, 2. ol fj.fv t-jropfvovTo TO TTA^^OS us Sisx'^toi (two thousand in number). Moreover rouvavTiov, rai/avria, on the contrary ; ToAAo, in respect to other things ; rb o\ot>, omnino ; a^dVcpa, TOUTO (ravra) fiev rovro (TaDTo) Se; ouSfV, in no respect; rl, in some respect ; iroAAei, irdvra, etc. To tir ^6, TOUIT* ^/*e, rovvl tA.6> oi rov Tratoa. Her. 3, 88. y dfj,ov s robs tr p&r ovs eydfj.ee 6 Aapelos Kvpov Svo &vya- repas, "Aroffadv re Kal 'AprvtrT ovo/Jia (they called me this name, by this name). PL Rp. 471, d. ai'a/caAoOi'Tes' TavTa TO ov6/jiaTa kavrovs, REJIARK 1 . Instead of the substantive denoting the thing effected, the Ace. of a pronoun is frequently used. X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. raAAa fji.ifj.ovij.fvos rbv 2a*cu/. An. 5. 7, 6. TOVTO vfj.as 6|a7rcm>a(. This is especially the case with verbs of praise and blame, of benefit and injury, after the analogy of fyKjcrKc/, VTTO- (with both of these the Gen. of the thing is more usual) ; (c) of dividing and cutting into parts: &uco-&u, 8u- pV, TCfj.vfLv, BLav^Lv, KaTav/x/ ; (d) of depriving and taking away : orepe/, aTrocrrcpetv ; orepicrK6H>, tnAai/, d' vfJLiv (inquire of those under you respecting the things necessary for food). Eur. Hipp. 254. iroAAa St8aor/cet yap /*' ^ TTO\VS ftioros (teaches me much). Antiph. 5. 131, 14. 6 xp^ os Ka ^ V fyireipfa rap.)) KaAws exovra rovs av&pwirovs (teach men what is not proper). Her. 1. 136. rovs iroTSas rpia juoGva (they teach boys three things only). 6, 138. yKSiffffdv re TT\V 'ATTIK^JJ/ *col rpdirovs r>v 'Abyvaiuv fSiSaffKOV rovs iraTSas. X. An.3.2, 11. a.vap.VT]vov yuot /cat f^ap tv u! affi- Xero. Dem. Aphoh. 839, 13. r^v rip^y avoffrepe? fie (robs me of honor). Phil. 54, 50. ra T^e'repa ^/ios awoffrepe? (& 4>tXnnros). Kpinrra tre rb a r v x 17 M (I conceal the misfortune from you). Eur. Hipp. 912. ou /uV i\ovs, Kpvirreiv SiKaiov eras, Trdrep, Svs-rrpa^ias. X. Cy. 1. 3, 17. Trots fj.tyas fj.iKpbv i\s Uv olTos &f\oi T & a\\6r pia aTrotrrepeij/ ; (how could he be willing to take away the things of others ?), X. Ag. 4, 1. Xd\aCcu T& KO.\U>S fyvuxr- p.4va (provisa) /cat TreTrotrj/xe'va atpaipovvr 0.1 (take away, destroy the provisions), O. 5, 18 ; the Ace. of the person alone is but rarely found ; thus with a o s, rovs Se rvvruv ovSevbs aiou> T^V Srjjuo/cpcmcu/ airo (b) ffrepf'iv, airoffTfpf'tv, ffrcpiffKeiv, a

cuperV \ayca, avrovs 5e TTJS axpeXeias, X. Ven. 6, 4. (d) o^atpeTo-^oi, airoffr e pelv with the Gen. of the person and the Ace. of the thing ; they then signify to take something from some one, to withdraw something from some one. This is a more rare construction. Ot irXeovfttTai T>V &\\(0v a.(f>aipov/jt.evo i xP^/ J - aTa eaurous OOKOVVI V\OVT'I^LV (taking their property from others, seem to enrich themselves), X. C. 1. 5, 3. Sv^juaxfas atyatpov [AGVOV TTJS Tr6\(as (= T>V TVO\ITU>V) Dem. Cor. 232, 22. El? TI f$ov\ovTa.i einTTjoeveiv Ka\uv, ovSevbs air offT e pet (TO. KvvTjytffia), X. Ven. 12, 8. "Osris, /J.T) &\\, KoXeiv ', to give, to take, to receive, e. g. TrapaXafietv 8e- etc. ; to produce, to increase, to form, to teach, to educate. I. I ACCUSATIVE CASE. 407 Kvpos rovs educate one wise, i. e. inj /nr. 4'5. 01 trra\ol Kal r)(3aioi tyi\ov, c it e p yt TTJ v t aur^pa. rbv * i A j IT * o v yyovvro. 'Qvop.af iv riva. a o tp i o~ r 4\ v (to cull one a sophist). Alpftff&ai riva orpo.rr\yov (to choose one a commander). X. Cy. 5. 2, 14. TO*- ru&pvav yvvSenrvov irapt\a&fi'. Dem. Chcrs. 106, 66.WAeo>s tytoyf w\ovrov riyovpai ff vfj.fj.dx us "flvriv^ ftvoiav. Andoc. 3. 24, 7. 7; rby Srj /J.QV ruv ' A&rjvaiwi' u^TjAov ^p *col REM. 5. On the use of the Inf. ftvai with the Ace., sec 269, Rem. 1. $281. Remarks on the use of the Accusative with the Passive. 1 As the Greek considers the passive as a reflexive ( 251, 1), it follows that, on the change of the Act. to the Pass., the Ace. may remain with every transitive verb which in the Act. takes an Ace. of a thing as the object acted upon, e. g. (ttAirrovai rb, /XTO>TTO), K 6irr o vrai TO fj. e'rw TT a, which may mean, either that they strike themselves on the forehead, they strike their forehead, or they let their forehead be struck, they are struck on the forehead; Her. 7, 69. 'Apd&ioi (cipas virf^ua-- fjiiv 01 %v K\I)- (^fljTa (r) 2,tKf\ia), 6, 4 (was called by its first name). 'H xpiffis, *i)v (to which he was condemned), Lys. Agor. 134, 50. To /j.eyiffra S. 0. R. 1203. Afo-/tbj> Svs f^fvffrov eX/ferot S e^c i s, Eur Hipp. 1237. So ti>e\e'iff&ai. fa/juova&at p.fyd\a, &\dirTfSovf)&rii' ; so may it also with such transitive verbs as have, together with the Ace. of the thing, a Dat. of the person, the Dat. of the person being changed into the Nom., but the Ace. of the thing remaining. Th. 1. 1, 26. ol TUV 'ASrivaiuv firirerpa.jj.4voi r^v v\aK"f)V (quibus custodia demandata erat, those of the Athenians who had been entrusted with the guard, from eTriTpe-rrca rivl rr}V v\a.KTiv). 5, 37. ol Kopivbioi raura eTrecrraA/xeyot atfex^povir (having been commanded these things) : 1, 140. el |uyx w / )1/ / " eT > Ka ^ #AA o r i jtte?- o v ev&vs ^TrtTax^^ff^e (you will be commanded something greater). X. An. 2. 6, 1. of o~rparr)yol airoT /J.TT) & evr e s ras /ce rots TroAiYais or TYJ TroAa; (/?) a thing, or an object considered as a thing, e. g. dyaAAo//,at TY} 1/1/07. In this way the Dat. may be treated under three divisions. In the first, the Dat. is regarded as a local object, in the second, as a personal object; in the third, the object is a thing, and is called the Dat. of the thing or instrumental Dat. 283. A. Local Dative. 1. The Dat, as a local object, designates the place in (by, near, at) which an action occurs. This use of the Dat. is al- most exclusively poetical ; in prose, prepositions are commonly joined with the Dative. II. t, 663. avrci.p 'AxiAAeus eSSe fJ.vxv /cAtli. ras ir^Amj lvtirlp.irpa. avro'ifft ro7> fiti< x toythir trlth tin: fmiji/cs cites, temples and all). X. II. 6. 2, 35. a* ajrb 2ypcufoixro>v i/fjey Hiraacu taAaxrcu' aurots avSpdffiv (die ships were taken together with the mm). 3. The local relation is transferred to the time in which some- thing happens, and then from the time to the circumstances under u-l/ich something happens. Hence the Dat. denotes the time (definite) and circumstances of an action. In prose with r/jUf'pa, VVKT[, /x/ji/t, rrei, &/tavr, &pq and the like, in connection with attributive demonstratives, ordinals, and adjectives, as irpfcepos, vo-repos, (iriwv, vap<\&v and the like. The Dat. therefore usually expresses definite time. TpSe r?7 vvurl, ravrr) rfj T)/j.pq, tKfivp ry ri/j.tpq, rfj OUT 77 VVKT(, iro\\o7s erccri, rplru> /J.i)t>t, rfj avrf) Sipq, ry iiri6vri 6TJ, I K I V ca TO? CTft, Tip V ff T 4 p <*> CT6t, T V T (f T

pa xeijUcDvos (in time of winter), vov/j,i)via (at the time of new moon)j likewise, nava^j/ouois, Aiovv ^" "VKri^ lv Stpfi : often also when a demonstrative stands with it, e. g. 4v TOVTUI ry tviavry ; (b) usually, when a space of time is to be indicated ; hence with substantives in connection with cardinals and the adjectives oA.ryos, Ppaxvs, fj.n, e. g. &vu, Kara, etc. ; those in -o i, e. g. TTfSoi, humi, humum; evravfro'i, hue and hie (but of, OTTOI, TTOL, always denote the direction whither}. 3. Most verbs, which take the personal Dat., as the object sharing or participating in the action, express the idea of associa- tion and union, e. g. StSoVai, Trape^etv, VTTto-^vetcr^at, a/)7raeiv ri nvi. The following classes of words, therefore, govern the Dative: (1) Verbs expressing mutual inter course, associating with, mix- ing ivith, participation. Dative of communion, e. g. 6/xtAeu/, /xtyvuvaij /xtyvucr^ai, KOLVOVV, K.owovcrSa.i, KOivoovetv, 6V, KaraXA-arretv (to reconcile}, Si-, KaraXXarTeo-^ai (to reconcile one's self to), evoi)- o-$ai, o-Trei/oW^at or o-7rov8as Troteto-^at, Trparretv ( agere cum aliquo) ; fiTTfLV, Acyeiv, 8uxA.ey9, aet IT e A a ^ i ( like always draics to like), PL Symp. 195, b. "l^ovro avrloi roiffi AatcfSainovloiffi (encamped opposite the Lacedaemonians), Her. 6, 77. Tvpavvos OTTOS ^x^pos ttevbtptq Kal v&nois tvavrios. On the Gen., see 273, Rem. 9. (3) Verbs of commanding, entreating, counselling, inciting, en- couraging ; of following, accompanying, serving, obeying and diso- beying, trusting and distrusting, e. g. Trpoyrarrctv, eTrirarmv, Trapat- vcii', 7rapaKeA.evecr&u, etc. (but KcXvv with Ace. and Inf.) ; CTrecnSai, (^o succeed to, take the place of) ; 7m'9ecr- etv, TTMrrevctJ/, TreTTOt^evat, etc.; the adjectives and adverbs djcoAov^os, aKoXovSus, CTro/xei/w?, X. Cy. 8. 6, 13. TOUTWI/ i/ (instead of o) i/Cy u/uTj/ irapaKf\fvo^ai ovSev TO Is Sov\ois TrposraTTca (I enjoin upon the slaves none of these things which I now command you). Her. 3, 88. 'Apd&ioi ou5o/io K ar^Kova-av M SovXoavvy Utpcrrja-i (never obeyed, were never subject to the Persians). 6, 14. tvavfidxfov roiVi ffrparrjyo Tovos; and very many words compounded With op,ov, crvVy fJi.f.Ta., e. g. ofjiovoeiv, 6/xoyXcorros, ofJLw Her. 1, 123. ray iro&as TOJ Kupow Trjv tpycav Qevpitv. Th. 1, 49. r) vavfj.axi-0- TfCA ta X* a T p o a"

sirep, K. T. A. (5) Expressions signifying to be becoming, suitable, fitting, to please, and the contrary, e. g. Trpiirew, d/D/x-ormv, TT/OOS^KCIV (with an Inf. following), TrpeTrovrcos, aTr/aeTrojs, etKos ICTTLV, ei/cora>5, apeT< apea-ras opxetro (he danced pleasing himself '). X. Cy. 3. 3, 39. ap 43ovdv (TLVI TWOS, $ 274, 1, more seldom nvi n), (to envy ; /Jao-KcuVeii/ TWO, slander). The Ace. of the thing very often stands with the Dat. of the person. Her. 3, 142. fyw TO. (= &) T< ircAa* ^TT i IT A TJ 0- rifji'iv (> 4>jA.j7nroj (gave trouble to us). X. An. 2. 5, 13. AlyvTrr'iovs, ols ^uciA/ora fytas i/t/i/ yiv^ useful, e. g. d/xwciv, dXt'^ctv, Ti/xcopetv, (3or)3eiv, eVt*covpctv, aTroAoyctcr^ai, Xctv, CTrapKetV, ^pawr/xetv and the like (but ovivdvat. and with Ace. $ 279, 1.) ; also several verbs compounded with s, ToXe^tos, etc. X. K. L. 4, 5. &p^|ou(rt T^ iroAet Train-1 o-^eVei ($ey cwsz'sf <^e ciVy twevyfiv KaraXnr6v ras, o\\' a.fj.vvai KO! aurats, /cal reKvois, KO! atyiaiv avrots (to de- fend them, their children and themselves). 4.3,2. rovrois ydp l\os, tx&P*i oX/*ioj are also used as sub- stantives, and govern the Gen. X. An. 3. 2, 5. rows ^/cetVou ^x^^ a " rovs (his bitterest enemies). Hence the Dative stands, in general, with verbs and ad- jectives of all kinds, when the action takes place for the advantage, favor, honor, hn, HJ. disadvantage of a person, or an object considered as a person (Dativus commodi et incommodi), where the English uses the prepositions to or for. Here belong particularly the rites performed in honor of a divinity, e. g. opxfw&cu rols &fo?? (to dance in honor of the gods) ; ffTpavovfaro ^ciAKeoj/ eyx 05 (received from him [as a favor to him] the brazen spear). See Larger Granim. Part. II. 597, Rem. 3. (8) Verbs of observing, finding, meeting ivith something in a person. "fir o\a jU/3 dve iv SeTry Toiovrca, Sri eirfibi)s ris fobptatros (scil. ear/;/), PL Rp. 598. d. "Erepa STJ, us eoie, rots tj>v\aiv evpj Ka/iey, 421, e. Qapaovffi juaAitrra iro\f/j.ioi, OTO.V rots vavrio is irpdyfjiara Kal atrxoAfas irvv&dvtovTai (when they perceive troubles and hindrances in those opposed to them), X. Hipp. 5. 8. (9) The Dative stands with eo-Tt(v) and eio-i(v), to denote the person, or thing considered as a person, that 7ias or possesses something. The thing possessed stands as the subject in the Nom., but the verb is translated by the English have, etc., and the Dat. as the Nom. So also with yiyveo-^ai and vTrdp^iv (to be, exist), also with tSios and d K u p ca ?iv neyd\T) fiaffiteia ( Cyrus had a great kingdom }. ToTs ir\ovl tyv&pas &a\do'o~ris ( which dwell as one enters Syria [from the entrance of S.] to the Red Sea). Also the expression us yap, us yepovri, irpovcrTd\ijs 6S6y (you went forward a great way, for an old man, as an old man would view it). Ant. 1161. KpW yap 3\v fr\a>T6s, us ^ot, irore (in my opinion). PL Soph. 226, c. raxfiav, us tpol, ffKetyiv lirirdTTfis. Her. 3, 88. yd^ovs robs irpurovs 3yd/j.fe Tlepa'rja'i 6 Aapetos (matrimonia ex Persarum judicio nobilissima, con- tracted very honorable marriages, in the judgment of the Persians). Altogether usual in the phrase &i6s elfj.1 nv6s nvi, or even without the Gen., & { 1 6 s ftpi nvi (I am of value in the estimation of some one). X. C. 1. 2, 62. fyol /uev Sr) 2, ^5o/iva>, a.ff/j.fi'u, ^XTToyueVo), ax&o(j.tt>ct>, trposSexofj-fvu and the like, in connection with verbs, most frequently with eTi/cu and ytyveffbai. Such a participle gives definiteness to an otherwise indefinite assertion. El ravrd oroi ^8ouA.o/tej/y toriv (if tJds is to you wishing it, if this is your wish). Ovr6s pot T? 5 o p. 4 v u aTTTjiTTjtfej' (he met me to my joy). Her. 9, 16. -rjdo/j.fvoio'i}' Tip.1v ol \6yoi ye- y6faffi. Th. 6, 46. r$ Hilda irpo sSexopf vca T]V ra. irept ruv 'Eyfffraluv (were as Nicias expected). PI. Rp. 358, d. aAA' opa t eJf v K&s /not Trp6rfpov SeS^Awrat (as has been before shown by me). Dem. Aphob. 844, 1. 8e? 8*7777? (Tacr&at ra TOUTW TT e IT pay p.4v a nepl rj/j.wv (it is necessary to describe what has been done by him). 01. 1. 26, 27. rl TT 4 IT paicr at ro?s &\\o is ; (what has been done by others ?). In this way a Perf. Act., which is wanting, may be supplied, e. g. ravrd /tot AtAe/crot (I have said this). (12) So also the active person or agent stands regularly in the Dative with verbal adjectives in -TO? and -reo?, [$234, 1, (i)], both when they are used, like the Latin verbal in -dum, im- personally in the Neut. Sing.: -roV, -re'ov, or PI. -ret, -rea ( 241, 3.), or when they are used personally, like the Latin participle in -dus ; those derived from transitive verbs, i. e. such as govern the Ace., admit both the Impers. and the Pers. construction ; but those derived from intransitive verbs, admit only the im- personal. The impersonal verbal Adj., in addition to the Dat. of the agent, governs the same Case as the verb from which it is derived. Tb a-rpdreu/jLa evfiri&eTov $v fi/Tav&a rots TT oAe/ifo is (could be easily attacked by the enemy), X. An. 3. 4,20. 'AtrKTjreo v (or -Tfo) eVrt croi r^v aperrjv (you must practise virtue or virtue must be practised by you). 'Eirt&u/tT/- Tfov eVrl ro7s av&p&irois TTJS aperfjs (there must be a desiring by men, men must desire virtue). 'ETT ix l P 7 l' r * ov ^^ ff l T $ ^PJV (y ou must attem P^ the work). #ij/ui 5^ ^orj^ijTeov etvai rots irpay^affiv v/j.?v (I say that you must render assistance), Dem. Ol. 1. 14, 17. KoAao-reoi/ effrl ~irov (you must punish the man}. 'Ao-KTjre'a ftrrt is letjibun) from ird^ofj.ai TIVI, obtempero aliciti ; aira\\uKTfov I cbnjX^oi', ewota, dSwaa, 6f3w, vfipei Trotetv TI ; especially with verbs denoting the State of tlie feelings, e. g. ^atpctr, ^Seo-^at, ayoAA.ecr.3at, eVaipecr- $0.1, \VTreicr3a.i, dvtacr^at, aXyeiv, CK-, Ka,Ta.7rX.r]TTO'9a.L ', jai)/xa^tv J eA.7Tt^etv ; (Trip-yew and ayairav, dpeo-Kto-^at, dp/ccta^at (all four : to be content, to be pleased with something) ; dyavaKretv, ^aXeTroi?, ySapeco? ^>petv, d^^co-^ai ; atcr^uvco-^at, etc. X. C. 1.3, 1. ol &ol Tats irapa ruv ev&ffifffTdToov Tifials /toA.J(TTo ff t v (are especially pleased with the honors from the most devout). Her. 478. 5 t a i - rrj oi/Sa/xwj ijpeffKTo "ZKv&iicfi (was by no means pleased with the Scythian mode of life). Th. 4, 85. &au|ucia> T fj O.TTOK \ftffe i p.ov TUV irv\uv (1 am surprised at the shutting of the gates against me). 3, 97. t\irifii' T 77 TV xy (to hope in fortune). Urtpyw TO?S trap ovfp'u Tols \Zyots. Dem. Ol. 3. 13, 14. ay air {] ft o o* J, X. C. 2. 7, 7. So also with adjectives, e. g. iffx v Ps x f p ff ^ v t Taxs troffiv, etc. REMARK 1. The preposition M, on account of, at, is very often joined with the Dat. ; thus commonly, xoAeirws tyipeiv lirl TIVI, bavfjLd&iv ^TTI TIVI ; 5 v s x < - paivu usually with the Ace., 279, 5; we also find ayairw, ffTtpyw, /SapeW, 418 SYNTAX. [$ 285. (2) The means and instrument, by which an action is accom- plished. Hence the Dat. also stands with x/^o-^ai (uti) and its compounds, and with vo/u'eiv (to be accustomed to). Ai&ois (to throw with stones = to throw stones). 'AKOVTI^CIV a i (to hurl with spears = to hurl spears}. X. Cy. 4. 3, 21. 6 ju/ li Svo'iv o <&a AjttoTj/ irpoctoparo Kal SvoIV &TOIV tficovfv fy&> Se (Aev 6(p&a\fJ.ots TeKfj.apovfj.ai, r err apff i Se wa\ irpoaiff&T}(rofj.ai TroAAct yap irdvTa Trj av&puirivri yvd>fj.r), TCUS Se x f P ff \ v oir\o, as in the Lat. utor te fido amico, I have thee for a true friend). X. An. 1. 4, 15. vfj,?v TT iff TOT O.TOIS xp^fffTai Kal fls

v in military expressions, with reference to a retinue or force, in order to represent this as the means by which something takes place ; this usage is found particularly with verbs of going and coming. Such Datives are ffTpaTcp, trrJAo), irA^&et, vav (with not a small number). 4. 39. ol nf\OTrowf)ffioi a.vt-)(jap-t\aa.v T $ povpia /care- p.ti.v*v (having rode up with the cavalry). An. 7. 6, 29. &appa\feoA.7>cu, tyfvabrivai (to be deceived in opinion), Th. 4, 18, Her. 7, 9. Her. 1, 184. ^f/j.ipafjus yfvffjai Tr4vre irp6rfpov tyfvfro TT}? NiruKpios (was before Nitocris by fite generations). So woAAy, oA/yw, /juKp/S, TOGOVTCI), o rov 6ir\triKov &\as (advanced with a noise and a cry). X. Cy. 1.2, 2. (oi v&poi) irpoffrdTTOvffi n^j /3 i a fls oiKiay irapifrcu (forbid to enter a Jtouse by force). So bopv&a, Kpavyrj, ftofj fftyfj iroifiv ri (to do something with a noise, etc.) ; 6^07, e'Tri/j.ftetq, typoo-ia. (sc. 65y), I5ia (&S, near, ivt, at and itjion, avv and perd, icith ; (b) into such as express local opposites : iiri, upon, Av<, /?, virtp, over, and uird, nnffer, xard, doirn (under), irp6, irpAs and kvrl, before, in front of and the improper prepositions 8irtVy OV. 'AlTO VVKTOS aTTT/A^OV (ft'OWl iiiht, immediately after the beginning of night). 'ATTO U/A- /x a xi as auroVo/xoi euro' (from, by virtue of tJie alliance). 6. Each preposition has a fundamental meaning, which it everywhere retains, even when it is connected with two or three Cases ; but it receives various modifications according to the different Cases with which it is connected, because the local relation varies with each Case. Comp. Rem. 1. The fundamental meaning of prepositions is most evident, when they express local relations ; it is generally quite evident in those of time also ; but in the causal relations, it is often very obscure. KEM. 2. Originally all the prepositions were merely adverbs of place. See $ 300, 1. The prepositions enumerated in No. 3, may be called Proper prepo- sitions, inasmuch as during the cultivated period of the language', they either were not used at all, or but very seldom, as adverbs of place, without a sub- stantive ; accordingly, they have the regular functions of prepositions : they differ from the Improper prepositions : of these latter, the following classes may be named : (a) both adverbs of place and other adverbs, which, though they regularly have the functions of adverbs, are sometimes, in connection with a substantive, used as prepositions, e. g. a.Trdirpo&ei', &vev, St'xo, o,ua ; (b) substantives in connection with the Gen., e. g. SI'KTJJ/, instar, xd.pw, gratia, eVe/co, on account of. L PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE ONLY. $ 287. (1) 'Ai/rt and irpo, before. 1. 'Avrt (Lat. ante, before, in the face of, opposite, etc.), orig- inal signification : in the face of (before, over against) ( 1 ) in a local sense (in prose seldom) ; (2) in a causal or figurative sense : (a) in adjurations, instead of the common word Trpo's with the Gen.; (b) with expressions denoting comparison (e. g. with the comparative), valuing, weighing, requital; hence with words of buying, selling, bartering, value, worth, likeness or 36 422 SYNTAX. [$ 287. unlikcness, prefereMce ; (c) of the cause or ground, when it expresses the idea of making compensation, as in Q.V& ov, av& &v, for what ? ivJierefore ? (d) of substitution, giving an equiva- lent, etc. (1) (Tb \ irdffxoicv $ virb rSiv j/ \ibav, $ virb rwv Kv\iv$ovfji4vQtv ; (be- hind which, since the trees stood before the soldiers), X. An. 4. 7, 6. (2) (a) 'Ayr I valSuv ruvSc... /KTi5oftei/, sc. ere (for the sake of. as it wefe standing before), S. O. C. 1326. (b) (A.vKovpyos Kareipydararo) ev TT? TroAet at p ertSr epov eTwi rbv Ka\bv frdvarov avrl aiffxpov fiiov (is better than, is preferable to a disgraceful life), X. R. L. 9, 1. Tfyv re\fvr))v brrl TTJS T&V tyvrw fftortipias ^A\a|avTo (exchanged death for the safety of the living), PL Menex. 237, a. TIarrjp vibv avrl irdvr tav r S>v &\\ vavroiv (in place of all which I have), X. An. 1. 7, 3. (d) AovAos brrl Sfcr- ir6rov (a slave instead of a despot). 'Avrl ypfpas vb ^eVero, Her. 7, 37. 'Avrl rov ndx^vba-t irefoeo-frai e'^eAci, X. Cy. 3. 1, 18. 'Ami is never used of time. 2. II/oo, original signification: on theforesi.de (pro, prae, be- fore, figuratively, in behalf of), (1) local; (2) of time; (3) causal and figurative : (a) in behalf of (for the good, for the weal) ; with expressions denoting comparison (hence with the Com. degree), valuing, estimation, like avri, but always with the accompanying idea of standing before, preference ; hence it is used to express preference in general ; (b) of an inward, mental cause, occasion, inducement (only Poet.) : on account of, prae, e. g. II. p, 667. 77730 6f3oLo (prae inetu, for fear, on account of fear). (1) MivaaT) vriv xpt](ji.dro)v ri^craff^ai n ( to value before much tuealth). (Tovrov) irpb irdvriav xprj/iarwj' Kal ir6va>v Trpial/j,T)v &v <$>[\ov p.oi flvai, X. C. 2. 5, 3. TLpb rovrov re&vdvai &v juaAAov eAoiro (for him), PL Symp. 179, a. 'Emupct? irpb 5i/ca/o(Tui/7js aSutiav (to praise injustice before, rather than, in preference to justice), Up. 361, e. REMARK. The reason that the prepositions avrl and irp6 are not con- nected with the Dat., like prepositions of the same meaning in other languages. * 268.] PREPOSITIONS. 'A, IK. 423 but with the genitive, is owing to the fact, that the Greek language regards the eolation (leiiotol by before, in front of, not merely as local, but implying action, a relation of dependence. The like holds of the prepositions vir4p t *p6s, tiid, an fiprjO'&cu, X. S. 2, 10. ( AJ ira\aial iro\is) a-jrb &a.\d' fffirepas] airb riav airb r iav KaTa\ei' lavrov (from his own imjnihc). (e) vavTixbv airb -rrposoSui/ (by revenues), Th. 1, 81. (f) 'Airb TUV v (*t'\iinrTT-r)s flirelv (by heart, by word of mouth) ; airb (rirouSris (zealously), (g) 'ATT' OV\V/J.TTOV otfpe- os KaXsovrai Ov\v/j.Trir)i>oi (are called from, derive their name from mount Olympus)^ Her. 7, 74. 'Airb ^vp.jj.ax ias aurJj/o/iot (by virtue of), Th. 7, 57. 2. 'E, e/c (ex), out of (opposite of ev, in), denotes (1) in a local relation : (a) removal either from within a place or object, or from immediate participation or connection with a place or object, with verbs of motion; hence an immediate succession of one object after another; (b) distance with verbs of rest: without, beyond (Epic), e. g. CK /SeAeW, extra telorum jactum; (2) of time, immediate outgoing from a point of time; then especially the immediate development of one thing from anoth- er, an immediate succession of two actions ; (3) in a causal and figurative sense : (a) of origin; (b) of the whole in relation to its parts, or in relation to what belongs to it, often with the accompanying idea of choice and distinction; (c) of the author with passive or intransitive verbs, instead of TTO, almost ex- clusively Ionic, used particularly by Herodotus, seldom in Attic prose ; (d) to denote the occasion or cause ; (e) of the material ; (f) of the means and instrument; (g) of conformity : according to, in consequence of, by virtue of, after. (1) 'E/c rrjs ir6\fios &Trrj\&ov, tit TTJS /j-dx^s etyvyov (out from the city, out from the battle, while OTTO would merely signify away from) ; e/c yr,s eVau- (out from the land). PI. Polit. 289, e. ol 8e ir6\iv IK WXews a\\dr- a ^tdXarrav Ka\ irerj (changing from city to city). Apol. 37, d. Ka\bs av juot 6 &ios eft; a\\r)v ^| a\\7)s Tr6\ea>s d/xei/So^eVw (comp. ex alio loco in alium migranti). (2) 'E ^jiicpos (ex quo dies illuxit, as soon as it was day).] IK rov- rov (sc. xpdvov) immediately after this; e/c VVKT&S or CK VVKT&V; IK irai- Stav (from very childhood); e| vffrfpov (subsequently); K rov \OITTOU. Her. 9, 8. e ^^.epTjs fs j]/j.epriv aj/oj8oXA.o^iefoi (ex die in diem, delaying from day to day, day after day). 1,87. e 1 * Se at^ptrjs re Kal vrjve/j,iT)s fa (immediately after fair weather, etc.). Th. 1, 120. e fjikv eip-f]vris 7ro\e/i6ij/, e/c 8e iro\efiov Trd\iv t,vp.$r)vai (to go to war after peace, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 17. 6 ffbs irar^p eV rfjSe ry /utct rjftfpa e'| atypovos ff&$p(av yeyevrjTai. (3) (a) ET>at, ylyvfff&ai e/c rivos (to be descended from some one, e'/c indicating more direct descent, while 4^0 may be used of one more remote), (b) 'E| 'A&r? val wv ol apiffroi (the best of), (c) Her. 3, 62. TO ^j/Tero\/*eVa e'/c rov Mdyov (the things commanded by Magus). Ib. irpooeo6evye ATjyuaprjTos e'/c STT^TIJS ^/c rotovSe ovet- 5 eos (on account of ). So e/c iravrbs TOV vov (with all the heart) ; K fit as and the like. Her. 2, 152. IK rrjs 8tyios TOV oveipov (in consequence of), (g) $289.] PREPOSITIONS. *Ei/, f< n v;:iil;irly UM mea,tua gratia; c. ci/c/ca (fvtKfv even before consonants, as CJ/CKO even before vowels in the Attic writers, tivtKa and ciVeKci', Ionic, but not wholly foreign to the Attic dialect, o[/Ve/ca in foetrv).r rots v^r)\o7s OffSpfffiv eiffi ffKiapai. 'Ev oir\ots, tv r6ois $iayuvlc7, Iv Scurf, Iv o'/8o>, Iv opyrj elvcu. PI. Crito. 43, c. al ciAAoi Iv rojauraty ^v/jKpopa'is a\io~- KOVTCU (are taken in, involved in such calamities). Phileb. 45, c. Iv rotovrois v o eTvat (to be equal) ; eV ySovy fj.ol corny (it is pleasing to me)] so also with ex tv an( * Trotetjr^at, e. g. 6 y o> o f , ^ v cAa^py Trotertr^ai (to esteem equally, to esteem lightly). 'Ev e/i o i, e y o~ o t eerri rt (penes me, te, it is in my power, etc.) ; hence the phrase ev laury cTvat (to 6e in one's senses, sui compotem esse) ; (b) Iv &pf tv $ (ivhile, during)] Iv Tre'vre rjfiepais (during, in the space of). (3) 'Opav, 6paff&ai, Iv o^^aA/iots, Poet, (to see. be seen with the eyes) ; then in other connections among the poets, Iv irvpl /ccuW, Iv Setr/xy Srjffai, Iv xe/xrl AajSelv, Horn. (to 6wrn zcjfA ^re, etc.). In prose, especially in Xenophon, Iv is used to denote the means, in the expressions STJ\OI/V, ST}AOV eTvai, trTj/xatVetv ev TIV*. X. Cy. 1. 6, 2. STI /xev, S Tra?, of &fol /? /mats, c( T* tXPW "foietv Kal & OVK 'Ev S/KJ7, Iv o'tcuTTTj. Th. 1, 77. Iv TO?* 6/j.oiois v6(ji.ois ras iroifiv (according to the same laws). So Iv fifpei (according to his part, in turn). 'Ev !/iof, ev i\cav) Itrrrv ovfiafjiias o*iv rf) fit a, a\\a p.a\\ov ffvv rfj eiifpyeffiq (not by violence, but rather kindness). (b) Upotfvai ffvv Kpavyrj, avv y4\WTi lA^eTv (with a shout, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 15. 7roVe/>a 5' ^777, 5 Kvpe, a/j-ewov elvat, (ruv rep o~tp aya&

S. 427 (c) 1. 3, 17. v tK(\tu(v ad rbv SiKaffr^jv T^V tyri (to vote with, in accordance withthelaw). (d) "2,vv r . REMARK. Of the adverbs used as improper prepositions, there belong here fijua (una cuwj), and several which are constructed also with the Gen., as has been seen, in treating of the Gen. and Dat. $290. 3. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE Ace. ONLY: 'Ava, is AND ws. 1. 'Ava (on, up, upon) signifies from a lower to a higher place, and is directly opposite to Kara with the Ace., which signifies from a higher to a lower place ; the use of ova. is more frequent in poetry than in prose. It is used (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote a direction towards a higher object; (b) to denote the extension from a lower to a higJier point, from bottom to top : througliout, tJirough, both with verbs of motion and rest; (2) in a temporal relation, to denote continuance or a period of time : per (seldom) ; (3) in a causal sense to denote manner ; then particularly in a distributive sense with numerals. (1) (a) Od. x, 132. & (pl\oi, OVK av S-fi ns av" op ffoStvpnv ava&ai-n (up to the lofty gate). This use is rare and only poetic ; in prose only in the phrases ava rbv irora/Jiov, ay a p6ov ir\iiv, up the stream (the opposite of KOTO, iroTapov, down the stream); (b) II. v, 547. (Xei|/) ovck i/ura btouffa (ab injima dorsi parte usque ad cervicem) ; so ova 5a>/xo, ava , fyty, Yapydpta aKpca in Homer. So eu'Sei 5' ava wanTa Atbs euerds, Find. 2. Ek (e? Ionic, Doric, and old Attic) is only a modified form of eV, and denotes the same relations of position as are ex- 428 SYNTAX. [$ 290. pressed by ev, but always in the direction whither; hence it is used of motion into the interior of an object, up to, into the im- mediate presence of; in general to denote the reaching a definite limit. (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote a local limit; (b) a limit in quantity : about, up to; (c) extension; (d) in the sense of before, in the presence of, coram, but with the idea of the di- rection whither; (2) of time, to denote a temporal limit: till, towards ; (3) in a causal sense : (a) of a mental aim, object or purpose; (b) of the manner ; with numerals either in the sense of about or in a distributive sense ; (c) in general to express a reference to something : in respect to. (1) (a) 'leVot els r))v ir6\iv; so also of persons with the accompanying idea of their habitation or country. PI. Apol. 17, c. els vpas elstevai, i. c. els T& 5iKaffT-f)piov elsievai. X. An. 4. 7, 1. eiropev^ffav els Ta6x<>vs (went into the country of the Taochoi). Among the Attic writers, also in a hostile sense: contra, in. Th. 3, 1. effTpaTewav e" y TT\V 'Am/c^p (into, against At- tica). With the verbs (ad Milesios). I? KM. 2. This s is to be distinguished from that which stands with tls, frf, and wp<$j with the Ace. (is cir, us M, us irp6s riva). This latter us is not a preposition, but it expresses a supposition, just as when it is joined with the par- ticiple, and docs not denote an actual direction to a place, but only one sup- posed, and hence intended. X. An. 1. 2, 1. c&pol&i us tvl rovrovs ro trrpa.T(v/j.a (QUASI his bellum illaturus, he collects AS IF aqainst these). Hence this ws also stands with the prepositions governing other Cases, e. g. Th. 3, 4. $KTt\ow Ivoffio'avTo ruv vtuv us lirl vau/uax^a (as if for the purpose of Jight- ing a naval battle). 1, 134. ol 84 iron)ffd(j.evoi x^A/covs avoptdtras Svo us a.vi\ Haver av(ov avtSeffav (quasi essent Pausaniae loco, as if in the place of Pau- MMJOt). 4. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSA- TIVE: Sia, Kara, VTrep, /xera. $291. (1) Ata, through. 1. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (2) to denote a mo- tion extending through a space or object and again coming out : through and out again, out of (Homer expresses this relation still more distinctly, by uniting the preposition CK or -n-po with Sto, e. g. Od. p, 460. 8te/c //.eyapoto dva^ojpctv) ; (b) to denote ex- tension through something, but without the accompanying rela- tion stated under (a) of coming out of the object; on the Gen., see $ 287, Rem. ; (2) of time, to denote the expiration or lapse of a period: after, properly to the end of a period, through and out; (3) in a causal sense, to denote origin (rare) and the author (very frequent) ; (b) to denote quality (possessive Gen.) in connection with ctvat and ytyvcor&u ; (c) the means, both of persons and things; (d) manner; (e) worth (rare); (f) com- parison (rare). (1) (a) Her. 7, 8. fjit\\u t\ay ffrpar}>v 8101 TT)J Evpuinjs tirl ryv 'EAAc8a. 2, 26. 5ieeA.&a>j/ 810 -jrdffijs Evpuiri) s. 7, 105. l^Aawe rov ffrpar'bv 8to rfjs 0p7jt7js cirl T}]V 'EAAaSa. 3, 145. SiaKinj/as oia TTJJ yopyvprjs (having crept out through the prison), (b) Od. p, 335. 5, & \lyov xp^vov (through, for a long, a short time)] also Si' 6\tyov, Si& iroAAou without xP^ ov t or ^(j.v, TOVTO flvai 6&a\- juows, ^ Si' ov 6p&fMv, Kcd $ axtuo/jifj/, S>ra, % Si' ov O.KOVO/J.V. (The Dat. denotes the means used, Sid with the Gen. the active means.) "Exew TWO. Si bpyTJs (to be angry with)', Si a. %t/>wj/ %x lv (' work upon, to be engaged in, to handle) -; also of persons, e. g. *Etrpaav ravra Si" Evpvfj.dx<>v, Th. 2, 2. (d) Ati ffirovSrjs, S la TOXOUS TTOICIV ri (with earnestness, earnestly, etc.). (e) S. 0. C. 584. St' ovSevbs iroiciff&ai (to consider of no value), (f) Her. 1, 25. ^er/s &iov Sia irdvrwv rS>v o.va^t}iJ.KT) Her. 7, 6. a$>a- vifd). Her. 4, 44. (Scylax cum suis) lirAeoi/ Kara irora/ibv irpbs r,u rt Kal r t \iov ava- ro\as Is S>a\acrcrav. (b) Her. 3, 109. at %x i S" at Karavaffav rr^v yr)V dart. Kara yi)v, Kara &d\affcrav iropeueo-^a* (through, over, by), (c) Th. 2,30. 432 SYNTAX. [$ 293. Ke?roi ^ K.fv iraitiwv rovavra (in respect to nourishing the boys). Her. 1, 85. Kara rbv Kprjrripa ourcas Kara n (in some respect, quodammodo) ; Kar' ovScv, Karairdvra (in no, every respect) ; Kara rovro (hoc respectu, hence propter hoc) ; Th. 1, 60. Kara io/j.ai nvos, to give judgment, bring a charge, pass a vote against any one ; KarafyevSo/jiai nvos, to lie against any one ; KarayeXw rivos, to laugh at, to deride one ; Kara^povw rivos, despicio aliquem. An Ace. very frequently stands with these, e. g. Kar-riyopeiv ri nvos, to accuse one of something, KarayiyvuxrKetv ri (as &VQIO.V, K\oirr)v) rivos, KaraKpiveiv rivbs frdvarov, Kara&iKa&iv rivbs frdvarov, Karafyr)$tCev ap'x (passing over us and the houses). Her. 7. 69. 'Apa&lur teal PC&ioiruv TWV vvfp Alyvirrov olKi\pevrep rS>v irpayfJidT(av(nrovSd^(tv,SfSoiKfvau vvfp rivos (timerealicui). (b) v-Kfp TTtv&ovs (for, because of grief ). (c) II. w, 466. Kai fuv uirep Trarpbs KCU (lyrtpos TJ v K 6 /i o i o \iffcrfo Kal T f K 6 o s (entreat him for t/ie sake of his father, etc. (d) PL Symp. 208, d. virep aperTjs a^avdrov KO! roiavr^s 5^|Tjs fVK\*ovs TrdvTfs vdvra. TTOIOVGIV (on account of , for the sake of imper- ishable distinction, etc.). Dem. Phil. 1. 52,43. virep rov firj irabfiv KOKUS fnrb QiXlinrov (for the purpose of not suffering evil, etc.). II. Her. 4, 188. purr4- ovffi virtp TOV 56fj.ov (over the house). Seldom of mere extension, as rois 0po$ rots vircp 'E\\-fisirovrov otKovffi (the Thracians dwelling beyond the Hellespont, i. e. on the Hellespont); vvep r^v 77 \iictav (beyond one's years, age); v-xfp Svva/j.iv (beyond one's power); virlp tivfrpvirov (beyond man, i.e. beyond what could be expected of him). Her. 5, 64. virep rat. rea-fffpd- Koyra fri) (beyond, more than, forty years). 294. (4) MCTO, with. I. MCTO, allied to /teVog (in the middle, between) denotes the being in the midst of, being among persons or things. With the Gen., /uera denotes an intimate connection, a participation, a sharing in (comp. /u,cre^c/) ; the Gen. denotes the whole, of which the subject of the sentence constitutes a part; it conse- quently differs from o-vv with the Dat, which merely denotes the connection (association) of one object with another, with- out the one being considered a part of the other (comp. o-we^eiv). It is used (1) in a local relation: in the midst, among ; then to denote an active participation in aid of some one : with ; (2) in a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote the means or manner ; (b) conformity. (1) Eur. Hec. 209. /Kerek vfKptav Kflffofwu (to lie among the dead, and one's self to bedead), PI. Up. 359, e. Kc&riv. MCTO TIVOS fjdxfirbcu (to fight in active participation with one). Dem. Phil. 3. 117, 24. /UCT& TUV T/SiKTj/xe'vwv iro\ffj.fiv (to participate in carrying on war with those who had been injured). Elvau, a-rrjvcu perd r i vo s (to be on the side of one). PL Rp. 467. e. O-O&TJO-OITCU, merit irpf v olnovvrts fv$ai/j,oj/((TTa.Toi T 'EAA^j/coz/ ?fffav (agreeably to which, ruv voptav fX^/J-fvoi, ley ibus quasi adhaerentes). PL Ap. 32, c. juerek rov v6fjiov Kal rov a i K a i o v (jj/jL-riv /iSAAov (Me SeZv SiaKivduvfveiv, t) fj.& v^.S>v yej'eV&at p/i] Succua j' (z'n conformity with law and justice). IT. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) (Poet.) to de- note a direction or motion into the midst of something, a striv- ing to be united with a person or thing, in a friendly or hostile relation, and generally to denote a succession in space ; (b) to denote a local extension between two objects, in the prose phrase /xera xeipas c^ew TI, to have something in hand; (2) (prose and Poet.) 'to denote succession in time and in order: after, next to, next in order; (3) in a causal sense (only Poet.), to denote purpose and conformity. (1) 'I/ceV&at per a Tpwas /cat 'AX a tows (to come into the midst of the Tr. and Gr.). II. p, 460. atcrv&i' wsr 1 cuyuiribs /iercfc XT/COS (among the geese). Seldom used of things. II. /3, 376. o's/xe /tier' airp^Krov s epiSas /calve//cea jSaAAet (z'nto *Ae ?mWs of contention). Erjvai (JLCTCI. NeVropa (to #0 to Nestor, properly into a connection with him ) ; j8rj Se p e T' 'I S o /t e v 77 a, (to goto Idomen. to follow after him, properly to go into the engagement or battle with him), H. j/, 297. II. v, 492. Aaoi cirovb', a>set re jwera KTiXov eWeTo p.ri\a (behind the ram). (2) Meret Tbv TOU TratSb^ ^tivaro*', X. (after the death). Mercfc ravra (after) ; the Ace. often has a participle agreeing with it, e. g. Her. 1, 34. fieTcfc SoAwva ol-)^6 fji^vov (after the departure of Solon). Me&' fjf^epau (interdiu, in the day time, properly after the break of day), X. An. 4. 6, 12. Ka/ceIVos eAa/3e ^ter' e^ue Seurepos (second after me), Cy. 2. 2, 4. n^Aty (e?%ov) TT?J/ TrAowcnwTaTTjv ^ TT? 'A(7(a /A era Ba)8uAd>w (pvi, irepi, iiri y -rrapa, Trpos, VTTO. $295. (1) 'AIML and irtpi 1. The prepositions d/*i K\dSois ^EO"dai (to be surrounded by branches, to sit among). (2) (a) II. ir, 565. &t*.l veitvt KO.T ar fib VTI&T i /tox0"&a* (about, on account of a dead body). II. 7, 157. a/j. (prae metu, for, on account of) ; o.fj.vpo'io f]/u.epis (there the vine was stretched around the cave). 130. rbf jj.ev ey&if ecrawtra ire pi r p6ir tos eawTa. (2) (a) Maxet with the Dat., but much more frequently ; (b) to denote an external or internal reason or cause (Poet). $296.] PREPOSITIONS. 'Eiri. 437 (1) Her. 7, 61. wtpl rrja-i Kf60, ff&tvei, oovvy (prae. for joy, fear, etc., as it were surrounded by them). III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation: around, (a) to de- note motion round about something, into the circle or vicinity of an object (Poet.) ; (b) extension around, in or at, through some- thing, with verbs of rest ; (2) of time and number stated in- definitely or approximately ; (3) in a causal or figurative sense, to denote a mental dwelling about an object, taking pains with it, being employed about it ; also in respect to. (1) (a) II. K, 139. ire pi Qpevas tf\v& Itai], the clamor came round his mind; (b) Her. 3, 61. Kanftvay xpo"'C " Tt iff pi Atywrov ^irowjo-TearoJ fotipes Md- yoi (round in Egypt). 7,131. 6 fjiev irepl Tliepii\v Sitrpi&f rjptpas Th. 6, 2. $Kovv *oiVi/ces irepl iraaav T^I/ 2tKe\iav &Kpas -re M rfj a.vo\a.&6vTfs KaL ri 3iriK(i/j.tva vr^fflSia (in Sici/y around on all the coasts). Hence ot ire pi nva (those around any one, connected or associated unth him) ; ol irtpl U\drcava ( 263, d). Comp. afi(pL (2) Th. 3, 89. irepl TOVTOVS rovs xP^vovs (about). Tlepl fivplovs (about). (3) Of vepl /j.ou(riK^f tmcs, ol IT (pi T)IV yewnfTpiav Starpi&orr cy, a.fiv irtpi ri (those oc- cupied about, with music, etc.). 'A/xe\ws exetv ire pi rtva. X. An. 3. 2, 20. ^a^aprdvfiv wept riva (with respect to). 1. 6, 8. 5t/coy irtpi nva. C. 1. 1, 20. ffoxppovt'iv irepl TOVS bcots. At irepl rb V v\^r)\OTaT(av. 6, 129. 4ir\ TTJJ Tpaireris opxfoaTo (danced upon the table). 2, 35. TO &x& ea ' 1 f^ v &v$pS firl T >v /cea\o>j/ tpopeovffi, at 5e yvvcuiccs irl Tv TreJjL^as &yye\ov /ceXeuei (avrovs) O.VTOV (j.f'iva.i e TT I TOV voTa/jiov (at, near the river), (b) Th. 1, 116. irXeiv lirl 2,d/j.ov (to sail for Samos). X. Cy. 7. 2, 1. e'^rl SapSewj/ ^e^etj/. Dem. Phil. 3. 123, 48. ai/a- X^pf't" 67r' oittov (to return homewards). (2) Her. 6,98. ^?rl Aapelov eyeV- TO irXca) Ko/V v\)\jlf\v . TV eVaw^aj/ iroielo-frcu CTTI TIVOS (to be called, to take a surname from one). '<' lourou (of one's own accord, sua sponte) ; eVl Trptxpdaecas (sirnulatione, under pretext). Atyeiv iiri rivos (dicere de aliqua re). PI. Charm. 155, d. ^ IT I TOV KaKov Xtyuv TT a i S 6s. (c) ZTjTeiV TI tirl TIVOS, Kpivtiv TI tiri TIVOS, ffKoire'tv TL fir I TI- VOS, \eyeiv TL 4iri TIVOS, rt8el!at TI firi TIVOS, etc. (to judge something accord- ing to a thing or person, as it were resting upon). PI. Rp. 597, b. jSovAet o3i/, etynv, ^TT' auTwi/ TO^TCOV Tl>v ij.ifj.r)T^)v TOVTOV fyiThvufjitv, T'LS TTOT' SCTT'IV ; (visne, ad haecipsa imitatorem istum exigamus?) (d)'E^)' eauroi/, CO.VTCOV, r)fj.uv av- T&V, eaur^s (by one's self, separately, of one's own accord, properly, resting or depending on one's self, independent of others). X. An. 2. 4. 10. oZ a E\\T)ves ixpopwvres TOVS fiap&dpovs avTol e eavTuv ^x^povv r]yf/j.6vas ^XOVTCS (marched by themselves). Her. 5, 98. OIKSOVTO.? TIJS $pvy(ris x&pov T6 /coi K&JJ.TIV CTT' eau- T&V (by themselves). 4, 114. oiKeuuev e TT' rj /* 4 u> v aiiTtav. Here seems to belong the phrase so frequently found in the Attic historians: '<' Iv6s, tirl Tpiuv, TfTTdpwv TfToix^at, arTrjvai, one, two, three men deep or in file, properly to be placed or stand on one, the row resting or leaning on one, etc.). Dem. Phil. 1.42,7. Uv Kal vpt'is etrl TTJS TOJOUTT/S &e\4x oUs T' $296.] PREPOSITIONS. Em. 439 & KaTtffrpairrai, ptvfiv tirl roiirtav (cannot remain with, satisfied with, those things whicli he has conquered). Phil. 2. 66, 3. K' uv IffTi vuv (quibus nunc studet). So (j.tvtiv lir\ avoias. (e) Dem. Cor. 230, 17. otfre SiKalus, ofrr' 4 if a\r)&elas ot Sepias ci^/icVa (stated neitfier with justice nor in adherence to the truth, as it were, resting on truth), (f) Her. 5, 109. ^ir* o5 tTdx&iUfv (cui rei praefecti sumus). Dem. Cor. 266, 118. ivl rov bftapiicov KaraffTabtts (placed over the theatre-money). Hence at tirl ruv irpayfj.drwv (those placed over business, those at the head of affairs). II. With the Dat, (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote the tarrying or resting upon, or (b) more frequently, at, by or near a place or object; (2) of time (mostly only poetic) ; (3) in a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote dependence : penes, in the power of; (b) a condition under which something takes place ; (c) the purpose, design, or determination ; (d) the goal or limit ; (e) the reason, with verbs expressing an affection of the mind 0285, Hem. 1). (1) (a) Th. 1, 56. (UoriSaiarai) OIKOVVIV tirl T$ 'lo-d/uy rf/s IToAA^np. X. An. 7. 4, 4. Ol Qp^KfS TO.S o\a>7TK/5as tirl ra?s Kf oyx v y ynpd.6va> (murder upon murder], Eur. (2) 'ETT! WKT\ (II. &, 529), in, during the ni<]ht, comp. 283, 3, (b). (3) (a) Dem. Chers, 90, 2. ^' u/t?>/ t \nrflsc, with this design). X. S. 1,5. FIpwTcryo'pa iro\v apyvptov &&a>Kas eirl ffola (ad discendam sapientiam). PI. Ap. 20. c. \^u8*Tat re al tirl 8ta/3o\p rfj Ipr} \eytt. Hence of irl rats /H7jx"a's (those placed over the machines) ; of tirl TO?S irpdy^affi (those intrusted with business)} tirl r |u,Ujiiaxw. (e) FeAai/, p.eya typovsiv, [n.a.lvf ir 77 v KO! 'A v travToiav aper^v \\6ytjjioi ^ irav ri frdavro (by eights, eight in file). 'Eirl /J.4ya, iro\b, ir\fov, ne'tfrv, , f.ia.Kp6v, tnl rSa-ov, ty oarov (greatly, especially, much rather, etc.). Terrfx- deu eirl TroAAo^ (many in file). (3) (a) Her. 1.37. ewt bJipav Uvai (venatum ire). 3, 14. lirl 8 5 up Uvai (aquatum ire). Hence tirl ri; wherefore? In a hostile sense, e. g. arpaTeiWd-cu tirl A v Sots (upon, against the Lydians) ; 2\a6- vfiv firl Hep eras', (b) CTT' 1va vapifvai (along, near, by Babylon). From this have originated various ethical expressions, e. g. irapa tioipav (near fate and by it, i. e. against, contrary to fate) ; irapa ooav (praeter opin- ionem, contrary to expectation) ; trap I \irl$a, irapa SiKaiov, wapa rovs o'jo/couy, TTapa Swajuiv, (It is the opposite of KOTO", e. g. Kara noipav, Svi/anw, ac- rordin;/ to.) Hence it has also the signification of besides, praeter, e. g. irapa TaOra ( praeter haec) ; (c) Her. 9, 15. irapa rbi> 'Av ir6 \epoi' (during); irapa r^v ir6ffit> (inter potandum, while drinking). So also of single points of time, during which something takes place, e. g. 442 SYNTAX. [$ 298. irap' avr'bv rov Kivdvvov (in ipso discriminis tempore, in the very moment of danger). (3) (a) Isocr. Archid. 126. u^oXoyeiro vapa TOVTOV yevftr&at T^V o-cDTrjpiav avrois (constabat, in hoc Us positam esse salutem, that their safety depended on him). Her. 8, 140. Trw&dvecr&G rty vvv Trap' 4fj.e lovcrav SiW^iui/ (is in my power, with me), (b) Her. 7, 20. C&STC /t^re rbv Aapeiov (ffr6\ov) TOP eirl SKU&OS irapa rovroif (sc. TOP fosirep beat, ol avStpcairoi ^torev- ovcri (in comparison with, beyond, other animals), (c) 'O/>a>, OTKOITU TI Trap' &\\o ri (to consider something in conformity with another thing, in comparison with it, properly, holding it near to something). Dem. Aph. 1.824,34. trap a r~bv \6- yov, t>v airo(p(pov(riv, eVtSe^lw (in conformity with, properly, holding an object near to another.) (d) Dem. 1.43,14. oi5e $i\nriros irapa r^v avrov p d/uyy rov $298.] PREPOSITIONS. Ilpds. 443 irpbs TUV \4ytiv Hvvanc vl\ovs 6(jLO\v IT 6\fiav, irpbs fffirepav (towards). Th. 2, 55. (*? 717) irpbs Fie Koitbvvt) ffov 6p$. (b) X. An. 5. 7, 20. fyxovrcu irpbs r)/j.as (to us, properly, come before its). 1. 6, 6. vftas irpul fi|ouej/ irpbs OUT o us. 5. 4, 5. Sicurca&rivcu fiov\6/j.f&a, IT pbs TT\V 'E A. A. o 5 a ( i. C. irpbs TOUS "EAATjvas, to go in safety to Greece). Ae'-yeii/, ayopfvew, ^erd^fiv TI irpos riva (to speak before, to one) ; cnfe't^ao-dat, Taros (against), X. C. 1. 2, 1. (c) 2a>/fpaTTjs yt K (towards daybreak). (3) (a) Dem. Phil. 2. 71, 23. iravTotiaira euprj/xeW TOIS ir6\fffi irpbs (pv\aK^v Kal ffuTrjplav (for a guard, etc.); (b) Her. 1, 38. irpbs TT\V Ztyiv ravrijv TOJ> yapov TOVTOV e&s irpbs rjSovbs Kal \viras irpbs \viras Kal fy6$ov irpbs irpbs Tfp vo/j.lcrfj.aTa (to exchange pleasures for pleasures, etc.). (e) SKO- irp6s ri (to consider with respect to something); 8iaa/) \a/3clw fiovv virb a^d^ris ayiaa'd/u.- fvos ^3oij&ej. (b) H. &, 13. e\8pou. 7. 7, 23. ^4ya p.oi So/ce? eu d/coueti/ virb av&p&iruv (to hear himself well spoken of by men}. 3. 4, 11. a.irv MTjSoi (lost the government by the Persians = spoliati sunt imperio a P.). 7. 2, 22. alriav e%aj vir6 TIVOS (= accusor ab aliquo). Her. 3, 104. virb TOV KavpaTos of yuup^rj/ces a^avees ylvovTai virb yrju (under the in- fluence of the heat, on account of the heat). Th. 2, 85. virb avf/j.cav /cat virb air \oias ej/SteVpn^ei/ OVK bxiyov XP^ VOV ( on account of the winds, etc.). "fir' avdyK-ns (from necessity), "firb pfb-ris paiveabai, PL "firb piyovs. Her. 1, 85. virb Seous Kal KUKOV tycavriv epp"n& (spoke from fear and grief ). So virb x a P^ s ^^ ovov '^Py^ 5 ^ o>'"'f l pio-s, ffu, etc. II. With the Dat (1) in a local relation, to denote a quiet rest under an object ; (2) causal and figurative : (a) to denotr the author (almost exclusively poetic, see $ 251, Hem. 4); (b) to denote the means, as with the Gen., but only Poet. ; (c) to denote subjection. (1) 'r-rb yr) efj/cu; with mountains, at the foot of, e. g. virb T/n^Aw (at the foot of Tmolus). "ftrb r$ "f p t\s) Siairffj.- irti irpos Te rovs v<$> eavrbv irdvras, oi irpbs Kpo'iffov. 6.2, 11. 6 f (/y Trepi Sci/cei/ aoi^v (in a special manner, especially). II. o-, 529. Kveivov 8' e'vrl w\ofrorripas (in addition, besides). Also not rare in Her., tirl Se (thereupon, turn); fiera Se (postea), Her.; irpos ye, npbs Se very common from Homer downward, also in Attic poetry and prose. REMARK 1. Sometimes two prepositions stand together in poetry, most fre- quently in Epic, the first of which always has an adverbial meaning, hut the sec- ond may be connected as a preposition with the Case of a substantive. Aik. irp6 (through and out) : II. p, 393. ravvrai Se re Tracra (jSoenj) 8ia Trp6. 'A/i! ire pi (round about). Od. X, 608. a/ucpl Trept ffr^ffffiv. 11. $, 10. ox&ai 8' a/u-fl TTfpl /ueyaV taxov. )8, 305. a^i<|)l irepl Kp-S]vr)v. Ilape (with the Gen. wear to, with the Ace. near 6y, a/on^ fty), e. g. Od. t, 116. Trape/c At/ue'i/os. jti, 276. a\Aa TT a p e ^ T^J/ J/TJCTOV ^Aau^ere /^o fisKaivav. II ct p e (as a Paroxy tone ) often in Her. with the meaning besides, e. g. 3, 91. irdpe TOV apyvpiov. 'TTreK (/row under, out from under), in Homer; also Her. 3, 116. \4yerai VTTCK rOI/TOI Sreol &\\oi. 8, 161. e/c re /cat oife reAe?. &, 108. ous ('[Kirovs) TTOT' OTT' Aa/cicw e\6fj.r]v (eAeV^at nvd Tt, II. TT, 56). REM. 3. Here belongs, especially, an abridged mode of expression, where several sentences follow each other, which consists in using the compound, which should stand in each sentence, only in the first, while in the others the preposition merely is repeated, e. g. II. i//, 799. K ar a fj.fi/ 8oA.i/, Kara 8* at 6 OTpa-rriyds. Kur. Ipli. An 1. 1,365. 5i' &p oAwAa/u v. The Attic pro XL- ri-inains five from iliis licence. \vir!i :\ 1V\\- s|Mvial exceptions, c. g. Th. 3, 13 rf uj/ KO.KWS Trotftv airrovs ptr 'AdifvoW, iAAi wt\(vb(pouv (so as to make the contrast emphatic). 1M. Gorg. 520, e. kvr' 5 TotciVand j tv iroi-f]ff S' 6i s afifporfpa: Ato^Seos tip par a ^TJTTJ*' (entered the chariot). Ace. of the object receiving an action ($ 279): II. ft, 156. 'A 3 77 v a I rj v "H/JTJ irpbs /JLV&OV (addressed, spoke to Athene). REM. 5. In the second case (b), a Tmesis is admitted only when mere par- ticles. like n-fjv, 5e, T, pd, ydp, &p\ S' fipa, come between the preposition and the Case of the substantive, a very frequent usage of the post-Homeric period, and even in the Attic writers. Comp. Rem. 4. 3. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, particularly of the Homeric language, that it often connects prepositions followed by the Dat., with verbs which ex- press the direction whither; and. on the other hand, prepositions followed by the Ace., with verbs whose signification presupposes a quiet resting in a place or object. This construction arises from a blending of two ideas, since the speaker either conceives and expresses, along with the moment of motion, the moment of the rest which succeeds ; or along with the moment of rest, the moment of motion which precedes. Hence this may be called the pregnant Construction. (a) The verb of motion involves the idea of the rest which succeeds, when preposi- tions with the Dat. stand instead of prepositions with the Ace. The moment of rest (the relation to the continuing result of the action) must then be regarded as the predominant one. The principle above stated holds with the following prepositions : With tv, particularly in the Epic language. II. e, 370. ^5* lv yovvaffi iriirre AtcSi/Tjs 5T 'A^poStTTj (she fell on her knees, and then lay on her knees). Od. o, 200. lyu /j.avTtv(ro/jiai, CDS ^vl frv/jif ddacaroi ftd\\ovfft. 11. A, 743. ijp tire S' eV Koviyffiv ( fell into the dust and lay there). In prose, r i&fvai fv x f p ff l v like the Latin, ponere et collocare in manibus. X. H. 4. 5, 5. first: ts 5e ro"lipaiov KaTfQvyov, and then ol 5' iv rf 'Hpalta KarairfQe vy 6r ts tytKf iv. (Caes. B. G. 5, 10. naves in Itttore cjrrtns esse. Sail. Jug. 5. in amicitia receptus). Also with afi(pi and ire pi with the Dat. instead of the Ace. II. A, 17. Krniu8as /ie/ irpeara ire pi KJ/TJM?;- l irvp'l trrrjffai rpiwoda. With j/ e'voffixbwv, Trpbs IT CT p-yari &a\(i>v, 289. OTUJ/ 8e 8va> /maptyas, &sre ' favry [slbi subjicere, 299,11, (2) (c)]. REM. 6. In the following and like examples from Homer, the Dat., without doubt, expresses the relation of aim or object: xetpas fi&X*w ^ t TIKO.I &e\os firi nvi, TT/j.\J/ai ovfipov firi nvi, f\avvfiv 'lirirovs fir\ vqva'iv, nraivfff&ai rd|a firi TIVI, aXAetr^at firi rivi, (j.a.^ff^a.1 4iri TIVI, irfTea&pf'iv ^coe u> is ehanired either into air6 and IK or into cis, attracted, as it were, by the expressed or understood, which denotes either the direction whence or it-hither. This construction may be called the attraction of prepositions : (a) 'Aw 6 and tic instead of tv, or IT a pd with the Gen. instead of irapd with the Dat. Ol IK r 7} s ayopas avdpuiroi airttyvyov (instead of ol tv rrj ayopq av&puirot air(vro (those UPOX the decks used their darts FROM the decks). PI. Apol. 32, b. v/j.t'is rovs SfKa o-rparrryovs TOVS OVK avfXofj. evovs rovs IK r^s vavfiax'tas ^ovAetr^e a&ptous Kplvetv (you wished to condemn all at once the ten commanders ix the naval battle, who did not carry off" the dead FROM it). Phaed. 109, e. ol K TT}S &a\drrris lx& ve s avaKvirrovr ts (the Jish IX - the sea coming up OUT of it). Dem. Phil. 3. 114, 15. rovs IK Zfpptov rti- Xovs o-rpariuras 4ffia\ev. X. An. 1. 1, 5. osrts S' a QiKvo'iro -ruv irapa (3acri\tus vpbs avr 6v (instead of ruv irapa (3ao~i\f'i ovruv irapa fiao~i\(us REM. 8. The same principle of attraction holds, also, with adverbs of lan.', e. g. (Kf'&ev and cvSobev instead of ^/r*? and fi/Sov. Dem. Ol. 3. 13, 15. t rbv ^Kel^ci/ ir&\ffj.ov Sevpo ^ovra. X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. tva T\aaov TO. ri. See Larger Grammar, II. 622, Rem. 2. (b) Els instead of Iv (far more seldom). Her. 2, 150. t\eyov ol tirixupiot, us ts r})v "SiVpriv r r/ v s Ai^vrjv ^K0i8o7 f] \(p.vri avrrj virb yr\v (empties into the Syrtis which is in Lybia). X. H. 1. 7, 29. 'Epao-iviSris (eKt \evev) M rovs ts M IT v \-fivr) v. iro\fjLiovs rrjv raxio~rr)v ir\f7y airavras (ayainst the enemies in Mitylene). 5. On the repetition and omission of prepositions, the following things are to be noted : (a) In a series of coordinate substantives, the preposition is either repeated before each single substantive, when each single idea is to be considered sep- arately and is to be made emphatic, or when the contrast or difference between the ideas is to be denoted, e. g. PI. Tim. 18, c. Kard TC ir6\f/jiov Kal Kara rriv &\\TIV Sicurav ; or the preposition is placed only before the first substantive, and omitted with the others, when the ideas are meant to express one whole, whether they are of the same kind or different, e. g. X. C. 1. 4, 17. IT tpl ruv tvddSf Kal vfpl ruv tv Alyvirru Kal tv 2,iK\ia (ppovrifciv (instead of Kal irepl ruv tv 2t/ceAia). 2. 1, 6. ayvfjivdffrus %X flv '"'pos re ^vx"n Ka -l md\irn. X. H. 1. 1, 3. air6 re ruv veuv Kal rys yr]s. PI. Phaed. 99, |B T) irtpl Mfyapa TI Bo IUT ov s. (b) When a substantive connected with a - preposition, is followed by a rela- uive pronoun standing in the same relation with the substantive, the preposition }n prose is often repeated before the relative, but more frequently omitted : ). 213, C. air* tKftvov rov xpovov, a&a\(j.G}V T'IVOS Seoj.ieSra; Ar,\ov, #77, OTI TOV opav. (d) The preposition is commonly omitted with a word in apposition. X. An. 5. 5, 3. 01 "E\\r]ves acp'iKOVTO els KoTvcapa, ir6\iv 'E \\rjviSa. Comp. 4. 8, 22. 5. 3, 2. 6. 2, 1. But when a greater emphasis rests upon the word in ap- position, as is particularly the case, when it is used to explain a preceding pronoun, then the preposition is regularly repeated. X. Cy. 3. 1, 28. (s g?)v Kal rjSecas, ap' ov xaXai ; (all the actions pertaining to this, viz., the living without grief, are they not praiseworthy ?) ; also in clauses expressing comparison, subjoined by ws, o&rrrep, the preposition may be either omitted or repeated. PL Rp. 330, c. irep\ TO. xp^^tora crirov$dovo~u', a> s epyov ea.vTu>v. PL Trap' ^/ias (poiTas, &s Trapa (pi\ovs. But when the member expressing the comparison pre- cedes the other, the preposition stands with the first member only, if the parti- cle of comparison is d>s ; but the preposition is repeated, if it is & sire p. PL Rp. 1. 4, 14, e. Se? o>s Trepl (j.n]Tpbs Kal Tpocpov TT)S ^c6pas a/j.vveiv (i. e. Trepl Trjs %copos). X. Cy. 1. 6, 4. us Trpos /jiaTos (TKOTre'icr&ai. TO, ovra.. 6. The natural position for prepositions is directly before their substantive, or before the attributive belonging to a substantive, e. g. irpbs T~bv avdpa, Trpbs TOJ/ bv avSpa. But this position is often changed in the following instances : (a) When a particle follows the substantive, as ye, (j.ev, ydp, fj.ev ydp, 5e, ov, also fify ovv, o5, /caf, etiam, Toivw, faus, also oT/uat used as an adverb ; these small words often come between the preposition and the substantive, e. g. It /jLev elpr)vr), eV juej/ yap elprivy. (b) The preposition irp6s in oaths and exclamations is separated from its substantive. Soph. 0. C. 1333. irp6s vvv (re Kpr)vcav, Trpbs &fi> b^oyvMV ahu> Trifreo-bai. So in Latin, per te deos oro. (c) The preposition sometimes follows its substantive, though it then is sub- ject to anastrophe ; in Attic prose, this takes place only with irepl when con- nected with the Gen., but here it is very frequent. PL Rp. 469, b. irp&Tov pey aj/SpoTroSta-ftoD Tre'pt; it is also separated by other words. Her. 6, 101. TOVTOV v eyoo ovSev ovTe /j.eya ovTe CTUIK- pbv Trept eVa'/'co. See 31, IV. ::02.) PRONOUNS. 451 CHAPTER IV. 301. The Pronoun as Subject, Predicate, At- tribute, and Object. The subject, predicate, attribute, and object are expi- by pronouns, when these members of a sentence are not designed to represent objects or qualities themselves, but when it is to be denoted merely, that an object refers either to the speaker himself, or to the person addressed, or to another person or thing. 2. All the rules which have been given on the substan- tive and adjective, apply also to substantive and adjective pronouns ; still, some remarks are here subjoined on the use of the pronouns. $ 302. I Personal Pronouns. The substantive personal pronouns, as the subject (in the Xoni.) : eyco, (TV, ly/xets, etc., and also the adjective (posses- sive) pronouns, as attributives, e. g. c/xos Tran/p, are used in Greek, as in Latin, only when they are specially emphatic; hence particularly in antitheses, but also, for the sake of per- spicuity, e. g. Kcu, (TV Taura e7rpaas. Kat 6 0-05 Trarrjp oi.7reSu.vtv. *Eya) //,ev aTrct/u, i9. 'H fj.rJTr)p clrre (AOL (my mother). Ot yoveis are/ryowt (their children). RKMA.RK 1. The distinction between the accented and the enclitic forms of the personal pronouns, e. g. e/j.ov and /*ov, etc. ( 87), lies in the greater or less emphasis with which they are pronounced in discourse. Thus, the accented forms are always employed, for example, in antitheses, e. g. fyov (j.fv Kareye- Aocrf, v Tra-Hjp, see 266, 2. REM. 2. The adjective personal pronouns more commonly have a subjective or active sense, e.g. ^ jSovA^j (my counsel, i.e. one which I originate, not one which 452 SYNTAX. [$ 302. relates to me) ; but sometimes they take the place of the objective Gen. and then have an objective or passive sense. Od. A, 201. o~bs irfoos, a desire FOR thee (like Ter. Heaut. II. 3, 66. desiderio TUO instead of tui). X. Cy. 3. 1, 28. tvvo'it} teal ffeavry apeff- Kfis. 'O 7ros eavrbv eVatj/e?. Oi yoveis ayairtaffi rovs kavr&v IVaJid-i ff e a v T 6 v. Ovros 6 avfyp iravra Si' e a v r o v p.eu.d^rjKei'. 'O inrb rS>v cavrov o~r par tear oav aire&avGV. (b) In relation to an object of the sentence : X. Cy. 1. 1, 4. Kvpos rS>v &\\(av jSotrtXewv, TUV apxas Si eavrwv KTr]. X. Cy. 1. 1, 5. Ty QeKhivev (6 ''Ayis) airb j.a t KO& rjffvxlav ^rci^Tjo'aj'. 6, 32. ^vi/evfi>xovro Kal 6 &\ rcav re iroKiriav *col ft TIS &\\os eJ/i/oi/s irapr^v foois xp^A tfJ/ s o&$ ol 'A^rj^aToi Trpoirapf/3d\ovro cr i vi, to them (e. g. X. H. 6. 5, 35) ; Ss, them, e. g. Th. 5, 49), when the object to which they refer, is more important in respect to the sense, than the subject of the sentence. Still, it is to be remarked in relation to the use of this pronoun, that in place of it with a reflexive sense, the compound reflexive eauroD, -TJ s, etc. is commonly employed; and in place of it with the sense of the Pers. pronoun third person, the corresponding forms of avr6s are used by the Attic writers. The form ov (ov) is used in prose only in PL Synip. 174, d. Rp. 617, b. 617, e.; ? (e) 327, b. 617, e. Symp. 175, a. c. 233, b. ; ol occurs far oftener (seldom accented of), ando-^eTs, o-i/ rbi/ ^ov\6p.evov ireu.tyavres. 1, 60. irefj.irov(Tiv eavrcav re e&eAoj/Tas /cal TWI/ &AAcoi' Tle\OTrovvi}' ectuTwi/ Sjej/ooiWo &AA 7 ?/ uc * TW ' / cro: TWI' tfjiuj/ Ktxp"n/J-i" c. Nausim. 11, 993. St/cat^repoj/ STJTTOU Tefc ypeTepa rjfJLas sffriv e%6Ji/, ^ TOUTOUS. C. Boeot. 2, 1010. u^eTs airav- res TOVS vfjierepovs ircuSas aycnrare. Ol TroAnrat ra (T^erepo o-w^etv eireipuii'- TO; or with the addition of the Gen. of aurJs according to 266, 2; or in- stead of the possessives, the Gen. of the compound substantive-reflexive is used; indeed in Prose, this is uniformly the case with the Sing. (mine,thine,his. thus 6 e /AO.VT o C, (TeauTou, e a u T ov TrcfH/p, and not o ffjibs avrot), 6 trbs CIVTOV irar-i'ip, which last mode of expression is found only in poetry), and with the third Pers. PL. it is more frequent than the possessive : but the possessives are commonly used when the pronoun is plural (our, your), except in the third Person. Hence as follows : 5. rbv efj.avTOv (ffeavrov, favrov) mrrepa not rbr f^v (ffbv) avrov TT. T^y efjiauTov ((TeauToG, eauroi;) p.r)Tfpa not r^v efifyv (CTTJI/) avrov fj.. rots f/uLavrov ((reaurow, eavrov) \6yois not roiis e/j.ois (ffois) avrov A. P. rbv y/jLfTepoi/ avT&v Trarepa very rare rbv e/j.a>v avrcau TT. TT?J/ v/j.Tepav avTwv /j.r]Tepa very rare rfy vp.S>v avrcav p. TO. jj/JieTepa avTcai/ a/j.apT^/j.aTa very rare T& rj/j.wv avrav a. rbj/ crcpeTepov avruv Trarepa more frequent rbv eaurcDf Trarepo, but never avTwv IT. Here also the Pronoun O.VT&S either retains its exclusive or emphatic force, or loses it: (a) 'O irals vfipifci rbv eavrov irarepa (SUUM IPSIUS patrem). 'Y^ue?? vfipi&re rovs vperepovs avriav irarepas (VESTROS IPSORUM patres). Ot irai5es vftpi^ovcri rovs e avruv irarepas (suos ipsorum p). X. Hier. 3, 8. TTO\\OVS Se Kai inrb -yvvaiKtav r&v eavr&v rvpavvovs oii8oDy KO! rbv larpbv eire^a. Th. 6, 21. TTO\V airb rys fiftfrepas a.vro>v /j.e\\ofj.ev ir\*iv (a nostra patria). Lysias. fiyovvrai OU/CCTI TO?S cr^f repots avrwv o/*op- J302.J PRONOUNS. 455 T^Hnfft rbv vovv vfjias irapfytiv. Her. 5, 87. (\4yovffiv) elpurav iKao~rr}v avrttev V yvvaiKwv), far) ftij 6 CWVTTJS av+ip (ulri 8UU8 vir esset). X. II. 4. 4, 17. ol ruv tavrui> K KM. 5. It is very rare in good classical authors, that the Gen. of Pers. Pro- refers to the nearest subject, e. g. PI. Lach. 179, c. omci/uf&o rovs irart- s 7;/xo>v, ort T)f*as pikv cfu>v rpvQav (instead of rovs rjfierepovs irarcpas or rous ijfjLcrcpovs avrtav ir.). Antiph. 1, 114. 4yw 8' v/jias irtrtp rov irarp6s p.ov vturos alrovfjuu (instead of Mp rov tpavrov irarp6s). Th. 4,8. &ri ras rp KtpKvpa. vavs TJ, cl jti^j tyo$oip.T]v, OTTUS ft)) tir' avrov /AC rpdirotro. (b) avrov, ^oi aiT<, tre avr6i/, II/JLUV avruv, etc., e. g. Dem. Ol. 3, 36. iro&ev io~xvpbs yeyovfv f) irap' rj/*>v avr&v &t\iinros ; X. C. 3. 8, 9. rov $(povs 6 r]\ios virfp ri/jLtav avrcav Kal rS>v o-reyuv iropv6fjLfvos o~Kiav irapfx* 1 ' 5, 20. o~% /j.fv avrbv ci(J>7}/fa. 6. 1, 14. areyai rj/utV avrols tlffiv. PL Apol. 41, a. /*oi7 Kal avr$ Sav/iavr)) Uv cfr? y Siarpifi)) avr6bi. 7. The reflexive pronoun is very often used instead of the reciprocal pronoun, in all the persons. Dem. C. Olympiod. 1169. rod' T)/i2V avrots 5to\e4ue&a. .PL Rp. 621, c. SiKaioffvin^v fifra (ppov^ffecas iravrl rpdiraj tirirr)8fvo-oiJ.fi/ t 'l^a Kal Tip.lv avrols if>i\oi 2>/j.v, Kal rots fools. Lys. 114. ^iretSiv vp.lv eyia /.irjvlffd), irpbs vfj.as av- rovs rpfyeo-fre Kairfira KO^' eVo fKao~rov vp.lv avrols OTTCX^O'C^C. X. C. !. "). 16. Qbovovffiv f avrols p.a\\ov, % rols &\\ots av&pc&irois. REM. 7. Both the reciprocal and reflexive pronoun is used when the action ]}'. is to an object that has been named. Both consequently express a reflexive and are related like the species and genus ; since now the genus includes the species, so the reflexive may take the place of the reciprocal, in cases where it is readily perceived that several persons so perform anything together tiint the action appears as reciprocal. But when the reciprocal is antithetic to e avrbv fKaffros, but the reflexive used for the reciprocal, to & \\ovs, it is clear that the reciprocal must then necessarily stand, where the antithesis e avrbv fKaffros is either expressed or implied, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. /j.a\\ov Xf-lpovffiv firl rols a\\ri\ci>v KOKols, 3) rols avrcav ISiois aya&ols (i. e. 2) tirl rols avrov eKaffros ayabols), they rather rejoice in each other's evils, than in their own good, i. e. than each one in his own. PL Phaedr. 263, a. a/j.isfir)Tovp.(v a\- \Ji\ois re Kal T}p.lv avrols. On the contrary, it is natural that the reflex- ive should be regularly used, where other persons (&\\ovs), either expressly or by implication, are contrasted with the reflexive, e. g. Isocr, Aegin. 387. wepj 456 SYNTAX. [ 303. TrAf ovos r)/j.as avrov s f]yov/j.e&a, $ rovs a5eA(ous (we think more of ourselves than of [others} our brothers), de Pac. ol p.ev ( erraXol ) fffyiaiv avrols iroXe^ov- (ov (j.r)8eves Iffxvpol Sums, a\\a Trait/res aa&e- z/e?s, avroi eV eavroTs (rraarid^ovres. So 6/j.o\oye'i(T&ai, d^isy37jTeto-^at, Si- ej/%&77>c, evavrlov tlvcu and irpdrreiv iv eaurcts ^Secos aAA^Aos tpact>/ie&a irdvres (let us HERE delibcr- tt< ). 185. xrjCs Se pot 7} 8' fffTrjKfv eV aypov v6i ir6\r]os (stood there in the field). Od. v ; instead of i (on the contrary). X. An. 4. 2, 6. of Se . . . vTav&a ffj.ffov, us Karfxov^fs rb &.KOOV of 8' Ka.Tfi-%ov (iidemque). This usage very often occurs in Horn, and Her. in disjunctive clauses : ^ if) oye. Od. /3, 327. fj TIVO.S fK Hv\ov &fi a.fj.vvropas . . ., ^ 876 /col 2,irdpTr)&fV. Her. 2, 173. Ac&ot &v ^ rot fj.avfls, fj 8 -ye cbroVATj/cTos yfv6fj,fvos. 3. Tlie use of the pronoun aros is as follows: (1) Avrog properly means av TO?, again he, and then se ipse, e. g. 6 THOS auro's or auros 6 vto?, ^e son himself. It can also refer to the person implied in the predicate, e. g. avros aW/ify. So avro TOVTO or TOVT' avro, hoc ipsum, this itself (not another). When used with l/cao-ro?, avros always precedes. Her. 7, 19. ^e\oji/ avros Kao-TOS TO, TrpoKCi/xcva Siopa XajSeZv. (2) In the oblique Cases, it is used for the third person of the personal pronouns ($ 302, 4). (3) In connection with the article (6 avros), it means the same, idem ($ 246, 3). On the position of the article with in connection with a substantive, see 246, 3. HEM. 3. Horn, and Her. often use o v T 6 s in the place of the reflexive pro- nouns of the three persons. Od. 8, 247. &\\*> 8' ourbv (instead of lovrbv) 39 458 SYNTAX. [$ 303. (part KaraKpvirruv ryiVncej/. , 27. ffol Se yd/uos (Tpce&Jj/ effriv, tia x avT-rjv (instead of ffawryv] cWuo&ai. Her. 7. 10. 1. TO Se avToTffi Seti/oV, f/j.6 ffoi 8ixcu6v eVrt ia, a)Se TTCOS (sic, fere, nearly thus) ; rpeTs rives (about three, some three or so). REM. 5. The regular position of the pronoun r \ s, as an enclitic, is after the word to which it belongs, e. g. co^jp Tts, /caA.o's TIS avhp. But sometimes, in con- nected discourse, it precedes, e. g. 6ba\nw Xtw ix* 1 '". nT/Ae/Sp 'Ax, 249. Ivo. piv iravtrfie ir6voio, 5 Toy 'A x ' A A ^ a. 2. In the same way, the Neut. of a demonstrative is used to prepare for a following substantive, or a following Inf. or entire sentence. PL Apol. 37, a. TOVTOV rifj.ufj.ai, eV irpvraveica cfn^ffetas (Tarn deemed worthy of tfiis t viz., a maintenance in the Prytaneum). X. Cy. 8. 7, 25. rt TOVTOV paxapuaTepov, TOV yfj /it x&fji'at; (what can be more blessed than this, to mix with the earth ?) ; PI. Gorg. 515, e. aAAa T<$Se /tot elire ^TT} TOVTCI>, el \eyovTat 'A^rjj/aTof 8f^ UepiK\fa j3e\T/oi/s yfyovcvai. Dem. Phil. 1. 41, 5. o/5/ . . . TO CTO KaAws ^/cetfos, Srt raOro /ic'j/ effTiv airavra T& \wpla. a&\a TOV TTO- \ffiov Kcl/j-fva ev fi4f (= bv) Ka.u/SurT/s eiriTpoirov riav OIKIOOV a7re'5ee, OVTOS Tavra eVeretAoTo (A/rt, vou^erto, Trposrarra), etc. cw, (rvy^wpS), d/xeAco, etc. SeSoiKCt, cfr 1 The verbs which take an Infinitive after them, are usually such as do not express a complete idea of themselves, but require an Inf. or some other con- struction, to complete the idea. The Inf., therefore, is the complement of the verb on which it depends. Other verbs take a Participle for their complement. See 309. $ 306.] INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 461 iryu>, a.va.pdXXofJLai, OKI-CO, etc. aTrayopeuto, /care^a), /cwXuw, etc. ; rja^xiav, Trpdyfjiara, da^oA-iav, o^A-ov Trapc^w Tiyt, i^mxriav SiSoVcu, and tlu- like. BovAo/iat 7pcfeii/. 'ETri&u^ai Trope veff&aj. ToA^w virofjLtvftv -rbv Kivtivvov. napaivai o~ot ypd o" /t^/ aTrteVat according to 318, 7: and after a preceding negation : 'Ao"Tu X. Cy. 1. 4, 2. according to ^ 318, 9. (c) ToO Spaire r fve iv (ol Sfffirorai rovs oiKfras) oVayxo?? air fipyovfft, X. C. 2.1,16. ( d ) Has ao"KOs Suo avSpas e^ei TOU /u); K a r a S v a (, X. An. 3. 5, 11. (e) (seldom) Me'AAo^no/ TOVTOVS ttpyfiv, fisre p.)) dvvaff&ai fiKdirrtiv ^/uas, ib. 3. 3, 16. (f) Toy TrAeTo-TOc o/j.i\ov TUV \|/(Aa)c elpyov TO /x^ TO tyyvs TTJS irdAfcus Ko/covpycTi/, Th. 3, 1. according to 308, Rem. 1. (g) very fre- quently after a preceding negation : Ou/c air eixovro ovS" dirb TUV (\cav TO I*)) oi>xl TrAeove/cTetj/ Trap' OUTWV Trctpao'^at, X. Cy. 1. 6,32. according to 318, 9. REM. 2. The verb vfl&eiv,to persuade, regularly takes for its object a sub- stantive-sentence, expressed by the conjunction us and a finite verb ; it takes the Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.) more seldom. X. C. 1. 1, 1. iro\\a.Kis e'&oiViao-a, TO" TTOT6 Aoyots 'A&Tjvaiovs fireiffav ol ypaifa/uej/oi Sw/cpoTTjj/, us aios efrj davdrov TTJ Tr6\fi. REM. 3. In order to express more definitely the idea of something which is to be done, effected, etc., the Greeks sometimes join the conjunction &ST* with the Inf. governed by verbs of this class. Her. 7, 6. oi/e'Treio-e Ee'p ea usTf iroiffiv Tavra (to do this). Sometimes, also, in order to make the pur- pose or object more emphatic, BIT us, us with the Subj., Opt. or Fut. Ind., is used. So in Attic prose, the verbs irpo&vfj.f'io-bai, Siavof'iff&ai, J u7jxa"o-^at, Trapo- Kf\Vavai, etc. apvUT$at (to deny), aTrurrflv, etc. NojLia> a/j.apre'iv (I think [to have erred] that I have erred). 'E\irtu fvTvxTlff eiv (I hope to be happy). A^TTJ rj $6}-a KO\US 5ot ex flv - Th. 3, 74. TJ TT^AJS tKivtivvfvffc TTiiffo. 5 1 o bap fj vo, i. Aeyu eltifvai ravra (1 say [to know] that 1 know this). REM. 4. On the difference between the Inf. and Part, after the verbs 39* 462 SYNTAX. [ 306. , eiSeVat, eTfurrair&ai, /j.av&dveiv, yiyvdaffKfiv, jUty/77<7/ceo - &at, 'ecr&ai ; Seutvvvai, OLirofyaiveiv, Srjhovi/, dyyeAAeij/, f (licet) TTOICO, StaTrparro/xat Karepya^o/xat, Karao-Keuau), etc. Seivos (powerful, capable, fit}, 1/cavos, eTrtr^Setos, /caKos, ^rrwv, curios et/u, etc.; after verbs of choosing, appointing, naming, educating, teaching. Avvapat iroit'iv ravra. Her. 2, 20. of errjo'tat #i/ejuoi eiVi oi'Ttot TTATJ- &VGIV rbv irora.ij.6v. 7. 129. dp'wi/y^ous TOWS fi\Aous e?t/ai iroteet. 5, 97. ffrparnybv air 08 e avr e s avr&v e?j/cu MeAav^iov. OT(Js T* ei/*l iroif'iv ravra. X. Cy. 1. 4, 12. TIS &>/ (rou 76 ixavdarepos 7re?(rai ; 3, 18. b~ei.v6- rcpos SiScio'Keii'. IT o i a; (re yf\av. A iSaffKco ere ypdrep6i' nva k \4ff&ai. So often in Plat. iKav})S 8>srf. X. Ag. 1, 37. eTroiTjo-ej/ (sc. Agesilaus), &ST" avtv vy^s Kal fravdruv ras ir6\eis Sia- T e A e ff a i. (d) The Inf. is also used after the verb 7reu/ce -rb av^pdairfiov Sia iravr^bs &px el v fj.fv rov efKovros, v- \O.Q- Kal irivt]n Trape'xw e>aurbj/ fptarav. X. An. 5. 2, 1. rb ^/J.ICTV rov ffrparevf^aros /careAtire Eej/o^cDi' v \drreiv rb ffrparoir&ov. "Ai6s fffri &av/u.dCfff&ai. Her. 4, 53. Bopvffbevns iriveff&ai ^Sierra's ^(TT: (dulcissimus ad bibendum). 6, 112. re'co? ^v To?(rt "E\\r]o'i Kal rb ovvopa rb M^Scoi' at, inu-t prolu explained (trilling so far (is if < iinj <>r iint:in . us /nl,l not ji6&os, and with verbs of a.5id tan fj.a&fiv (these things are easy to learn or be / (////< (/). Ka\6s tffnv iSe'iv ( pulcher est visu, he is beautiful to see or to be seen). Th. 1, 38. &|*os bav/j.d(rai. 1*1. Phaed. \6yos Swarbs Karavorja-at (capable of being understood). The active subject of the Inf. is easily supplied, in all examples of this kind, e. g. he is beautiful FOR us to see. A Dat. is often ex- pressed with such an Inf., e. g. PL Up. 599, a. f>a.Sta iroie'iv /uV elSori r^v a\Ti&tiav. So 'ScoKpd.Trjs irafft ira.pt'i-xtv cavTbv 4 pur nv (he yielded himself to all to question, i. e. he permitted all to question him). KI:M. 11. From the use of the Inf. after verbs of willing, wishing, entreating, and imploring and the like, the following peculiarities in the use of the Inf. are to be explained : a. The Inf. is very frequently used in the Epic writers instead of the second person Imperative, sometimes also instead of the third person ; instead of the second person, not seldom also in other poets, and even likewise in Herodotus and in the Attic prose-writers. The Inf. must then be considered as the object depending on the Imp. of a verb of willing, which is to be supplied, e. g. e&cAe. Hence when predicative expletives are joined with the Inf., these, inasmuch as they refer to the subject 'i\.T]v fs TTaTpiSo. -yoiav ai 'Adrj- ya/Tjs iri yavvaffiv T?i)/c($/uo(0. Her. G, 86. STJ p.oi /cat ra xpTi/j.aTa 5tcu, /col raSe ra (Tv/j.(3o\a 8 Kvviqyiffiov, TOV Se apKvwpbv eTrea^at. c. Hence the Inf. is sometimes used in reference to the first and second Pers., in qiiestions denoting indignation. Her. 1, 88. 3> fiaatXfv, /ofrepoj/ Ae'yeti/ irpbs 464 . SYNTAX. [$ 307. oi rk voeoov Tvyxdvca, 3) ffiyav eV T$ Trape6vTi Xp6"V >' {shall I speak or be si- lent?). Od. K, 431. 3 Se?A.oi TroV Ipev ; rl KO.K.&V 1/j.ctpere TOVTW ; (whither to go, i. e. whither are you to yo ?). d. Finally, the Inf. is used instead of the Opt., with at ydfj, cfld-e, as the ex- pression of a wish. Od. , 375, sq. at ydp, ZeO re TTOTC/J . . , TOIOS ewj/ rot (instead of 307. Nom.) Gen., Dat., and Ace. with the Infinitive. 1. Most verbs which take the Inf. have, in addition to this object, also a personal object, -which is put in the Case that the verb requires, e. g. Aeo/xat o-ov eA.$etv. REMARK 1. So also ite \evciv, which signifies to impel, to urge, hence to command (jubere), in Attic prose, is always constructed with the Ace. and the Inf., e. g. /ceAeuw ere ypd^ew (jubeo te scribere). 2. When predicative expletives, consisting of adjectives or sub- stantives, and referring to the personal object of the govern- ing verb, are joined with the Infinitive, they are either put by attraction in the same case as the personal object, or in the Accusative without attraction. (a) Gen. with Inf. Aeoyuaf V ir6\efj.ov yevfv eSeTjidijtrai' is yevfff&ai (requested the Athenians to aid them). If the Gen. is fol- lowed by the Inf. accompanied by a more definite ex- pletive, this expletive is always put in the Acc. } e. g. Lys. 118. Seo^tat v/j.>v Ka.Tafyfifyia'aff&a.i QeonvfjcrTov, ev- &v/j.ovtJLvdvs, offos )U.ot 6 aycav effrw (I pray you to condemn Th., considering, etc.). Th. 1, 120. avSpuv aya- &cav eVrti/, etS IKOV/JLCI/OVS e| ftp^vrjs iro\e(j.*iv (it is the characteristic of brave men, when injured, to exchange peace for war). (b) Dot. icith Inf. 'Sv/j./SovXevw crot TT p o 3- v jj. a> etvat (I advise you to be zeal- ous). ~2,v/jifiov\(voo ffoi Trpo&vfji.oi' flvai. X. An. 2. 1,2. eSo|e TO?S ruv 'E\\-fivocv ffrpar^yols (Tuo-Kevacro/u- 4vois ^ elxoi/ Kal e |o7rAicra /J.GVO is irpo'tfvai. X. Hipparch. 7, 1. iravrl Trpos-fjKfi &PXOVTL

p((T&at TO. (T(p(Tfpa aiiruv (instead of avro?s airiovcriv a.iro!<'. should nirnj t/uir < f]'(dx with them. So irapayyt\\a>, a.Trayyf\\ca, irposrarTw, SiaKf\cvofjLai fff a.trifva.1. X. C. 4. 7, 1. 2w/cpaT7js avrdpiceis *v rats irposTj/cou- ffcus irpd^fffiv avr ovs (TOVS 6 piXovvT as awTaJ) flvai 4 TT e fj. e A. e TT o. So also the verbs d-trf'tv, \eyei i/, <}>pdfiv t ua> TOV ayaSov avopa e vSui/x ovet f (I believe that the good man is happy}. If the predicate is an adjective, participle, or substantive with flvai yiyfco-^at, etc. ($ 240, 2), as C O ttyo$6? avrjp evSat/xcuf coTiV, then these words also are put in the Ace., e. g. No/xi^w TOV ayaSov avSpa evSat/zova ctvai. 4. But when the subject of the governing verb is at the same time the subject of the Inf. also, the subject of the Inf. is not expressed in Greek, as it is in Latin, by the Ace. of a personal pronoun, but is wholly omitted ; and "when adjectives or sub- stantives stand with the Inf. as expletives of the predicate, they are put, by attraction, in the Xom. 466 SYNTAX. [$ 307. anapretv (I believe I have erred, or that I have erred, credo me O?et a/j-apre'iv (you think that you have erred). Ofercu afj.aprf'iv. Ol6/ae^a apaprfiv. Otopai evSalfj-wy elvat (I think lam happy, or that lam happy, credo me beatum esse). Olfet e vSal/j-cav eTfat. Olfercu fvSat/j.iav eli/at. Oi6/j.&a evdaifj.ov es flvai. 'O (rTparTrybs , cru, ^^e?j, u^eTs, o-^eTs, are joined with the Inf. 'ETTO/J.VVCI) troi . . $ /xV tyca /3ouAe/ 'EAAaSo ffw, u/ueTs 5' a7ro5pc{<7eo-&cu T^ Tr^-y^oTa, OUK 6p&a>s Dem. Ph. 3, 74 (if you think that the Chalcidians will save Greece, and that rouble of it, etc.). you will escape the trouble of it, etc.). (Of v 2a/ia> e caTfpovs TT oielv ru>v iraTfp&v, X. C. 1.2,49 (persuadens discipulissuis,se EOS sapientiores reddere patribus). 5. Wlien the governing word is an oblique Case of a parti- ciple, the predicative expletives which are connected with the Inf., are put, by attraction, in the same Case as that participle. PI. Apol. 21. b. ?3\&o' eVi nva TWJ/ SOKOVVTCOV o-ov vvv Av/aW

eKftvovs 4\bf?v irpbs j' JivSpa 6u5oi/xoi/a flval Tj/ti T 2> j/ Kal TrovT/pfc v &b\io v, PL Gorg. 407, C. KperTTOv (sc. &TT/) o'i>' iroAAors ot/couj/To d(r0aAwy apKovvra ^X tI/ > ^ fJ-ovov 5 tatTu>fj.vov TO. TUV iro\n)V tiriKivSvifus irdyra KeT7j X a ^ 7r ^ v tSTC with the Inf. or Ind. (tantum abcst, ut ut) so far is it from, and iroAAoG Se'cu with the Inf. at rij/ /SatriAe'a uirofyvyeiv and A eyerat 6 fiaviXevs X. Cy. 5. 3, 30. 6 'Affffvpios fls TAJJ/ x^P av ^SaAAeii/ a.yy^\K(rai. Her. 3, 124. t56i(r&cu juot 5 o K f T KCU r) fKfivwv v fi pis Kal rj f] n ere pa. virotyia. 1*1. 1'hat'd. 74, a. ap' o5 v ov Kara TTOVTO raCra 6/j.oiuiu KT\. 67, c. K d& ap cr is clvai ov TOVTO vfjifiaii'fi. Ai Kai6 s flfMi TOVTO TrpaTTfiv instead of SuccuoV eVr^ /ie TOVTO irpaTTeiv. Ai- Kaits dpi flvai 2\fv&epos. Her. 6, 12. ^7r/8o|ot Tu>vTb TOVTO ir(io~o~&ai flffi. X. Cy. 5. 4, 19. &to i ye to~ fjisv TOV ycytvTiu.evov irpa.yu.a.Tos TOVTOV a.Tro\avo~ai TI ayc&ov. Isocr. Paneg. 76, 168. TOO~OVTOV Sfovo'ii' ^Aeeti/, Ssre Kal /LtaAAov Xaipovaiv M rots oAA^Awv KaKots (so far are they from pitying, that they rat/ier rejoice even, etc.). REM. 7. The personal construction with the verbs 8oKe/, ^oi/ceVo<, and the like, cxtriids :ilso to clauses with us, expressing comparison, as is the case in Latin with ut r/t/tor, ut vidcris. etc., instead of itt. riditiu: * PI. Rp. 426, b. OVK tiratveTris d, f (yon do not jiraise, as it seems [intend of ax you N.,///| s/tc/t nieiv, rb rvjs operas eiri&v/j.e'iv, rb rots Tro\[j.io i s /ic^xeaftat. (c) Tb KoAws ypdtyew, rb icaXws airo^aveiv (honorable death). Yet pronouns in the Neut. Sing., as attributive adjectives, are joined with the Inf., e. g. Plat. avrb rb airo^vfjaKeiv. By prefixing the article, whole sentences can be represented as one extended substantive-idea. 2. When the Inf., whether as a subject or object, has a sub- ject of its own and predicative expletives, both the subject and expletives, as in the case of the Inf. without the article, are put in the Ace., because the Inf., even as a subject, is considered dependent ($ 307, Rem. 5). When, however, the subject of the Inf. is not different from the principal subject of the sentence, it is not expressed, and the predicative expletives are put, by attraction, in the same Case as the principal subject of the sentence, i. e. in the Nona. (a) Nominative (subject). X. Cy. 5. 4, 19. rb apaprdveiv av&ptoirov s &VTO.S ouSeV, oT^ucu, ^avjj.a,ffr6v (that men constituted as they are should err, is not strange) ; here rb afiaprdveiv which is the subject of effrl, has av&p&Trovs for its own subject, and ovras as its predicative expletive. 7. 5, 82. ov rb fj.^ \a- ;8et>To aya&a ovrca ye xaAeTrJi/, Sasirep rb \a&6vra eVru/ ^ rov a\ea(T&ai SiKaiorepoj/, fy $ 308.] INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE. 469 TOU ToTs V iro\LTwv $ia.ita Savartp air o& v T}ff /ce iv. (c) Dative : (o) As the object of single verbs and adjectives, e. g. cbno-Ta), vw, eoiKa, opoios, avavrlos, very often as the instrumental Dat. X. Ap. 14. rtf tfjie rtr i fjiTjarbai virb 5ai/j.6vwi' (do not believe in my having been honored, that I have been honored). PL Phacd. 7 1 , c. T $ riv fort n tvavriov, Sisirep r$ typrjyoptvai TO /co^euSetv , (is there something opposite to living, as sleeping is to waking). X. Hier. 7, 3. Sofce? TOUTW Sicxpfpfiv av^jp riov &\\cav (uKav, r $ Ti/iTJs opeyeff&ai (seems to differ from other animals in this, that). (/J) With prepositions: ^y, in,4vl, on the condition that, in order that, because, irp6s, besides. PL Gorg. 456, e. irap^offav firl r$ diKaias xP : n ff ^ fat TOUTOIS (TO?S 8ir\ots) irpbs TOUS Tro\ffj.tovv (sc. ainj- pcararo), 5io TO ayxivovs elvai rax" aireKpivtro (because he was fond of learning). REMARK 1. Many verbs and verbal expressions, which are commonly con- structed with an Inf. merely, sometimes take also the Inf. with the article r6, 40 470 SYNTAX. [$ 309. even when they would have their object, if a substantive, in the Gen. The addition of the article gives greater emphasis to what is expressi-l by the Inf. X. C 3. 6, 6. rb irXovaicarepav TTIV ir6\iv voiftv dj'ajSaA.ou/.ie&a. Th. 3, 1. rbv -rrXfiffrov Ofj-iXov T&V tyiAiav elpyov rb fj.)) TCI yyvs TTJS TroAea's /ca/coi/p- yelv (tfpyeiv nva nvos). But when a preposition precedes an Inf., the nviiclc can never be omitted, because then the Inf. becomes an actual verbal substan- tive. REM. 2. As the Ace. of a substantive, so also the Inf. with the Ace. of the article, is used in exclamations and questions implying indignation. In poetry, however, the article is sometimes omitted with the Inf. X. Cy. 2. 2, 3. Ixetvos iravv avia&ets flire -rrpbs eavr6v Trjs rvxys, rb e/j.1 vvv KX^^rfvra Sevpo r vx f tv ! (that I have just now been called hither !). Without the article : Acsch. Eum. 835. 6)U6 ira&e'ii' raSe, eD, /J.V(TOS ! REM. 3. There are many phrases, used as adverbial expressions, in which the article r6 is placed before the Inf elj/at which stands in connection with an adverb or a preposition and its Case. These must be regarded as adverbial Accusatives. See 279, Rem. 10. The Inf. elVcu denotes a state or condition, e. g. rJ> vvv ?vat, the present state, condition, and as an adverbial expression, with respect to, or according to the present state of affairs, pro praesenti temporis conditione ; rb T^/u,epoj> elvai, pro hodierni diet conditione. X. An. 1. 6, 9. TO Kara TOVTOV tlvai (so far as he is concerned). H. 3. 5, 9. rb per ^ir' elvai airo\eim> avrf) TIKTOV- 7rov and opw avSpwTrov rpe^ovra. 3. But when the subject of the principal verb is at the same time its object also, as Ot^a (eya>) e/xavrov SVTJTOV oWa, then the per- sonal pronoun, which would denote the object, is omitted, and the participle is put, by means of attraction, in the same Case 472 SYNTAX. [$ 310. as the subject of the principal verb, i. e. in the Nona. (Comp. $ 307, 4), e. g. oTSa SvyTos &v. For more examples, see No. 4. KEMARK 1. Yet the Ace. of the personal pronoun and participle, as the object of the principal verb, is expressed, when the subject as an object is to be made emphatic. Comp. 307, Rem. 4. X. Cy. 1. 4, 4. ov%, & KpelrTcav j/'Set &v, ravTa irpovKaXe'tTO roiis avv6vras, dAA' airep e5 rjSei eavrbv i]rrova OPT a, ravra efiipX*- 5 i 1- TfpifiSov avrovs ybpa afiwarovs y evo fj.4 vovs (they permitted themselves to become enfeebled by old aye). REM. 2. With orui/otSa, | u foiSa e/j.avT(p a o 7j, OKVOVVTI Xtyfiv. See 311, 9. 4. The verbs and expressions, with "which the participle is used as a complement, are the following : (a) Verba sentiendi, i. e. such as denote a perception by the senses or by the mind, e. g. opav, aKovew, eiSei/cu (to know), CTTLO-- (to knoiv), /xav^aveiv (to perceive), yiyj/tocrKeij/ (to know}, ev- (to consider}, TrvySfoearSai (to perceive), etc. Th. 1, 32. ^/ie?s a5 iivcn 01 6p)/j.v ovres Vpryv4ff&ou (we see that we are unable, etc.). 'Opw l\wv 8 ia\eyo fj.et>ov (I heard Socrates discoursing concerning friends). H. 4. 8, 29. tfitovcre rbv paffv- fiov\ov irposiovra (he heard that Thrasybulus ivas coming). Cy. 1.4,25. Ka 1 uj8u(T7]s tfKOvffev avSpos ^877 6^70 Stoxetpt^juevov TOV Kvpov. OlSo &vi)Tbs &v (I know that I am mortal). O?Sa &v& pair ov ovra. Her. 3, 1 . 5 jSatnAeO, 8 tafie fi\T)/j. cvos VTTO 'A/xacnos ov (do you not see that you have been deceived?). 40. ^ $ 310.] THE PARTICIPLE AS A COMPLEMENT OF THE VERB. 473

avpov cu>ai, i\eyX L (to prove, to convict), aXto-Keo-^at (to &e convicted), TTOLUV (to rep resent), evpio-Kw (to find), etc. PI. Phncd. 101, c. r) tyvx)] aSdvaTos 4>alverai olffa. (the soul appears to be immortal). Her. 6, 21. 'A&r/i/cubi 5?}Aoj/ etrotriffav vtr epax^0"^VT s TIJ MiA?'/Tou a\uxr(i (made it evident that they were exceedingly yrieved on account of the capture of Miletus). Isocr. Evag. 190, d. rots irotrjTo?s r ovs & e ov s olov T' - av e po s ft/At, (p >o i v o /u a t r}]v irarpiSa eu Trotrj eras (f am evi- dent having done icelf, i. e. it is evident tliat I have done well for my country). X. An. 2. 6, 23. ffTtpywv fyavsp b s /xef ?) v ouSeVa, OTOJ 8e (pair] ((>i\os flvai, rovrca $v8ri \o s 4yiyvcTo * IT i/3ov\ev(av (he teas evident lovimj no one, i. e. it was evident that he loved, etc.). PI. Apol. 23, d. /caraSTjAot yiyvovrai irpos- fj.eif flSfvcu, e 1 5 6 T f s Se (c) Verba affectuum, i. e. verbs which denote an affection or State of the mind, e. g. xaiptiv, ^Seo-^cu, dyaAAeo-^at, ayaTrav (to be content), a^ecr^ai, dyai/aKretv, at8cto--9at and cu9(u (to be ashamed), /xera/AeXcto-^ai, //.CTa/AeAa, opyt^ecr^at, /3apwo-^at, etc. X. IT. 6. 4, 23. o &ebs iroAAa/cts x a ^P fl TOVS p.fv fjiiKpovs /J.fyd\ovs troiuv, US 5e /j.(yd\ovs piKpovs (rejoices to make the small great). Hicr. 8, 4. Sta\fy6fi- TC aya\\6/j.f&a TO?S Tr/JOTCT^UTj/itVots /uaA.Aoi', 1j rots ^/c TOU f(rou ^/xr^ olffi (ire are proud to converse with those preferred in honor, etc.). Th. 1, 77. 45 1- Kovfj.(voi ol &i>dpuiroi yuaAAoj/ opyiovrai, $ )8 ia^6p.fvo i (men are more ind/'/nant when they are injured than when they suffer violence). 4, 27 (ol 'A&rjvcuoi) /itr e jj.4 A.OJ/T o ras airovSas ov S e | a ju e i/ o t. 5. 35. TOUS &c TTJS tn\aov $ pevo t x^ poviriv (ol Seal) aybpuiruv fart (rejoice to be honored). Xatpia coi l\&6vri (I rejoice that you have come). PI. Rp. 475, b. inrb ff/j-iKporeptay KO! , 633. eVel rdpTnjffav es aAA^Aovs op6(avres (when they were satisfied at looking at each other}. S. 0. C. 768. jiieo-T&s ^ v &v fj-ov/nevo s. Ear. Ion. 924. otf rot )8 Ae'ireo y e'/x7ri7rA.o/tat trp6su>Trov. Her. 7, 146. Tat/Ta frrjev /u.ei/0 1 e&xri 7rA?jpees. (e) Verbs signifying to overlook, to permit, to endure, to per- severe, to continue, also to 6e weary, to be exhausted, e. g. KO.#- cis- tyopav, TrpoUcrSai (to neglect, to permit), dve^eo-^a petv, vTrojaei/eiv, AiTrapeti/ (per sever are), Ka/xvetv, aTretTretv, etc. Her. 7, 1 68. ou TreptoTrrerj e'trrt ^ 'EAAas aTroAAu^tej/Tj ( Hellas is not to be permitted to be destroyed). 101. et"EAA7jves viro p.ev tovff i ^eTpos e/xol aj/Tae*- p6/j.evoi (will venture to withstand me). 9,45. AtTrapeere juevoj/res (con- fr'nwe to re?nain). 3, 65 (v^juv ^Trjcr/cTjTTTw ) ^Trepii'Se??/ T^J/ ^\^^^ov(t]v at/Tis ts M-f]5ovs IT e pie\bov, i> ovSfvl ^fcas irpoeff- 3-ai aSiKov/j.evovs. PL Gorg. 470, c. /u)? Kdfj.rjs (pi\ov &v8pa evepyeruv (do not be weary of doing good to a friend). For avex ff & al w i tn tne Gen., see 275, 1. (f ) Verbs signifying to begin and cease, cause to cease, to omit, to be remiss, e. g. ap^eo-^at, vTrdpxeW, iravtw, 7raueo-$ai, StaAAarretv, aTraXXarTCcr^at ; /xe^tecr^at, AaVecr^ai, e/ he fortunate, to distinguish n<-'s m-/j\ '<> In- inferior, ftt do weft, to err, C. g. evrv^eti/, VIKO.V, Kpa- cv TTOICLV, a.fj.aprdviv y uSiKttv, etc 1 . HIT. .">. 24. 3 /TS Ka ^ <"ro' / 5as A. u o v T e s (you v (you are in fault in doing tins). PI. Phncd. 60, c. e5 y ^TT oirjr to excel oil in doing good). An. 2. 3, 23. oi>x y T rr; s and the Fut. Part.), and the Ionic phrases TroXXds ct/xi, tyxet/Aai, yty vo/xat, ^o 6c urgent about, to lay it to heart, to consider im- portant. Hrr. 7, 9. ^Trctp^&Tjy ^ir Xaui'tti' ^TT} TOI/J fij/5pas TOVTOVS (I attempted to march against). PI. Phileb. 21, a. Iv v(av Kvffcu. rbv tr6pov (earnestly entreated the lonians to break down (i) Certain expressions, mostly impersonal, e. g. it is fit, use- ful, jirojitable, good, agreeable, shameful, it is to my mind, and the like. TlpfiTfi /j.ot aya&cS OVT i and ayaScj) tlvai ( It is proper for me to be good) . Th. 1, 118. tinrjpwTwi/ rbv &c.6v, i (sc. avroTs) TTO\ fJLOvffiv &fj.ivov t m tne sense of to be in a condition or state, has an active, middle, or deponer* * ^/inle joined ^+^ ; * -\ 476 SYNTAX. 310. order to express the continued condition of the action (similar to the Latin aliquid pertractatum habere). Her. 3, 65. 6\(t> c%ou/>ia MKOVV iTa el^oy o-vaKfKOfj.KTfj.4voi, (into ivhich having conveyed all their provisions they had them there, or, as this idiom is more commonly expressed in English, into which they had conveyed their provisions). Dem. Phil. 3. 113, 12. Kal Qepas irpcprjv us (pi\os els &TTa\iav cA.&cbi' %et KOT a.\a.ft v (I ALWAYS, CONTINUALLY do what is honorable). 1, 157. pav 6?r iKOfjifvoi (anticipated the Persians much in coming to the bridge, came to the bridge long before the Persians). Also the conjunction irp\v tf (or ^ alone) with the Inf. can follow tybaveiv, e. g. Her. 6,116. efpSryo-av diri/ctJ^e^ irplf % TOVS fiapfidpovs '/J/ceti/ (they arrived before the barbarians came). Ov (pfrdveiv followed by Kal, Kal evfrvs, may be translated by scarcely when, no sooner than, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. 58, 86 (ol Ao/ceSatyu^i/iot) OVK e < & TJ a a v trv- &6/J.evoi TOV Trepl T^]V ^A.rTiK^v Tr6\fjLOf, K o 1 7roi/Ta>f T&V &\\ow afj,e\-f](Tav 5\Kov i][juv a.fjt.vvovvTs (the Lacedaemonians no sooner heard of the war in Attica, than they left everything to come to our defence, or they scarcely heard when, etc.). So in the phrase, OVK kv ty&avois iroiiav ri (you should do nothing quicker,!, e. you cannot do it too quickly, or do it quickly). X. C. 2. 3, 11. QVK &j/ 7j, a,KO\odovvT f s ; (will you not follow inuiiKlfnttlyf = follow immediately). OVK av Q&dvois ire paivotv ; (= statim rcliqua conclude). i I. With \avbdvciv and Qbdveiv the relation is sometimes ra- the participles of these verbs being used as the complement of the -o\. X. Cy. 3. 3, 18. QbdvovrfS tfSi) SpoG/uei/ T,V iKeivwv yrjv "age their country, ant id [Kit ing them = we anticipate them in ravaging their country). 6. 4, 10. rj 6e A a & o v a a avrbv ffvvftyfiirfTO (she followed unknown to hi m). KI:M. 5. The Part, of the verb efvoi, connected with adjectives or sub- stantives, with several of the above named verbs, is sometimes omitted, even when dvai is an essential word ; thus after Verba sentiendi and dec/arandi, e. g. Dem. Ph. 1. 45, 18. flSws finpfirtls vpus (knowing that you are ready). 54, 41. iav Iv X(pporf)atvofj.at, not seldom also with rvyx avw t Stare A a>, 8 1 aytyvo fiai, e. g.X. C. 1.6,2. a.wir6l>i}T6s re Kal b^wv Store Aets. $311. Remarks on the interchange of the Participle and Infinitive. Some verbs of the classes above mentioned are also constructed with the Inf., yet with a different meaning. 1. 'A K o v f i v with a Part., implies both a direct perception by one's own senses, and an indirect one, though certain and well-grounded ; with the Inf., it im- plies only an indirect perception obtained by hearsay, e.g. 'A/coww avrov Sia\fyofjifvov (i. e. ejus sennones anribus meis percipio). K.a/j.f3vrrr)s IjKovo-f rbv Kvpov avSpbs ^877 eypo. $ tax in the sense of to be assured, to know (ei'SeW), has a participle connected with it ; still this occurs^ very rarely. X. An. 6. 6, 24. v6fjiie S 1 , r b Tebvavai aur&J Kpeltrvov elvai (judged that it was better for him to die than to lire lotit/t-r). ITo (he seemed to weep, but did not weep). 9. 'E o i K e va. i with a Part, in the Norn, to appear ; with a Part, in the Dat. to be like ( 310, Rem. 2) ; Avith the Inf. to seem ; 'E o i K O.T Tvpavvlcri ^aAAoj/, ^ TroXiTeiais T]S6/j.voi (you appear to enjoy, you evidently enjoy, etc.) (comp. No. 8 ) . PI. Rp. 444, c. eoiKas OKVOVVTI Xsyeiv (you are like one in doubt in speaking = you seem to speak like one in doubt). X. Hier. 7. 1. eot/cep erj, /j.eya TI elvai ?j Ti/j.-f) (honor seems to be something important). Cy. 1. 4, 9. Troifi) oirus fiov\i ffv yhp vvv 76 T]fj.(av eot/cos fiacr i\evs e?vai. j' with a Part, is used of the annunciation of actual events ; with an Inf. of the annunciation of things still uncertain, merely assumed. Dem. Ol. 2. (3). 29, 4. a-irtjyyeX^'n $i\nnros vp.'iv eV &pa.Kp Tpirov /) re- -raprov (Tos TOUT} 'HpaToj/ re?%os iro\iopKcav (a settled fact). X. Cy. 1. 5, 30. 6 'Acravpios els r)]V x^P av *(J-fid\\eii/ ayy\\eTai (whether he had made an actual irruption or not, is uncertain). and airoQalvftv with a Part, to shoiv, to point out; with an Inf. to teach. y E5ei|a o-e a5t/c7j(rai/To(Z showed that you had done wrong). X. An. 2. 3, 14. aty'iKOJ/To els Ka>/j.as, o&ev air e5 eiav oi riyep.6vts \a[j.fid- veiv TO cTTiTTjSeja (where they pointed out to them that they might obtain pro- visions). Dem. Cor. 271, 135. (rj /SouA^/ AiVxiVr;y) Kal irpo$6Tyv etvai Kal KaK.6vovv VIMV aTrecpaLvev (docuit). But the Inf. is likewise used with Set/cvj/at, when the object of this verb is not to be represented as something perceived, but only as something possible, e. g. X. C. 2. 3, 17. KifSvvevcreis CTT iS 6?cu, 5' ^airaTT)&i'Tas Kal Karayo-nrev&fvras VTT Ipov Y>Kfiv fls 4>uriinj '> J '/i< dots ; \vitli an Inf. to Ite OtOtOMtd or a /raid to do tomething l 'tin from dm'iK/ SOHH t/n'ii'/ t/iruit< fir r, ntnl from doing soiiii thing l>t/ shami'. A.iffxvvofj.ai KOKO. Trpdrruv rbv vo pat KaKa irpdrrtiv rfcy ai x^-P 1 " PTITW M $vva.ff&ai) OVK ala'x^fo/j.ai Ae- y a) v TO Sf ' 'EAy /iK7Te Trap' ^fiol airoSw(reo, rovro, tv fore, on a I &x v v o Ifj. t\ v &v flirt'ty. S. Aj. 506. at 8 t era i /J.fv irartpa rbv (rov Iv \vyptp yripa irpo- \fiirras air o\e ITT eiv. R. L. 9, 4. irs &v ris alffxvv&siri rbv KUKOV avaK.r\vov irapa.Xa.fie'iv. av [ 310, 4, (e)] is sometimes, though seldom, constructed with an Inf. also, without any marked difference, as avyx^P^t ^""j e - Th. 4, 48. oi/8' flsifvat fva/j.iv TT t pi6\^f a bat ovS f va (they said they would not permit any one to enter). 'Evir peirfiv, to permit, is commonly connected with an Inf., rarely with a Part. X. An. 1.2, 19. TOVTTJJ/ rV Xdpav tTTfrpt^e Siapirdffai ro?s "EAAr/ff^ ( permitted the Greeks to plun- der). Isocr. Pac. r] ir6\is avrols OVK tiriTpcfyfi irapa&aivov P r l v 8fa(r&ai (dared to withstand the enemy making an incursion into their country). 16. y Apx eue py er f?v. 5, 15. 'A&Tqva'ioi airb rS>v irar4pv\aKas us apiffrovs fJvai Traixroi avrovs Kr\. IS.Tlfipaffbai with a Part., to make trial of anything, to practise [$ 310, 4, (h)] ; still this construction is rare; with the Inf. to attempt to do something ; irapao- Kcvdf TIo\vKpd- TEO (she used every expedient, etc.). EKM.UUC. By comparing $ 306 with 310, it will be seen that the Inf., as a complement of the verb, denotes something aimed at, intended, something ef- fected, while the participle, inasmuch as the idea expressed by it is prior to, or coincident with that of the verb with which it is connected, implies the actual existence of the idea designated by it. The participle, therefore, implies that the action denoted by it actually takes place, while the Inf. does not. 480 SYNTAX. [$ 312. $ 312. The Participle used to express Adverbial or Circumstantial Relations. 1. In the second place, the Part, is used to denote such an attributive qualification of a substantive, as will, at the same time, define the predicate of the sentence more exactly. In this case, the Part, expresses the adverbial relations of time, cause, motive or purpose, condition and concession, manner. The English often uses a Part. in this case, e. g. he said laughing (7 e A. > v) ; the city, besieged by the enemy, suffered much distress (iroAts virb TUV iroXen'iav TTO - \iopKov p.4v-ri). Instead of the Part, the English often uses either a subor dinate clause with the conjunctions when, after, while, since, because, as, inasmuch as, in order to, if, although, or a substantive with a preposition, e. g. Kvpos r^v Tr6\iv f\wv aj/fjA&ej' (after Cyrus had taken the city, he returned, or after taking the city, etc.). 2. In English we often translate the participle by a verb, connecting it with its own clause by one of the above-named conjunctions, using as a subject either the word with which the participle agrees, or a pronoun referring to it. Of 7ro\eViot Qvyovres virb ruv iro\ffilfav eSicax&Ww (WHEN the enemy FLED, THEY were pursued by the enemy, or the enemy FLED AND were pursued). To is Tlfpa-ais ets rV yriv eis/3aA.ot/73, Rein. 11. Subordinate clauses also may be used instead of the participial construction, either for the sake of greater em- s, or for perspicuity. 1 . The Participle as described under 2 and 3, is used to denote : (a) A specification of time, where the English uses subordi- nate' clauses, with the conjunctions when, while, during, after, since, or a substantive with a preposition. X. C. 1. 2, 22. iro\\ol ra xptfwa ava\(acr avr e s, S>v irpovbtv a ncepSwc, alffxpa vop.tnmS cTvai, TOVTUV OVK air^xovrai (after wasting their money, after, when they had wasted). An. 'A K o v a a vros /col M x&ovl 5c p K ope v o to iravra Kara -naSiav avaffKivSvtevfrfia'eTai. X. An. 6. 3, 8. T\UTwi/Tes Kal OTrb TOV vSaTos flpyov (rovs "EAArj^as) ol &paKts (at last the Thracians kept the Greeks from the water). (7) Aia\nrhv xp6 vov > ofi 6 * some time, after a ivhile, subsequently, or Sia\. TTO\VV, b\iyov xp-, tn lo-xuv , [UKpAv. PL Phaed. 59, e. ov iro\vv olv xpdf REM. 4. The Part, in the Gen. sometimes stands without a subject, when the subject can be readily supplied from what goes before, or when the subject is indefinite, where a demonstrative pronoun, or the words irpdy^ara xp4l JMr &i t, etc., used in a general sense, may be understood. Th. 1, 116. npi- 41 482 SYNTAX. [$ 312. /cXfjs ^x eTO Kara Ta%os M Kavvov Kal Kapias, esayye\& fvrwv, on vyes eV avrovs ir\eov oe'iirvov, eTTTjpero o KCpos. Also in the Sing. Th. 1, 74. (rcupcas S-rjXw&fVTOs, on eV TCUS vaval TUV 'E\\r)i>cav ra irpdy/j.aTa ^yeVero (it having been made very evident that). Comp. the Latin cognito, edicto, petito, etc., instead of postquam cognitum est, etc. EE3i. 5. In order to define the time more exactly, the preposition eiri is frequently connected with the Gen., yet only when the Part, is in the Pres. tense, e. g. 'Eirl Kvpov ftaff i\fvovr os (while Cyrus was king). See $ 296, 1, (2). The relation of past time is sometimes made more definite by the prep- osition /terci, after, with the Ace. e. g. Her. 6. 132. /ieret 8e 4v Mapa&wvi Tpca/u.a yev6/ji.voj> MiAnaSTjs ov|ero (after the slaughter made at Marathon). See 294, II, (2). The relation of indefinite time expressed by about, nearly, is indicated by vir6 with the Ace., e. g. virb T^V irpdrrjv fTrf\&ovaav VVKTO, [ 299, III, (2)]. the coincidence or contemporaneousness of one thing with another, is expressed by a/j.a with the Dat., e. g. a [A })/& pa 5 ia(pu>(TKov(rr) (as soon as daybreak) ; a/xa T(s), O/TO> 5^, a>8e. X. C. 3. 10, 2. e/c iro\\S)v ffvvdyovTes ra e| fKaffrov K p fjL i) fji a i. Ile/xircu o~f \toi/ra (I send you that you may, to, in order to, suy). (d) A condition, where the English often uses a subordinate clause with if; or a concession, where the English uses a sub- ordinate clause with altlwugh, though. X. Cy. 8, 7, 28. rovs i\ovs fvfpyfrovvres teal rovs tybpovs 8uj^u.t]v \af36vrwv, ovSev &j/ Tr\tov yfvoiro ro?s &\\ois, fvbs Sf avSpos fv pavf) o~avros, airavrfs 6v a.iro\avfffiav ol /3ou\6/j.tvoi K0ivs oX/yci Svfdfj.fi/oi Trpoopav livdpwTroi TTfpl rov /j,(\\oi>Tos iro\\a (irixftpovfj.fi/ TrpdrTfiv (although men can foresee little, yet, etc.). REM. 8. When the Part, expresses a concession, the particles K at (neg. ouSe, /*rj5), Katirtp, Kal rav-ra, are commonly joined with it. X. An. 1. 6, 10. irposfKvtfTfffay (*Op6vTTjv) Kaiirep tl94rtt t ori *TT\ Havana Hyotro (although t/tei/ tun-, that). Eur. Ph. 1618. OVK iv irpotioirjif ovSfTTfp TT p d a a u v KO.KUS. PI. Kp. 404, h. "Ouripos fv rail rtav ijpwcav fffTidfffffiv otire ix&vffiv avrovs (TTia, Kal ravra tvl baXdrrr) (v"E\\i]STr6vTa> 6vras (andthat too, though they were, etc.). lavra in such connections, may often be governed by the verb TiWw : and he did this, although they icere. etc. The words o/icus, fir a, Kara, fir fir a, K air fir a, are often added to the predicate of the sentence. Her. 6, 120. vo-rfpoi Se am- K6fj.fi/ot TTJS poavvT}v flvai ro ra tavrov irpdrrfiv, fir fir a ouSeV e p6 /J.GV o i (cum impetu delati) 4s4imrrW is TOVS Alytv^ras (as often as they escaped the Athenians, rushing on violently they fell into the hands of the Aeginetae). 8, 87. (i/avs) Stw/cojutV?] virb rfjs 'ATTIK^S $>4pov(ra. eW/3ai\e vy'l' v, where the English may use the preposition with; %xepwi/ irpos-fi^affei', 'iirwov &ywv $\bfi', 'nrireas \afihv robs iro\e/j.iovs KK ^t reXevrav (since it is not in our power to live honorably). Protag. 358, d. OTO.V avayKacr&r) SuoTi/ Ka/cotV rb erepoi/ alpe'io'&at, ouSels rb |Ue?bj> alp^ffe- rai, 6|bi/ rb eAorToi/ (aipe'iff&ai), no one will choose the greater, when it is in his power to choose the less. Her. 1, 129."Ap7ra7os, irapebv aurca jSatnAe'a yivtff&tu, rb Kpdros (when it teas in his power to become a king). 5, 49. liceat) TTJS Affirfs Trd(rr)s ^px c " / euTrere'cos, &\\o TI aip'f)S TTO- p a cr x & v > " {iW$7, abvvarov 6v. Also some- tiiius without 6v, e. g. STJA.OV, ivo7oroy. (b) Ai-cii-iitivi-s absolute. Though the participles of impersonal verbs ion- ally have no subject joined with them in the Ace. Absol., yet a neuter pronoun, not a substantive, may be joined with them as their subject. Her. 2, 66. TOUT a yiv6pfva, ireV&ca /xeycUa robs Alyvirriovs KaTa\au.&li/ei (when this is acme, the Egyptians are filled with great grief). Th. 4, 125. tfti fitv SoKofr dvaxttpei", KvpuSrev 5 6 ovSfv (scd quum nihil decretum esset), povv ^n-' otKov. X. H. 3. 2, 19. So'ai/Ta $( ravra Kal irepavd 'J/TO, TO /iei/ (TTpaTevpaTa airfjA&ci' (w-'Aen ffose things had been agreed upon and accomplished). I.' IM. 11. The Genilircs ahsohtfp, however, are more frequent than the Ace., when a neuter pronoun is joined with the impersonal verb. X. H. 1. 1, 36. 86avTos T o i> T o v 6>x 6TO (hac re decretd. this Imriny been ar/reed to, when this had been, etc.). 7, 30 and 5. 2. 24. 5 oai/T cav TOUT s, is connected both with the dependent Part. ($ 312, 3), and also with the Gen. and Ace, absolute, when the idea expressed by the Part, is to be in- dicated as a representation, as a subjective view, opinion, 01 purpose of the actor or speaker. This o>9 has the same signifi- cation as a Part, of a verb of thinking or saying, followed by an Inf., or Ace. with an Inf. The^ English can express this ws by the expressions thinking, intending, ivith the intention of, saying, or by as though, as if, under the pretence that, because. (a) Simple Participle. X. Cy. 1. 1, 1. olrvpaweiv e'Trixe'pVaTfSj K&V &TTO- e|uW( irdvras Qrjfiaiovs, us TUV Tvpdvvcav i f&v ecor coy (quiatyranni mortui essent, because, as he said, the tyrants were dead). Th. 1, 2. es 'Iwvlav ucrre- pov, cos oi>x tKow/js ovo"r\s rrjs 'Arnicas, airoiKias H-fW/j.tyav (i.e. vo/j.iovTfs ovx iKavriv elvcu) (afterward sent colonies to Ionia, thinking that Attica was not large enough). (c) Accusative absolute. X. An. 5. 2, 12. 6 Se TO?S ire\raffrats iriiffi Trap-fiy- yeAAe SiT)yKv\c>)!J.evovs leVcu, & s, birorov at]u.-i)vri, aKOvri^fiv S e r\ V -pi\a'rS)V bp,iK(a.v &ffKf)O'iv ovffav T)JS aperJjs, T^V Se TUV irovrip&v Ka,rd\vffiv (assured that, knowing that, the intercourse with good men leads them to practise virtue). ,3, 2. et/x eTO pdTTjs Trpbs TOVS beous air\u>s raya^a StSoVoi, CDS TOVS frfov 1 15 AT as (thinking that, convinced that, the gods knew what was best). This con- struction is very common, and is not limited to a pronominal subject, like the one mentioned in No. 5, (b). Perhaps this construction is not absolute, but depends upon a verb of perception to be supplied, indicated by us. REM. 12. A peculiar use of the Gen. absolute, in connection with coy, oc- curs with the verbs etSeVcu, e 5 TT t ia- Ke?<7&ai TTJV yvwfj.^v, (ppoi/Tieij/, also sometimes with A 676 1 v, and the like verbs, with which, instead of the Gen. absolute, the Ace. of the substan- tive with a Part, or the Ace. with an Inf., would stand as the object. The consequence resulting from the action of the Gen. is commonly denoted by ourco(s) joined to the predicate. X. An. 1. 3, 6. cos i/j.ov ovv IdvTos, oirr) &i> Kal y^iets, OVTU T^V -yvo D ye Kal aycaviovfj.e vov Kal, birolos &v TIS 3), Kara T^V aj-iav p.e TIJJ.O.V d|i dxrovT os, ovTcas, e^)7j, & Kupe, ytyvaxTKf. PI. Cratyl. 439, c. S iavoir)&e vre s cos l6vTv del /cat pf6vru)v (reputantes, omnia semper ire et Jluere). HEM. 13. Instead of cos, oSsTrep (quasi) is sometimes joined with the Part, In order to bring out emphatically an objective (actually existing) ground or reason, the particles are (arc 5^j), seldom oTa, olov (in the Ionic writers, also, & sTf), in the sense of inasmuch as, because, qnippe, are connected with the participle. Her. 6, 59. ore TTVKVOV e6vros TOV &\crfos, ou/c wpcoj/ ol fvrbs TOVS eKr6s (because the grove was thick). X. An. 4. 8, 27. ore d-ecoJUe'j/co v T co v eTcupcov, iro\\}] V oiKicav, 7ro\\ol -^ffav a$p6oi Kal uTrepe/fa^rjfTO irrl TUV aKpcav (inasmuch as they had been driven out of their houses, etc.). Th. 2, 5. ^ffav Kal av&pooiroL /COTO TOVS aypovs, ofa aTTposSoKTjTou KUKOV ev flprjvr) yevopfvov. PL Charm. 153, a. olov Sia Xpovov a(piyv.4v os acr/^eVcos ya tirl ras w-f)&fis Siarpiflds. $ 313.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. 487 $ 313. S])ccial peculiarities in the Participial con- st ruction. 1. The Nom. of a Part, often refers to a preceding substantive in the Dat, Are.. or (Jen.. when tin- D;it.. Ace., or Gen. in the preceding clause- denotes the object in a grammatical point of view, but the subject in a lo,/i,-nl respect, e. g. in SoKti /not = tycw i,yov/j.ai, I think. This is a species of Anacoluthon (i 347, 5). (a) Dative. Th. 3. 36. $8oev avroTs (i. e. ty-r\$lffavTo, voted) ov TOVS ira- pSvras i*.6vov airoKTf'ti'ai, a\\a Kal robs airavras Mnv\rivaiovs, tir IK a \ovvr s TV d\\rjv airoffTcuru K. r. A. (as Sallust.Jug. 102. populo Romano melius visum = rati). 6, 24. tptas ivfitffff iracriv (=tir(bvpovi' -nav-res) 6/j.oius ticir\(v' & %ir\tovi ..rots 8' Iv j)\iKtq . . V\iri5f s oi/res 6Ttpoi tiro\fpovv), 'A ^ TJ v a to t p^v . . TTJV v)\aov irepiir \eoi>Tfs.., ne\- o iro v vf). Her. 9, 99. ol ^dfjLtoi, inr IKO v.4v(i)v ' A. S TJ v a t (a v alxi* a ^<*> T(al '-- TOvrovs ^wdu.(voi irdv- Tas airoTrf(j.irov ^'n/ui- o//s liarhxi ransomed them, send all Inch to At/tens). Instead of the Dative. Th. 1. 114. Kal e? ayrrjj/ Sto/8ej8Tj/coTOS ^5rj II fp IK A. e o us . .i)yyf\&ri awry ) (tclien Pericles had crossed over into it. it //v/s announced to him). REM. 2. These examples must be distinguished from those in Homer, where the Gen. of a Part, follows a Dat. of a pronoun, or the Dat. of a Part, follows a Gen. ; then instead of the possessive Gen., Homer sometimes uses the Dat. 488 SYNTAX. [$$ 314, 315 Od. i, 257. fjfj.'iv 8' oSre KaTK\d.(rfrir) <})i\ov tfrop $ e iffdvr ). 458, sq. T /ce of y/ce/$ej/, SrjirovSev, SaL 1. A-fi is the abridged form of $7877, being conformed to it in usage ; but it can never, like ^S?j, stand as the first word in a sentence (except in the Epic 5-)j r6rf, turn vero, Sij ydp, jam enim), but is used only as a mere suffix ( 314, Rem.)- It denotes in general that which is certain, sure, settled, a reference to something known (already, now, even, precisely, exactly) ; it is not used of a par- ticular time exclusively, but may refer to any time. It is very often employed, in order to denote a consequence which follows of itself, nothing further being taken into the account. Tauro, & vvv S-/) \eyeis (just now, at this very time) ; & vvv 8 J? Ae7S (just now, just then). X. Cy. 4. 1, 23. vvv S-/j av ST)\C*>(TIS, el a\r)fr?i f\eyes (now certainly). OvSev S^] KUK^V TreTr6v&a/j.ev (nihil^am or nihil dum, thus Jar, as yet, up to this time). OvSei/ 8^7 ttaicbv 7reiV apxl*-* vuv , ou 8 77 iirnti. i. c. jam), because now, puisque, in respect to something conceded, known ; a>s 8tj, seeing that, qttandoquidcni, d 877, si jam. if now. In a series of scnieiircs con- nected by Kal, 877 is placed after the word which is to be made emphatic. PI. Men. 87. e. vyteia, 0ajueV, Kal lorxus Kal xd\\os Kal TT\OVTOS 5 ?/. So Kal rb $ T) /jLiyuTTOv ; further, &\\os re /cat 8 T> /c a /. Her. 1 , 30. els ftfyvirrov airiKcro irapa "A^do'tv, Kal ST) Kal ts 2,dfi8is irapa. Kpotarov (and even also, and moreover also to Sardis). Tt olv S-f); (why therefore, I pray ?) Ilus olv 8^; (how now then, ho'ir, I pray ?). 2. In general, S^ is very often used in order to render emphatic and define more exactly, the word after which it stands : precisely, exactly, even (in English often indicated only by the tone of voice). X. Cy. 2. 3, 13. ^eya mctints). fjt. ?; 877x0 {nay, do not), e. g. ju^j S/jra Spdvys ravra ; Kal 8fjTa (<.ntd forsooth, and truly). 4. The enclitic 77 1/ is a Doric particle, but it :il>o ;!]>j>ear- in t':e Kj-ic Ian 490 SYNTAX. [ 316. guage. In Homer, &V has alwa} r s an ironical sense, like the Attic S^TTOU, without doubt, certainly. II. , 276, ov & i\ v fj.ii/ ira\iv avris avfjtrei frvpos ayfivcap VfiKfifiv )8atn\7jas oveiSetois eTreWtrt*'. 5. Arjdei' (from S-f] and frfa) almost always expresses scorn, irony (scilicet, truly, indeed) ; it is very seldom used as a mere explanatory particle. X. Cy. 4. 6, 3. aTreTre/j.\f/djJ,r)v (TOV vi6v], /j.fya (ppovwv, OTI Srj&ev rrjs fiacriXews frvyarpbs 6tyoi/j.r)v TOV tpbv vlbv -ya/ieTTjj/ (because, forsooth, I should see my son the husband of the king^s daughter). 6. Ar)Trov&ev (from S^TTOU and I&TJJ'), / hope so indeed, I suppose, certainly (nempe, ironically). X. Cy. 4. 3, 20. eyw S\ ?}v l-mrevetf /xc&o>, orav fj.sv inl TOV tirirov yfVG)/j.ai, TO TOV linroKei/Tavpov STjTrou&ev SiaTrpd^o/j.ai (I shall, as I hope, act the part of a centaur). 7. A at is a lengthened form of 8^ (as va.1 of vi)}. It is used only in the phrases T'L 5at; TTWS Sai ; it expresses the idea of surprise, wonder (what then? how so ? euW tu ? itane ? itane vero ?). $316. B. Confirmative Adverbs. 1. M^y (Dor. and Ep. fj-dv) expresses, like vero, confirmation, assurance, as- severation, truly ; often also, like vero, it is used adversatively : stilL but. But it cannot stand as the first word in a sentence, as it commonly depends on another word, and that the most important in the sentence, particularly on particles. Its use with particles is as follows: (a) T H p-fi*, surely, certainly, hence used particularly with oaths, asseverations, or solemn promises. X. Cy. 4. 2, 8. rb. iriffra SiSuffiif oyTo?y, ^ fj.$)v us <(>i\ois Kal inarots xpfaev&cu avroTs (that he as- suredly would treat them as friends). (b) Ow ^i', |u}j P.TIV, truly, assuredly not. (c) Kal p.riv,and indeed, yea surely, nay more. PL Phaed. 58, e. Kal fi^v eyuye ^aufj.dffia firc&ov irapayfv6^vos. Kal p.4}V is often used, when a new assertion is adduced to strengthen or corroborate the meaning. Od. A, 582. Kal p.}]v lavraXov fisetSov ; so. often in the dramatic writers when atten- tion is to be directed to the entrance of a new person : and see ! and lo ! Also Kal n$)v Kai, et vero etiam, and indeed too ; K al ^v ouSe, and indeed not even. (d) 'AA.A.O iJ.-f)v, at, sed vero, but indeed, but assuredly. In a question, Tt \t.i}v ; TTUS /j-^v ; quid vero ? quid quaeso ? what indeed ? what I ask ? REMARK. Instead of /JL -fj v, the Ionic writers employ the shorter form /t e v, which, as well as fjrf)v and pdv, is found in Horn. also. Even in the Attic dia- lect, fj.fi/ is sometimes used instead of ^j/, e. g. in an answer. X. C. 1. 4, 4. yva>fj.T)s epya Kpiveis ; Tlpe-irei p.fvra eir oi^eAe/ot yiyv6(ji.fv a yia/u.r)s epya T his confirmative fj. 4 j/, instead of ufa, occurs in the following con- nections : (a) Mej/Tot expresses confirmation, surely ; very often in antitheses, like vero, to denote a limitation; thus, Kal /uei/rot, ov fj.evroi, a\\a p.ev- roi. (b) Mfvovv or pei/ ovv, sane guidem, quite certainly, yea indeed, is used, for the most part, only in replies, e. g. iraw /j.fv ovv\ very often when some correction is made. X. C. 2. 7, 5. ot Trapo aol TOVTWV ouSef tfitfrwrtu voitiv ; TldvTa p.tv ovv (but do those with you know nothing of these things'? yes, everything, immo vero omnia). So ov or n% /JLCVOVV, immo non. (c) or /tie*' 8^, quite certainly, yea indeed; always in the phrases $317.J EMPHATIC SUFFIXES TTep, ye, TOt. 491 ov nfvS-fi, AA.A* ntvS-fi, Kal fievS-fi, ye ptv 817 instead of rj ^i/ ty, etc. On the concessive /wV, see $ 322, 3. 2. *H expresses confirmation (profecto). In order to strengthen it, n^v is often joined with it. *H irov, surely indeed, often ironically. The Epic tfroi like ^, expresses assurance : surely, certainly. 3. N u in Epic, expresses also an asseveration, but generally in an ironical or scornful manner (like the Attic H-farov), indeed, forsooth, certainly, nempe. 4. N TJ, the Lat. nae. expresses an asseveration, but only in affirmative sen- . e. g. v^ TOV Afa, in truth, surely. From v4\ is formed the lengthened vat (as 5ai from STJ). which has the same meaning, and is often used with /to". Ma likewise denotes an asseveration; in affirmative sentences: i/al /ucfc rov Ala; in negative: ov pa rbv Ala. But where /*a A/a stands without a nega- tion, then a negative clause precedes or follows, or it is clear from the context and from an accompanying adversative particle, that the sentence is to be un- derstood as negative, like X. C. 3. 13, 3. $ 317. C. Emphatic suffixes -nip, ye, rot. 1. Hep is the enclitic, and hence the abridged form of the adverb irepi, through and through (Lat. per). The radical meaning of irep is through and through (throughout), rie'p agrees with 76 in that, like the latter, it gives empha- sis to the word with which it is joined, but it differs from y, in making the emphasis extensive (consequently denoting the measure, size, the extent of the idea) ; 76, on the contrary, makes the emphasis intensive (consequently de- noting degree, the inward strength or force of the idea). In the Common Language, irep is not used alone, but in relation to another thought. Hence it is often connected with conjunctions and relatives, e. g. orrrep, throughout, en- tirely, the very same who, oVosTrep, altogether as great as, precisely as great, olds irep, entirely, exactly of such a character as, etc., OTTOU irep, just where, wherever, o&tv Trep, just ichence, whence soever, etas irep, up to the very time, as far as, until, tirei Trep, since, tirfiS-f) irtp, forasmuch, seeing that, whereas, elrrep, if indeed, if even. In Eng. the meaning of both particles is often given by merely emphasizing the word to which they belong. 2. T e denotes intension, an inward force, certainty, assurance, and thus ren- ders an idea emphatic and distinguishes it from others ; it may be used either to augment or restrict the force of a word, e. g. tyta ye (/ indeed, I for my part, however it may be with others), av ye, ourts 76, iroAXa 76, o\(ya 7*, etc. It depends, like the enclitics, on the word whose meaning it renders emphatic. In connection with relatives and conjunctions, it serves to confirm or complete the preceding statement. Thus, 0576, who or which indeed, who certainly, qui qnidim ; wsirep ye, fust as indeed ; e"lye, if indeed, if however, siquide m : after adversative conjunctions: Kairot ye, a\\d ye, etc.. and i/ft indeed (like quamquam quidem, verum quidem), ye makes an antithesis prominent, since it defines more exactly, limits or corrects what precedes. X. C. 1. 2, 3. 492 SYNTAX. [$ 318. ye ovSeirtaTTore &7reV%eTo dt$d alo~xvvoiro) KO.KO. \fywvrbv ayabbv avSpa; ^Ap' ou bav/jidfcis r~bv SCO/C/D^TTJ ; Ou 8pdo~eis rovro; Ow Trfpipeve'is (255, 4). *j?s, ^ ov; or ps ; Ae'loi/, et (whether) ovx ifJ.apres ravra Ae'|as. On the dependent double question, see No. 3. (d) "Ore OVK ?i\&ov ol vohe/juot, ol "E\\f)ves T)ffvxa.&v. (e) "On ot fidpfiapoi ovx ^TTTJ^TJO-OJ/, ol "EAArji'es ra O/MJ ou KareXtiroj/. (f) X. Cy. 1. 4, 5. raxv TO &r)pia aia/Aco/cet (KOpos), &sre 6 'A.o-Tvdyr)s ou/cer' e1x t/ avrS ffv\\eyftv frrjpia. (g) 5 A^/), ov o u K 6?S6S. 'Avfjp, bv OVK av &avj.tdois. 3. M^ on the contrary, stands : (a) with commands, warnings ; hence with the i 318.") NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND /XT}. 493 Imp. and with the im iterative Subj.; (1>) with wishes and exhortations; (c) in deliberative questions [$ 259, 1. (b)] ; (d) in clauses denoting purpose, with tv etc. (also with Sirws and the Indie. Fut.) ; (e) in conditional clauses, with *' with the Indie, or Opt., ^(f, 3 ret?, twar, s Ay with the Subj., 6V -ye = sii/ui- dem ; so also in subordinate clauses which denote a repetition, whether they are introduced by a temporal conjunction, or by ei, idr, or by the relative, etc. ; (f) in clauses denoting consequence or result, with &srf and an Inf.; (g) in adjective clauses with 8s, Ssrts, etc., which imply a condition or purpose, in general when a subordinate clause contains an idea which is expressed only as a conception, supposition ; hence when the idea of a class or species as such is more precisely defined, and the sentence may be resolved by is, qui with the subjunctive (= ita comparatus, ut ) ; (h) in the second member of a dependent disjunctive question (whether or not), ov as well as ^ is used. PL Phaed. 70, d. ffKctyta- fif&a, fir' apa tv $5ov flfflv at tyvxal rf \fvri\ffdvruv ruv av&ptaTrwv, dre ical oti. Crit. 48, b. aKftrrtoi/, irorepov SIKUIOV ^ue ^deVSe TTfipaff&ai t^i4vai, ^ a d"**?**? STJITOU fff ', Kfv6v 7* 6ma trda'rjs poirt)S vfiiif Kftmcu, % /i 1 ^, aAA' ^/c riav v6p.{av TOWS TOV Ka.Ttty6pov \6yovs, fl 6p&u>s v/j.as SiSd^ovtri TO irpayna, 3\ o C. But in those dependent questions, in which there is merely a distinction between what is, and what is not, pi\ is used, when the predicate of the first member is not repeated, but must be supplied ; but o v as well as n ^, when it is repeated. Dem. Cept. 142. \oyicraffbf irpbs u/uay avrovs, rl TC (rv/j.^afrai KaTf^^ifffj.f^ois vpZv TOV t>6pov nal ri fji-ff. X. C.3.6, lO.oTtr&a, 6ir6, ^ /JL-f)] erv/tirfco-^f, ^ ov ; Rp. 337, b. irws \tyfts; /u^? et7ro/f ptW/xou ; (shall I not answer thee?). (d) Acyw, Iva /*)) iroifjs. (e) Ei /*)) \eytis. 'Eav fi^ \eyys. "Orav ravra (J.)] ycvTjrai. PL Prot. 345, e. os &v pi) ack iroiTJ CKWV, -roirrvv (frfflv ^Trai^eTTjs tlvat (as often as one does not willingly do evil, etc.). X. Cy. 2. 3, 20. ft (ore) ^ &\\o ri vro ( as often Q s, whenever, they were not engaged in more important busi- ness). (f ) PL Phaed. 66, d. TO crcD^a was ^cirA^TTei 5 s T e v. )) ovvacrbai UTT' ai/rou Ka&op 5 v TctATjde's. (g) PL Ap. 21. & fJitjoToa, ovoc o'to/j.ai cifflccu (= ? rtvo ^ o!5a). Hence S T t uA\, unless, nisi (properly ovofv OTI fi^ t then generally instead of ), off 01 p-fi, except those who not. Her. 1, 32. tv TO> u.aKp'a XP& 1 "' ^oAAi u.sv tort 494 SYNTAX. [$316. fSee/p, TO (= &) fii) TIS c'&eAet (multa, quae ita sunt comparata, ut, one can see many things of such a nature that he would not wish to see). Andoc. 3, 41. $noj8ot)juai, jU'J) 6 TTOTTJP Te'iSrTj/cej/; (I fear that my father is dead, I am anxious to know whether my father is dead). MTJ 8/>c0o8iT77i/ /*)) 'yea cr' a; nef/inius? Isocr. Pan eg. 71, 6. AafrWey t|a/fisx'Atous TWV 'EMjvcov, ol eV Ta?s avTwv oi>x oloi T' i?TJ/X/ and d/couw, ou is commonly used, since the Infinitive (Ace. with Inf.) in this case has the force of an affirma- tion ; much more seldom after other verba putandi et dicendi. When, however, these verbs are in the imperative, or in the imperative Subj., or in another con- struction \\hich requires /t^, then ^ follows. PI. Theat. 152, b. f'lKbs ffofov &v$pa fj.^) X-npeiv. X. C. 2. 1, 3. rb TOVS ir6i'ovs. 1. 1, 20. bavudfy, oirtas TTOTC ^ir e iffbti ff av 'A&yvaioi Trepl TOVS i^eoi/s fj.}] ffcafppovf'tv. An. 7. 6, 18. O/UPUCD f>f/ii/,*fjLr]o' & e/xol ISlcf. uTrejxeTo ~2.fvfrr)s fX lv - ^- C. 1. 1, 19- (01 TTO\\O\) otovrai TOVS freovs ret fj.fi/ eiSeVot, TO S' OVK etSevot. 2. 4. TOUTTJV T^V Qiv (vivendi rationem) T}\V r^s tyvx?i$ ^n-1/j.f \fiav OVK ^UTToSt^eu' f <$>?! 1. 15. TTHTTeixav &eo?s ir&s OVK etvai &eovs ej/; X. C. 4. 8. 2. 6 fj.o AoyeTr at ouSej/a TTW rwv /j,vr)/j.ovevofj.fi>oi)v av- KO.\\IOV Srdvarov freyKfti'. More frequently /ti^j, as: Isocr. Phil. 109. &p.o\6yovv fj. T) 8 e v J> s Trc67TOT6 To 8' , uiri. thus o 6 4>r;/u<, like w/'. / (A;///. ;v///sr. X. An. I. ,'}. I. oj ffrpanta- rat OVK $ a ff a V ivat rov irp6ffu (negaventitt .*< itnms ). Th. 2, 89. {i/pcKttA- tera (iWs), OUK d^wy ra /^? Seivi tv bppwSta %x* iv (desiring that you should a- ir/Kit is nut to be feared). 5. With the participle or adjective, p-fi is used only when these can be re- solved by a conditional clause, or when they stand in a connection which iTi|uires uA\ ; in all other cases, ov is used. Ov Swdfj.fi/os, one who cannot, or is nnol'lf. ov &ov\6/j.fj'os t nolens, OVK avayKcuov, unnecessary, ri ov KO\O. /3ow\eu- /iara, ttirpia consilia ; o ov irtarfixav (one who does not believe, is qui non credit, or quum (since) non credit, or quia non credit) ; o ov i\offo

v (is qui non philoso- phntnr) ; 6 /z^ iruTTsvwv (if one does not believe, si quis non credit). X. An. 4. 4, 15. oZros yap e'Sojcet Kal irpdrfpov iroXAo ^817 a\r)&fv(rai roiavra, ra uvra rt as 6vTa> Kal TO. /x^j ovra us OVK orra (if anything was not, he represented it as not being). So 'H ffora. "Hyyei\f r^v ir6\iv o v Tro\iopKrj^f7(Tav. Protag. 360, d. used in philosophical definitions of an ideal assumption ; on the contrary ra ov Sftvd objective, used of actual dangers. X. Cy. 1. 2, 7. t>v &** yvuxri Svvd/Afvov ^v x*P lv a.irof>il>6vai, u. ^ airo^6i/t a (5e, Ko\aovffi TQ\nov lo-x^pus (= 4dv rii/a KT\. ) (whoever they knew capable of repaying a kindness, if he did not repay it, they, etc.). 3. 1, 16. ri yap &v . . xpk ffaiT ' & v TIS i ff X v PV % avSpeica /j.^ o~povi (= tl (JL^J o~(t>bv fj.-nSafji.ov jUTjSej/l (pavfrfai (ichich never ANYWHERE seems to ANY ONE displeasing). Lysid. 214, d. o KUKOS otir' cryodw, OVTC /ca/fcD ovSe'ifore fls 0X77^ $i\iav fyxrrai. In like manner the simple negative (ov, fj.-f)), which in this case must always precede the other negatives, is so connected with its compounds that neither lose their force ; hence OVK tanv ovSev (there is not anytliing, there is nothing) ; so also the negative parts are joined with the nega- tive whole, c. g. Ou Swarai oftr' 5 \4yeiv ovr eu iroieiv rovs <(>i\ovs, he can neit/ier nor ; in like manner also ovSf, nySe, not even, ne quidem, are used in a negative sentence, e. g. o v Svvarai o u 5 e v\>v e5 iroisiv rovs l\ovs (he is not able, not even now, to benefit his friends). 11 KM. 5. If the finite verb is connected with a participle, the negative, when it rttVrs to both, is usually placed with the Part., though only when the Part. |iiveed-s the verb. Th. 1. 12. ^ra ra Tpca'iKa ?? 'E\Aas cri n*rav(P'h (ra> (^ e Assured, that I do not fear that I shall make concessions, i. e. be assured, that I certainly shall not make concessions to you). In a question with the second Pers. of the Fut. Indicative. Ar. Nub. 505. o u /* }) AoA^ereis, dAA 1 a/coAou&Tjffeis epoi : I shall not expect that you will talk = do not talk ( 255, 4). 8. After verbs and expressions of fear, anxiety, uncertainty, doubt, distrust, denying, hindering, abstaining, preventing, forbidding, contradicting, the Inf. with the negative /*^ commonly follows instead of the Inf. without ^, the Greek repeating with the Inf. the negative idea implied in these words, for the purpose of strengthening the negative view of the sentence. This use of ^ is sometimes regarded as pleonastic ; but it is entirely in accordance with the frequent usage of the language in employing two negatives for the purpose of increasing the negative force of the sentence ; hence, when a negative was contained in a preceding word, it was not unnatural to join a negative with the Inf. that followed. Ko>Auo> j with the finitfi verb follow expressions of doubt and denial, the negation is sometimes re] in the dependent subordinate clause by ou. X. 1?. Ath. 2, 17 apv etaSai rots a\\ots, Sri ov vapijv (to deny to others that he //vis prcm-nt). PI. Meno. 89, d. OTI o" OVK $ OVK tyopot (all the kinas rise from their seat y except the ephori). 10. My ov with the Infinitive is used instead of the Infinitive without nega- tion, with the expressions mentioned in No. 8., when the negative ou or another word which may be considered a negative, precedes ^ QJ. M^j ou is here merely equivalent to the simple /*)], and hence is not expressed iu English where uA\ would not be (comp. No. 8, above). OuScv Ku\vfi o~e fj.)] OVK aTToSavfiv (nothing hinders you to die, from dying). X. An. 3. 1,13. et yeinf)o-6/j.f^a tVl ^Sao-tAe?, ri ffjLiroSut/ (= ovSev tp- jroSuv) /JL^ ovx\ (rj/j-as) v&pio/j.fvovs airodai'f'iv (what hinders us from dying after being treated with insult); Vect. 3, 7. ou 5 use \iris flfj.i TO/A^ ovxl irpobv- fjuas &/ TOUS iroAtTos (Is TO TotaOra els /i ^ o u jSoTj^eTv oiKaioffvvr} els Svvofjiiv iravrl rp6iru (since it would not be right for you NOT to render assistance). Her. 7,5. GV K 42* 498 SYNTAX. [$ 319. elic6s effTi 'Afrrjvaiovs epya7jjui TOVTO /j.}) OVTUS tx elt; (NEGO id sic se non habere, I deny that this is not so). Also after the expressions Setj/bi/ etj/cu, al o.l(rxvvr\v flvai, a.i pendent on the other. I came, I saw, I conquered. Coordinate. Wlien I came, I conquered. Subordinate. j COPULATIVE COORDINATE Si: 1'.)'.; i U;K 1. The coordinate :is well as the subordinate conjunctions are properly U8ed only to connect whole sentence-;; luit when hut ouiv. Jn this way the sentences arc cither cmifrtirtnl into one -I'litence. the Mibjcct or predicate common to the sentences being cxpres.M d but once; or there is at lcai;rintii>n of the sentences, each sentence having its own separate subject, hut the predicate common to the sentences being exprc>-nl only with the subject of one sentence. O "EA.\Tj vt s rots iroteptois iiri&t I/- TO Kal KO\US inaxevavr o. ZwKpdrrjs KOI U\A.Twv (ro "E\- \r)vts irapa r'bv Trvres, '6p./j.aTos avros r e OVK rj/ue'Aet, TOVS r' afj.e\owTas OVK iTrpvei. Ka\6s re Kal aya&os. In antitheses: 'Aya&d re Kal Kand (the good as well as the evil), xpyvToi re Kal irovTripoi, TO T e epya 6fj.olcas Kal ol \6yoi. IIoAAa r e Kal Ka\a epya a7reSei|aTO. Her. 6, 114. iro\\ol re Kal ovvo/j.a(rrol. v AAAot re Kal 12,caKpdTr)5 (quum alii, turn, S.). Her. 6, 136. MtArjoSeo etrxov eV ffr6p.ari ol re &\\oi Kal p.a.\i(rra "Eavbiinros. Hence &\\us re Kal (quum aliter, turn, not only in other respects, but aho), especially (but a\\ov etpaivero irvp, Kal 2i\avbs o"r)(j.aivei ry (rdXtriyyi (the fire already began to appear through the roof, AND [when} Silanus gives notice with his trumpet). Isocr. Paneg. 119 o^o rjfj.e'is re rrjs apx^s aireffrepov^e^a, Kal rot^"E\\fiaiv apx^) ruv KaKtav eyiyi/ero. REMARK 1. Ka( has this strengthening, intensive force also, when it stands at the beginning of a question, where the interrogator takes up, with surprise, the remark of another, and from it draws a conclusion, which shows the nul- lity or absurdity of the other's statement. X. Cy. 4. 3, 11. oAA' etiroi ris o>, ort iraiSfs ovres e/j.dv&avov ; Kal Wrepo* TroTSes elai Qpovi/J-wrepoi, &sre /j.a&e'ii' ra epei rb (popriov rovro, fiapwo/jLevi) r e Kal KivSwev- ovffa . . Kal . . Kal Kr\. After Kal two members, considered, as it were, one $ 321. J COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 501 whole. can follow with ri Kal. Her. 7. 1. (iWrofe {fcdWoun) KO.\ War T ital OITOI/ Kal irAo?a. X. An. 4. 4, 2. (KW/UTJ) juey jio>iiion. tin- member introduced by re, is subjoined only as a mero inhlitian to tho preceding one. Th. 1, 54. Kopivdioi /j.ev Kparfaavres . . Kal av- pas %x oinfs cuxnaA-wTovs OUK e\dff back to the preceding; or more frequently it stands in only one of the corresponding members ; thus often eJfirep ire re, or titrfp re; (j.4v re 6 re or a\\d r c, as on this side, so on that, or fi4v Sf re (a\\d T); p v T6 8 6 ' ( a \\d); also the whole of the first member can be omitted, and In 1 supplied by the mind, from what precedes; thus 8e re, a\\d re, also often without the corresponding /*/: Se re; re 8; re aurop; then Kal re, atque, yet moreover, when the corresponding member is contained in wluu precedes (not only but also). 11. i, 509. rbv 8e /xe-y' tivrivav, Kai r' tK\vov ev^afj.fvoto. Also osre, he. who (not only in the poets, but also sometimes in Herodotus), OSTIS re, ol6s T, Zffos rf ( = TO?OS, olos ; TOCTOS, 6Vos, of such a nature, so great, as much as), & s T f, so as, so that, use I re, ore, ^i)re, STTOIS T e, or re, then, when, o&i re, Iva re, there, where. In Attic prose, the fol- lowin" eomhinations still remain, viz., oT6s r4 elfj-i with the Inf.. signifying / ,1111 'in the condition, &STC (so that), bsfire and ISTC (i. e. s, Kal ovrus (vel sir). K al novos, Kal els. With questions, e. g. Dem. Phil. 1, 53. -ri xp'n Kal ^P 05 ' toKav; (what is only to be effected even?) (=nihil plane cxpcctandum est) In Homer, after a temporal protasis, this Kai often introduces an and may then be translated by immediately. II. a, 478, foos V 502 SYNTAX. [$ 321. <|>aj/?7 /So5o5a/CTu/\.os 'Hccs, Kal TdV evretr' avdyovTO peTa. ffrparov et';puj/ 'A%aie OUTC (/J.-fiTe p-fiTe), neque neque (neve neve], neither nor; (d) by OUT e re (seldom Kai), neque -^et, on the one hand not and on the other ; as not so also. X. An. 1 . 4, 8. o v K eycoye UVTOVS 8uaw, o u 8' epet ouSeis, us eyci> avTovs KUKUS TTOI&). C. 3. 7, 9. Siarfivov /xaXXov irpbs TO ffavry Trpossxeiv, Kal fj.'r) au.e\et TUV rrjs Tro'A.eajs. Dem. Cor. 254, 85. (paivofAai eyh x^P LTOS TTV X'n K ^ >s TOTC Kal ov fjif/jL^/ecas ou5e rificaptas. Th. 3, 14. cVa/iupaTc . .Kal /j,^] irp6r]o-&e 7)/j.as. PI. Lysid. 207, e. euxriv apa are a &ov\i iroieiv Ka\ ovSev eirnr\-f)TTovV &V TTL^V/J.f}s. - O^T &ol, 0#T6 ttV^pUVOl. - X. An. 2. 2, 8. &fj.offau . . )H7jre irpoSuxreiv a\\r)\ovs (Tv^axoi re eereo-^at. 5. 1, 6. OVTC ayopd fffTiv wart), tf r e x^P a ToXe/xio. Th. 1, 118. ol A.aKe5ai/j.6vtoi evoi OVTC e'/ca>\uoj/, e2 p.)} eTrl fipaxv, f] Te Tr6\iv f(pv\a. 140. ov p6vov lirl TOVTUV avrovs fyti TV;J/ yvu/j.-iji' -TQ.\>TT\V fx oi/T aAA' ^irl TravTuv opoltas. I'linatli. 37. ov U.OVQV &j/ cup<$tiriv 4*1 TO?J vvv \fyofjifvois TavTijv i-^wv T^V SidVoiac, a A. A.' 6/j.oi(as 1 tr I iravrtav. X. ('. 1. ('). "2. i/xarioy ij/Mtpifffai ov povov (pav\ov t aAAa TO avrb fripovs rt (b) Ovx & if cos aAAa Kat, not only not but even, or ovx air as or /*}) oirtas a A A' o v 5 e, not only not but not even. ("Oirws = how, I say not or ( ImpJ say not how, which involves th%jtefl ^say^not or say not,thgj. not.) Al^^tJf^J' (followed by & A. A' oi5e) is used in the souse. of not only not, when both clauses have a common predicate, and this stands in the last clause. Dem. Cor. 271,1. o v x Sir us Xf ll/ "TofrrifjLfv ri/xet" (non modo non sed ne guidem). X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. ft)) oirws bpxftvbai Iv pvbfj.0}, dAA* ou5' opbovvbcu e'Svj/ocr&e (non modo non saltare poteratis, sed ne rectis quidem pedibus stare). Isae. 10, 1. tyu p)] on virtp &\\ov, eiAA' ou5c irtrep tfjiavrov ircairoTf SI'KTJJ/ iS'iav e JfpTj/ca (as in Latin: non modo de alio, sed ne de me guidem unquam causam dixi, instead of non modo non, the Latin using non modo sed ne guidem, instead of non modo non sec? ne guidem, when both the clauses are negative, and the common predicate of both is in the latter clause). REM. 9. "When ovx S T t ctAA' ouS has the sense of not only but not even, the predicate of the first member contains a negation, or at least has a negative sense. Th. 2, 97. tavrri (rrj ~2,Kv& ft)) on irpo'iKa Soirjs, oAA' oiS' eAoTTOc rf;s ot'as \api6v (you u'ould not only not give your house to any one gratuitously, but not even for a less price, than it is worth ; properly you icould give to no one, not to say, gratuitously, nay not even for a less pi'ice, etc.). (c) OV(K) aAAek Kai, not but even; OV(K) aAA' ovSe, not nay not even. Dem. Mid. 24. ov woin^p6s, aAAa Kal TT&VV xTnjtrnfo. X. C. 2. 3, 8. TOV /cal \6ycp Kal cpyc? irfipit>ij.fvov 1/j.f aviav o v K a^ $vvalu.t}v ovr* eu \fyfiv o^r* , (v iroif'tv, a A A* ovSf irfipdffouai. An. 1. 3, 2. (Sapet/coi/s) \afiwv ov K fls TO Viiov KaTebe/j.r]v faot, dAA* ou5^ Ka&rio'vTrdfrnffa, aAA' els vfMS ISaTravav. (d) Ou8e fj.^j &TI, not even not to say, much less (ne-guidem nedum). X. Symp. 2, 26. *cal ouSc avairveiv, /*$j ort \tyfiv TL SvvT)ff6iJ.c^a (ice shall be able not even to breathe, to say nothing of speaking, or much less to speak). 504 SYNTAX. [$ 322. 322. II. Adversative Coordinate Sentences. 1. An adversative coordinate sentence is one in which the clauses that stand in opposition to each other, are united and form one thought. (a) The opposition is of such a nature, that the thought expressed in the coordinate clause either wholly abrogates the thought of the preceding clause, since another thought is substituted for it ; this is done : (a) by placing the conjunction d A A 6. (but] in opposition to a preceding negative; (b) by placing fhe conjunction ctAXet together with the negative ov in opposition to a pre- ceding affirmative ; in the last case, dAAa may be translated and, or be wholly omitted: (a) ovx oi TrAownot et>Safytoves elffiv, a A A' of aya&oi. (b) 'E^elid-ei/, a A A' OVK eV&eVSe fipirdfffrn (he was seized there, and not here, or not here). () Or the opposition is of such a nature that the thought in the coordinate clause merely limits or restricts that in the preceding clause. The limitation is expressed by Se, dAAa (but),ardp (ourap, Epic.), /cotrot, fievroi, op.e / Afjuo' KaAoV, TO Se /3Aaj8epbj/ aiVxpoV. Th. 3, 68. Ste'^&et- pav nAaraieW jU.e*' avriav OVK eAdVcrous Siaitoffiuv, 'A&Tjvai'wj' Se TreVre /cai C?KOfflV. _ ^ 5. M 4v S e are especially used in the following cases : (a) With divisions of place, time, number, order, and persons, e. g. 'Ei/ravSra fj.4v e/ce? Se, eV&o fj.ev eV&a Se, rare fj.ev Tore S e, TTOTC fj.(v TTore S e, at one time, at another, sometimes sometimes, &\\OTC p. e v &\ Aore S e, a/J-a (J.4v a^a S e', sometimes sometimes, irpfaTov i*.4v eVen-a Se, TO fj.4 v TO Se, ra /J.GV ra Se and TOUTO fj.4v TOUTO Se, partly, partly, on the one side on the other, both and, not only but also, 6 /ie'v o Se', hie ille. (b) When several predicates belong to the same object, and also, when sev- 322.] ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 505 eral actions ri-ti-r to the same object. S. Ph. 239. tykyhos p4v el/jn TTJJ *ep~ ippvrov ^Kvpov, TAe'w 8' is oficoj/, auSw/Lwu Si irals 'AxtAe'ws NewirT<$Ae/i0y. So also in a principal and subordinate clause. Her. 1, 103. of eW#oAoj/ /j.tv t* r^v 'A, Kifiptplovs r 'tOI'TO. c. Where the same or an equivalent word is repeated in two different clauses. X. C. 2. 1, 32. e'-yti* ffvyftfjLt fi.fi/ &eois v (rvvfi/j.1 5' av&puirois roTs a-yo&ory. 1. 1, 2. ^wKpdrijs &vaffp^s % Tro\\d.Kis fJLfv ofrcot, TT o \\dxis Se eVl TWV KOIVVV TT}S iroAewy &W/J.UH'. Yet this principle is not always observed. M e v is regularly omitted, when 5 K a i follow, e. g. 2. 8, 5. x A e TT b j/ ovrw TI xoiTJo-cu, 5sre jiTjSev a.fjLapre'iy, x a ^- fir ^ t/ 8 e Ka ^ ^afjLapT-fjrtas re iroi//(TOKra f*J) ayvwuovi Kpirrj K KM ARK 1. When /teV stands in an adjective or adverbial clause, it is some- times repeated, for the sake of emphasis, in the corresponding demonstrative or concluding clause. Her. 2, 121. /col rbv (i. e. t>v) pfv Ka\4ovtlv, T o 8 e 3eoO TaTTovroy, us fyh tfT]^/]v re ai urre'Aa/Jo /we SePj/ ^TJ^ Kai e'leTo^orra ^/navroi/ Ka2 TOWS oAAous, eVTatJ&a Se ^efvoToj/ ^ SAAo &TIOVV irpayfj.a AtVot/ut T^V T<{|J*'. Yet this parallelism is but seldom found so regularly carried out. HEM. 2. On the position of fj.4v Se, the following points are to be no- ticed : They are commonly placed after the words, which are opposed to each other; yet they are often to be referred to the predicate or to the whole clause. X. C. 1. 1, 10. KO! eAe7 fjLfv (2, Kpiriav, Kvvas S 6 rpe^ets, Iva ffoi rovs \VKOVS atrb r&v trpo- fidrwv airepvKwo-i ; (you ai'e unwilling to support a man who could protect yon from your enemies, AND YET do you keep dogs ?). Or, 8e' has a copulative force and continues the question which had been interrupted by the answer of the Other, e. g. X. C. 3. 5, 2. OVKOVV o?er&a, fr). 2c6yttaTo Se 070^0 Kal /caXa ir6Tpov e/c "Rouartav ofei irAeiw Uv fK\ex&7)vai) t) e| 'A&rjvwv. The same principle holds in answers. REM. 7. Kal Se (in the Epic writers Kal Se not separated), and, though more seldom, the negative ouSe' Sc, in which connection Se' has an adver- bial force, can be translated by and on the other hand, and also ; and on the other hand not. X. H. 5. 2, 37. o't re &\\oi irpo^v^uis Tv opeuj/ iropevreov elvai (then, or on the contrary). As Se'is used after the protasis, so also in like manner after participles, which supply the place of a protasis. PL Symp. 220, b. Kal irore o.vros irdyov o'lov Seij/ordrov, Kal irdvrwv . . e';/ e t A 17- (levtav rovs tr6Sas els irl\ovs Kal apuaKiSas, duros 8' 4v TOUTOIS e^jfet Ixwi/ fadriov . . ol6virfp Kal Trp6Tpov elca&ei fyopeiv. X. C. 3. 7, 8. &av/j.dca ffov, fl e/ce^j/ous fo- St'ws x ei P ot ^A tei/os > fov-rois 8 e /njSeVa rp6irov otet SvrfjO'eo'&ai 6. 'A AA( (Neut. PI. of #AAos), but (sed, at), yet, however, generally expresses difference and separation. It always stands at the beginning of the sentence. According to the nature of the preceding member, it either abrogates what is affirmed in that member (see No. 1), or it restricts and limits it (yet, however). 4 322.) ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 507 He is indeed poor, but brave he is not brave, but cowardly ; (here the clause but brave restricts the one preceding, and but cowardly wholly denies or abrogates tlu- idea of brave). Tovro rb irpay/M u4\inov p.(v foni>, dAA' ou KoAoV. The u-c of d A Act is very frequent in objections (= at), also in questions, when the inotion expresses a contrast, or when an objection is introduced in the form of a question. Dem. Cor. rt yap Kal (3ov\6/j.ft>oi /j.ereir/j.ire(r&' &*> OUTOUJ, firl dAA' \nrripxtv avaffiv. 'A A A* ("irl rbv ir6\fjj.ov ; d A A' avrol irtpl ^SouAeuWde. Eur. Med. 325. Amyous dvaAoTs ou yap Jw irelffais irore. "'AAA' ^fAiyy jie, Kovoev aiottrai \irds ; " very frequently dAA' ij ; but really ? X. An. 7. 6, 4. Kal ot tiirov 'AAA' $ Sr)fj.ayuyei 6 avyp TOVS ai/Spas ; REM. 9. 'AAAeC is used in negative, non-concessive clauses, when bv it the gen- eral signification of the preceding negative clause is to be restricted by an excep- tion. Here dAAa 1 is the same as irAiijv or el /*^, nisi, and can be translated into English by except, than. In the first member. &\\os (erepos) is commonly phurd, e. g. ouSels oAAos, aAAa, and this oAAos points forward to the following dAAa, corresponding with it. X. An. 6. 4, 2. 4v rea /j.e, aAA' ^ fJUKpdv rt. O. 2, 13. ovrt a\\os ircairorf fiot irapeffx* To fauTou SLOI- K("iV, a A A* 77 eru vvvl ^deAeis irapfx fllf - ^- I J haed. 97, d. ou5ej> ^AAo ceiv avtywirca, dAA' v) TO apurrov Kal rb &e\ri poucriKr), etre 8r? eV 7roAtTj/cp. Apol. 27, c. efr* olv Kaivd, e^re iraXaid. 34, e. f'ir ovv aATji^es, eJfr' o^v tyevSes. Rp. 453, d. &VTG & v T e fls rb /Aeyurrov ireXayos /teVov, ofj.tas ye i/e? ouSev REMARK 1. The following forms, also, are sometimes used: ef (si sive) ; efre el Se (sive si vero), when the second member contains something opposite to the first ; elVe ^; tf eJfre (seldom and only Poet.) ; but once (poetic). REM. 2. The disjunctive connectives ^ ^, in the Epic writers, very seldom in the Tragedians, are united with /ueV and 8e' : ^^ev ^Se. In this case, they do not have a disjunctive, but like /ecu /ecu, rt re, a copulative force. Instead of rj8e', t'Sc is also used according to the necessities of the verse. II. e, 128. otyp* cS yiyvuffKys r)/j.ev b^v, rjSe Kal &i/Spa, both and, not only but aho. 2. The particle tf is not only used to denote the disjunctive relation, but also in expressing comparison, in which it does not exclude, or express the opposite of the preceding member, but only expresses separation or difference. As in its disjunctive relation, one ^ corresponds with another, so here ^ stands in rela- tion to a word, which expresses a difference, e. g. fciAAos, ovSels &\\os, dAAoTbs, evavrios, ?5ios, Sicupepw, etc.; also in relation to comparatives, as well as to all words which have the force of a comparative, e. g. Snr\d&dvci>, etc. PI. Phaed. 64, a. ovSev #AAo avrol eiriTr)$fvovTj- aor) tip f 7 TO Kal ovv rf y. 3. The other member of the comparison is joined to the Comparative by ^, m thf stun, < \isc as the comparative, and without a verb, when both members have the same verb in common. When this is not the case, the second member must stand as a complete sentence with its subject and predicate ; commonly, however, merely the subject is expressed, but the predicate omitted ; often also after the omitted copula, by attraction the same Case is used as in the first member. Instead of $ the Gen. also can be used ($ 275, 2), most frequently for the Norn, and Ace., often also for the Dot. But the Gen. is avoided, when the use of it would occa- sion ambiguity; it must be avoided when the time of the two clauses is different. Eur. Or. 1148. owe ftrnj/ ovtev K pelffffov, $ t\ou/x6i' uaAAoj/ TOUS aya^ous % TOVS KO.KOVS. Isocr. Pac. extr. rots vfuTtpots KO! /iSAAoi/ a K n d (o v a- tv, ^ iyd> fa), irapaii>u>. Th. 7, 77. ^817 rtfey Kal (K SfivoTcpui/ 1) ToiuvSf (from a more dangerous situation, than the present is). II. a, 260. ^5?j ydp TOT' y &fji.t\7ii/ ya\-i\vns vav- rl\ouriv flsopav (instead of ^ 70X^10?). Th. 6, 16. vpos-ftKfi not fj.u\\oi/ ere- pwv..fipx f "' (instead of ^ erepois). 7,63. raOro TOIS 6ir\iTais ovx T\ Aaffu TOV iraTpts (instead of ^ & irarTjp, or properly instead of TT?S TOV ir& f p6s). HEM. 4. With irAffwi/, ^A(TTWJ/, irXeoj/, \CITTO v, ^cTo v, when they stand in connection with a numeral, ^ is commonly omitted, without change of construction, i. e. the Case is the same as if there was no comparative in the sentence (comp. decem plus or amplius homines). 9 PI. Apol. 17, d. vvv lyk irpco- TOV frl SjKCHTTTjpioc ava&t^rjKa t CTTJ ycyovias ir\fi, the numeral specification can also stand in the Gen., e. g. "EX ov tr\cov (t\aTTov) Sevo TaXavTuv. The Greek can consequently say : (a) ir\tiovs (^XeiTToys, /j.eiovs) % Se'xo 7]/j.(pai ; (b) ir\ttovs 5a fifj-fpuv ; (c) ir\tov TI 8e /ca 7/jUf'pot ; (d) ir\4ov otita ripepai. It will be observed from several of the above examples that v\fov, ^eToi/, etc. stand as mere adverbs in the Ace., with substantives of a different gender and number. REM. 5. Sometimes, also, the particle T, is found with the Gen. Such exam- ples are to be explained in a two-fold manner. The Gen. either expresses its own appropriate relation, being wholly independent of the comparative, e. g. PI. L. 765, a. ^ f '\arTov % TpiaKovTa 'yfyovws ITWI> [ just as the Greek says yiyvfff^ai tpiaKovra IT&V ^ 273, 2, (c)] ; or the Gen. is a preparative demonstra- tive pronoun, with which the clause introduced by ^ may be regarded as an 43* 510 SYNTAX. [$ 323 appositive or explanatory clause. Od. , 182. ou /JLCV yap rovye K peTo'cro v Kal apfiov, fy o& o/jLofypoveovTe wfi/J.a(t>r epos, celerior, quam sapientior (more swift than wise, or not so wise as swift). PL Rp. 409, d. irAeovarfis irovripois, t] xP~n a " ro ^ s fVTvyx&vwv ff or epo s, % a/jia&fffTfpos So/m elvcu aury re Kal &\\ois. Her. 3, 65. j> el/j.1 3/j.avTov. Ee\riav el ffcavrov. "BeXrlcav tffriv av- rbs eouToG. Th. 3, 11. 5vvaT(>Tpoi avrol avruv eyiyvovio. In like man- ner, the superlative is used in connection with avrds and the Gen. of the re- flexive pronouns, when the subject is to be represented, as, at a given time, exhibiting the quality belonging to it, in the highest degree (in a higher degree than at any other time). "Apiffrbs avrbs IOUTOU. 'A.piffrij avr^} iau- TTJS. X. C. 1.2, 46. ^e o-oi, & UepiKXfis, T^TC avveyfv6fi.-r)v, ore Sif6raros cravr ov ravra fiv^a ( when you surpassed yourself in these things, when you had the highest distinction in these things, higher than at any other time). 6. The following is a peculiar mode of comparison : When an object in re- lation to some quality is compared, not with another object, but with a whole thought (sentence;, this thought is compressed into one substantive idea, and this substantive is put in the Gen. depending on the comparative. Here, also, the other mode of expression by ^, does not occur. Her. 2, 148. oav al irvpan'iSfs \6yov n4oves (oratione majores, \.Q.ma- jores, quam ut oratione explicari possit). Th. 2, 50. yev6fj.evov Kpe?(r(roi> \6yov rJ> elSos TJJS v6ffov (the nature of the disease being too severe to be described, severe beyond description). Hpayfj.a e'Airi5o>/ Kpe"irrov (too great to be hoped for, beyond hope). Instead of substantives, participles are also used, e. g. SeWros. PL Rp. 410, d. 01 yvfAvaffTiKrj afcpdrca %p7j(ro/*evot aypi&Tepot TOV Seovros atrofiaivovinv. CAUSAL COORDINATE SENTENCES. 511 7. When it is to be indicated, that a predicate or an attribute is in a higher or IOWIT derive than could i i. in proportion to another object, then the comparative is constructed with t) /caret, or (though seldom) $ vpos with the Ace. (= quam pro). Th. 7, 75. nflu t) KOTO Sdnpva ireirovba (I have suffered too much for tears). PI. Rp. 359, d. vfKpbs fj.tluv t) /car' avSpwirov (a dead body greater than in accordance with a human being, greater than could be expected for a human being, too great for that of a human being). X. H. 3. 3, 1. ("Ay is) rt/xe ff tpvo- r4pas tj Kara av&poairov ratpTJs. Comp. Liv. 21, 29. proelium atrocius, quam pro numero pugnantium, editur (more bloody than could have been expected considering the number). 8. If the predicate or attribute is represented as being in so high or low a degree, that another cannot coexist with it, then the comparative is used with ^ S>STf and the Inf., e. g. KOKO. neiu ?iv, 1) &STC nXaifiv, evils greater than one could weep for). X. An. 1. 2, 4. TjyTjtrd/j.fi'os eivai % is M UfiffiSas T^V irapcurKfvTiv (having tliought that the armament icas too great to be [greater, than to be] against the Pisidians). 3. 3, "i.&paxvrepa l]K6mov $ us QiKi'e'ta&ai TUV a 8e T rvpavvu ?iv a.8f\" afox'oi', K&KIOV ; also vwartpov, more seldom Kouv6rfpov,( since natvos is used synony- mously with vfwrtpos) and the like, especially with a negative, e. g. ov iV apt iv 6v7jA^ (yes, certainly for). Tdp has its explana- tory sense, especially after demonstratives and the phrases Te/c/tTjpioj/ Se, u.aprv- piov Sc, cnjjucioj' Se, SfjAov Se scil. eorf, SCLKW/JLI 5e, eSrjAcocrc Sc, er/ceij/acr&e Se, and the like. It expresses confirmation or assurance, particularly in rejoinders and repftes. X. C. 3. 5, 10. Spa A^eis TT)J> rcDy &ecw> Kpfaw V ol irepl KcKpoira St ape- TV eKpivav ; Ae7 yap, yes, certainly. 10, 2. IK iro\\Sjv vvvdyovres ra 5 | 4/cd'cr- TOU K-cCAAterra, OUTCOS 8Aa TCI ff?7, OVTWS (certainly, we do so). In addresses, wishes, commands, and ques- tions, the meaning of ydp, as denoting inference or conclusion, clearly appears. Arist. Ran. 251. TOUT! Trap' fyicov Aayu/SdVw ; Aeu/a 7ap Treta-^/xe- &a ! (am I so treated by you ? well ! then we shall have hard things to bear !) Ka- KUS yctp f6\oio\ may you perish then! So, ei 70^, cf&e ydp. X. C. 1. 7, 2. on 5' aArji^ ^676^, w5e eSiSaffKev i Ev&v/j.7j, e? Tts /i^ coi/ 070- frbs av\T]r^s So/feTj/ jSouAotro, T^ av aur^ iroitiTfov efrj ; (now fAew Zef us consider). 1. 4, 14. ov yap irdvv croi KardSyXov, on irapa ra &\\a ia wsirep i^eol av&pwiroi fiiorfvovffi , is it not then clear to you ? (nonne igitur ?). II. o", 182.^^1 ^ea, T/S 7v ; (why, can there be a greater novelty ?). So, Ti ydp; quid ergo? Kal ri ydp; and how then ? TlS>s ydp ; and IT 6 & e v ydp ; as an emphatic negative answer = by no means. IT us yap otf; (instead of it, irdbcv 8e ot is used with an antithesis) as an emphatic affirmative answer. X. C. 4. 4, 13. OVKOVV 6 /*/ TCI 8'iKaia irpdr- TWV Sf/caios, o 8e Ta aSiKa aSutos ; Ua>s yap otf , (is he, therefore, who does what is just, just, but he who does what is unjust, unjust ? to be sure, how not ?). REMARK 1. The explanatory sentence with ydp very often precedes the sentence to be explained, particularly in Herodotus, e. g. Her. 6, 102. Kai, ^v yap 6 Mapa^wv eTrtT^SewTOTOv xcopi'o*' TTJS 'ArriKrjs tviirirevcrai, 6S TOVTO orfyi /ecmy- 766TO 'linrijis (and, for Marathon was the most suitable place in Attica for the cav- alry, Hippias led them to this place). So especially with dAAct 7Ctp, at enim, but certainly, really, indeed, ctAA' ov ydp. PI. Apol. 20, c. ri^pvv6^.T]v av, ei T)TnffrdfJiT)v ctAA' ov yap eTrtcrTOjtiat (/ should be proud, if I knew this, but certainly I do not know). REM. 2. The two sentences, the preceding explanatory one with 70^, and the following one whose meaning is to be confirmed, are often so closely con- nected with each other, that the subject of the last is transferred to the first, and its government made to depend on it. Th. 8, 30. ToTs lv rfj 2dYia> 'AS ri- val o is Trposar}es Kal (TTparrjyoi, Kal ray OTrb Xi'ou trdaas Kal ras a\\as vi'ayay6i'TS e)3ovAo^TO, etc., instead of ol ejSouAoj/TO, avrois ydp, K. r. A. REM. 3. Kal 7

ere IK TT}S rtpi^y rd re 7ekp fiAAo, , us 6. pa tyta Ke/ccuXu/cws eti]v T^y v6\iv (rty eip-fji^v) Troi-fjaaff^ai (that I indeed^ that I, as it seems). Hence the use of ydp and the strengthened form yap &pa. Ei &pa and et ^^ a pa correspond to the Latin si forte, nisi forte, if perchance, unless perchance, the inferential force of apa being reduced to a mere conjecture, and are often used ironically. X. C. 1. 2, 8. TTWS av ovv TOIOVTOS at^jp 8iav &p' ^eAoi/ ainoi, precisely th<- one which, just the one u'hii'li, TTJ/UOS ipa, just then,8r' apa, just when, TOT' apa, precisely t/u -n, el pil apa, if not precisely, us apa, exactly so ; OVK , a \ A' a p a, not but just; t IT ef pa, since just, ydp pa, for just. Homer uses apa, in general, in 514 SYNTAX. [$ 325. order to connect thoughts together, which are intimately related, and are de- veloped from each other. REM. 5. The lyric, tragic, and comic writers also employ the lengthened form a pa instead of a pa. Thus el a pa, efr' a pa, instead of el apa, fir' apa. On the interrogative apa and on &pa in a question, see 344. (b) Olv (Ion. 3>v), which commonly has the second or third place in a sen- tence, means, consequently, hence, therefore (ergo, igitur) ; it appropriately points out the effect of a cause, the necessary consequence of what precedes, and is ac- cordingly far stronger than &pa, but is also used in a more general sense. REM. 6. O I v is used as a suffix to pronouns and conjunctions, and in this case also, retains its conclusive sense : Sorts olv, osnep olv, cxroi olv, fjiev olv, yovv, 5' olv, dAA' olv, efr' olv, yap olv. It expresses a conclusion, a setting aside of every- thing else, and a persisting in that which is affirmed ; hence it may express also confirmation and assurance. So o o* T t s olv, osire p olv, whoever he may be then, Sow olv, how many so ever then, /JLCV olv, yes indeed ( 316, Rem.), yovv, cer- tainly, surely, OVKOVV, truly, certainly not, 5' olv, a A A' olv, arap olv, but surely, ejfre olv, be it this or that, yap olv, for surely, et 5' olv, if then. REM. 7. OVKOVV, as a Paroxytone, means : (a) non ergo, without interro- gation (consequently OVK in connection with the syllogistic olv, ergo); still in this sense it is also written OVK olv; (b) nullo modo, nequaquam, by no means, without interrogation (consequently OVK in connection with the emphatic suffix olv) most frequently in answers, e. g. X. O. 1, 9. OVKOVV %/u.oiye So/ce?. Ou- KO vv, as a Perispomenon : (a) in a question : nonne igitur ? nonne ergo ? X. C. 2. 2, 12. OVKOVV, e7j 6 2., Kal T$ yfirovi |3ovAet ffv apfCTKeiv, "Eywyc, ^77. Also in this case it is written OVK o I v, as well as OVKOVV; the latter has been adopted in modern times, yet it is to be limited to such questions as involve a special emphasis in the negative, and so OVKOVV is equivalent to nonne certe ; like S. Aj. 79. OVKOUV ye\(as 7)5i /JLCV TT \ovo~Karepav rfyv ir6\iv iroisiv avafia\ovn&a. This last arises from its use as an interrogative, and OVKOVV is in this case properly nonne iqitur ? The frequent use of this interrogative form has caused a gradual weakening in the interrogative tone, and thus its sense has become obscure, e. g. is it not true therefore we shall put off 1 ? (= conse- quently we shall put off). (c) Toiwv, which never stands as the first word in a sentence, is derived from the Epic T$, therefore, and the slightly inferential or deductive vvv, now, which is derived from the temporal adverb vvv; it is used: (a) to make a transition; thus especially, Kal roivvv, and norv, ert rot vvv, -moreover then; (b) to mark a conclusion, therefore now, so then. Tolyap (from the Epic r$, therefore, and yap) corresponds to the Latin ergo, therefore, but is poetic ; still stronger is voiydproi, just on this account, precisely so, and roiyapovv, on this account then. They commonly stand as the first word in a sentence. 325. Asyndeton. 1. In certain cases sentences are connected without any conjunction (ao~w- Serus). Only some of the more prominent instances will be mentioned : (a) In pathetic and impassioned discourse, e. g. II. x> 295. (of Hector) v^vpoi\ovaiv r^us ol iirirt'ti- Qtuytii' uurois 3ura\tfi TTtpl TOVTUV 6/j.oius /ii/ TtKTtui', 6fj.oius 6e xoA/feuy ffK\nor6^os 6/j.iropos vai>K\7ipoSj v\ov/j.fvoi>. Od. o, 96. KoAck ire'StAo, afj.0p6v iroAeyiuW e\b6vT(av ; " when he had done this, he went away," with ravra irpdfas a7re'j8?7 ; " Cyrus, who had conquered the enemy, came back to the camp," with Kvpos rovs iro\ffj.lovs vucfi, & dv^e? TO? K-f)TT(p, K, ort (instead of T<$T, #TC). Still, when the reciprocal relation is not to be brought out emphatically, the demonstrative is commonly not expressed, e. g. "EAc^cy, tri 6 &vbpuiros c&dvaTOs lo-riv. KoAws irdvra irpae', & s r e *crA. "O T & Kvpos ijA&f , trdvTfs fj.fyd\cas Ix6.pr\aay. "E/xeive, HXP l ^ i /ScuriAeus ^injA^o', etc. Even both pronouns may, in certain cases, be omitted, e. g. 'E^eive, ^'x/> b 0a o^ 01 rpfiru>/j.ai (Tpd- ), non habeo, quo me vertam. OVK elxov, STTOJ T ptiroi(j.-nu (Tpairol- ) y non habebam, quo me verterem. Of iro\ffj.ioi Trdmas, OTO> &i/ KT tlvOVff IV. Oi TTO\tU.lOl irdvTaS, OTCp tvTVXOlfV, $KTflVOV. 2. But it is to be observed that the Greek confines itself less regularly to the above rule, than the Latin, but has much greater freedom. Very often in lively narration, the Greeks refer the predicate of a subordinate clause directly to the present time of the speaker, without any regard to the principal clause, so that, therefore, an historical tense in the principal clause is followed by the same mode ( Subj.) and the same tenses which 44 518 SYNTAX. [$ 327. accompany the principal tenses. The dependent clause or dis- course then assumes the character of independent or direct dis- course (an objective mode of expression) ; the speaker, in his lively conceptions, brings the past into present view ; the past becomes present to him. See $ 345, 5. $327 b . Use of Modes in Subordinate Clauses. The use of modes in the different kinds of subordinate clauses, will be considered in treating these clauses each by itself. Here, only those characteristics will be noticed which are common to several kinds of subordinate clauses. 1. There is very often an attraction of the mode, a subordi- nate clause which forms an intermediate member of another clause, taking the mode of this clause. (a) This occurs with the Indie, of the historical tenses in those subordinate clauses, which form an intermediate or accessory member of a hypothetical proposition with e< and a preterite Indie, in the Protasis, and a preterite Indie, with &v in the Apodosis [ 339, 2, I. (b)]. X. C. 1. 4, 14. (fobpwros) otfre obs &> ex&>j/ aw/j-a, av&prrov Se yvu/Anv, tSvi/ar' &v Trpdrretv, & e&ov\fTo (as in Lat. efficere posset, quae vellet). 3. 5, 8. et t ftovXo peSo. XPW"* 7 """' &v ol &\Xot f1x ov aj'Tiiroieio'&cu (.si vellemus expetere opes, quas alii haberent). Isocr. Paneg. 19. ixP*i v ( T vs p^ropas) fj.}) irpoTfpovTTfpl TUI/ dfwXoyov/j.fi/cai' iv airoKpfycu, ore p.iv fj.6pos alvbs IK. A. voi. X. S. 8, 1 7. rls fiiffflv S v v a i T' & v, ixp' ou flSeir] Ka\6s re Kal aya- ffrbs vo^i^o^vos. C. 4. 6, 7. TTWS yap &v rts, a ye ^ ^Trlffrairo, ravra arobs fti)', PI. Phaed. 72, c. el airobvi]ffKOi n*v irdvra, ocra rov ^rjv /ieraAo^oj, TOVTW rI/ /LUJTTJP jfyv. Kur. Troad. 698. ira?5a rJv5 iraiSb? ("K&pJtyats &v, Tpoias peyiffrov w KOT07c'A.oV a.Tro\ta\6T(av us rdxicrra. ffrparrjyol avTiKCLTao-Tabutriv. Cy. 3. 2. 28. xpVaTo irposyevfa-^ai ?TI &i/ 0ov\ot- H"t\v r)fMv, SITUS ^x w /" /j.-r)v, tTptirfTo irpbs rovs Iv TCUS K(a^ais. 1 . 9, 1 8. t rls y4 TI Kvpu irpos- Tai-ai'Ti Ka\us vir-rjpeTTjcrtifi', ovSevl irdiroTf axdpiffTov f'ia.ire T^V irpofrvptav. $328. I. Substantive-Clauses. Substantive-clauses are substantives or infinitives expand- ed into a sentence, i. e. they have the force of a substantive, and stand as the subject, as well as the attribute or object of a sentence. Comp. $ 326, 3. 329. A. Substantive-Clauses introduced by on or ws, that. 1. Substantive-clauses introduced by OTI and ws, that, express the object of verba sentiendi and declarandi, e. g. opav, OLKOVUV, voeij/, fjiavSavtw, yiyvwovceiv, etc. ; Aeyeiv, BrjXovv, SeiKvwai, dyyeAActv, etc., [$ 306, 1, (b)] ; in the second place, subordinate clauses introduced by on, express the object of verba ajfectuum, e. g. $av/x,ae', a^eo-^at, ayavaKTCLV, ato-^vveor^at, /Aeju,eo-$ai, etc. ; ort is also used to introduce a subordinate clause, which con- tains an explanation of the principal clause, or of a single word in it. EEMARK 1. 'fls, properly, how, differs from '6r i, in expressing the thought more indefinitely and undecidedly, than on ; hence &s is used particularly after verbs of believing, thinking, and after negative verba sentiendi and declarandi. After verbs of believing, thinking, fudging, hoping, promising, swearing, denying^ the Inf. or the Ace. with the Inf. usually follows, very seldom or i or & s ; after verbs of saying, mentioning, and the like, both constructions occur -with equal frequency ; after verbs of knowing, showing, and the like, either o r i or w s follows, or a participle, or, under certain conditions, the Ace. with the Inf. See 311. Sometimes, also, OTTUS and the Poet. OUJ/CKO, also d&ovvsKa in the Tragedians, are used nearly in the same sense with on, that. HEM. 2. When a subordinate clause refers to a Pass, verb or to an imper- sonal phrase with lf 'ArriK^v. Her. 3, 140. iri/j/daVfTat (Hist. Pres.) 6 2u- \oo~uii', us 77 /ScuriAijir) ircpieATjAu&ot is TOVTOV rbv 6i/5pa. X. An. 1. 1,3. Tie'pj>7]s $iafid\\ft (Hist. Pres.) r~bv Kvpov irpbs TOV a.5(\v paov "(rj TTWV 6.p\fiv. An. 2. 1, 3. ourot $\eyov, 8rt Kvpos n\v TfbvriKfv, 'Apicuos 8e irccal \tyot, 5ri ravnjv T^V TjfjLfpav Tfpi/j.dveifi' &i/ avruvs. REM. 3. When the Ind. Lnpf. instead of the Opt. follows an historical tense in the principal clause, the mode of expression resembles the form of direct discourse, since the Ind. of direct discourse remains, e. g. Eei/osre 6pav 7Tf?s. It is used even before the Imp., e. g. PL Criton. 50, c. foots ttv elvoifv (ol v6noi), 8ri- *H 2w/cpoT6s, /tr> davfj.a^e TO \fy6fjifva. 5. The Opt. with av is used, when the statement is to be represented as a conditional supposition, assumption, conjecture, or as an undetermined possibility [$ 260, 2, 4, (a)]. X. An. 1. 6, 2. KaTa\\aytls 5e ovros Kupcu, fiirev, et aury Soirj l-mrta* x 1 *' 1 ' ovs, 8 T TOVS TrpoKaraKaiovras lirveas 3) Ka.ra.icd.voi tiv tveSpeiHras, 1) u>tTas iro\\ovs avruv f\ot, Kal Kb)\vo~ft rov xditiv tirdi/ras. Cy. 1. 6, 3. /ne/iKrj/uai aKOVffas iroTf ot, aAA* ore TO &piffra irpdrroi, r6re p.d\iTo (osris p-f) KT\. instead of ef ns ^ KT\.). Dem. Aphob. 851, 22. oZ5o, STI irdmts 6.v Spo \oy4\ffa.ir t. 44* 522 SYNTAX. [$ 329. 6. The Ind. of the Hist, tenses with av is used, when the affirmation is to be represented as a condition, whose actual existence or possibility is denied [$ 260, 2, (2) (a)]. Dem. Aphob. 830, 55. el pev 6 irar^p 77 Trio-ret rovrots, r)\ov, 8ri O%T* av TaAAa CTT T peTTfv, OVT' &j> TO.V&' OVTU KaTaXtTTuv avrols ecppa^ev. Lys. C. Agor. 137, 75. ouSeVoTe Trettreis ouSeVo avfrpuTrcav, & s ^pui/t^ov airoKTeivas acpel- &T)S &v, flfJ.^) (J.eyd\a ri>v Srf/Aov runs 'A^rjvaiuv Kal av^Keffra /ca/ca elpydffw. PL Rp. 1. 330. efj.io-TOK\rjs aireKpivaro, on otr' &v avrbs 2epfya>s &v dfo^affrbs eyeveTO, O&T' ewea/os 'A&Tjvaios (&v). REM. 4. Impersonal forms of expressions are often changed into those which are personal, the subject of the substantive-clause being transferred to the principal clause and the impersonal expression becoming its predicate. Comp. 307, Rem. 6, and 310, Rem. 3. Th. 1, 93. Kal S^\TJ rj oJ*o5ojifa CTJ Kal vvv effTiv, art Kara ffirovoty eyevero, X. C. 4. 2, 21. (So/cet 6 TOIOVTOS) 57}\o s v)) Af elv a i, art a aero etSeWi OVK olSev. X. 0. 1, 19. '6r i trovrip&T- aroi elin, ouSe (re XavSdv ovffiv. REM. 5. In the place of a substantive-clause introduced by on or ws, the Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.) or the Part, may stand after verba declarandi and sen- tiendi. That there is a difference of meaning between the construction with the Inf. and that with the Fart., has been seen in 311 ; but the difference be- tween the construction with a Part, and that with on or ws, is only in form. The difference between the construction with on and us with the finite verb and that of the Inf. (Ace. with Inf.) is, that in the former, the affirmation is more objective and definite (as a fact) ; in the latter, on the contrary, subjective and indefinite (as an assumption). Hence verbs which express a merely sub- jective meaning, as, ofedvai (i.e. verbs which denote such a subjective view), are constructed almost exclusively with the Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.), very seldom with on or as. That the distinc- tion between the three modes of construction is very often unessential, is clearly seen from the fact, that examples are found in which the same thought is ex- pressed by the same writer in different places in each of the three forms, e. g. Her. 6, 63. eayye\\ei, &s ol irals yeyove. 65. ore ol e^yyeihe 6 jra'iSa yeyovfvai. 69. ore avry juaw, OTI -ravra yiyj/frai and ej ravra yiyverai. Attic politeness, which often blends in its language a coloring of doubt and a certain indeterminate manner of expression, frequently employs this form even in settled and undoubted facts ; in this case el has the force of on. Aeschin. Ctes. OVK ay airy, e i' ^ 5i'/ojz/ eScoKey (he is not satisjiecl, i/iat). PL Lach. 194, a. ayavaxTia et ovruvl a vow ^ oto's T' el/A etVeif. Rp. .348, 330.J FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 523 l iv lv TO?J ^i-avr/oty. Di'in. Mi'l. 'in. ">js. owe j crx UVI&TJ, < TOIOUTO tirdyei TU> (tlmt he brings such a calamity wyw/i oil'-). . 8. Instead of tn ourwr, the relative dy, /A"/, is ofn-n usrl, and instead of 8n TOIOVTOS or Srt r6 .Wy. ot i'.). Her. 1. 31. ai 'ApyeTcu l/j.oKd.pt&i' rV M 7 ? T f'pa> rtKvwv 4icupr)5, ti/a, etc. 1 1. The second class of substantive-clauses are those which denote a purpose, object, or a result. These clauses are intro- duced by the conjunctions TJ/O, w?, OTTWS (opa, Poet), Iva. fJiTJy 0)5 /XT/, OTTWS /XT/. 2. The mode in final clauses is commonly the subjunctive or optative, since the purpose or object is something merely imagined or conceived. When the verb of the principal clause is a principal tense : Pres., Perf, Fut, or an Aorist with the sig- nification of the present [$ 257, 1, (a) and (b)], then the final conjunction, i. e. the conjunction expressing the purpose, etc., is followed by the Subj. ; but when the verb of the principal clause is an historical tense: Impf, Plup., Aor., then the final conjunction is followed by the optative (but never by an Opt. Fut). Taura ypdu, yfypatya, ypdtyu, 'lv e \&rj s (ut venias, that you may come). Ae|oi/ (with the sense of the Pres.), lv flSw (die, ut sciam,that 2 may know). TaOro fypaS arfpir^s yov- va& IKOITO (ut ne occuparet). Dem. Cor. 239,39. yeypa(pa. V/JLIV, Iva. p)i etrl TT\(?OV tvox^ri- 1 For practical reasons both kinds of subordinate clauses are brought together here, although they properly belong to adverbial clauses denoting purpose. 524 SYNTAX. [$ 330. OTTCOS ov apiffTa a/ywi/i^oiVtedo; 1. 2, 3. (e*/c rrjs T>V UepTuv e"Aeit&e'pas d-yo- pas /caAof/ueVTjs) TO /uei/ &wa /col of ayopdioi an \-f) \avrai els a\\ov r6irov, us (j.)) fjLiyvvT]Tai 7) TOVTUV Tvpfir) rrj TU>V TreTroiSeujueVcoj' evKofff^ia. 15. 'Iva Se ffatpeo-Tfpov 8i)\V (= wv) fofro (Solon was absent ten years, in order that he might not be compelled, etc.). 7, 8. e SiJo-TTjve, AJTTCOV ^>oos r)e\loio tf\v&es, 6$ pa fSri VKvas Kal arcpirfa x&P "' Her. 7, 8. Sib iWas yCv eycb s r}ff)ffaiTO, ex (av Ka ^ TOUTOI/ airioi. Ar. Ran. 24. avrbs fiaSifa Kal Trovca, TOVTOV 8' GX&, 'Iva fj.7) T aXairaiir x ov evfKa TivfS otov- Tai Ka& iffTacr iv, Iva TT} pev TO ffu>p.a & fpairevo IVTO, TIJ Se T^V fyvxyv ; (the view of the lawgiver, i. e. his purpose). X. An. 2. 4, 4. foots Se'- TTOV (J3a- (Ti\evs) tl airoo-KdiTTfi TI fy d7roTetx'C ei > ^^ airopos e?7j 77 6$6s (the view of the king), (c) when in the principal clause, the Opt. stands with or without av [ 259, 3, (a) and 260, 2, (4), (a)], then an Opt. commonly follows, for the con- ceptions in the principal and subordinate clause are represented as separated from the present time of the speaker ( 259, 3) ; still, a Subj. may follow by attraction of the mode, since the present sense of the Opt. is assumed. See 327b, 1. (b). Theogn. 881. elp-ftvrj Kal TT\OVTOS %X ot fir o\iv, 8ou, tva nal vSnn %x u&6vs Kf v ^airjKfffffi oirus kv fidwfj.cv, are Se? s (more seldom are connected with the Ind. of the historical tenses, when it is to be indicated that the intended purpose is not accomplished, or is not to be accomplished. In this case, in the principal clause, the Ind. of an historical tense stands both with and without av. See $ 227 b , 1. (a). Ar. Pac. 135. OVKOVV ^XP^\ V " c Htiydo~ov evai irrfp6v, 3iro>s (f>atvov TOIS Stols TpaytKWTfpos. PI. Criton. 44, d. e yap > ^"' anQortpoav TJ/JLUV aKOvo~avrcs Ta\r}^TJ paSlus tyvwTC ra S/fcata. 6. Verbs which express care, anxiety, considering, endeavor- ing or striving, effecting, and inciting, e. g. eTri/xcXcto-^at, povri- Trpa.TTf.iv (curare), fj-rj^avaa-^ai., TrapaKoXelv, TrapayycAAeti/, irpoenrtiv, airttcr^at, d^tovi/, aye (up then), and the like, are followed by the conjunctions OTTW? (OTTWS/XT/), sometimes also by avSpes 'A&rjvaioi, oirus ft)) A6yov? epovffi H.QVQV ol irap' vpuv irpeafieis, aAAa Kal epyoi' ri SfLKVveij/ e|ov/ J - evOL e\avvouo~t eVi r'bv xP vcr ^ v AeA.07tV &fpfjiOTaT(av t6vT(DV o" o VT a. t eV rrj apirayfj (i. C. O'TCW Kav/j.ara frfp^Tara fj). REM. 4. "OTTUS or oircas nt with the Fut. Ind., sometimes refers to a word to be supplied, viz. op a, o par e, vide, videte. X. An. 1. 7, 3. OTTWS ovv fffeo~& HvSpes a^ioi TTJS e\cv&fpias, (see) then that ye are men worthy of liberty. PI. Menon, 77, a. oAA' OTTUS ^^J o\>x otos T' co-o/ucu iroAXa roiavra \eyew. A similar ellipsis occurs in the phrase, S e? e&o, O'TTOJS kv &pi(TTa $331. II. Adjective-Clauses. Adjective-clauses are adjectives or participles expanded into a sentence, and, like adjectives, serve to define a substantive or substantive pronoun more definitely. They are intro- duced by the relative pronouns 05, 77, o, osrts, ^rts, o TI, olo9, etc. Of iro\f/j.ioi, ot airf(pvyov (=ot fair o(pvy6vT s AvSpov irpdyfj-ara). 'H TroAts, tv TJ o Heifflffrparos Tvpavvos %v (= ft vnb TOV ffa Tr6\is). REMARK 1. Homer often uses the pronoun 8s in a demonstrative sense. II. , 198. dAAo Kal &s SeiSoiKe Aibs /j.eyd\oio Kfpavv6t>. So also, o'l o'/, these, those, the one. the other. In the Attic writers, as well as in Ionic prose, this usage is confined to the following instances: (a) /cot o s. Kal fy, instead of Kal OVTQS, Kal OUTTJ. X. Cy. 5. 4, 4. Kal or ecwraT7j&6ts 5tc$/c*t ava Kpdros. 4. 5, 331.] ADJECTIVE CLAUSES. 527 52. Kal of yt\d $Wo-xrro. In the ob- lique Cases tin- article ($ i>47, ;i). is u-ed instead of it, e. ir- /> T<>I/, / *v 5s 5 in Demo-thcnes. yet very seldom, ot't"ii in later fl ami earlier in Doric writers, as well as in Hippocrates; and it occurs not only in the Xoin.. !mt aUo in all the Cases of the Sin^. and I'lural. Dem. Cor. r ( >Ais 'EAAiiJ'tSas as ncv avaipwv, ds as 5c rovs 0/rya5aj Kardyuv. (c) os cai 8s, this and that, it not l>cin<; determined who, any one thut you please (very seldom). Her. 4, 68. ras /3ao-A7jfas larlas lirt6pKi)ffe os Kal 8s, exclu- sively in the Norn, (in the Ace. rbv Kal TOV, TO Kal r6, see 247, 3). (d) in the phrase 7} 5' S j, i$ o" $}, said he, she. KKM. 2. The reciprocal relation in which the substantive stands to an ad- jective-clause, and an adjective-clause to a substantive, is expressed thus: a demonstrative adjective pronoun or the article 6 77 r6 standing in a principal clause, refers to a relative adjective pronoun standing in a subordinate clause, and the latter, on the other hand, refers back to the former, e. g. ovros 6 euojo, t>v eTSes, rb pASov, b di/^e?. So also, TOIOVTOS, olos, roffovros, 8 s Ka\6s l fieri rd re &vpaf Susrvx.f'ts. Th. 2, 41. ou5e, s, &s ypd(pei. Th. 2, 60. /j.ol roiovrca avSpl 6pyifO'&e, its ovdevhs olop.a.1 ^crffuv flvai. Isocr. Paneg. TTUS OVK ^8rj SiKai6v effTiv T)u.as eircuveiv, o'lrives rty apx^ 7/5 vvfibiiiJ.ev] X. Cy. 5. 2, 15. Kal olicla ye TTO\W p.ei(jav rj u/ierepo TTJ of 76 OIK/? xpyvb* yfj re Kal ovpavcp. Hence after the Voc., the second per- son is regularly used, e. g. #J/d-p7T6, t>s J)/J.as roiavra Kaick 4 not it] eras. 3. When the relative refers to two or more objects, it is in the plural, and agrees in Gender with the substantives, when they are of the same Gender ; often, however, it is in the neu- ter, when, the substantives denote inanimate objects. Comp. 242, 1, (a), 08). Th. 3, 97. y fJ.dx"n, 5tc6|ejs re Kal inraycayai, Iv o Is afj.ba\u.S>v j, Kal xP^f- aros evrpltyfi Kal KO/uots irpos&frois, a 87] v6/j.i/j.a ?\v iv M^Soty. 332.] AGREEMENT OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 529 Isocr. Panath. 278, b. ravra tlirov, ov irpbs r^v fva^fiay, ou8i wpor r^v SiKcuoa fj.f\aivav t os 5// t V avfrpAiroav. Dem. Cor. 317, 273. t\iri8uj/ oi ^\ov KO! Ti,uo>*/, & Trai/ra vposijv rois r6re irpcrrro/ztVojs fnr' tpov. PI. Apol. 18, a. Iv lufling rrj tywvfj TC /col T< Tp6iru> Iv oTsirtp trdb pdfj.fj.7jv. Sometimes, also, the rela- tive takes the gender of the last substantive, e. g. Isocr. 1. d. 163, a b. ty Se rty tlfrt\VTiv iron/iiJ.&a, fieri iroAA^s ctor^oAc^as r^v ir T($et//*a \a&6vrfs <-v 'A&rjvatcov vavr ncdv, ot &pp.ovv 4v ry PL Phaedr. 260, a. it \-fibei, olirtp REMARK. 1. The following cases belong here : (a) The substantive to which the relative refers, is in the Sing., but the rela- tive in the P/., when it does not refer to a definite individual of the class, but to the whole class, and in this way takes the signification of olos. This usage, however, is more frequent in poetry, than in prose. Od. /K, 97. KTJTOJ, & fj.vpia /36- oo in particular, irajres, tims or oy &v (never wdvres (finves, but always irdrrfs foot or 8sTts), e. g. Th. 7, 29. -jrdvras e^s, Srif Ivrvxoiev, xal TraTSas KCU yvvaiKas terelvovrfs. PL Rp. 566, d. affirdfaat trdvras, $ &f REM. 2. The relative is put in the Neut. without reference to the gender of its substantive, when the idea contained in the substantive is not to be con- sidered as a particular one, but as general ( 241, 2), or when the relative is not so much to be referred to the substantive alone, as to the whole sentence. S. O. T. 542. &' oti fJMp6y ^O-TI rov^ 7 ! " oy & VfV Te "fX-fi^ovs Koi l\wv TV 45 530 SYNTAX. [$ 332. (b) Connection of the Dual with the Plural ($ 241, 5). Tu> xetpe, as 6 $eos CTTI TO a\Xrj\aw l-jroirjo-ev, X. C. 2. 3, 18. (c) When a predicative substantive, in the adjective-clause, is in the Norn. ($ 240, 2) or in the Ace. ($ 280, 4), the relative, instead of agreeing in Gender and Number with its substan- tive, by a kind of attraction often takes the Gender and Num- ber of the predicative substantive, which is considered the more important. Her. 2, 7. 77 65bs irpbs rju rpfirerai, rb (= fc) /caAe'eTcu IlTjAouo-tov crrJ/ia. 5, 108. T)JJ/ &Kpt)v, o'l KoAet/j/rat K\T)iSes rrjs KuTrpou. 7, 54. TlfpaiK^v iv Ifiepov Zevs Fcwv/r^Sovs fpSiv ooi/6/j.affe. Phileb. 40, a. A 6 y o i tlaiv ev eKdffTois yuan?, &s e \iriSas HEM. 3. So also, when the relative does not follow its own substantive im- mediately, bat a predicative substantive, it sometimes agrees by means of at- traction with the latter, as being the more important, instead of agreeing with the former. PI. L. 937, d. Kal $ IK 77 tv avfrpw-n-ois TTWS ou Ka\6v,b Trdvra rjuf- pane TO. a.v&p r S>v ir6\*ft>v wv Hireure ( rcav ireiff&tia'uv) arpandv. X. Cy. 3. 1, 33. (Tvv rots &r}ffavpo'is oTs 6 irarfyp /careAtTrev (= ro?y virb TOU irarpbs Kara\fi^f7(Tif). 2. 4, 17. 6-iroTe ov TrpoeATyAu&o/Tjy GVV rj %x LS Svvd/j.ei. 3. 1, 34. 6701; i>iriffx vo ^l JMl i fy & S&s cS SiSf, ai/fr' 3>v tii/ ^/JLO\ Saveicrrjs &\\a TrAeio- vos S|to evepyeT-fitretv (instead of &J/T! ro^>r(ai>,S.). PI. Gorg. 519, a. '6rav TO. ap- Xaia irposcnro\\v(ti(n irpbs ols eKr-^ffavro (instead of -rrpbs rovrois, a). Phaed. 70, a. (77 ^UX'^) a7njAAa7^eK7 rovrwv ruv naKuv S>v (TV vvv 87^ 8(7jA^es. Isocr. Paneg. 46, 29. wv eAajSev airaaiv ^TeSoj/cei/ (instead of rovrwv a). Evag 198. roiovrois %&V ira.p6vTwv Kal &v dpr (instaad f *ol %K ratrcov, & tpart). The preposition is frequently 332.] ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE IRONOUN. 531 repeated, e. g. Dem. Chcrs. 96, 26. i' wi/ iyelpei nal irposcure? KO) iirJ> TOVTWV 5y &yflp(i Sidyti without avb rovrtav). REM. 4. By attraction, the ndjective-clause acquires entirely tlie nature of an adjective or participle, which combines with its substantive to form a single iilru. and which also agrees with it in form, e. g. \aipTa). Ph. 2. 70, 17. of 5 o5ffiy vfj.tr- fpois (*j\tiriros), TOUTOVS a.(rs /ffKTTjTcu. REM. 6. The Nom. and Dat. of the relative very seldom suffer attraction. Th. 7, 67. iroAAoi (vrjts) pxcrrai ts rb /SAoTrreff^oi a.(p y uv T\^Hv irapf/) inrf^euro TratSas. S. Ph. 481. f^a\ov p.' STHJ bf\is &ywv, 4s avT\iav, 4s trpupai', 4s irpvp.vr)v oirot (instead of ow, ubi) ^Kia-ra fieAAw TOUS vcLp6inras a\yvveiv. 7. The relatives 0105, 00-05, 6?Ttsouv, ^Xt/cos, are attracted not only in the Ace. but also in the Nom., when the verb clvai and a subject formally expressed are in the relative clause, e. g. oto? o-i; et, otos eVeu/o? or 6 Sw/cptxrrys eori (such as you are, such as he or Socrates is). This attraction is made in the following manner. The demonstrative in the Gen., Dat, or Ace., to which the relation refers, is omitted, but the relative is put in the Case of the preceding substantive or (omitted) substantive demon- strative, and the verb clvai of the adjective-clause is also omit- ted, and the subject of the relative clause is put in the Case of the relative. Such a blended or attracted adjective-clause has, in all respects, the force of an inflected adjective ; the connection of the adjective-clause with its substantive is still more complete and intimate, when the substantive is placed in the adjective-clause ; for example, in the full and natural form of the sentence xopto/x,cu avSpl rotourw, otos i\iinros exet) roiov- rovs av&pwTTovs o'lovsfjLe&vff&evras 6px 6 ^"^ at ' Luc. Hermot. c. 76. 2Ta>i'K^5 roiovry o'la> fj-^re \vire'iff&ai /J.'IJT' 6pyi(eff&ai. The demon- strative is commonly omitted. X. C. 1. 4, 12. i>.6vi)v r^v TU>V a.v&pwir(av (y \wTrav) eiro'njffav (of &eol) o'iav ap&povv Te r^v cavf)v, K. r. X. REM. 9. When the adjective-clause has the signification of a substantive ( 331, Rem. 4), the article is sometimes placed before the attracted olos, T)\'LKOS, and in this way, the adjective substantive-clause acquires entirely the force of an inflected s'ubstantive, e. g. Nom. 6 oios ffv ai/^p ol aiioi Gen. rov o'iov ffov avfip6s vOw o'icav VLLUV Dat. r(f o'ica ffol avtipi TO?S O'LOLS vfjuv i Acc. Tbv olov ffe avSpa rovs O'LOVS v/j.as X. Cy. 6. 2, 2. of oloi irep v pel's avSpes TroXXaKis Kal TO. fi u.avS>dvovffiv (men like you). H. 2. 3, 25. yj/ovres ro7s O'LOLS ^ re Kal Eccl. 465. ^IJ.L "fo\LTftau elvai SijiiOKpariav (such men as we and you). Ar. lVo Seivbv ro'tcriv r) \iKoio~i vcpv (instead of rrjXiKovTois, T]\(KOI REM. 10. A similar kind of attraction occurs also in such modes of ex- pression as fravLiaffrbv offov irpovx^p'no-e = StavLLaffr6v fcniv offov Trpoi>x<*>- prjffe (mirum quantum processit, instead of minim est, quantum processed!). Even in PI. Rp. 351, d. pera ISpuros ^avpafft ov offov (instead of &avLiao-T6v effTiv /j. v a> s us a\r}^ ! Svn VT f pvs &s x'P w > instead of vireptyves tffnv, us Xeyeis. Symp. 173, C. $ oo'J.J INVERTED ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE. 533 REM. 11. Sometimes an attraction take* place in the adjective-clause di- rectly the opposite of that mentioned under No. G, tin- siibstant!\ I.eing attracted into the. Ca>e of the relative which refers to it. instead of the relative into the Ca>e of the >nltantivc. This is called in,-> ,-/,,/ -///,,,-- tion (Attraetio in reran). This attraction occur-; most frequently. when the substantive of the principal clause attracted hy the relative, would -tand in the Nom. or Ace. S. Tr. 283. rdsS* (instead of cu'5') asirtp e/jo^j, t oAJiW &^rj\oy tupoicrou fitov, )Kouias pro boil. Arisr. O4'j. T ^ v ovffiav (instead of 77 ovo~ia) ^v KaTe\nre TV vie?, ov ir\tiovoi dia tVriV. X 11. 1.4. '2. tAeyov, on A.cucf5ai/j.6vioi iravrtav uv Sfotrrat irirpay6-res ehv irapa /3a- (there is no one of you all whose father I miy/ti not be, considering my aye). Phaed. 117, d. KXaiiav KO.\ ayavaKTuv ovStva QVTIVO. ov KaTfK\avo~6 TUV irap6vT OVK inrfKoivaro ovo'eva ovr iva ov Ka.TfK\avo-tv. REM. 13. The inverted attraction is also found sometimes with adverbs of place, the demonstrative adverb taking the form of the relative. S. O. C. 1227. frrivai Retdev o&ev Trtp V et (instead of iteifff, <&cv). PL Crit. 45, b. iroXAaxoC yo.p Kal 6. \\oo~f oiroi fa aty'iKy, a.yuir-t}ffovo-i fff (instead of aAAaxou OKOl). S. The adjective-clause very frequently stands before the principal clause ; then, when the relative refers to a substan- tive, the substantive is transferred from the principal to the adjective-clause (though it is not generally placed immediately after the relative), and is governed by the verb in the adjective- clause. This change of the substantive into the adjective- clause is called transposition. When the attributive relation expressed by the adjective-clause, is to be made emphatic, a demonstrative, referring back to the substantive which is joined with the relative, is supplied in the principal clause ; this demonstrative, however, is often used for perspicuity also. The substantive can also be transposed, when the demonstra- tive stands before the adjective -clause. *O s f)f*as iroAAek ayc&a ^iroiTjaei/, o 5 r o s airfbtu'ei', or ft s focis ToAAek 070^ tirolrjfffv, airfbavev, or OVTOS air&avfv, fcs f)fMtis KT\., or aWdavci/, fcs ICT\. "O v fUfs fivSpa, olr os tffnv, or OVT 6s iffnv, b v flSes tivtipa.. PI. Lys. 222, d. ird\tv &pa, ots rb vpwrov \6yovs lnr6&a\6tJ.t&a irepl (ptpwv (hear the words which I bring to you as sac?, i. e. the sad words, etc.). Th. 6, 30 vois oitXois Kcd off ij &\\ri irapaffKev)) ^welirero, irp6r*pov e?p-r)TO KT\. (instead of KO! rrj &\\y irapao-Kfvfj, GOT?). Eur. H. F. 1164. VIKCO uv &\\ois, o? Trap' 'AO-COTTOU poas p.tvovffiv evoir\oi y^s 'A&ijj/cuW itopoi. Ar. Ran. 889. ydp flffiVy olffi REM. 15. A word in apposition with the substantive to which the relative clause refers, is sometimes attracted into the subordinate clause, and depends upon that clause for its government. In this case also, the transposed apposi- tive serves to explain more fully the adjective-clause. Od. a, 69. K.VK \uTros KfX < ^ a)TO " &" ot>, ovSev ex olJ/ i (instead of ot', tb>/ avrois , ovSev fX lf ")' Dem. Phil. 3, 128, 68. n-oAAa Uv f-iirw %x lfv 'OAui/^tot vvv, & r6r' el irpoeiSovTO, OVK tiv a.ir, quantuscunque, OTTOCTO?, OTTOCTOSOVV, etc. Her. 6, 12. $ov\rfti)v inro^tivai, $}TIS tffrat, qitaliscunque erit, X. An. 6. 5, 6. foairrov, 6ir6o~ovs tir cAc/x/3 avfv rj ffrparid. Here the idea of indefinite- ness is denoted by the relative ; but it is otherwise, when this idea is contained in the predicate, see No. 3, and 4. REMARK 1. The Tut. Ind. with e (only Epic) is used, when it is to be denoted, that something will take place in the future under some condition [$ 260, 2. (1)J. II. i, 155. lv 8' &rfpfs vcdowi *o\tpfavts, iro\v&ovrou ol KC k Serrlrrxri bfbv &s T tfi^ff ovff iv (who will honor him, IF HE SHALL COME TO THEM). 3. The relative with av, e. g. os av, rj ai/, o av t 05x15 av, etc., is followed by the Subj., when the verb of the principal clause is a principal tense (Pres., Perf, or Fut), if the attributive rela- tion expressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as one merely conceived or assumed. Hence it is also used in in- definite specifications of quality or size, and also to denote indefinite frequency (as often as, 227 b , 2). The adjective- clause can commonly be considered as a conditional clause, i. e. as one which expresses the condition under which the action of the principal clause will take place ; and the relative with av can be resolved into the conjunction eai/ with rls or any other pronoun followed by the Subj. X. Cy. 3. 1 , 20. o & s & v ( = idv nvas ) fteXriovs rivls kavrStv rj y-f] s kv 6pu ra KO\OL Kal Tayaba. eVtTTjSeuoj/ras, rovrous riff/fa ffca. 8. 8, 5. &fMotoi rives yap av ol irpov-rdrai fafft, TOIOVTOI KO\ ol vir aurovs &s tirl rb iro\u 7/71^01^01. Her. 6, 139. ^ Rubin v S 4 K fywv airaVfi/^e ^X 7 ? 5 ibfaorra vo-i]fft HiUvdfciv trapa vTival Kopwviffiv, otf of eTretra apKtov Iffffflrai s, >} T' opeos Kopvtyfj . . x^fai ra/j.vofj.fi'T) repeva x& OJ/ l <(>v\\a ire\dV 8' ayavdis eVe'cacni/ ip-rjTixraa'Ke irapaffrds. 198. t>v 8' av S'fi/j.ov T' avSpa JfSo i, $o6s f IS fir), v kv \dfroitv rbv (from it-hum they mit/tit or could receive a reward). PI. Phaed. 89, d. OVK forw 3 ri 6.V TIS utt&v TOVTOV Kaxbi' ird&oi (there is no evil which any one could experience greater than this). 7. The Ind. of the historical tenses is used with av, when it is to be indicated that the attributive idea denoted by the ad- jective-clause could exist only under a certain condition, but did not exist, because the condition was not fulfilled [$ ^60. 2, (2), (a)]. Od. e, 39, sq. wcfAA' 2cr' civ ouSeVoTf Tpolrjs ^l^par' 'OSvcrcreuy, eJfirep airri- fiwv t)A&e, Aaxwv OTTO \r}t8os afcrav. Eur. Med. 1339. OVK ta-rw ^TIS tovr' civ 'EAAi7//ls yvvy fr\rj (qnae sustinuisset hoc). PL Apol. 38, d. ofy &v (\6yots) e IT c j era, ct ^/ATJI/ Sftv airavra iroittv /cat \fyfiv. On the Ind. of the historical tenses in intermediate clauses of a conditional proposition, see 327l>, 1. (a). REM. 2. On the Inf. in adjective-clauses, in the oratio obliqua, see 345, 6. $ 334. Connection of several Adjective- Clauses. Interchange of tJie Subordinate Clause with the Adjective- Clause. Relative instead of the Demonstrative. 1. When t\vo or more adjective-clauses follow each other, which either have the same verb in common, or different verbs with the same government, the relative is commonly used but once, and thus the two adjective-clauses are united in one. e. g. cu-^p, bs iro\\a i*.ev aya$a TOI/S (A.ouy, TroAAct Se KOIKCI TOVS iro\fn'iovs firpa^ev av^p, &s irap' T\^iv l\v *coi (&s) farb iravTwv ttyiKtiTo d^p, ij/ &avfii\ow. But when the adjective-clauses have different verbs governing different cases, generally, the Greek either omits the relative in the second adjective-clause, or introduces, in the place of the rela- tive, a demonstrative pronoun (mostly auros), or a personal pronoun: in this way the relative clause is changed into a demonstrative one, and acquires the nature of a principal clause, (a) Od. /, 110. ct/i7reAot, a'lre 0epou /xei/ irpfatpov /j.t& rjSovris St^A^o*', (juxpy 5' v(ntpov ij/j.(\\f fxe \\nrT\fftiv (and WHICH was to grieve me). Lys. Dardan. 166. ofs fyms x a P lf ? ff &* Kv, o&s rj (jLfv ir6\is us ^x^pous . . aTTTjAocre, ffol 8* ^ffav t\ot (sc. oT). X. An. 3. 2, 5. 'Apjcuoj 5c, &v T]fJ.f"is Ti&(\o/j.ev jSacriAea KaAiffriivtu KO.\ (sc. tAous KO.KUS iroiflvireiparai. (b) PI. Rp. 505, e. t> 5); Siu>Kfi nfv airaffa tyvx)) Kai TOVTOV eVe/ca irdvra. irpdrrfi. Dem. Phil. 3. 123, 47. AaKcScu/zctptoi, ot i^aAciTTTjs (Jifif ^px ov Ka ^ "fn$ airacrTjs, /SacrtAea 8e crw/i/xa- Xov elxov, ixpiff-ra.ro 8' ouSf v avrovs ( instead of o&s ouSei/ ixplffTaro, quibus nihil non cessit). X. Cy. 3. 1, 38. irov tK('iv6s eVrtv 6 etJ^JP> &s ffvvefrhpa f]/Jiiv KO! av JJLOI uoAa t5o'/cets tou/xaei' avr 6i>. 2. The adjective-clause frequently takes the place of other subordinate clauses, e. g. Qavfuurrbi' ircucTs, & s T^U/ fj.tv ovStv SiSus (IN THAT or BECACSB you give us nothing), X. C. 2. 7, 13. The adjective-clause is very frequently used 538 SYNTAX. [$$ 335, 336. instead of a hypothetical adverbial clause (comp. 333, 3) ; so also instead of an adverbial clause introduced by & s r e ; the last case occurs : (a) after odrtas or 55 e. Dem. Chers. 100, 44. ov ykp O#T y eH&rjs l Kal ptyei SVVO.IT kv (b) after roiovros, TTJ \IKOVTOS, TOVOVTOS. In most instances, these demonstratives are followed by the corresponding relatives ofos, o rov ^eoO i 3. The relative pronoun serves not only to connect subordinate clauses with the principal one, but it is also used to connect clauses generally, inasmuch as it takes the place of a demonstrative which would refer to a word of the pre- ceding clause. This mode of connecting sentences belongs to the Latin as well as to the Greek, though it occurs very rarely in the latter compared with the former. Thus in Greek, e. g. it is altogether common for clauses to begin with TOI/TO 5e fiir6vr(S, ravra 5e axovoavrfs., /ierct Se roOra, &c TOVTUV Se, us 5^ ravra fyeVeTo, etc., where the Latin generally uses the relative qui. 335. III. Adverbial Clauses. Adverbial clauses are adverbs, or participles used adverbially ($ 326, 3), expanded into a sentence, and, like adverbs, express an adverbial object, i. e. an object which does not complete the idea of the predicate, but merely defines it, e. g. ore TO lap ^ (TO re) TO, av^rj $aAAei. 'Qs e\eas, (OVTWS) 6irpaa o' 73 " 7 ?* OTTOV, !i/#a (ubi) ; o$ev, e^ev (unde) ; ot, OTTOI, #, o-rn) (quo), and, like adverbs of place, express the three local relations, where, whence, and whither. The use of the Modes in these clauses, is in all respects like that in adjective-clauses ($ 333). Her. 3, 39. fl/cou t&vo-ete o-rpaTctecrbai, irdvra of ^x^>P f VTu%ews (indefi- nite frequency). Th. 2, 11. eTreo-^e (^Kere), tiiroi &v ris riyyTai. X. An. 4. 2, 24. naxtpevoi 8^ ol iro\ffj.toi Kai, oirr] fff] o"revbv x^P^ "? TpOKara\a(Jifidvoi>- res IK\VOV rcky irapoSovs (Opt. on account of ^K(a\vov). Cy. 3. 3, 5. ^pa oirovirep tiriTvyxdvoicv frypiois (wherever). PI. Apol. 28, d. ob &v TIS $ 337.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME. 539 $ 337. B. ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME. 1. Adverbial clauses denoting time, are introduced by the conjunctions ore, OTTO'TC, o>5, rjviKa (when), cV i/), or ws ra^tcrra (as as), e ov, c^ orou, also e' o>v, ea: <7wo, and a ov (since) ; TrptV, ^ (priusquam), lo>9, ecus o^, ets o, ISTC, /xe^pt or a^pt ou, /A^pt orov, /te^pi (z7/, until). 2. On the use of the modes, the following points are to be observed : 3. The Ind. is used, when the statement is to be represented as *.fact ; hence in speaking of actual events or facts. Her. 7, 7. us a.vfyv(afs (iz7/), is followed by the Ind. of the historical tenses, when an object is to be represented as unat- tained or not to be realized. Comp. $ 327 b , 1, (a). PL Gorg. 506, b. ^Sews &v KoAAt/cA-e? TOUTW rt SieAey^r/v, eus avrf a v e'8 UK a. (usque dum reddidissem). 5. The Subj. is used, when the statement is to be indicated as a conception or representation, and must be referred to the predicate of the principal clause, the verb of which is in one of the principal tenses. In the Common Language, the con- junctions take the modal adverb av, e. g. orav, oTrdrav, i^viV oiv, (TTOLV (cmjv), eVeiSai', iv , irpiv av, eo>s av, fte^pt av, i /SouAr; $ia\eyf (ol fidpftapoi SaaiAeTs) ffrparo t, rds 6 yepuv &pfj.cuve. o, 624. tv ft 67re(j.vov? e\Kero X/TO$ (as often as). Her. 6, 61. 8/cws (= Sre) tveiiteie i) rpoQbs (rii TroiSfov), irpts TC r&ya\/j.a 'iffra Kal t \lffffero T^J/ bebv a.ira\- \dai TT)s 5vs/j.op(j>ir)S rb iraiS'iov (as often as). X. An. 6. 1, 7. 6 TTO T e ol"E\\rives rois Tro\ffjitois ^Trloiev, pqSiws 4ir4i\ripfT[j.oiffi fjnyfirj (but opvvffi ~Boper)v Kal ayvvtri Kv/jutra, etas tt.v . . ft-typ)* PI. Phaed. 59, d. Treptejue/'O/xe* 1 eKdcrrcfTe, ftas EEM. 4. On &v in the principal clause, see 260, 2, (2), (ft). 8. Moreover, the Opt. without av is used with conjunctions of time, without reference to the time of the principal clause, when the statement of time is to be represented as an uncer- tain and doubtful condition, as a mere supposition, conjecture, or assumption; also, generally, when the subordinate clause forms a part of a principal clause expressing a wish. PI. Am at. 133, a. 6ir6r rb (piXoffo^f'tf ala"%pbv 777170' 0.1 \LT\V e?j/ai, ou8' Uv &v&ps &J> roV* TrXeiaTou al-ioi yiyvoivr* ol av&pwiroi, 6ir6re $ 337. J ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME. 541 Tj a,\ts t4&a\ov. X. An. 6. 1, 27. ov irp6o-&ev vo\novvTfs, irplv firoii)ffa.v ira (= tav /d) irp6rfp6v ere X. An. 5. 7, 12. ^i^j onre'A&TjTe, irplv kv O.KOV >Tovs yevfff&ai rovs 'Eperpttay, 4vf?x* cr< P l Sfivbv x^ ov ' 7> 2. taav AapeiWj K< d irpdrepov 1) fiaff i\fvo~ai, yeyovorcs rpf?s iratSfs. X. An. 1. 8, 19. irplv ro^fv/^a tiKve't(Tbai, fKK\lvovffiv ol fidpfiapni Kal (pevyovffi. 10, 19. irplv Kara\v(rai TO ffTpdTfv/j,a irpbs &PIITTOV, (dvrj. 4. 1,7. tirl rJ> &Kpov ava&alvei XftptffoQos, irplv Tiva alff- TUV irotepiuv. Cy. 7. 1, 4. irplv 6pav TOVS iro\e(j.iovs, fls Tpls aveiravve TO (npdTcvfjLa. 2.2, 10. ir&avol OVTWS flffi Ttves, &STf irplv clSfvaiTb irposTaff(r6/j.fvov, irporfpov irtfoovTcu. With attraction (^ 307. 4) : ib. 5. 2, 9. (iroAXol &vbp(airoi) airo&v-fiffKovffi irp6Tepov, irplv STJ^OI yevcff&ai, olot 3\aav. REM. 5. The Homeric irdpos, when it is not used as a mere adverb, is al- ways constructed with the Inf. 11. o-, 245. is 5' &yop^v aytpovro, irdpos S6piroto Iic5cs, CTTCI, quoniam, puisque, because, since, eTreiS?}, quoniam, and oVov, quandoquidem. In these adver- bial clauses, the Ind. is the prevailing Mode ; but the Opt. with Q.V may be used according to $ 260, 2, (4) (a), and also the Ind. of the historical tenses with av, according to $ 260, 2, (2) (a). H. irporf)K(i irpo&vfAws efteAeij/ a.KO'ueiv. X. C. 1. 4, 19. 2w/cpaT7js ov ^6vov TOVS cvvAvras eSo/cet Troieiv, 6ir6re virb ruv bptfvro a7re'xff&at T>I> avocrtuv re Kal aSiKwv, aX\a Kal dirtr* 4v tp-ri/j.la yyflffaivTo /uTjSei/ av TTOTC S>v irpd.T'roisv &(oi>s $ia\a&c?i', PL Prot. 335 d. 5owcu oitv &ov Trapain^ivai TifjLiV. & s ^*yci? ou5' & v i/bs 7$iois a K o v - ffatfj.1 fy I \ C 6s Iffnv. X. Cy. 1. 5, 13. ei TaDra e'yw \4yu iff pi V/JLUV &\\a yiyv&ffKtav, ^uai/TOj/ airaT a> (here something is spoken of, which in his heart the speaker wholly denies). E t TI %x fis > 5 6 s. El TOUTO ireirolriKas, eVatj/etVdcu &ios f ?. Her. 3, 62. d> 5eV- irora, OVK eo~Ti TCLVTO. aXTjdea, onus ( ori) KOTC o~ot 2yue'08ts a5eA.(/>eos 6 ffbs tiravtff- TTjK 4yw yap aurbs eSatyd fj.iv X f P ff ^ T ]7 O " 1 fyttoVTov e I p.4v vvv ol Tf&vt&Tfs b.i>(ff- r faff i, IT posS eK(6 rot Kod'Affrvdyfarbv VlriSov ^TravaffTTjffeff^ai' flS' foi 4$lSov. Et TOUTO tircTroi-fiKeis, C~nfJ.las &ios rja&a. Et ^ PpAvTi] ff 6, Ka\ fj &ao*o/u6i/ TOUS Tro\ffjLLOvs icaTa/CTaj'oWes, odSets rj/j.eav a.iro&avf'i- rai. (b) The Protasis has t with the Ind. of the historical tenses, and the Apodosis, also, the Ind. of an historical tense with ov\ then the reality, both of the condition and con- clusion is to be denied. This form is used only of the past, or where there is a reference to the past; here it is affirmed that something could take place under a certain condition, but did not, because the condition was not fulfilled. The use of the tenses is the same as in simple sentences. See $ 256. Here the negation of the reality is not contained in the form of expression 544 SYNTAX. [$ 339. itself, for the Ind. of the historical tenses necessarily always denotes a past occurrence or fact ; the negation is merely an inferred one, that is to say, it con- sists in this, that a conclusion or inference is drawn from the past and applied to the present, and a reality in the past is opposed to what is not a reality in the present. The past reality expressed in the conditional clause stands in opposition to another present reality (either expressed or to be supplied from the context), which contains precisely the opposite of that past reality, e. g. if the enemy came, we were destroyed, i. e. if the enemy had come, we should have been destroyed, BUT NOW THE ENEMY HAS NOT COME ; from this contrast it is now inferred, that the assumed fact if the enemy came, did not take place. Et TOVTO Ae7s, rjudpTave s av (si hoc dixisses, err ares, if you said this you erred, or if you had said this, you would have erred ; but you have not said it consequently you have not erred). PL Apol. 20, b, c. rts, 3\v S' lyca, KOI irotia- ir6s ; Kal iroVou 5tSa 2c6/cpares, Tldpios, TreVre /JLVUV. Kal 7^ rbtf Efrnvov ffj.OMa.pia 'a, el ws aATj&ais exet TavTtjv T^V Texwiv Kal OVTUS e'^eAws SiSacr/cei eytb yovv Kal avros e' Ka\\vv6 ^t\v re Kal rjfip vv6^i\ v av, el i) TT i o~ T a /JL 77 v ravra" a A A' ov yap tirio~TaiJ.ut, & avSpes 'A&Tji/atbt (here also something past is spoken of, as is evident from eVa/ccfyn 7rexepT?(ra irpaTTftv TO. iroArrt/cct irpdy/jiaTa, ird\ai tiv a TTO \da\T] Kal oijT* &i/ v/j.a.s w (p A ^ K V), ofrr' &y t/j.avT6ir. Th. 1, 9. ovK ttv ovv v^ffcav e Kp dr e i ('Ayap.fiJ.i'wi'), fl fji-f) n Kal vavriKbv f?X* v (^ e would not have ruled over the islands tinless he had a fleet ; but he had a fleet, consequently he could also rule over the islands). PL Gorg. 516, e. et ?tcrav avSpfs aya&oi, OVK av irore ravra %iraff-% ov (tf they Cimon, Themislocles, and Miltiades had been good men, they would never have experienced this injustice). X. Cy. 1. 2, 16. ravra OVK tiv O (ol Hfpffai) iroif'iy, el /UT? Kal Siairr) /j-frpia ^XP^ >1>T0 ' 3-3) 17. et TIS KlvSwos t(j.f \\ejs TJ/JUV elvai /cc? (sc. tv rrj Tro\f/j.lq), ^ eV^oSe (sc. <}>i\ia), fffcas TO afftya\tffTaTOv -t\v &v atpeTeov vvv Se fcroi /ie re els T))V eKflvoav (T&V iroX.ffJi.icav') Toanfv avTots (here also a past action is spoken of: as long as we were unarmed, and therefore were in greater danger in a hostile than in a friendly country, it was necessary for us to remain here ; but now, since we are armed, the danger here and there will be equal). 8. 3, 44. dXyj^, erj, \eyeis- et yap roi TO fX eiv OVTWS, wsiTfp TO Xa/updvfLv, rjo~v ^j/, 7ro\i &i> $ie, 8> AuKeSaifj-ovioi, KOI Trd\ai av $ /A e v Trap vfuv, flfJ.^ "S.fVOv Sevpo ri/j.as ireiffas airliyayev. Lys. defens. Call. 102, 1. et (J.cv irepl &\\ov TIVOS ^ TOV ffca/j-aTos Ka\\ias rjyuvl^eT o, "l--fipKei av /xot Kal TO. irapa T>V ah.Xcai' ftp-nut i/a vvv e fj.oi S o K e ? alffxpov flvai u^i jSoTj^aat KaAAta TO oiKata. Purg. sacril. 109, 15. et /xe^ alffxpov -f\v /AOVOV TO Trpayua, Ifftas av TIS T>V irapiovTcav 7; u. f A 77 CT e v v Se ou irepl alo"xvvi]S, dAAa -rrepl TTJS ueylffT-^s fonias eKivb'vvevov. REMARK 1. On the omission of &v in the Apodosis, see 260, Rem. 3. On the Ind. of the Hist, tenses in the intermediate clause of such a proposition, 327b, 1. (a). $ 339.] CONDITIONAL ADVERBI II. The condition is expressed, in conception or representation. The Greek hi to denote this relation : (;v) The Protasis has ei with the Opt, and the Apodosis, the Opt. with Q.V. (The Fut. Opt. is here not used.) By this form, both the condition and the conclusion are represented as a present or future uncertainty, as an undetermined possibility, a mere conjecture, assumption, or supposition, without any refer- ence to the thing supposed being real or not real, possible or impossible. El rt ?x' 5 > 80(775 i* (si quid habes des, if you had anything, you would give it ; here it is neither assumed nor denied that you have anything, but is merely a supposition. Et ravro \eyois, a^apravois av (if you should say this, then you would err). PI. Symp. 175, d. ev &v x' 6 * TOIOVTOV efrj 77 (Torr' e"/c TOV Tr\i)pTTepov fls rb/ Kevdrepov pfiv TJ/J.WI/, lav airrufif^a oAA^j- AO>J> et yap OVTUS exet Kal rf ffotpia, iro\\ov Tt/j.u>/j.ai rr}v irapa y eA^otre av, fl *A\vv Sja/Sa/T/re. 6.2,21. et KaTa\iir6i/Ts ret avfeur; ej/ ry pvu.vy us els (J.dx'nf TTJffffKfvafffMfVOi 1otfj.ev, lavs &v TO t'epa fjia.\Xov rjfjiiv. (Of the assumption of something past, in Herodotus [ 260, (4) (a)] 7, 214. etSe/Tj &v Kal twv ^ M7jAteis Tai>Ti]V rrjv arpairbv 'OJ/^TTJS, et TTJ x^PV tro\\a & /j.t\r) KW s e5f7j, Onetes might have known this way, if he had been very familiar with the country). (b) The Protasis has eav (r/v, av) with the Subj., and the Apodosis also, the Ind. of a principal tense, commonly the Fu- ture (also the Imperative). By this form, the condition is rep- resented as a conception or supposition, the accomplishment of which, however, is expected by the speaker, and is regarded as possible. The conclusion resulting from the subordinate clause, is represented as certain (necessary). REM. 2. As the Greek Subj. always refers to the future, idv with the Subj. almost wholly corresponds to e t with the Fut. Ind. ; the only distinction is, that by c t with the Fut. Ind., the form of the condition implies that the action will actually take place in future ; but by lav with the Subj., the form of the condition implies that the actual occurrence of the action is merely assumed or expected by the speaker. The reason for the use of the Subj. is not to be found in the conditioned relation itself, which it is necessary to express, but in 46* 546 SYNTAX. [$ 339. the fact, that, aside from this relation, it is used to denote a concession expected by the speaker ( 259, Rem. 4). 'E a v TOVTO \eyr)s, a/j.apr'f) cry, if you say this, shall say it, you will err. (Whether you will actually say this, I do not yet know ; but I expect, I as- sume that you will say it, and then it is a necessary consequence that you err.) 'Eaj/ TOVTO Ae'lps, a /JL a p T -i] ff rj (si hoc dixeris, errabis). Dem. 2, 14. airas \6yos, h.v a TT 77 Ta Trpdyfj.aTa, fidradv *i oL fiao~i\evo~$ re Kal iKavws, Kal TOVTO els TWTOV |u/i7T6 with the Suhj. and el with the Opt. are also used to denote indefinite frequency. Comp. 327*>, 2. In the place of edv with the Subj., I with the Opt. occurs, when the conditional clause is made to depend on an Hist, tense. Still, see 345, 4. On edv with the Opt. and el with the Inf. in orat. obliq., see 345, Rem. 4, and No. 6. 3. Besides the common forms of the Apodosis already men- tioned, which correspond to those of the Protasis, the Apodosis is very often found in a form that does not correspond to the Protasis. This interchange of forms gives great delicacy of expression. The following cases occur : (a) The Opt. with &v in the Apodosis, very often follows el with the Ind. and edv with the Subj., when the conclusion as uncertain, doubtful, an undeter- mined possibility, is to be contrasted with a condition which is certain, or which is expected or assumed as certain. But the Greek, particularly the Attic dialect, very often employs this form of the Apodosis with a degree of civility, even when speaking of settled convictions [ 260, 2, (4), (a)]. (a) Ei TOVTO \eyeis, apapTdvois &v (if you assert this, you would err). PI. 30, b. et fj,ev ovv ravTa \eyuv S latyfreipto TOVS veovs, TOUT' kv ely /3\a&pd. Ale. II. 149, e. al yap &v Seivbv e?7j, el irpbs TO. Scopa Kal TUS ^vo~tas airofiXev- o v ff i v T)fj.uv ot freoi, a\\a fj.7] irpbs T}\V tyvjchv, av TIS Offios Kal 5'iKaios &>v Tvy- XO.VTI. X. C. 1. 2, 28. ei 2a>/cpcT77s ffwtypoittav StcTeAeJ, TTWS & v SiKatus TYJS OVK evovff-ris avTy Kaxias alriav ex L \ T n - ^> ^- " iro\e(j.i6s ye tiv fftySSpa efiXairrov, Kal & v y.ev TV avTa \6yca $i\$ KOffp.eii', Tax & v SevTepot (paivoi- fj.eSra (then we should be inferior). (y) E I with the Ind. of the historical tenses is used in speaking of the denial of a fact, and in the Apodosis, the Opt. with a v is used in speaking of the past, instead of the usual Ind. of the Hist, tenses with &v. This use is not $ :> 10.] ELLIPSES OP THE PROTASIS. 547 frequent, and is found only in Homer [$ 2GO, (4), (a)]. II. , 80. ei /tip TIS rbf Zvtipov 'AXOUWJ' \Aos fvtiriref, ifC$ s ^y' apitrros > Axa'x Tai *?"<*' (if another ftad told the (Imtin, we should pronounce it false , and not believe it). II. , 311. *ca vv Ktv vd' aTTd'AojTo ifoj dpfywi' AjVe/as, fl ft)) &p* bv v6t]fff Aibs ^uyar^p 'AtppoSlrrj (and Aeneas tcould certainly have perished there, if Aphrodite had not v\dcu, fj xrf~ fiiara Staauffat, ap* a.i6irunov ets ravra rjyTja'diJif&a rbi/ aitpcnri ; (c) The Ind. of the historical tenses with &v in the Apodosis follows: (a) sometimes ei with the Ind. of a principal tense, if the condition is re- garded as a fact or something actually existing, while the conclusion is consid- ered as not real or actual. X. Hier. 1, 9. tl yiip ol/rtw TOVT' x f '> v ^ s ^ v ^o\- \o\ fifv lir (S> v fj.ovv Tvpawtiv . . , ircDs Se Wires ^fj\ovv &v TOVS rvptiw ovs ; (if this is really so, why should many strive after sovereignty, and all esteem tyrants as happy?) Eur. Or. 565, sq. t ykp yvvcuKts Is r6S" riov & 5 ^ox' " 7 "' ^^ ov\a tiroiov- fi-nv iraffi Ufpo-ais rots irposiova-tv. PI. Ale. I. Ill, e. et /SouATj^etT?/* ei/ 6i'5e- /at ^ITJ /j.6fov, iroioi liv&pwiroi flcrif, aAA' 6iro?ot vyieivot, % voffcaSfis, apa IKOVOI by 3\ dycDfj^b^ei/ots OVTUS e'lpapTO (fato constitutum ERAT) irpo|a<, rl xph irposSoKav ; (/3) negatively: Th. 3, 65. et /Lie/ yap ^tf?s avrol irpos re rty ir6\iv 4\b6vres ^/nax^Me^a (pugnavissemus) KCU rV yriv t$T)ov/j.tv (devastassemus) &s iroXtfuoi, a 8 1 KOV/JLC v tl 5e vpuv ol irparroi . . 4irfKaX4s eX l } ' et> ^ e M> ev&vvova\rj Karavevcrofj.ai. Also when et 8e or et 8* aye is used as an antithesis, where a verb must be sup- plied from the context. H. o, 302 ; t, 46. dAA' &\\oi peveovo-t KapT)KO/j.6cavres 'A%aiot, etsJ/ce irep Tpoiyv $iairepcro/j.ev ' el 8e Kal avroi (sc. p.}) p.eveoveA^(reie \6- yos Ka\a>s prjSfls fls av^paycAiav^ t) rovs awcuSfirrovs f^ovffiKi]s utrua /j.d\a KO.\US da^ff fls fJLOVTiK-nv. PI. Prot. 329, b. fyw etirep &\\(a TO> av&puirwv irfibot- IMIJV &v, KO! K\sre Trotetev ravra (Her.). 2. The Ind. is used in these clauses, when the consequence or effect, is to be indicated as a fact, something real and actual. The negative is in this case (ov, $ 318, 2). Her. 6, 83. "A.pyos avtipuv ^xW^^n ovroo, &sre ol Sov\oi avrecw %ffx ov irdvra ra irpT)y/j.aTa. X. Cy. 1. 4, 5. Kvpos TO.XV KOI ra Iv TKi, wsre 6 'A.(rrvdyT)s OVKCT' e?x" avrtf ffv\\eyetu frrjpta. 15. ovrws 7l, Kal &\\ovs re TTO\\OVS 3. The Inf., on the contrary, is used, when the consequence or effect is to be represented as merely a conceived or supposed one, inferred from the inward relation of things, or assumed as possible. (On attraction with the Inf., see $ 307, 4, and on the negative, $ 318, 2.) The particular cases where the Inf. is used, are the following : (a) When an effect or consequence is specified, which results from or has its ground in the nature or condition of an object. X. C. 1 . 2, 1 . ert Sc irpbs rb /XCT- p'uav 5e?ff&ai ireTratSew^eVos ?iv 2a>KpoT7js OVTWS, & s r ircta/u fj.iKpa KKT7]/j.ei/os irdvv paSicas ex elv apKovvra. Cy. 1. 1, 5. fSvvdcr&r) Kvpos e'7rth> / u/aj' ^uj8aAe?j/ Totrau- Ti)v TOV iravras avrtp %apf^f(r^a, SSTC del T^ avrov yvw/A-r) a^iovv nvfiepvaff- 3ai. 2, 1 . <^>Gvat <5 KCpos Ae-yerat sre iravra yucv Trdvov a v a T - A^i'at, ircivTa 8e nlvfivvov virofj.e'iva.i rov tiraive'ia'&ai eVe/co. For- the same reason, ^ &sre (quam ut) is used with the Inf., after a comparative. Her. 3, 14. TTOI Kvpov, TCI fikv oiK-fj'ia 3\v pefa KO.KO., if) &sr e apctKAafeff (greater than that any one can bewail, i. e. too great for one to bewail). X. C. 3. 5, 17. ofiov/ji.ai aeiy fji^i ri /u.eT^bj' i) 8>sre fyspew 8vvasre Kaipbv f.nriir\a(r&at, rovro paStcas irdvv "SuKpdr-rjs tyvXdrrero. (b) When the consequence is to be represented as one merely possible. X. An. 2. 2, 17. Kpavyyv TTO\\T]V firoiovv KoAoDi/rey oAA^Aous, &sre Kal rovs ovs h,KQv*iv (ut etiam hostes audire. POSSENX), S>yrc ol {nlv tyyfoafra r&v $ 341.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING CONSEQUENCE. 551 ose or aim. Th. 2, 75. ifpoKaXv^ara (l\* 8p/Sis Kal 5i since they could rule the rest of the Greeks, provided they themselves obeyed the king). X. Cy. 3. 2, 16. al rovro ^iri KDpe, on yu>, wsre aTreXaorat \a\8aiovs airb rovruv ru>v &Kpv, iroAAoTr Aacria &v t5a)/ca (e) When instead of an Inf. alone, the Inf. with 5 sre is used for the sake of emphasis. Th. 1, 119. (^Se^j&Tj aa.v] /ccurTa>j> <5/a, c&sre tyT)(pisre) with the Inf. In this way the Inf., particularly of verbs of saying, ihirk- : ng, judging, hearing, is used with us for the purpose of expressing restriction or limitation. That, of which such a subordinate clause expresses the consequence or effect, must be supplied, e. g. roiovru rp6iru. Th. 4, 36. us piKpbv ^eyd.\u> e I^K d s, e.g. OUTWIT} aitoZo-ai, So/ceTi/ e^ol, ov iroA- \$ \6yu e iTTfTv, especially o \iyov, P.IKOO G 8eTj/, ita ut paulitm absit, and in the still shorter form, o\iyov, prope, paene. According to the same analogy, 30-oj/, offa, o rt connected with an Inf., are used instead of us. (Hem. 2), e"g. oo-ov ye p eld ft/ a i, as far as I know, quantum sciam (properly pro tanto, quantum scire possim), 8 ri p elSevai. In like manner, us with the Inf. is usod in Herod, in sentences which express a limitation. 2, 8. rb &v 8)7 airb >T i\iovTr6\ios ovKfTi TroAAb*' x ca p' lot 'i & s elva-i- Alyvirrov (ut in Aegypto, for JEgypt, i. e. considering its whole extent). 4. The Opt. with av is used when the consequence or effect is to be represented as a conditioned supposition or presumption 1$ 260, 2, (4), (a)] ; finally the Ind. of the historical tenses is used with av, when it is to be stated, that the consequence would take place under a certain condition [$ 260, 2, (2), (a)]. Isocr. Archid. 130, 67. eiy TOO~O.VTT]V afj.i^tav f\ij\v&ao~iv, u s r* ol jue voi ras ovo~ias ifiiov & v els T)]V &d\aTrav T^ ff^erep' O.VTUV 4 [J.&d\\o le v, ^ TO?S Seo/j-fvois firap Keo~e iav. PL Menex. 236, d. o~oi ye 8e? xapifeo'ibcu, us re KO.V o\iyov, et /j.e Ke\evots airoSvvra opx"flo~ao~&a.i, xapiffaifj.'nv &v. Symp. 197, a. fj.avTtK^j' *A.ir6\\oov avevpev, 'ETrt^UyUias Kal "Epuros riyefi.ovfvcra.vros, & sre Kal olros "Epuros kv fjfij /xa&TjT^y. Dem. Cor. 236, 30. OVK &/ upitiofji.ev $i\nrirov, 8>sre rrjs elp^vrjs hv StT/juopr^/cet Kal OVK &v afj.({}6Tpa el;u Se, usre, &j/ /8ouAr/(r^6, %e tpor ovf)o~are (I ask that you would decree, if you wish t properly : decree, if you ivish). So, likewise, usre can be connected with a question. Dem. Aphob. 858, 47. el o irarty rjirio-rei rovrots, 5^\ov on ovr" bv rSAAa eirerpeirev, ovr' &> eKf-iv ovru KaraXiiruv avroTs e^po^ev, &sre Trofrev Iffaaiv] (ergo unde scie- nint ?) Comp. 344, Eem. 6. REM. 5. Instead of usre with the meaning ita or ea conditions, ut, the post- Homeric language also uses e^' ^re (more seldom c'0' $), which refers to the demonstrative enl rovru in the principal clause, either expressed or im- plied ; either the Put. Ind., or the Inf. are here used, e.g. Her. 3, 83. firl rovru Se vire^icfrap.ai rr t s ap%7]S, eTr 1 Sire VTT' ouSevbs v^euv apo/j.ai. X. H. 2. 2, 20. etroiovvTO cipyvyv, efi cj> ra re ftaKpa reixT] Kal rbv Tleipaia Ka&e\6 ras AoKe^amoviois eireo-frai. 4, 38. ol Se $ 342.) COMPARATIVE ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF MANNER. 553 D. ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING MANNER AND QUANTITY. $ 342. I. Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting Manner. 1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting quality and man- ner, compare the predicate of the principal clause, in respect to tftuility and manner, with the predicate expressed in the adver- bial clauses. They are introduced by the relative adverbs, o>9, W9TC, o>97rep, o7ra>9, which refer to a demonstrative adverb, e. g. OVTW9, in the principal clause, either expressed or understood. 2. The use of the modes in these adverbial clauses corre- sponds with that in adjective clauses ($ 333), e. g. Aeyas ovrws, u>9 9 oYoWu', O7ro>9 ISi- Xei or O7ra)9 av c^eAfl ($ 333, 3), c/caora> (gives to each, as he wishes). Very often ws av or us-rcp av is used with the Opt. ($ 333, 6). PL Phaed. 87, b. e/xol yap So/cei O/AOUOS Aeyeovfcu ravra, a>97rep av 1-19 irepi dv#pco7rov vdvrov Trpecr/Jvrov a7ro^avovTO9 X e y o t TOVTOV TOV Aoyov. REMARK 1. In comparisons, either the Present tense is used, since the com- pared object is placed in present view, or the Aor. [ 256, 4, (c)]. In respect to the Modes, it is to be noted, that in Homer, the adverbs of comparison d> s, w ST, i) vrt, are connected either with the Pres. or Aor. Ind., when the com- parison is stated as an actual fact, or with the Pres. Subj., or commonly with the Aor. Subj. ( 333, Rem. 2. ; the Aor. Subj. often retains the appearance of the Fut. by the shortening of the mode-vowel). II. K, 183. us Se /ewes irtpl /ZTjAa Svstap-f) STc sirtp, fisre, an attraction of the Case sometimes occurs, particularly in the Ace. Lys. Accus. Agor. 492, 136. ovSafiov foriv 'Ay6parov 'A^j/atov elj/at &sirep pa s possesses in a high degree the thing affirmed in the predicate of the sentence ; the latter, when it is pre- supposed that the object possesses only in a small degree what is affirmed by the predicate of the sentence, S. 0. R. 1118. Aa'tov y&p $v, tfirep ris #AAos, irur- r6s, us vopevs avf]p (ut pastor, as a shepherd ; the fidelity of shepherds be- ing presupposed). But Th. 4, 84. ?\v Se ov8 a.8vvaros, us AaKedai[Ji.6vios, flireTv (ut Lacedaemonius, for a Lacedemonian ; it being presupposed of Lacede- monians as a thing known, that they were not great orators). $ 343. II. Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting Quantity. 1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting quantity, compare the predicate of the principal clause, in respect to quantity or degree, with its predicate. The compared predicates are con- trasted either as equal or unequal to each other. 2. The equality of the predicates is expressed in the follow- ing manner : (a) The adverbial clause is introduced by the relative 6V on (oo-ov), which refers to the demonstrative TOO-OVTM (TOCTOV- rov), in the principal clause. X. Cy. 8. 1, 4. roffovrov Siacpepeiv ripcis Set r&v fiov\a>y, '6 (o o- o v), which refers to the demonstrative TOO-OVTW (TOO-OTOV), in the principal clause ; the predicate of both clauses, however, stands either in the comparative or superlative. X. An. 1. 5, 9. (Kvpos) voplfav, 'dff(a /uej/ &/ fraTTOV \&oi rovoiirta airapaffKevao-TOTepca flownAe? ftdxeffbai (quo [quanto] celeriuseo [tanto] imparatior, thinking that THE quicker he came, THE more unprepared he would find the king to fiyht). O. 7,42. 8(Tw bv Kal Ipol Koivcav6s, ical irauriv O?KOV 0uAa| afj-etvcav ylvy, roffoiirta Kal Tt/ttwrepo tv r$ olitcp Zffp (quo [quanto] mehor eo [tanto] honoratior, the so much the). Hier. 1, 19. o Uv IT \* lot TJS iro- pa^Tjrai ra TreptTTcl TUV inavfav, r off atrip btiffffov Kopos e/j.Triirrei TTJS e'SwS^y. Th. 8, 84. '6ffu fj.d\iffra Kal e'Aeu&epot tfffav vavrcu, roffovrca Kal frpafft- rara irposveff6vrs r,bt> fuff^v far-grow. The Superlative may also stand in the first member, the Comp., in the last. Dem. Ol. 1. 21, 12. off? yap erot- vdrres avr$. $ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. REMARK 1. Sometimes TOO-O is omitted, especially when the relative member of the comparison follows. PI. Gorg. 458, a. ptl^ov ykp avrb iya- dbv ijyovpat, 85uva>/xai Tox'o-To(as ^u/cA; as possible). For the like purpose, also, olos, 8rt are used in connection with elvai. X. C. 4. 8, 11. t$6icti TO to vr os thai, olos &v (It) HpiffrAs ye c/r?p e u5o ifj-ov^ar aros. The following elliptical expressions originate from the omission of the verb: us Uptffra olov x a ^ 6T ^ TaTOI ' ^ Tl nd\t, TTOCTC, 6tC. If the nominal questions are indirect, then they are introduced by the interrogative pronouns ($ 93, Rem. 1.) compounded with a relative : OSTIS, OTTOIOS, OTTOO-OS, OTrorepos, OTTWS, OTTTJ, OTTOV, OTro^ev, OTrocre, etc. Tls ^A&ev; Ti TTOICIS] Tlolov ffe tiros (pvytv epKos oSoVrwi/ ; ITcDs Ae- ] OVK oI8a, osns eVrtV. Owe oTSo, OTTWS TOUTO T& REMARK 1. Often, however, the indirect question takes the character of the direct, and then the direct interrogative pronouns are used instead of the indirect. Sometimes, indeed, in clauses that immediately follow each other, the first clause takes the indirect interrogative, the last more seldom, the direct. OVK ol5a, ris ravra Hirpa^fv. X. C. 4. 6, 2. eTW /tot ito'i6v TI vofj.i^eis eutre- ] yet there follows immediately, exs olv flireiv, Avoids ris 6 euo-c- ; Comp. Rem. 2. PL Grit. 48, a. OVK &pa TJ/JLIV ov-rca povTio~rfov, r I vffiv ol TroAAol fifias, oAA* 8 r t 6 ^TTOIWV Trepl ruv 8iKalv /col aS'iKcw. X. C. 4. 4, 13. ou yap aiaSdi'o/j.ai o~ov, oiro'iov v6fii/j.ov, 3) iro'iov SiKaiov \eyeis. In indirect questions, the simple relative is sometimes used, instead of the indirect interrogative, e. g. 8s instead of OSTIS, oTos instead of 6-iro'ios, etc. REM. 2. The adverb Trore, like the Latin tandem, is sometimes appended to the interrogative, in order to express the impatience or desire of the inquirer for an answer, or to denote wonder, or emotion in general. X. (J. 1. 1, 2. Trot (a Tror' exp^ffavro TeK/nr)pl/cpaT7jf, &s #|jos efrj fravoLTOV rp iroAei. R. L. 1, 1. f&av/j.aat5pe, o'vvd/j.eSa Kpiveiv, TOVTCDV cbjuoAt^rj^eVcov. . Ta TroTa; (in reference to the preceding e/ceTj/a). 279, a. Sowp. NOS CTI, 5 4>a?8pe, 'iffOKparns- & /ueWoz (JLOLV- revofj-ai KOT' ourou, \eycw e&eAco. 4>. Tb TT o?ov S"f] ; SoTa 7ro?a TouTa Xtyeis ; From this mode of expression, that is to be distinguished, in which a substantive with the article or a demonstrative follows an interrogative with- out an article. In this case, the inquiry relates to the nature or quality of an object already existing. II. TT, 440. iro'iov r'bv p.v&ov eenres; which the Eng. translates by means of two sentences, " What is that word, that thou hast spoken ? " The word is already spoken, and the other nowVsks what it means. Her. 7, 48. Sai/j.6vie avSp&v, Kola (= iro'ia) ravra \eyeis elvai Svo /J.QI iro\/ju6rara ,- (what are these two things which you say are most hostile to me?} PL Gorg. 521. a. eirl irorepav ovv /ue irapaKa\e?s r^v SbepaTreiav TTJS (== ir $ 31L] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 557 KIM. 4. In order to make tin- suljeet matter of the question emphatic, when there is an antithesis, or a transition in the discourse, the words which denote this subject matter aiv often taken from their own .-etitence and placed first with r i 8 *, and then the predicate of the proper interrogative clause is commonly placed with a second interrogative. 1M. lip. 341, d. rt 8e Kv0fprhrr)* ; 6 opdwj KV- f pv^j-njs vavruv &px 011% rjffvxiav ?iyov ; ( what punishment do I deserve, that I PURPOSELY have had no rest in my life ?). REM. 6. A rhetorical turn of the Greek language, of frequent recurrence, consists in suddenly changing a subordinate clause, introduced by a conjunc- tion, into a direct interrogative clause, yet in such a way that the earlier con- struction remains unaltered. In such a case, the Eng. changes the subordinate clause into the principal, and the principal into the subordinate. X. C. 1. 4, rcuv TWV i 14. s rcu) to what purpose, for what oly'ect? ori rl; (sc. yiyvfrcu), on what ground? So also in the adjective-clause, e. g. PI. Phaed. 105, b. l yap air6Kpi ol rl KO.KOV ovxl ira^xovruv irocra 17 ot/cou/te'v?j /As rl Up &/ ay7/. PI. Rp. 341, e. ^ op&fos ffoi SOKW, fT}v, kv eiire'ti' ovrta \eyuv, $ o& ; 'Op&ws, e7j. Very often used in connection with other particles, e. g. ju^j/ ( 316, 1), 54j, 84) TTOV ( 315, 1, 2), STJTO ( 315, 3), &pa, ydp [ 324, 2, 3, (a)], Kal, voii ( 316, 2), TTOU &pa. X. O. 4, 23. rl \eyeis, 8> Kvpe ; $ ykp , 5 Avcri, vtpoSpa (pi\ei ffe 6 irar^p Kal T] fJ.'firrjp ; Tldw ye, % S' '6s. Still, ^ it o v is also used when the inquirer would express doubt whether the actual existence of a thing is to be admitted or questioned. Eur. Med. 695.^ TTOV Ter6\(jL-r]K tpyov iv^r< ^H,-itmli\fTJ & 2wKpd>7jy, &sir(p, Happd-Vie, ypacpiKi) ivnv rj (iKaffia ruv op6Aets &/T6J u7j. 3. 13, 3. ap' ovv, % AC, ^ Ou 5^ra. 1.5,4. apd yt o v xpb "R&vTo. avSpa, riy^ffa^fvov T)JJ/ ^yKpdretav aperris lvai K/w/TrlSa, Ta.vrt\v jTpurov iv T^ tyvxfj KaraffKtvdaaa&ai ; (nonne eerie). 2.6,34. apa (*.)) 5ia/3aA- \r&ai S6^is far ffiov; 4. 2, 10. ri Sc 5)j /SouA^ews 070^65 yevtv Ufpffuv &affi\ea, Hi/jLr)(Ta tori, v Sov\os &v ; (but not a slave, is he ?) Eur. Hec. 754. rl xp^M a puurTfvovffa ; n. Eur. Andr. 82. \j.porrt v p.)) 5o/cf? frSecas Ae-yecr&at , 'Ev ols ri XPV V "^oi^iv [*.; /j,wv ovx aTrep tiroiovv ; (nonne, quod faciebam ?) (d) There is the same difference between ov and ^ when used without Spa, as when used with it, see (b) : i. e. 06 is used in affirmative questions, pA\ in negative. OVK $bf\fis If vat ; (non or nonne vis ire ? do you not wish to go ?) PL Prot. 309, a. ou , ^ Kodnffrov $ IMI /cpciT7js e ^? s TrAct/relV, ^ irfVJjra irotets; C. 1. 4, 6. ravra OVTU TrpoyorjTiKtos ireTrpa^^eVa, airopeis, Trdrcpo Tvxns, t) yvdfJL-ns epya IffTiv ; (g) "A \\o TI % (arising from &\\o ri etrrt or ylyverai, tf or yei/oir' &v, ^) and &\\o rt,has the same signification as nonne. X. An. 4. 7, 5. & \ \o n % ovSw Ku\vfi Trapttvai ; (does anything else than nothing hinder = does anything hinder ?) PL Hipparch. 236, e. &\\o rt olv ol ye ^tAo/ctpSely (\rpa. ^Tntrri^uc- vos ird\ai aireKpinrrov ^ o/ti/eTs, e(pr), Sp|ai, ^ alcrxpos tyavfjs, eav Trp6-repos TOV dSeA^by e5 Troths ; ( = ^ apa onre/cpuTTTOi/, ^ OKVG'IS ; ) (i) Ei and tdv [with the Subj., comp. 339, 2, II, (b)], whether, is used only in indirect questions, and, indeed, properly only in double questions, and de- notes a wavering or doubting between two possibilities ; but often only ono member is expressed, while the other is present in the mind of the speaker. Hence el and tav are especially used after verbs of reflecting, deliberating, inquir- ing, asking, trying, knowing, and saying. The connection must determine whether the interrogative sentence has an affirmative sense (whether not), or a nega- tive one (whether). X. An. 7. 3, 37. or/ce^at, et b "EXXfawv vopos Kd\\iov ex, (whether not). C. 1. 1, 8. otfre ry a-rparriyiK^ SJjAoi/, el (whether) crvfupfpei S' l&vs ^e'pe- rai p.evei, fjv nva TT e

first dre altogcthi-r. 6. On the use of Modes in interrogative sentences, the fol- lowing points are to be noted : The Ind. is used in direct and indirect questions ; it is also used after /XT; in indirect questions, when the interrogator wishes to express his conviction, that that which is the object of his anxiety or fear actually exists. The Subj. and Opt. are used in deliberative questions [$ 259, 1, (b), and 2] ; but the Opt. also (after an Hist, tense), when the question is to be represented as the sentiment of another ($345, 4), and also when the question depends on a clause expressing a wish ($333, 5). The Opt. with av and the Ind. of the histor- ical tenses with av, are used as in principal clauses, $ 260, 2, (2) and (4). Tf \eyeis; (Also in questions expressing wonder or astonishment, the Greeks use the Ind., e. g. iras o?So; (how could I know?) Ei'ire, '6ri \e- yeis; Th. 3, 53. r) /j.aprr) Kcipe v. X. Cy. 3. 1, 27. opa, pi) eKetvovs av Serjtret (re ffwtypovi^eiv tfrt fia\\ov, t) f]/j.as vvv ^5er], /XTJ &irjpe reuxe' e A 77 r o i, t) en KO.I Tr\tiover)fjLi, <^YI^ eyw, eyoo with- out ii, OVK eyo>. Commonly also strengthening adverbs are joined with the words which answer a question : yi ($ 317, 2), e. g. eywye, OVK eyorye; yap ($ 324, 2), rot ($ 317, 3), //.e'vroi ($ 316, Rem.), otv [$ 324, 3, (b)], /nei/- ovv ($316, Rem.). The answer to nominal questions is made by naming the object respecting which the inquiry is made. Eur. Hipp. 1395, sq. 6 pas /*e, SetmW, ws ex^, riv &&\iov; 'Op&. Ib. 90, sq. olery GUI', ftpOTciiffiv t>s Kc&4ffTT}Kev v6p.os ; OVK o?Sct. X. C. 4. 6, 14. v eyca ; *7j/wl yap o?>v. $345. n. OBLIQUE on INDIKECT DISCOURSE. 1. "\\Tien the words or thoughts of a person, whether the second or third person or the speaker himself, are again re- peated, unaltered, in precisely the same form as they were stated by us or another person, then the discourse or thought quoted, being independent of any view or representation of the narrator, is called direct discourse (oratio recta), e. g. I thought: PEACE HAS BEEN CONCLUDED. The messenger an- nounced: PEACE HAS BEEN CONCLUDED, or without a preced- ing verb : peace has been concluded. 2. When the words are not repeated in the precise form in which they were first spoken, but are referred to the rep- resentation of the narrator, and thus are made to depend upon a verb of perception or communication (verbum sen- tiendi or declarandi), standing in the principal clause, the discourse is called indirect (oratio obliqua), e. g. We believed, THAT PEACE WAS CONCLUDED. The messenger announced, THAT PEACE WAS CONCLUDED. 3. The principal clauses of direct discourse, to which also belong clauses introduced by coordinate conjunctions, e. g. KCH, 8e, ydp, ovv, KCUTOI, etc., are expressed in oblique discourse, when they contain a simple affirmation or an opinion, and de- note something which happens, has happened, or will happen: (a) either by the Ace. with the Inf. ($ 307, 6), or by on and ws with the finite verb ($ 329), or even by the participle [$ 310, 4, (a)J, e. g. 'ETnyyyeiAe TOVS TroXc/xtovs aTrcxfrvytlv OTI ol 345.] OBLIQUE on INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 563 CLTTOtfrvyOLfV - TOVS 7TO A //. t'o VS O.TT O < Wy 6 VTO.S ', Wilt 11 they express a command, wish, or desire: (b) by the Inf. and in continued oratio obliqua by Setv, x/^wu with the Inf., more seldom by the Inf. alone., ($ 306), e. g. "EAefc TOIS TOIS TToXe/xtois (oratio recta, e7ri REMARK 1. Intermediate clauses of the oratio obliqua. and particularly such as are connected with the preceding by ydp, although they are grammatically principal clauses, frequently stand in oblique discourse in the Opt. without any conjunction to introduce them ; commonly a sentence expressed by on or us with the Opt. or by the Ace. with the Inf. precedes. X. An. 7. 3, 13. (\fyov iroAAol Kara TO >rd, on iravr'os c -a \eyut Se&hjs x* l ^ v 7 P e l^li K ol fyopot. 4. The subordinate clauses* of direct discourse, undergo no change in indirect discourse, except that, after an historical tense in the principal clause, they take the Opt. in the place of the Ind. and Subj., when the indirect discourse is to be repre- sented as such, i. e. when the statement contained in the sub- ordinate clause, is to be viewed as the opinion or sentiment of the person spoken of, and not that of the narrator. "Av, which is joined with the Opt. and Ind. of the historical tenses, still remains in indirect discourse. X. An. 7. 1, 33. (KoiparciSTjy) eAeyev, 8rt eroj/ios ef^j ^7er, et uv olxoiro irpbs 2ey- &r)v oiKrjffwv Kal a vir ea x. fr avr a.iro\T]^i6(j.fvos (oratio recta: E. olx TO irpbs 2. a uir 4" O~X*T o airoATjifd/ievos). X. C. 2. 6, 13. IJKOvffa, OTI TltptK\ris iro\\as (^TrwSas) &n'i\fii^ avr&v (oratio recta: n. Mo-rarai, as . . etroiei). But subordinate clauses with bn (qnod,quia) fol- low the principal rule (No. 4). X. H. 7. 1, 34. 6?xe (neXoiriSas) \fyeiv, us AOKS- Sat/j.6i>toi 5ia TOVTO iroXf^fffiav avrols (TO?S 0rj.8aiots), STJ OUK ^eA^tratei' ft.tr 'A.yi)ffi\dov 4\^(?v ^TT* avrdv (rbv ^curtAea), oratio recta : A. Sta TOVTO fro- A^/XTJO-OV, '6n OUK Tj&eATjo-cu'. The reason why the Greek avoids the Subj. in indirect discourse after a principal tense, is, that it always uses its Subj. only with reference to the Future [ 257, 1, (a)]. But the use of the Opt. after a principal tense is inappropriate, because this, as being the Subj. of the histor- ical tenses, always accompanies the historical tenses. There are, however, a few single examples, in which the Opt. follows a principal tense. But then a 564 SYNTAX. [$ 345. thought is quoted as the sentiment of another, who, at the moment of quota- tion, is to be represented as one no longer present. Her. 7, 103. bpa, ^ /m-drnv K6fjLvas 6 \6yos 6 etpTjyueVos ej'r; (whether the statement made was not idle boasting). X. Cy.2. 4, 17. &> T(S /ceIo-e e'ic^-yef AT; 8^. us ty& & ov\ot/jLnv p*ya.\riv d^j- pav iroirjffcu (if any one announces there, that 1 INTENDED). C. 1. 2. 34. ei ^\v yap (T?V ruv \6ywv ti-)(yt\v} avv TO?S opS&s (\eyop.evois ei^ai i'0fj.i^ovres dn-e'xeo'&at /eeAeuere), S^Aov bri a^e/creW elf 77 rov op^ws \tyfiv (if you mean that philosophy is not to be used in reasoning right, it is evident that it WAS YOUR VIKW, that we must abstain from reasoning right). Hence if the Greek, after a principal tense, wishes to represent a statement as the sentiment of another person, it must use the Ace. with the Inf. instead of bri M'ith the Subj. Thus. e. g. the English phrase, He says that we are immortal, is not to be expressed in Greek by Ae-yet, b'ri fjfj.e'is a&dvaToi 3>fj.ei>, or ori 77. o&. el/JLev, but by Ae^et fifias a&avd- rovs el if a i. In hypothetical Protases with el and the Ind., the Ind. remains. REM. 3. The oblique discourse is sometimes used even in the subordinate clauses of j8A7?.H\ov- rai. Th. 2, 4. oi IIAaTcuTjs e~&ov\ei>ovTO, elre a r aKaticrovcr iv, Sts-jrep fXovffiv, e/j.TTp'fitTavres rb o^Krj/J.a, elre ri &\\o xP'h vrj. H. 2. 1, 25. AvffavSpos 8e ras rax^Tas rS>v vtwv f"KC\evffev eirea&ai rots 'A&nvaiois ^TreiSoi' 8e tKfi&ff i, Kart56i>ras 2 Tt On on, us (that), see 329, 4 and Hem. 3. f 346.] ELLIPSIS. - BRACHYLOOY. 665 REM. 5. The Imperfect (seldom the Plapf.) Indicative, referring to the his- torical tense of the principal clause, is sometimes used instead of the Pres. (Perf ), in a subordinate clause which is associated with other subordinate Clauses in the Opt. X. An. 1. 2, 2. Kvpos TOVS QvydSas tKt\cvs KaTairpdt;titv, ^ % a IvrpaTt v cr o, ^ v ravffcurdai, irplv avrovs Karaydyot ofcaSc. (Oratio recta: ^8pa ol SoKffiu 6ir\lri)v bvruTTTivcu. /j.fyav, rov (instead of ou) rb ytvciov T))V atriri'Sa iracrav evyetv ovSfv TTATJ&OS av&pwTrwv fK ^X"n s aAAa (sc. o.ve/j.ev (sc. avrovs). But sometimes the Case is made to depend on the more remote finite verb. Th. 2, 65. oaov wpodffrij (TLfptK\ris) TTJS irotevs , . , otr^aAois 8iv\acv ain-tiv, Kal ty (sc. avr-f)) & ^Kflvov pfylffrrj. X. An. 2. 5, 24. TOUTO (Tur(prr}s) clirwv ry K \edpxv aA-TJ^i \fyciv, KCU flirar (sc. 6 3. An important figure of Brachylogy is Zeugma, i. e. a con- struction in which a verb, that in sense belongs only to one subject or object, is connected with several subjects or objects. The verb, however, must always be of such a nature as to ex- press an idea which may be taken in a wider or more limited sense. II. y, 326. $xi fKdffrca "irirot deptriTroScs Kal iroiKi\a reux 6 ' fifftro (to lie, as well as generally to be in a jylace, to be in store). Her. 4, 106. ^rdf/To Se Te/0 '* ffl KOI &\\Ol(Tl ' 5. Pleonasm is the use of a word, which, in a grammatical point of view, is superfluous, the idea conveyed by it having IH-C 11 already expressed in what precedes, either by the same 568 SYNTAX. [$ 347. or by another word. The desire of perspicuity or emphasis is commonly the cause of Pleonasm. X. Cy. 1. 4, 19. o'l, %v CTT' e/ceiVous TjyiteTy eAawco/uei/, u7rore/xowTt y/j.a.5 ee?- voi. 3, 15. TTfipd upii/, 6r* 8T}(TCU rovs Mirv^vaiovs. 5, 25. r ijKovffd rivos, Sri K.heavb'pos IK Bv^curlov ap- fioa-r^s fj.e\\fi Vi^ftv (instead of us tfKovffa, KA. /xe'AAet ^fiv), for as I heard from some one, that Cleandros is about to come, etc. =for Cleandros is about to come, as I heard from some one. Her. 1. 65. d> s 5' avrol AaifeScu^j/Joi \eyovari Avuovpyov lirirpoTrevx, '^rav iSicarai/ yfvwvTou KpeirrovfSy rovro U.VTOVS fvQpaivet, oAA' OTO.V TCOJ/ avrayoavKTrwu T/TTOVS, TOUT* auTous di/ia (instead of rovrca evtypaivoi/Tcu ai/tourou), as the athletes, when they are superior to common men, this does not elate them, but when they are inferior to their competitors, this gives them pain = as the athletes are not elated when, etc. (b) In order to make the contrasted ideas in a sentence prominent or em- phatic, they are often placed in the same form at the beginning of their respec- tive sentences, although the natural construction of each would necessarily be different. PL Phaedr. 233, b. roiavra & epcos eiriSeiKvurai Svsrvx" VT as uev, & /ufy \vir-riv Tols &\\OLS Trope'xei, aviapb iroiei i/ofjii^fiv, e V.TVXOVVTO.S Se /cot TO. JUT> TjSovris a|ta Trap' e/ceiVwi/ tiraivov di/cry/cc^ei rvyx& v * tv (instead of Trap' evTvxovvruv 5e Kal TO. ^ 7?Soj/7js &ia liraivov avajKa^i TiryxaVetj/, Se Kal TO. fi^j 778. a|. tiraivtiv CHAPTER X. 348. Position of Words and Sentences. 1. The intimate relation between the members of a sentence and between one sontt-n :( tisid another, and the connection of $ :>18.] POSITION OP WORDS AND SENTENCES. 671 these so as to form one thought or idea, fire expressed as has been seen, partly by inflection, or by formal words ($ \\> . I) which siij>j)ly the place of inflection, partly by the accent and position of the members of a sentence and of the sentences themselves. As the accent can be made prominent only in living discourse, and commonly agrees with the position, only the position needs to be treated. KKMARK. The position of particular parts of speech, as the pronouns, prepositions, etc., has already been stated, in the sections where these are tivatcd. See the Index under Position. 2. There are two kinds of position : the usual or grammati- cal, and the rhetorical or inverted. The first denotes the logical and grammatical relation of the members of a sentence, and of the sentences themselves to each other, and the union of these in expressing a single thought or idea; the second makes one member of a sentence, which is specially important, more prominent than the other members, by giving to it a posi- tion different from the usual or grammatical order of the words. 3. The usual or grammatical position of the words in Greek is the following : The subject stands first in the sentence, the predicate last; the copula ei/ni stands after the predicative adjective or sub- stantive ; but the attributive follows its substantive ; the object is placed before the predicate ; the objectives, i. e. the qualify- ing statements or circumstances, are so arranged, that the most important one is placed immediately before the predicate, and the other objectives precede this, following each other in such order as they would naturally be joined to the first objective, the one suggesting itself last to the mind being placed before one already existing ; or in other words, the broader limitation usually precedes the narrower, the less necessary, the more necessary. Kvpos, 6 &affi\fvs, KoAws airt&avtv. Kinrpioi irv irpo&v/j.ws avry a TOWS II. eV/fa/a-av), the personal object precedes that denoting a thing, so the Dat. the Ace. (riv ircuSa r^v ypau.it.a.riK^v 8i8a/u), the adverb of time the adverb of place (TOTC or ravrT) rrj Tjfj-fpa ev Mapo^cSvt rovs II. ^vlKt](rav). The adverb of manner, even when another word is the principal objective, usually stands immediately be- fore the predicate, e. g. ol "EAArj^es ravrrj TT? ^/ue'pct iv Mapa&wvi rovs Hfpo~as 4. The position of subordinate clauses corresponds with the position of the words (substantive, adjective, adverb) whose place they take in the sentence, i. e. the adjective-clause, for example, occupies the place which the adjective would take; and so of the others. PI. Phaed. 50, e. 6 &vpc0p6s, osTrep el&ei viraKovtiv, flire irepi/jifveus. X. Cy. 3. 2, 3. 6 8 KCpos, iv $ a vj/eXe'yo VTO, fevero- eirel 8e /caA& %v rit ifpb avrcf, ffwetcatefff rovs re ruv Tlepffuv riyffj.6vas KaL rovs T&V M^Swj/. 'Ewcl 8 e 6/j.ov $, 6\e|e TotaSe. Yet the substantive-clauses, even when they express the grammatical subject, stand after the governing verb. Ibid. 1. 4, 7. of 8' eA.eyoi', #TI Hpicroi TTO \\ovs ^8e TTA.IJO- ids. Th. 2, 64. (pepeiv re XP^I T< * Te Sai/j.6via a v a. y K a i 9 (that), and final substantive -clauses, a iv placed before the governing verb, when the ideas they express are to be brought out prominently. "Ori fttyas IK jjuxpov & t/Annros TJ^TTTCU, irapaXttyu. "iva ffa^fffrtpov 5rj\oa&f) iroa-a TJ Tl(pv iro\iT(la, fuKpkr tirdvti/u. The inversion of adjective-clauses (bv eI5s &v$pa, olr6s /oro/) has been already treated, 332, 8. Inversion is not used in adverbial clauses of time and condition, since these, according to the common position, usually precede the principal sentence. 8. When a word in a subordinate clause is to be made more prominent than the others, it is sometimes placed before the connective word (relative, etc.) which introduces the clause, e. g. TOiavr* eori KCU roAAa, Trept c/zou aoi TroAAot X.eyovarLv. 9. A means of rendering a word specially emphatic by posi- tion, is the separation (Hyperbaton) of two words which would be naturally connected together, as forming one thought, by introducing one or more less important words between them. By this separation, only one of the two words is commonly made emphatic, though often both even, especially when both stand in an emphatic part of the sentence. Dem. Phil. 3, 110. iro\\uv, 5 &v8pes 'A^rjvatoi, \6yav yiyvo^fvtav. X. S. 1, 4. dlfjLcu obv iro\v b.v T^V KaTaffKevrjv JJLOI \a/j.irpoTfpav i\?v ye ^v el o!5' on ^iffrcurai (instead of 5 o!5' ori (piXeli/, etc.). Isocr. Paneg. 53. S>sre irepl /JLCV rvjy V rots "EXATjcrt Suva- aim olS 1 oirus &V TIS ffafytarfpov tiribsi^ai Swr]&tlr). Dem. Phil, oinoi (j.tv 10. Ideas that are alike or similar, or especially such as are antithetic or opposite, are made emphatic in their position, by being placed near each other. Thus avrbs avtov, etc. e. g. rj Tr6\is avr}) trap OUTTJS Slmjv X. Hier. 6, 2. vinjv /xii/ r)\iKitos) is the harmony produced by the alternation of long and short syllables, accompanied by the recurrence of an emphasis at intervals ; when the emphasis occurs at fixed intervals, the rhythm be- comes meter, each one of the intervals forming a metre or measure. 2. The emphasis with which particular parts of a verse are pro- nounced, is called the Arsis, and the corresponding weaker tone with which the other parts are pronounced, the Thesis. The former implies an elevation of the voice with an accompanying stress ( 29. 1.), the latter, a depression of the voice. The terms Arsis and Thesis are also trans- ferred to the particular syllable or syllables on which they rest, and hence the syllable on which the emphasis falls is called the Arsis. The Arsis is often called the metrical ictus, or merely the ictus. 3. The Arsis is naturally on the long syllable of a foot ; consequently in the spondee ( ) and the tribrach ( www ), the place of the Arsis can be determined only by the kind of verse in which they are found. In every verse, the original foot determines the place of the Arsis in all the other feet which are substituted for it. Hence, as the second syllable of an iambus is long, and as the Arsis naturally falls on the long syllable, the spondee in iambic verse would have the Arsis on the second syllable, thus - - ; so also in anapaestic verse. But as the first syllable of the foot is long in the trochee and dactyl, the spondee in trochaic and dac- tylic verse takes the Arsis on the first syllable, thus - - . Again, as a short syllable is assumed as the unit in measuring time, and as in a long syllable the emphasis or ictus necessarily falls on the first of the two units composing this long, it is evident that, in iambic verse, the tribrach t 350. J VERSIFICATION. 575 would take the Arsis on the second syllable, thus - w ; and in trochaic verse on the first So where the dactyl takes the place of the spondee with the Arsis on the last syllable, the arsis of the dactyl is on the first short, thus - ; but where the anapaest stands for the spondee (-' -), its Arsis is on the first short, thus ~ w - . $ 350. Metrical Feet. 1. The portions into which every verse is divided, are called feet. The feet are composed of a certain number of syllables, either all long, all short, or long and short together. A short syllable is assumed as the unit in measuring time, every short syllable being one mora or time, and every long one two morae. The feet used in poetry may be divided, according to the number of syllables, into four of two syllables, eight of three, and sixteen of four syllables. The dissyllabic feet are four : w w Pyrrhich l (TVTTOV) Spondee (TVTTTO)) w Iamb (TVTTWI/) v Trochee (TVTTTC) 1 DERIVATION OF NAMES OF FEET. Pyrrhich. This was so called from the celebrated war-dance (TTU^XTJ), in which it was used, as being rapid and energetic. Iamb. From ItiirTu, to abuse; because Archilochus the inventor used it in violent invectives. Trochee. From rpfx^t to run ; because of its running, saltatory style. Tribrach. Tpls j8poxk, because consisting of three short syllables. Spondee. So called, because it was used lv rats cnroi/SoTs, in sacred rites, from its slow, solemn sound. Dactyl. 'Airb rov ScucruAou; because it is, like the finger, composed of one long joint and two short ones. Ana- })aest. From di/airo/w, to strike back ; because the Ictus was contrary to that of the Dactyl. Amphibrach. 'AfiQl &paxvs; because the short syllables are on each side of the long one, (4/i^O Cretic. Because much used by the Cretans. Bacchlus. Used in the Dithyrambic Games in honor of Bacchus. Antibac- r/iiiis. The converse (iant) of the former. Proceleusmatic. From f \6uo-jua, the boatswain's call or command; because rapidly uttered. Pcieons. Because used in the Paeonic Hymns. Choriamb. Trochee or Choree -f- Iamb. An- tia/Kistus. 'Aj/Tto-irow, to draw to the opposite side ; because, being converse of the former, it appears to draw the Trochee to the other side of the Iamb. lu/iirits a majore, lonicus a minore. Feet much in use with the lonians ; a majore, when beginning with the long syllables ; a minore, when beginning with the short ones. Epitrite. Most probably from M and rpTros ; because, in addition to (M) the 3d syllable, it has a short one over. The Diiamb is an Iambic syzygy, admitting the Spondee in the first place. The Ditrochee is a Trochaic syzygy, admitting the Spondee in the second place. 516 VERSIFICATION. [$ 35Q. The trisyllabic are eight : ~ - Tribrach (CTVTTOV) Molossus - Anapaest - - - Dactyl (rvTrrere) w - w Amphibrach (CTT/JTOJ/) - * - Cretic w Bacchius w Palimbacchius The tetrasyllabic are sixteen : - Proceleusmatic Dispondee w - Diiamb _ _ - Ditrochee (rvTrrerwcrai/) w - Antispast _ _ Choriamb w " lonicus a minori w w lonicus a majori ~ ** -first Paeon w - - - second Paeon (ervrrrere) - v - third Paeon (CTCTVI//O) - - - - fourth Paeon w first Epitrite _^ second Epitrite (i di'dcrcreis, or in the Thesis of the third foot, thus, Kat TOTC Srj Sdpcnrjcre, \\ Kal rjvSa /xavTis d//,v/ HEM. 2. The three kinds of Caesura often occur together ; for example, after the syllable t\v of a&(i)v, there is the Caesura of the foot, of the rhythm, and of the verse. $352. Different kinds of Verse. 1. A verse is often named from its predominant foot. Thus Dactylic verse is so called, because the dactyl is the predominant foot, and Iambic verse, because the iamb is the predominant foot ; so Trochaic, Anapaestic, etc. Verses are also named from their inventors, as the Sapphic, from Sappho, Alcaic, from Alcaeus, etc. ; likewise from the kind of composi- tion in which they are used, as the Heroic, used in describing the achievements of heroes, also from the number of measures, as manometer, dimeter, trimeter, hexameter, etc. 2. A verse is called acatalectic, when it has its full number of feet or syllables, as trimeter iambics, -~-|--'~-.|-'^-. A verse is called catalectic, when one or two syllables are wanting to complete the verse, as the trimeter, w " |~ u | u w . In dactylic verse, if the last foot wants one syllable, the verses are called catalectic on two syllables, e. g. _'w^_ww_wj if two syllables are wanting, catalectic on one syllable, e. g. Jww_ww_. Verses in which the last dipody (a pair of feet) wants an entire foot, are called brachycatalectic, e. g. ^ w | w " w . Verses which have one or two syllables more than enough, are called hypercata- lectic, e. g. -'- 1 --' | ~ -'-. REMARK. When the regular rhythm of a verse is preceded by an unem- M 353 355.] VERSIFICATION. 579 phatic introductory syllable, such syllable is called an Anacrusis, an upward or back beat; when there are two such syllables, forming an introductory foot, they are called a Bate. The anacrusis and base belong to lyric verse. $353. View of the different kinds of Verse. The most usual kinds of verse are those which consist of the repeti- tion of the same foot Of these the most frequent are the Dactylic, Iam- bic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic. $ 354. Dactylic Verse. The fundamental foot in this verse is the dactyl, the place of which may be supplied by a spondee. $ 355. Hexameter. The Hexameter was employed by the Greeks at an early period, and is the metre of Epic or Heroic and Pastoral poetry. The Hexameter consists of six feet ; the fundamental foot is the dac- tyl, the verse being formed by five repetitions of the dactyl with a dis- syllabic catalectus. The sixth foot is usually called a spondee ; but when the last syllable is short, it may be considered a trochee. In each of the first four feet, a spondee may take the place of the dac- tyl. The fifth foot is regularly a dactyl ; but sometimes it is a spondee, and the line is then called a spondaic line, as Ov yap cyui TpuW IVZK yX-vSov ai^/Ar/rawv. - --I --I - --I- r: I" I-- The principal Caesura in Hexameter verse occurs after the Arsis or in the Thesis of the third foot, and is called the Penthemim ; sometimes also a Caesura occurs after the Arsis of the fourth part, which is called the Hephthemim. This Caesura in the fourth foot is commonly preceded by one in the second foot, which is called the Triemim. The Caesura oc- curring at the end of the fourth foot is called the Bucolic Caesura, from its use in pastoral poetry 'AAA' 6 fjiev At-S'ioira? || /xercKta-^e nyXo^' eoVra? AvSpa [j,oi ew7T, Moucra, j | iroXvrpOTrov 05 paXa TroAAa 'Hyc/xoVajv, |j OOTIS 01 aprjv \\ erapourtv d Mi/xva&iv Trapa inrjvarl Kopcovunv, || ov ol 580 VERSIFICATION. [$$ 356, 357. The beauty of Hexameter verse is promoted by varying the feet by an interchange of dactyls and spondees, and by introducing these in dif- ferent places in different verses. For the same reason it is desirable that the Caesuras should occur in different places in different lines. $ 356. Pentameter. This verse is divided into two parts, each of which consists of two dactyls and a catalectic syllable, thus, OVK eeovr van. Spondees may take the place of the dactyls in the first half, but not in the second, because the numbers at their conclusion should run more freely, instead of being retarded by the slow movement of the spondees. The long syllable at the end of the second half can be short. The Caesura is here the same as in the Hexameter, except that there must be a division, by the ending of the word, in the middle of the verse. When the word, however, has more than two syllables, Elision may take place. This kind of verse is commonly found only in connection with Hex- ameter, a Hexameter and Pentameter following each other alternately. A poem composed of these two measures is called Elegiac, being at first devoted to plaintive melodies. "AprL fjif yevo/xevov coas /3perj t 'IKTTJPLOLS KXaSowtv e^ecrre/A/xei/oi; "AAAcov d/coveiv, avros w8' eX^ / r r f w_ w_ _ The tragedians admit a dactyl only in the first and third foot ; they ad- mit an anapaest chiefly in the first foot, but in proper names, in any foot except the last. MeveXcos 'EXeiryv 6 Se KXvrai/AV^o-rpag Xe^os, IIoTa/xaiv re 77-7770,1', -TTOvrttov re OVK ai$jiov aXXoos dXX' \ 1 See Mercier. tf 369, 370.] VERSIFICATION. 585 The most frequent Caesura here is in the third foot (Penthemim). This Caesura, however, is often neglected, others being used, or some- times, none. *E^-5pa>v oSo>pa 1 1 oVopa KOVK onyo-i/xa. The Caesura is often found in the middle of the fourth foot (Hepthe- mim). 'ETTCI TraTYjp ovros 0-05, || ov ^pvyvet? act. The Caesura at the end of the third foot is less frequent $ 369. Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic. The iambic tetrameter is very much used by the comedians. It con- sists of seven feet and a syllable. The Caesura is usually at the end of the fourth foot, but is sometimes omitted. The scheme is nearly the same as the trimeter iambic. The anapaest occurs in the seventh foot only in case of a proper name. Ov r)cri xprjvai TOUS vovs 1 1 cwrKai/ eyob 8e ^>7//xt, --' h- II--I--II--I--II--I-- The iambic tetrameter acatalectic is but little used by the Greek poets. $ 370. Anapaestic Verse. 1. The anapaest is the predominant foot in this verse. But by uniting the two short syllables in one long, the spondee may be substituted for the anapaest Again, the second long syllable of the spondee may be resolved into two short syllables, and hence a dactyl take the place of a spondee. 2. In Anapaestic verse the most usual system is the dimeter, consist- ing of a greater or less number of perfect dipodies, followed by a pair of dipodies, the second of which is catalectic. This catalectic dime- ter, consisting of three feet and a syllable, is called paroemiac (Trapot- ju'ai) from its use in proverbs. The anapaestic verse is, therefore, al- ways terminated by a catalectic dipody, and also by a long syllable ; i. e. if the final syllable is not long by itself, it is made long by its position 586 VERSIFICATION. 371373. with respect to the next line, the scanning being continuous, and an an- apaestic series being constructed as if there were but one verse. The following is the scheme for an anapaestic tetrameter catalectic. REMARK. An anapaest does not follow a dactyl in the same dipody ; gen- erally a dactyl does not follow an anapaest or spondee in the same dipody. The third foot of the paroemiac is usually an anapaest ; but a spondee is some- times found. The dactyl does not occur in the sixth and seventh feet. The Anapaestic metre was the favorite one for martial music. 371. Anapaestic Manometer Acatalectic. The anapaestic monometer acatalectic consists of two feet. r-^l-^ 372. Anapaestic Dimeter Acatalectic. The anapaestic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet. The legiti- mate Caesura occurs after the second Arsis, at the end of the second foot. But the Caesura is often found after the short syllable which follows the Arsis. | [ ov Kara/3 vets 6 77-7787/0^5, ITrepvycov Iperfiolo-LV j | e $ 373. Anapaestic Dimeter Catalectic. The anapaestic dimeter catalectic (paroemiac) consists of three feet and a syllable, and has no Caesura, the Caesura not being used in the paroemaic. EtXero xwpas copevW Ata TOV aw 7rpo>/crov o * 37-1.1 ABBREVIATl li 587 $374. Anapaestic Tetrame* "fc*^ The anapaestic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a sylla- ble, being formed by adding the anapaestic dimeter catalytic (paroemiac) to the anapaestic dimeter acatalectic. This verse is also called Aria- tophanic, from its use by Aristophanes, though not invented by him. The spondaic paroemiac, which sometimes occurs in the regular system, is not admissible in the tetrameter. The Caesura is at the end of the fourth foot, sometimes, though rarely, after the short syllable immediately following. There is generally also an incisure at the end of the second foot. Ilpoepei TIS act TWV 6pvi$u>v \ \ /^.aKreuo/oteva) Trept TOV TT\OV ; Ilai? 8* vyituiv Saxrouo-' avrots. || ovvav Trapa TOUTI Tail' apyvpiW ovrot yap wrcurt. 1 1 \eyoucn 8c rot Ta8e Anapaestic tetrameter acatalectic does not seem to have been used by the Greek poets. APPENDIX B. ABBKEVIATIONS. 1. For the convenience of those who may wish to read some of the earlier editions of the Greek writers, the following table, containing old forms of some of the letters, and also abbreviations of certain words or parts of words, is subjoined. 2. No. I. contains certain single letters or elements, which are of con- stant occurrence in the compound characters, and are found nowhere else. No. II. contains characters, the elements of which would not at once be obvious, and for this reason alone they are not placed alphabetically in columns III VI. Indeed, the characters in 'Nos. I. and H might all have been arranged alphabetically in columns III VI. The characters in columns III VI. are arranged alphabetically ; the initial letter of these characters, by the aid of those in No. I, will be readily known. 1 1 See Robinson's Buttmann, p. 466. 588 TABLE OP ABBREVIATIONS. I. 7\ r il c P k p \r & Q aydesxvvy o II. C j$ v #4 >. , ""> I ^ oy yap yap t A r)v ov ico v 06 III. IV. V. VI. afo "V >f ^ > T 5 ! fJ& -- > aw TO /> > i aflT* O^TOff n -~ v ^"1"> { JLL *r l\S r inl eo *r nf pl 'Tf no Kara oa ^j r Of U.CCTCQV yo ' ^ % -*i GCO I. INDEX OF SUBJECTS. A N. B. The figures refer to sections. R. is used for remark. Abbreviations, Appendix B. p. 588. Ablative expressed by Dat. 285, 1. Absolute, Case Absolute, see Cases. Abrogation of clauses by aUa 322, 6. Abstracts 39, in PL 243, 3, (3). Absorption of Diphth. in Crasis, 10, 4,5. Acatalectic verse 352, 2. Accentuation 29 ; change and re- moval of the accent by Inflec., Compos, and Contract 30 ; in connected discourse (Grave in- stead of the Acute), in Crasis, Elision, Anastrophe 31. Accent of first Dec. 45 ; second Dec. 49 ; third Dec. 65 ; adjectives and participles 75 ; words ending in iiy, tla, v 76, II ; w?, cuv 78. R. 7, and 29, R. 5 ; wv, ov 78, R, 9, and 65, 5 ; ij$, eg 78, R. 11 ; verb 118. Accusative 276 sq. ; local relation, limit, aim 277 ; of the object pro- duced with a verb of the same stem or one of a cognate signifi- cation (/wa/Tjv fiaxtafrai, ; $}v fiiov) 278, 1 and 2; with verbs denot- ing to shine, to flow, etc. 278, 3 ; object, design 278, 4; manner 278, R. 3 ; of the object on whi.-h the action is performed or the ,50 suffering object 279 ; with verbs signifying to profit, to hurt, etc. 279, 1 ; of doing good or evil to anyone, etc. 279, 2; to persevere, to wait for, etc. 279, 3 ; to turn back, flee from, etc. 279, R. 3 ; to conceal, to be concealed, to swear, and with R- 4 Pulvuv, nhtv, etc., which denote motion, etc., with verbs of sacrificing or dancing in honor of any one 279, R. 5 ; denoting an affection of the mind 279, 5 ; of space, time, quantity 279, R. 8; (xaAos T o/u/uara, alyti rrjv xfqpaA^V) 279, 7 ; double accusative : cptJiw cfiUuv at, etc. 280, 1 ; xa/Ur, xaxa TTOiai, kiyw ve 280, 2 ; with verbs of beseeching, asking, teach- ing, reminding, dividing, depriv- ing, concealing, clothing and un- clothing, surrounding, etc. 280, 3 ; with verbs of appointing, choosing, educating, naming, etc. 280, 4 ; in the o^7]|U xafr' oJlov x. /uf'po? 266, R. 4 ; Ace. in adverbial expressions, e. g. pa- XQOV xkatsiv, pi'/d zalgtir 278, R. 1 ; XUQ'VI dwysdv, TOUIO, therefore, 278, R. 2 ; wvxov TO* 590 INDEX OF SUBJECTS. , dlxyv, ofjioia 278, R. 3 ; !' ; ui))rr t v, etc ; 7ioAA, sqepe, o/U/ov, etc. 279, R. 8 ; ev(jo$, i'j//oc, TwAAtt, etc. 279, R. 10 ; with Pass, verbs 281 ; with verbal Adjectives in ^lo$ 284, R. 7. Accusative with Inf. 307 ; instead of Norn, with Inf. 307, R.4 ; instead of Gen. or Dat with Inf. 307, R. 2 ; as a subject after Af/fTtu, do- xft, etc. 307, R. 5 ; with the Art. see Inf. ; with exclamations 308, R. 2 ; in the subordinate clauses of the oratio obliqua 345, 6. Accusative with the Part. 310, 2 ; absolute 312, 5 ; with w? 312, 6 ; Ace. of Part, instead of another Case 313, 1. Active verbs 102, 248, 249. Comp. Transitive ; with the meaning to cause to do 249, R. 3. Acute accent 29, 4 (a). Addition of consonants 24. Adjective (and Part.) 74 sq. ; Dial. 215 ; Accent 75 ; of three end- ings 76, 77 ; of two endings 78, 79 ; of one ending 80 ; Com- parison of 81 ; used as a Subs. 263, a ; Attributive 264 ; as Subs, with the Gen. (ij iroXiq TT)? yr t q instead of TO no\v trig /ijc) 264, R. 5 ; instead of the Adv. 264, 3. Adjectives Verbal, see Verbal Ad- jectives. Adjectives Numeral 96, 2. Adjective Substantive Clause 331, R.4. Adjective pronoun used as a Subs. 263, a. Adjective clauses 331 ; several con- nected together 334, 1 ; inter- changed with other subordinate clauses 334, 2. Adverb 100 ; formation 101 ; com- parison 85 ; expressed by an ad- jective 264, 3 ; as expressing an objective relation 314 sq. ; used as adjectives 262, d ; as substan- tives (ol vvv) 263, c ; in a preg- nant sense (o;iot yT,c fa^tr, etc.) 300, R. 7; (o extt&tv ntifpo? diiyo i'jSfi, instead of o ml n.) 300 R. 8 ; adverbs of place at- tracted 332, R. 7 ; inverse at- traction of Adv. of place 332 R. 13. Adverbial correlatives 94, 3. Adverbial clauses 335 sq. ; of place 336 ; time 337 ; cause 338 ; con- dition 339 ; concession 340, 7 ; consequence or effect 341 ; way and manner 342 ; quantity with caw, oaov 343. Adversative coordinate clauses ex- pressed by 5, AAu, etc. 322 ; negative adversative coordinate clauses 321, 2. Agreement 240 sq. ; of the Attrib. Adj. 264, 1 ; of the Rel. Pron. in Gend. and Numb. 332 ; in Case 332, 6. Alphabet, history of, 2 b . Anacoluthon 347, 5 ; in the Part, construction 313, 1, (a). Anacrusis 352. R. Anapaestic dimeter acatalectic 372. Anapaestic dimeter catalectic 373. Anapaestic monometer acatalectic 371. Anapaestic tetrameter acatalectic 374. Anapaestic verse 370. Anastrophe 31, IV. Anomalous substantives third Dec. 67 sq. ; Dial. 214 ; verbs 157 sq. Answer YES or NO 344, 7. Aorist 103 ; Aor. Pass, with cr 131 ; first Aor. Act. without a 154, 7 ; second Aor. with a 154, 8; sec- ond Aor. Act. and Mid. accord- ing to analogy of verbs in pi 191 sq. ; Aor. of some verbs with both a Mid. and Pass, from 197, INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 591 R. 1 ; Aor. of some Mid. verbs, whose Fut. has a Pass, from 197, R. 3 ; second Aor. Act. with In- trans. meaning and first Aor. Act with Trans, meaning 141,4. Syntax 256 ; iterative meaning 256, 4, (b) ; in comparisons 256, 4, (c) ; instead of the Pres. 256, 4, (d) ; Aor. with il ovv ov 256, 4, (e) ; instead of the Fut. 256, 4, (f) ; to denote the com- ing into a condition 256, 4 (g) ; signification of the Aor. Subj., Opt, Imp., Inf. and Part. 257. Aorist, first and second Mid. always reflexive (or Intrans.) 251, 3 ; Aor. Subj. in subordinate clauses instead of the Fut. Perf. as used in Lat 255, R. 9. Aphaeresis 14, 5. Apodosis 339, 1. Apocope 207, 7. Aposiopesis 340, 2, (b). Apostrophe 13, R. 1. Apposition 266 ; in Gen. with Poss. Pron. (e>o$ rov a&Uov {Hog) 266, 2 ; Distrib. or Partitive apposi- tion 266, 3. Arsis and Thesis 349, 2 ; place of 349, 3. Article 91 ; 244 sq. ; demons, and rel- ative 247 ; as proper article 244 ; with common nouns 244, 2 5 ; with abstracts, nouns of material, proper names 244, 6 and 7 ; with the Adjective and Part, used as substantives 244, 8, 9 ; with ad- verbs of time and place, used as adjectives 244, 10 ; with pro- nouns and numerals 246 ; (T tr,q 7IOACW, 01 TISQl IIVU, 01 VVV av&QMnoi) 244, 10. 263 ; with every word or part of speech 244, 11 ; position 245 ; with TI, oAo? 246, 5 ; with cardinal num- bers 246, 9. Article omitted with common nouns 244, R. 3 ; with abstracts 244, R. 4 ; with proper names 244,7; with Adj. and participles 244, R. 8 ; with demonstrative pronouns 246, R. 1. Article with the subject and predi- cate 244, R. 1. Article in apposition 244, R. 6. Article repeated 245, 2. Article in place of the Poss. pro- noun (o 7iT7j instead of tyig jr.) 244, 4. Asper, see Spiritus. Aspirate before another aspirate changed to a smooth 17, 4 ; 21, 3. Aspirates 5, (a). Asyndeton 325. Atonies 32. Attic second Dec. 48 ; Attic Redup. see Redup. Attraction of Gend. 240, 3 ; Numb. 241, 6; with Prep, and Adv. 300, 4, comp. 300, 3 ; with the Inf. 307, 4. 308, 2; with otgjf, 341,3; with the Part. 310, 2; of Modes 327 b ; of the relative 332, 6 ; of oto?, o rolvvv) 324, 3. Copula ilvat 238, R. 6. Copulative coordinate sentences 321. Coronis 10, R. 1. Correlative pronouns and adverbs 94. Crasis 10 sq.; in the Dialects 206 ; in relation to the accent 31, II. Customary, wont, 256, 4 (b). Dative 282 sq. Dative local (where f) 283, 1 ; () avjolg rolg 'innoig 283, 2. (/5) ffTQona), atoAw, 7rA/'#, vuval, etc. 285, R. 2 ; of time (when ?) rqhr) fi^tya ', of the condition under which anything happens, 283, 3. Dative as a personal object 284 ; in a local relation (whither) with verbs of motion (v.vi%nv xuQuq OVQUVM) 284, R. 1 ; Dat. of com- munion 284, 3 ; with verbs ex- pressing mutual intercourse, as- sociating with, participation 284, 3, (1) ; with verbs of contend- ing, approaching, yielding ; with INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 593 the adjectives and adverbs, nit)- Declension of the substantive 41, 3 ; first Dec. 42 44 ; quantity and accent 45 ; Dialects 211 ; second Dec. 46 18 ; accent 4!> der 50 ; Dialects 212 ; third Dec. 5169 ; quantity 64 ; accent 65 ; gender 66 ; Dialects 213 ; anoma- lous nouns 67 sq. 214; defective nouns 69. 214, R. 2. Declension of adjectives and partici- ples 74 79, see adjectives. Declension of pronouns 87 sq. Declension of numerals 99, 5. Defectives of the third Dec. 69, 73, 2. 214, R. 2. Demonstrative pronouns, see Pro- nouns. Denominative verbs 232, 1. Deponents 102, 3 ; Passive Depo- nents 197, Syn. 252. Derivation of words 232 sq., of ten- ses 128. Derivatives 231, 2, 4, (b). Desiderative verbs 232, Rem. 3. Diaeresis 4, R. 6 ; in the Dialects 205, 6 ; metrical diaeresis 351 R. Dialects page 13 ; 202 sq. Diastole 37, 2. Digamma 5, 2, (a) ; 25, 2 ; 200. Dimeter 360. Diminutives 233, 2, (c). Dipody 350, 4. Diphthongs 4, 3. Disjunctive coordinate sentences 323. Distributive apposition 266, 3. Division of syllables 36. Double consonants 5, 4. Doubling of consonants 208, 4. Dual number 41 ; 106 ; with a PI. verb 241, 5 ; interchanged with the PI. 241, R. 8 ; Dual verb with a PI. Subj. 241, R. 9 ; Dual of the Fern, with the Masc. (TOV- TW T rt'xva) 241, R. 10, (b). 284, 3, (2) ; with verbs of com- manding, entreating, counselling, inciting, following, serving, obey- ing, accompanying, trusting, with the adjectives and adverbs, xo- lov&og, diddo%o<;, cj-iys, etc. 284, 3, (3) ; with expressions of like- ness and unlikeness 284, 3, (4) ; with expressions denoting to be becoming, suitable, pleasing 284, 3, (5) ; of agreeing with, blam- ing, reproaching, being angry with, envying 284, 3, (6); of helping, averting and being use- ful 284, 3, (7); with all verbs and adjectives when the action takes place for the honor, advan- tage or disadvantage, etc. of a person (Dativus commodi et in- commodi) 284, 3, R. 4 ; with verbs of observing, finding, meet- ing with something in a person 284, 3, (8); Dat of possession with fivai and yiyvsa&ai. 284, 3, (9); instead of Lat Dat (ali- quid mini est honori) 284, 3, (9) ; when an action takes place in reference to a person 284, 3, (10) ; ethical Dat 284, 3, (10), (d) ; with Pass, verbs 284, 3, (11); with verbal adjectives in TO? and Tsoq instead of vno with the Gen. 284, 3, (12). Dative of the thing, or instrumental Dat 285 ; of the ground or rea- son with verbs denoting the state of the feelings 285, 1, (1); of the means and instrument with /oijf7#Mi and vout^nv 285, 1, (2) ; manner, material, standard, rule and measure 285, 1, (3). Dative with the Inf. 307, 2, (b). Dative with the Part 310, 2. Dative of participle instead of anoth- er Case 313, 1, (a). 50* Elision 13 sq. ; in the Dialects 206, 594 INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 5 ; elision in respect to the ac- cent 31, m. Ellipsis 346, 1 ; of the subject and especially of the Subs. 238, 5 ; of the copula iircu 238, R. 6 and 7 ; of the Subs, to which the attribute belongs 263 ; of uv 260, R. 3. 6, 7 ; of the Protasis and Apodosis 340. Emphasis in sentences 321, 3. Enclitics 33 sq. ; accented 35. Enhansive sentences expressed by y.al, ov povov, M xat 321, 3. Epicenes 40, R. 5. Essential words 238, 1. 38, 4. Etymology 13. Euphonic Prothesis 16, 10. Expulsion of consonants 25. V Factitive verbs 232, R. 1 and (c). Feminine PI. with Sing, verb 241, R. 6 ; with the neuter (i ^UT- /SoAwt Av/ri^or) 241, 2 ; with a Neut. (TO yvraiy.iov am xAj) 241, 2, sq. ; Fern. Dual with the Masc. (IOVTM T T^vtt) 241, R. 10. Final clauses 330. Frequentative verbs 232, R. 2. Formal words 238, 1. 38, 3. Formation of words 231 sq. Future tense 103 ; Attic 117 ; Doric in (Tot'/uat 154, 3; without a 154, 4 ; in oO/uat with mute verbs 154, 5 ; Mid. instead of Act. (axovw, axortroLiui instead of uxovfffa) 154*, 1, and 198 ; Synt. 255, 3, 4 ; Fut. Inf. after verbs of think- ing, hoping, etc. 257, R. 2. Future Perf. 103 ; in Act. form 154, 6 ; Synt. 255, 5 ; instead of the simple Fut. 255, R. 8 ; the Lat. Fut. Perf., how ex- pressed in Greek 255, R. 9. Gender of the substantive 40 ; first Dec. 42 ; second Dec. 50 ; third Dec. 66- of Adj. and Part. 74. Gender of the adjective, etc. in the const, xazw vvvfatv 241 ; in gen- eral statements 241, 2 ; with sev- eral subjects 242 ; of the Superl. with Part. Gen. 241, 7 ; of the relative pronoun 332. Genitive, attributive 265 ; used el- liptically 263, (b). Genitive in the objective relation 270. Genitive, separative, with verbs of removal, separation, loosing, de- sisting, freeing, missing, depriv- ing, differing from 271, 2, 3 ; with verbs of beginning 271, 4. Genitive of origin and author, with verbs of originating, being pro- duced from 273, 1. ^Genitive, possessive, (a) with dvai,, ylyvsa&cu, (/?) I'd tog oixtlog, etc. 273, 2. Genitive of quality 273, 2, (c). Genitive, partitive, with iivtu and ylyvev&ui; n&ivai, Tioitia&ai, t fjy&r&at 27.3, 3, (a) ; in attribu- tive relation with substantives, substantive adjectives, substan- tive pronouns, numerals and ad- verbs 273, R. 4 ; with words , which express the idea of parti- cipation, sharing in ; with verbs signifying to touch, be in connec- tion with ; of acquiring and at- taining ; of physical and intellec- tual contact, of laying hold of; of hasty motion, striving after an object 273,3, (b), and R. 7; with verbs of entreating and suppli- cating 273, R. 6 ; with the ad- verbs ei&v, i#v, ni"/Qi ; with verbs of meeting and approach- ing 273, 3, R. 9 ; Part. Gen. in poetry 273, R. 7. Genitive of place 273, 4, (a). Genitive of time 273, 4, (b). Genitive of material 273, 5 ; with verbs of making, forming 273, 5, INDEX OF SUBJECTS. (a) ; of fulness and want (b) ; of eating, drinking, tasting, enjoy- in.ir. h.iving tin- rnjoyinent of something intellectually, etc. (e) ; of smelling (d) ; of remember- ing and forgetting ; with expres- sions of being acquainted and unacquainted with, of experience and inexperience, ability, dex- terity, of making trial of, with verbal adjectives in -txog, etc. ex- pressing the idea of dexterity (e) ; with words of sensation and perception (uxorfiv, uxouuayaiy aiu&aviff&ui, offcpgaivtff&cti (f) and R. 19.; with verbs of hear- ing 273, R. 18; with verbs of seeing, hearing, experiencing, learning, considering, knowing, judging, examining, saying, ad- miring, praising, blaming 273, R. 20. Genitive of cause 274 ; with verbs denoting a desire, longing for (a) ; care, concern for (b) ; pain, grief, pity, with adjectives having a similar meaning, particularly in exclamations, with interjections (c) ; with verbs expressing an- ger, indignation, envy, admira- tion, praise and blame (d), (e), (f ) ; with verbs expressing re- quital, revenge, accusing and condemning 274, 2; TOU with the Inf. 274, 3, (a) ; with the adverbs u, xAw$, piloting, we, TrtiJj, O7iw, oi'rtuf, etc. connected with t^etv, IIXEIV, thai, 274, 3, (b). Genitive with verbs of ruling, supe- riority, and inferiority, subjuga- tion, with the adjectives f/x^wrrjj, ttxyr/J 275, 1. Geniiive after the comparative 275, 2 ; use of the Gen. and ?j with the comparative 323, 2 sq. Genitive of price 275, 3. Genitive with substantives and ad- jectives 275, R. 5. Genitive, double, governed Ly one substantive 275, R. 7. Genitive with the Inf. 307, 2, (a). Genitive with the Tart, 310, 2. Genitive absolute 312, 3 ; when the subject is the same as that of the predicate 313, 2; with os after tidtvui, votlv, etc. 312, R. 12. Gentile nouns 233, 2, (a). Grave accent 29 ; instead of the acute 31. Helerodites 59, R. 2; 67, (b); 71. Heterogeneous substantives 70, B. Hexameter verse 355. Hepthemim 355. Hiatus 8 ; 206, 7. Historical tenses 103, 2 ; 254, 3. Hypercalalectic verse 352, 2. Hypodiastole 37. Hypothetical sentences, see d. Iambic dimeter 367. Iambic monometer 366. Iambic trimeter acatalectic 368. Iambic tetrameter catalectic 369. Iambic verse 365. Imitative verbs 232, 1, (a). Imperative 104, 111 ; Synt 258, 1, (c) ; use of the Imp. 259, 4 ; third Pers. Sing. Perf. Mid. or Pass. 255, R. 6. Imperfect tense 103; analogous to verbs in pi, 196 ; Synt 256, 2 4. Impersonal construction, see per- sonal construction. Impersonal verbs 238, R. 2. Inclination, see Enclitic. Indeclinable nouns 73, 1. Indicative 104, 1 ; Synt 258, (a) ; Fut. with uv 260, 2, (1) ; Impf., Plup. and Aor. with iiv 260, 2, (2) ; difference between the Irnpf., Aor. and Plup. 256 ; Fut instead of the Imp. 255, 4 ; 696 INDEX OF SUBJECTS. with ov, e.g. ov nawn As'/wr ib.; Ind. of the Hist, tenses with words expressing a wish 259, R. 6; Ind. in subordinate sentences, see the separate conjunctions; Ind. in oral, obliq. 344, 6. Indirect form of discourse, see ob- lique form. Infinitive 105, (a) ; Synt., the Pres. and Aor. Inf. 257, 1, (c) ; Aor. Pres. and Fut. after verbs of thinking, etc. 257, R. 2 ; with civ 260, 2, (5). Infinitive 305 ; without the Art. 306 ; with verbs of willing and the contrary, etc. 306, 1. (a) ; with verbs of thinking, supposing, saying 306, 1, (b) ; after expres- sions denoting ability, cause, power, capacity 306, 1, (c) ; with adjectives and substantives, with ilvai, ntcpvxivcu and ylyrtff&cu with a substantive, after avfjpai- vst, dtl, XQ 1 ! and the like, after substantives, adjectives, demon- strative pronouns, after verbs of giving, sending, etc. 306, 1, (d). Infinitive, or Ace. with Inf. differ- ent from Part. 311 ; Inf., or Ace. with Inf., different from ort, w$, that 329, R. 5; in forms express- ing command or wish 306, R. 11 ; in forms expressing indignation 306, R. 11, c ; with at ydg, el'tfe 306, R. 11, (d). Infinitive with Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. 307. Infinitive with the Art. instead of the Inf. without the Art. 308, R. 1. ; in Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. 308, 2; in exclamations and questions implying indignation 308, R. 2 ; as an adverbial ex- pression (TO vvv tlvai and the like) 308, R. 3. Infinitive Act. instead of the Pass. 306, R. 10. Inflection 38. /n/?ecft'on-endings of the verb 109 sq. ; Remarks on 116 ; of verbs in pi 171, 172. Intensive verbs 232, R. 2. Interchange of vowels 201 ; conso- nants 202 204. Interpunction-marks 3 7. Interrogative pronouns, see Pro- nouns. Interrogative sentences 344 ; modes in 344, 6 ; connection with a relative sentence 344, R. 3 ; change of a subordinate sentence into a direct interrogative sen- tence (orav rl noiycrwcri) 344, R. 6 ; blending of two or more interrogative sentences into one (rig ilvog v.l'iiog fort) 344, R. 7. Intransitive verbs 248, (1) (/5) ; as Trans, with the Ace. 249, R. 2 ; instead of the Pass. 249, 3 ; in the Pass. 251, 4, and R. 6. Interrogative sentence with the Art. 344, R. 3. Inversion 348, 5. Iota subscript 4, R. 4. Iterative form in crxov 221. Lengthening of the vowels 16, 3. 207. Lenis Spiritus 6. Letters, sounds of 2 a . Limitation of sentences 322, 1 5. Litotes 239, R. 3. Local substantives 233, 2, (d). Masculine PI. with Sing, verb 241, R. 6 ; connected with the Neut (ol noUol dtivov) 241, 2 ; Masc. with a Neut. (iteiQixuiov fort xa- Adc) 241, 1 ; Masc. PL with Fern. 241, R. 11. Metaplasm 67, (c). 72. 214, R. 1. Metathesis of the liquids 22. 208, 3 ; of the aspirates 21, 3 ; verb 156. Middle form 102 ; Synt. 248, (2) ; INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 597 with reflex, sense 250 ; with the meaning to cause to do 250, R. 2; when an action is perforated to the advantage or disadvantage of tin- sulyi'i-t 250, K. 3 ; with a rehYx Trou. 250, R. 3; with a subjective meaning, figuratively 250, R. 4 ; with a pass, sense 251. Modes 104 ; Synt. 258 sq. ; in subor- dinate clauses 327 1 ', 1 ; attraction of 327 b ; comp. the separate con- junctions, in Greek Index. Mode vowels 111; summary of 1 1 2 ; of verbs in jut 171; in the Dial. 220. Movable final consonants 15. Multiplicative* 96, 1, (d). Negatives, ou, pi] 318; accumula- tion of negatives 318, 6 ; appa- rent Pleonasm of 318, 69. Neuter of names of persons con- nected with Masc. or Fern. 241, 2, R. 3 ; PI. instead of the Sing, with verb, adjectives 241, 3 ; PI. of pronouns 243, 4 ; PI. with Sing. verb 241, 4. Nominal question 344, 2. Nominative with the change of the Act construction of the verb with the Gen. or Dat. into the Pass., e. g. niaTtvo^ai 251, 4. Nominative Case 269 ; with uvopd fini uoi,, ovoua t/w, with verbs of naming 269, R. 3 ; Nom. of an abstract instead of a Lat. Dat. (mihi est honor!) 269, R. 2 ; Nom. instead of the Voc. 269, 2 ; in axftua xatf rtionals 96, 1, (e). Protasis 339. Prothesis Euphonic 16, 10. 207, 8. Punctuation-marks 37. Quantity 27 sq. ; in Dialects 209 ; first Dec. 45, (a) ; third Dec. 64. Redundant nouns 70. Reduplication 108, 4. 123, 219 ; in sec. Aor. 219, 7 ; Att in Perf. and Plup. 124 ; second Aor. 124; R. 2; in compound words 125 sq. ; as strengthening of the stem 163. Reflexive verbs 102 ; Synt. 248, (2). Reflexive pronouns 88. Relation of the Attrib. Adj. 264, 2. Relative construction changed to the Demonstrative 334, 1. Relative pronoun Decl. 92; Synt 331 sq. ; instead of the demons. 331, R. 1 ; agreement of gender and number 332 ; Case (attrac- tion) 332, 6 ; attraction with olog, oaog, ijUxog 332, 7 ; inverse attraction 332, R. 11 ; with oi'dtig ogrig ov 332, R. 12 ; with ad- verbs of place 332, R. 13 ; at- traction in position 332, 8 ; rela- tive pronoun of an intermediate clause attracted 332, 9 ; construc- tion of the relative pronoun 333 ; rel. pron. changed to a demons, or pers. 334, 1 ; rel. pron. in- stead of a demonstrative 334, 3. Relative clause, see adjective clause. Reciprocal pronouns 89. Reciprocal verbs 248, R. 1. Resolution of contract verbs 222. Restriction of sentences 322, 1 5. Rhythm 349. Roots 231, 2. Scheme, see o^/xa in Greek Index. Sentences 238, 1. Sentences denoting effect or re- oUO INDEX OF SUBJECTS. suit with >, ovv, roivvv, etc. 324, 3. Sequence of tenses 327 a . Shortening of the vowels 16, 4. 207,4. Singular verb with Masc. or Fern. PL 241, R. 6 ; with Neut PI. 241, 4 ; with several common nouns in PL 242, R. 2. Singular of substantives 243, 1 ; changed to the PL 241, R. 12; Sing. Imp. e. g. tins in an ad- dress to several 241, R. 13. Spiritus Len. and Asp. 6. Stem of the verb 108, 1 ; pure and impure 138 ; strengthening the consonant and prolonging the stem- vowel 139. Stems 231, 4, (a). Strengthening of the vowels 16, 1 ; consonants 24 ; stem of impure verbs 139. Subject 238, 2 ; change of the ac- tive construct, into the Pass., e. g. ni(TTti'0[itti from niffTtvw iwl 251, 4 ; ellipses of 238, 5. Subjunctive Mode 104, II. Perf. and Pip. Mid. or Pass, without an auxiliary verb 154, 9 ; Subj. and Opt. Act. and Mid. of verbs in vut without auxiliary verb 176,5. Synt. 258, 1, (b). 259; Subj. Aor. instead of Fut. Perf. of Latin 255, R. 9. Subjunctive with av 260, 2, (3) ; (with and without av) instead of the Fut. Ind. 259, R. 4; Subj. hortative 259, 1 (a); delibera- tive 259, 1, (b). 260, 2, 3, (b) ; Subj. to den. indefinite frequen- cy (as often as) 327 b , 2, 333, 3 ; in comparisons 333, R. 2 ; with ^77 instead of the Imp. 259, 5 ; in subordinate clauses, see the sep- arate conjunctions ; in Or. obliq. 345, 5. Subordinate sentences 326 sq.; class- es 326, 3 ; characteristics 326, R. 4 ; subordinate sentences changed into direct interrogative senten- ces 344, R. 6. Substantive 39 sq. ; Gen. 40 ; Numb., Case and Dec. 41 ; Dec. I. 42 sq. ; Dec. U. 46 sq.; Dec. ILL 51 sq. Substantive 39 sq. ; number 242. Substantive instead of adjective 264, R. 3. Substantive clauses expressing design, aim, with w, onoaq, ?va, etc. 330. Substantive clauses with OIL, wg, that 329. Superlative 81 sq. Synt. 239 ; strength- ening and more exact definition of, 239, R. 2; Gend. with the Part. Gen 241, 7. Syllables, division of 36. Synizesis 12. Dialects 206, 4. Syncope 16, 8. 207, 6; in substan- tives 55, 2 ; in verbs 155. Syntax 238 sq. Tenses of the verb 103 ; of the sub- ordinate modes 257; derivation 128 ; formation of the secondary tenses, use of the same in con- nection with the primary 141 ; Tenses primary and Sec. 103, R. 141. Tenses, Syntax 254; sequence of in subordinate clauses 327 a . Tense-formation of verbs in w 127 ; pure verbs 129 ; mute 142 sq. ; liquid 149 ; verbs in fit, 173; in Dialects 223. Tense-characteristic, see character- istic. Tense-endings 110. Tense-stem 110, 2. Theme of the verb 138, 3. Thesis and Arsis 349. Time, difference between Gen. and Dat. of time, 273, R. 13. INDEX OP SUBJECTS. 601 Tmesis of Prepositions 300, R. 4. Transitive verbs 248, (a) () ; with Intrans. or Reflex, signif. (T^C'TIW instead of iQtnopoti) 249, 1,2; with the sense to cause to do 249, R.3. Transition from direct discourse to indirect and vice versa 345, R. 6. Transposition of the attributive adjective and Subs, (ol xgrjatol twv av&QUHHav instead of ol xQ*t~ orot av&Qunoi,) 264, R. 5. Triemim 355. Trochaic verse 361. Trochaic monometer 362. Trochaic dimeter 363. Trochaic tetrameter catalectic 364. Variable vowels 16, 6 ; in the stem of impure verbs 140 ; change of into 01 140, 4 ; of e into o 231, 6. Verb 102 sq. 219 sq. ; division of verbs in cu according to the char- acteristic 127 ; barytones 127, R.; pure verbs (and contract) 129 137; Perispomena 127, R; impure 127. 138 141 ; mute 127. 142148; liquid 127. 149 153 ; special peculiarities of verbs (pure and impure) 154; anomalous in CD 157 sq. ; in pi 168 sq. ; in w which in certain tenses are analogous to verbs in pi : sec- ond Aor. Act. and Mid. 1 9 1 sq. ; in Dialects 227; Perf. and Plup. 1 a3 195; in Dialects 228; Pres. and Impf. 196 ; verbs De- nom., Frequent., Imitat, Intens., Fact, Desid. 232. Verbs active, with Mid. Fut 198 ; those which have both an active and middle form for the Fut 193, R. Verb Act. Trans., Reflex., Recip., Pass., Intrans., Mid. 248251. Verb finitum and infinitum 105, R. Verbal adjectives in TO? and reog 234. 1, (i) ; PL instead of Sing. 241, 3 ; Construction 284, 3, (12). Verb characteristic 108, 5. Versification 349. Vowels 4; change 8 16 ; weaken- ing or attenuation of 16, 2 ; in- terchange in the Dialects 201; change in the Dialects 205 207. Weakening of vowels 16, 2. Zeugma 346, 3. 51 II. GREEK INDEX. ABBREVIATIONS. Adv. adverb ; adj. adjective ; Comp. compare ; comp. com- pared ; c. a. with the accusative ; c. d. with the dative ; c. g. with the genitive ; c. inf. with the infinitive ; c. part, with the participle ; coll. collective ; con. construction ; Dec. declension ; dec. declined ; euph. euphonic ; ins. instead of; int. intensive ; intr. intransitive; pers. personal; prep, preposition; priv. privative; R. remark; trans, transitive. A pure 43, 1, (a) ; a priv., coll., int. 236, R. 3, (b); o euph. 16, 10. ayc&6s comp. 84, 1. ayd\\t6s c. g. 273, 3, (b). oSi/ceo/ c. a. 279, 1 ; c. two ace. 280, 2; c. part, 3 10, a-nUv dec, 55, R. 2. 'Ab6ft c. inf. 306,1, (c). ait6\ov&os, -/, -cos, -^Tt- KOS c. d. 284, 3, (3). c. g. 273, R. 7. , audivisse, 255, R.I. aKovfiv c. g. and a. 273, 5, (f) and R. 19; to obey, c. g. and d. 273, R. 18; c. inf. and part. 311, 1. a/epoTTjy c. g. 275, 1. &KpaTos 82, I, (e). aitpoaffbai c. g. 273, 5, (f ) and R. 19. toytw c. d. 285, 1, (1). a\yeiv6s comp. 84. 4. eUe'|eif C. d. 284, 3, (7). aAjeus dec. 57, R. 2. &\is c. g. 273, 5, (b). oAiWo c. d. 289, R. ; with part. 312, R. 6; c. d. and part. 312, R. 5. afAapTdveiv C. g. -271, 2 j C. part. 310, 4, (g). aneifciv, -ftr&ai c. g. 275, 3; c. a. 279, 1. afJLfivwv 84, 1. 0)tteA6?j/ c. g. 274, 1 ; c. inf. 306, 1, (a). et/xt c. inf. ins. ecrrt C. a. et inf. 307, R. 6. c. g. 273, 3. (b). c. d. 284, 3, (7). tyQl prep. 295, 1, (2) ; o, GREEK INDEX. 603 d. in a pregnant signif. ins. c. a. 300, 3, (a). i C. g. 273, 5, (e). fivev c. g. 271, 3. ai/e'xf0"daj c. g. 275, 1. &Wx. n^s VJ T " 2 84, 3, (10) (b). Qtow c. inf. 306, 1, (a). airayoptvtii' (fv, KOKUS) C. a. 2 7 9, 2; c. inf. 306, 1, (a). ctTraiSei/Tos C. g. 273, 5, (e). airaiTew a two a. 280, 3. 07raAAaTT 5, (e). 271,2. u c. inf. 306, 1, (b). air\ovs t -77, -oDi/ dec. 77. Gs comp. 82, I, (b). av& prep. 288, 1 ; with pregnant sense ins. lv C. d. 300, 3, (c) ; (O.TT& with the art. ins. lv (ol airb rrjs ay op as 4, (a). OTT& eVK300, R. 2. " c. g. 273, R. 20. -oSi'Soo-dat c. g. 275, 3. oSiSpdffKfii' c. &. 379, 3. airoAaiW c. g. 273,5, (c). c. d. 284, 3, *Air6\\uv dec. 53, 4, 1, (a); 56, R. 1. airoirfipcuT&ai C. g. 273, 5, (g). oiroirpJ 300, R. 1. oTro^eti/ c. g. 273, 5, (b). diroo-TtpeTv c. g. 271, 2; Tivd Tl, TWOS Tl, TIVOS TWO. 280, 3, and R. 3. airooTiAjSeo/ c.g.273,R.16. airoffTpfcpeff&ai C. g. 279, R.3. a.Troq>alvfw c. part, and inf. 311, 11. aTToQtvyfiv c. a. 279, 3. a*pciru>s C. d. 284, 3, (5). airTfffdcu c. g. 273, .'5. (b). apa 324, 3. apa ins. apa 324, K :>. opo interrogative 344, 5, (b). apfaKfw Twd 279, 1 ; ap- fo-Kfff&ai c. d. 284. 3, (5); c. dat. of tin: in- strument 285, 1, (1). aptyewc. d. 284,3, (7). "ApTjs dec. 59, R. 2. apuTTos 84, 1. 'ApuTTodmrjs dec. 59, R. 2. apK(i(r&ai c. d. 285, 1, (1). ap/j.6TTftv c. d. 284, 3, (5). apcrdat c. inf. 306, l,(b). a,pvos 55, R. 3. ticularly 312, R. 3*. 6.px flv i t ^/' H > c - g- 271, 4 ; to rule, c. g. 275, 1. &pxfo(y) 25, 4, (c). &TTa and Q.TTO. 93. aS, airr^p 322, 7. OUT(*CO with part. 312., R.6, ain6s dec. 91 ; Dial. 207, 4, (c). auT(fe use 302, 4; 303, 3 ; with the art. 246, 3, 8. ainos in avrols tirirois, fa getfier with the horses etc. 283, 2, (a) ; 6 ourJs c. d. 284. 3, (4). avrov dec. 88 ; use 302, 2. a, e\iro/jLV(a 284, 3,10, (c) ; yiyverai and an abstract substantive with an iuf. 306, 1, (d). yiyvuffKfw c. g. 273, R. 20; ii TIVI 285, 1, (3); c. part. 310, 4, (a) ; c. inf. and part. 311, 4. yiyveffbai c. g. 274, 2. yvfj.v6s c. g. 271, 3. yw-i] dec. 68, 2. A euphon. 24, 2. Saep Voc. 53, 4, (1) (a). 8af315, 7. Saieo-frai c. two acc. 280, 3. Sdxpv and oattpvov 70 B. Saa-vs c. g. 273, 5, (b). Se 322, in a question R. 6. Sc suffix 235, 3 and R. 3 ; after a demons. 95, (c). SeSoi/ceVcu c. inf. 306, l,(a). Se? c. g. 273, 5, (b) ; c. acc. and dat. 279, R. 4 ; c. inf. 306, 1, (d) ; c. d. and acc. c. inf. 307, R.3. SeT ff' SITUS 330, R. 4. SeiKvvvai c. part. 310, 4, (b) ; c. part, and inf. 311, 11. 8e?j/a dec. 93, R. 2. Seiv6s c. inf. 306, 1 (c). Seto-ai c. a. 279, 5. Seurdeu c. g. 273, 5, (b) ; c. inf. 306, 1, (a). Senas c. g. 208, R. dec. 72, (a). :. 61, (a), c. a. 278, 3. ,g.275, (1). ;. 45, 6. :. a. 278. 2. c. g. 275, 2. . two ace. 280, 4 ; Tivl n 284, R, 4. 877 95, (b) ; 315, 1. 2. S^er315, 5. SfjAoi/ eft/at, Troieti/ with part. 310, 4, (b) ; 8>)\Jy dpi iroiiav n 310, R. 3. on 329, R. 4. STjAoCi/ c. g. and a. 273, R. 20; c. part. 310, 4, (b) ; c. inf. and part. 311, 12. Arifj.r]rr)p dec. 55, 2. ATj/ioo-^eVrjs dec. 59, R. 2. 8^7TOT 95, (b). S-hirov&ei' 315, 6. STJTO 315, 3. Sid Prep. 291. SiO 7Tp<* 300, R. 1. Stdyew c. part. 310, 4, (1). Siayiyveff&ai c. part. 310, Ml). Soxos, 8t- c. d. 284, 3, (3). 8ta8tS/j.7]y with ajs and gen. abs. 312, R. 12. SiaA.e'760-frcu c. d. 284, 3, (1). SiaAiTrc^ xp6v v 312, R. 3. Sia\\drTiv c. part. 310, 4, (f). StaAAoTTeiv, -dTTfff&at C. d.284,3, (1). g. 275, 3. . two acc. 280, 3. C. oircas C. ind. fut. 330, 6 ; c. ws and g. abs. 312, R. 12. Siairpdrrea-^ai C. inf. 306, 1, (c). 8taTeA.tV c. part. 310, 4, (b). Siapepeiv C. g. 271, 2. Sidfopos c. g.271, 3; c.d. 284, 3, (4). Sidcpuvos c. d. 284, 3, (4). 8taxp^o"<^at c. d. and acc. 285, 1, (2). v c. two acc. 280, 3; c. inf. 306, 1, (c). c. g. partit. 273, 3, (b) ; c. g. price, 275, 3. GREEK INDEX. 605 - 271,2. fav c. g. 274, 2; St- ../ 215, R. eryi'Ce*./ c. g. 273, R. 9 ; c. d. 284, 3, (2). tyyvs c. g. 273, R. 9 ; c. d. 284, 3, (2). tyroAe*? c. g. 274, 2 ; c.d. 284, 3, (6). is c. g. 275, 1. - 63 > R - 5 - *yA dec. 87; use, 302, 1. .:., (si). om s215. R. -. inf. :, 1, (a). ft ins. 77 aug. 122, 3. 6t ins. redup. 123, 3. ct U. Pers. ins. p 116, 11. e cons. 339. tl concessive 340, 7 ; in wishes 259,3, (b). a;i, whether 344, 5, (i). '74 259,3, (b). et S' 076 340, 3. el 5e ellipt., 340, 3 ; ct 8c ins. et 5e /x^ and et 8e ^77 ins. i Se 340, 4. ci oT 340, 7. eJ; K SCO lav. ei ytii7 iron. 324, 3, (a) ; e* 1*4 except 340, 5; ei ^ ft, nisi, si, ib. 6ta, etas, e efpyeu/, -adcu C .271,1. els (^f) 1'r. -,,. 21X), 2; in pregnant sense ins. iv c. d. 300, 3, (b); with the art. ins. eV 300,4, (b). ds, fjiia, V dec. 99, 5. el> with Superl. 239, R. 2. els&yeiv c. g. 274, 2. ei c. g. 273, 3, (b). faffp-hs c. d. 284, 3, (4). fv ins. rjcroj/ 220, 14. fr Prep. 289, 1 ; in Preg. sense ins. ds 300, 3, (a) ; c. g. 263, (b). & rots, cv rats o. Superl. (e.g. irparroi) 239, R. 2. ivavrlov, -ios c. g. and d. 273, R. 9 and 284, 3, (2). tvSrhs c. g. 273, 5, (b). * i/$o& w with the Art. ins. (TV /So^ei/ rpd- v c. g. 271, 3. toinevai c. d. 284, 3, (4) ; c. inf. 307, R. 7.; c. part. 310, R. 2 ; c. inf. and part. 311, (9). Ms ins. eV<*s, o-^302, R. 8. liraiveiv c. g. and a. 273, R. 20 ; Tivd TIVOS 274, 1. iv Tivd TI 278, 4. . d. 285.1, (1). C. g. 273, R. 7. c. g. 274, 2. dec. 213, 19. cVdV see STOW under frr*.' rapKfiv c. g. 273, 3, (b) ; c. d. 284, 3, (7). ret see Sre ; in interrog. and imp. clauses 341, R.4. [(b). C. g. 273, R. 7, see STOV under 671-6(577 sec ore. iVeiTct in a question 344, 5, (e). tVen-awithpart.312,R. 8. ^7reteVai c. g. 274, 2. eirfff&ai c. d. 284, 3, (3). fir-fjv see eVay. firi ins. eTretm 31, R. 3. M Prep. 296 ; c. dat. in Preg. sense ins. c. a. 300, 3, (a) ; c. g. and part. 312, R. 5. e7n$c{AAe(rai c. g.273,R.7. eVt'5os and gen. abs. 312, R. 12. eiv c. g. 275, 1. .g. 273, 5, (e). vov 312, R. 3. . d. 284, 3, (3). / c.inf.306,l,(a). iT-ifieiosC. inf. 306, 1, (c). iTip.avc. d. 284, 3, (6). TpeVejj/ c. inf. and part. 311, 15. tTpoTreueti/ c. g. 275, 1 : c. a. 279, 1. TKp&dvcas 8iaicei(r&cu C. g. 274, 1, (e). c.inf. 306, l,(a). c. g. 273, 3, (b). C. d. 284, 3, (3). v TWO. TI 278, 4. c.g.274, 1. ita\d, KO.KO. c. a. 280, 2. c. two acc. 280, 3. tj/ c.two acc. 280, 3. fprmovv c. gen. 271,2,3. tpr)Tveiv c. g. 271, 2: ipi&tr c. d. 284, 3, (2). fppwuevos comp. 82, 1. (e). Ipearav C. two acc. 280, 3. epoDTiKws ex*w C. g. 274, 1. s dec. 48. R. 1. tws construction 337. , 14. suffix 235, R. 3. Zeus dec. 68, 4. fr\ovv c. g. 274, 1 5 c. a. 279, 1. *:./ c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 70, at't IT tin- omi-sion of .'J. K.3 ; omit- \\ith TrAeof, tr\tiw, in cDiiiH-ftinii with the uiuiHTiil .'5J.'5. R. 4; with the Gen. after a comparative 323, K. :>. n ins. / in Plup. 116, 6. TJ union vowel 237, R. 1. ^ Kart{ or j) irpjy c. a. 323, 7. ^ Ssre c. inf. 341, 3, (a). 3 316, 2. ij/xV316. 2. ijirou316, 2. 17 with Sup. 343, R. 2. ^ interrogative 344, 5. 3 5'&'s331, R. 1. 7j7e?(7dcu c. g. 273, 3, (a) ; c. g. and d. 275, 1, and R. 1 ; c. two a. 280, 4 ; c. inf. 306, 1, (b). Jiyffj.oi>i>eti> c. g. and d. 275, 1, and R. 1. ^5e, and, 323, R. 2. c. d. 285. 1, (1); c. part. 310, 4, (c). , R. 6. y H, (a) ^ alternativum, or, 323, 2 ; in a question 344, 5, (h)j-(b) 1} comparativum 323, 2; comp. 82, jjSvs comp. 83, I. iflKfiv 6, KO\WS etc. c. g. 274, 3, (b). VIKHTTOS 216, 2. Vw, veni, 255, R. 2. i]\iKos attracted 332, 7. V" ^5e'323, R. 2. rifu in compos. 236, R. 3, (b). l(juv, ?ifjLiv 87, R. 4. fyuo-us dec. 76, R. 2; 17 iipicrfia. iris yfjs and the like 264, R. 5, c. IHUHV 87, R. 4. ^i/ see e*^. jjvlKa, when, see 8r. ^pV comp 84, R. 3. fy>o>s dec. 60, (a). fodcu c. a. 279, R. 6. fioro-wv, Attic fiTTwv 84. ijao-wi/ ci/J c. inf. 306, 1, (c). tfarvxos comp. 82, I, (d). JTOI 316, 2; froi tifyf 303, R. 2. rfnaff&ai C. g. and \nr& -rivos 275, 1, R. 2. rrnaffSxii with the sense of the Perf. 255, R. 1. i)TTaffbai P. part. 310, 4, (g). TJXW dec. 60. (1)). i)u>s dec. 60, (l>). oATjsdcc. 71, A. (o). daAAen/c. a. 278, 3. (a). . a. and d. 279, 3, and R. 3. w c. a. 279, R. 6. 83, I. etc. 10, R. 2. iv c. g. and a. 273, R. 20; -rivd. TWOS 274, 1, (f) and R. 2; c. d. 285, ( 1 j ; M TM 285, R. 1. dotvxcurr&j/ go-oi/ 332, R. 10. bcavbai c. g. 273, R. 20. de'\e/c. inf. 306, 1, (a). tun 73, 1, (c). bfv suffix 235, 3, and R. 1 and 2. c. a. 279, 1. fo-j> dec. 68, 5. 315, 4. di suffix 235, 3. S>iYYas dec. 61, R. 1. /cotvos, Koivov(r&ai C. g. 273, 3, (b). K0iv6s, KOIVOVV, -ovcr&ai C. d.284, 3, (1). Koivuveiv c. g. 273,3, (b) ; c. d.284, 3, (1). Koivciv c. a. 279, 1. KopevwffSai C. g. 273, 5, (c). Ko'ws dec. 212, 7. v c. g. and a. 275, 1, and R. 1. c. part. 310, 4, (g). KparicrTos 84, 1. Ke'os dec. 54, R. 4. wv 84, 1. . 273, R. 2 and 20 ; Kplveff&ai c. g. 274, 2: KfliVew TI Ttyt 285, 1, (3). /cpij/oj/ dec. 72, (a). KpoiVeo) 212, 3. KpoTa\itiv c. a. 279, R. 5. . a. 279, R. 5. -r&ai c. a. 279, 4 ; c. two a. 280, 3. KpvQa c. g. 273, 5, (e). KTaa-^ai c. g. 275, 3. comp. 83, II. 56, R. 1. 213, 11. os 216, R. 2. s c. g. 273, 2. dec. 68, 8. dec. 61, R. 1. Kw\veiv c. g. 271, 2; c. inf. 306, 1, (a). Aas dec. 72, (a). , with, 312, R. 10. e.g. 273, 3, (b). dec. 48, R. 1 ; 70, A, (a). \abpalus C. g. 273, 5, (e). wv, secretly 310, R. 4. AaAos comp. 82, I, (f). \a/jLpdvf, R. 316, R. 322, 7. 25, 4, (c). comp. 82, 1, (d)and R. 5 ; with the Art. 245, R. 5. p.rTbv flvat c. part. 310, 4, jd). fifo-ros c. g. 273, 5, (b). ftera Prep. 294 ; /ic'ra ins. fj.fr (ffTi 31, R. 3. /iTa5i5oVai c. g. 273, 3, [AfTa/j.t\(i fjLol TWOS and TI 274, 1, (b) and R. 1. /uerofifAer c. part. 310, 4, (c). /j.eTa. i ue\f?(rSa.i c.part. 310, 4, (c). ' c. g. 273, 3, (b). with part. 312, R."a iTfo-rl uol TWOS 273, 3, (b). 273,3, (b). 25, 4, (b). 3. g. 273, R. 9 ; see ews. /t^ c. imp. and suhj. 259, 5. n4 318; ft-fi pleonastic, after expressions signi- fying to fear, to doubt, etc. 318, 8. ^ interrog. 344, 5, (d). fj.il 8rt, fj.^1 oirtas oAA^ Ked (oAAa) 321, 3. rf oil 318, 10. ,2, (a), dec. 99, R. fJL-f)KtffTOS 84. ^ 316, 1. fjnjvifiv c. g. 274, 1. fiTjm dec. 63, R. 5. /^T /^Te321, 2, (c). /X^TTJP dec. 55, 2. ec. 71, B, (c). c - inf. 306, 1, (a) ; c. OTTWS and ind. fut. 330, 6. , niytwbcu C. d. 284,3, (1). fj-iKpot comp. 84, 6. fj.ifj.f'io'bcu c. a. 279, 1. funrflo-Kfiv -J>vov 264, R. 7. fj.6vos c. g. 271, 3. (Mvoipdyos comp. 82, 1, (f ). IJAV, /w/, fj. use 87, R. 1. fj.vicr)s dec. 71, A, (a). nvffdrrfffbcu c. a. 279, 5. \&v 344, 5, (c). N tyfXKvariKov 15, 1 and R.; in the Dialects 206, 6. vai 316, 4; val /ick A/a 279, 4. wufe and ved>j 70, A. (a). VOTTTJ and yeCTos 70, B. vda-fffiv c. g. 273, 5, (b). vavsdec. 68, 11. 214, 5. veaTos 82, R. 5. veefo and vov Prep. 289, 2. O union-vowel 237, 2. 6 in dvoios, oVoVos, etc. 93, K. 1. 6, r), r6 dec. 91; relat., demons., as a prop. Art. see under Article. 6 TI\IKOS attract. 332, R. 9. 6 olos attract. 332, R. 9. 87* use 303, R. 2. 85e, $J5e, ro'Se dec. 91 ; Dialects 217, 4, (b) ; use 303, 1; with the Art. 246, 3. 6Si 95, (e). Cciv c.g.273, 5, (d); c. a. 278, 3, (b). dbovvcKa ins. on 329, R. 1 ; because 338, 2. ola^i (irepi) Tij/a263,(d). ofa c. part. 312, R. 13. OiSivouj dec. 71, B. (b). oiiretos c. g. 273, 2. otKTtipftif c. g. 274, 1, (c). obrrp6s comp. 83, II. otov c. part. 312, R. 13. oFos with Sup. 239, R. 2 ; olos, GIG'S T' ci/if c. inf. 306, 1, (c). olos ins. 8rt TOIOVTOS 329, R. 8. o!bs attracted 332, 7; c. inf. 332, R. 8. o!os ins. &srf 341, R. 2. o Spaffov, oJffdr' us , R. 10. , abii, 255, R. 2. c. part. 310, 4, (1). faveiv c. inf. 306, 1, (a.) 0X1705 comp. 84, 7. oXfyw, 0X1701' with Corn- par. 239, R. 1. oXi7o>p?j/ c. g. 274, 1, (b). 6\ovpforSHu c. g. 274, 1, (c); c. a. 279,5. o>uXeTi> c. d. 284, 3. (1). bfj-vvvai C. a. 279, 4. ofjioia TOW C. Sup. 239, R. 2. ouoiov tlvai c. partic. 310, R. 2. o>oios c. g. 273, 3, (b); 0/J.OlOS, OfJiOlOVV, -OVO~&CU, o>ofo>s c. d. 284. 3, 4. o>oXo76/ c. d. 284, 3, (6). dfj.o\oyc?T(u c. a. and inf. 307, R. 6. ofjLtas 322, 7 ; with a part. 312, R. 8. a*C" c. d. 284, 3, (6). oveipos dec. 72, (a). cVii/at/cu, -aofrcu c. a. 279,1. ovofjid fort not and the like 266, R. 1. ovop.d^iv c. two a. 280, 4. 6vru>v ins. trtoffav 116, 12. &Vio-&ei> c. g. 273, 3, (b). STTOI in pregnant sense ins. oirov 300, R. 7. 6woTav see STCW under oVe. dWre see Sre. STTOU in pregnant sense ins. oiroi 300, R. 7 5 oVou, quandoquidem see 8re. gTrws with Sup. 239, R. 2. oVws ins. &Vt329, R. 1. onus, that, in order that, 330 ; OTTUS and oirus ^ c. ind. fut. ellip. 330, R.4. &Vo>s, when, see Sre. onus, as 342. ipav c. g. 273, R. 20 ; 6pav aX/cV 278,3, (c) ; with verbs of appearing, showing 306, R. 9 ; c. part. 310, 4, (a). opyiCfffbcu c. g. 274, 1 ; C. part. 310, 4, (c). opfyeffbat c. g. 273, 3, (b). opSpios comp. 82, I, (d). op/iSo-dcu c. g. 273, R. 7, (b). 6pt>ibob-f)pas dec. 44, R. 2. opvis dec.54,(c) and 68,12. op(pa^6s c. g. 271, 3. os, $}, 3 dec. 92 ; use 331, sq. ; agreement in gen. and num. 332, sq.; Case (attraction) 332, 6 ; Attractio inversa 332, R. 11; attraction in position 332, 8; os, T}, o before intermedi- ate clauses, attracted 332, 9 ; modes 333 ; 2s changed into a demons. 334, 1 ; os ins. the de- mons. 334, 3 ; '6s ins. oVi, since, because, ins. fro, ut (after OUTWS, SSe, TOtOUTOS, TTjXfKOU- TOS,TOOTOCTOS) &ST, U1S. ifo or e! 334, 2. os, ?}, 8; os fj.fv Ss Se,- os Kal os demons. 331, R. 1. (6Vo>) TotroDroi' (TO- 343. 80-0^, o pleonastic, af- ter expressions denot- ing doubt, denial, after Comp. and Sup. ex- pressions 318, 8, and R. 7. ou yap a\\d 322, R. 11. ov interrog. 344, 5, (d). ou with Sup. negative adjectives 239, R. 3. ou fJ.fi>Toi aXXa 322, R.ll. ou rf 318, 7. ou ft-!) c. second pers. ind. fut. interrog. (ou /JL^J ^Xuap^aeis ; ins. jit}; \vdpfi) 255, 4. ou /*V a\\d 322, R. 11. ou rfvov aXXel Kat 321,3. ou pron. dec. 87 ; use 302, R. 3. oSSos dec. 61, R. 1. ouSe 321, 2. . 99, R. GREEK INDEX. 611 ov attracted 332, II. 12. owe tTtv grow, farus 331, R. 5. ofaouj/ and ofaow 324, R. 7. o3x suffix 95, (h); con- clusive 324, 3, (b); in an answer 344, 7. ofocxa c. g. 288, R. ; ov- vtKa ins. OTJ 329, R. 1 ; since, because 338, 2. o5s dec. 54, R. 4. otfre otfre ; oCre re 321, 2. oSros dec. 91 ; Dialects 217, 4, (c); use 303,1; with the Art. 246, 3. OVTOS, hens ! 269, 2, (a). ovroo-i 95, (e). o5rw(s) 15, 2. o5ro>s, s with part. 312, R. 7. oi>x OTTUS (ort), oux on, dAAck /cat ; o&x < OJ/ aAAc321, 3. %>a, Maf, so that, 330. MM///, see ews. comp. 82, 1, (d). oij/oa7os comp. 82,1, (f). HcuVoc. 53,4, (1), (c). v c. two a. 280, 3. comp. 82, I, (c). rturroiov flvcu, ytyrfff&ot c. Part. 310, 4, (h); c. a. c. inf. 311, 18. iropa Prep. 297 ; trapd c. g. ins. c. d. 300, 4, (a). vdpa ins. Trdpeo-Ti 31, R 3. KOLps c. g. 273, R. 9; c. d. 284, 3, (4). irapao-KfvdT&cu 306, 1, (a) ; c. bvus c. ind. fut. 330, 6; c. part, ami c. is and part.310,4. (li). irapaxwpf" c. g. 271. ~2 ; C. d. 284, 3, (2). ag/c, irap 6 '|, ir 95, d; Synt. 317, 1. irfpaios comp. 82, I, (c). e.g. 271,3. c. a. 279, R. 5. Prep. 295, 1 and 3. iTfpi 6i//ca300, R. 2. xepi c. d. in pregnant sense ins. of the ace. 300, 3, (a). TTfpt inS. TTfplfCTTl 31, R. 3. TTfptf} 78, R. 5. irAeW without ff 323, R. 4. irXeovtKTftv c. g. 275, 1. irAeo's c. g. 273, 5, (b). dec. 78, R. 5. c. g. 273, 5, (b). c. g. 271, 3. , ir\r)p6d> c. g. 273, 5, (b). irA7? c. a. 274, R. 1. iroi in Preg. sense ins. o5 (ubi) 300, II. 7. 7rot?f c. g. of mate-rial 273, 5, (a) ; c. two a. 280, 4. iroifiv fv, KO.KUS c. part. 310, 4, (g); c. a. 279, 2; a-ya^d, Kcntd etc. c. a. 280,2; c. inf.306, l,(c). iroifw c. part. 31 J, 4, (b) ; c. part, and inf. 311, 13. Toteladoi c. g. 273, 2 and 3, (a) ; c. g. of price 275,3. irolbs with the Art. 344, R. 3. TToAejueu/ c. d. 284, 3, (2). WAts dec. 63. iroAAoj/ tlvcu, tyict'iffbcu, yiyvfff&cu C. part. 310, 4, (h). iro\\ov Sew c. inf. 307, R. 6. iroAAy with comp. and superl. 239, R. 1 and 2. iroAu with Comp. and Superl. 289, R.I and 2. 612 GREEK INDEX. wo\vs dec. 77. noffeiSwv dec. 53, 4, (1) (d); 56, R. 1. iroT, rls Trore etc. 344, R. 2. TrJrepo, ir6repov ^ in a direct and indirect question 344, 5, (f). irpaos dec. 76, XIV. irpaTTeiv c5, KO.KUS C. a. 279, 2 ; signification of the first and second Perf. 249, 2; o-yodo, Hand etc. c. a. 280, 2 ; irpaTTfiv, -far&ai, to de- mand, c. two ace. 280, 3; c. d. 284, 3, (1). , Vpfjr6l/TO)S C. d. 284, 3, (5) ; c. inf. 306, 1, (d) ; c. d. and a. c. inf. 307, R. 3. eVet c. part. 310, 4, (i). fffflfis, irpffffivHis, irp4- ff&vs 70, B. c. g. 275, 1. 83, R. 2. . g. 275, 3. vpiv, irp\v &j>, Trplv ij const. 337. irp6 Prep. 287, 2. . g. 275, 1. bat c. inf. 306, 1, (a) ; c eJ?rws c. ind. fut. 330, 6. trpoiKa 278, R. 2. TrpoKa\fi(r&a.i rivd n 278, 4. . 275, 1. flv c. g. 274, 1. 17, R. 4. irpoopav C. g. 274, 1. irp6s Prep. 298 ; c. d. in Preg. sense ins. c. a. 300, 3, (a). irpos&d\\eiv C. g. 273, 5, (d). irposSiUvcu c. g. 273, 3, (b). . d. 284, 3, (5) ; c. inf. 306, 1, (d); c.d. and a. c. inf. 307, R. 3. irpos-fiKfi fj.oi c. g. 273, 3, (b). irp6sSev c. g. 273, 3, (b). irpostca\t'i dec. 87 ; use 302, 1. ffvyyiyv(f>ffK(D epavry c. part. 310, R. 2. (j.M c. g. 273, 5, (e). pe/ c. inf. 306,1, (a). avhav c. two ace. 280, 3. o-v/j-Paiveiv c. inf. 306, 1, (d) ; c. d. and a. c. inf. 307, R. 3 ; personal 307, R. 6. ffvu&ovXvlieiv c. inf. 306, 1, (a). ffv^Trpdrreiv C. d. 284, 3, (7)- epeiv c. d. 284, 3, (7). c. part. 310, 4, , repers dec. 72, (b). [(e). rtavr6 ins. rb avr6 217, 4, ir*6 Prep. 299 ; c. d. in Preg. sense ins. c. a. 300, 3, (a) ; c. a. and part. 312, R. 5. Siro ins. 8ire 3 > ( b )- 52 v c. g. 275, 1. i c. d. 284, 3, (2). ftyioros 216, R. 2. *o7Tf c. g. and a. 273, 5, (c) and R. 15. ^xuVeij/, os, w c. g. 274, 1, (e) ; c. d. 284, 3, (6). oj8e?(r&ai c. a. 279, 5 ; c. inf. 306, 1, (a). tyoii'LKovs 76, R. 3. tpovevu with signif. of Perf. 255, R. 1. 70, B. Vaveiv c. g. 273, 3, (b). tyfyftv c. g. and a. 273, R. 20. \}/ev$(ff&ai c. g. 271, 2. \i/eu8^5 conip. 82, II. e.g. 271, 3. with Part. 312, R. 7. |, 3)i>a 53, R. 4. c. g. 275, 3. cbs Prep. 290, 3 and R. 2. us that, see on. ws M<, in wishes (utinam) 259, 3, (b). ws, as, so as, const. 342 ; ovrus (8>s) &s in wish- es and asseverations 242, R. 2; &s with a Subs, (as might be ex- pected, us Aa.Kfdai/j.6- j/ios, ut Laced, for a La- cedaemonian) 342, R. 4. us with Superl. 239, R. 2. us c. d., as : us yp6vTi, us ffjiot, meo judicio, us t faf) 5% 284,3. (10) (b). us c. part, and case abs. 312, 6 : c. part. fut. 312, 6, (a). us ins. #TI o8rws329, R. 8. ws, that, so that 330; #s c, c. opt. utinam 260, R. 9. cos, when, see STC. els ins. usre, so that, see usre. us tlirciv and ws CTTOS et- ir?v 341, R. 3. us fls, tiri, irpos C. a., us eVr c. d. 290, R. 2. is rf 344, R. 6. us u, cjVw non-Att.); Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 230. INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 615 AH MI 230. oietCw Char. 143, 6. cu'Scoyuoi, aidofuu 166, 1. Dial. 230. euWa>, formation of ten- ses 130, (d), 2. a.lvvfjLa.1 230. aiptw 167, 1. Dial. 230. atpw see adpcD 230. 160, 1. Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 230. &ta>, Pf.with Att. Red. 124, 2. aAe' 166, 2. Dial. 230. oAe'o/icu or dAewo/icu 230. dAea>, formation of tenses 130, (d), 1. a\frn(TK(a t -bi, see dAef 162. dAAcWw, Char. 7. 143, 1. A. I. and II. P. 141, 4, (b). oAAo/wu, d in format. 149, R. 2. Dial. 230. oAociw, F. -do-w. 129, R.I. a\vKTu 230. a\vffK(a 230. , -cj/a> 230. u 160, 2. Dial. 230. anfatffKW 161, 2. djuTre'xeo 159. 4. a./j.ir\airyj/oe'a>, Aug. 126, 1 and 3. afj.(f)ivvvfj.i 184, 1. , Aug. 126, 2. 161, 3. 161,4. 230. 'ANE0n 230. Aug. 126, 1. (Ep.J 230. , avoiyw 187, 6. , Aug. 126, 1. 230. formation of tenses 130, (b), l.Dial. 230. airavpdoa 230. u 230. 230. 160, 3. 230. 177, 3, contrac- tion 137, 3. 'APAH 230. apeaKca 161, 5. apxeca, formation of ten- ses 130, (d), 1. aftu<$TTo>, -C, Char. 143, 3. &PVV/JLOU 188, 1. Comp.230. , formation of tenses 130, (e). w, Char. 143, 7. apvrta, apvca, formation of tenses 130, (b), 1. 'APn, opapiV/ca> 230. (f(T(ra>, eu 230. avaivca, Aug. 122, 1. 'ATAAZOMAI, Char. 143, 6. 'ATPAH, see airavpdca. Comp. 230. av$,dv(a, a(/|w, 160, 4. 'ATPI2KOMAI, ^oup.230. aQiKVfOfjiai 159, 2. a, Cliar. . 143, 1. 230. , Char. 143, 7. see t, &4ou,a.i 230. 0iao/uai 230. 8i/3aCw 163, 1. Comp. /3atVa> 230. 161, 6. Dial. 230. |8u*a> 192, 10. /3, A. II. P. 140 R. 1. Char. 143, 3. 230. /3oV/cw 166, 5. nai 1 66, 6. Dial. 230. -w, Char. 143, 3. > A. II. P. 140, 2. C". Char. 143, 6. 230. , fivca 159, 1. Tafj.ca 165, 1. Comp. 230. ydvvu.a.1 230. TAH, seey^o^iwu. Comp. 230. 767 (aviff KCD 161, 7. Comp yeywva 230. ytivofjLai 230. 7eAaw, formation of ten- . ses 130 (c). 76KTO 230. TENfi, see yiyvo/j.cu. ycvca, A. P. with o- 131,3, 77?^'w 165,2. yi)pd(TKca, ynpdca 161, 8. Dial. 230. yivou,ai 163, 2. , ylvuffKta 161,9 yodco 230. see 143, 6. 223, 5. 230. 230. 158, 9. ), 5a/x 156, 2. 230. 160, 6. Dial. 230. Sareo/jiai 230. AAfl 230. SeoTo 230. Sell 66, 7. SefSw, Pf. Se'Sta 193. Comp. 230. Si:j/u^l75, 187, 2. Dial. 230. Se?j>, see $?. AEKfi, see 5fiKuvfj.i and 616 INDEX FOR .THE FORMS OF VERBS. , formation of ten- ses 156, 2. tifonat contract. 137, 2. Sep/co/icu, Pf. SfSopKa with the meaning of the Pres. 140, 4. Dial. 230. 8epo>, A. II. P. and Pf. A. 140, 2 and 4. Seuo> 230. Sew, formation of tenses 130, (d), 2, contraction 137, 2. 8e'o>, see Set. Siairdu, Aug. 126, 2. SiaKovea, Aug. 126, 2. SioA67 161, E. AIAHMI 230. 161, 10. 175. 180, E. 3. Dial. 230. AIHMI 180, E. 3. Dial. 230. fc, Char. 143, 7. ), contracted 137, 3. 'EIKH, Pf. fotrac, Plup. tyiceiv 140, E. 3 ; Aug. 122, 5. Inflection of eoi/ca 1 95, 2. Dial. 230. efow, e?Ka&ov 162. etAew, eiAew, eJfAAw and e'/AAw, see cfAw. eJXi^w 230. e?Ao> 166, 9. efcf 181 and 225. flfit 181 and 226. aro 230. 165, 3. SOUTTCO? 230. ' Spcta, formation of tenses 131, 3. APEMn see Tpe'x. 179, 2. Accent 176, 1. Dial. 230. , Stw 158, 2. Dial. 230. see &TT 230. , Aug. 122, 3. For- mation of tenses 129, E.I. Pf. with Att. Eed. 124, 2, (b) ; Pf. II. with variable vowel 140, 4. Aor. II. M. 155, 1. Dial. 230. see eyxe'pew, Aug. 126. 5. e5w ^ee eV&io). e'Co/uai, see /co&tw. e'de'Aw 166, 8 toi'Cw, Aug. 122, 3. *E0n Aug.l22,3,Dial.230. 'EIAfl, see 6pd 230. efao, Aug. 122, 3, Dial. 230. , see 6&o>. 158,3. Dial. 230. , see 4\avv<. , Pf.with AttBed. 124, 2. , Char. 143, 6. Dial. 230. 'EAET0H, see epxo^ot.' eAtVcro), Aug. 122, 3. Pf. with Att. Eed. 124, 2. 'EAKTfl, see e'AKW. e'A/cw 166, 10. eATTco, Pf. oA7ro, Plup. ec^ATTeu/ 140, E. 3. Aug. 122, 5. 'EAH, see cupew. FOJ, formation of tenses 130, (d), 1. 225. see r)fj.vci). e/UTTlTTATJ/it 177, 5. ivaplfa, Char. 143, 6. evaiKD, Pass, with 7j/xi'. Comp. 230. Comp. eViVro) 230. ejWTrw, see ^>i 230. fj/vvfju, see Comp. 230. :'o>, Aug. 126, 1. see'EIKn. Comp. 230. see 'EPrn. toprdfa, Aug. 122, 5. eWo> 230. fTTavpttTKO) 230. fireiyonai 197, E. 2. firi&v/j.eu, Aug. 126, 5. e'Trfo-Ta^cu 179, 3. Dial 230. eVw, Aug. 122, 3. Comp. 230. epo j ua:l79, 4. fpdw see epajuot. tpydCopai, Aug. 122, 3. ep7a> 230. 'EPm, plup. e'^pyety 122, 5. Perf. with variable vowel 140, E. 3. ep5o> see 'EPrn. Comp. 230. , perf. with Att. Eed. 124, 2. Dial. 230. ^peiVw 230. epeWoo 143, 3. tpifa 230. J EPOMAI see 1 EIP. ep7rua>, epTTw, Aug. 122, 3. ep^w 166, 12. Dial. 2,30. Ipvyvdvu 160, 13. epv&aivca 230. epu/cco 230. epujiiat see ept/w 230. e'pua>, formation of tenses 223, 1. Comp. 230. epXOAtoi 167, 2. Comp. 230. Ard/w, tffba} 167, 3. l(TTia> 166, 15. Zdca, contract. 137, 3. Comp. jSiow. ^fvvv^.i 184. 2. Comp. e'a>. ^eu7Vi/i 187, 4. ea>, formation of tenses 130, (1), d. 186, 1. ypdo-KW, f)Pdca, 161^, 12. f&OIMCU S6( >mp. 230. INDEX FOR THE FO . Comp. 230. 1 90. Dial. 230. Tov see 178, R. 3. 230. 0dYra>, Char. $ 143, 1. &' Ao> see 4de\u. 230. 154, 2; contract. 137, 1. Comp. rpfx, Char. ^ 143, 1. p&fficu 161, 14. 156, 2. Dial. 230. &6w and a& 158, 4. &uw, formation of tenses 130, (b) 2. 'I5p6(a t contract. 137, E. 1 . Dial. 230. ldv(a see Ka&ifa. 7o> see Kc&ifa. fry/it 180. Dial. 230. iWo/tcu, ?/ca> 159, 2. See CKpiKveopai. Comp. 230. i\d(nco/j.ai 161, 15. 'IAHMI 230. t\\(t> see ?Aa>. iftdtro-u, Char. 143, 3. fcrd/xt 230. T(TT77/tl 175. iffxvalvu, d in format.149, K. 2. iffxveo/juu and see uirta'x' / co/iow. 'IH see i/ii. KAA-, KAIA-, see *af- PMUCU. Aug. 126, 3. 154, 5. 166, 13. t, Aug. 126, 3. see KO^/CIV- 230. /ciw 154, 2. Dial. 230. KO\(U, formation SCS 130, (il) 2 Plup. M. or. 1'. i.vi. im-tatli. in l*f. 156, 2. icdpvu 149, 5, and 158,10. 0uL 2:w. fca/iirro) Pf. M. or P. 144, R. 2. KaTTjyopfw, Aug. 126, 5. K-aw see Kaita. /ce?/xat 189. Dial. 230. Keipia 230. KEIH see Kf?/j.ai. Kf\fv(a, Pass, with o-, 131,2. KcXAc0 230. Kf \opai 230. K6VT6M 230. Kfpdwvfju 183, 1. Dial. 230. KfpSaiva), d in format.149, R. 2. Pf. I. Act. 149, 6. Comp. 230. oj5a> 166, 17. Dial. 230. iSfaucu 230. Kipvcua 230. Kixd-vu), -o/j.ai 230. Klxpniu 177, 1. /cfw 230. KXayyavv 160, 8. /cAaC, Char. 77 143, 8. Dial. 230. K \cdu 154, 2 and 166, 18. K\OU formation of tenses 130, (c). Pass, with o- 131,3. Dial. 230. eWw, Char. IT 143, 1. F. M., A. II. P. 140, 2. Pf. I. and Pf. M. or P. 140, 5. 230. Tjfoj, K\rjo> SCO KAeta 230. , Pf. A. and M. or P. and A. I. P. 149, 7. and R. 4. K\VW 230. Kvaita Pass, with 160, 17. Dial. 230. \da-Kw 230. AeVw, (a) to say, without Pf. A.; Pf. M. AeVr IMU. A. P. ^Ac'x&i?*'. (b) to collect, and in compounds Pf. cfAoxa, M. or P. ^7^01 140, 5 ; Aug. 123, 3 ; A. II. P. t\4rnv and A. I. P. 140,R.l. Comp.AEXn. Xehrw, A. ^AlTTor. 1Y. II. AeAonra 140, 4. A. II. A. and P. 141, 3. cor- responding form 160, Ac'', A. II. P. 140, B. 1 618 INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. \fvKalvca, a in for.149, E. 2. AeiWo), Char. 143, 3. Aevw, Pass, with , Char. T 143, 3. t, Char. 143, 3. AOVCD, contract. 137, 5. Dial. 230. \vfjLaivo/j.ai Pf. M. or P. 149, 8. Avco, formation of tenses 130, (b) 2. Dial. 230. 230. 230. , 19. Dial.230. fjuipva/j.ai 230. fj.apTvp(a 165, 5. ), Char. 7 143, 1. , Char. 143, 6. 166, 19. Dial. 230. 230. o 161, 16. 230. ei 166, 21. Dial. 230. fj.\\ca 166, 20. see /ieAct. Comp. 230. 149, 5; 166, K. 2. Comp. MAG. 166,21. Hfpnypifa, Char. 223, 5. (j.r]Kvo/j.ai 230. fjualvu, /injvot, fjuavai 149, R. 2= Pf. Act. juefiicryKa 149, 6. Pf. M. or P. pffjiicurnai 149, 8. Dial. 230. /Viva 187, 5. Dial. 230. fj.ifj.v-f] a Kca Subj. Pf. and Opt. Plpf. M. 154, 8; 161, 17. see fj,o\ovfj.ai see /ioAwco Pf. M. or P. 149, 1. /iuC, to suck, 166, 22. jui^co, to groan, 143, 7. fi.vKdo/j.a.1 230. /iua>, formation of tenses 130, (b) 1. 143, 4. 230. see 166, E. 2. yew 154, 2. Wa> (J/TJ&W). Pass, with , Pass, with c^Cw 143, 6. oMCw 122, 2. olvoxoeca 219, 5. otV 143,2. , Char. 223, 5. , Pf. I. and Pf. M. or P. 140, 5. ITENQn, see irdffx 01 - irfiraivca, d in the format. 149, E. 2. irepaivw, H in form.!49,E. 2 ; Pf. M, or P. 140, 8. jrepdo), formation of ten- ses 130, (c). TrepSu 166,28. irep&oo 230. ir^rdvvvp.1 183, 3. Tre'rojuai syncopated Aor. e'TTT^K 155; 166, 29. Dial. 230. ITETH See TT/TTTO?. irev^o/jLai, see Trvv iretyvov, &rcvov 230. 187, 8. Dial.230. i 230. l77, 5. Dial.230. irifjurpiini 177, 6. ir(vo> 158, 5. TTtTT^KW 161, 19. INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 619 161, 20. iriirrw 163, 3. Dial 230. irirvdu 230. {>, Char, 77 143, 8. see Tre\dfa. *\da 230. p"eo>, formation of tenses 154, 2 and 192, 7. 'PEfl, see c^rjyiU. p-^^Mi 187, 9. piyeu 230. piydca, contract. 137, 3. p'nrru, Char. $ 143, 1. pvirou, Bed. 219, 6. p^crc^a, Char. 143, 6. pcavvv/j.1 186, 2. 2oAwfC, Char. 77 143 > 8 230. 140, B. 2. , 77 and d in for- mat. 149, B. 2; Pf. M. 149, 8. , contract. 137, 3. , A. II. P. 140, 2. o-Tci/aCw, Char. 143, 6. A. II. P. 140, 2. Pf. M. or P. 140, 6. ffrpAvvvni 182 and 186,3. ffrvyfu 230. cruAeutf, Ep. aCw, ff 149, B. 3. e'w, format, of tenses 130, (d), 1. 158, 11. TEMil 230. Tf'pn-o) 230. TfTnov, see TEMil, revpuivca 163, 4, Tewx* 23Q. T^KW 140, B. 2. TIEfl 230. 175. T//CTW 143, 2. rivvv^i 185 ; Comp. 230. T/i/w 158, 6. TiTp 167, 6. comp. 230. see (pvyydvta. comp. 230. 167, 7, 178. 158, 7. Dial. 230. ^6fpo>, A. II. P. 140, 2. Pf.II. 140, 4. comp. 230. &iVo> 158, 8. Dial, 230, iAe'w 135. Dial. 230. 67,A. II. P. 140, B.I, uC Char. 143, 6. Qondu, Ep. (porrVj-njv 222, 8.1, 620 INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 187, 10. 148. Dial. 230. pdcro-(0, Char. 7 143, 1. , formation of ten- ses, 131, 2. Qpfoffu, Char. K. 143, 1. (pvyydvca (fevyu) 160, 22. Qvpco 230. ipva 192, 11. comp. 230. 230. Xeu>o> 166, 32. comp. 230. XoAeta, formation of ten- ses 130, (c). %cu>5a/w 160, 23. comp. 230. 130, (a). 186, 4. cw 161, 24. xri 177, 2. eo>, Char. S 143, 5 ; Pf. XP^"> formati II. /ce'xoSa 140, 4. Fat. Xfarovfiai 154, 3. A. II. Act. according to the analogy of A. 1. 154, 8. Xfw formation of tenses 154, R. 1. 230. X, formation of ten- ses 129, R. 2; contract. 137, 3. , Pass. with a o>, Pass, wiili a : contract. 137, 3. , A. II. P 140, R. 1. , A. II. )'. 141, R. 122, 4. 165, 7. Aug comp 16 U.C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES CD5311713M This voj